Manual Easygen 3500XTP2

easYgen-3000XT Series
Manual Genset Control
easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT
Release 1.16 or higher
37581D
This is no translation but the original Technical Manual in English.
Designed in Germany and Poland
Woodward GmbH
Handwerkstrasse 29
70565 Stuttgart
Germany
Telephone: +49 (0) 711 789 54-510
Fax: +49 (0) 711 789 54-101
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.woodward.com
© 2019
2 easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 37581D

Brief Overview
Brief Overview
Fig. 1: easYgen-3500XT-P2 Series

1 Terminal 21-40: Mains/Generator/Busbar voltage 9 Terminal 141-160: Discrete Outputs 13-23, Tran‐
2 Terminal 1-20: Mains/GND current, Generator sistor Output SO2
current, Analog inputs/outputs 10 Terminal 61-80: Discrete inputs, MPU, power
3 Terminal 101-120: Analog Input 10, Analog Out‐ supply, and D+
puts 3-6, Busbar Voltage L3/N 11 Terminal 121-140: Relay outputs 13-22
4 Terminal 81-100: Transistor Output SO1, Analog 12 Terminal 41-60: Relay outputs 01-12
Inputs 4-9 13 USB interface (2.0, slave) SERVICE port
5 RS-485 interface RS-485 #1 14 ETHERNET interface (RJ-45) LAN C
6 CAN bus interface CAN #2 15 ETHERNET interface (RJ-45) LAN B
7 CAN bus interface CAN #3 16 ETHERNET interface (RJ-45) LAN A
8 CAN bus interface CAN #1
The easYgen-3000XT series are control units for engine-generator

system management applications.
The control units can be used in applications such as: co-genera‐
tion, stand-by, AMF, peak shaving, import/export or distributed
generation.
The easYgen-3000XT series is also applicable for islanded, island
parallel, mains parallel and multiple unit mains parallel operations.
37581D easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 3

Brief Overview
Scope of delivery The following parts are included in the scope of delivery. Please
check prior to the installation that all parts are present.
Fig. 3: Scope of delivery - schematic

A/B Device easYgen-3400XT-P2 (sheet metal * D and E with plastic housing easYgen-3500XT-
housing) or easYgen-3500XT-P2(-LT) genset P2(-LT) only:
control (plastic housing). All screwable terminal D Clamp fastener installation material - 4 x
connectors are delivered with plug and jack. E Screw kit installation material - 12 x
C Product CD (configuration software and F Printed QR Code sticker - 2 x
manual)
Configuration files and Technical Manual are avail‐

able at the CD-ROM and additionally on device
internal memory. Opening USB connection to the
easYgen-XT offers read access to the files listed
below but with status "delivery" -- please be aware
that this files are not updated. The latest versions
are available at the Woodward web site.
Files stored at easYgen-XT device:
– Configuration
– msi-file (installing application files and
ToolKit)
– eds-file (zipped)
– Documentation
– Technical Manual (PDF)
QR Code
To get access to the complete product documentation, scan this
QR code or use the following link:
http://wwdmanuals.com/easygen-3500xt-p2.

Brief Overview
Sample application setup
Fig. 4: Sample application setup

A typical application mode for the control unit is the use for mains
parallel operation in a multi genset application.
n In this case, the easYgens-XT will function as an engine con‐
trol with generator, mains and engine protection.
n The control unit can open and close the generator circuit
breaker (GCB), group generator breaker (GGB), and the mains
circuit breaker (MCB).
n The easYgens-XT are well prepared for system control and
management, "talking" with other easYgens-3100XT/3200XT,
easYgens-3400XT/3500XT, and/or LS-5s.
For a listing of all available application modes

please refer to chapter Ä Chapter 2.2 “Application
Modes Overview” on page 39.

Brief Overview

Table of contents
Table of contents
1 General Information................................................................................................................... 21
1.1 About This Manual.................................................................................................................... 21

1.1.1 Revision History........................................................................................................................ 21
1.1.2 Depiction Of Notes And Instructions......................................................................................... 29
1.2 Copyright And Disclaimer.......................................................................................................... 30
1.3 Service And Warranty............................................................................................................... 31
1.4 Safety........................................................................................................................................ 31
1.4.1 Intended Use............................................................................................................................. 31
1.4.2 Personnel.................................................................................................................................. 32
1.4.3 General Safety Notes................................................................................................................ 33
1.4.4 Protective Equipment And Tools............................................................................................... 37
2 System Overview...................................................................................................................... 39
2.1 Display And Status Indicators................................................................................................... 39

2.2 Application Modes Overview..................................................................................................... 39
2.3 Operation Modes....................................................................................................................... 41
3 Installation................................................................................................................................. 43
3.1 Mount Unit (Sheet Metal Housing)............................................................................................ 43

3.2 Mount Unit (Plastic Housing)..................................................................................................... 45
3.2.1 Clamp Fastener Installation....................................................................................................... 46
3.2.2 Screw Kit Installation................................................................................................................. 47
3.3 Setup Connections.................................................................................................................... 49
3.3.1 Terminal Allocation.................................................................................................................... 50
3.3.2 Wiring Diagram.......................................................................................................................... 51
3.3.3 Power Supply............................................................................................................................ 56
3.3.4 Charging Alternator................................................................................................................... 57
3.3.5 Voltage Measuring.................................................................................................................... 58
3.3.5.1 Generator Voltage..................................................................................................................... 58
3.3.5.2 Mains Voltage............................................................................................................................ 65
3.3.5.3 Busbar Voltage.......................................................................................................................... 70
3.3.6 Current Measuring..................................................................................................................... 76
3.3.6.1 Generator Current..................................................................................................................... 76
3.3.6.2 Mains Current............................................................................................................................ 79
3.3.6.3 Ground Current......................................................................................................................... 80
3.3.7 Power Measuring...................................................................................................................... 81
3.3.8 Power Factor Definition............................................................................................................. 82
3.3.9 Magnetic Pickup Unit (MPU)..................................................................................................... 83
3.3.10 Discrete Inputs.......................................................................................................................... 85
3.3.11 Relay Outputs (LogicsManager)................................................................................................ 87

Table of contents
3.3.11.1 Connecting 24 V Relays............................................................................................................ 89

3.3.12 Connecting 24 V Relays............................................................................................................ 90
3.3.13 Analog Inputs............................................................................................................................ 91
3.3.13.1 Analog Inputs (0 to 2000 Ohm | 0/4 to 20 mA | 0 to 1 V)........................................................... 92
3.3.13.2 Analog Inputs (0/4 to 20 mA | 0 to 10 V)................................................................................... 93
3.3.13.3 Analog Inputs (0 to 250 Ohms | 0 to 2500 Ohms)..................................................................... 95
3.3.14 Analog Outputs.......................................................................................................................... 96
3.3.14.1 Analog Outputs (±20 mA, ± 10 V, PWM).................................................................................. 97
3.3.14.2 Analog Outputs 3 to 6 (0/4 to 20 mA)........................................................................................ 97
3.3.15 Transistor Outputs..................................................................................................................... 98
3.4 Setup Interfaces........................................................................................................................ 99
3.4.1 Interfaces overview................................................................................................................... 99
3.4.2 RS-485 Interface..................................................................................................................... 100
3.4.3 USB (2.0 slave) interface - Service Port.................................................................................. 101
3.4.4 CAN Bus Interfaces................................................................................................................. 102
3.4.5 Ethernet Interface (incl. Remote Panel).................................................................................. 104
4 Configuration........................................................................................................................... 109
4.1 Front Panel Access................................................................................................................. 112

4.1.1 Basic Navigation...................................................................................................................... 112
4.1.2 The HOME Screen.................................................................................................................. 116
4.1.3 Customer Screens................................................................................................................... 118
4.1.4 Standard Menu Screens.......................................................................................................... 119
4.1.4.1 Navigation Screens................................................................................................................. 119
4.1.4.2 Value Setting Screens............................................................................................................. 120
4.1.4.3 Status/Monitoring Screens...................................................................................................... 120
4.1.5 Specialized Menu Screens...................................................................................................... 121
4.1.5.1 HOME Screen Voltage Display............................................................................................... 121
4.1.5.2 Alarm List................................................................................................................................ 122
4.1.5.3 Event History........................................................................................................................... 123
4.1.5.4 Sequencing............................................................................................................................. 123
4.1.5.5 States easYgen....................................................................................................................... 124
4.1.5.6 States LS-5.............................................................................................................................. 125
4.1.5.7 Genset Parameter Alignment.................................................................................................. 125
4.1.5.8 Diagnostic devices.................................................................................................................. 126
4.1.5.9 Setpoints generator................................................................................................................. 126
4.1.5.10 Setpoints PID1 - PID3 ............................................................................................................ 127
4.1.5.11 Synchroscope (Generator/Busbar And Busbar/Mains)........................................................... 128
4.1.5.12 LogicsManager Conditions...................................................................................................... 128
4.1.5.13 LogicsManager........................................................................................................................ 129
4.1.5.14 Mains Decoupling Threshold................................................................................................... 130
4.1.5.15 Test Mains Decoupling (VDE AR-N 4105).............................................................................. 131

Table of contents
4.1.5.16 CAN Interface 1 State............................................................................................................. 131

4.1.5.19 Ethernet Network..................................................................................................................... 135
4.1.5.20 USB......................................................................................................................................... 137
4.1.5.21 RS-485.................................................................................................................................... 137
4.1.5.22 J1939 Special.......................................................................................................................... 137
4.1.5.23 J1939 Status miscellaneous.................................................................................................... 138
4.1.5.24 Time Indication According To Operating Condition ................................................................ 138
4.2 Access Via PC (ToolKit).......................................................................................................... 139
4.2.1 Install ToolKit........................................................................................................................... 139
4.2.2 Install ToolKit Configuration Files............................................................................................ 141
4.2.3 Configure ToolKit..................................................................................................................... 143
4.2.4 Connect ToolKit via USB Service Port.................................................................................... 144
4.2.5 Connect ToolKit via Ethernet Port........................................................................................... 145
4.2.6 View And Set Values In ToolKit............................................................................................... 147
4.2.7 How to use (and prepare/update) non-XT easYgen ... .wset files........................................... 151
4.2.8 Toolkit Offline Mode................................................................................................................ 152
4.2.9 Valuable Tips and Tricks With ToolKit..................................................................................... 155
4.3 Basic Setup............................................................................................................................. 155
4.3.1 Configure Language/Clock...................................................................................................... 155
4.3.2 Configure HMI......................................................................................................................... 160
4.3.2.1 Configure Customer Screens.................................................................................................. 160
4.3.2.2 Configure Display.................................................................................................................... 162
4.3.2.3 Screen configuration............................................................................................................... 163
4.3.3 Lamp Test............................................................................................................................... 165
4.3.4 Enter Password....................................................................................................................... 165
4.3.4.1 Password System - Parameter Overview................................................................................ 178
4.3.5 System Management.............................................................................................................. 180
4.4 Configure Application.............................................................................................................. 182
4.4.1 Configure Engine..................................................................................................................... 182
4.4.1.1 Configure Engine (general)..................................................................................................... 182
4.4.1.2 Engine Start/Stop.................................................................................................................... 188
4.4.1.3 Magnetic Pickup Unit............................................................................................................... 197
4.4.1.4 Idle Mode................................................................................................................................. 199
4.4.2 Inputs And Outputs.................................................................................................................. 200
4.4.2.1 Function Of Inputs And Outputs.............................................................................................. 200
4.4.2.2 Discrete Inputs........................................................................................................................ 205
4.4.2.3 Discrete Outputs (LogicsManager).......................................................................................... 209
4.4.2.4 Analog Inputs.......................................................................................................................... 212
4.4.2.5 Analog Outputs........................................................................................................................ 225
4.4.2.6 External Analog Inputs............................................................................................................ 230

Table of contents
4.4.2.7 External Analog Outputs......................................................................................................... 234

4.4.2.8 External Discrete Inputs.......................................................................................................... 236
4.4.2.9 External Discrete Outputs....................................................................................................... 237
4.4.3 Configure Breakers................................................................................................................. 239
4.4.3.1 Good to know: Actions with Breakers...................................................................................... 240
4.4.3.2 General Breaker Settings........................................................................................................ 251
4.4.3.3 Configure Breakers: GCB........................................................................................................ 254
4.4.3.4 Configure Breakers: GGB....................................................................................................... 258
4.4.3.5 Configure Breakers: MCB....................................................................................................... 261
4.4.3.6 Configure Breakers: Synchronization...................................................................................... 264
4.4.3.7 Configure Breakers: Neutral Interlocking................................................................................ 267
4.4.4 Configure Controller................................................................................................................ 267
4.4.4.1 Voltage Control........................................................................................................................ 269
4.4.4.2 Power Factor Control.............................................................................................................. 276
4.4.4.3 Load Share Control................................................................................................................. 296
4.4.4.4 Frequency Control................................................................................................................... 308
4.4.4.5 Load Control............................................................................................................................ 313
4.4.4.6 PID {x} Control......................................................................................................................... 334
4.4.4.7 Discrete Raise/Low Function................................................................................................... 336
4.4.5 Configure Operation Modes.................................................................................................... 338
4.4.5.1 Operation Modes: General...................................................................................................... 338
4.4.5.2 Operation Mode AUTO - Automatic Run................................................................................. 339
4.4.5.3 Operation Mode TEST............................................................................................................ 341
4.4.5.4 Critical Mode........................................................................................................................... 342
4.4.5.5 Load Dependent Start/Stop (LDSS)........................................................................................ 348
4.4.6 Emergency Run....................................................................................................................... 364
4.5 Configure Monitoring............................................................................................................... 367
4.5.1 Configure Generator Monitoring.............................................................................................. 367
4.5.1.1 Generator Operating Ranges: Voltage / Frequency / Busbar................................................. 367
4.5.1.2 Generator Voltage Monitoring................................................................................................. 369
4.5.1.3 Generator Frequency Monitoring............................................................................................ 373
4.5.1.4 Generator Current Monitoring................................................................................................. 376
4.5.1.5 Generator Power Monitoring................................................................................................... 383
4.5.1.6 Other Monitoring...................................................................................................................... 393
4.5.2 Configure Engine Monitor........................................................................................................ 405
4.5.2.1 Engine Overspeed (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 12............................................................................. 405
4.5.2.2 Engine Underspeed (Level 1 & 2)........................................................................................... 406
4.5.2.3 Engine/Generator Speed Detection........................................................................................ 407
4.5.2.4 Engine Start Failure................................................................................................................. 409
4.5.2.5 Engine Shutdown Malfunction ................................................................................................ 409
4.5.2.6 Engine Unintended Stop ........................................................................................................ 410
4.5.2.7 Engine Charge Alternator (D+)................................................................................................ 411

Table of contents
4.5.2.8 Cylinder Temperature.............................................................................................................. 412

4.5.3 Mains....................................................................................................................................... 417
4.5.3.1 General Mains Monitoring....................................................................................................... 417
4.5.3.2 Mains Monitoring Hysteresis Voltage / Frequency.................................................................. 417
4.5.3.3 Blocking of Mains Protection................................................................................................... 417
4.5.3.4 Mains Operating Ranges......................................................................................................... 418
4.5.3.5 Mains Decoupling.................................................................................................................... 420
4.5.3.6 Mains Overfrequency (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 81O...................................................................... 428
4.5.3.7 Mains Underfrequency (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 81U.................................................................... 429
4.5.3.8 Mains Overvoltage (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 59............................................................................. 430
4.5.3.9 Mains Undervoltage (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 27........................................................................... 432
4.5.3.10 Mains Voltage Increase........................................................................................................... 433
4.5.3.11 Mains Time-Dependent Voltage.............................................................................................. 435
4.5.3.12 QV Monitoring......................................................................................................................... 443
4.5.3.13 Change Of Frequency............................................................................................................. 445
4.5.3.14 Mains Voltage Phase Rotation................................................................................................ 448
4.5.3.15 Mains Import Power (Level 1 & 2)........................................................................................... 450
4.5.3.16 Mains Export Power (Level 1 & 2)........................................................................................... 451
4.5.3.17 Engine/Mains Active Power Mismatch.................................................................................... 452
4.5.3.18 Mains Lagging Power Factor (Level 1 & 2)............................................................................. 453
4.5.3.19 Mains Leading Power Factor (Level 1 & 2)............................................................................. 454
4.5.4 Breaker.................................................................................................................................... 456
4.5.4.1 Configure GCB........................................................................................................................ 456
4.5.4.2 Configure GCB 50BF.............................................................................................................. 457
4.5.4.3 Synchronization GCB ............................................................................................................. 458
4.5.4.4 Configure GGB........................................................................................................................ 459
4.5.4.5 Synchronization GGB ............................................................................................................. 460
4.5.4.6 Configure MCB........................................................................................................................ 460
4.5.4.7 Synchronization MCB ............................................................................................................. 462
4.5.4.8 Configure MCB 50BF.............................................................................................................. 463
4.5.4.9 MCB plausibility....................................................................................................................... 463
4.5.4.10 Configure Neutral Contactor.................................................................................................... 464
4.5.5 Flexible Limits.......................................................................................................................... 465
4.5.6 Miscellaneous.......................................................................................................................... 469
4.5.6.1 General monitoring settings.................................................................................................... 469
4.5.6.2 Free Configurable Alarms....................................................................................................... 470
4.5.6.3 CAN Interface 1....................................................................................................................... 472
4.5.6.4 CAN Interface 2....................................................................................................................... 473
4.5.6.5 CAN Interface 3....................................................................................................................... 474
4.5.6.6 CAN Interface 2 - J1939 Interface........................................................................................... 474
4.5.6.7 J1939 Interface - Red (Stop) Alarm......................................................................................... 477
4.5.6.8 J1939 Interface - Amber Warning Alarm................................................................................. 478

Table of contents
4.5.6.9 J1939 Interface - Protect Alarm............................................................................................... 479

4.5.6.10 J1939 Interface - Emission/Malfunction Alarm........................................................................ 480
4.5.6.11 J1939 Interface – DM1 Alarms................................................................................................ 481
4.5.6.12 Battery Overvoltage (Level 1 & 2)........................................................................................... 481
4.5.6.13 Battery Undervoltage (Level 1 & 2)......................................................................................... 482
4.5.6.14 Multi-Unit Parameter Alignment.............................................................................................. 483
4.5.6.15 Multi-Unit Missing easYgen..................................................................................................... 485
4.5.6.16 Multi-Unit Missing LS-5........................................................................................................... 486
4.5.6.17 Communication Management................................................................................................. 487
4.5.6.18 Operating Range Failure......................................................................................................... 492
4.5.6.19 Load Share Interface Redundancy is Lost.............................................................................. 494
4.6 Configure Measurement.......................................................................................................... 495
4.6.1 General measurement settings............................................................................................... 496
4.6.2 Generator................................................................................................................................ 497
4.6.2.1 Configure transformer............................................................................................................. 499
4.6.3 Busbar..................................................................................................................................... 500
4.6.4 Mains....................................................................................................................................... 501
4.6.4.2 External Mains Active Power................................................................................................... 504
4.6.4.3 External Mains Reactive Power.............................................................................................. 505
4.6.5 Engine..................................................................................................................................... 505
4.7 Configure Interfaces................................................................................................................ 506
4.7.1 USB (Service Port) Interface................................................................................................... 506
4.7.2 RS-485 Interface..................................................................................................................... 507
4.7.3 Modbus Protocol..................................................................................................................... 507
4.7.4 CAN Interfaces........................................................................................................................ 511
4.7.4.1 CAN Interface 1....................................................................................................................... 511
4.7.4.2 CAN Interface 2....................................................................................................................... 519
4.7.4.3 CAN Interface 3....................................................................................................................... 531
4.7.5 Ethernet Interfaces.................................................................................................................. 539
4.7.5.1 Ethernet Network A................................................................................................................. 540
4.7.5.2 Ethernet Network B................................................................................................................. 542
4.7.5.3 Ethernet Network C................................................................................................................. 543
4.7.5.4 SNTP....................................................................................................................................... 544
4.7.6 Load Share Parameters.......................................................................................................... 545
4.8 Configure LogicsManager....................................................................................................... 546
4.9 Configure AnalogManager...................................................................................................... 551
4.9.1 Operations............................................................................................................................... 551
4.9.2 AnalogManager Constants...................................................................................................... 561
4.10 Configure Counters................................................................................................................. 562
4.10.1 Generator Preset Values......................................................................................................... 563

Table of contents
4.10.2 Service Reset Values.............................................................................................................. 564

4.10.3 Counter Pulses and Transistor Output.................................................................................... 566
5 Operation................................................................................................................................. 569
5.1 Power ON................................................................................................................................ 569

5.2 Change Operating Modes....................................................................................................... 570
5.2.1 Operating Mode STOP............................................................................................................ 571
5.2.2 Operating Mode MANUAL....................................................................................................... 572
5.2.3 Operating Mode AUTOMATIC................................................................................................ 574
5.2.4 Operating Mode TEST............................................................................................................ 575
5.3 Restore Language Setting via HMI, Buttons and Softkeys..................................................... 576
6 Application Field...................................................................................................................... 577
6.1 Basic Applications................................................................................................................... 577

6.1.1 Application Mode A01 (None)................................................................................................. 577
6.1.2 Application Mode A02 (GCB open)......................................................................................... 579
6.1.3 Application Mode A03 (GCB).................................................................................................. 580
6.1.4 Application Mode A04 (GCB/MCB)......................................................................................... 582
6.1.5 Application Mode A05 (GCB/GGB)......................................................................................... 584
6.1.6 Application Mode A06 (GCB/GGB/MCB)................................................................................ 586
6.1.7 Application Mode A07 (GCB/LS5)........................................................................................... 589
6.1.8 Application Mode A08 (GCB/L-MCB)...................................................................................... 591
6.1.9 Application Mode A09 (GCB/GGB/L-MCB)............................................................................. 594
6.1.10 Application Mode A10 (GCB/L-GGB)...................................................................................... 596
6.1.11 Application Mode A11 (GCB/L-GGB/L-MCB).......................................................................... 598
6.1.12 Application Mode A12 (GCB/L-GGBMCB).............................................................................. 601
6.2 Multiple Genset Applications................................................................................................... 604
6.2.1 Configuration Example: Multiple Genset................................................................................. 605
6.2.1.1 Configuring Load-Dependent Start/Stop................................................................................. 606
6.2.1.2 Configuring Automatic Operation............................................................................................ 608
6.2.1.3 Configuring Emergency Operation.......................................................................................... 608
6.2.1.4 Configuring Power Control...................................................................................................... 608
6.3 Special Applications................................................................................................................ 609
6.3.1 Generator Excitation Protection.............................................................................................. 609
6.3.2 Configuring A Setpoint Control Via Analog Input.................................................................... 610
6.3.3 Creating Self-Toggling (Pulsing) Relays................................................................................. 613
6.3.4 Changing A Starter Battery Set............................................................................................... 614
6.3.5 Performing Remote Start/Stop And Acknowledgment............................................................ 615
6.3.5.1 Operating Modes..................................................................................................................... 616
6.3.5.2 Setting Up A Test With Or Without Load................................................................................. 617
6.3.5.3 Remote Start/Stop, Shutdown, And Acknowledgment............................................................ 618
6.3.6 Connecting IKD 1 on CAN Bus............................................................................................... 621

Table of contents
6.3.6.1 Configuring an IKD 1 Expansion Module................................................................................ 623

6.3.6.2 Configuration for a second IKD 1............................................................................................ 626
6.3.7 Configuring A PWM Duty Cycle For A CAT ADEM Controller................................................ 627
6.3.8 Wiring Self Powered Discrete Inputs....................................................................................... 628
6.3.9 Connecting Analog Inputs In Series........................................................................................ 628
6.3.10 Setup Expansion Modules at CAN 2....................................................................................... 629
6.3.11 Phase Angle Compensation.................................................................................................... 638
6.3.12 Start/Stop Logic Mode "Off"..................................................................................................... 640
6.3.13 Ripple Control Receiver.......................................................................................................... 643
6.3.14 Neutral Interlocking................................................................................................................. 646
6.3.15 Run-Up Synchronization......................................................................................................... 650
6.3.15.1 Configuration........................................................................................................................... 652
6.3.15.2 Procedures.............................................................................................................................. 653
6.3.15.3 Parameter Information............................................................................................................. 662
6.3.15.4 Commissioning Checklist........................................................................................................ 663
6.3.16 LDSS with predicted load........................................................................................................ 664
6.3.16.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................. 664
6.3.16.2 Internal source mode (EG3500XT)......................................................................................... 666
6.3.16.3 External source mode............................................................................................................. 670
6.3.16.4 Tables...................................................................................................................................... 674
6.4 CANopen Applications............................................................................................................ 676
6.4.1 Remote Control....................................................................................................................... 676
6.4.1.2 Transmitting A Frequency Setpoint......................................................................................... 680
6.4.1.3 Transmitting A Voltage Setpoint.............................................................................................. 682
6.4.1.4 Transmitting A Power Factor Setpoint..................................................................................... 685
6.4.1.5 Transmitting A Power Setpoint................................................................................................ 687
6.4.1.6 Transmitting Multiple Setpoints............................................................................................... 690
6.4.1.7 Remotely Changing The Setpoint........................................................................................... 691
6.4.1.8 Transmitting A Remote Control Bit.......................................................................................... 694
6.4.2 Sending A Data Protocol via TPDO........................................................................................ 695
6.4.3 Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................... 697
6.5 Modbus Applications............................................................................................................... 697
6.5.1 Remote Control....................................................................................................................... 698
6.5.1.2 Setpoint Setting....................................................................................................................... 701
6.5.1.3 Remotely Changing The Setpoint........................................................................................... 704
6.5.2 Changing Parameter Settings................................................................................................. 707
6.5.2.1 Parameter Setting................................................................................................................... 707
6.5.2.2 Configuration Of LogicsManager Functions............................................................................ 708
6.5.2.3 Configuration Of LogicsManager Functions For Remote Access........................................... 711
6.5.2.4 Remotely Acknowledge Single Alarm Messages.................................................................... 717

Table of contents
6.5.2.5 Remotely Clearing The Event History..................................................................................... 717

6.5.2.6 Remotely Resetting The Default Values................................................................................. 718
6.5.3 Exception Responses.............................................................................................................. 720
7 Interfaces And Protocols......................................................................................................... 721
7.1 Interfaces Overview................................................................................................................. 721

7.2 CAN Interfaces........................................................................................................................ 722
7.2.1 CAN Interface 1 (Guidance level)............................................................................................ 722
7.2.2 CAN Interface 2 (Engine level)................................................................................................ 722
7.2.3 CAN Interface 3 (System level)............................................................................................... 723
7.3 Ethernet Interfaces.................................................................................................................. 724
7.4 Serial Interfaces...................................................................................................................... 724
7.4.1 RS-485 Interface (Serial Interface 2)....................................................................................... 724
7.4.2 USB interface (USB 2.0, slave)............................................................................................... 725
7.5 CANopen Protocol................................................................................................................... 725
7.6 J1939 Protocol........................................................................................................................ 727
7.6.1 Displayed Messages (Visualization)........................................................................................ 728
7.6.2 Supported J1939 ECUs & Remote Control Messages............................................................ 732
7.6.3 Device Type Standard............................................................................................................. 735
7.7 Modbus Protocol..................................................................................................................... 737
7.8 Load Sharing........................................................................................................................... 741
7.8.1 Load Share via CAN................................................................................................................ 742
7.8.2 Load Share via UDP Broadcast Messages (Ethernet)............................................................ 743
8 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................... 745
8.1 Technical Data........................................................................................................................ 745

8.1.1 Measuring Values.................................................................................................................... 745
8.1.2 Ambient Variables................................................................................................................... 746
8.1.3 Inputs/Outputs......................................................................................................................... 747
8.1.4 Interfaces................................................................................................................................. 750
8.1.5 Real Time Clock Battery.......................................................................................................... 751
8.1.6 Display (plastic housing variant, only)..................................................................................... 751
8.1.7 Housing................................................................................................................................... 751
8.1.8 Approvals................................................................................................................................ 752
8.2 Environmental Data................................................................................................................. 752
8.3 Accuracy.................................................................................................................................. 753
8.4 Protection (ANSI).................................................................................................................... 755
9 Appendix................................................................................................................................. 757
9.1 Characteristics......................................................................................................................... 757

9.1.1 Triggering Characteristics....................................................................................................... 757
9.1.2 VDO Inputs Characteristics..................................................................................................... 762

Table of contents
9.1.2.1 VDO Input "Pressure" ............................................................................................................. 762

9.1.2.2 VDO Input "Temperature" ....................................................................................................... 764
9.1.2.3 Pt100 RTD............................................................................................................................... 768
9.1.2.4 Pt1000 RTD............................................................................................................................. 769
9.1.2.5 NTC-Sender "AB_94099" (AB-Elektronik Sachsen GmbH)..................................................... 769
9.2 Data Protocols......................................................................................................................... 769
9.2.1 Protocol 5003 (Basic Visualization)......................................................................................... 771
9.2.2 Protocol 5004 (Generator Values Visualization)..................................................................... 793
9.2.3 Protocol 5005 (Mains Values Visualization)............................................................................ 797
9.2.5 Protocol 5011 (Alarm Values Visualization)............................................................................ 834
9.2.6 Protocol 6000 (Load Share Message)..................................................................................... 853
9.2.7 Protocol 6003 (LS-5 Communication)..................................................................................... 858
9.2.8 Protocol 65000 (External Discrete I/O 1 to 8).......................................................................... 862
9.2.9 Protocol 65001 (External Discrete I/O 9 to 16)........................................................................ 862
9.2.10 Protocol 65002 (External Discrete I/O 17 to 24)...................................................................... 863
9.2.11 Protocol 65003 (External Discrete I/O 25 to 32)...................................................................... 864
9.2.12 Protocol 5014.......................................................................................................................... 864
9.2.14 Protocol 5017 (Alarm Values Visualization)............................................................................ 949
9.2.15 Protocols 5018 (Basic CAN Protocol)..................................................................................... 970
9.2.19 Additional Data Identifier......................................................................................................... 973
9.2.19.1 Receive Data (sent from remote control to the easYgen)....................................................... 973
9.2.19.2 Transmit Data (sent from easYgen to control external devices)............................................. 980
9.2.19.3 Data Receive........................................................................................................................... 982
9.2.19.4 Data Identifiers in General ...................................................................................................... 983
9.3 LogicsManager Reference...................................................................................................... 986
9.3.1 LogicsManager Overview........................................................................................................ 986
9.3.2 Logical Command Variables................................................................................................... 988
9.3.2.1 Group 01: Global Alarms......................................................................................................... 989
9.3.2.2 Group 02: Systems Conditions................................................................................................ 990
9.3.2.3 Group 03: Engine Control........................................................................................................ 991
9.3.2.4 Group 04: Applications Condition............................................................................................ 993
9.3.2.5 Group 05: Engine Related Alarms........................................................................................... 996
9.3.2.6 Group 06: Generator Related Alarms...................................................................................... 997
9.3.2.7 Group 07: Mains Related Alarms............................................................................................ 998
9.3.2.8 Group 08: System Related Alarms.......................................................................................... 999
9.3.2.9 Group 09: Discrete Inputs..................................................................................................... 1000
9.3.2.10 Group 10: Analog Inputs....................................................................................................... 1001

Table of contents
9.3.2.11 Group 11: Clock And Timer................................................................................................... 1002

9.3.2.12 Group 12: External Discrete Inputs....................................................................................... 1003
9.3.2.13 Group 13: Discrete Outputs................................................................................................... 1004
9.3.2.14 Group 15: Flexible Limits....................................................................................................... 1005
9.3.2.15 Group 16: Free Alarms latched............................................................................................. 1006
9.3.2.16 Group 17: System Alarms..................................................................................................... 1006
9.3.2.17 Group 25: Ext. Analog inputs "out of range".......................................................................... 1007
9.3.2.18 Group 26: Flags Of LS5 (33 to 48)........................................................................................ 1007
9.3.2.19 Group 27: Flags Of LS5 (49 to 64)........................................................................................ 1010
9.3.2.20 Group 28: LS5 System Conditions........................................................................................ 1013
9.3.2.21 Group 31: Transistor Outputs................................................................................................ 1013
9.3.2.22 Group 32: CAN 1 Receive PDO1.......................................................................................... 1013
9.3.2.24 Group 34: CAN 1 Receive PDO3 ......................................................................................... 1014
9.3.2.25 Group 35: CAN 1 Receive PDO4 ......................................................................................... 1014
9.3.2.27 Group 81: AM Results 1........................................................................................................ 1014
9.3.2.28 Group 82: AM Results 2........................................................................................................ 1016
9.3.2.29 Group 86: LM Results 1........................................................................................................ 1017
9.3.2.30 Group 87: LM Results 2........................................................................................................ 1019
9.3.2.31 Group 88: LM Results 3........................................................................................................ 1020
9.3.2.32 Group 90: AM Internal Values 0............................................................................................ 1020
9.3.2.33 Group 91: AM Internal Values 1............................................................................................ 1021
9.3.2.34 Group 93: AM Analog outputs 1............................................................................................ 1022
9.3.2.35 Group 96: LM Internal flags 1................................................................................................ 1022
9.3.2.36 Group 98: LM External DOs 1............................................................................................... 1023
9.3.2.37 Group 99: LM Internal DOs 1................................................................................................ 1024
9.3.3 Logical Symbols.................................................................................................................... 1025
9.3.4 Logical Outputs..................................................................................................................... 1027
9.3.5 Factory Settings.................................................................................................................... 1035
9.4 AnalogManager Reference................................................................................................... 1042
9.4.1 Data Sources AM.................................................................................................................. 1042
9.4.1.1 Group 01: Generator Values................................................................................................. 1043
9.4.1.2 Group 02: Mains Values........................................................................................................ 1045
9.4.1.3 Group 03: Busbar 1 Values................................................................................................... 1048
9.4.1.4 Group 05: Controller Setpoints.............................................................................................. 1049
9.4.1.5 Group 06: DC Analog Inputs................................................................................................. 1052
9.4.1.6 Group 07: J1939 Values 1..................................................................................................... 1052
9.4.1.7 Group 08: External Analog Inputs......................................................................................... 1055
9.4.1.8 Group 09: J1939 Values 2..................................................................................................... 1056
9.4.1.9 Group 10: Internal Values..................................................................................................... 1056
9.4.1.10 Group 11: Engine Values...................................................................................................... 1058

Table of contents
9.4.1.11 Groups 12 Free..................................................................................................................... 1058

9.4.1.12 Group 13: Free Constants..................................................................................................... 1059
9.4.1.13 Group 14: Controller Values.................................................................................................. 1059
9.4.1.14 Groups 15 .. 20: Free............................................................................................................ 1059
9.4.1.15 Group 21: CAN1 Receive...................................................................................................... 1060
9.4.1.16 Group 21: Free...................................................................................................................... 1060
9.4.1.17 Group 24: Free Analog Values.............................................................................................. 1060
9.4.1.18 Groups 25 .. 79: Free............................................................................................................ 1061
9.4.1.19 Group 80: Reserved - don't use............................................................................................ 1061
9.4.1.20 Group 81: Results 1.............................................................................................................. 1061
9.4.1.21 Group 82: Results 2.............................................................................................................. 1062
9.4.1.22 Groups 83..89: Reserved - don't use..................................................................................... 1063
9.4.1.23 Group 90: 'Internal'/Fixed Values 0....................................................................................... 1063
9.4.1.24 Group 91: 'Internal'/Fixed Values 1....................................................................................... 1064
9.4.1.25 Group 92: Reserved - don't use............................................................................................ 1064
9.4.1.26 Group 93: Analog Outputs 1.................................................................................................. 1064
9.4.1.27 Groups 94..99: Reserved - don't use..................................................................................... 1065
9.4.2 Reference Values.................................................................................................................. 1065
9.4.2.1 Generator Rated Voltage...................................................................................................... 1065
9.4.2.2 Mains Rated Voltage............................................................................................................. 1065
9.4.2.3 Nominal Frequency............................................................................................................... 1065
9.4.2.4 Generator/Mains rated active/reactive Power ...................................................................... 1065
9.4.2.5 Generator/Mains Power Factor ............................................................................................ 1066
9.4.2.6 Generator Rated Current....................................................................................................... 1066
9.4.2.7 Mains rated Current............................................................................................................... 1066
9.4.2.8 Nominal Speed...................................................................................................................... 1066
9.4.2.9 Battery Voltage...................................................................................................................... 1067
9.4.2.10 Fixed Value 10000 ............................................................................................................... 1067
9.4.2.11 Busbar 1 Rated Voltage ....................................................................................................... 1067
9.4.2.12 Display Value Format............................................................................................................ 1067
9.4.3 Factory Settings.................................................................................................................... 1068
9.5 Event And Alarm Reference.................................................................................................. 1078
9.5.1 Alarm Classes....................................................................................................................... 1078
9.5.2 Conversion Factors............................................................................................................... 1079
9.5.3 Status Messages................................................................................................................... 1079
9.5.4 Event History......................................................................................................................... 1082
9.5.4.1 Event Messages.................................................................................................................... 1083
9.5.4.2 Alarm Messages.................................................................................................................... 1084
9.6 Formulas............................................................................................................................... 1093
9.6.1 Load Dependent Start Stop (LDSS) Formulas...................................................................... 1093
9.7 Additional Information............................................................................................................ 1095
9.7.1 CAN Bus Pin Assignments Of Third-Party Units................................................................... 1095

Table of contents
10 Glossary And List Of Abbreviations....................................................................................... 1097
11 Index...................................................................................................................................... 1099

Table of contents

General Information
About This Manual > Revision History
1 General Information
1.1 About This Manual
1.1.1 Revision History

General Information
Rev. Date Editor Changes
D 2019-04 PC NEW Software Revision Release 1.16 or higher

NEW features & functions
n The FRT mains monitoring is further expanded. (VDE-AR-N 4110). See Ä Chapter
4.5.3.11 “Mains Time-Dependent Voltage” on page 435
n The mains frequency measurement is optimized to reach faster and more reliable
response times regarding mains frequency monitoring. (VDE-AR-N 4110). See Ä Chapter
9.4.1.2 “Group 02: Mains Values” on page 1045.
n Some min. and max. adjusting values for configure mains decoupling monitorings are
changed to match the newest grid code demands. (VDE-AR-N 4110)
n Introduction of special mains limits to maintain the resynchronization of the genset back to
mains after a mains failure. (VDE-AR-N 4110). See Ä Chapter 4.5.3.4.2 “Reconnecting
Mains Operating Range” on page 419.
n Introduction of a generator reactive power setpoint [kvar] including the capability to serve it
through interface connection or any free analog input. See Ä “Remote reactive power set‐
point” on page 978.
n Introduction of different individually configurable reactive power setpoint filters (PT1 char‐
acteristic). (VDE-AR-N 4110). See Ä Chapter 4.4.4.2.5 “Reactive Power / Power Factor
setpoint filter” on page 285.
n Introduction of a Reactive power – Voltage curve Q(V). (VDE-AR-N 4110). See Ä Chapter
4.4.4.2.6 “Reactive Power Characteristic” on page 287.
n Introduction of a Reactive power – Active power curve Q(P). (VDE-AR-N 4110). See
Ä Chapter 4.4.4.2.6.2 “Reactive Power Q(P)” on page 290.
n Introduction of a Reactive power – Voltage curve Q(V) including voltage limitation. (VDE-
AR-N 4110). See Ä Chapter 4.4.4.2.6.3 “Reactive Power Q(V) limit” on page 292.
n Introduction of a special mains frequency value based on a 200ms gliding average value to
match an accuracy of 50mHz and better. (VDE-AR-N 4110). See Ä Chapter 9.4.1.2
“Group 02: Mains Values” on page 1045.
n The over frequency -active power decrease function is expanded with under frequency -
active power increase function. (VDE-AR-N 4110). See Ä Chapter 4.4.4.5.5 “Active Power
– Frequency Function P(f)” on page 329.
n Providing a LogicsManager command variable in order to blocking ROCOF Monitor during
FRT-cases. (VDE-AR-N 4110). See: Parameter 3053 () and Parameter 3103 () and
Ä Chapter 9.3.2.7 “Group 07: Mains Related Alarms” on page 998.
n Providing of a configurable hysteresis for mains voltage and frequency monitoring. (VDE-
AR-N 4110). See Ä Chapter 4.5.3.2 “Mains Monitoring Hysteresis Voltage / Frequency”
on page 417).
n Introduction of a pole-slip monitoring function in parallel to mains operation. (VDE-AR-N
4110) Ä Chapter 4.5.1.6.3 “Pole Slip Monitoring” on page 403
n The generator negative reactive energy [kvar] is now available in the data protocols 5014
and 5016.
n The AnalogManager provides now the analog variable "Number of starts". See Ä Chapter
9.4.1.10 “Group 11: Engine Values” on page 1058.
n Introduction of an AVR algorithm to send a excitation control signal to an external excita‐
tion module. See Ä Chapter 4.4.4.1.1 “AVR” on page 273.
n Introduction of the discret alarm redundancy load share interface B/C is lost. See
Ä Chapter 4.5.6.19 “Load Share Interface Redundancy is Lost” on page 494.
n The frequency controller "PID analog" provides now a second parameter set. See
Ä Chapter 4.4.4.4 “Frequency Control” on page 308.
n The frequency controller can now alternatively be operated with a speed source. See
Ä Chapter 4.4.4.4 “Frequency Control” on page 308.
n The device provides now free analog values, which can be set from remote by communica‐
tion interface. See Ä Chapter 9.4.1.17 “Group 24: Free Analog Values” on page 1060.
n The Windows Microsoft driver for USB interface is stored on the easYgen flash drive.
n The easYgen AnalogManager pool supports direct active and reactive power [kW and
kvar] coming from LS5. See Ä Chapter 9.4.1.9 “Group 10: Internal Values” on page 1056.
n The easYgen LogicsManager pool supports direct phase rotation flags coming from LS5.
See Ä Chapter 9.3.2.7 “Group 07: Mains Related Alarms” on page 998.
Corrections/Repairs
n L1-N [%] and L3-N [%] are in AM with wrong percentage value when measurement system
= 1Ph3W. Percentage value is based on Un/sqrt(3). It should be based on Un/2.
C 2018-12 PC NEW Software Revision Release 1.15 or higher

n To improve the handling of the AnalogManager, the following AM functions have been
changed:

General Information

– "Compare with Delay On" > C1 entry changed from = [ms] to [s]
– "Filter" > C1 entry changed from = [ms] to [s]
– "Timer" > C1 entry changed from = [ms] to [s]
– "Delay type A" > C1 entry changed from = [ms] to [s]
– "Delay type B" > A1 and A2 entries changed from = [ms] to [s]
– "Toggle" > A1 and A2 entries changed from = [ms] to [s]
– "One shot" > C1 entry changed from = [ms] to [s]
For details see Ä “The following AnalogManager operations are available:” on page 557.
n Rounding of 16Bit Integers in communication protocols 5010 and 5016. AC values which
are supported in a 16Bit integer format are rounded.
n The service tool ToolKit allows now also an Offline Mode (For details see Ä Chapter 4.2.8
“Toolkit Offline Mode” on page 152.)
n Different timers (e.g. Cooldown), usually indicated on display, are available as AnalogMan‐
ager variables and accessible by communication interface. See Ä Chapter 9.4.1.10 “Group
11: Engine Values” on page 1058.
n Introduction of new AnalogManager variables regarding RTC, counter and timer (For
details see Ä Chapter 9.4.1.9 “Group 10: Internal Values” on page 1056.)
n Introduction of a customer tool for translations. Makes individual language translation of
the easYgen HMI possible. For details, see Ä “Localization Tool” on page 160.
n Now, the device provides a flag in the LogicsManager that the mains decoupling monitor is
activated. See Ä Chapter 9.3.2.2 “Group 02: Systems Conditions” on page 990.
n The LDSS parameter alignment monitor is expanded with the settings:
– Delay
– Self acknowledge
– Enabled
For details see Ä Chapter 4.5.6.14 “Multi-Unit Parameter Alignment” on page 483.
n Introduction of the CAN protocol 5017 with all relevant alarms of an EG3000XT. For details
see Ä Chapter 9.2.14 “Protocol 5017 (Alarm Values Visualization)” on page 949.
n Change in AnalogManager: The setpoints for W and var are reworked to kW and kvar for
better configuration handling.
n Support of Diesel Particle Filter SPNs according to Deutz EMR4 ECU. Refer to Ä Chapter
7.6.2 “Supported J1939 ECUs & Remote Control Messages” on page 732 for details.
n The time span of excitation the charging alternator (D+) is now configurable. For details,
see Ä Chapter 3.3.4 “Charging Alternator” on page 57.
n It is now possible to fade out decimals of analog values on the HMI customer screens. For
details see Ä Chapter 4.3.2.1 “Configure Customer Screens” on page 160.
n The free AnalogManager output values 1-16 are now usable in the CANopen PDO system.
For details see Ä Chapter 9.4.1.15 “Group 21: CAN1 Receive” on page 1060.
n J1939 MTU ECU9: The device supports from now on the function "Rapid start" and
"droop". See Ä Chapter 7.6.2 “Supported J1939 ECUs & Remote Control Messages”
on page 732. Refer to MTU ECU9 documentation for more details.
n Introduction of ECU (J1939) messages regarding diesel particle filter (DPF). See
Ä Chapter 7.6.2 “Supported J1939 ECUs & Remote Control Messages” on page 732.
n Inverse Time Overcurrent Tp monitor:
The setting Inverse time overcurrent Time constant Tp can now configured on up to 5 sec‐
onds (Before 1.99s).
n Introduction of a new LDSS feature: LDSS with predicted load. For details see and
Ä Chapter 6.3.16 “LDSS with predicted load” on page 664.
n Introduction of the J1939 handling for ECU Hatz EDC 17. For details see Ä Chapter 7.6.2
“Supported J1939 ECUs & Remote Control Messages” on page 732.
n General additionally J1939 SPNs implemented concerning diese particel filter (DPF). See
Ä Chapter 7.6.2 “Supported J1939 ECUs & Remote Control Messages” on page 732 for
details.
n Introduction of a new monitor: Easygen monitors ECU malfunction (emission) and protec‐
tion alarm on J1939. See Ä Chapter 7.6.2 “Supported J1939 ECUs & Remote Control
Messages” on page 732 for details.
n The device easYgen3500XT-P2 provides now a dedicated phase rotation monitor instead
a LogicsManager command variable only. Ä Chapter 4.5.1.6.2.2 “Generator Phase Rota‐
tion” on page 399
n Introduction of a new monitor in the easYgen: For multiple easYgen applications a MCB
plausibility alarm can be used. See Ä Chapter 4.5.4.9 “ MCB plausibility” on page 463 for
details.
n Introduction of breaker monitors for GCB and MCB:

General Information

Breaker GCB open alarm 50BF.
Breaker MCB open alarm 50BF.
See Ä Chapter 4.5.4.1 “Configure GCB” on page 456 for details.
n Now, the event logger also provides the information that the "Emergency run" is finished.
n Introduction of a new GGB mode. From now on, two different GGB handlings are configu‐
rable. See Ä Chapter 4.4.3.1.7 “GGB Handling” on page 249 for details.
n In all application modes with L-MCB the Homepage and submenu "busbar/System/LS5"
indicates now Mains (LS5) instead of LS5 only. See Ä Chapter 4.1.2 “The HOME Screen”
on page 116 for details.
n The Pmin is considered when starting engine in Parallel mode. This feature is now also
available in the breaker transition mode "Parallel". See Ä Chapter 4.4.3.1.6 “Transition
Modes (Breaker Logic)” on page 245 for details.
Corrections/Repairs
n The L-GGB feedback is under some circumstances wrong recognized and accordingly
wrong monitored. This is fixed now.
n The event logger got trouble with the entry "Emergency run" under special circumstances.
This is fixed now.
n The ground fault monitor based on the CT measurement was wrongly described in the
manual. This is fixed now. See Ä Chapter 4.5.1.6.2.1 “Generator Ground Fault (Level 1 &
2)” on page 396 for details.
n Improvements regarding Operating range monitoring included.
n Setpoint Ramp active power 2 was not executed in island parallel operation. This is
working correctly now.
n Power Factor setpoint could not be changed in MANUAL mode. This is working correctly
now.
n The issue (ERRATA sheet #24) is solved: Application mode GCB/L-GGBMCB mode with
breaker transition mode closed transition: During Emergency run the MCB is not served
correctly. This is fixed now.
n If "Generator/Busbar" is configured for Homescreen, and measurement for 1 Phase meas‐
urement is set to "Phase-neutral", then the Busbar voltage on Homescreen is always Zero
(000 V), even when there is actually voltage measured. This is fixed now.
n The issue (ERRATA sheet #25 is solved: Changing from Breaker transition mode "Parallel"
to "Interchange" being parallel to mains and running an export power setpoint: The MCB is
opened immediately without consider the power at the interchange point. This is now fixed.
See Ä Chapter 4.4.3.1.6 “Transition Modes (Breaker Logic)” on page 245 for details.
n Falling into frequency and voltage droop during island operation (e.g. missing member)
and droop tracking is enabled. This can lead to troubles with frequency and voltage con‐
trol, if the MCB shall be synchronized. This is fixed now.
n Improved behavior during Ethernet network errors.
n Home screen engine (HMI) J1939 values. If a configured SPN is not available or having a
sensor defect, HMI indicates "---".

General Information
B 2017-09 GG NEW Software Revision Release 1.14-4 or higher

n The devices are CSA certified (For details see Ä Chapter 8.1.8 “Approvals” on page 752).
n The device provides now the capability to create an own Modbus address point list, begin‐
ning with address 50,000. For this purpose WW provides a TelegramMapper software tool
to create customer specific DataTelegrams. This self created DataTelegrams can be used
with easYgen-XT revision 1.14 or higher. For details see Ä Chapter 4.7.3 “Modbus Pro‐
tocol” on page 507.
n The device offers the capability to disable the password protection for the individual inter‐
face communication channels. If the password level is disabled the access level is set on
code level 5. For details see 9126 Ä p. 513, 9127 Ä p. 534, 9128 Ä p. 507, and
9129 Ä p. 540.
n For running the Remote Panel RP-3000XT with the easYgen-XT, the user can dynamically
switch the Remote Panel into an Full mode, Annunciator mode or Off mode.
See menu “Parameter è Configuration/Configure HMI è Configure Remote Panel” .
Corrections/Repairs
n Issue #19 described in the ERRATA sheet is solved:

Indication of red and amber alarm lamps of ADEC ECU7 in easYgen did not work (ADEC
ECU 7 is transmitting only one byte of DM1, eight are expected).
Restricted to application mode GCB/L-GGB and GCB/L-GGB/L-MCB only: The feedback
of the LS-5 installed over the GGB was always recognized as closed.
Application mode GCB/MCB together with “GCB auto unlock”: If emergency run was
active, “GCB auto unlock” could have caused simultaneous dead bus closure of GCB and
MCB if mains returned during the “GCB open pulse”. This could only happen in parallel
logic if the “GCB open time pulse” (5708) was configured higher or same than 2 s. (This
was because the mains settling time - which is shortened to 2 s in emergency case - and
the “GCB open time pulse” were mismatched.)
Generator power factor monitoring works now even if generator measurement is config‐
ured to 3PH3W.
All visualization values of ADEC ECU7 are indicated now.
MCB plausibility alarm works fine now: If MCB was not enabled (12923 = FALSE) and start
without load was active and emergency run was active, the GCB no longer will be fre‐
quently closed and opened.
n The active power setpoint can be changed now even in island mode and with load control
enabled.
n The event logger stores from now, when the engine has stopped. Until now only the
starting information was stored.
n GCB no longer opens and closes permanently if emergency and start without load
n Setpoint Ramp active power 2 is executed in island parallel operation, too
n Busbar display and voltage of busbar is correct now (HMI and ToolKit), even if "Generator/
Busbar" is configured for HOME screen, and measurement for 1 Phase measurement is
set to "Phase-Neutral".
The Busbar voltage on HOME screen is no longer always Zero (000 V) when there is
actually voltage measured.
n Mains decoupling screen: Text "Overfreq." is changed to "Overfreq.2" and text "Underfreq."
is changed to "Underfreq.2"
n Screens "Configure Breaker", "Monitor Breaker": Corrected hide/unhide of links and but‐
tons for GGB
n The buttons had no function and this is now corrected:
– "Test ON"/"Test OFF" under “Next Page è Diagnostic è Mains decoupling
è Mains decoupling thresholds”
– "Execute" under “Next Page è Diagnostic è Mains decoupling
è Mains decoupling test”
– “Measured values è Busbar”: Corrected jump at arrow down for non configurable
busbar with breaker mode with LS5
– “Measured values è BusbarMainsByLS5”: corrected jump at arrow up for non config‐
urable busbar with breaker mode with LS5
n MANual operation mode:
– The power factor setpoint is now adjustable, if the device runs power factor control.

General Information

– In island- or mains parallel operation and when switching the device into operation
mode STOP, the unloading of the generator now is executed before opening the
GCB.
– If an analog output is configured to a discrete +/- setpoint (e.g. 05.64), the value will
be updated now.
n If emergency run is active (no mains) AND operating mode is fixed to AUTOmatic via Logi‐
csManager AND an alarm of class C .. F occurs, the Command Variable “Emergency run”
(04.09) no longer toggles for 2 s and so does not generate lot of entries in the event his‐
tory.
n CAN J1939 address claiming: Device did not answer on address claiming request.
n CAN: The baud rate handling in all CAN communication ports has been optimized.
n During cranking: Crank relay could have toggled if speed (measured via MPU) jittered
around firing speed.
Technical Manual updated
n Description, images, and tables updated according to the new features, functions, and cor‐
rections listed above.
n The Ethernet port is named Ethernet #1 or Ethernet A which means the same.
n Two symbols "generator Add-on/Add-off" explained (see Ä Chapter 4.1.5.4 “Sequencing”
on page 123).
n Load Control example updated (see Ä “Example 3: Islanded Parallel Operation (IOP)”
on page 327).
n NOTE added: Use Pin 61 or (metal housing) protective earth, see Ä Chapter 6.3.8 “Wiring
Self Powered Discrete Inputs” on page 628.
n More user-friendly description of remotely changing setpoints (see Ä Chapter 6.4.1.7
“Remotely Changing The Setpoint” on page 691 and Ä Chapter 6.5.1.3 “Remotely
Changing The Setpoint” on page 704).
n Settings proposal for J1939 communication with Cummins ECU (see Ä Chapter 7.6.2
“Supported J1939 ECUs & Remote Control Messages” on page 732).
n Product label with Unom (see Ä Chapter 8.1 “Technical Data” on page 745).
n Data Protocols updated:
– 5003, start addr. 450066, ID 10149
– 5003, start addr. 450120, ID 10298
– 5010, start addr. 450111, ID8009
– 5014, start addr. 450066, ID 4087
– 5014, start addr. 450136, ID 4090
n LogicsManager References update:
– 07.xx: IDs changed
n Layout optimizations and typo corrections.

General Information
A 2016-12 GG NEW Software Revision Release 1.13 or higher

n A new application mode is available: GCB/L-GGBMCB.

In this application mode, the easYgen-XT controls the connected LS-5 device (version
V2.0002 and higher) at the interchange point.
For details refer to Ä Chapter 6.1.12 “Application Mode A12 (GCB/L-GGBMCB)”
on page 601 (and Ä Chapter 2.2 “Application Modes Overview” on page 39 for overview).
n A customer specific device name can be entered and will be used e.g. as device name in
Ethernet network. For more details refer to Ä Chapter 4.3.5 “System Management”
on page 180.
n Run-up synchronization is possible even without connected speed sensor, if in a single
application the genset shall magnetize a power transformer.
For details refer to Ä Chapter 6.3.15.2.4 “Run-Up Synchronization without Speed Sensor”
on page 657.
n The breaker closed transition time in the mode GCB/MCB has been optimized to match the
<100 ms duration time. Refer to Ä “ Breaker logic "CLOSED TRANSIT."” on page 246 for
details.
n easYgen-XT in conjunction with the LS-5 (version V2.0002 and higher) can synchronize
even with negative slipping frequency: LS-5 is switching the easYgen to a special slip fre‐
quency offset.
For details refer to description of parameter 6676 Ä p. 253 in this document and parameter
5709 in the LS-5 (Technical Manuals 37649/37650).
n The frequency measurements based on phase-phase and phase-neutral voltages are
monitored on plausibility. For details refer to Ä Chapter 4.5.1.3.1 “Plausibility Check of Vol‐
tages' AC Wiring” on page 373.
n All monitoring functions in the device are from now on expanded with an additional func‐
tionality:
– Each monitor can be individually enabled by an internal LogicsManager flag.
(For example refer to parameter “Enabled” Ä Chapter 4.5.1.3.2 “Generator Overfre‐
quency (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 81O” on page 374).
n Both alarm class configuration parameters 2601 Ä p. 457 for GCB and 2621 Ä p. 462 for
MCB now additionally offer the possibility to select "Control".
n The Node-ID of the device in a CAN bus network can be automatically pre-set with the
device number. Parameter 1894 Ä p. 512 “Align device no. with Node-ID” must be config‐
ured to "Yes". This will avoid same-number-mismatch.
n AnalogManager became even more flexible:
– 16 free configurable and accessible constants enable pre-sets to be used as Analog‐
Manager input. For details refer to Ä Chapter 4.9.2 “AnalogManager Constants”
on page 561 and Ä Chapter 4.9.1 “Operations” on page 551.
n ECU J1939: The transmission rate of PGN 64913 has been changed. For details refer to
Ä Chapter 7.6 “ J1939 Protocol” on page 727.
n Fuel level monitoring offers two further SPN available via J1939 interface (refer to
Ä “Standard visualization messages” on page 728) and Ä Chapter 9.2.13 “Protocol 5016
(Basic Visualization)” on page 897:
– SPN 96: Fuel level 1
– SPN 38: Fuel level 2
n “Generator Total AC Power” PGN 65029 Ä p. 736 is send to Scania S6 ECU via J1939
protocol. For details refer to Ä Chapter 7.6.3 “Device Type Standard” on page 735.
n Load sharing interface can be switched between CAN and Ethernet. Refer to parameter
“Load share interface” 9924 Ä p. 301/Ä p. 741 for details.
n Power factor values display (generator and mains) enhanced: Three instead two decimal
places. Refer to Ä Chapter 8.3 “Accuracy” on page 753 for details.
n The "Protection Lamp DM1" status of the J1939 communication is from now on available
as LM 03.44 command variable. Refer to Ä Chapter 9.3.2.3 “Group 03: Engine Control”
n Max number of logged events enhanced: 1000 events saved now instead of 300 before.
Refer to Ä Chapter 9.5.4 “Event History” on page 1082 for details.
n The device stores from now on the three generator current slave pointers in a non-volatile
memory.
n Device identification via settings file: Serial number will be part of the .wset file generated
and saved via ToolKit. Device identification, file management, and support request become
much easier.
n The readme.txt file in the device additionally informs, that the Technical Manual saved in
the device will not be updated when executing a firmware update.
Corrections/Repairs

General Information

If ECU Device type (parameter 15102) is configured to "EGS Woodward", it can happen,
that the easYgen is transmitting SPN 189 too slowly. This would cause an "Easygen 3000
communication timeout" in the E3 and twinkling of the SPN 189 indication at the E3.
SPN 189 "Engine rated speed" is transmitted in time, so "Easygen 3000 communication
timeout" J1939 E3 communication will not occur even if ECU Device type (parameter
15102) is configured to "EGS Woodward".
The easYgen-XT is not making a reboot procedure if a Modbus TCP write order is exe‐
cuted on a password protected parameter just at that moment the password level expires.
An additional PHOENIX CAN coupler device is supported:
– PHOENIX 27 02 23 0 (with firmware 101 or higher).
n Issue #7 described in the ERRATA sheet is resolved:
Island mode:
– If - during warm-up - the genset becomes the single engine (by unexpected drop-out
of parallel genset), the warm-up is interrupted immediately to avoid dead busbar.
PC/laptop with operating system Windows 8.1 and ToolKit running:
– USB connection handling is improved.
n Phase rotation (mismatch) measurement changed: Based now on phase-phase voltages
instead of phase-neutral voltages.
n Complete HMI/display text translated: English text fragments replaced by local wording.
n GCB/MCB mode:
– The closed transition time of the breaker matches the duration time of <100 ms. Refer
to Ä “ Breaker logic "CLOSED TRANSIT."” on page 246 for details.
Technical Manual
n Small corrections:
– Ä Chapter 3.3.11.1 “Connecting 24 V Relays” on page 89 re-arranged:
Moved below Ä Chapter 3.3.11 “Relay Outputs (LogicsManager)” on page 87.
– Cable recommendations updated:
General note instead of repeating separately with sub-chapters (see Ä Chapter 3.3.2
“Wiring Diagram” on page 51 ff)
Cable length recommended (see Ä Chapter 3.4.1 “Interfaces overview” on page 99)
Amax added (see Ä Chapter 3.4.2 “RS-485 Interface” on page 100 and Ä Chapter
3.4.4 “CAN Bus Interfaces” on page 102)
n Description, images, and tables updated according to the new features and functions listed
above.
n Wiring terminals added. For details refer to Ä Chapter 3.3.2 “Wiring Diagram”
on page 51.
n Terminal assignment corrected. For details refer to Ä Chapter 3.3.5.2.3 “ Parameter Set‐
ting '1Ph 3W' (1-phase, 3-wire)” on page 68 and Ä Chapter 3.3.5.2.4.2 “'1Ph 2W' Phase-
Phase Measuring” on page 70.
n Home screen values of Busbar are voltage, power, and frequency. For details refer to
Ä Chapter 4.1.2 “The HOME Screen” on page 116.
n Wrench button (softkey) explained. For details refer to Ä Chapter 4.1.4.3 “Status/Moni‐
toring Screens” on page 120.
n Further WAGO devices expand I/O via CAN 2. For details refer to Ä Chapter 6.3.10 “Setup
Expansion Modules at CAN 2” on page 629.
n Relation between “Monitoring delay time” and “Engine monitoring delay time” explained
in more detail. Refer to Ä Chapter 6.3.15 “Run-Up Synchronization” on page 650.
n Explained in more detail:
– Ä Chapter 6.5.1.3 “Remotely Changing The Setpoint” on page 704
– Ä Chapter 6.4.1.7 “Remotely Changing The Setpoint” on page 691
n "Main" screen renamed to "Home" screen. Refer to Ä Chapter 4.1.5.1 “HOME Screen
Voltage Display” on page 121 for details.
n Technical Data of display added. For details refer to Ä Chapter 8.1.6 “Display (plastic
housing variant, only)” on page 751.
n Marine approvals updated - no longer pending. For details refer to Ä Chapter 8.1.8 “Appro‐
vals” on page 752.

General Information
About This Manual > Depiction Of Notes And Ins...
NEW 2016-09 GG Technical Manual - 1st issue
n Describing device software release 1.12-2 or higher
Notes
New device features & updates in comparison to easYgen-3000 series will be found in the tran‐
sition manual #37625. Please check availability at Woodward web site www.woodward.com.
Up to date documentation?
Please check Woodward web site for latest revi‐
sion of this Technical Manual (search for "37581")
and if there is an Errata Sheet with latest informa‐
tion (search for: "37619").
1.1.2 Depiction Of Notes And Instructions

Safety instructions Safety instructions are marked with symbols. The safety instruc‐
tions are always introduced by signal words that express the
severity of the danger.
DANGER!
This combination of symbol and signal word indi‐
cates an immediately dangerous situation that can
cause death or severe injuries if not avoided.
WARNING!
cates a possibly dangerous situation that can
cause death or severe injuries if it is not avoided.
CAUTION!
cause slight injuries if it is not avoided.
NOTICE!
cause property and environmental damage if it is
not avoided.
Tips and recommendations

This symbol indicates useful tips and recommen‐
dations as well as information on efficient and
trouble-free operation.

General Information
Copyright And Disclaimer
Additional markings To highlight instructions, results, lists, references, and other ele‐
ments, the following markings are used in these instructions:
Marking Explanation
Step-by-step instructions
ð Results of action steps
References to sections of these instructions and to

other relevant documents
Listing without fixed sequence
[Buttons] Operating elements (e.g. buttons, switches), display

elements (e.g. signal lamps)
“Display” Screen elements (e.g. buttons, programming of func‐

tion keys)
“Screen xx è Screen xy Menu path.

è Screen xz” ...
The following information and setting refer to a page
on the HMI screen or ToolKit located as described
here.
Some parameters/settings/screens are available only

either in ToolKit or on the HMI/display.
Dimensions in Figures
All dimensions with no units specified are in mm.
1.2 Copyright And Disclaimer

Disclaimer
All information and instructions in this manual have been provided
under due consideration of applicable guidelines and regulations,
the current and known state of the art, as well as our many years
of in-house experience. Woodward assumes no liability for any
damages due to:
n Failure to comply with the instructions in this manual
n Improper use / misuse
n Willful operation by non-authorized persons
n Unauthorized conversions or non-approved technical modifica‐
tions
n Use of non-approved spare parts
The originator is solely liable for the full extent for damages caused
by such conduct. The obligations agreed-upon in the delivery con‐
tract, the general terms and conditions, the manufacturer’s delivery
conditions, and the statutory regulations valid at the time the con‐
tract was concluded, apply.
Copyright
This manual is protected by copyright. No part of this manual may
be reproduced in any form or incorporated into any information
retrieval system without written permission of Woodward GmbH.

General Information
Safety > Intended Use
Delivery of this manual to third parties, duplication in any form -

including excerpts - as well as exploitation and/or communication
of the content, are not permitted without a written declaration of
release by Woodward GmbH.
Actions to the contrary will entitle us to claim compensation for
damages. We expressly reserve the right to raise any further
accessory claims.
1.3 Service And Warranty

Our Customer Service is available for technical information.
For regional support, please refer to:
http://www.woodward.com/Support_pgd.aspx.
In addition, our employees are interested in any information and
experiences that arise from usage and can be valuable for the
improvement of our products.
Warranty terms
Please enquire with your nearest Woodward repre‐
sentative about the terms of warranty.
For our contact search webpage please go to:
http://www.woodward.com/Directory.aspx
1.4 Safety
1.4.1 Intended Use
The genset control unit has been designed and constructed solely
for the intended use described in this manual.
The easYgen-... devices are available in two different enclosures.
They are designed to be installed either on the back plate of a
switch gear cabinet (e.g. easYgen-x100.../...-x400...) or on the front
plate of a switch gear panel (e.g. easYgen-x200.../...-x500...).The
terminals are always located on the inner side of the housing.
The genset control unit must be used exclusively for engine-generator system
management applications.
n Intended use requires operation of the control unit within the specifications
listed in Ä Chapter 8.1 “Technical Data” on page 745.
n All permissible applications are outlined in Ä Chapter 2.2 “Application Modes
Overview” on page 39.
n Intended use also includes compliance with all instructions and safety notes
presented in this manual.
n Any use which exceeds or differs from the intended use shall be considered
improper use!
n No claims of any kind for damage will be entertained if such claims result
from improper use.

General Information
Safety > Personnel
NOTICE!
Damage due to improper use!
Improper use of the genset control unit may cause
damage to the control unit as well as connected
components.
Improper use includes, but is not limited to:
– Storage, transport, and operation outside the
specified conditions.
1.4.2 Personnel
WARNING!
Hazards due to insufficiently qualified personnel!
If unqualified personnel perform work on or with
the control unit hazards may arise which can
cause serious injury and substantial damage to
property.
– Therefore, all work must only be carried out by
appropriately qualified personnel.
This manual specifies the personnel qualifications required for the

different areas of work, listed below:
n Well trained for electrical installations.
n Skilled and competent to be aware especially of the local
safety regulations.
n Experienced in working on electronic measuring and control
devices.
n Allowed to manage the controlled (engine/generator) system.
The workforce must only consist of persons who can be expected

to carry out their work reliably. Persons with impaired reactions due
to, for example, the consumption of drugs, alcohol, or medication
are prohibited.
When selecting personnel, the age-related and occupation-related
regulations governing the usage location must be observed.

General Information
Safety > General Safety Notes
1.4.3 General Safety Notes

Electrical hazards
DANGER!
Life-threatening hazard from electric shock!
There is an imminent life-threatening hazard from
electric shocks from live parts. Damage to insula‐
tion or to specific components can pose a life-
threatening hazard.
– Only a qualified electrician should perform
work on the electrical equipment.
– Immediately switch off the power supply and
have it repaired if there is damage to the insu‐
lation.
– Before beginning work at live parts of electrical
systems and resources, cut the electricity and
ensure it remains off for the duration of the
work. Comply with the five safety rules in the
process:
– cut electricity;
– safeguard against restart;
– ensure electricity is not flowing;
– earth and short-circuit; and
– cover or shield neighboring live parts.
– Never bypass a fuse or render it inoperable.
Always use the correct amperage when
changing a fuse.
– Keep moisture away from live parts. Moisture
can cause short circuits.
Prime mover safety

WARNING!
Hazards due to insufficient prime mover protection
The engine, turbine, or other type of prime mover
should be equipped with an overspeed (over-tem‐
perature, or over-pressure, where applicable) shut‐
down device(s), that operates totally independently
of the prime mover control device(s) to protect
against runaway or damage to the engine, turbine,
or other type of prime mover with possible personal
injury or loss of life should the mechanical-
hydraulic governor(s) or electric control(s), the
actuator(s), fuel control(s), the driving mecha‐
nism(s), the linkage(s), or the controlled device(s)
fail.
Device implemented self test this Woodward device has a self test check implemented. Perma‐
nently under control are:
n processor function and
n supply voltage.
The internal signal "self check" is aligned in series with the inverse
signal “Ready for op. OFF” parameter 12580 Ä p. 211/Ä p. 212/
Ä p. 1037/Ä p. 1081. Per default (factory settings) discrete output
R01 is energized/closed if device itself is OK.

General Information
LogicsManager (LM) equation parameter 12580 Ä p. 211/

Ä p. 212/Ä p. 1037/Ä p. 1081 allows to customize this safety relay.
You can use the result of this equation: LM command variable
99.01 .
Be careful in changing safety relevant settings!
CAUTION!
Uncontrolled operation due to faulty configuration
The discrete output "Ready for operation" must be
wired in series with an emergency stop function.
This means that it must be ensured that the gener‐
ator circuit breaker is opened and the engine is
stopped if this discrete output is de-energized.
If the availability of the plant is important, this fault
must be signaled independently from the unit.
Modifications
WARNING!
Hazards due to unauthorized modifications
Any unauthorized modifications to or use of this
equipment outside its specified mechanical, elec‐
trical, or other operating limits may cause personal
injury and/or property damage, including damage
to the equipment.
Any unauthorized modifications:
– constitute "misuse" and/or "negligence" within
the meaning of the product warranty thereby
excluding warranty coverage for any resulting
damage
– invalidate product certifications or listings.
Use of batteries/alternators
NOTICE!
Damage to the control system due to improper
handling
Disconnecting a battery from a control system that
uses an alternator or battery-charging device whilst
the charging device is still connected causes
damage to the control system.
– Make sure the charging device is turned off
before disconnecting the battery from the
system.

General Information
Unit includes a lithium backup battery for Real

Time Clock. Field replacement of the battery is not
allowed.
In case of battery replacement please contact your
Woodward service partner.
Electrostatic discharge
Protective equipment: n ESD wrist band
NOTICE!
Damage from electrostatic discharge
All electronic equipment sensitive to damage from
electrostatic discharge, which can cause the con‐
trol unit to malfunction or fail.
– To protect electronic components from static
damage, take the precautions listed below.
1. Avoid build-up of static electricity on your body by not

wearing clothing made of synthetic materials. Wear cotton or
cotton-blend materials as much as possible because these
do not store static electric charges as easily as synthetics.
2. Before working on terminals on the control unit, ground your‐

self by touching and holding a grounded metal object (pipes,
cabinets, equipment, etc.) to discharge any static electricity.
Alternatively wear an ESD wrist band connected to ground.
3. Before any maintenance work on the control unit, ground

yourself by touching and holding a grounded metal object
(pipes, cabinets, equipment, etc.) to discharge any static
electricity.
Alternatively wear an ESD wrist band connected to ground.
4. Keep plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam materials (such as plastic
or Styrofoam cups, cigarette packages, cellophane wrappers,
vinyl books or folders, plastic bottles, etc.) away from the
control unit, modules and work area.

General Information
5. Opening the control cover may void the unit warranty. Do not
remove the printed circuit board (PCB) from the control cab‐
inet unless instructed by this manual.
If instructed by this manual to remove the

PCB from the control cabinet, follow these
precautions:
– Ensure that the device is completely
voltage-free (all connectors have to be
disconnected).
– Do not touch any part of the PCB except
the edges.
– Do not touch the electrical conductors,
connectors, or components with conduc‐
tive devices or with bare hands.
– When replacing a PCB, keep the new
PCB in the plastic antistatic protective
bag it comes in until you are ready to
install it. Immediately after removing the
old PCB from the control cabinet, place it
in the antistatic protective bag.
For additional information on how to prevent

damage to electronic components caused by
improper handling, read and observe the precau‐
tions in:
– "Woodward manual 82715, Guide for Handling
and Protection of Electronic Controls, Printed
Circuit Boards, and Modules".
Notes on marine usage Marine usage of the easYgen genset control requires additional
precautions as listed below:
The specified marine approvals are initially only

valid for metal housing units. They are only valid
for plastic housing units, if they are installed using
the screw kit .
– Use all 12 screws and tighten accordingly.
n The easYgen-3000(XT) Series has an internally isolated power

supply.
Some additional, independent safety and protec‐

tion devices are necessary to meet safety require‐
ments of Rules and Regulations of marine Classifi‐
cation Societies.
– Please refer to the corresponding documents
issued by marine Classification Societies for
the applicable requirements.

General Information
Safety > Protective Equipment And T...
The easYgen is type approved by LR Lloyd's Reg‐

ister.
– Please consider for final functional arrange‐
ments to comply with appropriate Lloyd's Reg‐
ister Rules as subject of the Plan Approval
process.
1.4.4 Protective Equipment And Tools

Protective gear Personal protective equipment serves to protect risks to the safety
and health of persons as well as to protect delicate components
during work.
Certain tasks presented in this manual require the personnel to
wear protective equipment. Specific required equipment is listed in
each individual set of instructions.
The cumulative required personal protective equipment is detailed
below:
ESD wrist band
The ESD (electrostatic discharge) wrist band keeps the user's body
set to ground potential. This measure protects sensitive electronic
components from damage due to electrostatic discharge.
Tools Use of the proper tools ensures successful and safe execution of
tasks presented in this manual.
Specific required tools are listed in each individual set of instruc‐
tions.
The cumulative required tools are detailed below:
Torque screwdriver
A torque-screwdriver allow fastening of screws to a precisely speci‐
fied torque.
n Note the required torque range individually specified in the
tasks listed in this manual.

General Information
Safety > Protective Equipment And T...

System Overview
Application Modes Overview
2 System Overview
2.1 Display And Status Indicators
HMI and ToolKit are aligned for the same

sequence and structure of functions and parame‐
ters.
Restrictions
Full access to all parameters and settings with
ToolKit only!
2.2 Application Modes Overview

The genset control provides the following basic functions via the
application modes listed below.
For detailed information on the application modes

and special applications refer to Ä “Device status”
on page 577.
Application mode Symbol Function
None No breaker control.

This application mode provides the following functions:
n Measuring of engine/generator parameters (i.e. voltage, frequency, current, power,

coolant temperature, oil pressure, etc.)
n Engine start/stop
GCB open GCB control (open)


n Engine start/stop
n Engine/generator protection (relay output to open GCB)
n Mains failure detection with mains decoupling (GCB)
GCB GCB control (open/close)


n Engine start/stop
n GCB operation (relay output to close GCB)

System Overview
Application Modes Overview
GCB/MCB GCB/MCB control (open/close)


n Engine start/stop
n MCB operation (relay outputs to open and close MCB)
n Mains failure detection with mains decoupling (GCB and/or MCB)
n Auto mains failure operation (AMF)
GCB/GGB GCB/GGB control (open/close)


n Engine start/stop
n GGB operation (relay output to open and close the GGB)
GCB/GGB/MCB GCB/GGB/MCB control (open/close)


n Engine start/stop
n MCB operation (relay outputs to open and close the MCB)
n Mains failure detection with mains decoupling (GCB/MCB)
GCB/LS5 GCB/LS5 control (open/close)


n Engine start/stop
n Connection to LS-5 system, LS5 runs as independent unit (Mode “LS5”)
n Auto mains failure operation (AMF) guided by LS-5 system
GCB/L-MCB GCB/L-MCB control (open/close)


n Engine start/stop
n MCB operation via LS-5, LS-5 runs as slave unit (Mode “L-MCB”)
n Mains failure detection with mains decoupling via GCB or LS-5 (MCB)

System Overview
Operation Modes
GCB/GGB/L-MCB GCB/GGB/L-MCB control (open/close)


n Engine start/stop
GCB/L-GGB GCB/GGB/L-MCB control (open/close)


n Engine start/stop
GCB/L-GGB/L-MCB GCB/L-GGB/L-MCB control (open/close)


n Engine start/stop
n GGB operation via LS-5, LS-5 runs as slave unit (Mode “L-GGB”)
GCB/L-GGBMCB GCB/L-GGBMCB control (open/close)


n Engine start/stop
n GGB and MCB operation via LS-5x2, LS-5 runs as slave unit (Mode “L-GGBMCB”)
n Mains failure detection with mains decoupling via GCB or LS-5x2 (GGB or MCB)
2.3 Operation Modes

The easYgen-3000XT offers four operation modes:
n AUTO
n MANUAL (MAN)
n TEST

System Overview
Operation Modes
n STOP
n ... and an internal (non) operating phase during starting the
device itself
The plastic housing (HMI) version of the easYgen-3000XT enables

to select an operation mode by pressing the according button at
the front panel - if current settings allow this function.
For more information about the operation modes please see
Ä Chapter 5.2 “Change Operating Modes” on page 570.

Installation
Mount Unit (Sheet Metal Hous...
3 Installation
NOTICE!
Avoid electrostatic discharge!
Before working with terminals please read and
follow the instructions of chapter Ä “Electrostatic
discharge” on page 35.
For CAN and RS485 shielded cabling, no more
than 25 mm wiring exposed without shield cov‐
erage are allowed at terminal plug side.
3.1 Mount Unit (Sheet Metal Housing)

Dimensions
Fig. 5: Sheet metal housing - dimensions

Installation
Mount Unit (Sheet Metal Hous...
Mounting into a cabinet

Special tool: n Torque screwdriver
Proceed as follows to install the unit using the screw kit:
Fig. 6: Sheet metal housing - drill plan

1. Drill the holes according to the dimensions in Fig. 6 (dimen‐
sions shown in mm).
Ensure sufficient clearance for access to the

terminals (top and bottom) and connectors
located at the sides.
2. Mount the unit to the back panel and insert the screws.

Installation
Mount Unit (Plastic Housing)
3. Tighten the screws to a torque according to the quality class

of the used screws.
Tighten the screws with a crosswise pattern

to ensure even pressure distribution.
3.2 Mount Unit (Plastic Housing)

Mount the unit either using the clamp fasteners ( Ä Chapter 3.2.1
“Clamp Fastener Installation” on page 46) or the screw kit
( Ä Chapter 3.2.2 “Screw Kit Installation” on page 47).
– Don't drill holes if you want to use the clamp

fasteners. If the holes are drilled into the panel,
the clamp fasteners cannot be used anymore.
– In order to enhance the protection to IP 66,
fasten the unit with the screw kit instead of the
clamp fastener hardware.
Dimensions
Fig. 7: Plastic housing - dimensions

Installation
Mount Unit (Plastic Housing) > Clamp Fastener Installation
Panel cutout
Measure Description Tolerance
H Height Total 216 mm —
h Panel cutout 183 mm + 1.0 mm
h' Housing 181 mm

dimension
W Width Total 282 mm —
w Panel cutout 249 mm + 1.1 mm
w' Housing 247 mm

Fig. 8: Cutout schematic dimension
Depth Total 98.2 mm —
The maximum permissible corner radius is 4 mm.
3.2.1 Clamp Fastener Installation

For installation into a door panel with the fastening clamps, pro‐
ceed as follows:
1. Cut out the panel according to the dimensions in Fig. 8.
Don't drill the holes if you want to use the

clamp fasteners. If the holes are drilled into
the panel, the clamp fasteners cannot be
used anymore!
2. Loosen the wire connection terminal screws on the back of

the unit and remove the wire connection terminal strip if
required.
Fig. 9: Remove terminals
3. Insert the four clamping screws into the clamp inserts from
the shown side (Fig. 10; opposite the nut insert) until they are
almost flush. Do not completely insert the screws into the
clamp inserts.
4. Insert the unit into the panel cutout. Verify that the unit fits
correctly in the cutout. If the panel cutout is not big enough,
enlarge it accordingly.
Fig. 10: Insert screws in clamps

Installation
Mount Unit (Plastic Housing) > Screw Kit Installation
5. Re-install the clamp inserts by tilting the insert to a 45° angle.

(Fig. 11/1) Insert the nose of the insert into the slot on the
side of the housing. (Fig. 11/2) Raise the clamp insert so that
it is parallel to the control panel.
Fig. 11: Attach clamp inserts
6. Tighten the clamping screws (Fig. 12/1) until the control unit
is secured to the control panel (Fig. 12/2). Over tightening of
these screws may result in the clamp inserts or the housing
breaking. Do not exceed the recommended tightening torque
of 0.1 Nm.
Fig. 12: Tighten clamping screws
7. Reattach the wire connection terminal strip (Fig. 13) and

secure them with the side screws.
Fig. 13: Reattach terminals
3.2.2 Screw Kit Installation
The housing is equipped with 12 nut inserts

(Fig. 14), which must all be tightened properly to
achieve the required degree of protection.

Installation
Mount Unit (Plastic Housing) > Screw Kit Installation
Fig. 14: Plastic housing - drill plan

Special tool: n Torque screwdriver
Proceed as follows to install the unit using the screw kit:
1. Cut out the panel and drill the holes according to the dimen‐
sions in Fig. 14 (dimensions shown in mm).
2. Insert the unit into the panel cutout. Verify that the unit fits
correctly in the cutout. If the panel cutout is not big enough,
enlarge it accordingly.
3. Insert the screws and tighten to 0.6 Nm (5.3 pound inches) of
torque.
Tighten the screws with a crosswise pattern

to ensure even pressure distribution.
If the thickness of the panel sheet exceeds

2.5 mm, be sure to use screws with a length
exceeding the panel sheet thickness by 4
mm.

Installation
Setup Connections
3.3 Setup Connections
NOTICE!
General notes
NOTICE!
Malfunctions due to literal use of example values
All technical data and ratings indicated in this
chapter are merely listed as examples. Literal use
of these values does not take into account all
actual specifications of the control unit as deliv‐
ered.
– For definite values please refer to chapter
Ä Chapter 8.1 “Technical Data” on page 745.
Wire sizes
Field wiring shall be made with use of cables which
have temperature rating not less than 90 °C.
AWG mm² AWG mm² AWG mm² AWG mm² AWG mm² AWG mm²
30 0.05 21 0.38 14 2.5 4 25 3/0 95 600MCM 300
28 0.08 20 0.5 12 4 2 35 4/0 120 750MCM 400
26 0.14 18 0.75 10 6 1 50 300MCM 150 1000MCM 500
24 0.25 17 1.0 8 10 1/0 55 350MCM 185
22 0.34 16 1.5 6 16 2/0 70 500MCM 240
Table 1: Conversion chart - wire sizes

Installation
Setup Connections > Terminal Allocation
3.3.1 Terminal Allocation
NOTICE!
The device terminals 1 to 80 are allocated similarly for all

easYgen-3000XT and all housing variants. Terminals 81 to 160
additionally are allocated similarly for:
n Plastic housing - for easYgen-3500XT-P2 and
easYgen-3500XT-P2-LT and
n Sheet metal housing - for easYgen-3400XT-P2
The max. possible conductor cross-section of the terminals used is
Amax = 2.5 mm2!
LT Variant description
The temperature range is the only difference
between standard plastic housing and LT variant.
The manual is describing plastic housing and
metal housing variant. Describing the plastic
housing means both standard and LT variant - if
not, it is mentioned!
Fig. 15: Terminals easYgen-3500XT-P2(-LT) plastic housing

Installation
Setup Connections > Wiring Diagram
Fig. 16: Terminals easYgen-3400XT-P2 sheet metal housing
3.3.2 Wiring Diagram
The Protective Earth terminal 61 is not connected

on the sheet metal housing.
– Use the protective earth (PE) connector
located at the bottom center of the sheet metal
housing instead.
Common terminal for AC measurement voltages

Mains, generator, and busbar voltage measuring
terminals no longer differentiate with separate ter‐
minals for each voltage range.
Please be aware that former (easYgen) 100/120 V
terminals are no longer available.

Installation
General recommendations
Ensure appropriate cable cross sections following
the local standards and restrictions.
The maximum cable cross section of the terminal
blocks is 2.5 mm2.
For every type of signal lines like power supply, DI,
DO, AI, AO, MPU:
– Return line has to be close to forward signal
line.
– Use cables instead of single wires.
– In case of using single wires please do at
least one twist per meter to keep wires
together closely.
Plastic housing variants:
– Rout all cables connected to terminal blocks
away from back cover.

Installation
USB
terminals
USB Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet
Screw
Host
In Device C B A
preparation
600 Vac
40
41
*1
Relay [R02] isolated Busbar voltage L2
[R01] Fixed to Ready for operation
42
*1
Relay [R02]
600 Vac
38
43
[R02] Preconfigured to Centralized alarm

*1 Busbar voltage L1
Relay [R03]
44
[R03] Preconfigured to Starter

*1
Relay [R04]
600 Vac
36
45
[R04] Preconfigured to Fuel solenoid / gas valve

Generator voltage N
46
easYgen3400XT / easYgen3500XT -P2 Terminals 01-80

600 Vac
34
47
*1
Relay [R05] isolated
[R05] Generator voltage L3
Preconfigured to Preglow
48
*1 600 Vac
32
49

[R06] Fixed to „Command Close GCB“, if GCB Generator voltage L2
control is enabled.
50
*1 600 Vac
30
51

[R07] Fixed to „Command Open GCB“, if GCB Generator voltage L1
open control is enabled.
52
*1 600 Vac
28
53

[R08] Fixed to „Command Close MCB“, if MCB Mains voltage N
control is enabled.
54
*1
600 Vac
26
55

[R09] Fixed to „Command Open MCB“, if MCB Mains voltage L3
control is enabled.
56
*1
Relay [R10]
Fixed to „Command Close GGB“, if GGB 600 Vac
24
57
[R10] control is enabled.

Mains voltage L2
*1
58
Relay [R11]
[R11] Fixed to „Command Open GGB,“ if GGB
control is enabled. 600 Vac
22
59
[R12] *1 Mains voltage L1

Relay [R12]
60
Preconfigured to Alarm class C, D, E or F
20
61
Earth
Analog output [AO 02]
(+/-10Vdc / +/-20mA / PWM) +
19
NC
62
[AO 02]
Voltage Biasing
Do not
+
18
63
Power supply connect !
Isolated, 8 to 40 Vdc *2 Analog output [AO 01]

- -
17
64
(+/-10Vdc / +/-20mA / PWM)

Auxiliary excitation D+ Speed Biasing +
16
65
[AO 01]
isolated
Engine
15
66
Common (terminals 67 to 78) GND

*1
Discrete Input [D01] isolated
[D01] +
14
67
Emergency Stop
*1 [AI 03]
[D02] -
13
68
Start in Auto
*1 Analog Input Type 1
[D03] +
12
69
Low oil pressure (0 to 2000 Ohm /

*1
[AI 02]
Discrete Input [D04] isolated 0/4 to 20mA /
[D04] -
11
70
Coolant temperature 0 to 1V)

*1
[D05] +
10
71
Alarm acknowledgement
*1 [AI 01]
[D06] -
72
Enable MCB
[D07] s1
73
Reply: MCB open

L3
[D08] s2
74
Reply: GCB open

*1
[D09] Fixed to „Reply GGB open“, if GGB Generator current s1
75
control is enabled.
*1 (isolated) L2
[D10] 1A / 5A compatible s2
76
Fixed to „Load busbar is dead“, if GGB

control is enabled.
*1
[D11] s1
77

4
Alarm input
*1
L1
[D12] Discrete Input [D12] isolated s2
78
Alarm input or Neutral Contactor
+ Mains s1
79
MPU input or Ground current (isolated) L1

- 1A / 5A compatible s2
80
1: RS485_A
1: CAN_GND CAN#3 1: CAN_GND RS485#1 2: RS485_B
terminals
terminals
Screw
Screw
2: CAN_L 2: CAN_L 3: RS485_GND

3: CAN_SHIELD 3: CAN_SHIELD 4: RS485_SHIELD
4: CAN_H CAN#1 4: CAN_H CAN#2 5: RS485_Y
6: RS485_Z
*1
Subject to technical modifications configurable via LogicsManager easYgen-3000XT Series Wiring DiagramPCB1
Fig. 17: Wiring diagram 1(2) easYgen-3400XT/3500XT-P2 (-LT)

Pin 61 Metal housing: don't use; Plastic housing
with HMI/display: Earth/ground

Installation
121
120
[R13] 600 Vac
Busbar voltage N
122
119
123
118
600 Vac
[R14] Busbar voltage L3
124
117
125
116
[R15]
126
115
easYgen3400XT / easYgen3500XT P2 Terminals 81-160
+
127
114
[R16] Analog output [AO 06]
(0/4 to 20mA)
isolated
128
113
-
129
112
+
[R17] isolated
Relay outputs (0/4 to 20mA)
130
111
-
(isolated)
131
110
Analog output [AO 04] +
[R18] isolated
(0/4 to 20mA)
132
109
-
133
108
+
[R19] isolated
(0/4 to 20mA)
134
107
-
135
106
[R20]
136
105
137
104
[R21]
138
103
Analog Input Type 3 (AI 7-10) 3
Analog input [AI 10]
139
102
(0 to 250 Ohm / 0 to 2500 Ohm)
2
[R22]
140
101
1
100
141
[D13] 3
142
99
[D14] (0 to 250 Ohm / 0 to 2500 Ohm)
143
98
[D15]
144
97
[D16]
145
96
[D17] (0 to 250 Ohm / 0 to 2500 Ohm)
Discrete inputs
146
1
95
[D18]
(isolated)
147
3
94
[D19]
148
2
93
[D20] (0 to 250 Ohm / 0 to 2500 Ohm)

149
1
92
[D21]
Analog Input Type 2 (AI 4-6) +
150
91
[D22]
151
90
[D23] (0/4 to 20mA / 0 to 10V)

-
152
89
Common (terminals 141 to 151)
+
Jumper for 20mA
153
88
Sinking output [TO2]

(isolated) Analog input [AI 05]
154
87
(0/4 to 20mA / 0 to 10V)

-
155
86
+
156
85

157
84
(0/4 to 20mA / 0 to 10V)

-
158
83
159
82
Sinking output [TO1]

(isolated)
160
81
1: RS485_A
terminals
2: RS485_B
Screw
3: RS485_GND
RS485#2 4: RS485_SHIELD
5: RS485_Y
6: RS485_Z
Subject to technical modifications easYgen-3000XT Series Wiring Diagram PCB2
Fig. 18: Wiring diagram 2(2) easYgen-3400XT/3500XT-P2 (-LT)

Installation
Fig. 19: Label/print easYgen-3400XT/3500XT-P2(-LT) wiring

1) Pin 61: Metal housing: don't use
Plastic housing with HMI/display: Earth/ground

Installation
Setup Connections > Power Supply
3.3.3 Power Supply

General notes
WARNING!
Risk of electric shock - plastic housing
– Connect Protective Earth (PE) to the unit to
avoid the risk of electric shock.
Setup the connection using screw-plug-ter‐
minal 61.
– The conductor providing the connection must
have a wire larger than or equal to 2.5 mm² (14
AWG). The connection must be performed
properly.
WARNING!
Risk of electric shock - sheet metal housing
– Connect Protective Earth (PE) to the unit to
avoid the risk of electric shock.
Use the protective earth (PE) connector
housing.
– The conductor providing the connection must
have a wire larger than or equal to 2.5 mm² (14
AWG). The cable length should be as short as
possible.
– The connection must be performed properly.
WARNING!
Permissible differential voltage
The maximum permissible differential voltage
between terminal 64 (B-) and terminal 61 (PE) is
100 VRMS. On engines where a direct connection
between battery minus and PE is not possible, it is
recommended to use an isolated external power
supply if the differential voltage between battery
minus and PE exceeds 100 VRMS.
Woodward strictly recommends to use a power

supply that is fulfilling the SELV restrictions (SELV
= separated or safety extra-low voltage, see IEC)
Woodward recommends to use one of the fol‐

lowing slow-acting protective devices in the supply
line to terminal 63:
– Fuse NEOZED D01 6A or equivalent or
– Miniature Circuit Breaker 6A / Type C
(for example: ABB type: S271C6 or equivalent)

Installation
Setup Connections > Charging Alternator
Power ON
With power ON the easYgen-3000XT device is
monitoring self preparation by some display on
screen and button illumination. HOME screen
shows the device is working.
Schematic and terminals
Fig. 20: Power supply - wiring
Terminal Description
A 61 PE (protective earth) - plastic housing ONLY
B 63 12/24Vdc (8 to 40.0 Vdc)
C 64 0 Vdc
Table 2: Power supply - terminal assignment
Characteristics
Fig. 21: Power supply - crank waveform
3.3.4 Charging Alternator

General notes
The charging alternator D+ acts as an pre-exciting
output during the engine start-up.
During regular operation, it acts as an input for
monitoring the charging voltage.

Installation
Setup Connections > Voltage Measuring > Generator Voltage
Fig. 22: Charging alternator - wiring
A 63 Battery B+ (8 to 40.0 Vdc SELV)
B 65 Auxiliary excitation (D+) output
Table 3: Charging alternator - terminal assignment
3.3.5 Voltage Measuring

General notes
Woodward recommends protecting the voltage
measuring inputs with slow-acting fuses rated for 2
to 6 A.
The wide range terminals allow several voltages.
The current voltage (range) of the application must
be "told" to the genset controller device. Settings
are described in chapter Ä Chapter 4.6 “Configure
Measurement” on page 495.
3.3.5.1 Generator Voltage

General notes
The voltage measuring inputs for 120 V, 480 V,
and 690 V are using the same terminals 30 to 36.
The current voltage range must be selected by the
corresponding settings via HMI and/or ToolKit.
Parameter 1800 Ä p. 499 ("Gen. PT secondary

rated volt.") must be configured to the correct value
to ensure proper measurement.

Installation
Fig. 23: Voltage measuring - generator - wiring
Measuring input / Phase Terminal
Generator voltage - L1 A 30
Generator voltage - L2 B 32
Generator voltage - L3 C 34
Generator voltage - N D 36
Table 4: Voltage measuring - generator - terminal assignment
3.3.5.1.1 Parameter Setting '3Ph 4W OD' (3-phase, 4-wire, Open delta)

Generator windings A generator system that is connected to the load through a 3-
phase, 4-wire connection but have the device wired for a 3-phase,
3-wire installation may have the L2 phase grounded on the secon‐
dary side. In this application the device will be configured for 3-
phase, 4-wire OD for correct power measurement.
Table 5: Generator windings - 3Ph 4W OD

Installation
Measuring inputs
Fig. 24: Measuring inputs - 3Ph 4W OD
Terminal assignment
Generator voltage - N -/-
Table 6: Generator terminal assignment 3Ph 4W OD
3.3.5.1.2 Parameter Setting '3Ph 4W' (3-phase, 4-wire)

Generator windings
Table 7: Generator windings - 3Ph 4W

Installation
Measuring inputs
Fig. 25: Measuring inputs - 3Ph 4W
Terminal assignment
Table 8: Generator terminal assignment 3Ph 4W

Generator windings

Installation
Measuring inputs
Terminal assignment
-/- -/- 36

Generator windings

Installation
Measuring inputs
Terminal assignment
B 32
The 1-phase, 2-wire measurement may be per‐

formed phase-neutral or phase-phase.
– Please note to configure and wire the easYgen
consistently.
'1Ph 2W' Phase-Neutral Measuring

Generator windings
Table 13: Generator windings - 1Ph 2W (phase neutral)

Installation
Measuring inputs
Fig. 28: Measuring inputs - 1Ph 2W (phase neutral)
Terminal assignment
Generator voltage - N B 32
C 34
D 36
Table 14: Generator terminal assignment 1Ph 2W (phase neutral)
Never configure the busbar measurement for

phase-neutral, if the other systems like mains and
generator are configured as 3ph 3W or 4ph 4W
without being the neutral in the middle of the tri‐
angle.
The phase angle for synchronization would be
incorrect.
'1Ph 2W' Phase-Phase Measuring

Generator windings
Table 15: Generator windings - 1Ph 2W (phase-phase)

Installation
Setup Connections > Voltage Measuring > Mains Voltage
Measuring inputs
Fig. 29: Measuring inputs - 1Ph 2W (phase-phase)
Terminal assignment
Generator voltage - L3 -/-
-/- -/- 34, 36
Table 16: Generator terminal assignment 1Ph 2W (phase-phase)
3.3.5.2 Mains Voltage

General notes
and 690 V are using the same terminals 22 to 28.
The current voltage range must be selected by the
corresponding settings via HMI and/or ToolKit.
Parameter 1803 Ä p. 503 ("Mains PT secondary

rated volt.") must be configured with the correct
value to ensure proper measurement.
If the easYgen is intended to be operated in par‐

allel with the mains, the mains voltage measuring
inputs must be connected.
If an external mains decoupling is performed,
jumpers between busbar and mains voltage meas‐
uring inputs may be installed.

Installation
Fig. 30: Voltage measuring - mains - wiring
Mains voltage - L1 A 22
Mains voltage - L2 B 24
Mains voltage - L3 C 26
Mains voltage - N D 28
Table 17: Voltage measuring - mains - terminal assignment

Mains windings
Table 18: Mains windings - 3Ph 4W
Measuring inputs

Installation
Terminal assignment Measuring input / Phase Terminal
Mains voltage - N D 28
Table 19: Mains terminal assignment 3Ph 4W

Mains windings
Measuring inputs
-/- -/- 28

Installation

Mains windings
Measuring inputs
Mains voltage - N B 24
D 28

consistently.

Installation

Mains windings
Table 24: Mains windings - 1Ph 2W (phase neutral)
Measuring inputs
Fig. 34: Measuring inputs - 1Ph 2W (phase neutral)
Mains voltage - N B 24
C 26
D 28
Table 25: Mains terminal assignment 1Ph 2W phase neutral

Installation
Setup Connections > Voltage Measuring > Busbar Voltage

Mains windings
Table 26: Mains windings - 1Ph 2W (phase-phase)
Measuring inputs
Mains voltage - L3 -/- -/-
-/- -/- 26, 28
Table 27: Mains terminal assignment 1Ph 2W phase-phase
3.3.5.3 Busbar Voltage

General notes
The busbar voltage measuring of the
easYgen-3400XT/3500XT-P2 provides both a gen‐
eral 1-phase measurement and a 3-phase meas‐
urement. Please have in mind that the 3-phase
measurement needs other terminals located on
another plug! Furthermore the arrangement of L1,
L2, L3 and N is re-arranged. Please read carefully
the wiring diagram.

Installation

and 690 V are using the same terminals 37 to 40
and 117 to 120. The current voltage range must be
selected by the corresponding settings via HMI
and/or ToolKit.
Parameter 1812 Ä p. 501 ("Busb1 PT secondary
rated volt.") must be configured to the correct value
to ensure proper measurement.
The busbar parameters in the device are often

named with the affix "1". This preparation is done
to avoid confusion e.g., if a model with a second
busbar measurement is introduced.
Fig. 36: Voltage measuring - busbar - wiring overview/examples
Busbar voltage - L1 A 38
Busbar voltage - L2 B 40
Busbar voltage - L3 C 118
Busbar voltage - N D 120
Table 28: Voltage measuring - busbar - terminal assignment

Installation

Busbar windings
Table 29: Busbar windings - 3Ph 4W
Measuring inputs
Fig. 37: Voltage measuring - busbar - wiring
Busbar voltage - N D 120
Table 30: Busbar terminal assignment 3Ph 4W

Installation

Busbar windings
Measuring inputs
-/- D 120

Installation

Busbar windings
Measuring inputs
Busbar voltage - N B 40
D 120

consistently.

Installation

Busbar windings
Table 35: Busbar windings - 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral)
Measuring inputs
Fig. 40: Measuring inputs - 1Ph 2W (phase-neutral)
Busbar voltage - N B 40
C 118
D 120
Table 36: Busbar terminal assignment 1Ph 2W phase-neutral
Do not forget to connect terminals B ,C, and D!

This is different to all easYgen-3000XT-P1 and the
former easYgen-3000 series.

Installation
Setup Connections > Current Measuring > Generator Current

Busbar windings
Table 37: Busbar windings - 1Ph 2W (phase-phase)
Measuring inputs
-/- C 118
D 120
Table 38: Busbar terminal assignment 1Ph 2W phase-phase
3.3.6 Current Measuring

3.3.6.1 Generator Current
General notes
WARNING!
Dangerous voltages due to missing load
– Before disconnecting the device, ensure that
the current transformer (CT) is short-circuited.

Installation
The current measuring inputs for 1 A and 5 A are

using the same terminals 3 to 8. The current range
must be selected by the corresponding settings via
HMI and/or ToolKit.
Generally, one line of the current transformers sec‐

ondary must be grounded close to the CT.
CAUTION!
External current transformers shall provide insula‐
tion adequate to system voltage to which unit is
connected.
Fig. 42: Current measuring - generator - wiring
A 8 Generator current - L3 - transformer terminal s1

(k)
B 7 Generator current - L3 - transformer terminal s2

(l)
C 6 Generator current - L2 - transformer terminal s1

(k)
D 5 Generator current - L2 - transformer terminal s2

(l)
E 4 Generator current - L1 - transformer terminal s1

(k)
F 3 Generator current - L1 - transformer terminal s2

(l)
Table 39: Current measuring - generator - terminal assignment

Installation
3.3.6.1.1 Parameter Setting 'L1 L2 L3'

Wiring terminals
F E D C B A
L1 L2 L3
Terminal 3 4 5 6 7 8
Phase s2 (l) L1 s1 (k) s2 (l) L2 s1 (k) s2 (l) L3 s1 (k)

L1 L2 L3
Fig. 43: Current measuring - gener‐
ator, L1 L2 L3 Phase L1 and L3
Phase s2 (l) L1 s1 (k) — — s2 (l) L3 s1 (k)

L1 L3
"Phase L1 and L3" applies if the generator voltage

measurement is configured to 1Ph 3W ( Ä Chapter
3.3.5.1 “Generator Voltage” on page 58).
3.3.6.1.2 Parameter Setting 'Phase L1' 'Phase L2' 'Phase L3'

Fig. 44: Current measuring - generator, 'Phase L1' 'Phase L2' 'Phase L3'
Wiring terminals
F E D C B A
Phase L1
Phase s2 (l) L1 s1 (k) — — — —

L1
Phase L2
Phase — — s2 (l) L2 s1 (k) — —

L2
Phase L3
Phase — — — — s2 (l) L3 s1 (k)

L3

Installation
Setup Connections > Current Measuring > Mains Current
3.3.6.2 Mains Current

General notes
WARNING!

HMI and/or ToolKit.

Fig. 45: Current measuring - mains - wiring
A 2 Mains current - transformer terminal s1 (k)
B 1 Mains current - transformer terminal s2 (l)
Table 40: Current measuring - mains - terminal assignment
3.3.6.2.1 Parameter Setting 'Phase L1' 'Phase L2' 'Phase L3'

Fig. 46: Current measuring - mains, 'Phase L1' 'Phase L2' 'Phase L3'

Installation
Setup Connections > Current Measuring > Ground Current
Wiring terminals
B A
Phase L1
Terminal 1 2
Phase s2 (l) - L1 s1 (k) - L1
Phase L2
Terminal 1 2
Phase s2 (l) - L2 s1 (k) - L2
Phase L3
Terminal 1 2
Phase s2 (l) - L3 s1 (k) - L3
3.3.6.3 Ground Current

General notes
WARNING!

HMI and/or ToolKit.
The mains current input can be configured to

measure the mains current or ground current. The
parameter 'Mains current input' determines, if this
input will measure the mains current (default) or
the ground current.


Installation
Setup Connections > Power Measuring
Fig. 47: Current measuring - ground current - wiring
A 2 Ground current - transformer terminal s1 (k)
B 1 Ground current - transformer terminal s2 (l)
Table 41: Current measuring - ground current - terminal assign‐

ment
3.3.7 Power Measuring

If the unit's current transformers are wired according to the diagram
(Fig. 48), the following values are displayed.
A 1 Mains or ground current
B 2
C 3 5 7 Generator current
D 4 6 8
Fig. 48: Power measuring - wiring
Parameter Description Sign displayed
Generator real power Genset generating kW + Positive
Generator real power Genset in reverse power - Negative

Installation
Setup Connections > Power Factor Definition
Parameter Description Sign displayed
Generator power factor Inductive / lagging + Positive

(cos φ)
Generator power factor Capacitive / leading - Negative

(cos φ)
Mains real power Plant exporting kW + + Positive
Mains real power Plant importing kW - - Negative
Mains power factor Inductive / lagging + Positive

(cos φ)
Mains power factor Capacitive / leading - Negative

(cos φ)
Measuring 3PH 3W
The values of single active power, reactive power,
and power factor in L1, L2 and L3 are not dis‐
played. This values can not be determined through
this connection type.
3.3.8 Power Factor Definition

Definition Power Factor is defined as a ratio of the real power to apparent
power. In a purely resistive circuit, the voltage and current wave‐
forms are instep resulting in a ratio or power factor of 1.00 (often
referred to as unity).
In an inductive circuit the current lags behind the voltage waveform
resulting in usable power (real power) and unusable power (reac‐
tive power). This results in a positive ratio or lagging power factor
(i.e. 0.85lagging).
In a capacitive circuit the current waveform leads the voltage wave‐
form resulting in usable power (real power) and unusable power
(reactive power). This results in a negative ratio or a leading power
factor (i.e. 0.85leading).
Properties
Inductive Capacitive
Load type Electrical load whose current waveform lags the Electrical load whose current waveform leads the
voltage waveform thus having a lagging power voltage waveform thus having a leading power
factor. Some inductive loads such as electric motors factor. Some capacitive loads such as capacitor
have a large startup current requirement resulting in banks or buried cable result in leading power fac‐
lagging power factors. tors.
Different power factor i0.91 (inductive) c0.93 (capacitive)

display on the unit
lg.91 (lagging) ld.93 (leading)
Reactive power display 70 kvar (positive) -60 kvar (negative)

on the unit
Output of the interface + (positive) - (negative)
Current relation to Lagging Leading

voltage
Generator state Overexcited Underexcited

Installation
Setup Connections > Magnetic Pickup Unit (MPU)
Control signal If the control unit is equipped with a power factor controller while in parallel with the utility:
A voltage lower "-" signal is output as long as the A voltage raise "+" signal is output as long as the
measured value is "more inductive" than the refer‐ measured value is "more capacitive" than the refer‐
ence setpoint ence setpoint
Example: measured = i0.91; setpoint = i0.95 Example: measured = c0.91; setpoint = c0.95
Phasor diagram
The phasor diagram is used from the generator's
view.
Diagram
3.3.9 Magnetic Pickup Unit (MPU)

General notes
The shield of the MPU (Magnetic Pickup Unit) con‐
nection cable must be connected to a single point
ground terminal near the easYgen.
The shield must not be connected at the MPU side
of the cable.
The number of teeth on the flywheel reference

gear and the flywheel speed must be configured so
that the magnetic pickup input frequency does not
exceed 14 kHz.

Installation
Setup Connections > Magnetic Pickup Unit (MPU)
Overview
Fig. 49: MPU - overview
Fig. 50: MPU - input
A 79 MPU input - inductive/switching
B 80 MPU input - GND
Characteristic
Fig. 51: MPU - characteristic
Fig. 51 shows the minimal necessary input voltage

depending on frequency. It is recommended to
ensure input voltage greater than minimal neces‐
sary with a margin of 2 to 3 V (especially at high
ambient temperature above +50 °C).

Installation
Setup Connections > Discrete Inputs
3.3.10 Discrete Inputs

General notes
WARNING!
Hazards due to improper implementation of emer‐
gency stop
Discrete input [DI 01] "Emergency Stop" is only a
signaling input. This input may only be used to
signal that an external emergency stop button has
been actuated.
According to EN 60204, this input is not approved
to be used as the emergency stop function.
– The emergency stop function must be imple‐
mented external to the control and cannot rely
on the control to function properly.
The discrete inputs are electrically isolated which

permits the polarity of the connections to be either
positive or negative.
– All discrete inputs must use the same polarity,
either positive or negative signals, due to the
common ground.
Schematic and terminal assignment
Fig. 52: Discrete input - positive polarity signal
Fig. 53: Discrete input - negative polarity signal
A B
66 67 Discrete Input [DI 01] Preconfigured to "Emergency stop"1

GND 68 Discrete Input [DI 02] Preconfigured to "Start in AUTO"1
Common ground
69 Discrete Input [DI 03] Preconfigured to "Low oil pressure"1
70 Discrete Input [DI 04] Preconfigured to "Coolant temperature"1
71 Discrete Input [DI 05] Preconfigured to "Alarm acknowledge"1
72 Discrete Input [DI 06] Preconfigured to "Enable MCB"1
73 Discrete Input [DI 07] Fixed to "Reply: MCB open"
74 Discrete Input [DI 08] Fixed to "Reply: GCB open"
75 Discrete Input [DI 09] LogicsManager1

Installation
Setup Connections > Discrete Inputs
A B

Preconfigured to "Alarm input or Neutral
Contactor"1
Table 42: DI 01-12
A B
152 141 Discrete Input [DI 13] LogicsManager1

GND 142 Discrete Input [DI 14] LogicsManager1
Common ground
Table 43: DI 13-23
1 configurable via LogicsManager
Operation logic Discrete inputs may be configured to normally open (N.O.) or nor‐
mally closed (N.C.) states.
Fig. 54: Discrete inputs - state N.O.

In the state N.O., no potential is present during normal operation; if
an alarm is issued or control operation is performed, the input is
energized.
Fig. 55: Discrete inputs - state N.C.

In the state N.C., a potential is continuously present during normal
operation; if an alarm is issued or control operation is performed,
the input is de-energized.

Installation
Setup Connections > Relay Outputs (LogicsManag...
The N.O. or N.C. contacts may be connected to the signal terminal

as well as to the ground terminal of the discrete input ( Ä “Sche‐
matic and terminal assignment” on page 85).#
3.3.11 Relay Outputs (LogicsManager)

General notes
CAUTION!
The relay output "Ready for operation" must be
stopped if this relay output is de-energize.
– We recommend to signal this fault independ‐
ently from the unit if the availability of the plant
is important.
For information on interference suppressing cir‐

cuits when connecting 24 V relays, please refer to
Ä Chapter 3.3.11.1 “Connecting 24 V Relays”
on page 89.
Fig. 56: Relay outputs - schematic
N.O. Common
A B Form A
PCB 1 identical for all easYgen-3000XT:
42 41 Relay output [R 01] All Fixed to "Ready for operation"1
43 46 Relay output [R 02] All Preconfigured to "Centralized alarm"1
44 Relay output [R 03] All Preconfigured to "Starter"1
45 Relay output [R 04] All Preconfigured to "Fuel solenoid / gas valve"1
48 47 Relay output [R 05] All Preconfigured to "Preglow"1
50 49 Relay output [R 06] LogicsManager1
to Fixed to "Command: close GCB"1
52 51 Relay output [R 07] Preconfigured to "Mains decoupling"1
to Fixed to "Command: open GCB"1
54 53 Relay output [R 08] LogicsManager1

Installation
Setup Connections > Relay Outputs (LogicsManag...
N.O. Common
A B Form A
Fixed to "Command: close MCB"1
56 55 Relay output [R 09] Preconfigured to "Mains decoupling"1
Fixed to "Command: open MCB"1
57 60 Relay output [R 10] Preconfigured to "Auxiliary services"1
Fixed to "Command: close GGB"1
58 Relay output [R 11] Preconfigured to "Alarm class A and B"1
Fixed to "Command: open GGB"1
59 Relay output [R 12] All Preconfigured to "Alarm class C, D, E or F"1
PCB 2 only:
121 122 Relay output [R 12] All Configurable via LogicsManager
1 configurable via LogicsManager

Installation
Setup Connections > Relay Outputs (LogicsManag... > Connecting 24 V Relays
Notes
– LogicsManager: Using the function LogicsMan‐
ager it is possible to freely program the relays
for all application modes.
– : no breaker mode;
: GCB open
: GCB
: GCB/MCB
: GCB/GGB
: GCB/GGB/MCB
: GCB/LS5
: GCB/L-MCB
: GCB/GGB/L-MCB
: GCB/L-GGB
: GCB/L-GGB/L-MCB
– N.O.: normally open (make) contact
3.3.11.1 Connecting 24 V Relays
NOTICE!
Damage to adjacent electronic components due to
induced voltages
– Implement protection circuits as detailed
below.
Interferences in the interaction of all components may affect the

function of electronic devices. One interference factor is disabling
inductive loads, like coils of electromagnetic switching devices.
When disabling such a device, high switch-off induced voltages
may occur, which might destroy adjacent electronic devices or
result interference voltage pulses, which lead to functional faults,
by capacitive coupling mechanisms.
Since an interference-free switch-off is not possible without addi‐
tional equipment, the relay coil is connected with an interference
suppressing circuit.
If 24 V (coupling) relays are used in an application, it is required to
connect a protection circuit to avoid interferences.
Fig. 57 shows the exemplary connection of a diode

as an interference suppressing circuit.
Fig. 57: Protection circuit (example)

Installation
Setup Connections > Connecting 24 V Relays
Advantages and disadvantages of different interference sup‐

pressing circuits are as follows:
Connection diagram Load current / voltage curve Advantages Disadvantages
Uncritical dimensioning High release delay

Lowest possible induced
voltage
Very simple and reliable
Uncritical dimensioning No attenuation below VVDR

High energy absorption
Very simple setup
Suitable for AC voltage
Reverse polarity protected
HF attenuation by energy Exact dimensioning required

storage
Immediate shut-off limiting
Attenuation below limiting
voltage
Very suitable for AC voltage
3.3.12 Connecting 24 V Relays
NOTICE!
Damage to adjacent electronic components due to
induced voltages
– Implement protection circuits as detailed
below.

Installation
Setup Connections > Analog Inputs
Interferences in the interaction of all components may affect the

function of electronic devices. One interference factor is disabling
inductive loads, like coils of electromagnetic switching devices.
When disabling such a device, high switch-off induced voltages
may occur, which might destroy adjacent electronic devices or
result interference voltage pulses, which lead to functional faults,
by capacitive coupling mechanisms.
Since an interference-free switch-off is not possible without addi‐
tional equipment, the relay coil is connected with an interference
suppressing circuit.
If 24 V (coupling) relays are used in an application, it is required to
connect a protection circuit to avoid interferences.
Fig. 57 shows the exemplary connection of a diode

as an interference suppressing circuit.
Fig. 58: Protection circuit (example)
Advantages and disadvantages of different interference sup‐

pressing circuits are as follows:
Connection diagram Load current / voltage curve Advantages Disadvantages
Uncritical dimensioning High release delay

Lowest possible induced
voltage
Very simple and reliable
Uncritical dimensioning No attenuation below VVDR

High energy absorption
Very simple setup
Suitable for AC voltage
HF attenuation by energy Exact dimensioning required

storage
Immediate shut-off limiting
Attenuation below limiting
voltage
Very suitable for AC voltage
3.3.13 Analog Inputs

The easYgen offers Analog Inputs for different applications and
measuring standards such as current, voltage or resistance:
n AI01-AI03 0 to 2000 Ohm | 0/4 to 20 mA | 0 to 1 V
n AI04-AI06 0 to 10 V | 0/4 to 20 mA
n AI07-AI10 0 to 250/2500 Ohm

Installation
Setup Connections > Analog Inputs > Analog Inputs (0 to 2000 O...
3.3.13.1 Analog Inputs (0 to 2000 Ohm | 0/4 to 20 mA | 0 to 1 V)

It is recommended to use two-pole analog senders for best pos‐
sible accuracy.
Connect the resistive analog input's return wires

(GND) always to Engine Ground (terminal 15) and
as close to the easYgen terminals as possible.
For two pole senders of 0/4 to 20 mA or 0 to 1 V
sensors Engine Ground is no "must have".
The following curves may be used for the analog inputs:

n Table A
n Table B
n Linear
n Pt100
n Pt1000
n AB 94099
n VDO 120° C
n VDO 150° C
n VDO 10 bar
n VDO 5 bar
The 9 setpoints of the free configurable Tables A and B can be
selected for Type definition (parameters 1000, 1050, and 1100).
A catalog of all available VDO sensors is available

for download at the VDO homepage
(http://www.vdo.com)
Wiring senders
Fig. 59: Analog inputs - wiring senders
AI0 A 10 Analog input [AI 01 +]

1
B 9 Analog input [AI 01 -] ground, connect with Engine ground ter‐
minal 15

Installation
Setup Connections > Analog Inputs > Analog Inputs (0/4 to 20 ...

2
B 11 Analog input [AI 02 -]

3
B 13 Analog input [AI 03 -] ground, connect with Engine ground ter‐
minal 15
CAUTION!
Mixed senders
When both types resistive sender and single pole
sender are connected to the device, connection
from minus (pins 9, 11, 13) should be made with
short wire to the Engine Ground (pin 15) on input
connector.
Wiring single and two-pole senders It is possible to combine single- and two-pole senders but with the
simultaneously lower accuracy.
3.3.13.2 Analog Inputs (0/4 to 20 mA | 0 to 10 V)

It is recommended to use two-pole analog senders for best pos‐
sible accuracy (see Ä Chapter 8.3 “Accuracy” on page 753 for
details).
Connect the return wires (GND) to PE on the

housing (terminal 61; depends on version) or
engine ground (terminal 16; for single-pole
senders) as close to the terminals as possible.
The following curves may be used for the analog inputs AI 04-AI
06:
n Table B
n Table A
n Linear
selected for Type definition (parameters 4310, 4321, and 4332).
A 83 Analog input [AI 04]: -
B 84 Analog input [AI 04]: jumper for current measurement
C 85 Analog input [AI 04]: +

Installation
Setup Connections > Analog Inputs > Analog Inputs (0/4 to 20 ...
Wiring two-pole senders
Fig. 60: Wiring two-pole senders for mA input
Fig. 61: Wiring two-pole senders for V input
Wiring single-pole senders
Fig. 62: Wiring single pole senders for mA and/or V input

The specified accuracy for single-pole sensors can only be ach‐
ieved if the differential voltage between the genset chassis ground
and PE does not exceed ± 2.5 V.

Installation
Setup Connections > Analog Inputs > Analog Inputs (0 to 250 Oh...
Wiring single-pole and two-pole

senders simultaneously
Fig. 63: Wiring two-pole senders for mA (1x) and/or V (2x) input
It is possible to combine single- and two-pole senders but with the
lower accuracy. The specified accuracy for single-pole sensors can
only be achieved if the differential voltage between the genset
chassis ground and PE does not exceed ± 2.5 V.
3.3.13.3 Analog Inputs (0 to 250 Ohms | 0 to 2500 Ohms)

These analog inputs AI 07-AI 10 are designed for resistive senders
(RTDs) and can be connected in two or three wire technique.
The resistive senders must be isolated to provide a

correct measurement.
The following curves may be used for the analog inputs:

n AB 94099
n Table B
n Table A
n Linear
n Pt1000
n Pt100
n VDO 120° C
n VDO 150° C
n VDO 10 bar
n VDO 5 bar
selected for Type definition (parameters 4343, 4354, 4365, and
4376).

Installation
Setup Connections > Analog Outputs
A catalog of all available VDO sensors is available

for download at the VDO homepage
(http://www.vdo.com)
A 92 Analog input [AI 07, 1]
B 93 Analog input [AI 07, 2]: to compensate voltage drop over long wires
C 94 Analog input [AI 07, 3]
C 100 Analog input [AI 09,3]
Three wire connection

The idea of the three wire connection is to subject the voltage drop
over the wires leading to the sender. The principle is based on the
assumption that the three wires have the same length and diam‐
Fig. 64: Wiring three wire connection eter. The easYgen subjects the voltage drop over the wiring with
the connection C (see figure Fig. 64). This connection type makes
sense, when the wire resistor is near to the resistive measurement
delta (i.e. Pt100).
Two wire connection

The two wire connection is used when the voltage drop over the
wiring does not have much impact on the measurement signal (i.e.
Pt1000). A bridge is executed directly on terminals B, C.
Fig. 65: Wiring two-wire connection
3.3.14 Analog Outputs

The easYgen offers current, voltage or PWM analog outputs for dif‐
ferent applications. Most commonly they are used for speed and
voltage biasing.
Controller configuration can change the multifunction controller
bias output signals. The analog outputs are galvanically isolated.

Installation
Setup Connections > Analog Outputs > Analog Outputs 3 to 6 (0/...
3.3.14.1 Analog Outputs (±20 mA, ± 10 V, PWM)

Controller wiring - two wires
CAUTION!
Connecting external power sources to the analog
Fig. 66: Analog controller output - two outputs may damage the device.
wires
In case that higher permanent insulation voltages

are required than described in the technical data,
please install isolation equipment (isolation ampli‐
fier) for proper and safe operation.
Type Terminal Description
I A 16 + Analog output
[AO 01]
Current B 17 GND
or
V*
Voltage
(Don't connect terminal 18!)
I A 19 + Analog output
[AO 02]
Current B 20 GND
or
V*
Voltage
*) Internal shunt (resistor) is managed automati‐

cally.
3.3.14.2 Analog Outputs 3 to 6 (0/4 to 20 mA)

Controller wiring
0 to 20 mA A 107 - Analog output

[AO 03]
Fig. 67: Analog controller output 4 to 6 or B 108 +
- wiring 4 to 20 mA

[AO 04]
or B 110 +
4 to 20 mA

[AO 05]
or B 112 +
4 to 20 mA

Installation
Setup Connections > Transistor Outputs

[AO 06]
or B 114 +
4 to 20 mA
This analog outputs can be used for 0..10 V output

by connecting an external 500 Ohms shunt
resistor.
3.3.15 Transistor Outputs

The transistor outputs can be used for driving counter pulses like
kWh or kvarh.
NOTICE!
Woodward recommends protecting the transistor
outputs against excessive current with slow-acting
fuses rated for 0.5 A to 1 A.
CAUTION!
Overload will damage the (output) electronics! The
max. valid load is 300 mA.
Controller wiring
Fig. 68: Transistor output - wiring
Sinking Output SO1 A 82 Sinking Output

(isolated) ON: max. 300 mA
B 81 GND Emitter (open collector)
Sinking Output SO2 A 154 Sinking Output

(isolated) ON: max. 300 mA
B 153 GND Emitter (open collector)
Transistor outputs can be used e.g. for counters (counter pulses).

Refer to Ä Chapter 4.10.3 “ Counter Pulses and Transistor Output”
on page 566 for more details.

Installation
Setup Interfaces > Interfaces overview
3.4 Setup Interfaces
NOTICE!
3.4.1 Interfaces overview
Unshielded cable length

For CAN and RS-485:
– Cabling without shield coverage should be less
than 25 mm.
The following drawing shows all available interfaces of the device:

Installation
Setup Interfaces > RS-485 Interface

3.4.2 RS-485 Interface

General notes
The easYgen must be configured for half- or full-
duplex configuration.
Pin assignment For location of interface 6 see Ä Chapter 3.4.1 “Interfaces over‐
view” on page 99.
Ter‐ Descrip‐ .. used for FULL ... used for HALF Amax
minal tion duplex mode duplex mode
1 A A (RxD+) 1.5 mm2
2 B B (RxD-) 1.5 mm2
3 GND GND - local galvanically isolated 1.5 mm2
4 SHLD Shield connected to earth via RC element 1.5 mm2
5 Y Y (TxD+) Y (TxD+ / RxD+) 1.5 mm2
6 Z Z (TxD-) Z (TxD- / RxD-) 1.5 mm2
Table 44: Pin assignment
Fig. 71: screwable 6-terminal con‐

nector - RS-485

Installation
Setup Interfaces > USB (2.0 slave) interface ...
RS-485 half-duplex
Fig. 72: RS-485 - connection for half-duplex operation (120 Ohms

termination resistor at both ends)
RS-485 full-duplex
Fig. 73: RS-485 - connection for full-duplex operation
Shielding easYgen-3000XT is prepared for shielding: Terminal 4 and the

connector housing are internally grounded via an RC element.
Therefore, they may either be grounded directly (recommended) or
also via an RC element on the opposite connection.
Fig. 74: Shielding preparation (internal RC element)
3.4.3 USB (2.0 slave) interface - Service Port

General notes
Avoid electrostatic discharge during USB cable
connection to the unit.

Installation
Setup Interfaces > CAN Bus Interfaces
To connect this USB 2.0 (slave) device a USB

cable with USB Type A (PC/laptop side) and Type
B (Woodward device side) connectors is neces‐
sary.
USB cable length shall be limited up to 3 m. It is
recommended to use professional (high quality)
USB cable: 28AWG/1P+24AWG/2C with good
shielding.
Use USB service port for ToolKit connection

The USB interface is a service port and the pre‐
ferred ToolKit connection!
'Read only' USB interface For location see Ä Chapter 3.4.1 “Interfaces overview” on page 99.
For others than ToolKit connection the USB interface is read-only!
It can be used for further service tasks from manufacturer's side.
Connecting it to a PC/laptop will display the USB interface avail‐
able and all files prepared from Woodward manufacturing side.
Read/write attributes of this service port are restricted to read only.
3.4.4 CAN Bus Interfaces

Avoid electrostatic discharge during cable connec‐
tion to the unit.
Pin assignment For location of interface 5, 7, and 8 see Ä Chapter 3.4.1 “Inter‐
faces overview” on page 99.
Terminal Description Amax
1 GND - local galvanically 1.5 mm2

isolated
2 CAN-L 1.5 mm2
3 Shield 1.5 mm2
4 CAN-H 1.5 mm2
5 Not connected 1.5 mm2
6 Not connected 1.5 mm2
Fig. 75: screwable 6-terminal con‐

nector - CAN bus

Installation
Setup Interfaces > CAN Bus Interfaces
Topology
Please note that the CAN bus must be terminated
with a resistor, which corresponds to the impe‐
dance of the cable (e.g. 120 Ω, 1/4 W) at both
ends.
The termination resistor is connected between
CAN-H and CAN-L.
Fig. 76: CAN bus - termination

For very critical EMC conditions (many noise sources with high
noise levels) and for high transmission rates we recommend to use
the 'Split termination concept' as shown.
n Divide the termination resistance into 2x60 Ohms with a center
tap connected to ground via a capacitor of 10 to 100 nF.
Maximum CAN bus length The maximum length of the communication bus wiring is
dependent on the configured baud rate. Observe the maximum bus
length.
(Source: CANopen; Holger Zeltwanger (Hrsg.); 2001 VDE
VERLAG GMBH, Berlin und Offenbach; ISBN 3-8007-2448-0).
Baud rate Max. length
1000 kbit/s 25 m
800 kbit/s 50 m
500 kbit/s 100 m
250 kbit/s 250 m
125 kbit/s 500 m
50 kbit/s 1000 m
20 kbit/s 2500 m
Bus shielding All bus connections of the easYgen are internally grounded via an
RC element. Therefore, they may either be grounded directly (rec‐
ommended) or also via an RC element on the opposite bus con‐
nection.
A shielded cable with shielded plug is required.

Installation
Setup Interfaces > Ethernet Interface (incl. ...
Fig. 77: Bus shielding (internal RC element)
Troubleshooting
If there is no data transmission on the CAN bus,
check for the following common CAN bus commu‐
nication problems:
– A T-structure bus is utilized
– CAN-L and CAN-H are switched
– Not all devices on the bus are using identical
baud rates
– Termination resistor(s) are missing
– The configured baud rate is too high for wiring
length
– The CAN bus cable is routed in close proximity
with power cables
Woodward recommends the use of shielded,

twisted-pair cables for the CAN bus (see exam‐
ples).
– Lappkabel Unitronic Bus CAN UL/CSA
– UNITRONIC-Bus LD 2×2×0.22
3.4.5 Ethernet Interface (incl. Remote Panel)

This Ethernet interface 10/100Base-T/-XT complies with the IEEE
802.3 specifications.

Avoid electrostatic discharge during Ethernet cable
connection to the unit.
Pin assignment For location of interfaces 10, 11, and 12 see Ä Chapter 3.4.1
“Interfaces overview” on page 99.

Installation
Pin Description 10Base-T 100Base-T
1 Transmit Data+ TX+ TX+
2 Transmit Data- TX- TX-
3 Receive Data+ RX+ RX+
4 Not connected NC NC
6 Receive Data- RX- RX-
Fig. 78: RJ-45 connector - Ethernet 8 Not connected NC NC
Notes
NC: Not connected
Visualization Two LEDs (green and yellow) indicate communication status as

well known by the standard.
n The green LED indicates the link activity: blinking during data
transmission.
n The yellow LED indicates the link (speed) status:
– 10MB – LED switched-OFF
– 100MB – LED switched-ON
General notes Ethernet category 5 (STP CAT 5) shielded cable is required with
shielded plug RJ45. The chosen switch shall support a transmis‐
sion speed of 10/100 Mb/s with a network segment expansion
capability of 100 m.
Flexibility
All Ethernet ports have auto MDI/MDI-X function‐
ality what allows to connect straight-through or
crossover Ethernet cable.
The Ethernet ports are named twice but mean the
same: Ethernet #1 or Ethernet A; Ethernet #2 or B;
and Ethernet #3 or C .
Cable length / distance The maximum length from connection to connection is 100 m.
Some third party suppliers offer technology to expand the connec‐
tion.

Installation
Topology
Fig. 79: Application Example: Simple constellation with

easYgen-3000XT and RP-3000XT
Remote Control
The Woodward Remote Control is able to visualize
the display of the remotely controlled device and to
make front button and soft key related functionality
available.
Access via Remote Panel PR-3000XT is described
in chapter and the Technical Manual “37593
RP-3000XT” .
Fig. 80: Application Example: Multiple Generator operation with a

ToolKit access point (A)

Installation
Fig. 81: Application Example: Multiple Generator operation with a

ToolKit access point (B)
Troubleshooting Check first the power supply of the switches.

Check the IP addressed of the single devices. See chapter
Ä Chapter 4.7.5 “Ethernet Interfaces” on page 539 for details.

Installation

Configuration
4 Configuration
Parameter Numbers All parameters are assigned a unique parameter identification
number.
The parameter identification number may be used to reference
individual parameters listed in this manual.
This parameter identification number

– is also displayed in the ToolKit configuration
screens next to the respective parameter
– can be used with ToolKit "search" functionality
– to find all ToolKit screen this parameter
appears
– to directly jump to the preferred ToolKit
screen
Values of variables and parameters This device is working with variables and values in FLOAT format.
This allows to handle values by number and exponent.
There is a need to convert FLOAT to INTEGER (32 bit) for
common Data Protocols, communication with some PLCs, and for
some display restrictions.
Rounding error
Numbers higher than 8388608 come with an
rounding error of 0.005% of the number itself.
Displayed restrictions sample Values of user defined tables (“Parameter è Configuration

è Configure Application è Configure inputs/outputs
è Configure analog inputs è General analog inputs
è User defined table A/B”) have an input range from
-900000.000 to 900000.000.
Type 12345.678 and ...
n ToolKit display will immediately change to 12345.680 for
rounding error
n HMI/display shows 12345.678
n ... independent from where value is typed in (ToolKit or HMI/
display)
Handle value and unit separately Some parameters have a separate definition of value and unit. This
flexibility comes with the need to take additional care for factorized
units like "k..., M..., m..., µ..." multiplying or dividing the number of
the value.
Values and units must fit

Device and software offer a very flexible handling
of values with well defined selectable rules. It is on
customers responsibility to combine what fits.
From device side it is neither restricted nor con‐
trolled to use values in a wrong way.

Configuration
Values and units V, kV, and %

FLOAT, INTEGER
Unit defined and definable
Configuration and Re-Booting

Wait before re-booting
Changing configuration/parameters becomes
effective immediately. To be sure that the changes
have been saved internally in the device needs
max. 20 seconds.
Menu structure (menu tree) The menu structure of HMI/display and ToolKit is aligned.
Exceptions
– The well introduced HMI/display softbutton
[Next Page] is continued but in ToolKit named
[STATUS MENU].
(In ToolKit [Next Page] is used to go to the next
page.)
– Some monitoring parameters in HMI/display
are in ToolKit placed directly with it's settings
e.g.: find 10341 [Freq. dep. derating of power]
at
“Next page è Setpoints è Derating” in HMI/
display but
“PARAMETER
è Configure: Configure application
è Configure controller: Load control
è General load control” in ToolKit
– [Sequencing] in HMI/display comes with a sep‐
arate softbutton - ToolKit offers the information
together with others as part of the
[States easYgen/Sequencing] screen.
The following drawing shows the first three (mayor) levels of

easYgen-3400XT-P1/3500XT-P1 menu structure:

Configuration
Fig. 82: Menu structure (menu tree) easYgen-3400XT/3500XT-P2

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Basic Navigation
4.1 Front Panel Access
The following chapters only apply to model with

front panel and display.
Front Panel / HMI / display Please see chapter for detailed description of the front panel with
display and buttons.
Buttons can be disabled by ToolKit with parameter

12978 Ä p. 163/Ä p. 1038 “Lock keypad” .
4.1.1 Basic Navigation

Main screen After power-up the control unit displays the main screen / HOME
screen (Fig. 83).
The main screen can be divided into the following basic sections:
Fig. 83: Main screen

1 Values
2 Status Messages
3 Alarm Messages
4 Single Line Diagram
5 Current Softkey Functions
Values [1] The "values" section (Fig. 83/1) of the screen illustrates all meas‐
ured power related information including voltages, currents, fre‐
quencies, power, and power factor values.

Configuration
If the mains data display is disabled, the main

screen will only show generator data with bigger
digits.
The section's content changes based on the

selected sub-menu screen.
For information on specialized menu screens refer
to Ä Chapter 4.1.5 “Specialized Menu Screens”
on page 121
Status messages [2] The "status message" section (Fig. 83/2) of the screen shows the
actual operating information.
For a list of all operation states refer to Ä Chapter

9.5.3 “Status Messages” on page 1079.
Alarm messages [3] The "alarm message" section (Fig. 83/3) of the screen shows the
last alarm message that is occurred and not yet acknowledged.
For a list of all alarm messages refer to Ä Chapter

9.5.4.2 “Alarm Messages” on page 1084.
Single line diagram [4] The single line diagram (Fig. 83/4) shows the current status of the
engine and power circuit breakers.
This section is also used for manual operation of

the genset.
For additional information refer to Ä Chapter 5.2.2
“Operating Mode MANUAL” on page 572.
Softkeys [5] The softkeys (Fig. 83/5) permit navigation between screens, levels
and functions as well as configuration and operation.
Group Softkey Caption Description
Display Display Mode Next step to display all measured (delta/wye) voltages one after
the other.
Customer configurable screen Change to "customer specific screen 1 (or 2)"

1 (and 2)
Notes
The name of this softbuttons is configurable, too.

Configuration
Group Softkey Caption Description
CAN 1 Change to "CAN interface 1 state" screen.
CAN 2 Change to "CAN interface 2 state" screen.
Ext. I/O Change to external discrete I/Os screen.
Int. I/O Change to internal discrete I/Os screen.
Reset Value Display Reset the maximum value display.

Reset Maintenance Reset the maintenance counter.
Operation Increase Value Increase selected value.
Decrease Value Decrease selected value.
Confirm Input Confirm and store changed value.
Acknowledge Message Acknowledge/Delete message/event.
Open Breaker Open mains/generator breaker (MANUAL mode).
Close Breaker Close mains/generator breaker (MANUAL mode).
Code req. Request a blink code for one error message from the ECU.
Repeated pressing of this softkey displays all stored error mes‐
sages (J1939 Special Screen).
Reset Reset the blink code (J1939 Special Screen).
Navigation Move Up Select previous value/entry.
Move Down Select next value/entry.
Move Cursor Position Move cursor position
Return Return to previous menu.
Next Page Go to following page/screen of the current menu.
Parameter Screen Show parameter screen.
Alarm Screen Show alarm screen.

Configuration
Status symbols
Menu screen Symbol Caption Description
Main Screen Voltage Display Mode The index of the symbol indicates whether delta or wye voltage is
displayed and which phases are displayed.
Single Line Dia‐ Rotating Field CW Generator, mains or busbar rotating field moves clockwise.
gram
Rotating Field CCW Generator, mains or busbar rotating field moves counter-clock‐
wise.
Power Detected Power is detected at the respective measuring point (generator,

busbar or mains).
Monitoring Enabled Indicates that the engine delayed monitoring has expired and the
monitoring functions are enabled.
Power Imported Power is imported (at mains interchange).
Power Exported Power is exported (at mains interchange).
Alarm List Alarm Condition Present Indicates that corresponding alarm condition is still present.
Alarm class A/B/C/D/E/F Symbol with "!" indicates that an alarm of class A/B/C/D/E/F is
present present.
Alarm class A/B/C/D/E/F not Symbol without "!" indicates that an alarm of class A/B/C/D/E/F is
present not present.
Setpoints Generator Power Indicates the generator power (actual value).
Mains Power Indicates the mains power (actual value).
Synchroscope Phase Angle Indicates the actual phase angle between busbar and mains or
busbar and generator.
Sequencing Breaker Closed GCB of respective genset in sequence is closed.
Breaker Open GCB of respective genset in sequence is open.
Add-on Generator is becoming "Add-on" to the (multiple) genset system.
Add-off Generator is going "Add-off" from the (multiple) genset system.
LogicsManager Delay ON Delay before output becomes TRUE.
Delay OFF Delay before output becomes FALSE.
TRUE/enabled Variable is TRUE (LogicsManager).

The bit is enabled (CAN Interface).
Relay activated (Discrete Outputs)
FALSE/disabled Variable is FALSE (LogicsManager).

The bit is disabled (CAN Interface).
Relay deactivated (Discrete Outputs)

Configuration
Front Panel Access > The HOME Screen
The following chapters list notes related to the spe‐

cific menu screens.
For information on standard softkeys and status
symbols refer to Ä Chapter 4.1.1 “Basic Naviga‐
tion” on page 112.
4.1.2 The HOME Screen

General notes
n The “Home” button is a one-click way back to the overview
starting point: the HOME page / HOME screen
n The “Home Screen” offers display alternatives via parameter
4103 Ä p. 163 “ Home screen data”
– Generator
– Generator/Mains
– Generator/Busbar
– Generator/Engine
– Generator/LS-5
– Generator/Mains (LS5)
n To display the single line diagram with/without mains is select‐
Fig. 84: HOME page/screen able via parameter 4129 Ä p. 163 “Oneline diagram with
mains”
n Two customizable buttons enable selection of indications to
display engine and auxiliary values (full access via ToolKit,
name/description cannot be changed via HMI)
Find menu: “Parameter è Configure HMI
è Configure customer screen x”
n Two display brightness levels can be switched by LogicsMan‐
ager. Can be used for e.g.:
– Key activation determined
– Brightness reduction on navigation bridge (vessels)
– Saving energy
è Configure display”
n Lock keypad function is determined by LogicsManager
12978 Ä p. 163/Ä p. 1038. Result is available as logical com‐
mand variable 11924 Ä p. 1017/Ä p. 1028 (and can be used with
86.30).
Find menu (ToolKit only!): “Parameter è Configure HMI
è Configure display”
Display alternatives The HOME screen allows a number of pre-selectable and soft‐
button controlled display variants.

Configuration
Front Panel Access > The HOME Screen
n Generator
– Voltages (pp - pn) - selectable via softbutton [1]
– Power
– Power Factor PF
– Frequency
– Currents (L1, L2, L3)
n Generator/Mains
– Generator values as described above
and additionally for Mains
– Voltage
– Frequency
– Current
– Power
– Power factor
n Generator/Busbar
and additionally for Busbar
– Voltage
– Power
– Frequency
n Generator/Engines
and additionally for Engine
– Engine speed (rpm)
– Oil pressure (bar or psi)
– Water temperature (°C or °F)
– Operating hours (h)
– Battery voltage (V)
– Fuel level (%)
n Generator/LS-5
and additionally for LS-5
– Voltage
– Power
– Frequency
n Generator/Mains (LS5)
and additionally for mains values mearured by LS-5, if an
application mode (parameter 3444 Ä p. 251) with L-MCB is
selected.
– Voltage
– Power
– Frequency

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Customer Screens
"Engines" parameter selection

The values to be displayed at "Engines" can be
selected via AnalogManager definition of the
parameters at “Parameter è Configure HMI
è Screen configuration”. Menu texts and symbols
cannot be changed!
Fig. 85: AnalogManagers for "Engine"

values at Home Screen
4.1.3 Customer Screens

Available at HOME page, two softbuttons give one-click access to
customer specific (monitoring) screens.
Full functionality available via ToolKit. HMI allows

access to the AnalogManager but not to the text
fields [Description] and [Unit].

è Configure customer screen x è AM Customer screen x.x”
Fig. 86: Customer Screen sample:

"Engine"
How to customize screens via

ToolKit?
Two customer specific named screens enable flexible configuration
of up to 18 values. Each displayed with Description (customer spe‐
cific text), the result of a free configurable AM, and (a customer
specific text for) Unit.
Customize via Parameter Description
Configure homepage button names for screen 1 and screen 2:
Screen/button 14895, 14897 Button text, displayed at easYgen-

Name XT HMI homepage
Fig. 87: Customer screen: setting
sample Notes
The display allows two rows with
five letters each. Use <WBR> for
row separator because a blank is
taken as one letter.
If the text is too long it will not be
visible and an "empty/clear button"
will appear! We propose to check
input immediately by refreshing
home screen.
Configure each row of the customer screens with:
Description 7691, 7696, 7701, ..., Text displayed

7776

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Standard Menu Screens > Navigation Screens
Customize via Parameter Description
Value AM 7690, 7695, 7700, ..., AnalogManager to select param‐

7775 eter for display. Additionally avail‐
able via , too.
Unit 7692, 7697, 7702, ..., Text displayed

7777
4.1.4 Standard Menu Screens
The following chapters list standard menu screens,

where all user input is handled similarly.
For information on standard softkeys and status
symbols refer to Ä Chapter 4.1.1 “Basic Naviga‐
For information on all other menu screens refer to
Ä Chapter 4.1.5 “Specialized Menu Screens”
on page 121.
4.1.4.1 Navigation Screens

Navigation screens offer access to sub-menu screens via the dis‐
played softkey.
Navigation screens samples:
Parameter, Configuration, Measured values, Synchroscope,
Engine (J1939), Diagnostic ...
Fig. 88: Navigation screen (example)
Press the desired softkey to change to a sub-menu screen.
Sub-menu entries are only displayed if the

code level needed to access them is the
same/or higher than the displayed code level
in the center of the navigation screen.

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Standard Menu Screens > Status/Monitoring Screens
4.1.4.2 Value Setting Screens

At value setting screens the settings of the parameters can be
changed.
Value setting screens samples:
Configure language / clock, Configure display, Password, Con‐
figure application ...
Fig. 89: Value setting screen

(example)
Use the following softkeys in a value setting screen to select,

change and confirm a setting.
Softkey Description
Select previous value/entry.
Select next value/entry.
Increase selected value.
Decrease selected value.
Confirm and store changed value.
4.1.4.3 Status/Monitoring Screens

Status/Monitoring screens display monitored values or set parame‐
ters.
Status/Monitoring screen Notes
Generator Which values are shown in the display and whether

they are correct depends on the measurement type.
Busbar/System/LS-5 Which values are shown in the display and whether

Mains Which values are shown in the display and whether

Fig. 90: Status/Monitoring screen Analog inputs/outputs The analog outputs are displayed as a percentage of
(example) the selected hardware range, i.e. 50% of a 0 to 20
mA output refer to 10 mA or alternatively as absolute
values (depending on selected parameters).
Discrete inputs/outputs The configured logic for the discrete input "N.O./N.C."
will determine how the easYgen reacts to the state of
the discrete input.
If the respective DI is configured to N.O., the unit
reacts on the energized state, if it is configured to
N.C., it reacts on the de-energized state.

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Specialized Menu Screens > HOME Screen Voltage Display
Status/Monitoring screen Notes
Counters and service For additional information on setting/resetting coun‐

ters refer to Ä Chapter 4.10 “Configure Counters”
on page 562.
Engine —
Engine (J1939) —
J1939 Analog values —
J1939 Status —
Actual date and time —
Version —
Load diagnostic —
Table 47: Status/Monitoring screens samples
4.1.5 Specialized Menu Screens

4.1.5.1 HOME Screen Voltage Display
If a softkey appears with a wrench symbol it is possible to reset
the peak hold value(s).
Fig. 91: Monitoring screen 2nd page

(example)
The softkey “Display mode” on the main screen "HOME"

changes the type of voltage display.
The amount of information available from the

system depends on how the measuring is config‐
ured in the control unit.
The following tables illustrate what values are available depending

on the configured measurement type:
The displayed voltages ... Displayed at parameter setting
Press Symbol Type Measur 3Ph4W 3Ph3W 1Ph2W 1Ph3W

e
0× (6×) Delta L1-L2 Yes Yes Yes1 —
1× Delta L2-L3 Yes Yes — —
2× Delta L3-L1 Yes Yes — Yes
3× Wye L1-N Yes — Yes1 Yes

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Specialized Menu Screens > Alarm List

e
4× Wye L2-N Yes — — —
5× Wye L3-N Yes — — Yes
Table 48: Measuring point - generator
1 Depends on setting of parameter 1858 Ä p. 496.

e
0× (6×) Delta L1-L2 Yes Yes Yes1 —
1× Delta L2-L3 Yes Yes — —
2× Delta L3-L1 Yes Yes — Yes
3× Wye L1-N Yes — Yes1 Yes
4× Wye L2-N Yes — — —
5× Wye L3-N Yes — — Yes
Table 49: Measuring point - mains
1 Depends on setting of parameter 1858 Ä p. 496.
4.1.5.2 Alarm List

All alarm messages, which have not been acknowledged and
cleared, are displayed. Each alarm is displayed with the alarm
message and the date and time of the alarm occurred in the format
yy-mon-dd hh:mm:ss.ss.
Self-acknowledging alarm messages get a new

timestamp when initializing the unit (switching on).
Fig. 92: Alarm List screen Symbol/Softkey Description
Indicates that corresponding alarm condition (class A/B) is

still present.
Indicates that corresponding alarm condition (class A/B) is

no longer present.

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Specialized Menu Screens > Sequencing
Symbol/Softkey Description
Indicates that corresponding alarm condition (class C/D/E/F)

is still present.
Indicates that corresponding alarm condition (class C/D/E/F)

is no longer present.
Symbol with "!" indicates that an alarm of class A/B/C/D/E/F

is present.
n Amber color = alarm class A/B

n Red color = alarm class C/D/E/F
Symbol without "!" indicates that an alarm of class

A/B/C/D/E/F is not present.
Acknowledge the selected alarm message (displayed

inverted).
Acknowledgment is only possible, if the alarm con‐

dition is no longer present. If the Alarm LED is still
flashing (an alarm is present, which has not yet
been acknowledged as 'Seen'), this softkey resets
the horn and acknowledges the alarm as 'Seen'.
4.1.5.3 Event History

This screen displays system events. A date/time stamp is added to
each entry!
+ Indicates when a condition was activated
- Indicates when a condition was de-activated
Fig. 93: Event History screen
4.1.5.4 Sequencing
The sequencing screen shows all gensets participating in load
sharing. The operation mode of each genset as well as the state of
its GCB is shown on this screen.
Symbol Description
AUTOMATIC Mode is active
MANUAL Mode is active
Fig. 94: Sequencing screen

STOP Mode is active

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Specialized Menu Screens > States easYgen
Symbol Description
TEST Mode is active
GCB of respective genset in sequence is closed.
GCB of respective genset in sequence is open.
Own easYgen device number
Sequence is running with respect to the settings e.g., the sequencing timing - see
table below:
Generator is becoming "Add-on" to the (multiple) genset

system.
Generator is going "Add-off" from the (multiple) genset

system.
The remaining time is displayed on the upper right side on the grey
bar "Sequencing ...", see table below:
"..." text on the grey Description Parameter / ID

bar
Sequencing Add-on Shows the remaining time until Add-on delay,

delay ... s the own generator is add-on 13274 Ä p. 1082
Sequencing Minimum Shows the remaining time the Minimum run time,
run time ... s own generator is running at 13276 Ä p. 1082
minimum
Sequencing Add-off Shows the remaining time until Add-off delay,

delay ...s the own generator is add-off 13275 Ä p. 1082
The bottom field displays the actual load sharing

values. If this device is not participating in load
sharing, "LD start stop Off" is displayed here.
4.1.5.5 States easYgen

The states of the easYgen devices are displayed. The operation
mode of each genset as well as the state of its GCB is shown on
this screen.
AUTOMATIC Mode is active
MANUAL Mode is active
Fig. 95: States easYgen screen

STOP Mode is active
TEST Mode is active
GCB of respective genset in sequence is closed.

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Specialized Menu Screens > Genset Parameter Alignment
GCB of respective genset in sequence is open.
Own easYgen device number
Other easYgen device numbers
Segment number
4.1.5.6 States LS-5

The states of the LS-5 devices are displayed.
1: Segment numbers with switch in between
Segment numbers and breaker switch: opened/closed
Segment numbers and isolation switch: opened/closed
Fig. 96: States LS-5 screen

Frame around number indicates voltage and frequency are
in range
Dotted frame around number indicates voltage or frequency

are not in range but even not Dead busbar
NO frame around number indicates dead busbar
2: Device numbers (segments above and devices are aligned)
LS-5 device numbers
4.1.5.7 Genset Parameter Alignment

This screen displays easYgen devices configured differently than
the LDSS setting of your current device.
Symbol Description
The easYgen uses the same configuration as your current

device.
The easYgen uses a different configuration than your current

device.
Fig. 97: Genset parameter alignment

screen

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Specialized Menu Screens > Setpoints generator
4.1.5.8 Diagnostic devices

This screen displays the diagnostic status (the current communica‐
tion state of the load share and system bus) of the accepted
easYgen and/or LS-5 devices. Refer to Ä Chapter 4.5.6.17.2
“Diagnostic Screens: System Status” on page 490 for details.
Fig. 98: Diagnostic screen example

(HMI)
4.1.5.9 Setpoints generator

The setpoint is displayed on the left and the actual value is dis‐
played on the right half of the screen.
The source, which is used for setpoint 1 or setpoint 2, is displayed
with the respective AnalogManager function number.
The setpoints may only be adjusted if the respective controller is
enabled. Frequency and voltage may be adjusted within the config‐
ured operating limits.
Active power may be adjusted between 0 and the configured load
control setpoint maximum. The power factor may be adjusted
between 0.71 leading and 0.71 lagging.
Fig. 99: Setpoints screen 1: P and PF/

kvar
Indicates the generator power (actual value).
Indicates the mains power (actual value).
Raise the selected setpoint.
Lower the selected setpoint.
Fig. 100: Setpoints screen 2: V and f
Manual mode and Auto mode do have separate setpoints. The

Manual mode setpoints are temporary and can be set via front
panel softkeys only.
Setpoint for ... ... in AUTO ... in MANUAL ... in TEST mode
mode mode
Load 5542 5529 5542
Reactive power 5646 5646
Power factor 5641 5623 5641
Voltage 5640 5605 5640
Frequency 5541 5509 5541

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Specialized Menu Screens > Setpoints PID1 - PID3
ToolKit's setpoint page "STATUS MENU | Set‐

points" gives an overview.
4.1.5.10 Setpoints PID1 - PID3

Menu path for configuration: “Parameter è Configuration
è Configure application è Configure controller è Miscellaneous
è PID x control”
The PID screens enable direct access to PID control settings.
Fig. 101: PID1(-3) screen 1
Fig. 102: PID1(-3) screen 2
Menu path for visualization: “Next page è Setpoints

è Setpoints PID 1-3”
Fig. 103: PID1(-3) visualization screen

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Specialized Menu Screens > LogicsManager Conditions
4.1.5.11 Synchroscope (Generator/Busbar And Busbar/Mains)

The needle indicates the actual phase angle between busbar and
generator or mains.
Please take care for compensation settings with

parameters 8825 Ä p. 256
[Phase angle compensation GCB] and
8824 Ä p. 256 [Phase angle GCB].
If phase angle compensation 8825 Ä p. 256 is
active the compensated values are taken for syn‐
chroscope display (and synchronization)!
Fig. 104: Synchroscope screen

(example)
WARNING!
Ensure correct synchronization configuration to
avoid generator destructive power!
The 12 o'clock position on the top means 0° and the 6 o'clock posi‐
tion on the bottom means 180°.
The actual phase angle is indicated on the bottom of the screen.
The maximum positive and negative phase angles are indicated
'green'. The length of the green part changes according to the
parameters.
The frequency and voltage differences are indicated on top of the
bargraphs.
Operating mode MANUAL: Raise voltage/frequency.
Operating mode MANUAL: Lower voltage/frequency.
4.1.5.12 LogicsManager Conditions

This screen displays the conditions of all LogicsManager command
variables, which are located in their respective groups.
Fig. 105: LogicsManager conditions

screen

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Specialized Menu Screens > LogicsManager
Symbol Description
Select the highlighted command variable group and display

the state of the command variables in this group.
Variable is TRUE.
Variable is FALSE.
Fig. 106: Command variables screen

(example)
4.1.5.13 LogicsManager
Some parameters of the easYgen are configured via the Logi‐
csManager.
Fig. 107: LogicsManager screen
Configure a logical operation using various command varia‐

bles, signs, logical operators, and delay times to achieve the
desired logical output.
Delay before output becomes TRUE.
Delay before output becomes FALSE.
State of the command variable is TRUE.
State of the command variable is FALSE.
Command variable selection field: Change the command

variable group.
Time delay configuration field: Change the cursor position.
Help screen
Help screen (displays logical operators) can be
found at “Parameter è Configuration
è Configure L/A Manager
è General settings LM and AM / Help for ASA/IEC
symbols”

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Specialized Menu Screens > Mains Decoupling Threshold
4.1.5.14 Mains Decoupling Threshold

Starts a special TEST mode which allows mains decoupling

test independent from breaker status (even if not mains par‐
allel; GCB open, no rotation of prime mover/generator).
Stops the TEST mode so mains decoupling is possible if

system is mains parallel only.
Notes:
TEST mode is deactivated not only by this button but too:
n ... if firing speed is reached

Fig. 108: Mains decoupling screen 1 or
n ... automatically after 60 minutes
* Indicates parameters that are part of the mains decoupling

configuration.
Fig. 109: Mains decoupling screen 2
Fig. 110: Mains decoupling screen 3

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Specialized Menu Screens > CAN Interface 1 State
4.1.5.15 Test Mains Decoupling (VDE AR-N 4105)

VDE AR-N 4105 is asking for a test button.
Restricted Access
The function Mains Decoupling Test is available on
Code level CL3. Code levels CL0 to CL2 are inten‐
tionally not supported. Refer to Ä Chapter 4.3.4
“Enter Password” on page 165 for details.
Mains decoupling test is running after the warning is accepted.

The Mains decoupling test opens the selected breaker for mains
Fig. 111: Test mains decoupling decoupling (parameter 3110 Ä p. 421).
selection screen
CAUTION!
This function is independent from the breaker
status and is active for 1 sec.
No thresholds are considered.
As long as the decoupling function is executed the “Execute”

button and the warning text are faded out.
Fig. 112: Security query mains decou‐

pling test
4.1.5.16 CAN Interface 1 State

Symbol Description
State is TRUE
State is false
Table 50: Graphic assignments
Fig. 113: CAN interface state screen

(example)
Section Description
Code level 00 Current code level of CAN1 connection
TPDO has incorrect mapping parameters State is TRUE/false
RPDO has incorrect mapping parameters /

TPDO has more than 8 bytes
RPDO has more than 8 bytes
TIME source double
Table 51: Bit assignments

Configuration
Symbol State Description
State is TRUE PDO is missing
State is false PDO is NOT missing
Fig. 114: CAN interface 1 state screen

(example)
Section Assignment
Missing Receive-PDO number: active {x} RPDO {x} is not received at the moment
Missing Receive-PDO number: latched {x} RPDO {x} has not been received
Notes
CAN 1 monitoring 3150 must be enabled

Symbol Description
State is TRUE
State is false

(example)
Section Description

(don’t care for the current applications)
TPDO has incorrect mapping parameters State is TRUE/FALSE
RPDO has incorrect mapping parameters / (The mapping is done automatically by the parameter 15320 Ä p. 524
“Select external terminals”)
Text “4IKD_1.1_27347.seq” This example indicates the name of the current selected file for the
external terminals inclusive version.
If this line shows “---”, the file is missing on the device.

Configuration
Section Description
Notes
For the different selections of external terminals different files are stored
in the device.
Text “CANopen sequencer file error” 0000000 If the value indicated here is not equal “0000000” there is something
wrong with the file indicated above.
Table 54: (Bit) assignments
The next screen indicates missing Node-IDs of the external termi‐

nals.
State is TRUE Node-ID is missing
State is false Node-ID is NOT missing

(example)
Section Assignment
Missing Node-ID number: active {x} Node {x} is not received at the moment
Missing Node-ID number: latched {x} Node {x} has not been received
Notes
J1939 state
Fig. 117: CAN interface 2 j1939 state

screen (example)
Section Description
Text "J1939 state" Screen title / Interface type
Text “J1939 sequencer file error” 0000000 If the value indicated here is not equal “0000000” there is something
wrong with the file indicated below.

Configuration
Section Description
Text “Standard_1.1_27347.ecu” This example indicates the name of the current selected file for ECU
inclusive version.
If this line shows “---”, the file is missing.
Notes
For the different selections of "Device type" different files are stored in
the device.
Table 56: Assignments

Symbol Description
State is TRUE
State is false

(example)
Section Description
TPDO has incorrect mapping parameters State is TRUE/false
RPDO has incorrect mapping parameters /

TIME source double
Table 58: Bit assignments
State is TRUE PDO is missing

(example)

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Specialized Menu Screens > Ethernet Network
State is false PDO is NOT missing
Section Assignment
Missing Receive-PDO number: active {x} RPDO {x} is not received at the moment
Missing Receive-PDO number: latched {x} RPDO {x} has not been received
Notes
4.1.5.19 Ethernet Network
Fig. 120: Ethernet A state screen

(example)
Fig. 121: Ethernet B state screen

(example)

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Specialized Menu Screens > Ethernet Network
Current Ethernet state is displayed. Setting can be found under

“Next Page è Diagnostic è Interfaces è Ethernet”.
In this menu select:
n [Ethernet A]
n [Ethernet B]
n [Ethernet C]
n [SNTP]
n [Servlink]
n [Modbus TCP/IP]
Fig. 122: Ethernet C state screen See chapter Ä Chapter 7.3 “Ethernet Interfaces”
(example) on page 724 for configuration.
Fig. 123: Ethernet SNTP (example)
Fig. 124: Ethernet Servlink (example)
Fig. 125: HMI-XT_Inter‐

faces_Ethernet-Modbus-TCP-IP_NEW

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Specialized Menu Screens > J1939 Special
4.1.5.20 USB
Current USB state is displayed. Setting can be found under
“Next Page è Diagnostic è Interfaces è USB”.
See chapter Ä Further information on page 506 for

configuration.
Fig. 126: USB interface
4.1.5.21 RS-485
Current RS-485 interface state is displayed. Setting can be found
under “Next Page è Diagnostic è Interfaces è RS485”.
See chapter Ä Chapter 4.7.2 “RS-485 Interface”

on page 507 for configuration.
Fig. 127: RS-485 interface
4.1.5.22 J1939 Special

The status of the configured J1939 ECU error messages is dis‐
played here if the unit is configured accordingly. Some ECUs have
a special screen for proprietary features. Ä Further information
on page 137 shows the special screen for Scania S6.
The following softkeys are only visible if parameter

15127 Ä p. 529 is configured to "ON".
Fig. 128: J1939 Special screen Symbol/Softkey Description

(example)
Request a blink code for one error message from the ECU.
Repeated pressing of this softkey displays all stored error
messages.
This symbol/softkey is only visible if the ECU is configured to
"Scania S6".
Scania S6: Reset the blink code. To do this, disable the igni‐
tion (terminal U15), press this softkey, and enable the igni‐
tion again within 2 seconds.
Other ECU: Reset ECU failure codes.

Configuration
Front Panel Access > Specialized Menu Screens > Time Indication According ...
4.1.5.23 J1939 Status miscellaneous

SPN Description
1081: Eng. wait to ?

start lamp
3697: DPF Lamp ?
3698: Exh. Gas ?

temp.lamp
3699: DPF Pas‐ ?

sive regen. state
Fig. 129: J1939 Status miscellaneous

screen
4.1.5.24 Time Indication According To Operating Condition

This screen element (on main screen) displays time indications
according to the operating condition of the easYgen device. The
time indications of the events indicated in the table below are
shown in the display. The counter starts with the setting value of
the related event and counts down to zero. After that, the status
change of another event is shown. The sequence of the events is
related on the configuration of the device.
Event Description
Auxiliary services Refer to parameter 3300 Ä p. 195 for details.

prerun
Fig. 130: Time indication according to
operating condition Crank protect Refer to parameter 3326 Ä p. 194 for details (only half of the
configured time is used).
Preglow time Refer to parameter 3308 Ä p. 183 for details.
Starter time Refer to parameter 3306 Ä p. 194 for details.
Start pause time Refer to parameter 3307 Ä p. 194 for details.
Ignition delay Refer to parameter 3310 Ä p. 184 for details.
Gas valve delay Refer to parameter 3311 Ä p. 184 for details.
Engine monitoring Refer to parameter 3315 Ä p. 194 for details.

delay time
Generator stable Refer to parameter 3415 Ä p. 257 for details.

time
Cool down time Refer to parameter 3316 Ä p. 195 for details.
Stop time of Refer to parameter 3326 Ä p. 194 for details.

engine
Auxiliary services Refer to parameter 3301 Ä p. 195 for details.

postrun

Configuration
Access Via PC (ToolKit) > Install ToolKit
4.2 Access Via PC (ToolKit)

Version
Woodward’s ToolKit software is required to access
the unit via PC
– Required version: 5.5.1 or higher
– Please use the latest available version!
– For information on how to obtain the latest ver‐
sion see Ä Chapter 4.2.1 “Install ToolKit”
on page 139.
NOTICE!
EXISTING wset Settings Files
wset file properties changed. easYgen-XT wset
files are different from wset files of easYgen
Series.
– wset Settings files created with easYgen must
be converted before use with easYgen-XT!
– NEW ... .wset files are NOT BACKWARD
COMPATIBLE!
– Please ask your Woodward sales support con‐
tact for conversion/update instruction to use
files created with easYgen.
4.2.1 Install ToolKit

Load from CD
1. Insert the product CD (as supplied with the unit) in the CD-
ROM drive of your computer.
ð The HTML menu is opened automatically in a browser.
The 'autostart' function of your operating

system needs to be activated.
Alternately open the document
"start.html" in the root directory of the CD
in a browser.
Fig. 131: Product CD - HTML menu
2. Go to section “Software” and follow the instructions

described there.
Fig. 132: HTML menu section 'Soft‐

ware'

Configuration
Access Via PC (ToolKit) > Install ToolKit
Load from the website

The latest version of the ToolKit software (5.5.1 or
higher) can be obtained from our website.
The latest version of Microsoft .NET Framework
(4.5.1 or higher) can be obtained from Microsoft
website.
To get the software from the website:

1. Go to http://www.woodward.com/software
2. Fill the empty search field with "toolkit" and click on the
“Search” button
ð The (software) products are listed
3. Select ToolKit in the list and click the “Go” button.
4. Click “More Info” to get further information about ToolKit.
5. Choose the preferred software version and click “Download” .
6. Login with your e-mail address or register first.
ð The download will start immediately.
Minimum system requirements n Microsoft Windows® 10, 8.1, 7, Vista (32- & 64-bit)
n Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5.1 or higher
n 1 GHz or faster x86 or x64 processor
n 1 GB of RAM
n Screen
– Resolution: 800 by 600 pixels
– Colors: 256
n If using USB service port of the easYgen for ToolKit communi‐
cation:
– USB port
– USB 2.0 cable (with type A and type B connector)
n If using Ethernet port of the easYgen for ToolKit communica‐
tion
– Appropriate Ethernet cable
n To install ToolKit and manage configuration files
– CD-ROM drive
Microsoft .NET Framework must be installed on

your computer to be able to install ToolKit.
– If not already installed, Microsoft .NET Frame‐
work will be installed automatically (internet
connection required).
– Alternatively use the .NET Framework installer
found on the Product CD.

Configuration
Access Via PC (ToolKit) > Install ToolKit Configura...
Installation
To install ToolKit:
Hidden folder?
Depending on the (version of your) operating
system, the preferred folder for installation
"C:/ProgramData" can be hidden by default
WINDOWS settings. Installation will work
properly but installed sub-folders might not
be visible.
Two possible solutions:
– Change WINDOWS settings to see
hidden files (e.g. in Windows explorer tab
“Extras” , “Folder options” , tab “View” ,
check box "...show.." below “Hidden files
and folders” )
– Select another (not hidden) directory/
folder for installation when asked for
during installation.
Run the self-extracting installation package and follow the

on-screen steps to install.
ð ToolKit software and all relevant additional folders and
files are installed.
4.2.2 Install ToolKit Configuration Files

Load from CD
1. Insert the product CD (as supplied with the unit) in the CD-
ROM drive of your computer.
ð The HTML menu is opened automatically in a browser.
The 'autostart' function of your operating

system needs to be activated.
Alternately open the document
"start.html" in the root directory of the CD
in a browser.
Details of your current product CD menu
may differ because of updates.
Fig. 133: Product CD - HTML menu
2. Go to section “Configuration Files” and follow the instruc‐

tions described there.
Fig. 134: HTML menu section 'Soft‐

ware'

Configuration
Access Via PC (ToolKit) > Install ToolKit Configura...
ToolKit files
*.WTOOL
File name composition: [P/N1]1-[Revision]_[Language ID]_[product name short form]_[# of Release]-[# hotfix]_[#
of build].WTOOL
Example file name: 8440-2082-new_EG3200XTP1_1.10-0_56789.wtool
File content: Display screens and pages for online configuration, which are associated with the
respective *.SID file.
*.SID
File name composition: [Product name short form]_[# of Release]-[# hotfix]__[# of build].].SID
Example file name: EG3200XTP1_1.10-0_56789.sid
File content: All display and configuration parameters available in ToolKit.
*.WSET
File name composition: [user defined].WSET
Example file name: device_settings.WSET
File content: Default settings of the ToolKit configuration parameters provided by the SID file or user-
defined settings read from the unit.
Notes
New settings DON'T override Ethernet address!
n The local Ethernet address of a device is intentionally NOT overwritten by loading

WSET files.
It is possible to handle the complete set of Settings or even a part of it (selected set‐
tings). This can be done by using "Partial .WSET files". For more details please read
Application Note 37572 ‘How to create new complete/partial settings files offline‘ at
woodward.com (search for "37572").
n 1 P/N1 = Part number of the unit

n 2 P/N2 = Part number of the software in the unit

Configuration
Access Via PC (ToolKit) > Configure ToolKit
4.2.3 Configure ToolKit

To change ToolKit settings:
1. Select “Tools è Options”.
ð The “Options” windows is displayed.
Fig. 135: Tools menu
Fig. 136: ToolKit Options window

A File locations (default location is C:\Users\[users's name]\Docu‐
ments\Woodward\ToolKit\Applications)
B Language (selection) setting for tools
2. Adjust settings as required.
For more information on the individual set‐

tings refer to the ToolKit help.
ð Changes take effect after clicking “OK” .
Please do not change the default installation

Fig. 137: Help folder! Otherwise the language selection will not
work properly.

Configuration
Access Via PC (ToolKit) > Connect ToolKit via USB Se...
4.2.4 Connect ToolKit via USB Service Port
A USB cable with USB 2.0 Type A and (at Wood‐

ward device side) Type B connector is necessary.
It is not part of delivery.
Local ports
The number of the COM port used for USB con‐
nection depends on your configuration. This
sample is using COM4.
Sample configuration procedure

1. Install the USB driver delivered with the CD-ROM
Fig. 138: Install USB driver from CD-

ROM
2. Check
3. Start easYgen and wait for "normal operation"
4. Connect the Woodward device and the PC/laptop ToolKit is
running on with the USB cable
ð USB drive will be automatically detected: WINDOWS
offers pre-selected next step e.g., open in explorer what
would display files on the easYgen-XT device but is not
needed now
5. Open ToolKit
ð wtool selection window opens
6. Select the .wtool file for your device by double click
Fig. 139: USB device @ COM4 ð ToolKit Home Page (empty) opens

Configuration
Access Via PC (ToolKit) > Connect ToolKit via Ethern...
7. Click on “Connect”
ð Network selection window opens
8. Select COM4 - the USB port
ð Connection will be established
Security Login window opens
USB connection fails?

If USB connection fails please try the fol‐
lowing methods before you contact your
IT expert:
– disconnect and reconnect USB cable
– use another USB port
– use a proper USB cable (for refer‐
ence see Ä Chapter 3.4.3 “USB (2.0
slave) interface - Service Port”
on page 101)
– re-start ToolKit two or three times
10. Log in with your “Username” and “Password”

ð ToolKit is opened and homepage is displayed. Access
Fig. 140: Select COM4 for ToolKit (code) level depends on the password typed in.
USB connection
Without entering username and pass‐
word (correctly): Values are displayed
(read) only.
In case ToolKit doesn't open correctly please close

ToolKit and open it a second time.
4.2.5 Connect ToolKit via Ethernet Port
Ethernet category 5 (STP CAT 5) shielded cable is

required with shielded plug RJ45. It is not part of
delivery.
Description below exemplarily is done for Ethernet
A.
Connection is also possible via Ethernet B or
Ethernet C, please note the changed IP address.

Configuration
Access Via PC (ToolKit) > Connect ToolKit via Ethern...
During connecting ...

Don't work with event history or *.wset files while
connecting to ToolKit.
1. Connect the Woodward device with the Ethernet cable to the

network.
2. Find IP address of the device at the device with menu path
“Next page è Diagnostic è Interfaces è Ethernet
è Ethernet A”
Network restrictions
Both the easYgen control and your ToolKit running
computer/laptop (PC) must be in the same IP
address range. For example if the IP address of
easYgen is 10.31.140.20, the IP address of the PC
must be 10.31.140.xxx.
It is as well recommended to use an isolated/dedi‐
cated network for ToolKit communication (Anti-
virus software sometimes may interfere with the
Ethernet network). Please consult your IT team for
adjustment help.
Fig. 141: IP-address: Ethernet A
3. Check that the "ToolKit device" is in the same network but

with a different device address
4. Click on the .wtool file for your device
ð ToolKit Home Page for easYgen-XT (empty) opens
ð Network selection window opens
6. Select Ethernet port "TCP/IP"
ð Check that device address is the host name address oth‐
erwise add the host address and select it for (preferred)
use
Don't use leading "0" zero in address!

This would lead to no connection.
Sample: If displayed “Actual IP address”
is 169.254.114.002 type 169.254.114.2
(instead of "... . 002").
Second sample - valid for every three-
numbers-block: Type 169.54.14.2 if dis‐
played “Actual IP address” is
169.054.014.002.
ð Connection will be established
Security Login window opens
8. Log in with your “Username” and “Password”
Fig. 142: Select TCP/IP for ToolKit
ð ToolKit is opened and homepage is displaying current
connection states and values

Configuration
Access Via PC (ToolKit) > View And Set Values In Too...
CAUTION!
Avoid using the same IP address twice!
By mistake it is possible to assign the same IP
address twice to two different devices e.g. for
Remote Panel RP-3000XT as in the system is con‐
figured for the easYgen-3000XT so far.
In this case the last configured device
(RP-3000XT) will work properly but the so far con‐
figured device (easYgen-XT) will be invisible on
the Ethernet: Load Share and ToolKit do not work
on this device! ... and cannot be found for remote
connection.
Solution:
– Apply again properly IP addresses for devices
A and B
or
– reset easYgen-XT (power cycle)
Network mismatch using the same IP address
twice with other devices can be handled similarly.
4.2.6 View And Set Values In ToolKit

Basic navigation
Fig. 143: ToolKit home screen

ToolKit offers the following graphical elements for basic navigation:
Graphical element Caption Description
On top of the page/screen One level back in menu hierarchy

(Visible at menu level 2 and higher)

Configuration
Left sidebar navigation buttons Main Buttons in orange. Permanently

visible
Yellow buttons depend on current

menu/page and guide to further pages
"beside" the current page. This pages
can be opened by “ Previous page” /
“Next page” and as result of a search
[Ctrl] [F]
Both “HOME PAGE” and page
“PARAMETER” offer a green button
[Open web page] to open product web
page containing product information
and links to additional information
Navigation list Directly select a configuration page

based on its name
Buttons “Previous page” and “Next Go to the previous/next configuration

page” page (as ordered in the list)
Buttons “Previous visited page” and Go to the previous/next visited page (as
“Next (already) visited page” ordered in the list)
Value and status fields

Value field To directly input (alpha)numeric values
Display (read) only
Option field To select from a preset list of options
Connection status field Displays active port and unit connection

status
To change the value of a value or option field:

1. Enter the value or select an option from the drop-down list.
2. Press [Enter ] to confirm.
ð The new value is written directly to the unit.

Configuration
Visualization
Values displayed by visualization graphical ele‐
ments cannot be changed.
System setup visualization (Oneline/ Displays engine/busbar/mains connec‐

single line diagram) tion status
Search
[Ctrl][F]
The short cut ctrl-F works to open ToolKit search
window.
To find specific parameters, settings and monitoring values more

easily, ToolKit includes a full-text search function.
To find a parameter/setting/monitoring value:
1. Select “Tools è Search” from the menu.
ð The “Search” dialog opens.
2. Enter a search term and press [Enter].
ð The results are displayed in the table.
Column width can be adjusted as usual

(e.g. to read full path).
“May not be visible” : display (on not) of
Fig. 144: Search dialog this value depends on settings.
3. Double-click a table entry to go to the visualization/configura‐

tion page that includes this parameter/setting/monitoring
value.
Value trending The value trending view can chart up to eight values over time.

Configuration
To select values for trending screen:

1. Right-click an analog value field on any configuration/visuali‐
zation page and select “Add to trend” from the context-
menu.
ð The trending screen opens.
2. Click the “Start” button to initiate charting.
3. Click the “Stop” button to stop charting the values.
Viewed range!
The range to be exported depends on the view and
the start position of the time bar but is always
reported 'til the end of charting.
To export all (complete report) time marker must
be at start position or the complete graph must be
Fig. 145: Trending screen viewed.
4. To store the tracked data select “Export”

ð The tracked data are exported as a time/value table to
a .htm file. This file can be opened and viewed with a
web browser. A copy of the web page content can be
inserted and edited/analyzed in external applications
(e.g. MS Excel/OpenOffice.org Calc).
“Start” Start value charting
“Stop” Stop value charting
Zoom controls Adjust detail of value chart
“Export” Export to .htm file
“Properties” Change scale limits, sample rate, time

span, colors
Details ... of connection The bottom of the ToolKit screen comes with information about
connection and a button for more “Details ...” .
With a click on “Details ...” a list of all current connections will be
displayed and further buttons appear:
Table/list of all connected devices
Disconnect Dissolving connection between ToolKit and device

(same function as at the top of ToolKit page/screen)
Log In Opens “Security login” window

Configuration
Access Via PC (ToolKit) > How to use (and prepare/up...
Log Out Reset of security level to "0"
Save values Opens “Save values” window to save values/settings

(same function as at the top of ToolKit page/screen)
4.2.7 How to use (and prepare/update) non-XT easYgen ... .wset files
WSET file conversion

Please take care for device compatibility.
The .wset files of easYgen-XT are not compatible
with the formerly used .wset files.
ToolKit can handle former non-XT .wset files. Loading a non-

XT .wset file automatically guides into a supported conversion pro‐
cedure.
Please read information of the step-by-step preparation and follow
the displayed then. The resulting settings implemented will use all
1:1 settings, resolve all changes like re-naming or re-numbering,
ask for taking over matching settings, and list all settings that do
not fit the XT restrictions but offering notes for manual implementa‐
tion.
New settings DON'T override Ethernet A address!

The local Ethernet A address of a device is inten‐
tionally NOT overwritten by loading any WSET
files.
The save and re-load function for Ethernet address
is implemented like for other settings
(5330 Ä p. 541 “IP address” ) but it still needs
parameter 7412 Ä p. 541 to “Set IP address” .
Load a non-XT .wset file 1. Open ToolKit version 5.0 or higher

2. Open “Settings è Load Settings File to Device ...”
ð Explorer window appears
3. Select the ... .wset file to be updated
4. Click [OK]
ð Window “Setting Differences ” appears
5. Click on button “Resolve Differences” for details
6. Go through the left hand side list and select settings found
ð If possible, ToolKit offers you to “Map” the setting for
easYgen-XT
Every mapped setting is listed below

Configuration
Access Via PC (ToolKit) > Toolkit Offline Mode
7. Close mapping with a click on “OK” button and - back on

“Settings Differences” screen - with “Next >” button
ð “Settings Conversion Finished” screen lists all Errors and
Warnings
8. Click “Next >” to finalize settings loading
9. Define location/folder and name of the updated ... .wset file
10. Click [OK]
ð New updated ... .wset file is saved and ready for usage
with easYgen-XT
4.2.8 Toolkit Offline Mode

The Toolkit Offline mode offers the possibility to create and edit a
new settings file or a partial settings file for an easYgen-3000 con‐
troller without actually being connected to the device. The param‐
eter settings can be edited and saved as a .wset-file. The .wset-
files can be loaded to the device when it's connected to a
computer. All settings made in offline mode can be applied to the
device later.
Entering Offline Mode
Fig. 146: Load file

1. Open ToolKit and click on "Settings". Choose and load the
preferrend file, e.G. "New from SID Specification Defaults" to
create a new complete settings file. Alternatively, edit a set‐
tings file.

Configuration
Fig. 147: Select File

2. Select the respective file and click "OK". If the Specification
file to be used is not listed or is located in a different direc‐
tory, click “SID File Locations” to browse to the proper direc‐
tory.
Fig. 148: Select Off-line editor

3. Choose the Off-line option to open the Off-line editor.
ð A new window opens up. The Off-line mode is now
active.
In the “Off-line mode” window now all

parameters can be accessed and modi‐
fied in the same way like being actually
connected to the device.
The status indicator in the left upper
corner indicates the Off-line mode! If it
only displays "Off-line", it indicates an off‐
line easYgen-device.

Configuration
Fig. 149: Basic setting off-line mode

4. Make sure the parameters (1) and off-line parameters (2) are
equal.
Fig. 150: ToolKit Off-line mode: Parameter

5. After modifying the parameters, you can save the settings,
and later load it into the controller e.g. when you are on-site.
To save just click “File” and select “Save As…” or hit the
save button.
The file can be named in a format like e.g. “Customer‐
Name_Generator#_Date.wset”)
ToolKit Off-line Mode

ToolKit Off-line mode offers almost all settings of
the "Online mode". However, a few functions are
not visible in off-line mode, e.g. live-screens,
alarm-statuses etc.

Configuration
Basic Setup > Configure Language/Clock
4.2.9 Valuable Tips and Tricks With ToolKit
The ToolKit software help is worth to read: “Help

è Help Contents...”
Just click ...

n buttons to go to previous/next page
n buttons to go one step/click back/forward
n “Tools è Search...” or ([Ctrl] [F]) to
– find a parameter by number
– find a parameter by name
– find all pages/screen this parameter is found
– find all pages/screen this name is found (e.g. occurrence of
"engine")
n “Navigation list” to see
– menu path (breadcrumb) of the current page/screen
– located in the sequence list of all pages/screens
n “Value field” and see the value's range in the
footer bar
n “Details ...” in the bottom line to
– find a list of all connected devices and the connection
states
– get access to Log In / Log Out e.g. to change security level
4.3 Basic Setup

The "Basic Setup" describes a collection of configuration sub-
menus:
n Configure language/clock
n Configure system management
n Password
n Configure HMI
– Configure customer screen 1
– Configure customer screen 2
– Configure display
– Screen configuration
(Other configuration is "below" the sub-menu “Configuration” . See
following chapters.
4.3.1 Configure Language/Clock

General notes The following parameters are used to set the unit language, the
current date and time, and the daylight saving time feature.

Configuration
If an Asian language is configured, some param‐

eter screens may be displayed with an empty
space at the bottom of the parameter list, which
may be interpreted as an end of the list, although
more parameters exist and are displayed when
scrolling down.
This can easily be checked:
– The list display is a closed loop, so ...
– scrolling UP from first list entry goes to the end
of the list and vice versa.
If a custom language is configured, the enumera‐

tion text in Toolkit displays "Reserve 1". In the
easYgen HMI, the enumeration text is the name of
the current custom language.
If the language is set to "Reserve1" without a
loaded custom language, the language of the HMI
will be set to English.
Update Clock
HMI/display and ToolKit differ in updating the clock
settings
– HMI/displays the actual value and enables
direct change of each parameter
– ToolKit displays the “Actual values” (ID 1690
to 1695) beside and the time values and date
values can be prepared each as a set before
transfer
ID Parameter CL Setting range Description

[Default]
1700 Language 0 selectable lan‐ The desired language for the unit display text is configured here.
guages
(Set language) Available languages are: English, German, Dutch, Spanish, French, Italian,
[English] Portugese, Japanese, Chinese, Russian, Turkish, Polish, Slovakian, Finnish,
Swedish, Reserve 1.
“Values to be set”
1710 Hour 0 hour 0 to 23 h
The hour of the clock time is set here.
[real-time clock]
Example
n 0 = 0th hour of the day (midnight).

n 23 = 23rd hour of the day (11 pm).
1709 Minute 0 0 to 59 min The minute of the clock time is set here.
[real-time clock] Example
n 0 = 0th minute of the hour

n 59 = 59th minute of the hour
1708 Second 0 0 to 59 s The second of the clock time is set here.

[real-time clock]

Configuration

[Default]
Example
n 0 = 0th second of the minute

n 59 = 59th second of the minute
1698 Transfer time to 2 Yes Yes transfers the time values to the clock.
clock
[No] Notes
ALL values are transferred and overwritten - even if you want to change only
one.
1711 Day 0 day 1 to 31 The day of the date is set here.

n 1 = 1st day of the month.

1712 Month 0 month 1 to 12 The month of the date is set here.

n 1 = 1st month of the year.

n 12 = 12th month of the year.
1713 Year 0 year 0 to 99 The year of the date is set here.

n 0 = Year 2000
n 99 = Year 2099
1699 Transfer data to 2 Yes Yes transfers the date values to the clock.
clock
[No] Notes
ALL values are transferred and overwritten - even if you want to change only
one.
4589 Time zone 2 -12 to 14 Time shift in hours between the time zone in which the device is used com‐
pared to the absolutely Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
[0.00]
This information is needed to transfer the general time signal into the local
real-time clock setting.
“Daylight saving time”

4591 Daylight saving 2 On On enables the Daylight saving time.
time
[Off] The daylight saving time feature enables to automatically adjust the real-time
clock to local daylight saving time (DST) provisions. If daylight saving time is
enabled, the real-time clock will automatically be advanced by one hour when
the configured DST begin date and time is reached and falls back again by
one hour when the configured DST end date and time is reached.
If the unit is used in the southern hemisphere, the DST function will be
inverted automatically, if the DST begin month is later in the year than the
DST end month.
Notes
Do not change the time manually during the hour of the automatic time
change if DST is enabled to avoid a wrong time setting.
Events or alarms, which occur during this hour might have a wrong time
stamp.
4594 DST begin time 2 0 to 23

The real-time clock will be advanced by one hour when this time is reached
[0] on the DST begin date.
Example
n 0 = 0th hour of the day (midnight)

n 23 = 23rd hour of the day (11 pm)

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
This parameter is only displayed, if Daylight saving time (param‐
eter 4591 Ä p. 157) is set to "On".
4598 DST begin 2 Sunday to Sat‐ The weekday for the DST begin date is configured here
weekday urday
Notes
[Sunday]
4592 DST begin nth. 2 The order number of the weekday for the DST begin date is configured here.
weekday
[1st] DST starts on the 1st configured weekday of the DST begin month.
2nd DST starts on the 2nd configured weekday of the DST begin month.
3rd DST starts on the 3rd configured weekday of the DST begin month.
4th DST starts on the 4th configured weekday of the DST begin month.
Last DST starts on the last configured weekday of the DST begin month.
LastButOne DST starts on the last but one configured weekday of the DST begin month.
LastButTwo DST starts on the last but two configured weekday of the DST begin month.
LastButThree DST starts on the last but three configured weekday of the DST begin month.
Notes
4593 DST begin 2 1 to 12 The month for the DST begin date is configured here.
month
[1] Example
n 1 = 1st month of the year

n 12 = 12th month of the year
Notes
4597 DST end time 2 0 to 23 The real-time clock will fall back by one hour when this time is reached on the
DST end date
[0]
Example
n 0 = 0th hour of the day (midnight).

n 23 = 23rd hour of the day (11 pm).
Notes
4599 DST end 2 Sunday to Sat‐ The weekday for the DST end date is configured here
weekday urday
Notes
[Sunday]
4595 DST end nth. 2 The order number of the weekday for the DST begin date is configured here.
weekday
[1st] DST ends on the 1st configured weekday of the DST begin month.
2nd DST ends on the 2nd configured weekday of the DST begin month.
3rd DST ends on the 3rd configured weekday of the DST begin month.
4th DST ends on the 4th configured weekday of the DST begin month.
Last DST ends on the last configured weekday of the DST begin month.
LastButOne DST ends on the last but one configured weekday of the DST begin month.

Configuration

[Default]
LastButTwo DST ends on the last but two configured weekday of the DST begin month.
LastButThree DST ends on the last but three configured weekday of the DST begin month.
Notes
4596 DST end month 2 1 to 12 The month for the DST begin date is configured here.
[1] Example
n 1 = 1st month of the year

n 12 = 12th month of the year
Notes
Table 60: Parameters Language/Clock Configuration
Example If daylight saving time starts at 2:00 am on the 2nd Sunday in

March and ends at 2:00 am on the 1st Sunday in November, the
unit has to be configured like shown in Ä Table 61 “Daylight saving
time - configuration example” on page 159 to enable an automatic
change to daylight saving time and back to standard time.
ID Parameter Setting
4591 Daylight saving time On
4594 DST begin time 2
4598 DST begin weekday Sunday
4592 DST begin nth weekday 2nd
4593 DST begin month 3
4597 DST end time 2
4599 DST end weekday Sunday
4595 DST end Sunday 1st
4596 DST end month 11
Table 61: Daylight saving time - configuration example
USA, Canada European Union
Year DST Begins 2 DST Ends 2 DST Begins 1 DST Ends 1

a.m. (Second a.m. (First a.m. a.m.
Sunday in Sunday in UTC=GMT UTC=GMT
March) November) (Last Sunday (Last Sunday
in March) in October)
2008 March 9, 2008 November 2, March 30, October 26,

2008 2008 2008

Configuration
Basic Setup > Configure HMI > Configure Customer Screens
USA, Canada European Union
2009 March 8, 2009 November 1, March 29, October 25,

2009 2009 2009
2010 March 14, November 7, March 28, October 31,

2010 2008 2010 2010
Table 62: Daylight saving time - exemplary dates
Localization Tool
Create a customized localization of The LocalizationTool is a tool which allows the user to create a
an easYgen 3000XT HMI localization of an easYgen3000XT HMI in a selected language
and create from this a package which can be updated to the
device. Creating localized text is done using Excel which has to
be installed on the PC. The tool will create a basic Excel sheet.
The user will translate in Excel and then from the edited Excel
sheet will create a resource file which can be uploaded on the
easYgen using the Woodward Toolkit tool.
Additionally the tool provides a simulation of the easYgen’s HMI
to check the translation. It also provides a way to re-use previ‐
ously translated texts.
The Localization tool software is delivered as an “Localization‐
ToolInstaller.msi” file with the product CD-ROM and needs to be
installed before use at your PC/laptop. After starting the program,
the HELP file can guide through the required settings.
4.3.2 Configure HMI

4.3.2.1 Configure Customer Screens
easYgen-3000XT comes with two fully customizable screens - just
one click (one level) from home screen. Softbutton text and dis‐
played name, values, and units can be defined/selected. The new
full-featured AnalogManager 1:1 parameter monitoring but even
math. function computing.
There are two configurable customer screens

available.
Handling/set-up is similar so described one time
only.
The (configurable) names of the customer screens are displayed at

home page as softbutton text. Pressing one of this softbut‐
tons opens the screen with the configured Names, Values, and
Units.

Configuration
Basic Setup > Configure HMI > Configure Customer Screens
Customer Screen Configuration

Numbering convention
Customer Screen X.Y: Screen #X (1 or 2); Row #Y
(1 to 9)

[Default]
AM Customer screen 1.1
7691 Description 2 23 characters Name displayed in row 1

[Cust. Screen Notes
row 1]
The max. number of characters is higher but will not be displayed correctly on
HMI/display.
The row is hidden if description is empty (no character, not even a blank)!
7692 Unit 2 6 characters Unit displayed in row 1

[Unit] Notes
The max. number of characters is higher but will not be displayed correctly on
HMI/display.
Notes
If “°C” or “bar” is assigned the unit will be converted into "°F" or "psi" auto‐
matically if the corresponding parameter for conversion 3630 Ä p. 213 and/or
3631 Ä p. 213 is configured to YES.
7690 AM Customer 2 Determined by For details see Fig. 232.

screen 1.1 AnalogManager
90.01
[Pass
Through, ...]
7934 Decimal points 2 0 to 2 Number of decimal points for the value in row 1–9 of the customizeable
screen 1.
Table 63: Parameters Customer Screen 1.1 Configuration (sample)
AM Customer ID "Descrip‐ ID "Unit" ID "Decimal AnalogMan‐

screen # tion" points" ager
1.1 7691 7692 7932 7690
1.2 7696 7697 7933 7695
1.3 7701 7702 7934 7700
1.4 7706 7707 7935 7705
1.5 7711 7712 7936 7710
1.6 7716 7717 7937 7715
1.7 7721 7722 7938 7720
1.8 7726 7727 7939 7725
1.9 7731 7732 7940 7730
2.1 7736 7737 7941 7735
2.2 7741 7742 7942 7740
2.3 7746 7747 7943 7745
2.4 7751 7752 7944 7750
2.5 7756 7757 7945 7755

Configuration
Basic Setup > Configure HMI > Configure Display
AM Customer ID "Descrip‐ ID "Unit" ID "Decimal AnalogMan‐

screen # tion" points" ager
2.6 7761 7762 7946 7760
2.7 7766 7767 7947 7765
2.8 7771 7772 7948 7770
2.9 7776 7777 7949 7775
Table 64: Overview Customer Screens/Rows IDs
Customer Screen Configuration
Fig. 151: Customer Screen sample: a set of interesting Engine

values

[Default]
7701 Description 2 Oil Temperature (Defined by customer)
7702 Unit 2 °C (Defined by customer)
7700 AM Customer screen 1.3 2 Determined by AnalogManager 90.03: (Defined by customer)

[Pass Through] of
[A1= 07.23 175:Oil Temperature 1]
7934 Decimal points 2 2 (Defined by customer)
Table 65: Parameters Customer Screen 1.3 Configuration sample
4.3.2.2 Configure Display

Display Configuration
[Default]
Display bright‐ 2 0 to 100% Color bar visualization for immediately displayed selection
ness
[35]%

Configuration
Basic Setup > Configure HMI > Screen configuration

[Default]
7796 2nd display 2 1 to 100 Level of 2nd brightness.

brightness
[5]% Used if parameter 11971 Ä p. 1018/Ä p. 1029 is true.
4557 Key activation 2 1 to 999 min If no soft key has been pressed for the time configured here, the 2nd display
time brightness will be used.
[120 min]
Notes
This parameter is only effective, if LogicsManager 86.33 2nd disp.
bright. 11971 Ä p. 1018/Ä p. 1029 is configured to "Key activation".
7794 Enable 2nd dis‐ 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the brightness
play brightness LogicsManager level of the display switches to the 2nd brightness level defined by parameter
86.33 7796 Ä p. 163.
[(04.64 NOT& 1) This can save energy and support visualization of device/system state.
& 1]
For information on the LogicsManager and its default settings see Ä Chapter
= 11971 4.8 “Configure LogicsManager” on page 546Ä Chapter 9.3.1 “LogicsManager
7799 Enable front 2 Determined by If this parameter is TRUE and ambient temperature goes below -10° C, the
(panel) heater LogicsManager display (front panel) will be heated for seven minutes (and wait further
86.34 3minutes).
[(1 & 1) & 1] For information on the LogicsManager and its default settings see Ä Chapter
= 11972 4.8 “Configure LogicsManager” on page 546Ä Chapter 9.3.1 “LogicsManager
Notes
This parameter is always visible in HMI and ToolKit, even it is implemented in
"-LT" variants for enhanced temperature use only
12978 Lock keypad 2 Determined by Key pad can be locked remotely.

LogicsManager
86.30 This parameter is intentionally not available via HMI/display.
4.8 “Configure LogicsManager” on page 546Ä Chapter 9.3.1 “LogicsManager
= 11924 Overview” on page 986.
Table 66: Parameters Display Configuration
4.3.2.3 Screen configuration

Screen Configuration

[Default]
4103 Home screen 2 : Home screen can display several pre-defined data collections.
data
Generator Generator relevant information are displayed.
[Generator/ Home screen is splitted and displays generator and mains related informa‐
Mains] tion.
Generator/ Home screen is splitted and displays generator and busbar related informa‐
Busbar tion.
Generator/ Home screen is splitted and displays generator and engine related informa‐
Engine tion.
Generator/LS5 Home screen is splitted and displays generator and LS5 related information.
4129 Oneline diagram 2 Off : Display of oneline (single line) diagram on home screen can be
with mains reduced NOT to show mains symbols.
[On]
Notes
Softbutton for MCB is (visible and) valid only if this parameter is TRUE.

Configuration
Basic Setup > Configure HMI > Screen configuration

[Default]
8891 AM Engine 2 Determined by With this AnalogManager the according speed source may be selected from
speed AnalogManager the available data sources.
81.24
Even it is possible to select all data sources Ä Chapter 9.4.1 “Data Sources
[A1 = 11.51 AM” on page 1042), only the following data source may be used:
Engine speed
[rpm]] 11.51 Engine speed [rpm]
The indication is displayed in the format 0000 rpm.
8892 Show engine 2 [Yes] Display of engine speed on home screen.

speed
No
8893 AM Engine oil 2 Determined by With this AnalogManager the according oil pressure source can be configured
pressure AnalogManager and scaled. The indication is displayed in the format 00.0bar (000psi).
81.25
Notes
[A1 = 07.07
100:Engine Oil If “bar” is assigned the unit will be converted into "psi" automatically if the
Press.] corresponding parameter for conversion 3630 Ä p. 213 is configured to YES.
8894 Show oil pres‐ 2 Yes Display of engine oil pressure on home screen.
sure
[No]
8895 AM Engine 2 Determined by With this AnalogManager the according operating hours source can be con‐
hours AnalogManager figured and scaled. The indication is displayed in the format 00000.00h .
81.26
[A1 = 11.55
Eng.oper.hours
[h]]
8896 Show engine 2 [Yes] Display of engine running hours on home screen.
hours
No
8897 AM Engine fuel 2 Determined by With this AnalogManager the according fuel level source can be configured
level AnalogManager and scaled. The indication is displayed in the format 000.0% .
81.27
[A1 = 06.03
Analog input 3]
8898 Show engine 2 Yes Display of engine fuel level on home screen.
fuel level
[No]
8899 AM Engine 2 Determined by With this AnalogManager the according battery voltage source can be config‐
batt.voltage AnalogManager ured and scaled. The indication is displayed in the format 00.0V .
81.28
[A1 = 10.54 Bat‐
tery voltage [V]]
8900 Show engine 2 [Yes] Display of engine battery voltage on home screen.
battery voltage
No
8901 AM Engine 2 Determined by With this AnalogManager the according coolant temperature source can be
coolant temp. AnalogManager configured and scaled. The indication is displayed in the format 000°C (°F).
81.29
Notes
[A1 = 07.15
110:Eng.Coolan If “°C” is assigned the unit will be converted into "°F" automatically if the cor‐
t Temp.] responding parameter for conversion 3631 Ä p. 213 is configured to YES.
8902 Show engine 2 [Yes] Display of engine coolant temperature on home screen.
coolant temp.
No
General notes The home screen data configuration "Generator/Engine" offers an

engine value indication. With the following AnalogManagers the
according sources can be configured and scaled.

Configuration
Basic Setup > Enter Password
The according AnalogManager has to be config‐

ured as 'Pass Through'.
4.3.3 Lamp Test
All lights on the controller may be tested for correct

operation with this function.
“Parameter è Lamp test”
Lamp test is available via HMI/display, ToolKit, and parameter

10773 with logical command variable 04.61.
4.3.4 Enter Password

General notes The controller utilizes a password protected multi-level access hier‐
archy to prevent unauthorized access to parameters, configuration
and calibration items. This permits varying degrees of access to
the parameters being granted by assigning unique passwords to
designated personnel.
Password protection covers direct and remote access through all
methods and interfaces of interconnectivity of the device.
Personal security
Configure password security before handing over
the device to the customer!
Note your password on a secure location. The next
higher password level (2 and 4) allows to reset the
password of the level below (1 and 3).
To restore the according User Name Account
needs support from Woodward (authorized
partner).
Access via channel ... The following table and drawing provide an overview about the
possible access channels to the easYgen-XT.
Access to the easYgen-XT by a/an ... # used in drawing Ä “Access via

channel ...” on page 165below
HMI on the control directly ①
PC running ToolKit servlink, connected over USB ②
Remote Panel with the Woodward screen share concept connected over Ethernet (HMI simula‐ ③=①
tion)

Configuration
Access to the easYgen-XT by a/an ... # used in drawing Ä “Access via

channel ...” on page 165below
3rd party Remote Panel (i.e. Proface, Sütron, ...) running Modbus TCP ④
PLC running Modbus TCP ④
PC running ToolKit servlink, connected over Ethernet ⑤
Netbiter® Easy Connect gateway running Servlink TCP (ToolKit via internet) ⑤
PLC running Modbus RTU via RS-485 ⑥
PLC running CANopen ⑦
PLC running CANopen via Profibus DP ⑦
Each channel has its own independent access

level.
The according password handling for each of this
access is defined afterwards.
Fig. 152: Access to the easYgen-XT device - Overview

Configuration
Two login procedures cover all access channel variants: The ...
n Basic Code Entry
n User Account Entry
Hidden entry for more security

The currently selected entry number is visible only
- all other numbers are hidden and a "*" asterisk is
displayed instead.
LOGIN procedure "Basic Code Entry" The Basic Code Entry is valid for access ①, ③, ⑥, and ⑦.
The Basic Code Entry asks for four numbers to open the related
password level. It starts with the default value of parameter
10416 Ä p. 179 “Random number for password” .
Fig. 153: Password entry: HMI
LOGIN procedure "User Account The User Account Entry is valid for access ②, ④, and ⑤.
Entry"
The User Account Entry comes with more security as requested for
internet access. It asks for “Username:” and “Password:” ("Alpha‐
numeric Password"). To open the related password level, both
rows entries need the correct alphanumeric strings.
The already existing User names cannot be

changed. They are fixed for the desired code level,
which shall be entered.
Fig. 154: Password entry: HMI

Check you Password entry
View hidden password entry by pushing the
symbol on the right side of the “Password:” box.

Configuration
Enter Password for level ... (Over‐ A distinction is made between the access levels as follows:
view)
Code Level User Account Entry Basic Code Entry Comment
User Name Password Password

(fix) (default) (default)
5 CL05 CL0500 500 The Super Commissioning Level

Access to nearly all parameters and configurations,
except calibration and super user items.
The firmware updating is released.
The own code level and the levels below can be
indicated and configured.
4 AC04 Algorithm Code Algorithm Code The temporary Super Commissioning Level
The same access rights like in the Super Commis‐
sioning Level but with the following exceptions:
n The password for this level is not visible.

n The access is dismissed afterwards.
3 CL03 CL0003 3 The Commissioning Level

Access to well defined parameters and configura‐
tions, which are usually needed on a commissioning
level.
The own code level and the levels below can be
indicated and configured.
2 AC02 Algorithm Code Algorithm Code The temporary Commissioning Level

The same access rights like in the Commission
Level.
The Code level is entered in an algorithm code. The
access is dismissed afterwards.
Only the code levels below can be indicated and
configured.
1 CL01 CL0001 1 The Basic Level

Access to a limited number of parameters and con‐
figurations.
The own code level can be indicated and config‐
ured.
0 No access rights to change, even viewed informa‐

tion is restricted.
Active Code Level

A code level always belongs to an access channel.
Each access channel has its own password level.
This password level can be different to others
(other channels) at the same time.
The access related code level is available and
visible beside the access related interface settings.
No direct access as expected?

Please check: LogicsManager 86.30 Parameter
12978 Ä p. 163/Ä p. 1038 "Lock keypad 1" =
TRUE?

Configuration
The Algorithm Code The "Algorithm Code" is an implemented procedure to give an

external user temporarily access to the device but without being
able to see or change the according passwords. This temporary
access needs a random number produced by the device. The
actual password then is calculated from this random number using
a secret formula. The secret formula is provided by a higher
instance.
Access Channels
Maximum Security
Each of these channels have their own inde‐
pendent access level. That has the advantage that
e.g. a HMI channel password level opens not auto‐
matically the access rights for the other channels.
Maximum Flexibility
The device offers the capability to disable the
password protection for the individual interface
communication channels RS485, Ethernet, CAN 1
and CAN 3. If the password level is disabled the
access level is set on code level 5.
The device provides different access Remarks

channels via ...
HMI directly or by WW Remote Panel screen share concept
USB ToolKit Servlink
RS485 Modbus RTU
Ethernet Modbus TCP
ToolKit Servlink TCP, 8 sub channels

are possible
Note: Each of the 8 sub channels has
its own independent password access
level!
CAN1 CANopen
CAN2
CAN3
The different Password Code Levels This chapter defines the properties of the single password code
levels. The device differentiates several password levels. Generally
with a higher reached password level the access rights increases.
Code Level 0 The Level 0 means there are no access rights enabled. All configu‐
rations are blocked.

Configuration
Code Level 1 - The Basic Level CL01 n General:

This level releases the access to a limited number of parame‐
ters and configurations
n Basic Code entry:
In this and higher levels the password for the Basic Code Level
CL01 can be changed
n User Account Entry:
This level is selected with the User Name CL01 and the
according password can only be changed being in code level
CL01.
Being in code level AC02 or higher the password of the Basic
Level CL01 can be reset to its default by the Yes/No parameter
10434 Ä p. 179.
Code Level User Account Entry Basic Code Entry

1 CL01 CL0001 0001

Configuration
Code Level 2 - The temporary Com‐ n General:

missioning Level AC02 This Level allows temporary access to parameters of the Com‐
mission Level.
The access is dismissed automatically (see Ä “Automatic
Logout from Password level (Fall into level 0)” on page 173).
n Basic Code Entry:
In this and higher Levels, the password for the Basic Code
Level CL01 can be changed.
This level is selected with the User Name AC02 and the
according algorithm for the password can only be changed
being in the Commissioning code level CL03.
Being in code level AC02 or higher the password of the Basic
Level CL01 can be reset to its default by the Yes/No parameter
10434 Ä p. 179.
Code Level User Account Entry Basic Code Entry

(fix)
2 AC02 The entry procedure: The entry procedure:

The operator connects ToolKit with the The operator navigates on the easYgen-
device and closes the upcoming security XT HMI or on RP-3000XT to the
login window without entering username screen“Parameter è Password
and password (Code level 0). The operator è Password display”.
navigates with ToolKit to the page
“Parameter The operator reads the indicated random
è Configure system management”. number. He tells it to a higher instance.
The operator reads on that page The higher instance calculates: (10414
10416 Ä p. 179 “Random number for “Code temp. commissioning” + 10416
password” . He tells it to a higher instance. “Random Number” ) x 3.
The higher instance calculates: (10414 The higher instance takes the lower four
“Code temp. commissioning” + 10416 digits of the result and tells it the operator.
“Random Number” ) x 3. The operator enters the result as password
into the control.
The higher instance takes the lower four
digits of the result and puts the according
algorithm string 10437 “Alphanumeric
code temp. comm.” as prefix in front.
The higher instance tells the result to the
operator, who enters the result as pass‐
word into the control.
Code Level 3 - The Commissioning n General:

Level CL03 In this Level, the operator has access to all parameters and
configurations, which are usually needed on a commissioning
level
n Basic Code Entry:
In this and higher levels the password for the Commissioning
Level CL03 can be changed
This level is selected with the User name CL03 and the
according password can only be changed being in the Com‐
missioning Level CL03
Being in code level AC04 or higher the password of the Com‐
missioning Level CL03 can be reset to its default by the
Yes/No parameter ID 10435 Ä p. 179

Configuration
Level User Account Entry Basic Code Entry

3 CL03 CL0003 0003
Code Level 4 - The temporary Super n General:

Commissioning Level This Level allows temporary access to nearly all parameters
and configurations, except calibration and super user items.
The access is dismissed automatically
n Basic Code Entry:
In this and higher levels the passwords for the Commissioning
Level CL04 can be changed
This level is selected with the User name AC03 and the
according algorithm for the password can only be changed
being in the Super Commissioning Level CL05
Being in code level AC04 or higher the password of the Com‐
missioning Level CL03 can be reset to its default by the
4 AC04 The entry procedure: The entry procedure:

The operator connects ToolKit The operator navigates on the
with the device and closes the easYgen-XT HMI or on
upcoming security login window RP-3000XT to the
without entering username and screen“Parameter è Password
password (Code level 0). The è Password display”.
operator navigates with ToolKit
to the page “Parameter The operator reads the indi‐
è Configure system cated random number. He tells
management”. it to a higher instance.
The operator reads on that The higher instance calculates:

page 10416 Ä p. 179 “Random (10412 “Code temp.
number for password” . He tells commissioning” + 10416
it to a higher instance. “Random Number” ) x 5.
The higher instance calculates: The higher instance takes the

(10412 “Code temp. lower four digits of the result
commissioning” + 10416 and tells it the operator. The
“Random Number” ) x 5. operator enters the result as
password into the control.
The higher instance takes the
lower four digits of the result
and puts the according algo‐
rithm string 10438
“Alphanumeric code super
temp. comm.” as prefix in front.
The higher instance tells the
result to the operator, who
enters the result as password
into the control.

Configuration
Code Level 5 - The Super Commis‐ n General:

sioning Level CL05 In this Level, the operator has access to nearly all parameters
and configurations, except calibration items
The firmware updating is released
n Basic Code Entry:
In this and higher Levels the password fro the Super Commis‐
sioning Level CL05 can be changed
This level is selected with the User name CL05 and the
according password can only be changed being in the Super
Commissioning Level CL05
Being in a higher level as CL05 the password of the Super
Commissioning Level CL05 can be reset to its default by the
If you have forgotten your password for the Super

Commissioning Level, please contact Woodward
or a representative for help.

5 CL05 CL0500 0500
Automatic Logout from Password All basic code entry channels deny after 2h
level (Fall into level 0)
The Modbus TCP access channel denies after 2h
Generally with power supply cycling the password level is denied.
The ToolKit Servlink access never logout
What forces the Logout from Pass‐ All basic code entry channels with [0] as password or a wrong
word levels (Fall into level 0) password
The ToolKit Servlink access with logout function
The Modbus TCP (in all channels) with wrong password
Definition of the password Numeric Password of the Basic Code entry

n The range of possible passwords is 1 to 9999
Alpha numeric Password of the User Account entry
n The maximum length of the alpha numeric password is 20
characters
n The maximum length of the alpha numeric prefix (ID
10437 Ä p. 178; 10438 Ä p. 178) is 6 characters
The Random Number Each time a password is entered, the random number is calculated
at new. This guarantees max. security.
Password handling on the HMI of the The easYgen supports only the Basic Code entry.
easYgen

Configuration
The easYgen HMI password level shall be visible in the parameter

menu screens.
A dynamic key symbol is visible and displays the currently entered
code level number inside:
n code level = 00: locked
n code level > 00: unlocked
In case of a password level time out during configuration over HMI,
the HMI display switches back to the main screen.
The Input of the code level number or string contains a disguise
function.
Password handling in ToolKit The ToolKit supports the User Account entry and in case of CAN‐
open connection the Basic Code entry.
Ethernet Connection: The ToolKit password level is visible in the
menu “STATUS MENU è Diagnostic è Interfaces è Ethernet
è Servlink”. Refer to your IP-address (PC).
USB Connection: The ToolKit password level is visible in the menu
“STATUS MENU è Diagnostic è Interfaces è USB”.
CAN Connection: The ToolKit password level is visible in the menu
“STATUS MENU è Diagnostic è Interfaces è CAN è CANx”.
Password handling via Modbus TCP The easYgen must be a member of an Ethernet network and both
using Ethernet connection user name and password have to be transferred (from PLC) to the
device.
Set easYgen-XT to code level CL05 With factory settings username is expected to be "CL05" and
via Modbus TCP password to be "CL0500" for code level CL05. With setting the
Code Level all five communication channels (sockets) are
released.
1. Write and transfer [CL05] as hex:
43-4C-30-35-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-
00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-0
0-00-00-00
for "User name" to parameter 7490 Ä p. 177 (40 bytes).
2. Write and transfer [CL0500] as hex:
43-4C-30-35-30-30-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-
00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-0
0-00-00-00
for "Password" to parameter 7491 (40 bytes).
ð Code level can be read with parameter 10427
The password level is visible in the Ethernet interface diagnostic

screen.
Password handling via Modbus using The easYgen must be a member of a RS-485 network and the
RS-485 connection password has to be transferred (from PLC) to the device.

Configuration
Set easYgen-XT to code level 5 via With factory settings the password is expected to be "500" for
Modbus RS-485 code level 5.
n Modbus address = 400000 + (Par. ID + 1) = 410431
n Modbus length = 1 (UNSIGNED 16)
Code level state can be read with parameter 10420.
Please find the password level in ToolKit: “STATUS MENU
è Diagnostic/Interfaces è RS485”.
Password handling via CAN using The easYgen must be a member of a CANopen network and the
CANopen connection password has to be transferred (from PLC) to the device.
The easYgen provides several CAN ports and therefore each port
has his own password level. The password is written by a SDO
Communication Channel.
Set easYgen-XT to code level 5 via With factory settings the password is expected to be "500" for
CANopen code level 5.
Procedure for CAN 1 n CAN interface 1 Parameter ID = 10402 (dec) = 28A2 (hex)
n Incorporate the 2000 (hex) value: 28A2(hex) + 2000 (hex) =
48A2 (hex)
n Identifier: 600 (hex) + Node-ID
n Example Node-ID is 1
The following table shows exemplary send data for the device on
the CANopen bus.
Identifier Description Data (hex)
601 (hex) Password 500 writing on 2B A2 48 01 F4 01 00 00

Parameter ID 10402

è Diagnostic/Interfaces è CAN è CAN 1 state”.
Procedure for CAN 2 n CAN interface 2 Parameter ID = 10432 (dec) = 28C0 (hex)
n Incorporate the 2000 (hex) value: 28C0 (hex) + 2000 (hex) =
48C0 (hex)
the CANopen bus.
601 (hex) Password 500 writing on 2B C0 48 01 F4 01 00 00

Parameter ID 10432


Configuration
Procedure for CAN 3 n CAN interface 3 Parameter ID = 10433 (dec) = 28C1 (hex)
n Incorporate the 2000 (hex) value: 28C1 (hex) + 2000 (hex) =
48C1 (hex)
the CANopen bus.
601 (hex) Password 500 writing on 2B C1 48 01 F4 01 00 00

Parameter ID 10433

Code level display The current code level is indicated by the lock symbol in the config‐
uration menu screens. The lock symbol indicates the number of the
code level and appears as "locked" (in code level CL00) or
"unlocked" (in higher code levels).
Symbol Status
Locked
Unlocked (Code Level 01)

[Default]
10400 Password dis‐ 0 0000 to 9999 The password for configuring the control via the front panel must be entered
play here.
[random
number]
10405 Code level dis‐ 0 (display only) This value displays the code level which is currently enabled for access via
play the front panel display or the Woodward Remote Panel with screen share
[0] mode.
Code level interfaces The password and/or User name for access via interface cannot be
entered via HMI.

[Default]
10402 Password for 0 0000 to 9999 The password for configuring the control via the CAN interface #1 must be
CAN interface 1 entered here.
[random
number] Not visible but can be accessed by interface!
10407 Code level CAN 0 [0] This value displays the code level which is currently enabled for access via
interface 1 the CAN interface #1.

Configuration

[Default]
[random
10422 Code level CAN 0 [0] This value displays the code level, which is currently enabled for access via
[random
10423 Code level CAN 0 [0] This value displays the code level, which is currently enabled for access via
7486 Code level for 0 [0] This value displays the code level, which is currently enabled for access via
USB the USB interface.
The password is entered via the ToolKit login window.
10430 Password for 0 0000 to 9999 The password for configuring the control via the RS485 interface must be
serial interface entered here.
[random
10420 Code level for 0 [0] This value displays the code level, which is currently enabled for access via
RS485 the RS485 interface.
7490 User name 0 The user name for configuring the control via the Modbus TCP/IP interface
Modbus TCP must be entered here.
Not visible but can be accessed by interface!
7491 Password 0 0000 to 9999 The password for configuring the control via the Modbus TCP/IP interface
Modbus TCP/IP must be entered here.
[random
10427 Code level 0 [0] This value displays the code level, which is currently enabled for access via
Modbus TCP/IP the Modbus TCP/IP interface.
7816 IP Servlink 0 [0] This is the IP address of the PC that is connected via ToolKit with the device
Master 1 as Servlink Master 1.
7824 Code level 0 [0] This value displays the code level, which is currently enabled for access as
Servlink Master Servlink Master 1.
1
2
3
4
5

Configuration
Basic Setup > Enter Password > Password System - Paramete...

[Default]
6
7
8
4.3.4.1 Password System - Parameter Overview

General notes
The following passwords grant varying levels of
access to the parameters.
Each individual password can be used to access
the appropriate configuration level through multiple
access methods and communication protocols (via
the front panel, via serial RS-485 interface, and via
the CAN bus).

[Default]
10415 Password Basic 1 1 to 9999 The password for the code level "Basic" is defined in this parameter.
[-] Refer to Ä Chapter 4.3.4 “Enter Password” on page 165 for default values.
10413 Password com‐ 3 1 to 9999 The password for the code level "Commissioning" is defined in this param‐
missioning eter.
[-]
Refer to Ä Chapter 4.3.4 “Enter Password” on page 165 for default values.
10414 Code temp. 3 1 to 9999 The algorithm for calculating the password for the code level "Temporary
commissioning Commissioning" is defined in this parameter.
[200]
10412 Code temp. 5 1 to 9999 The algorithm for calculating the password for the code level "Temporary
super commis‐ Super commissioning" is defined in this parameter.
sioning [400]
10411 Password super 5 1 to 9999 The password for the code level "Super commissioning" is defined in this
commissioning parameter.
[500]
Refer to Ä Chapter 4.3.4 “Enter Password” on page 165 for default values.
10437 Alphanumeric 3 (up tp 6 charac‐ Alphanumeric code for temporary commissioning level.
code temp. ters)
comm. This is the alphanumeric algorithm value for the formula to reach the tempo‐
[a9t5] rary commissioning code level (Level 02), entered as string here.
10438 Alphan. code 5 (up tp 6 charac‐ Alphanumeric code for temporary super commissioning level
temp. super ters)
comm. This is the alphanumeric algorithm value for the formula to reach the tempo‐
[xk38] rary commissioning code level (Level 04), entered as string here.

Configuration
Basic Setup > Enter Password > Password System - Paramete...
4.3.4.1.1 Random Number for Password

[Default]
10416 Random [(random four Random number generated by the easYgen-XT device. Needed to get an
number for letters number)] alphanumeric password by Woodward support.
password
4.3.4.1.2 Change/Reset Alphanumeric Password

[Default]
Change password basic level
10439 Old password 1 ((empty)) Enter here your old alphanumeric password to release the password change
basic level for the basic code level (CL01)
10440 New password 1 ((empty)) Enter here your new alphanumeric password string for the basic code level
basic level (CL01)
10441 Confirm pass‐ 1 ((empty)) Repeat here your new alphanumeric password string for the basic code level
word basic level (CL01)
10442 Change pass‐ 1 [No] With switching this parameter to yes, the control checks the entries for
word basic level changing the password and executes the password change, if the entries are
Yes correct. The visualization 10443 indicates the successful execution.
Notes
If the parameters 10439, 10440, and 10441 are not correct, the password
change is not executed.
10443 Change passw. 0 Flag: illuminated LED

error basic level
[green] Password was not changed or successfully changed
red Error: password could not be changed
10434 Reset password 2 Yes The control resets the password of the basic level to "CL0001".
basic level
[No]
Change password commissioning level
10444 Old password 3 ((empty)) Enter here your old alphanumeric password to release the password change
commiss. level for the commissioning code level (CL03)
10445 New password 3 ((empty)) Enter here your new alphanumeric password string for the commissioning
commiss. level code level (CL03)
10446 Confirm pass‐ 3 ((empty)) Repeat here your new alphanumeric password string for the commiss. code
word com‐ level (CL03)
miss.level
10447 Change pass‐ 3 [No] With switching this parameter to “Yes” , the control checks the entries for
word commiss. changing the password and executes the password change, if the entries are
level Yes correct. The visualization 1048 indicates the successful execution.
Notes

error commiss.
level [green] Password was not changed or successfully changed
10435 Reset password 4 Yes The control resets the password of the commissioning level to "CL0003".
commiss. level

Configuration
Basic Setup > System Management

[Default]
[No]
Change password super commissioning level
10449 Old passw. 5 ((empty)) Enter here your old alphanumeric password to release the password change
super comm. for the super comm. code level (CL05)
level
10450 New passw. 5 ((empty)) Enter here your new alphanumeric password string for the super comm. code
super comm. level (CL05)
level
10451 Confirm 5 ((empty)) Repeat here your new alphanumeric password string for the super comm.
passw.super code level (CL05)
comm.level
10452 Change 5 [No] With switching this parameter to “Yes” , the control checks the entries for
passw.super changing the password and executes the password change, if the entries are
comm. level Yes correct. The visualization 1053 indicates the successful execution.
Notes

super error
comm. level [green] Password was not changed or successfully changed
10436 Reset passw. 11 Yes The control resets the password of the commissioning level to "CL0005" e.g.,
super comm. if you forgot your password.
level
Notes
The code level to execute the password reset is provided by your Woodward
sales support partner.
[No]
4.3.5 System Management
CAUTION!
Don't initiate “Set factory default settings” during
controlling a genset! This causes easYgen
rebooting.
Parameter 1701 Ä p. 181 “Set factory default
values” causes a reboot of the control. During this
time the genset system is not controlled by the
easYgen! An uncontrolled operation can lead into
life-threatening hazard or damage.
After settings changed: Please wait 30 seconds to
be sure changes are saved before power cycling
the device.

Configuration
Basic Setup > System Management

[Default]
1702 Device number 2 1 to 32 A unique address is assigned to the control though this parameter. This
unique address permits the controller to be correctly identified on the CAN
[1] bus. The address assigned to the controller may only be used once.
All other bus addresses are calculated on the number entered in this param‐
eter.
The device number is also important for the device assignment in load
sharing and load-dependent start/stop.
Notes
The unit must be restarted after changing the device number to ensure proper
operation.
For multiple genset applications please make sure to change parameter
8952 Ä p. 533 as well
1889 Device name 2 [Device_name] After set with parameter 1893 this customer specific device name is used e.g.
preset as device name in Ethernet network.
12 to 38 charac‐
ters but varies Notes
on font
Recommended are 19 ASCII characters max. Blanks and special characters
will be replaced.
1890 Device name 2 ["displayable (Pre)view of device name.

characters of
parameter
1889"]
up to 38 charac‐
ters but varies
on font
1893 Set device 2 [No] YES: Device name typed in as value of parameter 1889 taken, processed,
name and displayable characters saved as parameter 1890.
Yes
10417 Factory default 0 Yes The following three parameters are visible and restoring the configured
settings parameters to factory default values is enabled.
[No] The following three parameters are invisible and restoring the configured
parameters to factory default values is not enabled.
1701 Set factory 4 Yes All parameters, with the exception of customer defined passwords, will be
default values restored to factory default values. If the default setting is initiated the alarm
LED starts twinkling with a higher rate (ca. 5 Hz).
Notes
The device is power cycled and rebooting after approx. 20 seconds!
In case of ToolKit connected via USB service port: USB connection will be
lost!
[No] All parameters will remain as currently configured.
Notes
This parameter is only displayed, if factory default settings (parameter
10417 Ä p. 181/Ä p. 718) is set to "Yes".

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Engine > Configure Engine (general)
4.4 Configure Application

4.4.1 Configure Engine
4.4.1.1 Configure Engine (general)
[Default]
3321 Start/Stop mode 2 Diesel or gas engine start/stop logic must be selected.
logic
[Diesel] Start sequence
The relay "Preglow" will be energized for the preheating time period ("Pre‐
glow" is displayed). Following preheating, the fuel solenoid is first energized
and then the starter is engaged ("Start" is displayed).
When the configured firing speed is exceeded, the starter is disengaged and
the fuel solenoid remains energized via the firing speed. "Ramp to rated" is
displayed until the engine monitoring delay timer expires and the start
sequence has finished.
If the engine fails to start, a start pause is initiated ("Start - Pause" is dis‐
played). If the number of unsuccessful start attempts reaches the configured
value, an alarm message will be issued ("Start fail" is displayed).
Stop sequence
After opening the GCB, the coasting time starts and the engine runs without
load ("Cool down" is displayed). On termination of the coasting time, the fuel
solenoid is de-energized, and the engine is stopped ("Stop engine" is dis‐
played). If the engine cannot be stopped via the fuel solenoid, the alarm mes‐
sage "Eng. stop malfunct." is displayed.
Start/stop diagram
The formula signs and indices mean:
n tPRE Auxiliary services prerun [s] (parameter 3300 Ä p. 195)

n tPH Preglow time [s] (parameter 3308 Ä p. 183)
n tST Starter time [s] (parameter 3306 Ä p. 194)
n tSP Start pause [s] (parameter 3307 Ä p. 194)
n tED Engine delayed monitoring [s] (parameter 3315 Ä p. 194)
n tPOST Auxiliary services postrun [s] (parameter 3301 Ä p. 195)
n tCD Cool down time [s] (parameter 3316 Ä p. 195)
n tGS Generator stable time [s] (parameter 3415 Ä p. 257)
Refer to Ä “Diesel engine diagrams” on page 185.

Configuration

[Default]
Gas Start sequence

The starter is engaged ("Turning" is displayed). Following the expiration of the
firing delay time and if the engine is rotating with at least the configured "min‐
imum speed for ignition", the ignition is switched on ("Ignition" is displayed).
Following the expiration of the gas valve delay, the gas valve is then enabled
("Start" is displayed). If the configured firing speed is exceeded, the starter is
disengaged. The gas valve and the ignition remain enabled via the firing
speed. "Ramp to rated" is displayed until the engine monitoring delay timer
expires and the start sequence has finished.
If the configured "minimum speed for ignition" is not reached, a start pause is
initiated ("Start - Pause" is displayed) before the next start attempt.
Stop sequence
After opening the GCB, the coasting time starts and the engine runs without
load ("Cool down" is displayed). On termination of the coasting time, the gas
valve is closed or de-energized, and the engine is stopped ("Stop engine" is
displayed).
If the engine cannot be stopped, the alarm message "Eng. stop malfunct." is
displayed. If no speed is detected anymore, the ignition remains active for
5 seconds so that the remaining gas is able to combust.
Start/stop diagram
The formula signs and indices mean:
n tPRE Auxiliary services prerun [s] (parameter 3300 Ä p. 195)

n tST Starter time [s] (parameter 3306 Ä p. 194)
n tSP Start pause [s] (parameter 3307 Ä p. 194)
n tID Ignition delay [s] (parameter 3310 Ä p. 184)
n tGD Gas delay [s] (parameter 3311 Ä p. 184)
n tED Engine delayed monitoring [s] (parameter 3315 Ä p. 194)
n tPOST Auxiliary services postrun [s] (parameter 3301 Ä p. 195)
n tCD Cool down time [s] (parameter 3316 Ä p. 195)
n tIC Ignition coasting ("post burning") [s] (fixed to 5 seconds)
n tGS Generator stable time [s] (parameter 3415 Ä p. 257)
Refer to Ä “Gas engine diagrams” on page 186 and Ä “Gas engine dia‐
grams” on page 186.
CAUTION
It is imperative to connect an emergency stop circuit to discrete input DI 1 to
be able to perform an emergency stop by disabling the ignition in case the
gas valve fails to close.
External The start/stop sequence must be done externally.
Off The start/stop sequence is completely disabled.

The delayed engine monitoring is dependent from LogicsManager release
engine monitoring 12999 Ä p. 196/Ä p. 1038.
The GCB release is activated by LogicsManager start request in AUTO
(parameter 12120 Ä p. 340/Ä p. 1035).
The controllers are deactivated in operating mode STOP.
Please refer to Ä Chapter 6.3.12 “Start/Stop Logic Mode "Off"” on page 640
for details.
Notes
All functions which are described here, may be assigned by the LogicsMan‐
ager to any relay that is available via the LogicsManager and not assigned to
another function.
3308 Preglow time 2 1 to 999 s Notes

[tPH]
[5 s] The display indicates "Preglow".
(Diesel engine)
3347 Preglow mode 2 This parameter dictates if and under what conditions a diesel engine is pre‐
heated.

Configuration

[Default]
(Diesel engine Off The diesel engine is never preheated before a start attempt.
only)
[Always] Before a start attempt the "Preheating" relay is always energized for the pre‐
glow time (parameter 3308 Ä p. 183). After that a start attempt is initiated.
Analog A preglow sequence is initiated if the monitored analog input temperature

(coolant temperature) is below the configured threshold (param‐
eter 3309 Ä p. 184). The preglow sequence is enabled for the configured pre‐
glow time (parameter 3308 Ä p. 183). After that a start attempt is initiated.
3309 Preglow temper‐ 2 -10 to 250 °C This is the temperature threshold, which must be exceeded to prevent a pre‐
ature threshold heating process, if parameter 3347 Ä p. 183 has been set to "Analog".
[0 °C]
(Diesel engine
only)
4057 Pre-excitation D 2 [On] When the engine is starting up, an exciting current is issued.
+
Notes
The resulting voltage at terminal 65 can be monitored. Refer to chapter
Ä Chapter 4.5.2.7 “Engine Charge Alternator (D+)” on page 411 for details.
Off No exciting current is issued. The input D+ can be used as analog input which
can be configured freely e.g. for (firing) speed detection.
Notes
This function is only working if the battery voltage is below 27.5 V to avoid
overload of internal circuitry.
3346 AM Preglow cri‐ 2 Determined by The preglow criterion may be selected from the available data sources.
terion AnalogManager
81.01 Usually, a temperature measuring is selected here, which is measured via a
(Diesel engine sensor.
only) [A1 = 10.01
ZERO] Notes
Refer to Ä Chapter 4.9 “Configure AnalogManager” on page 551 for explana‐
tion how to use the AnalogManager.
Refer to Ä Chapter 9.4.1 “Data Sources AM” on page 1042 for a list of all data
sources.
3310 Ignition delay 2 0 to 9999 s With gas engines often a purging operation is desired before starting.
[tID]
[5 s] With the engaging of the starter the ignition delay is started. The display indi‐
(Gas Engine cates "Turning".
only)
If the "Minimum speed for ignition" is reached after the expiration of this time,
the ignition is energized.
3311 Gas valve delay 2 1 to 999 s By energizing the ignition relay the gas valve delay is started ("Ignition" is dis‐
[tGD] played).
[5 s]
(Gas Engine After the time set here has expired, and as long as the speed is higher than
only) the minimum speed for ignition, the gas valve is enabled for the time config‐
ured in parameter 3306 Ä p. 194 "Starter time" ("Start" is displayed).
Once the ignition speed has been reached, the gas valve remains opened. If
the speed falls below ignition speed, the gas valve will be closed and the
"Ignition" relay is de-energized 5 seconds later.
3312 Minimum speed 2 10 to 1,800 rpm After expiration of the ignition delay the number of revolutions set here must
for ignition be reached, so the "Ignition" relay will be energized.
[100 rpm]
(Gas Engine
only)

Configuration
Diesel engine diagrams
Fig. 155: Start/Stop sequence - diesel engine

Configuration
Gas engine diagrams
Fig. 156: Start/Stop sequence - gas engine - failure

Configuration
Fig. 157: Start/Stop sequence - gas engine - success

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Engine > Engine Start/Stop
4.4.1.2 Engine Start/Stop

Speed States easYgen-XT offers individually configurable speed and firing speed
detection (non-XT easYgen was determined by the electrical fre‐
quency measurement only).
Firing speed and the speed detection is now managed by Logi‐
csManager equations named “Firing speed detection” and “Speed
detection”. The default setting of them is backward compatible!
The possibility to arrange different sources to determine speed and
firing speed comes with more flexibility. Woodward recommends to
spend some time to understand the parameters and dependencies
listed below or on ToolKit page “Parameter è Configuration
è Configure application è Configure engine
è Configure start/stop”.
Firing Speed detection The “Firing Speed” detection is a basic function of the easYgen
genset controls. This information influences a lot of functions and
therefore is to configure very carefully!
With the firing speed detection the device recognizes e.g. the
engine as successfully started, removes the starter immediately
and triggers the timer “Monitoring delay time” for engine speed rel‐
evant monitoring. The firing speed can be detected out of different
sources.
In comparison to the easYgen-3000 first generation, the firing
speed is generated through a LogicsManager equation always and
allows all speed source combinations. By default this LogicsMan‐
ager is configured backward compatible: easYgen-XT behaves like
the first generation easYgen-3000.
Speed detection With the “Speed” detection the device recognizes e.g. the engine
as turning or as successful stopped. The speed can be detected
out of different sources.
In comparison to the easYgen-3000 first generation, the speed is
generated through a LogicsManager equation and allows all speed
source combinations. By default the LogicsManager is configured
backward compatible: easYgen-XT behaves like the first genera‐
tion easYgen-3000.
The easYgen provides two LogicsManager command variables
(LMCV) for detecting speed:
n Electrical measured determined speed
n Speed sensor (rpm) determined speed

Configuration
Configuration of the Firing Speed

Detection
Fig. 158: Internally determined firing speed flags
The electrical frequency measurement starts at 15

Hz. So 15 Hz is usually the lowest firing speed
limit. This corresponds for a 4-pole synchronous
generator to 450 rpm at 50Hz.
The rpm measurement allows lower firing speed
limits. With a speed sensor the firing speed can be
configured down to 5 Hz.

Configuration
Firing speed configuration Configuration A)

n Firing speed: 5 Hz
n Rated speed: 1800 rpm
Rated frequency: 60 Hz
Calculation
n Firing speed [rpm] = (Firing speed [Hz] * Rated speed
[rpm]) / Rated frequency [Hz]
n Firing speed [rpm] = 5 Hz * 1800 rpm / 60 Hz = 150 rpm
Configuration B)
n Firing speed: 5 Hz
n Rated speed: 1500 rpm
Rated frequency:50 Hz
Calculation
n Firing speed [rpm] = (Firing speed [Hz] * Rated speed
[rpm]) / Rated frequency [Hz]
n Firing speed [rpm] = 5 Hz * 1500 rpm / 50 Hz = 150 rpm
Usually both command variables 02.34 and 02.35 are entered in
the LogicsManager equation for detecting firing speed.
The result of the LM “Firing speed detection” goes directly into
the start / stop logic and other functions of the easYgen. Through
the LogicsManager approach other sources can be taken into
account.
Fig. 159: LogigsManager Firing

speed detection
Configuration of the Speed Detection
Fig. 160: Internally determined speed flags

Configuration
The electrical frequency measurement starts at 15

Hz. So 15 Hz is usually the lowest speed limit. This
corresponds for a 4-pole synchronous generator to
450 rpm at 50Hz.
The rpm measurement allows lower speed limits.
With a speed sensor the speed can be configured
down to 5 Hz.
Usually both command variables 02.36 and 02.37 are entered in

the LogicsManager equation for detecting speed.
The result of the LM “Speed detection” goes directly into the start /
stop logic and other functions of the easYgen. Through the Logi‐
csManager approach other sources can be taken into account.
Fig. 161: LogicsManager for detecting

speed
Firing speed and delayed monitoring

When the firing speed is reached, the starter is dis‐
engaged under one of the following conditions:
– The measurement via MPU is enabled (On):
– Ignition speed measured via MPU is
detected or
– Ignition speed measured via the generator
voltage is detected or
– Ignition speed measured via ECU/J1939 or
– Conditions for "Ignition speed" (see Logi‐
csManager) equal true.
– The measurement via MPU is disabled (Off):
– Ignition speed measured via the generator
voltage is detected or
– Conditions for "Ignition speed" (see Logi‐
csManager) equal true.

Configuration
Fig. 162: Engine - firing speed
Auxiliary operations The auxiliary operations start, as soon as the engine is to be

started or a running engine is detected.
At the same time, the discrete output for the auxiliary services
(LogicsManager 03.01) will be enabled. This discrete output
remains enabled as long as speed is detected or if the controller is
in the MANUAL mode.

Configuration
Fig. 163: : Engine - auxiliary services timing
Start/Stop logic (inhibit cranking)
Fig. 164: Engine - start/stop logic (inhibit cranking)

Configuration

[Default]
3302 Start attempts 2 1 to 20 The control will attempt to start the engine with this number of start attempts.
[3] If the engine fails to start after the configured number of attempts, an alarm
will be initiated.
An engine has been successfully started if the ignition speed reaches the
configured firing speed and the delayed engine monitoring (set by release
engine monitoring) has expired.
4102 Start attempts 2 1 to 20 If a critical operation mode ( Ä Chapter 4.4.6 “Emergency Run” on page 364)
critical mode is initiated, the engine will continue to attempt to start for the number of starts
[10] configured here.
An engine has been successfully started if the ignition speed reaches the
configured firing speed and the delayed engine monitoring (set by release
engine monitoring) has expired.
3306 Starter time 2 1 to 99 s This is the maximum time that the starter relay will remain energized ("Start"
display).
(Maximum [5 s]
starter delay If the LogicsManager output "Ignition speed reached" = TRUE, the speed/
[tST]) frequency have reached firing speed, or the time has expired, the relay will be
de-energized.
3307 Start pause time 2 1 to 99 s This is the delay time between the individual starting attempts.
[tSP]
[7 s] This time is also used to protect the starter relay. The message "Start -
Pause" is displayed.
4844 Inhibit cranking 2 1 to 999 s If the inhibit cranking (parameter 4871 Ä p. 196 becomes active this counter
max. time starts.
[60 s]
Once the counter exceeds the delay time, the message "Start fail" is dis‐
played.
The LogicsManager command variable "Inhibit cranking" (03.38) becomes
TRUE as soon as the inhibit cranking signal has been issued and remains
true until this timer has expired.
3326 Stop time of 2 1 to 99 s During this time a restart of the engine is blocked. This time should be config‐
engine ured so that the engine is total shutdown to protect the starting circuit.
[10 s]
(Engine Once speed from the engine is no longer detected the time configured in this
blocking) parameter is initiated. The message "Stop engine" is displayed.
The LogicsManager command variable "Stop solenoid" (03.27) becomes
TRUE as soon as the stop signal has been issued and remains true until this
timer has expired.
3313 Firing speed 2 5 to 60 Hz After firing speed has been reached, the starter is disengaged.
[15 Hz] The firing speed is to be configured low enough that it is always exceeded
during regular generator operation.
Notes
The time counter for the engine delayed monitoring is no longer activated
directly by firing speed but by release engine monitoring 12999 Ä p. 196/
Ä p. 1038.
Frequency measurement via the generator voltage input is possible beginning
with 15 Hz or higher. If the MPU measurement is enabled, values down to
5 Hz can be measured.
With this firing speed limit are generated both the “firing speed electric” flag
02.34 and the “firing speed rpm” flag 02.35.
3315 Engine moni‐ 2 1to 99 s Delay between reaching release engine monitoring and activation of the mon‐
toring delay time itoring of engine speed delayed alarms (i.e. underspeed).
[8 s]
(Engine delayed After reaching the firing speed, the engine delayed monitoring timer is started.
monitoring [tED]) Upon expiration of this timer all "engine delayed monitoring" configured
alarms and discrete inputs will be enabled.
This timer should be configured in such a manner that it corresponds to the
starting time of the engine plus any possible startup transients. A GCB clo‐
sure may take place after the expiration of this timer.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
The overall time engine monitoring is delayed from firing speed becoming
TRUE (former version's setup), Delay On and Delay OFF of LM equation
11459 release engine monitoring must be added.
The GCB closure can be initiated prior to engine delayed monitoring by con‐
figuring the LogicsManager "Undelay close GCB" (param‐
eter 12210 Ä p. 257/Ä p. 1035).
3316 Cool down time 2 1 to 9999 s Regular stop

[tCD]
[180 s] If the engine performs a normal stop (start request is disabled or change into
STOP operating mode) or a stop caused by an alarm of alarm class C/D, a
cool down with an opened GCB is carried out. This time is programmable.
The message "Cool down" is displayed and the LogicsManager command
variable 04.10 becomes TRUE.
Stop by a class 'C' or 'D' alarm
If the engine is stopped by an alarm of this alarm class, a cool down is carried
out with an opened GCB. This time is programmable.
Stop by a class 'E' or 'F' alarm
If the engine is stopped by an alarm of this alarm class, the engine is shut‐
down without a cool down immediately.
Notes
If a critical operation mode ( Ä Chapter 4.4.6 “Emergency Run” on page 364)
is initiated, the time configured in critical mode postrun (parameter 4109) will
be used instead of the cool down time.
3319 Cool down in 2 [Yes] A cool down will be performed if the genset is changed to STOP operation
STOP mode mode.
No No cool down will be performed if the genset is changed to STOP operation

mode.
3322 Cool down 2 This parameter may be used to perform a cool down if the application mode
without breaker (parameter 3444 Ä p. 251) is configured to "None" or "GCB open".
Yes A cool down will be performed if a start signal is disabled or a stop signal is
enabled.
[No] No cool down will be performed if a start signal is disabled or a stop signal is
enabled.
Notes
This parameter only applies to application mode .
3300 Auxiliary serv‐ 2 0 to 9999 s Prior to a start sequence being initiated, the discrete output for the auxiliary
ices prerun services prerun (LogicsManager 03.30) remains enabled for the configured
[tPRE] [0 s] amount of time to permit engine related operations (i.e. open louvers) to be
performed.
(Prerun auxiliary
operation (start While this discrete output is enabled the control screen will display the mes‐
preparation)) sage "Aux.serv.prerun" for the configured time.
The auxiliary services discrete output disables when the operation mode is
changed from the MANUAL operation mode or, if engine speed is no longer
detected, when the discrete output for the auxiliary services postrun (Logi‐
csManager 03.31) is disabled.
CAUTION
During an emergency start this delay time "auxiliary prerun" is not initialized.
The engine will be started immediately.
3301 Auxiliary serv‐ 2 0 to 9999 s After each engine stop (the engine stop timer has expired), the discrete
ices postrun output for the auxiliary services postrun (LogicsManager 03.31) remains ener‐
[tPOST] [0 s] gized for an adjustable time (i.e. operate a cooling pump).
(Coasting auxil‐ If the operating mode is changed from MANUAL to STOP or AUTOMATIC
iary operation without a start command the relay remains energized for this period of time.
(post operation))
The message "Aux.serv.postrun" will be displayed on the control unit screen.
In the "MANUAL" operating mode this relay output is not used.

Configuration

[Default]
4871 Inhibit cranking 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the cranking
LogicsManager (03.38) is blocked. The discrete output relay [R 03] will be not energized.
87.66
Notes
[(0 & 1) & 1]
= 11455 9.3.1 “LogicsManager Overview” on page 986.
Please refer to Fig. 164 for details.
12951 Firing speed 2 Determined by This LogicsManager allows different sources to generate the general firing
detection LogicsManager speed flag. This will be taken into account for the START/STOP automatic
87.68 and some monitoring functions.
[(02.34 Firing Notes
speed electr.
OR 02.35 Firing The former easYgen was fixed to the electrical frequency always and allowed
speed rpm) & 1] other sources additionally. The default setting here is backward compatible.
= 11457
12989 Speed detection 2 Determined by This LogicsManager allows different sources to generate the general speed
LogicsManager flag. This will be taken into account for some monitoring functions.
87.69
Notes
[(02.36 Speed
electr. OR 02.37 The former easYgen was fixed to the electrical frequency always. The default
Speed rpm) & 1] setting here is backward compatible.
= 11458
12970 MAN engine 2 Determined by With the rising edge of this LogicsManager equation an engine start com‐
start LogicsManager mand in operating mode MANUAL is initiated. The state TRUE of this LM
87.50 inhibits the start command in MANUAL.
[(0 & 1) &1]
= 11439
12971 MAN engine 2 Determined by With the rising edge of this LogicsManager equation an engine stop com‐
stop LogicsManager mand in operating mode MANUAL is initiated. The state TRUE of this LM
87.59 inhibits the start command in MANUAL.
[(0 & 1) &1]
=11448
12999 Release 2 Determined by Switch to activate the delayed engine monitoring e.g., oil pressure, under fre‐
eng.mon. LogicsManager quency, ...
87.70
Notes
[(02.34 Firing
speed electr. & For more details see description below.
02.35 Firing
speed rpm) &
03.28 Start/Gas]
tON = 0.00; tOFF
= 0.00]
= 11459
Release Engine Monitoring This LogicsManager equation (ID = 12999 with logical command
variable 11459) enables or blocks all monitoring functions, which
are speed related by enabled setting: “Delayed by engine speed”:
n Under/Over frequency
n Under speed
n Under voltage
n ...

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Engine > Magnetic Pickup Unit
In the default setting of the easYgen the engine start/stop is exe‐

cuted by the easYgen directly. So the engine monitoring is
released, if the control energizes the solenoid valve (Start/Gas
11657) and the firing speed is reached. In the moment the
easYgen removes the solenoid valve the monitoring is disabled.
This avoids wrong alarms during the engine stopping procedure.
In cases the start/stop of the drive is executed from outside, the
command variable 03.28 Start/Gas (11657) is replaced by a com‐
mand from outside i.e. any discrete input (09.XX). With starting the
drive the operator gives the command for monitoring. With stop‐
ping the drive the command has to be removed to avoid wrong
alarms during the engine stopping procedure.
Fig. 165: Release Engine Monitoring
screen
The delayed engine monitoring can be seen with
the upcoming “Eye” symbol in the single line dia‐
gram.
4.4.1.3 Magnetic Pickup Unit
To configure the MPU input, the number of teeth on the flywheel

detected by the magnetic pick up (MPU) or the number of pickup
pulses per revolution of the engine must be configured.
The table below shows the speed measuring range for various fly‐
wheel teeth numbers (parameter 1602 Ä p. 198) and rated speeds
(parameter 1601 Ä p. 505) for a minimum signal voltage of 2 Vrms.
Fly wheel teeth Rated speed [rpm] Speed measuring range

[rpm]
10 1500 1200 to 4500
10 1800 1200 to 5400
10 3000 1200 to 9000
10 3600 1200 to 10800
25 750 480 to 2250
25 1500 480 to 4500
25 1800 480 to 5400
25 3000 480 to 9000
25 3600 480 to 10800
50 750 240 to 2250
50 1500 240 to 4500
50 1800 240 to 5400
50 3000 240 to 9000
50 3600 240 to 10800
100 750 120 to 2250
100 1500 120 to 4500
100 1800 120 to 5400
100 3000 120 to 6000

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Engine > Magnetic Pickup Unit
Fly wheel teeth Rated speed [rpm] Speed measuring range

[rpm]
100 3600 120 to 6000
150 750 80 to 2250
150 1500 80 to 4000
150 1800 80 to 4000
150 3000 80 to 4000
150 3600 80 to 4000
200 750 60 to 2250
200 1500 60 to 3000
200 1800 60 to 3000
200 3000 60 to 3000
260 750 50 to 2250
260 1500 50 to 2300
260 1800 50 to 2300
280 750 45 to 2100
280 1500 45 to 2100
280 1800 45 to 2100
300 750 40 to 2000
300 1500 40 to 2000
300 1800 40 to 2000
400 750 30 to 1500
400 1500 30 to 1500
500 750 24 to 1200
600 750 20 to 1200
700 750 18 to 850
800 750 15 to 750
Table 67: MPU input - typical configurations

[Default]
1600 MPU input 2 [On] Speed monitoring of the engine is carried out by the MPU or via ECU/J1939.
(Pickup) Off Speed/frequency monitoring of the generator set (the engine) is performed by
measuring the frequency of the generator.
15155 Engine speed 2 [Internal] The internal MPU input is used as engine speed source.
source
ECU/J1939 An external ECU/J1939 signal is used as speed source.
1602 Fly wheel teeth 2 2 to 800 Number of pulse per revolution/teeth on the flywheel.
[118] Notes
This parameter is only applicable if parameter 15155 Ä p. 198 is set to
"Internal".

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Engine > Idle Mode
4.4.1.4 Idle Mode

General notes When the engine is operated at idle speed, undervoltage, underfre‐
quency, and underspeed monitoring as well as the monitoring of
the flexible limits 33 through 40 are not performed.
This function allows for a controlled operation of an engine without
alarm messages at a lower speed (below the configured under‐
speed monitoring values) for e.g. a warm-up operation with low
emission.
The frequency controller output does not control the idle speed; it
will remain in initial state position. The GCB cannot be closed in
idle mode.
A message may be output to a relay here using the LogicsManager
(Idle mode is active, command variable 04.15), e.g. as a signal for
a speed controller. The display indicates "Idle run active" during
idle mode.
The idle mode can be only used if the function is

supported by the ECU or the frequency controller.
The normal operation monitoring limits will be ena‐

bled again, if one of the following conditions is ful‐
filled:
– Idle mode has ended and generator frequency
has reached rated frequency -1 Hz. (e.g. 49 Hz
at 50 Hz rated)
– Idle mode has ended and engine delayed mon‐
itoring (parameter 3315 Ä p. 194) has expired.
The flexible limits 33 through 40 are disabled

during idle mode operation ( Ä Chapter 4.5.5
“Flexible Limits” on page 465).

[Default]
12570 Auto idle mode 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the engine will
LogicsManager be operated in idle mode automatically for the configured time during start-up.
86.20 Monitoring is limited as described above.
[(0 & 1) ≥1 0] This function may always be configured to "1" for example.
= 15719 Notes
9.3.1 “LogicsManager Overview” on page 986.
12550 Constant idle 2 Determined by As long as the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the engine
run LogicsManager will be continuously operated in idle mode. Monitoring is limited as described
86.14 above. A key switch via a DI may be configured here for example.
(Continuous idle
mode) [(0 & 1) & 0] Notes
= 10713 The idle mode is blocked if the GCB is already closed.

Configuration
Configure Application > Inputs And Outputs > Function Of Inputs And Out...

[Default]
3328 Automatic idle 2 1 to 9999 s The automatic idle mode is active for the time configured here. Monitoring is
time limited as described above during this time.
[30 s]
(Time for auto‐
matic idle mode)
3329 During emer‐ 2 Yes If an emergency or critical operation is enabled, the engine will go to rated
gency / critical speed only after completing the configured idle mode.
(Idle mode pos‐ [No] If an emergency or critical operation is enabled, no idle run will be performed.
sible during The engine will go directly to rated speed.
emergency /
critical opera‐
tion)
4.4.2 Inputs And Outputs
Changed from easYgen series to easYgen-XT

series:
External Analog Inputs/Analog Outputs (AI/AO)
configuration is enhanced from % values only to to
% values or absolute values in addition.
4.4.2.1 Function Of Inputs And Outputs

4.4.2.1.1 Discrete Inputs
The discrete inputs may be grouped into two categories:
n Programmable
– The discrete input has been assigned a default function
using either the LogicsManager or preconfigured alarms
such as "emergency stop".
– The following sections describe how these functions are
assigned.
– The function of a discrete input can be changed if required.
– The following description of the inputs, labeled with "pro‐
grammable", refers to the preconfiguration.
n Fixed
– The discrete input has a specific function that cannot be
changed depending upon the configured application mode.
Input Type/Preset Description
Discrete input [DI 01] Programmable This discrete input is configured as alarm class F and is not
delayed by the engine speed.
Preconfigured to "Emergency STOP"
Discrete input [DI 02] Programmable Enabled in the AUTOMATIC operation mode
Preconfigured to "Startrequest in AUTO" This discrete input is configured as a Control input in the alarm
class and is not delayed by the engine speed.
n Energized
If the unit is in the AUTOMATIC operation mode (selected
with the operating mode selection push button on the front
panel) the controlled engine is started automatically.
n De-energized
The engine is stopped.

Configuration
Discrete input [DI 03] Programmable This discrete input is configured as alarm class B and is
Preconfigured to "Low oil pressure"
Discrete input [DI 04] Programmable This discrete input is configured as alarm class B and is not
Preconfigured to "Coolant temperature"
Discrete input [DI 05] Programmable This discrete input is used as a remote acknowledgment for
alarms. The input is normally de-energized. When an alarm is
Preconfigured to "External acknowledg‐ to be acknowledged the input is energized. The first time an
ment" alarm in acknowledged, the centralized alarm/horn is silenced.
When the input is energized a second time, all alarms, which
are no longer active, will be acknowledged.
This discrete input is configured as a Control input in the alarm
Discrete input [DI 06] Programmable Only applicable for application mode
Preconfigured to "Release MCB" This discrete input is configured as a Control input in the alarm
n Energized
The MCB is enabled and closure of the breaker is per‐
mitted.
n De-energized
The MCB is not enabled and closure of the breaker is not
permitted. This function permits a supervisory control (i.e.
a PLC) to allow the closure of the MCB by the genset con‐
trol.
Discrete input [DI 07] Fixed to "MCB open reply" Only applicable for application mode
This input implements negative function logic.
The controller utilizes the CB auxiliary (B) contacts into this dis‐
crete input to reflect the state of the MCB.
This discrete input must be energized to show when the
breaker is open and de-energized to show when the MCB is
closed. The status of the MCB is displayed on the screen.
This input is usually used in all breaker modes to change
between frequency/voltage and power/power factor control
(refer to note below).
Discrete input [DI 08] Fixed to "GCB open reply" Only applicable for application modes and
This input implements negative function logic.
crete input to reflect the state of the GCB. This discrete input
must be energized to show when the breaker is open and de-
energized to show when the GCB is closed. The status of the
GCB is displayed on the screen.
This input is usually used in all breaker modes to enable
reverse power protection, overload MOP protection, mains
decoupling and the activation of the load sharing (refer to note
below).
Discrete input [DI 09] Programmable Only applicable for application mode , and
Fixed to "Reply: GGB open" if GGB con‐ This input implements negative function logic.
trol is activated
crete input to reflect the state of the GGB.
This discrete input must be energized to show when the
breaker is open and de-energized to show when the GGB is
closed. The status of the GGB is displayed on the screen.
This input is usually used in all breaker modes to change
between frequency/voltage and power/power factor control
(refer to note below).

Configuration
Discrete input [DI 10] Programmable Only applicable for application mode , and
Fixed to "Load busbar is dead" if GGB The controller utilizes an external voltage relay output to reflect
control is activated the condition of the load busbar. The discrete input must be
energized to show the load busbar is dead. The status of the
load busbar is displayed on the screen.
Discrete input [DI 11 - Programmable Each DI can be separately set-up with description, delay, oper‐
DI 23 ] ation, alarm class, self acknowledgment, and enable.
"Discrete Input XX"
The genset control usually decides whether it per‐

forms voltage and frequency (V/f) control or power
and power factor (P/PF) control using the reply of
the circuit breakers, i.e. the discrete inputs DI 7
and DI 8.
– If the GCB is open, only V/f control is per‐
formed
– If the GCB is closed and the MCB is open, V/f
control as well as active and reactive power
load sharing is performed
– If the GCB is closed and the MCB is closed,
P/PF control or import power control with load
sharing and PF control is performed.
A different configuration is possible and depends
on the following LogicsManager (parameter
12940 Ä p. 317/Ä p. 1038 "P control" and param‐
eter 12941 Ä p. 281/Ä p. 1038 "Q control")
Alarm inputs
All discrete inputs, which are not assigned a func‐
tion, can be used as alarm or control inputs. These
discrete inputs can be freely configured as such
( Ä Chapter 4.4.2.2 “Discrete Inputs”
on page 205).
4.4.2.1.2 Discrete Outputs

n Programmable
– The discrete output has been assigned a default function
using the LogicsManager.
– The following text describes how these functions are
assigned using the LogicsManager.
– It is possible to change the function of the discrete output if
required.
– The following description of the outputs, labeled with "pro‐
grammable", refers to the preconfiguration.
n Fixed
– The discrete output has a specific function that cannot be
changed depending upon the configured application mode.
– The discrete output cannot be viewed or changed in the
LogicsManager.
– However, the discrete output may be programmable in
some application modes.

Configuration
The discrete outputs can be "programmable" or

"fixed" depending on the application mode (param‐
eter 3444 Ä p. 251).
For information on the function of the discrete
outputs depending on the configured application
mode refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.2.3 “Discrete Outputs
(LogicsManager)” on page 209.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Uncontrolled operation due to unknown configura‐
tion
The circuit breaker commands must be checked
before every commissioning because the relays
can be used for different applications and can be
assigned to various functions.
– Make sure that all relay outputs are configured
correctly.
Output Type/Preset Description
Relay output [R 01] Programmable This discrete output is used to ensure that the internal functions
of the controller are operating properly.
Fixed to "Ready for operation"
It is possible to configure additional events, which cause the con‐
CAUTION! Only relay [R 01] has an tacts of this discrete output to open, using the LogicsManager.
inverse logic. The relay opens (all other
relays close), if the logical output of the
LogicsManager becomes TRUE.
Relay output [R 02] Programmable When a centralized alarm is issued, this discrete output is ena‐
bled.
Preconfigured to "Centralized alarm (horn)"
A horn or a buzzer maybe activated via this discrete output.
Pressing the button with the "3" symbol will acknowledge the
centralized alarm and disable this discrete output.
The discrete output will re-enable if a new fault condition resulting
in a centralized alarm occurs. The centralized alarm is initiated by
class B alarms or higher.
Relay output [R 03] Programmable The generator starting circuit is engaged when this discrete
output is enabled.
Preconfigured to "Starter"
This discrete output will enable depending on the start sequence
(refer to the start sequence description in Ä Chapter 4.4.1.1
“Configure Engine (general)” on page 182) to energize the starter
for the configured starter time (parameter 3306 Ä p. 194).

Configuration
Relay output [R 04] Programmable Fuel solenoid

Preconfigured to "Start/Gas" The fuel solenoid for the diesel engine is energized when this dis‐
crete output is enabled. If the engine is given a stop command or
engine speed drops below the configured firing speed, this dis‐
crete output is disabled immediately.
Gas valve
The gas valve for the engine is energized when this discrete
output is enabled. If the engine is given a stop command or
engine speed drops below the configured firing speed, this dis‐
crete output is disabled immediately.
Relay output [R 05] Programmable Preglow

Preconfigured to "Preglow" When this discrete output is enabled, the diesel engine's glow
plugs are energized. This function only occurs if the control has
been configured for diesel engine start/stop logic.
Ignition
When this discrete output is enabled, the gas engine's ignition is
enabled. This function only occurs if the control has been config‐
ured for gas engine start/stop logic.
Notes
Refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.1.1 “Configure Engine (general)”
on page 182
Relay output [R 06] Fixed to "Command: close GCB" Only applicable for application modes and .
The "Command: close GCB" output issues the signal for the GCB
to close. This relay may be configured as an impulse or steady
output signal depending on parameter 3414 Ä p. 254.
Impulse
If the output is configured as "Impulse", the discrete output will
enable for the time configured in parameter 3416 Ä p. 255). An
external holding coil and sealing contacts must be installed into
the GCB closing circuit if this discrete output is configured for an
impulse output signal.
Steady
If the relay is configured as "Steady", the relay will energize and
remain enabled as long as the discrete input "Reply GCB"
remains de-energized and the generator and busbar voltages are
identical. If a class C or higher alarm occurs, this discrete will dis‐
able and the GCB will open immediately.
Relay output [R 07] Fixed to "Command: open GCB" Not applicable for application mode
The parameter 3403 Ä p. 254 defines how this relay functions.
If this output is configured as "N.O.", the relay contacts close
resulting in the GCB opening circuit energizing.
If this output is configured as "N.C.", the relay contacts open
resulting in the GCB opening circuit de-energizing.
If this output is configured as "Not used", this relay is freely con‐
figurable.
Application mode
The open GCB command remains enabled until the GCB is man‐
ually closed and the discrete input "Reply GCB" is energized. The
open GCB command will be issued when a fault condition or an
engine shut down occurs.
Application mode or
The controller enables the open GCB command when the GCB is
to be opened for switching operations. If the discrete input "Reply
GCB" is energized, the open GCB command will be disabled.

Configuration
Configure Application > Inputs And Outputs > Discrete Inputs
Relay output [R 08] Fixed to "Command: close MCB" Only applicable for application mode .
The discrete output "Command: close MCB" is an impulse output
signal.
This discrete output is enabled for the time configured in param‐
eter 3417 Ä p. 261.
An external holding coil and sealing contacts must be utilized with
the MCB closing circuit.
Relay output [R 09] Fixed to "Command: open MCB" Only applicable for application mode .
The controller enables this discrete output when the MCB is to be
opened for switching operations.
If the discrete input "Reply MCB" is energized, the discrete output
"Command: open MCB" is disabled.
Relay output [R 10] Programmable Only applicable for application mode , and .
Fixed to"Command: close GGB" if GGB is The discrete output "Command: close GGB" is an impulse output
activated otherwise preconfigured to "Aux‐ signal.
iliary services"
This discrete output is enabled for the time configured in param‐
eter 5726 Ä p. 258.
An external holding coil and sealing contacts must be utilized with
the GGB closing circuit.
Preconfiguration "Auxiliary services":
The auxiliary services output (LogicsManager 03.01) will be ena‐
bled with the start command (prior to the engine start because of
the prerun time) and remains enabled as long as the engine is
running.
It will be disabled after the engine has stopped and the postrun
time has expired(i.e. for operating a cooling pump). Ä “Auxiliary
operations” on page 192 for this behavior.
The auxiliary services output (LogicsManager 03.01) is always
enabled in MANUAL operation mode.
Relay output [R 11] Programmable Only applicable for application mode , and .
Fixed to"Command: open GGB" if GGB is The controller enables this discrete output when the GGB is to be
activated otherwise preconfigured to opened for switching operations.
"Alarm class A and B"
If the discrete input "Reply GGB" is energized, the discrete output
"Command: open GGB" is disabled.
Preconfiguration "Alarm class A and B":
This discrete output is enabled when a warning alarm (class A or
B alarm) is issued ( Ä Chapter 9.5.1 “Alarm Classes”
on page 1078).
After all warning alarms have been acknowledged, this discrete
output will disable.
Relay output [R 12] Programmable This discrete output is enabled when a shutdown alarm (class C
or higher alarm; refer to Ä Chapter 9.5.1 “Alarm Classes”
Preconfigured to "Shutdown alarm" on page 1078 for more information) is issued.
After all shutdown alarms have been acknowledged, this discrete
output will disable.
LogicsManager of DO xx / Relay output [R xx]: All discrete outputs not assigned to a defined function, may be
freely configured via the LogicsManager.
Notes
[R 13 to 22] are freely configurable via LogicsManager.
4.4.2.2 Discrete Inputs

General notes Discrete inputs may be configured to normally open (N.O.) or nor‐
mally closed (N.C.) states.

Configuration
Fig. 166: Discrete inputs - alarm/control inputs - operation logic

(state N.O.)
In the state N.O.:
n No potential is present during normal operation.
n If an alarm is issued or control operation is performed, the input
is energized.
Fig. 167: Discrete inputs - alarm/control inputs - operation logic

(state N.C.)
In the state N.C.:
n A potential is continuously present during normal operation
n If an alarm is issued or control operation is performed, the input
is de-energized.
All reply messages from breakers are evaluated as

N.C.
Alarm inputs may also be configured as control

inputs and then be used as command variables in
the LogicsManager.
The discrete inputs 1 to 6 are pre-configured to

various functions and differ in their default values.
However, they may still be configured freely.
The discrete inputs 7 & 8 are always used for the
circuit breaker replies and cannot be configured.
If a discrete input has been configured with a shut-

down alarm that has been enabled to self-acknowl‐
edge, and has been configured as engine delayed
the following scenario may happen:
– The discrete input shuts down the engine
because of its alarm class.
– Due to the engine stopping, all engine delayed
alarms are ignored.
– The alarm class is acknowledged automati‐
cally.
– The alarm will self-acknowledge and clear the
fault message that shut the engine down.
This prevents the fault from being analyzed.
– After a short delay, the engine will restart.
– After the engine monitoring delay expires, the
fault that originally shut down the engine will do
so again. This cycle will continue to repeat until
corrected.

Configuration
Internal discrete inputs - terminal

assignment
Number Terminal Assignment (all application modes)
[DI 01] 67 Pre-configured for Alarm input 'Emergency Stop'
[DI 02] 68 Pre-configured for Control input 'Start request in AUTO'
[DI 03] 69 Pre-configured for Alarm input 'Low oil pressure'
[DI 04] 70 Pre-configured for Alarm input 'Coolant temperature'
[DI 05] 71 Pre-configured for Control input 'External acknowledgment'
[DI 06] 72 Pre-configured for Control input 'Release MCB'
[DI 07] 73 Reply MCB
[DI 08] 74 Reply GCB
[DI 09] 75 Pre-configured for Alarm input
Number Terminal Assignment (all application modes)

Configuration
Parameter IDs
The following parameters are used to configure the
discrete inputs 1 through 12. The parameter IDs
refer to discrete input 1.
– Refer to Ä Table 68 “Discrete inputs - param‐
eter IDs” on page 208 for the parameter IDs of
the parameters DI 2 through DI 12(23).
DI 1 DI 2 DI 3 DI 4 DI 5 DI 6 DI 7 DI 8 DI 9 DI 10 DI 11 DI 12
MCB GCB
open open
only only
Descrip 1400 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460 1480 1488 1496 1504
tion
Delay 1200 1220 1240 1260 1280 1300 1320 1360 1380 1205 1225
Opera‐ 1201 1221 1241 1261 1281 1301 1321 1361 1381 1206 1226
tion
Alarm 1202 1222 1242 1262 1282 1302 1322 1362 1382 1207 1227
class
Self 1204 1224 1244 1264 1284 1304 1324 1364 1384 1209 1229
acknowl
edged
Ena‐ 1203 1223 1243 1263 1283 1303 1323 1363 1383 1208 1228
bled
Table 68: Discrete inputs - parameter IDs
DI 13 DI 14 DI 15 DI 16 DI 17 DI 18 DI 19 DI 20 DI 21 DI 22 DI 23
Text 1512 1520 1528 1536 1544 1552 1560 1568 1576 1584 1592
Opera‐ 1246 1266 1286 1306 1326 1346 1366 1386 1211 1231 1251
tion
Delay 1245 1265 1285 1305 1325 1345 1365 1385 1210 1230 1250
Alarm 1247 1267 1287 1307 1327 1347 1367 1387 1212 1232 1252
class
Delayed 1248 1268 1288 1308 1328 1348 1368 1388 1213 1233 1253
by
engine
speed
Self 1249 1269 1289 1309 1329 1349 1369 1389 1214 1234 1254
acknowl‐
edged
Table 69: Discrete inputs - parameter IDs

[Default]
1400 DI {x} Descrip‐ 2 user defined (up

tion to 39 charac‐
ters) for default
see Ä Table If the discrete input is enabled with alarm class, this text is displayed on the
on page 207 control unit screen.
The event history will store this text message as well.

Configuration
Configure Application > Inputs And Outputs > Discrete Outputs (LogicsMa...

[Default]
Notes
This parameter may only be configured using ToolKit. 19 characters are best
for HMI readability - text strings with 20 and more characters but without a
blank in between are NOT visible as headline on DI {x} detail screen. DI
selection screen on HMI/display works fine with up to 30 characters; others
are overwritten by mandatory screen symbols. Please verify the length on the
display for best view.
If the DI is used as control input with the alarm class "Control", you may enter
here its function (e.g. external acknowledgment) for a better overview within
the configuration.
1200 DI {x} Delay 2 0.08 to 650.00 s A delay time in seconds can be assigned to each alarm or control input.
[0.20 s] The discrete input must be enabled without interruption for the delay time
before the unit reacts.
If the discrete input is used within the LogicsManager this delay is taken into
account as well.
1201 DI {x} Operation 2 The discrete inputs may be operated by an normally open (N.O.) or normally
closed (N.C.) contact.
The idle circuit current input can be used to monitor for a wire break.
A positive or negative voltage polarity referred to the reference point of the DI
may be applied.
[N.O.] The discrete input is analyzed as "enabled" by energizing the input (normally
open).
N.C. The discrete input is analyzed as "enabled" by de-energizing the input (nor‐
mally closed).
1202 DI {x} Alarm 2 An alarm class may be assigned to the discrete input.
class
The alarm class is executed when the discrete input is enabled.
A/[B] Warning alarm classes
C/D/E/F Shutdown alarm classes
Control Signal to issue a control command only.

If "control" has been configured, there will be no entry in the event history and
a function out of the LogicsManager ( Ä Chapter 9.3.1 “LogicsManager Over‐
view” on page 986) can be assigned to the discrete input.
1204 DI {x} Self 2 Yes The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no longer
acknowledge detected.
[No] The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault condition is
no longer detected.
The alarm must be acknowledged and reset by manually pressing the appro‐
priate buttons or by activating the LogicsManager output "External acknowl‐
edgment" (via a discrete input or via an interface).
Notes
If the DI is configured with the alarm class "Control", self acknowledgment is
always active.
1203 DI {x} Enabled 2 [Always] Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled.
87.70 Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine monitoring is ena‐
LM:Eng.mon bled. This is determined through the LogicsManager equation "Release
engine monitoring".
For xx = 1 to 32: The monitoring is executed, if the LogicsManager "Flag {xx}" is TRUE.
96.{xx} Example:
LM: Flag{xx} 96.01 LM: Flag1, 96.02 LM: Flag2, ..., 96.32 LM: Flag32
4.4.2.3 Discrete Outputs (LogicsManager)

The discrete outputs are controlled via the LogicsManager.

Configuration
For information on the LogicsManager and its

default settings see Ä Chapter 9.3.1 “LogicsMan‐
ager Overview” on page 986.
Some outputs are assigned a function according to the application

mode (see following table).
Relay Application mode
No. Ter‐ None GCB GCB GCB/M GCB/GG GCB/GG GCB/LS GCB/L- GCB/G GCB/L- GCB/L-
minal open CB B B/MCB 5 MCB GB/L- GGB GGB/L-
MCB MCB
[R 01] 41/42 'Ready for operation'; additionally programmable with LogicsManager

CAUTION! Only relay [R 01] has an inverse logic. The relay opens (all other relays close), if the logical output of
the LogicsManager becomes TRUE.
[R 02] 43/46 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'Centralized alarm (horn)'
[R 03] 44/46 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'Starter'
[R 04] 45/46 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'Diesel: Fuel solenoid, Gas: Gas valve'
[R 05] 47/48 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'Diesel: Preglow, Gas: Ignition'
[R 06] 49/50 LogicsManager Command: close GCB
[R 07] 51/52 Logi‐ Command: open GCB

csMan‐
ager
[R 08] 53/54 LogicsManager Com‐ Logi‐ Com‐ LogicsManager

mand: csMan‐ mand:
close ager close
MCB MCB
[R 09] 55/56 LogicsManager; pre- Com‐ Logi‐ Com‐ LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'Mains decoupling'
assigned with 'Mains mand: csMan‐ mand:
decoupling' open ager; open
MCB pre- MCB
assigned
with
'Mains
decou‐
pling'
[R 10] 57/60 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with Command: close LogicsManager; Com‐ LogicsManager;
'Auxiliary services' GGB pre-assigned with mand: pre-assigned with
'Auxiliary services' close 'Auxiliary services'
GGB
[R 11] 58/60 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with Command: open LogicsManager; Com‐ LogicsManager;
'Alarm class A, B active' GGB pre-assigned with mand: pre-assigned with
'Alarm class A, B open 'Alarm class A, B
active' GGB active'
[R 12] 59/60 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'Alarm class C, D, E, F active'
Table 70: Internal relay outputs - assignment
R 13 - R 22 are valid for package 2 only.
Relay Configuration
No. Terminal
[R 13] 121/122 LogicsManager

Configuration
R 13 - R 22 are valid for package 2 only.
Relay Configuration
No. Terminal
Table 71: Internal relay outputs - assignment
CAUTION!

[Default]
12580 Ready for op. 2 Determined by The "Ready for operation" relay is energized by default if the power supply
Off LogicsManager exceeds 8 V.
99.01
(Ready for oper‐ Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the relay will
ation OFF) [(0 & 0) & 1] be de-energized. This LogicsManager output may be configured with addi‐
tional conditions, which may signal a PLC an "out of operation" condition by
= 11870 de-energizing the relay on terminals 41/42, like "shutdown alarm" or no
"AUTO mode" present.
Notes
12110 Relay {x} 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the relay will
LogicsManager be energized.
(See ID For (pre- 99.02
table defined) func‐ Notes
below) tion see assign‐ [(03.05 Horn &
ment table 1) & 1]
above) For information on the LogicsManager and its default settings see Ä Chapter

Configuration
Configure Application > Inputs And Outputs > Analog Inputs
Parameter IDs
The parameter IDs above refers to relay 2.
– Refer to Ä Table 72 “Discrete outputs - relay
parameter IDs” on page 212 for the parameter
IDs of the parameters for relay 3 to relay 12.
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R 10 R 11 R 12
Parameter ID 12580 12110 12310 12320 12130 12140 12150 12160 12170 12180 12560 12590
Table 72: Discrete outputs - relay parameter IDs
R 13 R 14 R 15 R 16 R 17 R 18 R 19 R 20 R 21 R 22
Parameter ID 12690 12700 12710 12720 12730 12740 12750 12760 12770 12780
Table 73: Discrete outputs - relay parameter IDs
4.4.2.4 Analog Inputs

4.4.2.4.1 Analog Inputs (general)
Displayed units
Conversion restricted to ...

The conversions described below are only active
for parameters “Unit” of
– J1939 pressure and temperature values
and
– analog inputs which units are configured as
[°C] or [bar].
Exact string mandatory

Type in* the “Unit” string carefully!
For example:
– Temperature works with the exact string[°C]
only but not with [°c] or [degC] or [° C] ...
– Pressure needs the exact string [bar] only but
don't work with [Bar] or [BAR] ... !
*) Parameters “Unit” are:
AI {x} 1034, 1084, ...; external AI{x} 16208,
16218, ...; PID {x} setpoint 7494, 7495, ...; cus‐
tomer screens {x.y} 7692, 7697, ...

Configuration

[Default]
3630 Convert bar to 1 [No] The pressure value is displayed in Bar.

psi
Yes The pressure value is converted and then displayed in psi.
3631 Convert °C to °F 1 [NO] The temperature is displayed in °C (Celsius).
Yes The temperature is displayed in °F (Fahrenheit).
User Defined Tables A/B (Characteristic Curves Setup)

General notes The characteristic curves of "Table A" and "Table B" (freely config‐
urable over 9 defined points) are independently configurable and
can be used among other predefined curves for each of the analog
inputs. Each point may be scaled to related values measured from
the analog input (0 to 250/500/2500 Ohms, 0 to 10 V, or 0 to
20 mA), so that the actual display and monitoring reflects the corre‐
sponding values (e.g. 200 to 600 kW).
The created characteristic curves can be used for scaling the
analog inputs.
Fig. 168: Characteristic curves (example table)

The X and Y junction may be moved within the range of values and
the space between setpoints can be nonuniform.
When configuring the X coordinates, ensure the coordinates
always increase in scale continuously.
In the following example the first set of x/y coordinates is correct
and the second set of x/y coordinates is wrong:
(correct)
X-coordinate 0 10 20 40 50 60 80 90 100
Y-coordinate -100 -95 -50 -10 +3 +17 +18 +100 +2000
wrong:
X-coordinate 0 10 20 60 20 30 80 40 100
Y-coordinate -100 -50 -95 +18 +17 +3 -10 +2000 +100

Configuration
If the first X coordinate is >0, all values smaller

than the first X value will be output with the first
Y value.
If the last Y value is <100, all higher values will be
output with the value of Y9.
All parameters used to configure the characteristic

curve follow the samples listed below.
– Refer to Ä “Parameter IDs and default values
for all scaling points” on page 214 for the
parameter IDs of the individual parameters for
all scaling points of tables 'A' and 'B'.
Scaling points settings

[Default]
3560 to Table {A/B} X- 2 -900000.000 to The analog input is assigned to a curve. This parameter defines the actual
3568 value {1..9} 900000.000 value assigned to each of the nine points along the X-axis of the total range of
the selected hardware for analog input.
or [0, ...]
3610 to Example
3618
If a 0 to 20 mA input is configured and the X1-coordinate = 0, then the value
configured for Y1 is output for an input of 0 mA.
3550 to Table {A/B} Y- 2 -21000000.00 to This parameter defines the Y-coordinate (the displayed and monitored value)
3558 value {1..9} 21000000.00 at the corresponding X-coordinate.
or [0, ...]
3600 to Example
3608
If a 0 to 20 mA input is configured and the X2-coordinate = 10, then the value
configured for the Y2-coordinate is output for an input of 10 mA.
Table 74: Scaling point sample
Parameter IDs and default values for

all scaling points
Scaling point no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Table A - X value 3560 3561 3562 3563 3564 3565 3566 3567 3568
[0] [2.5] [5] [7.5] [10] [12.5] [15] [17.5] [20]
Table A - Y value 3550 3551 3552 3553 3554 3555 3556 3557 3558
[0] [10] [20] [30] [45] [60] [70] [85] [100]
Table B - X value 3610 3611 3612 3613 3614 3615 3616 3617 3618
[0] [2.5] [5] [7.5] [10] [12.5] [15] [17.5] [20]
Table B - Y value 3600 3601 3602 3603 3604 3605 3606 3607 3608
[0] [10] [20] [30] [45] [60] [70] [85] [100]

Configuration
4.4.2.4.2 Analog Inputs 1 to 3 (0 to 2000 Ω | 0/4 to 20 m A | 0 to 1 V)

General notes
Monitoring of the analog inputs (overrun/underrun)
must be configured manually to the flexible limits
( Ä Chapter 4.5.5 “Flexible Limits” on page 465).

[Default]
1025 Analog input {x}: 2 user-defined (up The event history will store this text message and it is also displayed on the
Description to 39 charac‐ visualization screen.
1075 ters)
If the programmed limit value of the analog input has been reached or
1125 [Analog inp. {x}] exceeded this text is displayed in the control unit screen.
Notes
blank in between are NOT visible as headline on AI {x} detail screen. AI
selection screen on HMI/display works fine with up to 30 characters; others
are overwritten by mandatory screen symbols.
The max. number of characters depends on the numbers of Bytes for each
character.
Please verify the length on the display for best view.
1000 Analog input {x}: 2 According to the following parameters different measuring ranges are pos‐
Type sible at the analog inputs.
1050
[Off] The analog input is switched off.
1100
VDO 5 bar The value of the analog input is interpreted with the VDO characteristics 0 to
5 bar.
10 bar.
VDO 150 °C The value of the analog input is interpreted with the VDO characteristics 50 to
150 °C.
120 °C.
Pt100 The value of the analog input is interpreted with a Pt100 characteristic.
AB 94099 The value of the analog input is interpreted with a AB 94099 characteristic.
Linear Each analog input may be assigned to a linear characteristic curve, which can
be only used for the respective defined input [T{x}] (x = 1 to 3). The minimum
value refers to the value configured as "Sender value at display min." (param‐
eter 1039 Ä p. 216, 1089 Ä p. 216 or 1139 Ä p. 216). The maximum value
refers to the value configured as "Sender value at display max." (param‐
eter 1040 Ä p. 216, 1090 Ä p. 216 or 1140 Ä p. 216).
Table A The analog input is assigned to a characteristic curve which is defined over
9 points (stored in a table). Two independent tables (table A and table B) may
Table B be allocated to the analog inputs.
Notes
Points of these tables must be programmed into the control unit before use.
For the characteristic curves of the inputs refer to Ä Chapter 9.1.2 “VDO
Inputs Characteristics” on page 762.
1001 User defined 2 -21000000.00 to The value (y-axis) to be displayed for the minimum of the input range must be
min. display 21000000.00 entered here.
1051 value
[0] Notes
1101 (User defined
minimum dis‐ This parameter is only visible if the parameter "Type" (1000 Ä p. 215/
play value) Ä p. 227/1050 Ä p. 215/1100 Ä p. 215) is configured to "Linear".

Configuration

[Default]
1002 User defined 2 -21000000.00 to The value (y-axis) to be displayed for the maximum of the input range must
max. display 21000000.00 be entered here.
1052 value
[2000] Notes
1102 (User defined
maximum dis‐ This parameter is only visible if the parameter "Type" (1000 Ä p. 215/
play value) Ä p. 227/1050 Ä p. 215/1100 Ä p. 215) is configured to "Linear".
1039 Sender value at 2 0.000 to The value (x-axis) of the configured input range, which shall correspond with
display min. 2000.000 the minimum value configured for the display, must be entered here. This
1089 specifies the lower limit of the hardware range to be measured.
(Sender value at [0.000]
1139 display min‐ Example
imum)
If the input range is 0 to 20 mA and the value configured here is 4, an analog
input value of 4 mA would correspond with the minimum value configured for
the display.
Notes
This parameter is only visible if the parameter "Type" (1000 Ä p. 215/
Ä p. 227/1050 Ä p. 215/1100 Ä p. 215) is configured to "Linear".
1040 Sender value at 2 0.000 to The value (y-axis) of the configured input range, which shall correspond with
display max. 2000.000 the maximum value configured for the display, must be entered here. This
1090 specifies the upper limit of the hardware range to be measured.
1140 display max‐ Example
imum)
input value of 20 mA would correspond with the maximum value configured
for the display.
Notes
This parameter is only visible if the parameter "Type" (1000 Ä p. 215/
Ä p. 227/1050 Ä p. 215/1100 Ä p. 215) is configured to "Linear".
Table 75: Analog Inputs 1 to 3 settings
Example: Hardware range 4 to 20

mA mapped to 0 to 1000 display
value
Fig. 169: Analog Input Mapping

Configuration

[Default]
1020 Sender type 2 The software in the control unit may be configured for various types of sen‐
sors. The configurable ranges apply to the linear analog input.
1070
[0 to 2000 The measuring range of the analog input is 0 to 2000 Ohms.
1120
Ohms]
0 to 20 mA The measuring range of the analog input is 0/4 to 20 mA.
0 to 1 V The measuring range of the analog input is 0 to 1 V.
Notes
If parameter "Type" (1000 Ä p. 215/Ä p. 227/1050 Ä p. 215/1100 Ä p. 215)
is set to "VDO xx" or "Pt100", this parameter must be configured to "0 to 2000
Ohm"!
1046 Offset 2 -20.0 to 20.0 The resistive input (the "0 to 2000 Ohms" analog input) may be calculated
Ohms with a permanent offset to adjust for inaccuracies.
1096
[0.0 Ohm] If the offset feature is utilized, the value configured in this parameter will be
1146 added to/subtracted from the measured resistive value.
This has the following effect to the measured values (please note tables in
Ä Chapter 9.1.2 “VDO Inputs Characteristics” on page 762):
Notes
This parameter is only visible if the parameter "Sender type"
(1020 Ä p. 217/1070 Ä p. 217/1120 Ä p. 217) is configured to "0 to 2000
Ohms".
VDO temperature and pressure senders use the ± range in different ways!
Please take care for sender documentation.
1035 Exponent for 2 -2 to 3 This is the exponent to adapt the decimal place of the actual value (parameter
protocol 1033/1083/1133) for the protocol format.
1085 [0]
Example
1135
Exponent is 3:
value of analog input {½/3} x 103 = value of analog input {½/3} x 1000
1033 Analog input {X} (displayed only) Current scaled value of the AI {X}
1003 Monitoring wire 2 The respective analog input can be monitored for wire breaks.
break
1053 If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "Wb: {Text of
Parameter [Description]}" (parameter
1103 1025 Ä p. 215/1075 Ä p. 215/1125 Ä p. 215).
The following configurations are used to monitor for wire breaks:
[Off] No wire break monitoring is performed.
High If the actual value rises over the maximum value (overshoot), this is identified
as a wire break.
Low If the actual value falls below the minimum value (undershoot), this is identi‐
fied as a wire break.
High/Low If the actual value rises over the maximum value (overshoot) or falls below
the minimum value (undershoot), this is identified as a wire break.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
Monitoring of the analog inputs (overrun/underrun) must be configured man‐
ually to the flexible limits ( Ä Chapter 4.5.5 “Flexible Limits” on page 465).
If the control unit detects that the measuring range for an analog input has
been exceeded and an alarm is issued, the limit value monitoring of this
analog input is disabled and an error message is displayed.
The measuring range is recognized as being exceeded and an alarm is
issued:
n 0 to 20 mA:
Minimum value 2 mA Undershooting
Maximum value 20.5 mA Overshooting
n 0 to 2000 Ohms:
Minimum value 20 Ohms Undershooting (Offset = 0 Ohm)
Maximum value 2040 Ohms Overshooting (Offset = 0 Ohm)
n 0 to 1 V:
No wire break monitoring
Resistive sender type only:

Depending on what was configured for the offset value (param‐
eter 1046 Ä p. 217/1096 Ä p. 217/1146 Ä p. 217) the displayed value may
be shifted.
This may result in a broken wire being recognized early or later than the
actual value being measured. (An offset of +20 Ohms will recognize a wire
break at 40 Ohms instead of 20 Ohms.)
A wire break is indicated in ToolKit by displaying an analog input value

"Error".
1004 Wire break 2 Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what
alarm class action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
1054
A/[B] Warning alarm classes
1104
C/D/E/F Shutdown alarm classes
Control Signal to issue a control command only
Notes
This parameter is only visible if wire break monitoring (parameter
1003 Ä p. 217/1053 Ä p. 217/1103 Ä p. 217) is not set to "Off"
For additional information refer to Ä Chapter 9.5.1 “Alarm Classes”
on page 1078.
1005 Self acknowl‐ 2 Yes The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no longer
edge wire break detected.
1055
1105
no longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged and reset by manually
pressing the appropriate buttons or by activating the LogicsManager output
"External acknowledgment" (via a discrete input or via an interface).
Notes
This parameter is only visible wire break monitoring (parameter
1003 Ä p. 217/1053 Ä p. 217/1103 Ä p. 217) is not set to "Off"
10113 Filter time con‐ 2 Off, 1 to 5 A low pass filter may be used to reduce the fluctuation of an analog input
stant for reading.
10114
0/4 to 20 mA The cut-off-frequency is defined as usual with 63% (e-1).
10116 and 0 to 1 V
Off The analog input is displayed without filtering.
1 Cut-off-frequency = 7.96 Hz (filter time constant = 0.02 s)
[3] Cut-off-frequency = 1.99 Hz (filter time constant = 0.08 s)

Configuration

[Default]
Filter time con‐ 2 Off, 1 to 5 A low pass filter may be used to reduce the fluctuation of an analog input
stant for reading.
0 to 2000 Ω The cut-off-frequency is defined as usual with 63% (e-1).
Off Cut-off-frequency = 0.64 Hz (filter time constant = 0.25 s)
5 Cut-off-frequency = 0.02 Hz (filter time constant = 8.0s)
1034 Unit 2 up to 6 charac‐ This parameter is assigning a unit text to the displayed analog value.
ters text
1084 Notes
[______]
1134 This parameter may only be configured using ToolKit.
If “°C” or “bar” is assigned the unit will be converted into "F" or "psi" auto‐
matically if the corresponding parameter for conversion 3630 Ä p. 213 and/or
3631 Ä p. 213 is configured to YES.
The max. number of characters is 39 but depends on numbers of Bytes for
each character. The Bytes/character are defined by the font of the currently
selected language.
Up to six characters are best for display/HMI; more will override screen
border/frame. Please verify the length on the display for best view!
3632 Bargraph min‐ 2 -21000000.00 to The start value for the bar graph display of the analog input is defined here.
imum 21000000.00 The value must be entered according to the display format, which refers to
3634 the analog input type (parameter 1000 Ä p. 215/Ä p. 227).
[0]
3636
3633 Bargraph max‐ 2 -21000000.00 to The end value for the bar graph display of the analog input is defined here.
3634 the analog input type (parameter 1000 Ä p. 215/Ä p. 227).
[2000]
3637
Table 76: Analog Inputs 1 to 3 sender settings
4.4.2.4.3 Analog Inputs 4 to 6 (0 to 10 V | 0/4 to 20 mA)

General notes
Parameters for configuration

[Default]
7000 Description 2 1 to 16 charac‐ User-defined text.

ters
7008 The event history will store this text message and it is also displayed on the
visualization screen.
7016
[Analog inp.{x}] Notes
This parameter may only be configured using ToolKit.
"x" should be 4 to 6 in accordance with ToolKit and the wiring table.

Configuration

[Default]
4310 Type 2 According to the following parameters different measuring ranges are pos‐
sible at these analog inputs:
4321
Table A The analog input is assigned to a characteristic curve which is defined over 9
4332
points (stored in a table). Two independent tables (table A and table B) may
Table B be allocated to the analog inputs.
Notes
Note that if these tables A/B are to be used with the analog inputs, the
defined points of these tables must be programmed into the control unit.
Linear Each analog input may be assigned to a linear characteristic
Monitoring is disabled.
4311 User defined 2 -21000000 to The value to be displayed for the minimum of the input range must be entered
min. display 21000000 here.
4322 value
[0] Notes
4334 (User defined
minimum dis‐ This parameter is only visible if the parameter "Type" is configured to
play value) "Linear".
4312 User defined 2 -21000000 to The value to be displayed for the maximum of the input range must be
max. display 21000000 entered here.
4323 value
[10.00] Notes
4334 (User defined
maximum dis‐ This parameter is only visible if the parameter "Type" is configured to
4317 Sender value at 2 0.000 to 20.000 The value of the configured input range, which shall correspond with the min‐
display min. imum value configured for the display, must be entered here. This specifies
4328 the lower limit of the hardware range to be measured.
(Sender value at
imum)
input value of 6 mA would correspond with the minimum value configured for
the display.
[0.000] Notes
This parameter is only visible if the parameter "Type" is configured to
"Linear", "Table A", or "Table B".
4318 Sender value at 2 0.000 to 20.000 The value of the configured input range, which shall correspond with the max‐
display max. imum value configured for the display, must be entered here. This specifies
4329 the upper limit of the hardware range to be measured.
(Sender value at
imum)
If the input range is 0 to 10 V and the value configured here is 3.6, an analog
input value of 3.6 V would correspond with the maximum value configured for
the display.
[10.000] Notes
4316 Sender type 2 n 0 - 20 mA The software in the control unit may be configured for various types of sen‐
4327 n 0 - 10 V
0 to 10 V:
4338
The measuring range of the analog input is 0 to 10 Volt.
0 to 20 mA:
The measuring range of the analog input is 0 to 20 mA.
[0 - 10 V] Notes
The "0 to 20 mA" input requires a bridge at the according terminals. Refer to
connection set up.

Configuration

[Default]
4313 Monitoring wire 2 The respective analog input can be monitored for wire breaks. If this protec‐
break tive function is triggered, the display indicates "Wb:
4324
{Text of Parameter [Description]}".
4335
High If the actual value rises over the maximum value (overshoot), this is identified
as a wire break.
Low If the actual value falls below the minimum value (undershoot), this is identi‐
High/Low If the actual value rises over the maximum value (overshoot) or falls below
[Off] No wire break monitoring is performed.
Notes
ually to the flexible limits (refer to chapter Ä Chapter 4.5.5 “Flexible Limits”
on page 465).
analog input is disabled and an error message is displayed. The measuring
range is recognized as being exceeded and an alarm is issued:
4 to 20 mA:
Minimum value 2 mA Undershooting
Maximum value 20.5 mA Overshooting
0 to 10 V:
No wire break detection /monitoring.
4314 Wire break 2 Class A to F, Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what
alarm class Control action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
4325
A/B Warning alarm classes.
4336
C/D/E/F Shutdown alarm classes.
[Class B] Notes
This parameter is only visible, if wire break monitoring is not set to "Off".
4315 Self acknowl‐ 2 Yes, No Yes:

edge wire break
4326 The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no longer
detected.
4337
No:
The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault condition is
[No] Notes
4427 Filter time con‐ 2 Off, 1 to 5 A filter time constant may be used to reduce the fluctuation of an analog input
stant reading.
4428
The cut-off-frequency is defined as usual with 63% (e-1)
4429
Notes
This filter time constant assesses the average of the signal according to the
following formula:
Cut-off-frequency = 1 / (640 ms x 2 x π x 2N - 1)
whereby "N" is the filter time constant.
Off The analog input is displayed without filtering.

Configuration

[Default]
3638 Bargraph min‐ 2 -21000000 to The start value for the bar graph display of the analog input is defined here.
imum 21000000 The value must be entered according to the display format, which refers to
3640 the analog input type.
[0]
3642
3639 Bargraph max‐ 2 -21000000 to The start value for the bar graph display of the analog input is defined here.
imum 21000000 The value must be entered according to the display format, which refers to
[10.00]
3643
7073 Unit 2 1 to 6 charac‐ This parameter is assigning a unit text to the displayed analog value.
ters
7077
[______] Notes
7081
If “°C” or “bar” is assigned the unit will be converted automatically if the cor‐
responding parameter for conversion 3630 Ä p. 213 and/or 3631 Ä p. 213 is
configured to YES.
4.4.2.4.4 Analog Inputs 7 to 10 (0 to 250 Ω | 0 to 2500 Ω)

General notes
Parameters for configuration

[Default]
7024 Description 2 1 to 16 charac‐ User-defined text.

ters
7032 The event history will store this text message and it is also displayed on the
visualization screen.
7040
[Analog inp.{x}] Notes
7048
"x" should be 7 to 10 in accordance with ToolKit and the wiring table.
4343 Type 2 According to the following parameters different measuring ranges are possible at the analog
inputs:
4354
4365
5 bar.
4376
10 bar.
150 °C.
120 °C.

Configuration

[Default]
Linear Each analog input may be assigned to a linear characteristic curve, which can
be only used for the respective defined input [T{x}] (x = 1 to 2). The minimum
(0%) and maximum (100%) value refers to the total measuring range of the
analog input (i.e. 0 to 250 Ohms or 0 to 2500 Ohms) or the values configured
as "Sender value at display min." and "Sender value at display max.".
Table A/B The analog input is assigned to a characteristic curve which is defined over 9
points (stored in a table). Two independent tables (table A and table B) may
be allocated to the analog inputs. Note that if these tables are to be used with
the analog inputs, the defined points of these tables must be programmed
into the control unit.
AB 94099 The value of the analog input is interpreted with a characteristic according the
NTC-sender "94099" of the AB-Elektronik Sachsen GmbH
Notes
For the characteristic curves of the inputs refer to Chapter “VDO Inputs Char‐
acteristics”.
4344 User defined 2 -21000000.00 to The value (y-axis) to be displayed for the minimum of the input range must be
min. display 21000000.00 entered here.
4355 value
[0.00] Notes
4366 (User defined
minimum dis‐ This parameter is only visible if the parameter "Type" is configured to
4377
4345 User defined 2 -21000000.00 to The value (x-axis) to be displayed for the maximum of the input range must
max. display 21000000.00 be entered here.
4356 value
[2500.00] Notes
4367 (User defined
maximum dis‐ This parameter is only visible if the parameter "Type" is configured to
4378
4350 Sender value at 2 0.000 to The value of the configured input range, which shall correspond with the min‐
display min. 2500.000 imum value configured for the display, must be entered here. This specifies
4361 the lower limit of the hardware range to be measured.
4383 imum)
If the input range is 0 to 2500 Ohms and the value configured here is 100, an
analog input value of 100 Ohms would correspond with the minimum value
configured for the display.
Notes
4351 Sender value at 2 0.000 to The value of the configured input range, which shall correspond with the max‐
display max. 2500.000 imum value configured for the display, must be entered here. This specifies
4362 the upper limit of the hardware range to be measured.
4384 imum)
If the input range is 0 to 2500 Ohm and the value configured here is 1000, an
analog input value of 1000 Ohm would correspond with the minimum value
configured for the display.
Notes
4349 Sender type 2 The software in the control unit may be configured for various types of sen‐
4360
0 - 250 Ohm 0 to 250 Ohm:
4371
The measuring range of the analog input is 0 to 250 Ohms.
4382
[0 - 2500 Ohm] 0 to 2500 Ohm:
The measuring range of the analog input is 0 to 2500 Ohms.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
For RTD measurement purposes it is recommend to use for the 0 to 250 Ohm
measuring range the 3-wire connection. Refer to Ä Chapter 3.3.13.3 “Analog
Inputs (0 to 250 Ohms | 0 to 2500 Ohms)” on page 95.
4353 Offset 2 -20.0 to 20.0 The resistive input may be calculated with a permanent offset to adjust for
Ohm inaccuracies. If the offset feature is utilized, the value configured in this
4364 parameter will be added to/subtracted from the measured resistive value.
[0.00 Ohm]
4375
4386
4346 Monitoring wire 2 The respective analog input can be monitored for wire breaks. If this protec‐
break tive function is triggered, the display indicates
4357
"Wb: {Text of Parameter [Description]}".
4368
4379
High High:
If the actual value rises over the maximum value (overshoot), this is identified
as a wire break.
Low Low:
If the actual value falls below the minimum value (undershoot), this is identi‐
High/Low High/Low:
If the actual value rises over the maximum value (overshoot) or falls below
[Off] Off:
No wire break monitoring is performed.
Notes
ually to the flexible limits (refer to chapter Ä Chapter 4.5.5 “Flexible Limits”
on page 465).
analog input is disabled and an error message is displayed. The measuring
range is recognized as being exceeded and an alarm is issued:
0 to 250 Ohm:
Minimum value 2.5 Ohms Undershooting
Maximum value 255 Ohms Overshooting
0 to 2500 Ohm:
Minimum value 25 Ohms Undershooting
Maximum value 2550 Ohms Overshooting
4347 Wire break 2 Class A to F, Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what
alarm class Control action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
4358
A/B Warning alarm classes.
4369
C/D/E/F Shutdown alarm classes.
4380
[Class B] Notes
4348 Self acknowl‐ 2 Yes Yes:

edge wire break
4359 The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no longer
detected.
4370
4381

Configuration
Configure Application > Inputs And Outputs > Analog Outputs

[Default]
[No] No:
The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault condition is
Notes
4430 Filter time con‐ 2 Off, 1 to 5 A filter time constant may be used to reduce the fluctuation of an analog input
stant reading.
4431
The cut-off-frequency is defined as usual with 63% (e-1).
4432
4433 Off The analog input is displayed without filtering.
[3] Cut-off-frequency = 0.4Hz (filter time constant = 0.4 s)
3644 Bargraph min‐ 2 -2100000.00 to The start value for the bar graph display of the analog input is defined here.
[0.00]
3648
3650
3645 Bargraph max‐ 2 -2100000.00 to The start value for the bar graph display of the analog input is defined here.
[2500.00]
3649
3651
7085 Unit 2 1 to 6 charac‐ This parameter is assigning a unit text to the displayed analog value.
ters
7089
[______] Notes
7093
If “°C” or “bar” is assigned the unit will be converted automatically if the cor‐
7097
responding parameter for conversion 3630 Ä p. 213, 3631 Ä p. 213 is config‐
ured to YES.
4.4.2.5 Analog Outputs

4.4.2.5.1 Analog Outputs 1 and 2
The analog outputs AO 1 and AO 2 may either be configured as
analog or PWM outputs. The analog outputs are prepared for
speed and voltage biasing signal for a speed controller and voltage
regulator.
n The following table shows two configuration examples with
parameters and default values for the analog outputs 1 and 2.
n Example 1 at AO 1 is for a generator active power output at AO
1 with a range of -20 kW to 220 kW via a 4 to 20 mA signal
(generator rated power = 200 kW).
n Example 2 at AO 2 is assigning the speed bias signal (0 to
100%) to PWM signal (0 to 100%) with level 6 V.

Configuration
Configuration examples
Parameter / AnalogManager Example 1 with AO 1 Example 2 with AO 2
ID ID Value
Selected hardware type 5201 mA 5215 PWM

(For details refer to )
Minimum hardware level 5208 4 5222 0.00 (%)
Maximum hardware level 5209 20 (mA) 5223 100.00 (%)
PWM output level 5210 — 5224 6V

(visible only if [PWM] selected)
Source value at minimum level 5204 -20 (kW) 5218 0(%)
Source value at maximum level 5206 220 (kW) 5220 100 (%)
Filter time constant 5203 3 5217 Off
AM Data source AO1 5200 Type: Pass through 5214 Type: Pass through
A1 = 01.74 Gen. act. A1 = 11.03 Speed bias
power [W] [%]
Analog output 1 10310 Display of resulting value 10311 Display of resulting value

Configuration
Settings/setup example The following drawing shows the relation between the value of the
AO signal selected and its corresponding values at the terminal
pin. For settings see table below the drawing.
Fig. 170: Example to setup AO for 0 to 1000 IN becomes OUT 4 to 20 mA
Parameter / AnalogManager Example 3 with AO 1
ID
Selected hardware type 5201 mA

(For details refer to )
Minimum hardware level 5208 4
Maximum hardware level 5209 20 mA
PWM output level 5210 —

(visible only if [PWM] selected)
Source value at minimum level 5204 0
Source value at maximum level 5206 1000
Filter time constant 5203 3
AM Data source AO1 5200 Type: Pass through

A1 = analog signal with range 0 to 1000
Analog output 1 10310 Display of resulting value

Configuration

[Default]
5200 AM Data 2 Determined by The data source may be selected from the available data sources.
source ... AnalogManager
5214 93.01, 93.02 Notes
AO1: [A1 = Refer to Ä Chapter 9.4.1 “Data Sources AM” on page 1042 for a list of all data
11.03 Speed sources.
bias (%)]
AO2: [A1 =
11.02 Voltage
bias (%)]
5201 Selected hard‐ 2 This parameter is used to configure the appropriate type of analog controller
ware type signal. The range of the analog output is configured here.
5215
PMW value is defined in %.
Off No analog output signal will be issued.
[mA] Notes
V Because of different isolation purposes the two biasing outputs must be clear
labeled with their function.
PWM
5208 Minimum hard‐ 2 -20.00 to 100.00 The value of the configured hardware range, which shall correspond with the
ware level configured minimum source value, must be entered here (y-axis). This speci‐
5222 [0.00] fies the minimum limit of the hardware range.
(User defined
minimum output Example
value)
If the value configured here is 2.5, the maximum output range of +/-20 mA /
+/-10 V has a lower limit of 2.5 mA / 2.5 V.
Notes
Value [100] is possible only for PWM.
5209 Maximum hard‐ 2 -20.00 to 100.00 The value of the configured hardware range, which shall correspond with the
ware level configured maximum source value, must be entered here (y-axis). This speci‐
5223 [20.00] fies the maximum limit of the hardware range.
(User defined
maximum Example
output value)
f the value configured here is 7.5, the maximum output range of +/-20 mA /
+/-10 V has a upper limit of 7.5 mA / 7.5 V.
Notes
Value [100] is possible only for PWM.
5210 PWM output 2 0.00 to 10.00 V If PWM has been enabled in parameter 5203 Ä p. 228/5217 Ä p. 226/
level Ä p. 228, is defined in %, and the level of the PWM signal (amplitude) may be
5224 [10.00 V] adjusted here.
5204 Source value at 2 -21000000.00 to The value from the data source must exceed the value configured here to
minimum level 21000000.00 raise the output signal above minimum hardware level. Negative percentage
5218 values may be used to change the sign, e.g. for power.
[0]
The entry format of the value depends on the selected data source.
5206 Source value at 2 -21000000.00 to If the value from the data source reaches the value configured here, the
maximum level 21000000.00 output signal will reach maximum hardware level. Negative percentage values
5220 may be used to change the sign, e.g. for power.
[10000]
The entry format of the value depends on the selected data source.
5203 Filter time con‐ 2 Off, 1 to 7 A filter time constant may be used to reduce the fluctuation of an analog
stant output value.
5217
[Off] The analog output is displayed without filtering.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
The filter is not applied to the analog output display value, i.e. the end value
of the analog output is displayed immediately.
4.4.2.5.2 Analog Outputs 4 to 6

The analog outputs AO 04 to AO 06 may be used as current out‐
puts 0/4 to 20 mA or - with a shunt resistor of 500 Ohms - as
voltage output 0 to 10 V.

[Default]
5242 Data source 2 Determined by The data source may be selected from the available data sources.
AnalogManager
5256 Notes
AO 04: [A1 =
5270 01.24.Gen. act. Refer to Ä Chapter 9.4.1 “Data Sources AM” on page 1042 for a list of all data
power (%)] sources.
AO 05: [A1 =
01.20 Gen. PF
(%)]
AO 06: [A1 =
01.09 Gen. fre‐
quency (%)]
5246 Source value at 2 -32000 to 32000 The value from the data source must exceed the value configured here to
minimal output raise the output signal above 0%. Negative percentage values may be used
5260 [0] to change the sign, e.g. for power.
5274 The entry format of the value depends on the selected data source.
Notes
If the monitored analog value has a reference value, the threshold is
expressed as a percentage of this reference value (-320.00% to 320.00%).
If an analog input is monitored, the threshold refers to the display value
format ( Ä Chapter 9.4.2.12 “Display Value Format” on page 1067).
5248 Source value at 2 -32000 to 32000 If the value from the data source reaches the value configured here, the
maximal output output signal will reach 100%. Negative percentage values may be used to
5262 [10000] change the sign, e.g. for power.
Notes
expressed as a percentage of this reference value (-320.00% to 320.00%).
If an analog input is monitored, the threshold refers to the display value
format ( Ä Chapter 9.4.2.12 “Display Value Format” on page 1067).
stant output value.
5259
5273

Configuration
Configure Application > Inputs And Outputs > External Analog Inputs

[Default]
Notes
5257
Connecting a shunt resistor of 500 Ohms over the output terminals a voltage
5271 output can be established.
[Off] No analog output signal will be issued.
User defined An own dedicated range within 0 to 20 mA / 0 to 10 V may be limited.
0-10 mA / 0-5 V 0-10 mA / 0-5 V
0-20 mA / 0-10 0-20 mA / 0-10 V

V
4 - 20 mA 4 - 20 mA
0.5 - 4.5 V 0.5 - 4.5 V
10-0 mA / 5-0 V 10-0 mA / 5-0 V
20-0 mA / 10-0 20-0 mA / 10-0 V

V
20 - 4 mA 20 - 4 mA
4.5 - 0.5 V 4.5 - 0.5 V
5250 User defined 2 0.00 to 100.00% The minimum output value, which shall correspond with the minimum value of
min. output the output range, must be entered here.
5264 value [0.00%]
5278 (User defined Notes
minimum output
value) This parameter is only active, if the selected hardware type is "user defined".
Example
If the value configured here is 25%, the minimum output would be 5 mA (2.5
V).
5251 User defined 2 0.00 to 100.00% The maximum output value, which shall correspond with the maximum value
max. output of the output range, must be entered here.
5265 value [100.00%]
5279 (User defined Notes
maximum
output value) This parameter is only active, if the selected hardware type is "user defined".
Example
f the value configured here is 75%, the maximum output range would be 15
mA (7.5 V).
4.4.2.6 External Analog Inputs

General notes
Configuration of these external analog inputs is performed similarly
to the internal analog inputs.

Configuration
Changed from easYgen series to easYgen-XT

series:
External Analog Inputs/Analog Outputs (AI/
AO)configuration is enhanced from % values to
absolute values additionally.
If an external expansion board (e.g. Phoenix Contact or WAGO) is

connected to the easYgen via the CAN bus, it is possible to use 16
additional analog inputs.
n Refer to Ä Table on page 231 for the parameter IDs of the
parameters for external analog inputs 1 through 16.
Please note that the available options for the

parameters "Type" and "Sender type" differ from
the internal analog inputs.
The parameters "Offset" and "Monitoring wire
break" are not available for the external analog
inputs.
– Refer to the Parameter List for details.
A wire break or sender failure is indicated by a

dedicated value sent via the CAN bus ( Ä Chapter
4.7.4.1 “CAN Interface 1” on page 511).
For an example for the configuration of external

analog inputs refer to Ä Chapter 6.3.10 “Setup
Expansion Modules at CAN 2” on page 629.

External analog inputs - parameter

IDs
Parameter AI 1 AI 2 AI 3 AI 4 AI 5 AI 6 AI 7 AI 8
external
Description 16203 16213 16223 16233 16243 16253 16263 16273
Type1 5851 5864 5877 5890 5903 5916 5929 5942
User defined 5852 5865 5878 5891 5904 5917 5930 5943
min display
value
User defined 5853 5866 5879 5892 5905 5918 5931 5944
max display
value
Sender 5857 5870 5883 5896 5909 5922 5935 5948

value at dis‐
play min.

Configuration
external
Sender 5858 5871 5884 5897 5910 5923 5936 5949

value at dis‐
play max.
Sender type 5856 5869 5882 5895 5908 5921 5934 5947
Sender con‐ 5859 5872 5885 5898 5911 5924 5937 5950
nection type
Filter time 5863 5876 5889 5902 5915 5928 5941 5954
constant
Exponent for 16204 16214 16229 16234 16244 16254 16264 16274
protocol
Wire break 5854 5867 5880 5893 5906 5919 5932 5945
alarm class
Self 5855 5868 5881 5894 5907 5920 5933 5946

acknowl‐
edge wire
break
Unit 16208 16218 16228 16238 16248 16528 16268 16278
Bargraph 5861 5874 5887 5900 5913 5926 5939 5952

minimum
Bargraph 5862 5875 5888 5901 5914 5927 5940 5953

maximum
external
Description 16283 16293 16303 16313 16323 16333 16343 16353
Type 5955 5968 5981 6930 6943 6956 6969 6982
User defined 5956 5969 5982 6931 6944 6957 6970 6983
min display
value
User defined 5957 5970 5983 6932 6945 6958 6971 6984
max display
value
Sender 5961 5974 5987 6936 6949 6962 6975 6988

value at dis‐
play min.
Sender 5962 5975 5988 6937 6950 6963 6976 6989

value at dis‐
play max.
Sender type 5960 5973 5986 6935 6948 6961 6974 6987
Sender con‐ 5963 5976 5989 6938 6951 6964 6977 6990
nection type
Filter time 5967 5980 5993 6942 6955 6968 6981 6994
constant
Exponent for 16284 16294 16304 16314 16324 16334 16344 16354
protocol
Wire break 5958 5971 5984 6933 6946 6959 6972 6985
alarm class
Self 5959 5972 5985 6934 6947 6960 6973 6986

acknowl‐
edge wire
break
Unit 16288 16298 16308 16318 10390 10392 10394 10396

Configuration
external
Bargraph 5965 5978 5991 6940 6953 6966 6979 6992

minimum
Bargraph 5966 5979 5992 6941 6954 6967 6980 6993

maximum
External analog inputs – example con‐

figuration analog input 1 Please make sure that the selected settings you
are using are supported by your external devices.
Available "Type"s
(parameters 5851, 5864, ...)
Off Table A Pt DIN(R0)
Linear Table B Pt SAMA(R0)
TC Type K Ni DIN(R0)
TC Type J Ni SAMA(R0)
TC Type E Cu10
TC Type R Cu50
TC Type S Cu53
TC Type T Ni 1000(Landis)
TC Type B Ni 500(Viessm.)
TC Type N KTY 81-110
TC Type U KTY 84
TC Type L
TC Type C
TC Type W
TC Type HK
Available "Sender type"s

(parameters 5856, 5869, ...)
0 - 10 V R0=100
±10 V R0=10
0 - 20 mA R0=20
±20 mA R0=30
4 - 20 mA R0=50
0 - 400 Ohms R0=120
0 - 4000 Ohms R0=150
Thermocouple R0=200
R0=240

Configuration
Configure Application > Inputs And Outputs > External Analog Outputs
Available "Sender type"s

(parameters 5856, 5869, ...)
R0=300
R0=400
R0=500
R0=1000
R0=1500
R0=2000
R0=3000
Available "Sender connection type"s

(parameters 5859, 5872, ...)
Two wire
Three wire
4.4.2.7 External Analog Outputs
If an external expansion board (e.g. from Phoenix Contact or

WAGO) is connected to the easYgen via the CAN bus, it is pos‐
sible to use 4 additional analog outputs.
The configuration of these external analog outputs

is performed similarly to the internal analog out‐
puts.
Refer to Ä Table 77 “External analog outputs {1 to
4} - parameter IDs” on page 234 for the parameter
IDs of the parameters for external analog outputs 1
through 4.
Please note that the available options for the
Selected hardware type are limited. Refer to the
Parameter List for details.
Parameter Ext. AO 1 Ext. AO 2 Ext. AO 3 Ext. AO 4
Data source 10237 10247 10257 10267

ext. AO {x}
AnalogManager: [Pass Through of 11.03 Speed bias (%)]
Source value 10240 10250 10260 10270

at minimum
level
Source value 10241 10251 10261 10271

at maximum
level
Filter time 10239 10249 10259 10269

constant
Selected 10238 10248 10258 10268

hardware type
Setting range: [Off]; mA; V

Configuration
Configure Application > Inputs And Outputs > External Analog Outputs
Parameter Ext. AO 1 Ext. AO 2 Ext. AO 3 Ext. AO 4
Minimum 10242 10252 10262 10272

hardware
level
Maximum 10243 10253 10263 10273

hardware
level
Ext. analog 10245 10255 10265 10275

output {x}
(displayed in
ToolKit only:
ON/OFF)
Notes:
Refer to for details and definition of the parameters.
Table 77: External analog outputs {1 to 4} - parameter IDs

[Default]
10237 Data source ... 2 Determined by The data source may be selected from the available data sources.
AnalogManager
10247 93.21 .. 93.24 Notes
10257 AO1 to AO 4: Refer to Ä Chapter 9.4.1 “Data Sources AM” on page 1042 for a list of all data
[A1 = 11.03 sources.
10267
Speed bias (%)]
10248
Off No analog output signal will be issued.
10258
10268 [mA]
10242 Minimum hard‐ 2 0.00 to 20.00 The value of the configured hardware range, which shall correspond with the
ware level configured minimum source value, must be entered here (y-axis). This speci‐
20252 [0.00] fies the minimum limit of the hardware range.
(User defined
10262 minimum output Example
10272 value)
If the value configured here is 2.5, the maximum output range of +/-20 mA /
+/-10 V has a lower limit of 2.5 mA / 2.5 V.
10243 Maximum hard‐ 2 0.00 to 20.00 The value of the configured hardware range, which shall correspond with the
ware level configured maximum source value, must be entered here (y-axis). This speci‐
10253 [20.00] fies the maximum limit of the hardware range.
(User defined
10263 maximum Example
10273 output value)
f the value configured here is 7.5, the maximum output range of +/-20 mA /
+/-10 V has a upper limit of 7.5 mA / 7.5 V.
10240 Source value at 2 -21000000.00 to The value from the data source must exceed the value configured here to
minimum level 21000000.00 raise the output signal above minimum hardware level. Negative percentage
10250 values may be used to change the sign, e.g. for power.
[0]
10270
10241 Source value at 2 -21000000.00 to If the value from the data source reaches the value configured here, the
maximum level 21000000.00 output signal will reach maximum hardware level. Negative percentage values
10251 may be used to change the sign, e.g. for power.
[10000]
10271
stant output value.
10249
10259

Configuration
Configure Application > Inputs And Outputs > External Discrete Inputs

[Default]
10269 1 Cut-off-frequency = 3.98 Hz (filter time constant = 0.04 s)
Notes
4.4.2.8 External Discrete Inputs

If a Woodward IKD 1 or other external expansion board (e.g.
Phoenix Contact or WAGO) is connected to the easYgen via the
CAN bus, it is possible to use 32 additional discrete inputs.
– The configuration of these external DIs is per‐

formed similarly to the internal DIs ( Ä Chapter
4.4.2.2 “Discrete Inputs” on page 205).
– Refer to Ä Table 78 “External discrete inputs -
parameter IDs 1..8” on page 236 for the
parameter IDs of the parameters for external
DIs 1 through 32.
External DI 1 DI 2 DI 3 DI 4 DI 5 DI 6 DI 7 DI 8
Description 16200 16210 16220 16230 16240 16250 16260 16270
Delay 16000 16010 16020 16030 16040 16050 16060 16070
Operation 16001 16011 16021 16031 16041 16051 16061 16071
Alarm class 16002 16012 16022 16032 16042 16052 16062 16072
Self acknowledge 16004 16014 16024 16034 16044 16054 16064 16074
Enabled 16003 16013 16023 16033 16043 16053 16063 16073
Table 78: External discrete inputs - parameter IDs 1..8
Description 16280 16290 16300 16310 16320 16330 16340 16350
Delay 16080 16090 16100 16110 16120 16130 16140 16150
Operation 16081 16091 16101 16111 16121 16131 16141 16151
Alarm class 16082 16092 16102 16112 16122 16132 16142 16152

Configuration
Configure Application > Inputs And Outputs > External Discrete Outputs
Enabled 16083 16093 16103 16113 16123 16133 16143 16153
Description 16201 16211 16221 16231 16241 16251 16261 16271
Delay 16005 16015 16025 16035 16045 16055 16065 16075
Operation 16006 16016 16026 16036 16046 16056 16066 16076
Alarm class 16007 16017 16027 16037 16047 16057 16067 16077
Enabled 16008 16018 16028 16038 16048 16058 16068 16078
Description 16281 16291 16301 16311 16321 16331 16341 16351
Delay 16085 16095 16105 16115 16125 16135 16145 16155
Operation 16086 16096 16106 16116 16126 16136 16146 16156
Alarm class 16087 16097 16107 16117 16127 16137 16147 16157
Enabled 16088 16098 16108 16118 16128 16138 16148 16158
4.4.2.9 External Discrete Outputs

If a Woodward IKD 1 or other external expansion board (e.g.
Phoenix Contact or WAGO) is connected to the easYgen via the
CAN bus, it is possible to use 32 additional discrete outputs.

Configuration
Configure Application > Inputs And Outputs > External Discrete Outputs
The configuration of the external DOs is performed

in a similar way like for the internal DOs.
Refer to Ä Table 82 “External discrete outputs -
parameter IDs (1 to 8)” on page 238 for the param‐
eter IDs of the parameters for external discrete out‐
puts 1 through 32.
External DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 DO 4 DO 5 DO 6 DO 7 DO 8
Parameter 12330 12340 12350 12360 12370 12380 12390 12400

ID
Table 82: External discrete outputs - parameter IDs (1 to 8)
Parameter 12410 12420 12430 12440 12450 12460 12470 12480

ID
Parameter 12331 12332 12333 12334 12335 12336 12337 12338

ID
Parameter 12339 12341 12342 12343 12344 12345 12346 12347

ID

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Breakers
4.4.3 Configure Breakers

General notes
The assignment of the defined relays to defined
functions occurs by selection of the application
mode (i.e. function "Command: Close GCB" on
relay [R 6], this relay can no longer be operated via
the LogicsManager).
The same way some relays are designated to spe‐
cific functions, others may be assigned to different
functions. These are listed as "programmed"
relays. If a relay is "programmable" the function
may be assigned to other relays via the Logi‐
csManager by configuration.
For additional information refer to Ä Chapter
4.4.2.3 “Discrete Outputs (LogicsManager)”
on page 209.

inputs must be connected. If an external mains
decoupling is performed, jumpers between busbar
and mains voltage measuring inputs may be
installed.
Changing the application mode will not change

other configured values in the parameters. The
application mode parameter is the only one.
Operation of the circuit breakers The configuration of pulse switching takes place in the following
screen and has the described effect on the signal sequence (the
MCB cannot be controlled by the continuous pulse for security rea‐
sons, because otherwise, the MCB would be opened in case of a
failure/exchange of the easYgen).
The parameter "Enable MCB" allows/prevents the closing of the
MCB. A closed MCB will not be opened.
If the parameter "Auto unlock" is configured to YES, an open pulse
will be issued prior to each close pulse.
External breaker handling In operation mode AUTO the easYgen operates its breakers auto‐
matically according to the configured application and transition
modes. Actually the breaker transition mode “external” would only
allow the breaker closure from external. On the other hand the
easYgen allows in special cases the closure of breaker from
external, when the following configurations and modes are fulfilled:

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Breakers > Good to know: Actions with...
External Breaker Synchroni‐ Dead Bus Condition for the closure accept‐
Handling zation Closure ance
Mode
GCB Synchroniza‐ Off - n The start request in auto‐

tion matic is active
GCB Dead bus - Off n The generator is in oper‐
closure ating range
n The engine start procedure
is expired
MCB Synchroniza‐ Off - The mains is in operating range

tion
GCB Dead bus - Off

closure
... and if GGB is available:
GGB Synchroniza‐ Off - Minimum 1 GCB is closed

tion
GGB Dead bus - Off

closure
Interaction with LS-5 The easYgen provides some application modes, which contain the
handling of the breaker control LS-5. According to the application
mode a single LS-5 or a system of LS-5s is installed. The LS-5
technology shall give the designer an instrument to handle more
complex breaker applications.
Here are some feature examples of the LS-5 technology:
n Open/close of individual breakers including synchronization
and dead bus closure.
n Determining the generators in load share segments.
n Loading/unloading active and reactive power via the dedicated
breaker.
n 3-phase power measurement at the interchange point to the
utility.
n Included mains decoupling functions.
See further chapters in this document and in the

LS-5 technical manual for more information.
4.4.3.1 Good to know: Actions with Breakers

4.4.3.1.1 Dead Bus Closing GCB
All parameters listed below only apply to applica‐

tion mode to
The unit closes the GCB without synchronization, if the following

conditions are met. The display indicates "GCB dead bus close".
Automatic operation
n The operating mode AUTOMATIC has been selected
n No class C alarm or higher is present
n The engine is running

Configuration
n The engine delayed monitoring (parameter 3315 Ä p. 194) as

well as the generator stable time (parameter 3415 Ä p. 257)
have been expired or the LogicsManager function "Undelay
close GCB" (parameter 12210 Ä p. 257/Ä p. 1035) is enabled
n The generator voltage and frequency are within the configured
operating range ( Ä Chapter 4.5.1.1 “ Generator Operating
Ranges: Voltage / Frequency / Busbar” on page 367)
n The MCB has been opened for at least the time configured in
"Transfer time GCB↔MCB" (parameter 3400 Ä p. 253)
(Mode , , , and with open transition mode
only)
n The function "Start without load" (parameter 12540 Ä p. 340/
Ä p. 1037/Ä p. 1037) has been disabled through the LogicsMan‐
ager
n Only in critical mode: the parameter "Close GCB in override"
(parameter 4100 Ä p. 348) is configured to "Yes"
n The busbar voltage is below the dead bus detection limit
(parameter 5820 Ä p. 500)
n There is no other GCB closed in the same segment
n There is no other device with a smaller device ID willing to
close its GCB too (Dead busbar closure negotiation)
Manual operation
n The operating mode MANUAL has been selected.
n No class C alarm or higher is present.
n The engine is running.
n The engine delayed monitoring (parameter 3315 Ä p. 194) as
well as the generator stable time (parameter 3415 Ä p. 257)
have been expired.
n The generator voltage and frequency are within the configured
operating range ( Ä Chapter 4.5.1.1 “ Generator Operating
Ranges: Voltage / Frequency / Busbar” on page 367).
n The button "Close GCB" has been pressed.
n The MCB has been open for at least the time configured in
"Transfer time GCB↔MCB" (parameter 3400 Ä p. 253).
(Mode , , , and with open transition mode
only)
(parameter 5820 Ä p. 500).
n There is no other GCB closed in the same segment.
n There is no other device with a smaller device ID willing to
close its GCB too (Dead busbar closure negotiation).
Dead Busbar Negotiation Each easYgen, who intends to close its GCB on a dead busbar
publishes a “Dead busbar closure request” flag over CANbus and
reads back whether there is any other easYgen publishing the
same intension:
If not, the unit waits an estimated time for security and then closes
its breaker.
If yes, the unit compares its own device number with the smallest
device number of all others who also intend to close. If the own
device number is smaller than the rest, the unit will close its
breaker - otherwise it blocks its own closure.
The easYgen removes its wish to close its GCB on a dead busbar,
if the GCB closure failure occurs in a multiple generator applica‐
tion. So the next easYgen with the higher device number gets the
permission for closure.

Configuration
The load sharing messages are monitored. In case of a “missing

member” alarm on the load share bus, the single dead bus clo‐
sures are delayed depending on the own Generator number to
avoid simultaneous closure. The delay time is Generator Number
multiplied with 500 ms.
The GCB dead busbar closure is realized faster, if LogicsManager
"Undelayed close GCB" ID 12210 is set to TRUE.
The dead busbar negotiation is going over segments.
4.4.3.1.2 Synchronization GCB/MCB

tion mode to
The synchronization is active, if the following conditions are met

simultaneously.
The display indicates "Synchronization GCB" or "Synchronization
MCB".
Automatic operation
n The mains voltage is available and within the configured oper‐
ating range ( Ä Chapter 4.5.3.4 “Mains Operating Ranges”
on page 418)
n The generator and busbar voltage are available and within the
configured operating range ( Ä Chapter 4.5.1.1 “ Generator
Operating Ranges: Voltage / Frequency / Busbar”
on page 367)
n The differential frequency/voltage is within the configured oper‐
ating range
n Synchronizing the MCB
– The GCB is closed (or at least one GCB is closed in a mul‐
tiple genset application)
– The busbar voltage is within the configured operating range
– The "Enable MCB" (parameter 12923 Ä p. 263/Ä p. 1038)
signal is present, for example discrete input 6 is energized
if configured as DI 6
n Synchronizing the GCB
– The MCB is closed
– Engine delayed monitoring (parameter 3315 Ä p. 194) and
generator stable time (parameter 3415 Ä p. 257) have
expired or "Undelay close GCB" (param‐
eter 12210 Ä p. 257/Ä p. 1035) is enabled
Manual operation
n Operating mode MANUAL has been selected
n The generator and busbar voltage are available and within the
configured operating range ( Ä Chapter 4.5.1.1 “ Generator
Operating Ranges: Voltage / Frequency / Busbar”
on page 367)
n The differential frequency/voltage is within the configured oper‐
ating range

Configuration
n Synchronizing the MCB

– The GCB is closed (or at least one GCB is closed in a mul‐
tiple genset application)
– The "Enable MCB" (parameter 12923 Ä p. 263/Ä p. 1038)
signal is present, for example discrete input 6 is energized
if configured as DI 6
– The button "Close MCB" has been pressed
n Synchronizing the GCB
– The MCB is closed
– Engine delayed monitoring (parameter 3315 Ä p. 194) and
generator stable time (parameter 3415 Ä p. 257) have
expired or "Undelay close GCB" (param‐
eter 12210 Ä p. 257/Ä p. 1035) is enabled
– The button "Close GCB" has been pressed
4.4.3.1.3 Dead Bus Closing MCB
The following applies to application mode and

.
The unit closes the MCB, if the following conditions are met simul‐
taneously.
The display indicates "MCB dead bus close".
Automatic operation
n The parameter "Dead busbar closure MCB" (parameter
3431 Ä p. 263) is configured On
on page 418)
n The GCB is open or has been opened for at least the "Transfer
time GCB↔MCB" (parameter 3400 Ä p. 253) (open transition
mode only)
n The "Enable MCB" (parameter 12923 Ä p. 263/Ä p. 1038)
signal is present, for example discrete input 6 is energized if
configured as DI 6
Manual operation
n Operating mode MANUAL has been selected
n The parameter "Dead busbar closure MCB" (parameter
3431 Ä p. 263) is configured "On"
on page 418)
n The GCB is open or has been opened for at least the "Transfer
time GCB↔MCB" (parameter 3400 Ä p. 253) (open transition
mode only)

Configuration
n The "Enable MCB" (parameter 12923 Ä p. 263/Ä p. 1038)

signal is present, for example discrete input 6 is energized if
configured so
n The button "Close MCB" has been pressed
4.4.3.1.4 Open GCB
The following applies to application modes to

.
The GCB will be opened when the "Command GCB open" is

issued. The behavior of the GCB open relay depends on the set‐
ting of parameter 3403 Ä p. 254.
If this parameter is configured as "N.O.", the relay energizes to
open the GCB, if it is configured as "N.C.", the relay de-energizes
to open the GCB.
The GCB will be opened under the following conditions:
n In STOP operating mode after unloading the generator
n In case of a class C alarm or higher
n By pressing the "GCB" or "MCB" softkey (depending on the CB
logic which has been set) in MANUAL operating mode
n By pressing the button "stop engine" in MANUAL operating
mode
n In the event of an automatic stopping in the AUTOMATIC oper‐
ating mode (the start request has been terminated or a stop
request has been initiated)
n In critical mode (Sprinkler operation), provided that an emer‐
gency power operation is not active, and "Close GCB in over‐
ride" (parameter 4100 Ä p. 348) has been configured to No
n If "Start without load" has been enabled through the Logi‐
csManager and the breaker was closed
n By pressing the "MCB" softkey (depending on the CB logic
which has been set) in MANUAL operating mode
The conditions above are only valid if the GCB is

closed, whereas the following conditions are valid
regardless of the GCB is open or closed.
n Prior to the MCB closing onto the dead busbar (depending on

the CB logic which has been set)
n In case of an alarm of class D or F
4.4.3.1.5 Open MCB
The following applies to application modes ,

, , and .

Configuration
The MCB will be opened when the relay "Command: MCB open" is
energized.
The MCB will be opened under the following conditions if the MCB
is closed:
n If an emergency power operation is initiated (mains failure)
once the generator voltage is within the permissible limits
n Prior to the closure of the GCB (depending on the CB logic
which has been set)
n Upon pressing the "MCB" or "GCB" softkey (dependent upon
the configured CB logic) in MANUAL operating mode
4.4.3.1.6 Transition Modes (Breaker Logic)

Breaker logic "PARALLEL" Parallel operation is enabled by configuring param‐
eter 3411 Ä p. 252 to "PARALLEL".
Parallel breaker logic must be selected for the fol‐

lowing operation modes:
– islanded operation
– Mains parallel operation
In the event of an engine start request the following occurs:

n The GCB is synchronized and closed
n The generator assumes load and the adjusted real power or
reactive power setpoints are controlled
Following the stop request the following occurs:
n The generator sheds load until real power has reached the
"Unload limit" (parameter 3125 Ä p. 392)
n The generator power factor is controlled to "1.00" (unity)
n The GCB is opened
n The engine is shut down following the configured cool down
period
When a stop command is issued to the engine,

soft loading (power reduction) is carried out before
opening the GCB, except an alarm of class D or F
is present.
Breaker logic "INTERCHANGE"

, , and .
For this breaker logic to function correctly, the

mains power measurement must be connected
properly.
The following applies for the power display:
– Positive mains power = export power
– Negative mains power = import power

Configuration
In the event of a start request, a change is made from mains to

generator supply.
The following occurs:
n The generator assumes load until the imported mains inter‐
change real power has reached 5 % of the "Generator rated
active power" (parameter 1752 Ä p. 497)
n The MCB is opened
When a stop request has been issued, a change is made from
generator to mains supply.
n The MCB is synchronized and closed
n The generator sheds load until real power has reached the
"Unload limit" (parameter 3125 Ä p. 392)
n The generator power factor is controlled to "1.00" (unity)
n The GCB is opened
The limit for opening the MCB during softloading

(Unloading mains) is +/- 5% active generator rated
power without any delay. In multiple generator
applications the 5% limit is calculated out of the
current nominal generator power in the system.
Examples:
– One engine is running with 1000kW rated, the
+/-5% limit is a power window at the inter‐
change point from 50kW import up to 50kW
export.
– One engine is running with 500kW rated and
another with 300kW rated, the +/-5% limit is a
power window at the interchange point from
40kW import up to 40kW export.
Hint: The generator rated power is taken into
account to find a good compromise between
bumpless power transfer and being not too long
mains parallel.
Breaker logic "CLOSED TRANSIT."

, , and .
Closed transition (make-before-break/overlap synchronization) is

enabled by configuring parameter 3411 Ä p. 252 to "CLOSED
TRANSITION".
In the event of an engine start request, a change is made from
mains to generator supply.
n The MCB is opened and the generator assumes all loads
After the engine stop request has been issued, a change is made
from generator to mains supply.

Configuration

n The MCB is synchronized and closed
n The GCB is opened and the mains assume all loads
The circuit breakers are opened irrespective of the

power.
The breaker closed transition time matches the
duration time <100 ms.
The maximum time between the reply from the CB

and the CB open command is 100 ms.
Breaker logic "OPEN TRANSIT."

, , and .
Open transition (break-before-make/change over logic) is enabled

via configuration of parameter 3411 Ä p. 252 to "OPEN TRANSI‐
TION".
In the event of an engine start request, a change is made from
mains to generator supply.
n The MCB is opened
n The GCB is closed after the time configured in "Transfer time
GCB<->MCB" (parameter 3400 Ä p. 253) has expired.
n The GCB is opened
n The MCB is closed after the time configured in "Transfer time
GCB<->MCB" (parameter 3400 Ä p. 253) has expired
Breaker logic "EXTERNAL" External breaker logic is enabled via configuration of parameter
3411 Ä p. 252 to "EXTERNAL".
All breaker control (especially the CB closing instructions) must be
carried out via master controller (e.g. a PLC).
The easYgen controller always issues additionally the breaker
open command under fault conditions and in the breaker unloading
states (Unloading GCB) if the stop request is active.

Configuration
Overview for application mode A04

STOP MANUAL AUTOMATIC
EXTERNAL: Breaker logic "External"

In a mains parallel operation, decoupling from the mains is carried out via the MCB or the GCB in the event of a mains failure. The
breakers will not automatically close in emergency power operation. Emergency power operation in accordance with European Com‐
munity Specification DIN VDE 0108 is not possible in this power circuit breaker logic.
The GCB is opened. The MCB and the GCB may be manually The GCB is opened if the genset is
opened. The circuit breakers are opened stopped or if decoupling from the mains,
for decoupling from the mains. but will not close if the engine is started.
The MCB is opened only if decoupling
from the mains, and is never closed.
PARALLEL: Breaker logic "Mains parallel operation"

The MCB and GCB are synchronized to permit continuous mains parallel operation in this breaker logic mode.
The GCB is opened; the MCB is operated Mains parallel operation can be initiated by The GCB is synchronized via an add-on
depending on the setting of "Enable MCB" pressing the "GCB On" or "MCB On" push- request and a mains parallel operation is
(parameter 12923 Ä p. 263/Ä p. 1038). button. performed. When a shed-off request is
issued, the generator sheds load and
opens the GCB and the engine is shut
down following the configured cool down
period.
Emergency power: The emergency power
operation is terminated following the expi‐
ration of the mains settling time. The MCB
is synchronized and closed, putting the
system back into a mains parallel opera‐
tion.
OPEN TRANSIT.: Breaker logic "Open transition / change-over / brake-before-make"

The MCB and GCB are never synchronized in this breaker logic mode.
The GCB is opened; the MCB is operated A change can be made to either generator A change is made to generator operation
depending on the setting of "Enable MCB" or mains operation by pressing either the through an add-on request. Once the add-
(parameter 12923 Ä p. 263/Ä p. 1038). "GCB On" or "MCB On" push-button. The on request is terminated, the system
"STOP" push-button opens the GCB and changes back to mains operation. The
simultaneously stops the engine. MCB is closed when the busbar is dead,
even if there has not been an add-on
request. Emergency power operations are
terminated following the expiration of the
mains settling timer. The GCB opens and
the MCB closes, transferring all loads to
the mains.
CLOSED TRANSIT.: Breaker logic "Closed transition / make-before-brake / overlap synchronization"

The MCB and the GCB are synchronized, in order to avoid a dead busbar in this breaker logic mode. Immediately after the synchroni‐
zation of one breaker, the other is opened. Continuous mains parallel operation is not possible.
The GCB is opened; the MCB is operated Synchronization of either the generator or The GCB is synchronized via an add-on
depending on the setting of "Enable MCB" the mains can be initiated by pressing the request. After the GCB closes the MCB is
(parameter 12923 Ä p. 263/Ä p. 1038). "GCB On" or "MCB On" push-button. opened. Following the shed-off request
being issued, the MCB is synchronized
and closed. After the MCB has closed the
GCB is opened.
ration of the mains settling time and the
MCB synchronizing to the generator. The
MCB closes and the GCB opens immedi‐
ately afterwards.

Configuration
INTERCHANGE: Breaker logic "Soft loading / interchange synchronization"

The MCB and the GCB are synchronized, in order to avoid a dead busbar in this breaker logic mode. The operation of a breaker
under load is avoided by utilizing the ability to soft load. Continuous mains parallel operation is not possible with this breaker logic.
Following the shed-off request, the MCB synchronizes and closes, the generator soft unloads to the mains and the GCB opens. After
the GCB is open the engine is stopped following the expiration of the configured cool down period.
The GCB is opened; the MCB is operated Synchronization of either the generator or Via an engine request, the GCB is
depending on the setting of "Enable MCB" the mains can be initiated by pressing the synchronized and the generator power is
(parameter 12923 Ä p. 263/Ä p. 1038). "GCB On" or "MCB On" push-button. increased. The MCB is then opened. Fol‐
lowing the disabling of the engine request,
the MCB is reverse synchronized and the
GCB is then opened.
ration of the mains settling time. The MCB
closes, the load is transferred, and the
GCB opens.
Overview for application mode A03

PARALLEL: Breaker logic "Mains parallel"

This operation mode may be used both in the case of an islanded system, an islanded parallel system, and a system that is operated
in mains parallel.
The GCB is opened. Mains parallel operation can be performed The GCB is synchronized via an add-on
via the "GCB On" push-button. request and mains parallel operation is
performed.
When a shed-off request is issued, the
generator sheds load, the GCB is opened,
and the engine is shut down following the
configured cool down period.
4.4.3.1.7 GGB Handling
Introduction
Usually the easYgen treats the GGB always so that an open com‐
mand is issued, if the GCB is opened. This is the GGB open mode.
In some applications this can lead to the issue that the AC power is
separated from the generator bar in healthy mains situations. That
means in times when the mains is feeding the load (MCB closed),
the genset container (generator busbar) is not connected to AC
power. But this is needed to support the battery charger and some
other single consumers in standby situations. To fix that the GGB
close mode is introduced.
The user can configure what adapts at best to his application.
Function The easYgen3500XT includes a configuration which offers two

modes for handling the GGB:
n GGB open mode
n GGB close mode
GGB open mode AUTOMATIC operation:

Configuration
The GGB is generally opened, when all GCBs are opened. The
closing of the GGB is performed, if the own GCB is closed and
enough nominal generator power is available. (refer to parameter
ID3440 "Min. gen power"). A LogicsManager equation can be set
on TRUE to override this blocking factor.
MANUAL operation:
Generally the GGB holds the last condition of the other operation
modes. The GGB is allowed to be closed, if the GCB is closed.
STOP operation:
The GGB is generally opened, when all GCBs are opened. The
closing will never be executed.
GGB close mode AUTOMATIC operation:

The easYgen does not open automatically the GGB, when all
GCBs are opened.
n The easYgen opens the GGB, if:
– an emergency run situation is initiated (gen busbar gets
dead)
– the minimum generator power cannot be reached with a
single genset. (Refer to ID 3440 “Min. generator power).
In these cases, the GGB is opened before the first GCB is closed.
The first easYgen executes a GCB dead bus closure, others syn‐
chronize to generator busbar
n The reclosing of the GGB during standby situation is executed,
if:
– The mains is ok AND
– the MCB is closed AND
– all GCBs are open AND
– no easYgen intends to do a GCB dead bus closure.
The easYgen never closes the GGB, if both sides of the GGB are
dead. Exception: Run-up synchronization with GCB/GGB mode.
The closing of the GGB is finally performed, if the

own GCB is closed and enough nominal generator
power is available. (see parameter ID3440 "Min.
gen power"). A LogicsManager equation can be
set on TRUE to override this blocking factor.
MANUAL operation:
Generally the GGB holds the last condition of the other operation
modes.
n The GGB is allowed to be closed, if the GCB is closed. The
GGB is allowed to be closed on a dead generator busbar, if:
– The mains is ok AND
– the MCB is closed AND
– all GCBs are open AND
– no easYgen intends to do a GCB dead bus closure.
STOP operation:
The GGB is generally not operated.

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Breakers > General Breaker Settings
Minimal Generator Power Considera‐ With a GGB installed in the application an available generator
tion (Pmin) power on busbar can be considered.
To ensure that there is enough generator power available before
closing the GGB, a minimal generator rated power can be config‐
ured. Refer to ID3440 "Min. Generator power". The transfer
sequence is delayed until the correct amount of nominal power is
available. In special circumstances the Pmin consideration can be
bypassed through a LogicsManager equation. Refer to ID12936
"Bypass min. Pgen.".
This consideration is provided in the operation modes AUTO‐
MATIC, MANUAL and TEST and in all breaker transition modes.
4.4.3.2 General Breaker Settings

[Default]
3444 Application 2 The unit may be configured to different application modes. The discrete inputs
mode and relay outputs are pre-defined dependent upon the selected application
mode. Only the screens and functions that pertain to the application mode
selected are displayed. The single line diagram in the main screen will
change.
Refer to Ä Chapter 2.2 “Application Modes Overview” on page 39 for addi‐
tional information.
None Application mode

The control unit will function as an engine start/stop control with generator
and engine protection. All necessary inputs and outputs are assigned and
pre-defined.
GCB open Application mode

The control unit will function as an engine start/stop control with generator
and engine protection. The control unit can only open the GCB. All necessary
inputs and outputs are assigned and pre-defined.
GCB Application mode

The control unit will function as a one-CB unit. The control unit performs full
control like synchronizing, opening and closing the GCB with generator and
engine protection. All necessary inputs and outputs are assigned and pre-
defined.
[GCB/MCB] Application mode

The control unit will function as a two-CB unit. The control unit performs full
control like synchronizing, opening and closing the GCB and the MCB with
generator and engine protection. The GCB/MCB perform also full load
transfer via open/closed transition, interchange and parallel mode. All neces‐
sary inputs and outputs are assigned and pre-defined.
GCB/LS5 Application mode

In this mode the unit operates the GCB with close and open orders. All other
breakers in the system are operated by the LS-5. The CAN system allows
here a maximum 16 LS-5 and 32 easYgen-3400/3500(XT) devices.
GCB/L-MCB Application mode

In this mode the unit operates the breakers like in the mode "GCB/MCB". But
instead of operating the MCB directly over relays the unit commands an LS-5
to operate the MCB.
GCB/GGB Application mode

In this mode the unit operates the GCB and a "Generator Group Breaker"
(GGB) with close and open orders.
GCB/GGB/MCB Application mode

In this mode the unit operates the GCB, the GGB and the MCB with close and
open orders.

Configuration

[Default]
GCB/GGB/L- Application mode

MCB
In this mode the unit operates the breakers like in the mode "GCB/GGB/
MCB". But instead of operating the MCB directly over relays the unit com‐
mands an LS-5 to operate the MCB.
GCB/L-GGB Application mode

In this mode the unit operates the breakers like in the mode "GCB/GGB". But
instead of operating the GGB directly over relays the unit commands an LS-5
to operate the GGB. In comparison to the "GCB/GGB" mode, it does not allow
a mains parallel operation. So this is a purely islanded operation mode.
GCB/L-GGB/L- Application mode

MCB
MCB". But instead of operating the MCB and GGB directly over relays the
unit commands two single LS-5 to operate the MCB and GGB.
GCB/L- Application mode

GGBMCB
MCB". But instead of operating the GGB and MCB directly over relays the
unit commands the LS-5x2 to operate the GGB and the MCB. The LS-5x2
must be accordingly configured to application mode L-GGBMCB.
3411 Breaker transi‐ 2 The control unit automatically controls the two breakers (MCB and GCB).
tion mode
External
Open Transition
Closed Transit.
Interchange
[Parallel]
Notes
The following applies to application modes , , , , ,
and .
For a detailed explanation for each mode refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.3.1.6 “Tran‐
sition Modes (Breaker Logic)” on page 245.
The unit provides two alternative transition modes, which may be activated
temporarily via the LogicsManager and override the transition mode config‐
ured in this parameter.
tion mode 1
External
Open Transition
Closed Transit.
Interchange
[Parallel]
Notes
and .
12931 Transition mode 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the transition
1 LogicsManager mode configured in parameter 3412 Ä p. 252 will be used instead of the
86.93 standard transition mode configured in parameter 3411 Ä p. 252.
= 11922

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
and .
Alternative transition mode 1 has priority over alternative transition mode 2,
i.e. if both LogicsManager functions (parameters 12931 Ä p. 252/Ä p. 1038
and 12932 Ä p. 253/Ä p. 1038) are TRUE, breaker transition mode 1 (param‐
eter 3412 Ä p. 252) will be used.
tion mode 2
External
Open Transition
Closed Transit.
Interchange
[Parallel]
Notes
and .
12932 Transition mode 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the transition
2 LogicsManager mode configured in parameter 3412 Ä p. 252 will be used instead of the
86.94 standard transition mode configured in parameter 3411 Ä p. 252.
[(0 & 1) & 1] Notes
= 11923 Alternative transition mode 1 has priority over alternative transition mode 2,
i.e. if both LogicsManager functions (parameters 12931 Ä p. 252/Ä p. 1038
and 12932 Ä p. 253/Ä p. 1038) are TRUE, breaker transition mode 1 (param‐
eter 3412 Ä p. 252) will be used.
3400 Transfer time 2 1.00 to 99.99 s Switching from generator supply to mains supply or from mains supply to gen‐
GCB↔MCB erator supply occurs automatically if the operating conditions have been met.
[1.00 s]
The time between the reply "power circuit breaker is open" and a close pulse
is set by this parameter. This time applies for both directions. During this time
the consumers are de-energized.
Notes
and .
This is only valid, if parameter 3411 Ä p. 252 is configured to OPEN TRANSI‐
TION
6676 LS5 slip freq. 2 -0.50 to 0.50 Hz This is a separate slip frequency offset, being executed instead of the
separate offset "standard slip frequency offset" 5502 Ä p. 311 if the easYgen-XT receives an
[-0.1 Hz] according flag "Synchronization with separated slip frequency offset". The flag
is sent by the LS-5 (series II) Load share message.
Notes
This is usually receipt from an LS-5, which synchronizes a breaker at the
interchange point to mains. Here exporting power to mains must be avoided.

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Breakers > Configure Breakers: GCB
4.4.3.3 Configure Breakers: GCB

General notes
Normally Open (N.O.) contacts

The relay (discrete output) must be energized to
close the contact.
Fig. 171: Normally Open contacts -

schematic
Normally Closed (N.C.) contacts

The relay (discrete output) must be energized to
open the contact.
Fig. 172: Normally Closed contacts -

schematic

[Default]
3403 GCB open relay 2 [N.O.] Normally open:

The relay "command: GCB open" will be energized to open the GCB and will
be de-energized again after the discrete input "Reply GCB" is energized to
signal the control that the GCB is open.
N.C. Normally closed:

The relay "command: GCB open" will be de-energized to open the GCB and
will be energized again after the discrete input "Reply GCB" is energized to
signal the control that the GCB is open.
Not used A GCB open relay is not used and relay R7 (Command: open GCB) is freely
programmable. In this case, parameter 3414 Ä p. 254 must be configured to
"Steady" to open the breaker.
Notes
This parameter only applies to application mode to .
3414 GCB close com‐ 2 Impulse The relay "Command: GCB close" issues an add-on pulse. If the relay is con‐
mand figured in this manner a holding coil and sealing contacts must be installed
externally to the control unit. The DI "Reply GCB" is used to identify closed
contacts.
[Steady] The relay "Command: close GCB" may be wired directly into the holding cir‐
cuit for the power circuit breaker. If this method is utilized it is recommended
that isolation relays are used.
After the connect pulse has been issued and the reply of the power circuit
breaker has been received, the relay "Command: close GCB" remains ener‐
gized. If a class C alarm or higher occurs or a GCB open command is issued,
this relay de-energizes.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
In both cases the relay "Command: GCB open" energizes to open the GCB if
parameter 3403 Ä p. 254 is not configured as "Not used".
This parameter only applies to application modes to .
3416 GCB time pulse 2 0.10 to 1.00 s The time of the pulse output may be adjusted to the breaker being utilized.
[0.50 s] Notes
5729 Synchronization 2 [Slip frequency] The frequency controller adjusts the frequency in a way, that the frequency of
GCB the source (generator) is marginal greater than the target (busbar). When the
synchronizing conditions are reached, a close command will be issued. The
slipping frequency depends on the setting of "Slip frequency offset" (param‐
eter 5502 Ä p. 311).
Phase matching The frequency controller adjusts the phase angle of the source (generator) to
that of the target (busbar), in view of turning the phase difference to zero.
Notes
Notes
Regardless of breaker control, the values of 5700, 5701, 5702, 5703, 5704, 8824, and 8825 are important to the sync-
check relay function.
5700 Voltage differen‐ 2 0.00 to 20.00% The maximum permissible voltage differential for closing the generator circuit
tial GCB breaker is configured here.
[5.00%]
If the difference between generator and busbar voltage does not exceed the
value configured here and the generator voltage is within the operating
voltage window (parameters 5800 Ä p. 367 and 5801 Ä p. 367), the "Com‐
mand: GCB close" may be issued.
Notes
This value refers to the generator rated voltage (parameter 1766 Ä p. 497).
5701 Positive fre‐ 2 0.00 to 0.49 Hz The prerequisite for a close command being issued for the GCB is that the
quency differen‐ differential frequency is below the configured differential frequency.
tial GCB [+0.18 Hz]
This value specifies the upper frequency (positive value corresponds to posi‐
tive slip ￫ generator frequency is higher than the busbar frequency).
Notes
5702 Negative fre‐ 2 -0.49 to 0.00 Hz The prerequisite for a close command being issued for the GCB is that the
quency differen‐ differential frequency is above the configured differential frequency.
tial GCB [-0.10 Hz]
This value specifies the lower frequency limit (negative value corresponds to
negative slip ￫ generator frequency is less than the busbar frequency).
Notes
5703 Maximum posi‐ 2 0.0 to 60.0° The prerequisite for a close command being issued for the GCB is that the
tive phase angle leading phase angle between generator and busbar is below the configured
GCB [7.0°] maximum permissible angle.
Notes
This parameter is only displayed, if parameter 5729 Ä p. 255 is configured to
"Phase matching".
5704 Maximum nega‐ 2 -60.0 to 0.0° The prerequisite for a close command being issued for the GCB is that the
tive phase angle lagging phase angle between generator and busbar is below the configured
GCB [-7.0°] maximum permissible angle.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
"Phase matching".
5707 Phase matching 2 0.0 to 60.0 s This is the minimum time that the generator voltage, frequency, and phase
GCB dwell time angle must be within the configured limits before the breaker will be closed.
[3.0 s]
Notes
"Phase matching".
8825 Phase angle 2 The phase angle between generator voltage and generator busbar voltage
compensation can be compensated according to an installed power transformer between
GCB generator and busbar.
On The compensation is active. The phase will be compensated according the

value configured in parameter 8824 Ä p. 256.
Notes
Measured values 181 'Ph.ang.busb1-gen.L12' and 184 'Ph.ang.mns.busb1
L12' are not changed but the compensated (8824 Ä p. 256) values are taken
for synchronization control and synchroscope display.
[Off] The compensation is inactive. The phase angle is directly taken from the
measurement.
Notes
WARNING: Ensure the following parameters are configured correctly to pre‐
vent erroneous synchronization settings. Incorrect wiring of the system cannot
be compensated for with this parameter!
Please check during initial commissioning the phase angle and the synchroni‐
zation with a zero voltmeter.
Recommendation: For safety reasons, please mark the easYgen with a label
showing the configured phase angle compensation.
Refer to Ä Chapter 6.3.11 “Phase Angle Compensation” on page 638 for
details.
8824 Phase angle 2 -180 to 180° The phase angle compensation corrects the degree between generator
GCB voltage and busbar voltage. The configured degree is added to the real meas‐
[0°] ured phase angle.
Visible only, if parameter 8825 is "On".
Notes
Ensure correct configuration to prevent erroneous synchronization settings to
avoid generator destructive power. Incorrect wiring cannot be compensated
for with this parameter!
3432 Dead bus clo‐ 2 [On] A dead busbar closure is allowed if the required conditions are met.
sure GCB
Off A GCB close command to a dead busbar is prevented. Synchronization is still
possible.
Notes
15161 Inhibit dead bus 2 Determined by If active the dead bus closure of the GCB can be inhibited.
closure GCB LogicsManager
87.74 Notes
= 11463

Configuration

[Default]
3415 Generator 2 0 to 99 s The time configured here begins to count down once the “Engine monitoring
stable time delay timer” 3315 Ä p. 194 has expired. This permits for an additional delay
[2 s] time before the breaker is closed in order to ensure that none of the engine
delayed watchdogs trips.
It is possible to bypass this delay time through the LogicsManager (param‐
eter 12210 Ä p. 257/Ä p. 1035) in the event an emergency operation condition
(mains failure) occurs.
Unnecessary CB switching operations and voltage interruptions should be
avoided by utilizing this parameter.
Notes
After “Generator stable time” has expired, then 03.08 Ä p. 992/Ä p. 1048
“Breaker del. exp. -Status” becomes TRUE.
12210 Undelay close 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the GCB will be
GCB LogicsManager closed immediately (without waiting for engine speed delay and generator
86.12 stable timer to expire).
[(04.09 Emer‐ When using the standard setting, the GCB will be closed without delay in
gency mode & emergency power operation.
1) & 1]
Notes
= 10711
Usually the dead busbar negotiation is started with reaching the generator fre‐
quency and voltage operating window. But during the function "undelayed
close GCB", the dead busbar negotiation is executed from the moment on the
engine has reached the firing speed.
Through starting the dead bus bar negotiation earlier, the overall time before
closing the GCB can be shorten.
12976 GCB open in 2 Determined by With the rising edge of this LogicsManager equation a GCB open command
MAN LogicsManager in operating mode MANUAL is initiated. The state TRUE of this LM inhibits
87.46 the GCB close command in MANUAL.
[(0 & 1) & 1] Notes
= 11435 This parameter only applies to application mode to .
12977 GCB close in 2 Determined by With the rising edge of this LogicsManager equation a GCB close command
MAN LogicsManager in operating mode MANUAL is initiated.Precondition: deactivated "GCB open
87.47 in MAN"
[(0 & 1) & 1] Notes
= 11436 This parameter only applies to application mode to .
5705 Closing time 2 40 to 300 ms The inherent closing time of the GCB corresponds to the lead-time of the
GCB close command.
[80 ms]
The close command will be issued independent of the differential frequency at
the entered time before the synchronous point.
Notes
3405 GCB auto 2 This is used for special circuit breakers to put the GCB into a defined initial
unlock state or to enable closing at all.
Yes Before every close-pulse, an open-pulse is issued for defined duration

(parameter 5708 Ä p. 258. A CB close pulse is enabled only after the open
pulse is issued.
[No] The CB close pulse is enabled without being preceded by a CB open pulse.

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Breakers > Configure Breakers: GGB

[Default]
Notes
5708 GCB open time 2 1.00 to 10.00 s This time defines the length of the GCB open time pulse, if the automatic
pulse switch unblocking GCB is activated.
[1.00 s]
Notes
4.4.3.4 Configure Breakers: GGB

General notes
All of the following Parameters only apply to the
application modes:
, , , , and

[Default]
3440 Min. Generator 2 0.00 to 327.67 GGB operation - the GGB shall be closed when a minimum of generator rated
power MW power is available. Each easYgen adds the nominal power of all active run‐
ning generators to determine the closing of the GGB.
[0.10 MW]
Notes
This parameter only applies to application mode , , , ,
and .
12936 Bypass min. 2 Determined by This LogicsManager equation can bypass the considered minimal nominal
Pgen. LogicsManager generator power for closing the GGB.
87.29
If the LogicsManager becomes TRUE the GGB will be closed independent of
= 11418 the current nominal generator power. According to the breaker transfer mode.
Precondition: minimum one GGB is closed.
Notes
This parameter is valid for transition modes , , , , ,
and now. On lower software versions (> SW 1.2100) this parameter only
applied to application modes and .
5726 GGB time pulse 2 0.10 to 0.50 s The time of the pulse output may be adjusted to the breaker being utilized.
[0.50 s] Notes
and .
GGB the source (generator) is marginal greater than the target (load busbar).
When the synchronizing conditions are reached, a close command will be
issued. The slipping frequency depends on the setting of "Slip frequency
offset" (parameter 5502 Ä p. 311).
Phase matching The frequency controller adjusts the phase angle of the source (generator) to
that of the target (load busbar), in view of turning the phase difference to zero.
Notes
Please consider that the "Phase angle compensation MCB" (parameter
8841 Ä p. 262 influences the GGB synchronization as well. In both synchroni‐
sations the phase angle between generator busbar and mains is used.
and .

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
Regardless of breaker control, the values of 5723, 5724, and 5720 are impor‐
tant to the sync-check relay function.
5720 Voltage differen‐ 2 0.50 to 20.00% The maximum permissible voltage differential for closing the generator group
tial GGB breaker is configured here.
[5.00%]
If the difference between generator busbar and mains voltage does not
exceed the value configured here and the mains voltage is within the oper‐
ating voltage window (parameters 5810 Ä p. 419 and 5811 Ä p. 419), the
"Command: GGB close" may be issued.
Notes
This value refers to the generator rated voltage (parameter 1766 Ä p. 497)
and mains rated voltage (parameter 1768 Ä p. 501).
and .
5721 Positive fre‐ 2 0.0 to 0.49 Hz The prerequisite for a close command being issued for the GGB is that the
quency differen‐ differential frequency is below the configured differential frequency.
tial GGB [+0.18 Hz]
This value specifies the upper frequency (positive value corresponds to posi‐
tive slip ￫ generator frequency is higher than the load busbar frequency).
Notes
and .
5722 Negative fre‐ 2 -0.49 to 0.00 Hz The prerequisite for a close command being issued for the GGB is that the
quency differen‐ differential frequency is above the configured differential frequency.
tial GGB [-0.10 Hz]
This value specifies the lower frequency limit (negative value corresponds to
negative slip ￫ generator frequency is less than the load busbar frequency).
Notes
and .
5723 Maximum posi‐ 2 0.0 to 60.0° The prerequisite for a close command being issued for the GGB is that the
tive phase angle leading phase angle between generator and load busbar is below the config‐
GGB [7.0°] ured maximum permissible angle.
Notes
and .
"Phase matching".
5724 Maximum nega‐ 2 -60.0 to 0.0° The prerequisite for a close command being issued for the GGB is that the
tive phase angle lagging phase angle between generator and load busbar is below the config‐
GGB [-7.0°] ured maximum permissible angle.
Notes
and .
"Phase matching".
5727 Phase matching 2 0.0 to 60.0 s This is the minimum time that the generator voltage, frequency, and phase
GGB dwell time angle must be within the configured limits before the breaker will be closed.
[3.0 s]
Notes
and .
"Phase matching".
3422 GGB mode 2 [GGB open The GGB opens when the last GCB was opened.
mode]

Configuration

[Default]
GGB close The GGB is usually closed.

mode
sure GGB
Off A GGB close command to a dead load busbar is prevented. Synchronization
is still possible.
5725 Closing time 2 40 to 300 ms The inherent closing time of the GGB corresponds to the lead-time of the
GGB close command.
[80 ms]
Notes
and .
3441 Voltage moni‐ 2 The decision to close the GGB or the MCB on a dead load busbar depends
toring load on the feedback of the GGB and MCB. To avoid damage because of a wrong
busbar breaker feedback the condition of the load busbar can additionally be moni‐
tored by a separate voltage relay.
On The external load busbar voltage monitoring is enabled and the terminal 76
(input 10) expects a dead load busbar signal according to the breaker feed‐
back GGB and MCB. The signal is usually provided by an external three
phase voltage relay.
[Off] The external load busbar voltage monitoring is disabled and the terminal 76
(input 10) is free for other purposes.
3446 GGB auto 2 This is used for special circuit breakers to put the GGB into a defined initial

pulse is issued.
Notes
and .
5719 GGB open time 2 0.10 to 9.90 s This time defines the length of the GGB open time pulse, if the automatic
pulse switch unblocking GGB is activated.
[1.00 s]
Notes
and .
12972 GGB open in 2 Determined by With the rising edge of this LogicsManager equation a GGB open command
87.61 the GGB close command in MANUAL.
= 11450
Notes
and .
12973 GGB close in 2 Determined by With the rising edge of this LogicsManager equation a GGB close command
MAN LogicsManager in operating mode MANUAL is initiated.Precondition: deactivated "GGB open
87.62 in MAN"
= 11451
Notes
and .

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Breakers > Configure Breakers: MCB
4.4.3.5 Configure Breakers: MCB

General notes
The following parameters are only applicable for
application modes , , , , and
.

[Default]
3417 MCB time pulse 2 0.10 to 0.50 s Breaker pulse duration to close the MCB
[0.50 s] The time of the pulse output may be adjusted to the breaker being utilized.
Notes
This parameter only applies to application mode and .
MCB the source (busbar) is marginal greater than the target (mains). When the
synchronizing conditions are reached, a close command will be issued. The
slipping frequency is positive to avoid reverse power.
Phase matching The frequency controller adjusts the phase angle of the source (busbar) to
that of the target (mains), in view of turning the phase difference to zero.
Notes
Notes
Regardless of breaker control, the values of 5710, 5711, 5712, 5713, 5714,
8841, and 8842 are important to the sync-check relay function.
5713 Max positive 2 0.0 to 60.0° The prerequisite for a connect command being issued for the MCB is that the
phase angle leading phase angle between busbar and mains is below the configured max‐
MCB [7.0°] imum permissible angle.
(Maximum per‐ Notes
missible positive
phase angle This parameter is only displayed, if parameter 5730 Ä p. 261 is configured to
MCB) "Phase matching".
5714 Max negative 2 -60.0 to 0.0° The prerequisite for a connect command being issued for the MCB is that the
phase angle lagging phase angle between busbar and mains is below the configured max‐
MCB [-7.0°] imum permissible angle.
(Maximum per‐ Notes
missible nega‐
tive phase angle This parameter is only displayed, if parameter 5730 Ä p. 261 is configured to
MCB) "Phase matching".
5710 Voltage differen‐ 2 0.00 to 20.00% The maximum permissible voltage differential for closing the mains circuit
tial MCB breaker is configured here.
[5.00%]
Notes
This value refers to the generator rated voltage (parameter 1766 Ä p. 497)
and mains rated voltage (parameter 1768 Ä p. 501).
If the difference between mains and busbar voltage does not exceed the
value configured here and the mains voltage is within the operating voltage
window (parameters 5810 Ä p. 419 and 5811 Ä p. 419), the "Command:
MCB close" may be issued.
5711 Pos. freq. differ‐ 2 0.02 to 0.49 Hz The prerequisite for a connect command being issued for the MCB is that the
ential MCB differential frequency is below the configured differential frequency.
[0.18 Hz]
(Positive fre‐ This value specifies the upper frequency (positive value corresponds to posi‐
quency differen‐ tive slip ￫ busbar frequency is higher than the mains frequency).
tial MCB)

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
5712 Neg. freq. differ‐ 2 -0.49 to 0.00 Hz The prerequisite for a connect command being issued for the MCB is that the
ential MCB differential frequency is above the configured differential frequency.
[-0.10 Hz]
(Negative fre‐ This value specifies the lower frequency limit (negative value corresponds to
quency differen‐ negative slip ￫ busbar frequency is less than the mains frequency).
tial MCB)
Notes
5709 MCB sync. with 2 On The MCB is synchronized with an individual slip frequency (also negative).
separate slip
Notes
The setting for the slipping frequency (parameter 5647 Ä p. 262) via display
is located under 'configure frequency control'.
[Off] The MCB is synchronized with the same slip frequency like the GCB (param‐
eter 5502 Ä p. 311).
Notes
5647 MCB slip freq. 2 -0.50 ... 0...50 Individual frequency offset for the MCB and LS5 synchronization. This value
setpoint offset Hz can be a positive or negative offset. The value is valid as long as the param‐
eter 'MCB synchronization with separate slip' On/Off' (parameter
[-0.10 Hz] 5709 Ä p. 262) is set to 'On' .
8841 Phase angle 2 The phase angle between busbar voltage and mains voltage can be compen‐
compensation sated according to an installed power transformer between busbar and mains.
MCB
On The compensation is active. The phase will be compensated according the
value configured in parameter 8842 Ä p. 262.
Notes
Measured values 181 'Ph.ang.busb1-gen.L12' and 184 'Ph.ang.mns.busb1
L12' are not changed but the compensated (8842 Ä p. 262) values are taken
for synchronization control and synchroscope display.
[Off] The compensation is inactive. The phase angle is directly taken from the
measurement.
Notes
WARNING: Ensure the following parameters are configured correctly to pre‐
vent erroneous synchronization settings. Incorrect wiring of the system cannot
be compensated for with this parameter!
Please check during initial commissioning the phase angle and the synchroni‐
zation with a zero voltmeter.
Recommendation: For safety reasons, please mark the easYgen with a label
showing the configured phase angle compensation.
Refer to Ä Chapter 6.3.11 “Phase Angle Compensation” on page 638 for
details.
8842 Phase angle 2 -180 to 180° The phase angle compensation corrects the degree between busbar voltage
MCB and mains voltage. The configured degree is added to the real measured
[0°] phase angle.
Notes
Ensure correct configuration to prevent erroneous synchronization settings to
avoid generator destructive power. Incorrect wiring cannot be compensated
for with this parameter!
5717 Phase matching 2 0.0 to 60.0 s This is the minimum time that the generator/busbar voltage, frequency, and
MCB dwell time phase angle must be within the configured limits before the breaker will be
[3.0 s] closed.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
"Phase matching".
sure MCB
Off An MCB close command to a dead busbar is prevented. Synchronization is
still possible.
Notes
, and .
5715 Closing time 2 40 to 300 ms The inherent closing time of the MCB corresponds to the lead-time of the
MCB close command.
[80 ms]
Notes
3407 MCB auto 2 This is used for special circuit breakers to put the MCB into a defined initial

pulse is issued.
Notes
12923 Enable MCB 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the MCB will be
LogicsManager enabled.
86.85
Notes
[(09.06 DI06 & !
08.07 MCB fail DI 6 is pre-assigned by default to this function, but may be configured freely.
to close) & !
07.05 Mns. ph. For information on the LogicsManager and its default settings see Ä Chapter
rot. mismatch] 9.3.1 “LogicsManager Overview” on page 986.
= 11914 This parameter only applies to application mode , , , ,

, and .
5718 MCB open time 2 0.10 to 9.90 s This time defines the length of the MCB open time pulse, if the automatic
pulse switch unblocking MCB is activated.
[1.00 s]
Notes
12974 MCB open in 2 Determined by With the rising edge of this LogicsManager equation a MCB open command
87.48 the MCB close command in MANUAL.
[(0 & 1) & 1] Notes
, and .

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Breakers > Configure Breakers: Synchr...

[Default]
12975 MCB close in 2 Determined by With the rising edge of this LogicsManager equation a MCB close command
MAN LogicsManager in operating mode MANUAL is initiated.Precondition: deactivated "MCB open
87.49 in MAN"
[(0 & 1) & 1] Notes
, and .
4.4.3.6 Configure Breakers: Synchronization

General notes
The following parameters are only applicable for
application modes to .

[Default]
5728 Synchronization 2 Off The synchronization is disabled; the frequency and voltage adaptation for
mode synchronization is not active.
In operation mode AUTO the easYgen allows the external GCB closing in
synchronization mode “Off” if:
n Start request in automatic active

n Generator is in operating range
n The engine start procedure is finished
In operation mode AUTO the easYgen allows the external MCB closing in
n Mains is in the operating range

In operation mode AUTO the easYgen allows the external GGB closing in
n Minimum 1 GCB is closed
Permissive The unit acts as a synch check device. The unit will not issue speed or
voltage bias commands to achieve a synchronization, but if phase matching
synchronization conditions are matched (frequency, phase, voltage and
phase angle), the control will issue a breaker close command.
There are two different functionalities of this option depending on the setting
of parameter 3414 Ä p. 254 (GCB close command).
n GCB close command set to "Impulse":

The GCB close command is pulsed as long as the synchronization con‐
ditions are matched.
n GCB close command set to "Steady":
The GCB close command remains enabled as long as the synchroniza‐
tion conditions are matched.
Check Used for checking a synchronizer prior to commissioning.

The control actively synchronizes generator(s) by issuing speed and voltage
bias commands, but does not issue a breaker closure command for synchro‐
nizing.
[Run] Normal operating mode. The control actively synchronizes and issues breaker
closure commands.

Configuration

[Default]
Controlled by The synchronization mode may be selected by enabling one of the respective
LM LogicsManager functions (parameters 12907 Ä p. 265/Ä p. 1037,
12906 Ä p. 265/Ä p. 1037, or 12908 Ä p. 265/Ä p. 1037).
If none of these parameters is enabled, the synchronization is disabled.
If more than one of these parameters is enabled, the following priority is valid:
n 1. PERMISSIVE
n 2. CHECK
n 3. RUN
Notes
The device will still perform a dead busbar closure if the conditions are valid.
12907 Syn. mode 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the PERMIS‐
PERMIS. LogicsManager SIVE synchronization mode will be enabled.
86.39
(Synchroniza‐ Notes
tion mode PER‐ [(0 & 1) & 1]
MISSIVE) For information on the LogicsManager and its default settings see Ä Chapter
12906 Syn. mode 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the CHECK
CHECK LogicsManager synchronization mode will be enabled.
86.38
(Synchroniza‐ Notes
tion mode [(0 & 1) & 1]
CHECK) For information on the LogicsManager and its default settings see Ä Chapter
12908 Syn. mode RUN 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the RUN syn‐
LogicsManager chronization mode will be enabled.
(Synchroniza‐ 86.40
tion mode RUN) Notes
[(0 & 1) & 1]
15157 Synchroscope 2 On The synchroscope screen automatically appears on the main screen, when
autom. to front the synchronization becomes active.
(Synchroscope [Off] Functionality deactivated.
automatic to
front)
4.4.3.6.1 Independent Sync. Check Function

General notes The device provides two independent "Sync Check" functions for
the voltage comparisons generator to busbar and busbar to mains.
The criteria are the same like for the according internal self-exe‐
cuted synchronization.
The easYgen provides two command variables available for the
LogicsManager input:
n 02.29 Sync Check generator / busbar
n 02.32 Sync Check mains / busbar
WARNING!
No dead bus interlocking
Synch. Check is intended to be a redundant check
function enhancing system security. Don't use for
MCB control!

Configuration
The Sync. Check functionality is available in every

application mode. The command variables are
independently calculated and depending on the
same configurations, like the self-executed GCB
and MCB close commands. The sync. Check func‐
tion has no influence on any frequency or voltage
biasing. There is no relationship to the Sync.
Check mode for the internal self-executed synchro‐
nization.
The Synch. Check command variables do not care

about:
– Possible dead busbar closure capabilities
– Internally calculated self-executed circuit
breaker close orders
– Synchronization control conditions, like “mains
settling time ”
Variables and Parameters [02.29 Sync.Check gen./busb] depends on

n Voltage
n Frequency
and
n Phase angle
The command variable [02.29 Sync.Check gen./busb] is true if the
synchronization conditions are matched according to (GCB)
parameters:
n 5701: Pos. freq. differential
n 5702: Neg. freq. differential
n 5700: Voltage differential
n 8825, 8824: Phase angle compensation
n 5703: Max. positive phase angle
n 5704: Max. negative phase angle GCB
[02.32 Sync.Check mns/busb] depends on

n Voltage
n Frequency
and
n Phase angle
The command variable [02.32 Sync.Check mns/busb] is true, if the
synchronization conditions are matched according to parameters:
n 5711: Pos. freq. differential MCB
n 5712: Neg. freq. differential MCB
n 5710: Voltage differential MCB
n 8841,8842: Phase angle compensation MCB
n 5713: Max. positive phase angle MCB
n 5714: Max. negative phase angle MCB

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Controller
4.4.3.7 Configure Breakers: Neutral Interlocking

General Notes The Neutral Interlocking feature controls a Neutral Contactor (NC)
of each generator. The rule is that only one neutral contactor of all
running generators are closed. The Logic ensures that with
changing of generators the neutral link is passed over to another
running generator. Refer to Ä Chapter 6.3.14 “Neutral Interlocking”
on page 646 for more information.

[Default]
1840 Neutral inter‐ 2 On Neutral interlocking is enabled. The command variable 03.39 Close neutral
locking contactor is activated and the DI 12 is used for the NC feedback. The unit
monitors the NC feedback according to the close order.
[Off] Neutral interlocking is disabled. The NC monitoring is disabled.
1841 Priority 2 1 ... 32 The priority determines which NC is closed, if multiple gens are running in the
same segment.
[1]
Notes
The lower the configured number, the higher the priority
To make use of the Close neutral interlocking con‐

tactor status, configure a discrete output relay DO
x to react for 03.39.
4.4.4 Configure Controller
WARNING!
Hazards due to incorrect settings
The following parameters dictate how the easYgen
controls voltage, frequency, load and power factor.
Failure to do so may lead to incorrect measure‐
ments and failures within the control unit resulting
in damage to or destruction of the generator and/or
personal injury or death.
– Always ensure that the correct settings are
entered in these parameters.
The Real load, reactive load, and process control all utilize PID
controllers. The response of each control loop can be adjusted for
optimum response, however it is important to understand what a
PID controller is and the effect of each controller adjustment has
on the controller response.
Proportional gain, integral gain (stability) and DR (speed derivative
ratio) are the adjustable and interacting parameters used to match
the response of the control loop with the response of the system.
They correspond to the P (proportional), I (integral), and D (deriva‐
tive) terms, and are displayed in the easYgen as follows:

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Controller
P - Proportional gain (%)

I - Integral gain (%)
D - Derivative gain (determined by DR and I)
Proportional control Proportional response is directly proportional to a process change.

n Analogy: Setting hand throttle to keep constant speed on
straight and level road.
Proportional control (using the same analogy) results in a certain
speed as long as the car is not subjected to any load change such
as a hill. If a throttle is set to any particular setting, the speed of the
car will remain constant as long as the car remains straight and
level. If the car goes up a hill it will slow down. Of course, going
down a hill the car would gain speed.
Integral control Integral compensates for process and setpoint load changes.
n Analogy: Cruise control maintains constant speed regardless of
hills.
Integral, sometimes called reset, provides additional action to the
original proportional response as long as the process variable
remains away from the setpoint. Integral is a function of the magni‐
tude and duration of the deviation. In this analogy the reset
response would keep the car speed constant regardless of the ter‐
rain.
Derivative Derivative provides a temporary over-correction to compensate for

long transfer lags and reduce stabilization time on process upsets
(momentary disturbances). The behavior of the derivative param‐
eter is shown in Fig. 173.
n Analogy: Accelerating into high speed lane with merging traffic.
Derivative, sometimes called "preact" of "rate", is very difficult to
draw an accurate analogy to, because the action takes place only
when the process changes and is directly related to the speed at
which the process changes.
Merging into high speed traffic of a freeway from an "on" ramp is
no easy task and requires accelerated correction (temporary over‐
correction) in both increasing and decreasing directions. The appli‐
cation of brakes to fall behind the car in the first continuous lane or
passing gear to get ahead of the car in the first continuous lane is a
Fig. 173: Behavior of the derivative derivative action.
parameter
PID tuning example If the system is unstable, make sure the governor is the cause.
This can be checked by closing the valve limiter until it has control
of the actuator output. If the governor is causing the oscillation,
time the oscillation cycle time. A rule-of- thumb is, if the system’s
oscillation cycle time is less than 1 second, reduce the Proportional
gain term. A rule-of-thumb is, if the system’s oscillation cycle time
is greater than 1 second, reduce the Integral gain term (propor‐
tional gain may need to be increased also).
On an initial startup with the easYgen, all PID dynamic gain terms
will require adjustment to match the respective PID’s response to
that of its control loop. There are multiple dynamic tuning methods
available that can be used with the easYgen’s PIDs to assist in
determining the gain terms that provide optimum control loop
response times.

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Controller > Voltage Control
The following method can be used to achieve PID gain values that
are close to optimum:
1. Increase Derivative Ratio (DR) to 100.
2. Reduce integral gain to 0.01.
3. Increase proportional gain until system just starts to oscillate.
The optimum gain for this step is when the

system just starts to oscillate and maintains a
self-sustaining oscillation that does not
increase or decrease in magnitude.
4. Record the control gain (Kc) and oscillation period (T) in sec‐
onds.
5. Set the dynamics as follows:
n For PI control G=P(I/s + 1) set:
– Proportional gain = 0.45*Kc
– Integral gain = 1.2/T
– Derivative ratio = 100
n For PID control G=P(I/s + 1 + Ds) set:
– Proportional gain = 0.60*Kc
– Integral gain = 2/T
– Deriv ratio = 8/(T*Integral Gain) for feedback domi‐
nant
– Deriv ratio = (T*Integral Gain)/8 for input dominant
ð This method of tuning will get the gain settings close,
they can be fine-tuned from this point.
4.4.4.1 Voltage Control
ToolKit: find settings screen

“Parameter è Configuration: Configure application
è Configure controller: Configure voltage control”
AnalogManagers to define input signal of voltage
setpoint (1, 2) are available in ToolKit by
– a click from screen/page "Configure voltage
control"
– on the button "Analog manager" in the left
sidebar (below permanent buttons) or
– on two times "next page", or
– search for one of the AnalogManagers
5618 Ä p. 272/Ä p. 1071/5619 Ä p. 272/
Ä p. 1071

Configuration
ToolKit: Trend chart

ToolKit offers a trend visualization accessible by
control"
– on the button "Trend chart" in the left
– on "next page", or
– search for one of the voltage controlled param‐
eters 144 Ä p. 86/Ä p. 207/Ä p. 771/Ä p. 793/
Ä p. 865/Ä p. 897/
Ä p. 970/5535/5635/171 Ä p. 771/Ä p. 793/
Ä p. 865/Ä p. 946/170 Ä p. 763/Ä p. 771/
Ä p. 793/Ä p. 865/Ä p. 946

[Default]
5607 Voltage Control 2 Off Voltage control is not carried out.
[PID analog] The voltage is controlled using an analog PID controller.
3pos controller The voltage is controlled using a three-step controller.
AVR The voltage is controlled using an inner AVR algorithm acting on an excitation
module.
Note: (easYgen
3400XT/3500XT Note: With enabling the AVR function the power factor control (kvar control) is
only!) provided as well over this algorithm. The setting 5625 Power factor control is
faded out.
5608 Voltage control 2 0.0 to 100.0% The value entered for this parameter is the start reference point for the analog
initial state output to the voltage controller.
[50.0%]
If the output to the voltage control has been disabled, the output will act as a
control position reference point.
5610 Proportional 2 0.01 to 100.00 The proportional coefficient specifies the gain. By increasing the gain, the
gain response is increased to permit larger corrections to the variable to be con‐
[1.00] trolled. The farther out of tolerance the process is the larger the response
action is to return the process to the tolerance band. If the gain is configured
too high, the result is excessive overshoot/undershoot of the desired value.
Notes
This parameter is only visible if voltage control (parameter 5607 Ä p. 270) is
configured to "PID analog".
5611 Integral gain 2 0.01 to 100.00 The integral gain identifies the I part of the PID controller. The integral gain
corrects for any offset (between setpoint and process variable) automatically
[1.00] over time by shifting the proportioning band. Reset automatically changes the
output requirements until the process variable and the setpoint are the same.
This parameter permits the user to adjust how quickly the reset attempts to
correct for any offset. The integral gain constant must be greater than the
derivative time constant. If the integral gain constant is too large, the engine
will continually oscillate. If the integral gain constant is too small, the engine
will take too long to settle at a steady state.
Notes
5612 Derivative ratio 2 0.01 to 100.00 The derivative ratio identifies the D part of the PID controller. By increasing
this parameter, the stability of the system is increased.
[0.01]
The controller will attempt to slow down the action of the actuator in an
attempt to prevent excessive overshoot or undershoot.
Essentially this is the brake for the process. This portion of the PID loop oper‐
ates anywhere within the range of the process unlike reset.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
The default configured controller acts like a PI controller what is the valid D
part setting for systems with secondary controllers.
5650 Deadband 1 0.1 to 9.9% islanded operation

[1.0%] The generator voltage is controlled in such a manner that the measured
voltage does not deviate from the configured setpoint by more than the value
configured in this parameter without the controller issuing a voltage raise/
lower signal to the voltage regulator. This prevents unneeded wear on the
voltage bias output control or the raise/lower relay contacts.
Synchronization
The generator voltage is controlled in such a manner that the measured
voltage does not deviate from the monitored reference (mains or busbar)
voltage by more than the value configured in this parameter without the con‐
troller issuing a voltage raise/lower signal to the voltage regulator.
This prevents unneeded wear on the voltage bias output control or the raise/
lower relay contacts. The value configured for this parameter must be less
than the value configured for the dV max (maximum voltage differential) for
synchronization (parameters 5700 Ä p. 255 or 5710 Ä p. 261).
Notes
configured to "3pos controller".
5651 Time pulse min‐ 1 0.01 to 2.00 s A minimum pulse on time must be configured here. The shortest possible
imum pulse time should be configured to limit overshoot of the desired voltage refer‐
[0.05 s] ence point.
Notes
5652 Gain factor 1 0.1 to 10.0 The gain factor Kp influences the operating time of the relays. By increasing
the number configured in this parameter, the operating time of the relay will
[5.0] be in-creased in response to a deviation from the voltage reference.
By increasing the gain, the response is increased to permit larger corrections
to the variable to be controlled.
The farther out of tolerance the process is the larger the response action is to
return the process to the tolerance band. If the gain is configured too high, the
result is excessive overshoot/undershoot of the desired value.
Notes
5659 Cycle time 1 1.0 to 20.0 The cycle time factor adjusts the time between the pulses (pause time).
factor
[1.0] By increasing the cycle time factor, the time between the pulses increases.
Notes
5653 Expand dead‐ 1 1.0 to 9.9 If the measured generator voltage is within the deadband range (param‐
band factor eter 5650 Ä p. 271) and the configured delay expand deadband time (param‐
[1.0] eter 5654 Ä p. 271) expires, the deadband will be multiplied with the factor
configured here.
Notes
5654 Delay expand 1 1.0 to 9.9 s The measured generator voltage must be within the deadband range for the
deadband time configured here in order to multiply the deadband with the factor config‐
[2.0 s] ured in parameter 5653 Ä p. 271.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
5618 AM Voltage SP1 2 Determined by The voltage setpoint 1 source may be selected from the available data
[V] AnalogManager sources.
81.09
The internal voltage setpoint 05.57 can be changed manually at the setpoint
[A1 = 05.57 screen of the display.
Internal v setp1
[V]] Notes
The voltage setpoint may be adjusted within the configured operating limits
( Ä Chapter 4.5.1.1 “ Generator Operating Ranges: Voltage / Frequency /
Busbar” on page 367).
5600 Int.voltage con‐ 2 50 to 650,000 V The internal generator voltage setpoint 1 is defined in this screen. This value
trol setpoint 1 is the reference for the voltage controller when performing islanded and/or no-
[400 V] load operations.
5619 AM Voltage SP2 2 Determined by The voltage setpoint 2 source may be selected from the available data
[V] AnalogManager sources.
81.10
The internal voltage setpoint 05.58 can be changed manually at the setpoint
Internal v setp2
[V]] Notes
The voltage setpoint may be adjusted within the configured operating limits
5601 Int.voltage con‐ 2 50 to 650,000 V The internal generator voltage setpoint 2 is defined in this screen. This value
trol setpoint 2 is the reference for the voltage controller when performing islanded and/or no-
[400 V] load operations.
12920 Setp. 2 voltage 2 Determined by If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the voltage setpoint 2 will be used
LogicsManager instead of voltage setpoint 1. The voltage (result of AM) 5619 Ä p. 272/
86.83 Ä p. 1071 instead of 5618 Ä p. 272/Ä p. 1071 will be taken into account.
[(0 & 1) & 1] Notes
= 11912 For information on the LogicsManager and its default settings see Ä Chapter
Remotely switching the setpoint is possible: Use the LogicsManager com‐
mand variable for input that is correlating with the dedicated bit of parameter
504 Ä p. 691/Ä p. 704.
5616 Start value 1 0 to 100% The voltage controller is activated when the monitored generator voltage has
exceeded the value configured in this parameter. This prevents the easYgen
[70%] from attempting to control the voltage while the engine is completing its start
sequence.
Notes
This value refers to the generator voltage setpoint (parameter 5600 Ä p. 272
or 5601 Ä p. 272).
5617 Start delay 1 0 to 999 s The voltage controller is enabled after the configured time for this parameter
expires.
[5 s]
5603 Voltage control 2 1.00 to The different setpoint values are supplied to the controller via this ramp. The
setpoint ramp 300.00 %/s slope of the ramp is used to alter the rate at which the controller modifies the
setpoint value. The faster the change in the setpoint is to be carried out, the
[5.00 %/s] greater the value entered here must be.
5604 Voltage control 2 0.0 to 20.0% If this control is to be operated on a generator in parallel with other generators
droop and voltage control is enabled, a droop characteristic curve must be used.
[5.0%]
Each generator in the system will require the same value to be configured for
the droop characteristic, so that when the system is stable the reactive power
will be distributed proportionally among all generators in relation to their rated
reactive power.
12905 Volt. droop act. 2 Determined by If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the voltage droop is enabled.
LogicsManager
(Voltage droop 86.26
active)

Configuration

[Default]
[(08.17 Missing Example
member OR
08.06 GCB fail n Rated reactive power: 400 kvar
to open) & 1]
n Rated voltage setpoint: 410 V
= 11605 n Droop 5.0%
n Reactive power 0 kvar = 0% of rated power
n Voltage is adjusted to (410 V – [5.0% * 0.0 * 410 V]) = 410 V.
n Reactive power 400 kvar = 100% of rated reactive power
n Voltage is adjusted to (410 V – [5.0% * 1.0 * 410 V]) = 410 V – 20.5 V =
389.5 V.
Notes
12938 Release V-con‐ 2 Determined by This LogicsManager is used to activate generally the voltage biasing to the
trol LogicsManager sub controller. If the LogicsManager is false the output will be on the initial
86.97 state (see parameter 5608 Ä p. 270).
[(1 & 1) & 1] The LogicsManager condition status 'TRUE' is activating the voltage or reac‐
tive power regulation according to the LogicsManager 'V/Q control' ID
= 11926 12941 Ä p. 281/Ä p. 1038).
Notes
4.4.4.1.1 AVR
Introduction The easYgen-3000XT can replace in combination with an external
excitation module the traditional “external AVR”. In this mode the
easYgen-3000XT provides the voltage controller algorithm based
on the own AC measurement and sends an excitation control
signal to an excitation module. The excitation module itself acts as
a power amplifier and outputs the excitation current to the gener‐
ator.
Fig. 174: easYgen-3500XT-Schematic AVR control
Function The easYgen-3000XT with integrated voltage regulator provides:

n Automatic voltage regulation
n Soft start functionality

Configuration
n Under frequency regulation V(f) defined by reference points

and activated by LogicsManager
n Power factor and kvar control
n Reactive droop compensation (No relation to FRT)
The excitation control signal is usually put out through the analog
output 2 (terminal 19/20). The according AnalogManager is config‐
ured with 14.01 "Excitation AVR[%].
This function needs an external exciter module to

transform the excitation control signal into an
exciter current.
With activating the AVR function, the kvar control

(PF control) is automatically included. Therefore
the parameter "5625 Power factor control" is faded
out.
AVR Start sequence The first function to configure is the genset (AVR) start sequence,
which is configured so that the generator voltage is properly con‐
trolled during the up ramping generator after cranking.
Fig. 175: The AVR Start sequence

The figure shows the idealized set point voltage during the start
procedure:
Point 0: The engine is starting and the voltage controller is
released:
n The parameter “5632 Start voltage” determines the start
voltage setpoint.
n The excitation is limited to this time by parameter “5634 Max.
starting excitation”

Configuration

released:
n The excitation limit (5634) is disabled,
n The ramp defined by parameter “5633 Starting ramp” becomes
active, the set point is ramping up to the final voltage set point,
n The LogicsManager "12037 AVR Enable V(f)" can be used to
enable the V(f)-characteristic. Refer to AVR V(f) setting.
released:
n The Parameter “5633 Starting ramp” has no influence any‐
more. From now on, the common parameter “5603 Voltage
control set point ramp” is valid.
The AVR V(f) Curve The AVR function provides a frequency related voltage setpoint
adaptation. The easYgen offers 5 interpolation points definable
with frequency and voltage limit value. The result of this character‐
istic is available as AM analog variable or as indication in ToolKit.
Refer to "Observing of values" for more information. To enable the
V(f)-characteristic the LogicsManager "12037 AVR Enable V(f)" is
set on TRUE.
Controlling voltage and kvar The AVR voltage controller is taking care about the voltage control
in isolated operation and the power factor- or kvar control in par‐
allel to mains operation. The LogicsManager "12941 Q control"
switches between voltage and power factor control. The PID set‐
tings for voltage and kvar are used as well for the AVR as for the
PID analog function.
So all parameters remains valid except the parameters “5616 Start
value” and “5617 Start delay”.
Observing values ToolKit:

To observe the excitation control signal and the inner voltage set‐
point the device indicates on ToolKit fields:
n 15842 14.01 Excitation AVR [%]
n 15843 14.02 Volt.setp. V(f) [%]
n 15844 14.52 Volt.setp. V(f) [V]
AnalogManager:
To observe the excitation control signal and the inner voltage set‐
point the device provides analog variables:
n 14.01 Excitation AVR [%]
n 14.02 Volt. setp V(f) [%]
n 14.52 Volt. setp V(f) [V]

[Default]
5624 Voltage filter 2 0 to 1s The measured generator voltage can be filtered. The filter output value have
time 63% from the input value after the configured filter time. The filtered value is
[0s] available as analog variable.
[PID analog] The voltage is controlled using an analog PID controller.

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Controller > Power Factor Control

[Default]
3pos controller The voltage is controlled using a three-step controller.
AVR The voltage is controlled using an inner AVR algorithm acting on an excitation
module.
Note: (easYgen
3400XT/3500XT Note: With enabling the AVR function the power factor control (kvar control) is
only!) provided as well over this algorithm. The setting 5625 Power factor control is
faded out.
5632 Start voltage 2 10 to 90% This is the start set-point for the voltage controller
[50%]
5633 Starting ramp 2 1 to 300% The voltage controller uses the set point ramp during starting from the start
voltage values to the active voltage reference
[5%]
5634 Maximum 2 1 to 90% During starting the here entered excitation value is used. If the real voltage
starting excita‐ reaches the starting voltage setpoint this excitation limit is removed.
tion [20%]
5480 Frequency ref‐ 2 15 to 85% Frequency reference point

erence point
5482 5480: [15Hz]
5484 5482: [30Hz]
5486 5484: [40Hz]
5488 5486: [50Hz]
5488: [60Hz]
5481 Voltage refer‐ 2 15 to 85% Voltage reference point

ence point
5483 5481: [50%]
5485 5483: [50%]
5487 5485: [80%]
5489 5487: [100%]
5489: [100%]
5633 Starting ramp 2 1 to 300% The voltage controller uses the set point ramp during starting from the start
voltage values to the active voltage reference
[5%]
Parameter Under frequency regula‐ The voltage set-point V(f) is defined with five reference points. The
tion V(f) characteristic reference points are interpolated to each other.
The result of this characteristic related to the current set point (not
to the rated voltage) and is passed as final set point to the PID
control. The result of the characteristic related to the current set
point is available as analog variable 14.02 Voltage set-point V(f)
[%] and 14.52 Voltage set-point V(f) [V].
4.4.4.2 Power Factor Control

The easYgen cover a wide range of power factor control tasks:
n Controller type can be selected for an analog PID or a three-
step controller (see chapter Ä Chapter 4.4.4.2.2 “Configure
Power Factor / kvar Control” on page 278)
n PF(P) characteristic is available (see chapter Ä Chapter
4.4.4.2.4 “Power Factor Characteristic” on page 282)

Configuration
n Beside PF(P) characteristic, Q(V) characteristic is available too

(see chapter Ä Chapter 4.4.4.2.4 “Power Factor Characteristic”
on page 282).
n Reactive power control at the interchange point offers another
opportunity of power factor control (see chapter Ä Chapter
4.4.4.2.1 “Control The Power Factor / Reactive Power At The
Mains Interchange Point” on page 277).
4.4.4.2.1 Control The Power Factor / Reactive Power At The Mains Interchange Point
General notes Being parallel to the utility, it is desired in some application to con‐
trol either the power factor or the amount of imported/exported
inductive reactive power in kvar at the mains interchange point.
Similar to an import/export active power setpoint, all easYgens can
be programmed to the same setpoint and will share between each
other the reactive power to reach this setpoint.
The easYgen can work as reactive power control at the inter‐
change point. In this mode the gensets are monitored and
restricted in reactive power flow (outcome and income; respectively
leading and lagging).
Generator Reactive Power Limitations A reactive power control (kvar or power factor) can cause an over‐
load or damage of the generator. To avoid this the easYgen pro‐
vides a 2-step protection:
1. The own absolute generator current is monitored with an per‐
centage setting related to rated current input (ID
1754 Ä p. 497). The easYgen limits or controls down the
excitation that this given level (ID 5791 Ä p. 279) is not
exceeded.
2. The inductive reactive power outcome of the own generator
is limited according to the configuration of ID 5792 Ä p. 279.
Or:
The inductive reactive power income of the own generator is
limited according to the configuration of ID 5793 Ä p. 279.
Fig. 176: The kvar setpoint is limited to protect the generator
Tracking of the limitation An active Limitation is

n indicated as 'Gen excitation lim.' on the display (HMI)
n driving the LogicsManager command variable 05.18 Gen exci‐
tation lim. from FALSE to TRUE
n driving an event logger entry

Configuration
4.4.4.2.2 Configure Power Factor / kvar Control

[Default]
5625 Power factor 2 [PID analog] The power factor is controlled using an analog PID controller.
Control
3pos controller The power factor is controlled using a three-step controller.
Off Power factor control is not carried out.
[1.00] trolled.
return the process to the tolerance band.
Notes
If the gain is configured too high, the result is excessive overshoot/undershoot
of the desired value.
This parameter is only visible if power factor control (param‐
eter 5625 Ä p. 278) is configured to "PID analog".
[1.000] over time by shifting the proportioning band.
Reset automatically changes the output requirements until the process vari‐
able and the setpoint are the same. This parameter permits the user to adjust
how quickly the reset attempts to correct for any offset. The integral gain con‐
stant must be greater than the derivative time constant.
If the integral gain constant is too large, the engine will continually oscillate. If
the integral gain constant is too small, the engine will take too long to settle at
a steady state.
Notes
this parameter, the stability of the system is increased.
[0.01]
The controller will attempt to slow down the action of the actuator in an
attempt to prevent excessive overshoot or undershoot.
Essentially this is the brake for the process. This portion of the PID loop oper‐
ates anywhere within the range of the process unlike reset.
Notes
5660 Deadband 1 0.001 to 0.300 The generator power factor is controlled in such a manner, when paralleled
with the mains, so that the monitored power factor does not deviate from the
[0.010] configured power factor setpoint by more than the value configured in this
parameter without the controller issuing a raise/lower signal to the voltage
regulator.
This prevents unneeded wear on the raise/lower relay contacts.
Notes
eter 5625 Ä p. 278) is configured to "3pos controller".
5661 Time pulse min‐ 1 0.01 to 2.00 s A minimum pulse on time must be configured here.
imum
[0.05 s] The shortest possible pulse time should be configured to limit overshoot of
the desired power factor reference point.
Notes
This parameter is only visible if power factor control (parameter
5625 Ä p. 278) is configured to "3pos controller".

Configuration

[Default]
5662 Gain factor 1 0.1 to 10.0 The gain factor Kp influences the operating time of the relays.
[5.0] By increasing the number configured in this parameter, the operating time of
the relay will be in-creased in response to a deviation from the power factor
reference.
to the variable to be controlled.
Notes
factor
Notes
5663 Expand dead‐ 1 1.0 to 9.9 If the measured generator power factor is within the deadband range (param‐
configured here.
Notes
5664 Delay expand 1 1.0 to 9.9 s The measured generator power factor must be within the deadband range for
deadband the time configured here in order to multiply the deadband with the factor con‐
[2.0 s] figured in parameter 5663 Ä p. 279.
Notes
5791 Max. generator 2 0 to 150% This is the maximum generator current during reactive power control. The
current percentage is related to the rated current setting (ID 1785 Ä p. 501).
[100%]
5792 Max. 2 0 to 150% This is the maximum accepted generator reactive inductive load (outcome)
react.inductive during reactive power control at the interchange point. The percentage is
pwr.gen [80%] related to the reactive power setting (ID 1746 Ä p. 501).
5793 Max. 2 0 to 150% This is the maximum accepted generator reactive capacitive load (income)
react.capacity during reactive power control at the interchange point. The percentage is
pwr.gen [50%] related to the reactive power setting (ID 1746 Ä p. 501).
5638 AM PF/kvar 2 Determined by The power factor / reactive power setpoint 1 source can be selected from the
SP1[-/kvar] AnalogManager available data sources.
81.11
The internal PF/var setpoint 05.10 can be changed manually at the setpoint
Intern. PF setp1
[%]]
5639 AM PF/kvar 2 Determined by The power factor / reactive power setpoint 2 source can be selected from the
SP2[-/kvar] AnalogManager available data sources.
81.05
The internal PF/var setpoint 05.11 can be changed manually at the setpoint
Intern. PF setp2
[%]]

Configuration

[Default]
5743 PF/kvar setpoint [Gen. PF] Determination of the reactive power control argument (Modes)
1 mode
Mns. Export Gen.PF: The value entered as PF/kvar setpoint is a generator power factor
kvar setpoint.
Mns. Import Mns.Export kvar: The value entered as PF/kvar setpoint is a mains export
kvar power setpoint in kvar. Note: Even the value is also configurable as negative
value do not enter a negative value in this mode.
Mains PF
Mns.Import kvar: The value entered as PF/kvar setpoint is a mains import
Gen. kvar power setpoint in kvar. Note: Even the value is also configurable as negative
Mains PF: The value entered as PF/kvar setpoint is a mains power factor set‐
point at the interchange point to mains.
Gen.kvar: The value entered as PF/kvar setpoint is a generator kvar power
setpoint (-99999.9 to 99999.0 kvar). Note: A negative value is accepted as a
capacitive kvar setpoint. A positive value is accepted as inductive setpoint in
this mode.
5620 Int. power factor 2 -0.999 to +1.000 The desired power factor may be configured here so that the reactive power
setpoint 1 is regulated in the system.
[+1.000]
The designations "+" and "-" stand for inductive/lagging (generator overex‐
cited) and capacitive/leading (generator underexcited) reactive power.
This setpoint is active only in mains parallel operation.
5744 PF/kvar setpoint [Gen. PF] Determination of the reactive power control argument (Modes)
2 mode
Mns. Export Gen.PF: The value entered as PF/kvar setpoint is a generator power factor
kvar setpoint.
Mns. Import Mns.Export kvar: The value entered as PF/kvar setpoint is a mains export
kvar power setpoint in kvar. Note: Even the value is also configurable as negative
Mains PF
Mns.Import kvar: The value entered as PF/kvar setpoint is a mains import
Gen. kvar power setpoint in kvar. Note: Even the value is also configurable as negative
Mains PF: The value entered as PF/kvar setpoint is a mains power factor set‐
point at the interchange point to mains.
Gen.kvar: The value entered as PF/kvar setpoint is a generator kvar power
setpoint (-99999.9 to 99999.0 kvar). Note: A negative value is accepted as a
capacitive kvar setpoint. A positive value is accepted as inductive setpoint in
this mode.
5745 Int. kvar setpoint -99999.9 to This setpoint is active only if PF/kvar setpoint 1 is set to Mns. Export kvar or
1 +99999.9 Mns. Import kvar.
[0.0]
5621 Int. power factor 2 -0.999 to +1.000 The desired power factor may be configured here so that the reactive power
setpoint 2 is regulated in the system.
[+1.000]
The designations "–" and "+" stand for inductive/lagging (generator overex‐
cited) and capacitive/leading (generator underexcited) reactive power. This
setpoint is active only in mains parallel operation.
5746 Int. kvar setpoint -0.999 to This setpoint is active only if PF/kvar setpoint 2 is set to Mns. Export kvar or
2 +99999.9 Mns. Import kvar.
[0.0]
12921 Setp. 2 2 Determined by If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the power factor setpoint 2 will be
pwr.factor LogicsManager used instead of power factor setpoint 1. The power factor (result of AM)
86.84 5639 Ä p. 279/Ä p. 1070 instead of 5638 Ä p. 279/Ä p. 1070 will be taken into
account.
[(0 & 1) & 1]
Notes
= 11913
5622 React. pwr. ctrl 2 0.01 to The different setpoint values are supplied to the controller via this ramp.
setpoint ramp 100.00 %/s
The slope of the ramp is used to alter the rate at which the controller modifies
[3.00 %/s] the setpoint value. The faster the change in the setpoint is to be carried out,
the greater the value entered here must be.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
This ramp is also used in islanded operation for loading or unloading an addi‐
tional genset. An excessive oscillation may occur if the ramp is configured too
high.
1884 Gen. PF set‐ 2 0.0 to 99.9 s The PT1-filter for the Gen PF or Gen kvar setpoint mode can be configured
point filter here. The parameter stands for the 3 times tau value of a PT1 element. (see
[0s] drawing). That means the configured time defines when 95% of the original
setpoint jump is reached.
Notes
Input 0.0s disables the filter influence.
12941 Q control 2 Determined by With LogicsManager can be controlled if a voltage control or a reactive power
LogicsManager control should be performed. If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the
86.99 reactive power control is performed.
[(04.07 MCB
closed & 04.06
GCB closed) &
1]
= 11928
4.4.4.2.3 AVR FRT Adjustments

Introduction If there is a LVRT (Low voltage ride through) or HVRT event which
means the mains voltage jumps below a defined threshold (or over
a defined treshold), the generator has to bear the mains for a
defined time. Usually this is not possible with the current Var/PF
setpoint. For this reason the easYgen is providing some parame‐
ters which become effective only in FRT situations.
Adjusted Q setpoint If any FRT is excited, a 5 points Q(V) characteristic (parameter

6660-6669) becomes active after the time defined by parameter
"6658 Delay FRT SP" has exceeded. This characteristic defines
the reactive power setpoint dependent from the measured gener‐
ator voltage during FRT. -For LVRT this characteristic is using the
lowest generator voltage, dependent on parameter "1770 Gener‐
ator voltage monitoring". -For HVRT this characteristic is using the
highest generator voltage, dependent on parameter "1770 Gener‐
ator voltage monitoring". The resulting Var setpoint is visable in
Toolkit "6657 VAR control FRT SP".
Underexcited case: In case of under excitation (negative reactive power) in FRT case
sometimes the controller is trending to swing. For this reason it is
possible to activate the 2nd PID configuration (parameter
6654-6656) e.g. with smaller proportional gain. (The 5 point Q(V)
characteristic is active in this case too.) The 2nd PID configuration
becomes active if -any FRT is excited and -the power factor is
below the limit configured with "6659 2nd PID Q Limit FRT" and -
the time "Delay FRT SP" has exceeded .
Command variables: There are two command variables which can be assigend e.g. to a
relay output during the commissioning:
07.35: FRT Q/V curve (True if any FRT is excited and "6658 Delay
FRT SP" has exceeded.)
07.36: 2nd Q PID in FRT (True if 07.35 is true and "6659 2nd PID
Q Limit FRT" is undercut.)

Configuration

[Default]
6658 Delay FRT set 2 0.00 to 1.00 If any FRT is excited, the special Q(V) characteristic becomes effective after
point this delay .
[0.08]
6659 2nd PID Q Limit 2 -0.999 to -0.500 If the measured power factor value in FRT case becomes higher (more
FRT capacitive ) than this value and "Delay FRT SP" is exceeded, the 2nd PID
[-0.900] configuration will become effective.
6654 2nd Proportional 2 0.01 to 100 Proportional gain if 2nd PID configuration is effective
gain
[1.00]
6655 2nd Integral 2 0.001 to Integral gain if 2nd PID configuration is effective
gain 100.000
[1.000]
6656 2nd Derivatio 2 0.01 to 100 Derivative ratio if 2nd PID configuration is effective
ratio
[1.00]
6660 Q(V) character‐ 2 0% to 150% Voltage for Q(V) characteristic in FRT case point @[1,2,3,4,5]
istic V FRT
6662 points 6660: [0%]
6664 6662: [30%]
6666 6664: [60%]
6668 6666: [90%]
6668: [120%]
6661 Q(V) character‐ 2 -100% to 200% Q for Q(V) characteristic in FRT case set point @[1,2,3,4,5]
istic Q FRT set
6663 points 6661: [100%]
6665 6663: [70%]
6667 6665: [40%]
6669 6667: [10%]
6669: [-20%]
4.4.4.2.4 Power Factor Characteristic

General notes
This feature is related to the former BDEW grid
code. For the VDE-AR-N 4110 / 4105 grid code
please refer the reactive power characteristics
The Power Factor Characteristic function is adapting the reactive

power flow between generator and mains to support a dynamic
stabilization of the mains. Some network provider prefer therefore
a power factor control over real power PF(P) (see chapter
Ä Chapter 4.4.4.2.4.1 “Power factor characteristic PF(P) ”
on page 283 for more details).
Other provider prefer power factor control over mains voltage Q(V)
as described in chapter Ä Chapter 4.4.4.2.4.2 “Power factor char‐
acteristic Q(V) ” on page 284. Both methods are configurable alter‐
natively.
Enhanced according BDEW Requirements

Both power factor characteristic curves now offer
four point settings.
Factory settings come with backward compatibility.

Configuration
Power factor characteristic PF(P)

A method to support the mains is to feed different reactive power
values into the grid in relation to the own active power value. The
reactive power is defined through a power factor setpoint for the
generator. This can be defined in characteristic curve.
Fig. 177: Power factor characteristic (schematic)

The characteristic is defined by four points (① .. ④). The power
factor corresponding to this characteristic is available as data
source 05.29 in the AnalogManager.
To use this function, the source (05.29) must be

applied as source to one of the setpoints e.g.,
"Power factor setpoint 1" (parameter
5638 Ä p. 279/Ä p. 1070).

[Default]
5786 Power factor 2 [PF(P)] A power factor setpoint is determined according to the characteristic curve:
characteristic Power factor in relation to the actual Generator power.
Q(V) A power factor setpoint is calculated according to the characteristic curve:

Generator reactive power in relation to the mains voltage.
5787 Point 1 power 2 0.0 to 150% The value entered into "Point 1 power" defines the cos phi (P) characteristic.
[0%]
5788 Point 1 cos phi 2 -0.999 to 1.000 The desired "Point 1 cos phi" may be configured here which defines the cos
phi (P) characteristic.
[-0.950]
[100%]
[0.950]
[100%]

Configuration

[Default]
[0.950]
[100%]
[0.950]
Power factor characteristic Q(V)

Another method to support the mains is to feed different reactive
power values into the grid in relation to the mains voltage [param‐
eter 5786 Ä p. 283 = Q(V)]. The reactive power is defined through
the value Q/S rated over voltage. This can be defined in a charac‐
teristic curve. The resulting outcome for the reactive power control
is then a power factor setpoint.
Fig. 178: Power factor characteristic according to the relation Q/S

rated over rated voltage
The characteristic is defined by four points (① .. ④). The power
factor corresponding to this characteristic is available as data
source 05.29 in the AnalogManager.
To use this function, the source (05.29) must be

applied as source to one of the setpoints e.g.,
"Power factor setpoint 1" (parameter
5638 Ä p. 279/Ä p. 1070).

Configuration

[Default]
5778 Point 1 voltage 45.0 to 150.0% The value entered into "Point 1 Voltage" defines the x-coordinate of point 1
[98.0%]
5779 Point 1 Q/S -0.99 to +0.99 The value entered into "Point 1 Reactive power" defines the y-coordinate of
rated point 1
[-0.31]
[106.0%]
rated point 2
[+0.31]
[106.0%]
rated point 3
[+0.31]
[106.0%]
rated point 4
[+0.31]
5799 Q(V) response 001 to 999 s The response with a new reactive power setpoint acting on the analog com‐
time mand variable 05.29 PF characteristic can be delayed. Q(V) response time is
[10 s] used to calculate the power factor characteristic Q(V), parameter
5786 Ä p. 283.
Notes
The delay is realized with a PT-1 filter. Therefore the reaction times are opti‐
mized for the range 10 s until 60 s within a symmetrical characteristic curve.
Accuracy of the setup Q(V) response time is given within a symmetrical char‐
acteristic curve.
5023 Q(V) Hysteresis 0 to 20% The hysteresis for the Q(V) characteristic acts as a deadband for the selected
band. If the Mains voltage is within the hysteresis the resulting power factor
[0%] characteristic reference doesn't change.
4.4.4.2.5 Reactive Power / Power Factor setpoint filter

Introduction The FNN VDE-AR-N 4105 / 4110 requests a reactive power control
with a setpoint which is leaded over a PT1-element. The PT1-ele‐
ment shall be adjustable with a 3 tau setting. The 3 tau setting
defines at what time shall be reached 95% of the original setpoint
change. This 3 tau value is configurable.
Function The reactive power controller PID is always receiving a reactive

power setpoint even the setpoint is entered as power factor or as
power factor setpoint. The PT1 filter behavior is always included
(Refer to drawing) but the filter can configured so that it has no
influence.

Configuration
Fig. 179: Setpoint Jump (standardized with height 1) and the resulting PT1 setpoint
Four reactive power setpoint filters are placed in the easYgen in
regards to:
n Gen PF setpoint setting
n Reactive power characteristic Q(V)
n Reactive power characteristic Q(P)
n Reactive power characteristic Q(V) limit
Fig. 180: The allocation of reactive power setpoints and their filters

Configuration
Configuration
ID Parameter Setting range Description
[Default]
1897 Q(V) setpoint filter 0 to 99.9s The PT1-filter for the reactive power characteristic Q(V) can be configured
here. The parameter stands for the 3 times tau value of a PT1 element. (see
[10.0s] drawing). That means the configured time defines when 95% of the original
Note: Input 0.0s disables the filter influence.
1898 Q(P) setpoint filter 0 to 99.9s The PT1-filter for the reactive power characteristic Q(P) can be configured
1899 Q(V) limit setpoint filter 0 to 99.9s The PT1-filter for the reactive power characteristic Q(V) limit can be config‐
ured here. The parameter stands for the 3 times tau value of a PT1 element.
[10.0s] (see drawing). That means the configured time defines when 95% of the orig‐
inal setpoint jump is reached.
4.4.4.2.6 Reactive Power Characteristic

Reactive power Q(V)
General notes
This feature is related to the VDE-AR-N 4110 /
4105 grid code. For BDEW related grid code
please refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.4.2.4 “Power Factor
Characteristic” on page 282.
The FNN VDE-AR-N 4105 / 4110 requests different methods for

reactive power control during mains faults to stabilize the mains.
This method determines a reactive power setpoint deviation based
on the mains voltage deviation from a rated mains voltage value.
The slope follows the formula:
Slope (QV) =
The formula contains a factor which can shift the curve on the
voltage axis. The shift itself can be determined through an analog
value “VQ0”. This gives the network provider the capability to
change the reactive power influence remotely.
Function This procedure of running different reactive power values over the
voltage is based on two points:
Point 1 is defined as the reference voltage on which the reactive
power shall be zero.
Point 2 is defined through the value pair (Vmax/VC ; Qmax/Pinst.).
This point defines finally the maximal reactive power, which is
allowed to run for the generator. It is valid for leading and lagging
reactive power (Under-excitation/Over-excitation).
So if mains voltage exceeds the Vmax/VC point inductive power is
absorbed and with surpassed Vmax/VC inductive reactive power is
delivered to mains.

Configuration
Furthermore the function provides the capability to shift point 1 on

the x-axis from outside. Through this it can be determined after‐
wards at what mains voltage level the reactive power flow begins
to work.
Through a dead band incorporation into the function the operator
can determine to stay on a last calculated reactive power. So as
long the mains voltage deviates not again around a dead band
width the last setpoint is kept.
And finally through a test function the function gives the operator
the opportunity to simulate different mains voltages to observe
whether the reactive power flow is maintained properly.
Fig. 181: EGXT_Example_of_a_Q(V)_characteristic

Configuration

[Default]
5823 Vmax/Vc 1.00 to 1.2s The point 2 defines the maximal allowed reactive power for the generator.
The point determines the leading limit as also the lagging limit. Refer to
[1.4s] drawing.
This value determines the value 1 (Vmax/VC) of the point 2 value pair. This is
the maximum voltage which can be transacted.
Maximum voltage in relation to the supply voltage (Vc). Mostly the supply
voltage is similar to the rated voltage in the system.
5824 Qmax/Pinst. 0 to 0.5s The point 2 defines the maximal allowed reactive power for the generator.
The point determines the leading limit as also the lagging limit. Refer to
[0.33s] drawing. This value determines the value 2 (Qmax/Pinst.) of the point 2 value
pair.
Maximum reactive power in relation to the installed active power from the
power generation device. The installed active power is usually the rated gen‐
erator power. The maximum reactive power defines the positive and negative
reactive power as well.
5825 AM Reference VQ0 AnalogManager AnalogManager which provides the shifting of the x-axis. It is named VQ0.
10.02 (ONE) Through this value the reference mains voltage level Point 1 can be shifted.
Refer to drawing.
10.01 (ZERO)
The value determines the point where the reactive power setpoint matches 0
0.0 kvar.
02.01 (LM Analog result of AnalogManager 81.31 AM Reference VQ0
FALSE)
Binary result of AnalogManager 81.31 AM Reference VQ0
02.01 (LM
FALSE)
Pass through
5827 Q(V) voltage dead 0 to 10.00% The dead band for the mains voltage relates to the calculation of a new reac‐
band tive power reference. If the mains voltage is higher/lower as the previous
[0%] mains voltage +/- hysteresis the “new value” will be used for the reactive
power calculation.
1897 Q(V) setpoint filter 0 to 99.9s The PT1-filter for the reactive power characteristic Q(V) can be configured
5828 Enable mains test On For test purposes, use the mains test voltage instead of the measured mains
voltage voltage. This function is temporarily enabled.
[Off]
On: The mains test voltage is used for Q(V) reactive power characteristic.
This function is reset after 1 hour automatically.
Off: The test voltage is disabled and the measured mains voltage is used.
Note: Only in toolkit!
5829 Mains test voltage 50 to 150% The Q(V) function uses the mains test voltage for the calculation of the reac‐
tive power reference.
[100%]
Note: Only in toolkit!
Interface reference setpoint VQ0 AnalogManager variable “05.46 VQ0 reference”

Configuration
No. Description Value Meaning
512 Control 10 INT16 Interface refer‐

ence value VQ0.
Resolution (1/100)
VQ0: The
“starting” value is
1.00.
The value is
limited according
to the configura‐
tion setting.
Analog source: Interface reference This can be picked up with the AnalogManager variable “05.46
setpoint VQ0 VQ0 reference”
Visualization Q(V) reactive power Actual value V/Vc ID10353

characteristic
Q/Pinst reference ID 10347
QV reference [kvar] ID 10359
Configuration Test possibility for reac‐ For test purposes it is possible to configure a "Test mains voltage"
tive power Q(V) characteristic which is passed to the Q(V) characteristic instead the real mains
voltage measurement.
Reactive Power Q(P)

General notes The FNN VDE-AR-N 4105 / 4110 requests different methods for
This method determines a reactive power based on the actual
power output of the generator. The reactive power is controlled in
relation to the actual active power. Maximal 10 reference points
define the curve. The space between the points are linear interpo‐
lated. The tolerance band for the configured curve is +/- 2%
Function Through the input of up to 10 points a reactive power characteristic

can be formed.

Configuration
Fig. 182: Example of a Q(P) characteristic with 5 points

Configuration

[Default]
5831 P/Pinst point 1 0 Configuration points (reference points 1 to 10 with relation active power/active
power installed (P/Pinst) and rated reactive power in relation to active power
5832 Q/Pinst point 1 0 installed (Q/Pinst)
5833 P/Pinst point 2 0.1 P:
5834 Q/Pinst point 2 0 Range 0.00 .. 1.50
5835 P/Pinst point 3 0.2 Format 0.00
5836 Q/Pinst point 3 0
5837 P/Pinst point 4 0.3
5839 P/Pinst point 5 0
5844 Q/Pinst point 7 0.05
5847 P/Pinst point 9 1
1898 Q(P) setpoint filter 0 to 99.9s The PT1-filter for the reactive power characteristic Q(P) can be configured
Visualization Q(P) reactive power Actual value P/Pinst ID10354

characteristic
Q/Pinst reference ID10349
QP reference [kvar] ID10350
Reactive Power Q(V) limit

Introduction The FNN VDE-AR-N 4105 / 4110 requests different methods for
This method determines a reactive power setpoint deviation based
on the mains voltage. The curve here is defined with four points.
The value pairs of point 2 and point 3 can be influenced through an
offset value remotely.
This is a way to shift the dead band into a reactive power flow
zone. The network provider can influence the basic reactive power
flow remotely.

Configuration
Function This procedure of running different reactive power values over the
voltage is based on four point:
n Point 1 is defined as the reference voltage on which the lag‐
ging reactive power flow shall be limited (max. over-excitation).
Example in drawing [V/VC 0.94 ; Q/Pbinst -0.33]
n Point 2 is defined as the lowest reference voltage at which the
reactive power flow is zero. Example in drawing [V/VC 0.96 ;
Q/Pbinst 0.00]
n Point 3 is defined as the highest reference voltage at which the
reactive power flow is zero. Example in drawing [V/VC 1.04 ;
Q/Pbinst 0.00]
n Point 4 is defined as the reference voltage on which the
leading reactive power flow shall be limited (max. under-excita‐
tion). Example in drawing [V/VC 1.06 ; Q/Pbinst 0.33]
Furthermore the function provides the capability to shift point 2 and
point 3 so that the dead band is shifted into a reactive power flow
zone. With this setting the network provider can relative simple
shift the reactive power flow (leading or lagging) in the usual
voltage range. This helps to compensate any local situations from
remote.
Finally, through a test function, the function gives the operator the
chance to simulate different mains voltages to observe if the reac‐
tive power flow is being maintained properly.

Configuration
Fig. 183: Example of a Q(V) limit characteristic

Configuration

[Default]
6912 P/Pinst point 1 0.94 Configuration points (reference points 1 to 4) with voltage level in relation to
the supply voltage (Vc) and the reactive power in relation to the installed
6913 Q/Pinst point 1 -0.33 active power from the power generation device. The installed active power is
normally the rated power.
V:
Range 0.00 to 1.50
Format 0.00
6917 Q/Pinst point 3 0 Q:
6918 P/Pinst point 4 1.06 Range -0.5 to 0.50
6919 Q/Pinst point 4 0.33 Format 00.00
1899 Q(V) limit setpoint filter 0 to 99.9s The PT1-filter for the reactive power characteristic Q(V) limit can be config‐
ured here. The parameter stands for the 3 times tau value of a PT1 element.
[10.0s] (see drawing). That means the configured time defines when 95% of the orig‐
inal setpoint jump is reached.
6908 Q/P reference offset AnalogManager AnalogManager for the source selection from the reference offset from the
energy provider. This value defines the offset for the reference points 2 and 3.
10.02 (ONE)
AM Q/P reference offset
10.01 (ZERO)
81.32
0.0
Analog result of AnalogManager
02.01 (LM
FALSE) LM Q/P reference offset
02.01 (LM 81.32
FALSE)
Binary result of AnalogManager
Pass through
Interface reference setpoint Q/P limit AnalogManager variable “05.47 QP limit offset”
offset
No. Description Value Meaning
513 Control 10 INTEGER16 Interface refer‐

ence value Q/P
offset. Resolution
(1/100)
Q/P offset: The
“starting” value is
0.
The value is
limited according
to the configura‐
tion setting.
Analog source: Interface reference AnalogManager variable “05.47 QP limit offset”

setpoint Q/P offset
Visualization Q(V) limit reactive power Actual value V/VC ID10355

characteristic
Q/Pinst reference ID 10351
QV reference [kvar] ID 10352
Configuration Test possibility for reac‐ For test purposes it is possible to configure a "Test mains voltage"
tive power Q(V) limit characteristic which is passed to the Q(V) limit characteristic instead the real
mains voltage measurement.

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Controller > Load Share Control
The parameter Ids are the same like for the Q(V) reactive power
characteristic.
4.4.4.3 Load Share Control
CAUTION!
Load Share Communication
For correct load share communication all load
sharing gensets in the system must actively use
the same load share communication interface (and
network)!
Load share communication is defined by param‐
eter [Load share interface ] 9924 Ä p. 301/
Ä p. 741 (CAN or Ethernet) and others.
Please see settings at
– “Parameter è Configuration
è Configure application
è Configure controller
è Configure load share”
– Chapter Ä Chapter 4.4.4.3.7 “Parameters”
on page 301
The easYgen performs proportional load and/or var sharing. This

means each generator will share the load at the same percentage
level of the generator rated power when paralleled against the
mains, in an islanded operation with multiple generators paralleled,
or when re-synchronizing the common bus to the mains.
Also in islanded operation the load ramp rate parameters
5522 Ä p. 316 and 5622 Ä p. 280 are used to ramp a new gener‐
ator onto the other.
If not enough nominal power on the busbar is

available, from now on the ramping of an engine
onto others will be interrupted but the load sharing
will be executed immediately. This is to avoid over‐
loading of already online generators.
Proportional load/var sharing will not be performed
when the easYgen has the GCB closed and is in
the constant power/base load mode.
A system can consist out of 32 gensets which are controlled by a

single easYgen.
4.4.4.3.1 Mains Parallel Operation With Mains Interchange Real Power Control (Import/Export)
The easYgen controllers maintain the real load level on the individ‐
ually controlled generators at a level so that the real power setpoint
at the mains interchange remains at the configured setpoint. The
real power setpoint for the mains interchange must be configured
identically for each easYgen.

Configuration
The easYgen controller communicates with other controls in the

system via a CAN bus. This enables the controllers to adjust the
real power generated by the generator while remaining within the
rated power of the generator. A smaller generator will contribute
less real power as compared to a large generator, but they will
both be utilized to the same capacity factor. An example of this
would be a 100 kW generator with a configured 1000 kW generator
and a mains interchange of 825 kW. The 100 kW generator would
contribute 75 kW and the 1000 kW generator would contribute
750 kW or both generators would be at 75% of their rated capacity.
How the reactive power handling is executed depends the PF/kvar

setpoint mode. Two setpoints (5743 Ä p. 280 and 5744 Ä p. 280)
are available. Each setpoint allows the modes:
n Gen PF
n Mains PF
n Mains Import kvar
n Mains export kvar
In PF modes the reactive load sharing is not performed when oper‐
ating in parallel with the mains. Reactive power control will be
defined by the configured power factor setpoints (5620 Ä p. 280 or
5621 Ä p. 280) of the individual controllers. If the power factor con‐
troller setpoint is configured as +0.950, the easYgen will propor‐
tionally share the real load with all generators in parallel with the
mains while controlling the reactive power at a 0.95 inductive (lag‐
ging) power factor regardless of the what power factor the mains is
operating at.
The parameter "Active power Load share gain" (param‐
eter 4522 Ä p. 301) can be used to define the priority of the refer‐
ence variable for real power sharing (real power at interchange). A
higher configured value influences the control more towards main‐
taining the real power setpoint for the interchange. A lower config‐
ured value influences the control more towards maintaining real
power sharing between units.
The parameter "React. power Load share gain"

(parameter 4543 Ä p. 301) has no influence here.
In kvar modes the reactive load sharing is performed when oper‐

ating in parallel with the mains. Mains import/export kvar control at
the interchange point will be determined by the configured int. kvar
setpoints (5745 Ä p. 280 or 5746 Ä p. 280) of the individual con‐
trollers.
4.4.4.3.2 Islanded Operation In Parallel

The easYgen controllers maintain the voltage and frequency of the
individually controlled generators at a constant level. This makes it
imperative that the voltage and frequency setpoints are configured
identically for each easYgen.
The easYgen controller communicates with other controls in the
system via a CAN bus. This enables the controllers to adjust the
real power generated by the generator while remaining within the
rated power of the generator. A smaller generator will contribute
less real power as compared to a large generator, but they will
both be utilized to the same capacity factor.

Configuration
Example An example of this would be a 100 kW generator and a 1000 kW

generator with an 825 kW load. The 100 kW generator would con‐
tribute 75 kW and the 1000 kW generator would contribute
750 kW or both generators would be at 75% of their rated
capacity.
The reactive power will be shared proportionally among all genera‐

tors involved.
ence variable for real power sharing. A higher configured value
influences the control more towards frequency control. A lower
configured value influences the control more towards real power
sharing.
ence variable for real power sharing. A higher configured value
influences the control more towards frequency control. A lower
configured value influences the control more towards real power
sharing.
4.4.4.3.3 Re-synchronization Of The Busbar To The Mains

The system is operating as an islanded system, for synchronization
to be performed the voltage and frequency differentials of the
mains and bus must be within the configured windows.
The bus frequency reference point is dictated by the measured
mains frequency and the configured frequency differential (+ slip
frequency setpoint offset (parameter 5502 Ä p. 311).
Example If + slip frequency setpoint offset = 0.2 Hz, the easYgen will calcu‐
late the bus frequency reference point as:
n [measured mains frequency] + [slip frequency setpoint
offset] = bus frequency reference point
A practical example of this would be:

n The monitored mains frequency is 60 Hz
n Configured + slip frequency setpoint offset = 0.2 Hz
n [60 Hz] + [0.2 Hz] = 60.2 Hz bus frequency reference point
The differential voltage is configured as a window. The monitored

voltage from the potential transformers secondary for the mains
and the bus must be within the configured voltage differential limit
in relation to the rated voltage configuration.
This means that the voltage window dV [%] is in relation to the
rated voltage configuration [%].
When the monitored bus frequency and voltage are within the con‐
figured differential limits, the "Command: close MCB" relay will
enable, closing the MCB, and the system will be paralleled to the
mains.

Configuration
4.4.4.3.4 Prerequisites
All easYgen controllers connected to the system must have rated
system frequencies and breaker logic configured identically and
the parameter "Active power load share" (param‐
eter 5531 Ä p. 301) or "Reactive power load share" (param‐
eter 5631 Ä p. 301) must be enabled.
4.4.4.3.5 Load-Share Interface

The easYgen utilizes a peer relationship between units to control
the system. This permits for parallel applications of up to 32 gener‐
ators.
The current load-share interface is selected by parameters
9924 Ä p. 301/Ä p. 741 and 11986 Ä p. 742 LM 86.13.
For set-up of the load-share communication refer

to Ä Chapter 3.4.4 “CAN Bus Interfaces”
on page 102 for information about the CAN bus
connection or to Ä Chapter 4.7.5 “Ethernet Inter‐
faces” on page 539 for Ethernet
4.4.4.3.6 Load Sharing

The "Active/Reactive power load share" together with the "Active/
Reactive power load share gains" determine if and how a gener‐
ator performs real power or frequency control when paralleled with
other generators in an islanded operation.
In the illustrated control system, it must be noted that each control
calculates the mean utilization factor of all controls from the data
transmitted via the selected bus and then compares this with its
own utilization factor. The utilization factor is compared with the
reference variable and results in a new reference variable setpoint.
Frequency and real power control are carried out simultaneously in
these controls (corresponding to the reference variable).
Frequency control is carried out via the measured voltage/
frequency of the voltage system. The MPU is used merely for mon‐
itoring functions, or is available as a control value to the secondary
controller.

Configuration
Fig. 184: Load sharing diagram

Configuration
4.4.4.3.7 Parameters
[Default]
9924 Load share 2 The interface, which is used for transmitting the load share data is configured
Interface here.
[CAN ] Use CAN interface 3.
Ethernet A Use Ethernet A interface.
Ethernet B/C Use Ethernet B or C interface.
CAN/EthA by Use CAN interface 3 but switch to Ethernet A by TRUE of LM 86.13

LM (described below).
Off Deactivate load share interface.
5531 Active power 2 [On] Active power load share is enabled. When multiple generators are operating
load share in parallel, the real power is shared proportionally.
Off Active power load share is disabled
4522 Active power 2 0.01 to 9.99 This parameter defines the impact of the active power load sharing error
load share gain signal on the frequency/load controller setpoint. The active power load share
[1.25] gain can be adjusted between 0.01 to 9.99.
The load controller setpoint is considered, if an export import power control to
mains is maintained. With a higher value the active load sharing has a higher
correction factor in the regulation.
Notes
This parameter replaces the former existing weighting factor on non-XT
easYgen (ID 5530). The default gain 1.25 relates to the 50% value.
5631 Reactive power 2 [On] Reactive power load share is enabled. When multiple generators are oper‐
load share ating in parallel, the reactive power is shared proportionally.
Off Reactive power load share is disabled
4543 React. power 2 0.01 to 9.99 This parameter defines the impact of the reactive power load sharing error
load share gain signal on the voltage/reactive load controller setpoint. The reactive power
[1.25] load share gain can be adjusted between 0.01 to 9.99.
The reactive load controller setpoint is considered, if an export/import reactive
power control to mains is maintained.
With a higher value the reactive load sharing has a higher correction factor in
the regulation.
Notes
This parameter replaces the former existing weighting factor of non-XT
easYgen (ID 5630). The default gain 1.25 relates to the 50% value.
High data volume on communication ports can

cause low HMI display operation dynamic.
Recommendation:
Reduce data transfer volume on CAN bus. This
can be done with parameter 9921 Ä p. 545
“Transfer rate LS fast message” .
A general action to reduce data volume on CAN1

is disabling the TPDO1 data protocol if it is not
used. Therefore navigate to parameter
9600 Ä p. 517 “COB-ID” and enter "80000000" via
front panel or "2147483648" via ToolKit.
For more information how to reduce bus load see
Ä Chapter 4.4.4.3.6 “ Load Sharing” on page 299.

Configuration
Relation "... factor" <> "... gain"

This ... gain parameter replaces the former existing
(%) ... factor of non-XT easYgen. The table below
shows the relation between the old and new
values.
The used defaults 1.25 / 50% ensure backward
compatibility.
Weighting % LS Gain
10 2,25
20 2
30 1,75
40 1,5
50 1,25
60 1
70 0,75
80 0,5
90 0,25
98 0,05
4.4.4.3.8 Load Sharing And Segments

Load Share Control Grouping
Load sharing with several gensets is possible for a supply of sev‐
eral split busbars. Each of this individual groups is called a seg‐
ment.
Up to four segments can be managed easily for load share by Log‐
icsManager!
In the application breaker mode GCB/LS-5 the

LogicsManager equations described below are
used to handle even more complex easYgen/LS-5
applications. Please read general information first
and then continue with Ä Chapter 4.4.4.3.8.1.1
“Segment Number in GCB/LS-5 mode”
on page 304.
General A group breaker splits the busbar in a way that some gensets
supply one busbar and some supply another one. However, it is
necessary to group the gensets, which supply the same busbar.
The designer of a busbar system gives all individual bus bars an
own number: The Segment Number for the easYgen is defined
with ID 1723. Each easYgen is connected with its GCB on one of
these segments.

Configuration
The configured segment number can be changed to one of three

alternative segment numbers by three LogicsManager equations.
These LogicsManager equations stand for the segment numbers 2,
3, or 4. They are usually controlled by circuit breaker reply auxiliary
contacts. This is finally the segment number the easYgens inter‐
acts with.
Example Six gensets (G1 through G6) supply a system with two group
breakers (A, B) as shown in . All gensets have the same segment
number configured #1 (parameter 1723 Ä p. 303)
Case - Group breakers A and B are closed and G1 through
I G6 supply the same busbar. The same segment
number is configured to each genset since all gen‐
sets supply the same busbar.
Case - Group breaker A is closed and group breaker B is
II open (G1 through G4 supply a different busbar than
G5 and G6). A different segment number must be
selected for G5 and G6 by enabling the LogicsMan‐
ager function "Segment no.2 act" (param‐
eter 12929 Ä p. 303/Ä p. 1038) in order to change
the segment number of G5 and G6 to #2.
Case - Group breakers A and B are open (G1 and G2, G3
III and G4, as well as G5 and G6 supply different bus‐
bars).
A different segment number must be selected for G3
and G4 (LogicsManager function "Segment no.2
act" (parameter 12929 Ä p. 303/Ä p. 1038)) as well
as to G5 and G6 (LogicsManager function "Segment
no.3 act" (parameter 12928 Ä p. 303/Ä p. 1038)).
With this, the segment number of G3 and G4 is
Fig. 185: Load sharing - grouping changed to #2 and the segment number of G5 and
G6 is changed to #3.

[Default]
1723 Segment 2 1 to 32 The genset is assigned a load share segment number with this parameter.
number This segment number may be overridden by the following parameters
[1] 12929 Ä p. 303/Ä p. 1038, 12928 Ä p. 303/Ä p. 1038, and 12927 Ä p. 303/
Ä p. 1038.
12929 Segment no.2 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, this genset is
act LogicsManager assigned load share segment number 2 (this parameter has priority over
86.87 parameters 12928 Ä p. 303/Ä p. 1038 and 12927 Ä p. 303/Ä p. 1038).
[(0 & 1) & 1] Notes

12928 Segment no.3 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, this genset is
act LogicsManager assigned load share segment number 3 (this parameter has priority over
86.88 parameters 12927 Ä p. 303/Ä p. 1038).
[(0 & 1) & 1] Notes

12927 Segment no. 4 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, this genset is
act LogicsManager assigned load share segment number 4.
86.89

Configuration

[Default]
[(0 & 1) & 1] Notes

5568 Mode ext. load 2 The operation mode for the external Woodward Load Share Gateway (LSG)
share gateway is configured here.
[0] Off
1 Woodward EGCP-2
RS-485 (P & Q)
2 Woodward SPM-D
R = 4.99k | P: 0 − 4 V (0 to 100%) | Q: 0 − 5 V (-85% to +85%)
Woodward MFR 15
R = 4.99k | P: 0 − 4 V (0 to 100%)
3 Woodward 2301 A
R = 54.90k | P: 0 − 3 V (0 to 100%)
4 Caterpillar LSM
R = 25.00k | P: 0 − 3 V (0 to 100%)
5 Cummins PCC 3100, 3200, 3201, 3300

R = 5.00k | P: 0 − 2.5 V (-14.1 to 121.9%) | Q: 0 − 2.5 V (-16.7% to +125.3%)
6 POW-R-CON
R = 20.67k | P: 0 − 5 V (0 to 100%)
7 Prepared
R = 25.00k | P: -5 − +5 V (0 to 100%)
8 Prepared
R = 25.00k | P: 0 − 7 V (0 to 100%)
9 Woodward GCP/MFR
CAN (P & Q)1 − easYgens and GCP/MFR share the same CAN bus
10 to 16 Not defined
Notes
Refer to the Load Share Gateway (LSG) Manual 37442 for security guidelines
and detailed information about the configuration.
R: Internal resistance
P: Range for active power
Q: range for reactive power
Segment Number in GCB/LS-5 mode

In the application breaker mode GCB/LS-5 the Segment Number
(ID 1723) informs the LS-5 algorithm about the dedicated segment
of the particular easYgens. Finally the LS-5 algorithm determines
for each easYgen on which segment number it has to interact with
others.
In cases, where different GCBs shall be served, the operator can

switch over the Segment LogicsManager equations between up to
four dedicated segments, three of them predefined: The Segment
Number (ID 1723) or the segment number 2, 3, or 4.

Configuration
Segment 10 Segment 11
LS-5 LS-5
Segment 2 Segment 5
LS-5
LS-5 LS-5
Segment 3 Segment 4
LS-5
GCB1 GCB2
easYgen easYgen
Fig. 186: Example: GCB/LS-5 application mode.
In cases, where different GCBs shall be served, the operator has

to switch the correct segment number before he is closing the
according GCB. Only one GCB per easYgen is allowed to be
closed.
Segment 10 Segment 11
LS-5 LS-5 LS-5
Segment 2 Segment 5
LS-5 LS-5 LS-5
Segment 3 Segment 4
GCB1-1 GCB1-2 GCB2-1 GCB2-2
easYgen easYgen
Fig. 187: Example: GCB/LS-5 application mode with 2 GCBs per

easYgen.

Configuration
4.4.4.3.9 Droop
The isochronous running frequency or voltage controllers keep the
desired frequency or voltage set point independent on the real or
reactive power of the generator.
The frequency controller with activated droop behavior (Logi‐
csManager ID12904 Ä p. 312/Ä p. 1037) reduces the desired fre‐
quency setpoint dependent on the active power of the generator
(ID1752 Ä p. 497). In case of a full loaded engine the frequency
setpoint will be reduced with the percentage value
(ID5504 Ä p. 312) related to rated frequency.
freal
{
Frated
Droop
0.98 x Frated
P
0 Prated Prated
2
Frated: Rated Frequency Regulation: Isochronous

Prated: Rated Power Regulation: With droop
Fig. 188: Frequency controller - behavior with and without droop,

diagram
The resulting frequency setpoint is calculated as follows: F'Set =
FSet - (Preal * (Frated * droop factor) / Prated)
The voltage controller with activated droop behavior (LogicsMan‐
ager ID12905 Ä p. 272/Ä p. 1037) reduces the desired voltage set‐
point dependent on the reactive power of the generator
(ID1758 Ä p. 497). In case of a full reactive loaded generator the
voltage will be reduced with the percentage value
(ID5604 Ä p. 272) of the rated frequency.

Configuration
Vreal
{
Vrated
Droop
0.98 x Vrated
Q
0 Qrated Qrated
2
Vrated: Rated Voltage Regulation: Isochronous

Qrated: Rated Reactive Power Regulation: With droop
Fig. 189: Voltage controller - behavior with and without droop, dia‐
gram
The resulting voltage setpoint is calculated as follows: V'Set = VSet
- (Qreal * (Vrated * droop factor) / Qrated)
Function Droop Tracking The droop tracking for frequency/voltage control is implemented
such that when the control is switched to frequency/voltage control
with droop the frequency/voltage real value does not change at the
current active/reactive load. This is provided by pre-calculating a
setpoint offset, which is needed to hold rated frequency/voltage at
present load.
This is a feature in applications where for example the load sharing
over communication interface gets lost and the number of genera‐
tors remains the same.
Droop Tracking On/Off The easYgen allows disabling the droop tracking for frequency and
voltage generally. This makes sense in applications where the
number of generators can vary during running in droop mode.
Load sharing in Droop mode On/Off Multiple easYgens are load sharing under each other, if they run
islanded from mains or they control export/import power at a
common interchange point. For dynamic reasons it makes sense to
disable the load sharing, when the easYgens running in droop or
can fall into droop mode (Missing member case).
ID Parameter CL Setting Range Description

[Default]
5747 Droop tracking 2 [On] The frequency and voltage setpoint offset is pre-calcu‐
lated to hold the frequency and voltage, when control is
switched into droop.
Off The setpoint offset is always zero.

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Controller > Frequency Control
ID Parameter CL Setting Range Description

[Default]
5748 Load sharing in 2 [On] As long the load sharing function is enabled, it is done in
droop mode droop mode too.
Off The load sharing is generally disabled in droop mode.
Table 86: Droop related parameters
4.4.4.4 Frequency Control

Notes on kick impulse function Frequency control provides a kick impulse function, which issues a
pulse if the frequency control deadband (parameter 5550 Ä p. 310)
is not exceeded and no synchronization could be performed for 20
seconds. The function is enabled, if a synchronization is carried
out.
n If the phase angle is between 0° and 180°, a "frequency lower"
signal is issued.
n If the phase angle is between 180° and 360°, a "frequency
raise" signal is issued.
The pulse duration is 100ms. If the synchronization still fails,
another pulse will be issued after 10 seconds.
The following conditions are required for the kick impulse function:
n Frequency control (parameter 5507 Ä p. 309) is configured to
"3pos controller"
n Synchronization mode (parameter 5728 Ä p. 264) is config‐
ured to "RUN" or "CHECK" (or "Controlled by LM" and RUN or
CHECK enabled by the LogicsManager)

Analog Managers to define input signal of fre‐
quency setpoint (1, 2) are available in ToolKit by
– a click from screen/page "Configure frequency
control"
– on two times "next page", or
– search (for parameter)

– a click from screen/page "Configure frequency
control"

Configuration

[Default]
5090 Proportional 2 0.01 to 100.00 This parameter defines the proportional coefficient that specifies the gain of
gain 2 the 2nd PID controller. By increasing the gain, the response is increased to
[1.00] permit larger corrections to the variable to be controlled. The farther outside
tolerances the process is, the larger the response action is to return the
process to the tolerance band.
5091 Integral gain 2 2 0.01 to 100.00 This parameter defines the integral gain that identifies the I part of the 2nd
PID controller. The integral gain corrects for any offset (between setpoint and
[1.00] process variable) automatically over time by shifting the proportioning band.
able and the setpoint are the same.
correct for any offset.
5092 Derivative ratio 2 2 0.01 to 100.00 This parameter defines the D part of the 2nd PID controller. By increasing this
parameter, the stability of the system is increased. The controller will attempt
[0.01] to slow down the action of the actuator in an attempt to prevent excessive
overshoot or undershoot. Essentially this is the brake for the process. This
portion of the PID loop operates anywhere within the range of the process
unlike reset.
5097 Frequency con‐ 2 Enum Determining the speed source for the frequency controller.
trol with
MPU Enum: The rpm value is internally calculated to an Hz value and provided to
the frequency controller.
[Gen. fre‐
quency] MPU: The source for the speed control is the speed input. Usually the con‐
nected MPU or the J1939 speed. Refer to ID 15155 Engine speed source" for
more information.
Gen.frequency: The electrical frequency in Hz is the source.
Note: If MPU is enabled check carefully the relation ship rpm to electrical fre‐
quency. Refer to parameter "1601 Engine rated speed" , "1600 Speed input"
and "1602 Fly wheel teeth".
5507 Frequency con‐ 2 [PID analog] The frequency is controlled using an analog PID controller.
trol
3pos controller The frequency is controlled using a three-step controller.
Off Frequency control is not carried out.
5508 Freq. control ini‐ 2 0.0 to 100.0% The value entered for this parameter is the start reference point for the analog
tial state output to the speed controller.
[50.0%]
(Frequency con‐ Notes
trol initial state)
If the output to the speed control has been disabled, the output will act as a
control position reference point.
[1.00] trolled.
The farther outside tolerances the process is, the larger the response action
is to return the process to the tolerance band.
Notes
This parameter is only visible if frequency control (parameter 5507 Ä p. 309)
is configured to "PID analog".
5511 Integral gain 2 0.01 to 100.00 The integral gain identifies the I part of the PID controller.
[1.00] The integral gain corrects for any offset (between setpoint and process vari‐
able) automatically over time by shifting the proportioning band. Reset auto‐
matically changes the output requirements until the process variable and the
setpoint are the same.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
The integral gain constant must be greater than the derivative time constant.
If the integral gain constant is too large, the engine will continually oscillate.
If the integral gain constant is too small, the engine will take too long to settle
at a steady state.
5512 Derivative ratio 2 0.01 to 100.00 The derivative ratio identifies the D part of the PID controller.
[0.01] By increasing this parameter, the stability of the system is increased. The
controller will attempt to slow down the action of the actuator in an attempt to
prevent excessive overshoot or undershoot. Essentially this is the brake for
the process.
This portion of the PID loop operates anywhere within the range of the
process unlike reset.
Notes
5550 Deadband 1 0.02 to 9.99 Hz islanded operation

[0.08 Hz] The generator frequency is controlled in such a manner that the measured
frequency does not deviate from the configured setpoint by more than the
value configured in this parameter without the controller issuing a frequency
raise/lower signal to the frequency control.
This prevents unneeded wear on the frequency bias output control or the
raise/lower relay contacts.
Example
n If the frequency setpoint is 50 Hz and a deadband of 0.5 Hz is config‐

ured, the measured generator frequency must exceed 50.5 Hz (50 + 0.5)
to issue a lower pulse or fall below 49.5 Hz (50 - 0.5) to issue a raise
pulse.
Synchronization
The generator frequency is controlled in such a manner that the measured
frequency does not deviate from the monitored reference (mains or busbar)
frequency by more than the value configured in this parameter without the
controller issuing a frequency raise/lower signal to the frequency control.
This prevents unneeded wear on the frequency bias output control or the
raise/lower relay contacts. The value configured for this parameter must be
less than the value configured for the df max (maximum frequency differen‐
tial) for synchronization.
Notes
is configured to "3pos controller".
imum
the desired speed reference point.
Notes
the relay will be in-creased in response to a deviation from the frequency ref‐
erence.
to the variable to be controlled. The farther out of tolerance the process is the
larger the response action is to return the process to the tolerance band.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
5636 Cycle time factor 1 1.0 to 20.0 The cycle time factor adjusts the time between the pulses (pause time).
Notes
5553 Expand dead‐ 1 1.0 to 9.9 If the measured generator frequency is within the deadband range (param‐
configured here.
Notes
5554 Delay expand 1 1.0 to 9.9 s The measured generator frequency must be within the deadband range for
deadband the time configured here in order to multiply the deadband with the factor con‐
[2.0 s] figured in parameter 5553 Ä p. 311.
Notes
5518 AM Frequency 2 Determined by The Frequency setpoint 1 source may be selected from the available data
SP1 [Hz] AnalogManager sources.
81.03
The internal frequency setpoint 05.51 can be changed manually at the set‐
[A1 = 05.51 point screen of the display.
Internal f setp1
[Hz]] Notes
The frequency setpoint may be adjusted within the configured operating limits
5500 Int. freq. control 2 15.00 to 85.00 The internal generator frequency setpoint 1 is defined in this screen.
setpoint 1 Hz
This value is the reference for the frequency controller when performing
(Internal fre‐ [50.00 Hz] islanded and/or no-load operations.
quency control
setpoint 1) Generally 50 Hz or 60 Hz will be the values entered into this parameter. It is
possible to enter a different value here.
5519 AM Frequency 2 Determined by The Frequency setpoint 2 source may be selected from the available data
SP2 [Hz] AnalogManager sources.
81.04
The internal frequency setpoint 05.52 can be changed manually at the set‐
[A1 = 05.52 point screen of the display.
Internal f setp2
[Hz]] Notes
The frequency setpoint may be adjusted within the configured operating limits
5501 Int. freq. control 2 15.00 to 85.00 The internal generator frequency setpoint 2 is defined in this screen.
setpoint 2 Hz
This value is the reference for the frequency controller when performing
(Internal fre‐ [50.00 Hz] islanded and/or no-load operations.
quency control
setpoint 2) Generally 50 Hz or 60 Hz will be the values entered into this parameter. It is
possible to enter a different value here.
5502 Slip frequency 2 0.00 to 0.50 Hz This value is the offset for the synchronization to the busbar/utility.
setpoint offset
[0.10 Hz] With this offset, the unit synchronizes with a positive slip.

Configuration

[Default]
Example
If this parameter is configured to 0.10 Hz and the busbar/mains frequency is
50.00 Hz, the synchronization setpoint is 50.10 Hz.
Notes
The MCB can be synchronized with an individual slip frequency (also nega‐
tive).
The activation of MCB sync. with separate slip can be selected with param‐
eter 5709 Ä p. 262 (HMI: configuration | breakers | MCB) hat comes with the
MCB slip freq. setpoint offset parameter 5647 Ä p. 262 (HMI: configuration |
application | controller | frequency).
5505 Phase matching 2 1 to 99 The phase matching gain multiplies the setting of the proportional gain
gain (parameter 5510 Ä p. 309) for phase matching control.
[5]
5506 Phase matching 2 0.02 to 0.25 Hz Phase matching will only be enabled if the frequency difference between the
df-start systems to be synchronized is below the configured value.
[0.05 Hz]
12918 Setpoint 2 freq. 2 Determined by If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the frequency setpoint 2 will be
LogicsManager used instead of frequency setpoint 1. The frequency (result of AM)
(Setpoint 2 fre‐ 86.81 5519 Ä p. 311/Ä p. 1068 instead of 5518 Ä p. 311/Ä p. 1068 will be taken into
quency) account.
[(0 & 1) & 1]
Notes
504 Ä p. 691/Ä p. 704.
5516 Start frequency 1 15.00 to 85.00 The frequency controller is activated when the monitored generator frequency
control level Hz has exceeded the value configured in this parameter.
[47.00 Hz] This prevents the easYgen from attempting to control the frequency while the
engine is completing its start sequence.
5517 Start frequency 1 0 to 999 s The frequency controller is enabled after the configured time for this param‐
control delay eter expires.
[5 s]
5503 Freq. control 2 0.10 to 60.00 The different setpoint values are supplied to the controller via this ramp.
setpoint ramp Hz/s
(Frequency con‐ [2.50 Hz/s] the setpoint value.
trol setpoint
ramp) The faster the change in the setpoint is to be carried out, the greater the value
entered here must be.
5504 Frequency con‐ 2 0.0 to 20.0% If this control is to be operated on a generator in parallel with other generators
trol droop and frequency control is enabled, a droop characteristic curve must be used.
[2.0%]
Notes
Each generator in the system will require the same value to be configured for
the droop characteristic, so that when the system is stable the active power
will be distributed proportionally among all generators in relation to their rated
power.
12904 Freq. droop act. 2 Determined by If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the frequency droop is enabled.
LogicsManager
(Frequency 86.25 Notes
droop active)
[08.17 Missing For information on the LogicsManager and its default settings see Ä Chapter
member OR 9.3.1 “LogicsManager Overview” on page 986.
08.06 GCB fail
to open) & 1] The active droop will also be sent to an ECU connected to the J1939 interface
(CAN interface 2). This information is independent from the breaker states or
active controller (frequency or power controller).

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Controller > Load Control

[Default]
Example
n Rated power: 500 kW

n Rated frequency setpoint: 50.0 Hz
n Droop 5.0%
n Active power: 0 kW = 0% of rated power
Frequency is adjusted to: (50.0 Hz – [5.0% * 0.0 * 50 Hz]) = 50.0 Hz.
n Active power: +250 kW = +50% of rated power
Frequency is adjusted to: (50.0Hz – [5% * 0.50 * 50 Hz]) = 50.0 Hz –
1.25 Hz = 48.75 Hz.
n Active power: +500 kW = +100% of rated power
Frequency is adjusted to: (50.0Hz – [5% * 1.00 * 50 Hz]) = 50.0 Hz –
2.5 Hz = 47.50 Hz.
12909 Release f-con‐ 2 Determined by This LogicsManager is used to activate generally the frequency biasing to the
trol LogicsManager sub controller. If the LogicsManager is false the output will be on the initial
86.96 state (see parameter 5508 Ä p. 309).
[(1 & 1) & 1] The LogicsManager condition status 'TRUE' is activating the frequency or
power regulation according to the LogigsManager 'F/P control' ID
12940 Ä p. 317/Ä p. 1038).
Notes
12990 2nd Frequency 2 [02.01 False This LogicsManager is used to activate the 2nd Frequency PID controller
PIDl And 02.01 True parameter set. If the LogicsManager output is false the 1st Frequency PID
And 02.01 True] controller parameter set is taken.
Notes
4.4.4.5 Load Control
A 2nd ramp is implemented to meet both BDEW

and VDE AR-N 4105 decoupling requirements
Additionally to the “Load control setpoint ramp”
parameter 5522 Ä p. 316 there is an alternative
(2nd) “Load control ramp decoupling” parameter
5014 Ä p. 316 available for ramping slower. So it
is possible to follow the BDEW/VDE requirements
– after mains decoupling
and
– after “Frequency depending derating of power”
(see chapter Ä Chapter 4.4.4.5.4 “Derating
And Uprating Of Power ” on page 321)
becomes inactive.
Default ramping is backward compatible because
parameter 5015 Ä p. 316 per default comes with
zero.

Configuration
NEW LogicsManager to disable all load ramps

(BDEW)
With LogicsManager 11465 Ä p. 1019/Ä p. 1030 It is
possible to activate the fastest load ramp e.g., for
test.
4.4.4.5.1 Configure: Load Control (general)

Analog Managers to define input signal of load set‐
point (1, 2, 3, 4) are available in ToolKit by
control"

– a click from screen/page "General load control"

[Default]
5525 Load Control 2 [PID analog] The generator load is controlled using an analog PID controller.
3pos controller The generator load is controlled using a three-step controller.
Off Load control is not carried out.
[1.00] trolled.
return the process to the tolerance band.
Notes
This parameter is only visible if load control (parameter 5525 Ä p. 314) is
5514 Integral gain 2 0.01 to 100.00 The integral gain identifies the I part of the PID controller.
[1.00] The integral gain corrects for any offset (between setpoint and process vari‐
able) automatically over time by shifting the proportioning band.
able and the setpoint are the same.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
The integral gain constant must be greater than the derivative time constant.
If the integral gain constant is too large, the engine will continually oscillate.
If the integral gain steady is too small, the engine will take too long to settle at
a steady state.
5515 Derivative ratio 2 0.01 to 100.00 The derivative ratio identifies the D part of the PID controller.
[0.01] By increasing this parameter, the stability of the system is increased. The
controller will attempt to slow down the action of the actuator in an attempt to
prevent excessive overshoot or undershoot. Essentially this is the brake for
the process.
This portion of the PID loop operates anywhere within the range of the
process unlike reset.
Notes
5560 Deadband 1 0.10 to 9.99% The generator load is controlled in such a manner, when paralleled with the
mains, so that the monitored load does not deviate from the configured load
[1.00%] setpoint by more than the value configured in this parameter without the con‐
troller issuing a raise/lower signal to the speed control.
This prevents unneeded wear on the raise/lower relay contacts. The config‐
ured percentage for the dead band refers to the generator rated active power
Notes
imum
the desired speed reference point.
Notes
the relay will be in-creased in response to a deviation from the frequency ref‐
erence.
to the variable to be controlled. The farther out of tolerance the process is the
larger the response action is to return the process to the tolerance band.
Notes
factor
Notes

Configuration

[Default]
5563 Expand dead‐ 1 1.0 to 9.9 If the measured generator load is within the deadband range (param‐
configured here.
Notes
5564 Delay expand 1 1.0 to 9.9 s The measured generator load must be within the deadband range for the time
deadband configured here in order to multiply the deadband with the factor configured in
[2.0 s] parameter 5563 Ä p. 316.
Notes
5522 Load control 2 0.10 to The different setpoint values are supplied to the controller via this ramp. The
setpoint ramp 1 100.0%/s slope of the ramp is used to alter the rate at which the controller modifies the
[3.00%/s] greater the value entered here must be.
Notes
high.
setpoint ramp 2 100.0%/s slope of the ramp is used to alter the rate at which the controller modifies the
Notes
high.
11978 2nd load control 2 Determined by The LogicsManager can be used to switch from load ramp 1 to load ramp 2
setpoint ramp LogicsManager settings.
87.77
If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE and load ramp will be performed,
[(0 & 02.02) & [Load control setpoint ramp 2] will be used.
02.02]
5015 Time until set‐ 2 0 to 9999 s The mains decoupling ramp (2nd load ramp) will be disabled after that time
point ramp reset delay.
[0 s]
Notes
This parameter comes with default zero for backward compatibility (2nd load
ramp disabled). BDEW prefers 600 s.
setpoint ramp 3 100.00 %/s slope of the ramp is used to alter the rate at which the controller modifies the
Notes
high.
11998 3rd load control 2 Determined by The LogicsManager can be used to switch from load ramp 1 or load ramp 2 to
setpoint ramp LogicsManger load ramp 3 settings. If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE and load ramp
87.79 will be performed, [Load control setpoint ramp 3] will be used. (3rd load con‐
trol setpoint ramp has the highest priority.)
[(02.02 & 02.02)
& 02.02]
12853 Disable load 2 Determined by The LogicsManager can be used to perform fastest possible load ramp inde‐
setpoint ramp LogicsManager pendent from load ramp settings.
87.76
If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE and load ramp will be performed,
[(02.01& 1) & 1] e.g. a test with different setpoint steps but without any ramping is possible like
requested by BDEW.

Configuration

[Default]
5569 Load control 2 0.10 to 100.00 The ramp rate is used for the unloading in parallel operation or islanded oper‐
unloading ramp [%/sec] ation.
3.00 [%/sec]
5523 Load control 2 0 to 150% If the maximum generator load is to be limited, a percentage based on the
setpoint max‐ rated generator power (parameter 1752 Ä p. 497) must be entered here. The
imum [100%] controller adjusts the generator in such a manner that this value is not
exceeded. This parameter limits the setpoint of the load controller when the
generator is in a mains or island parallel operation.
3465 Min. generator 2 0 to 100% If the load controller is active, the generator operates with the configured min‐
power imum generator power, even if the actual active power setpoint is lower than
[0%] that parameter value.
This parameter isn't used during the unloading sequence.
5524 Min. generator 2 0 to 100% If the minimum generator load is to be limited, a percentage based on the
import/export rated generator power (parameter 1752 Ä p. 497) must be entered here. The
[0%] controller will not permit the load to drop below the configured load limit value.
This parameter is only functional when the generator is in a mains parallel
operation.
12940 P control 2 Determined by The LogicsManager can be used to control whether frequency control or
LogicsManager active power control should be performed.
86.98
If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the active power control is per‐
[(04.07& 04.06) formed.
& 1]
12998 Setp. 3load 2 Determined by If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the frequency setpoint 3 will be ena‐
LogicsManager bled, i.e. the setting of parameter 5606 Ä p. 319/Ä p. 1069 overrides the set‐
(Setpoint 3 load) 87.67 ting of parameter 5539 Ä p. 318/Ä p. 1069 but setpoint 2 becomes priority.
[(0 & 1) & 1] Notes
5796 Load setpoint 3 2 Import The value entered for the import level shall always be supplied by the utility.
All load swings are absorbed by the generator(s) provided the load rating for
the generator(s) is not exceeded. The generator will always start when an
import power operation is enabled.
Export The value entered for the export level shall always be supplied to the utility.
export power operation is enabled.
[Steady] The generator shall always supply the value entered for the steady power
level. All load swings are absorbed by the utility. The generator will always
start when a steady power (base load) operation is enabled.
5795 Int. load control 0 0.0 to 9999.9 The load setpoint 3 is defined in this screen. This value is the reference for
setpoint 3 kW the load controller when performing parallel operations.
(Internal load [200.0 kW]
control setpoint
3)
3465 Min. Generator 1 0 to 100% This is the minimum active power setpoint. Any lower other active power set‐
power point will be ignored!
[0%]
Notes
For backward compatibility reasons the default value is zero.
This min. value is also used for the AnalogManager data sources Ä Chapter
9.4.1 “Data Sources AM” on page 1042
n 05.19 Used power setpoint without ramp
and
n 05.20 Used power setpoint with ramp

Configuration
4.4.4.5.2 Configure: Load Setpoints

Analog Managers to define input signal of load set‐
point (1, 2, 3, 4) are available in ToolKit by
– a click from screen/page "Load setpoints"

[Default]
control setpoint
1)
5539 AM ActPower 2 Determined by The load setpoint 1 source may be selected from the available data sources.
SP1 [kW] AnalogManager
81.05 The internal load setpoint 05.54 can be changed manually at the setpoint
screen of the display.
[A1 = 05.54
Internal P setp1 Notes
[kW]]
The load setpoint may be adjusted between 0 and the configured load control
setpoint maximum (parameter 5523 Ä p. 317).
control setpoint
2)
[A1 = 05.55
Internal P setp2
[kW]]

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
12919 Setp. 2 load 2 Determined by If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the ActPower setpoint 2 will be used
LogicsManager instead of ActPower setpoint 1. The ActPower (result of AM) 5540 Ä p. 318/
(Setpoint 2 load) 86.82 Ä p. 612/Ä p. 1069 instead of 5539 Ä p. 318/Ä p. 1069 will be taken into
account.
[(0 & 1) & 1]
Notes
504 Ä p. 691/Ä p. 704.
control setpoint
2)
[A1 = 05.80
[kW]]
12998 Setp. 3 load 2 Determined by If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE and [Setp. 2 load] is not TRUE, the
LogicsManager frequency setpoint 3 will be enabled., i.e. the setting of parameter
(Setpoint 3 load) 87.67 5606 Ä p. 319/Ä p. 1069 overrides the setting of parameter 5539 Ä p. 318/
Ä p. 1069.
[(0 & 1) & 1]
If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the frequency setpoint 3 will be
used instead of frequency setpoint 2. The ActPower SP3 (result of AM)
5606 Ä p. 319/Ä p. 1069 instead of 5539 Ä p. 318/Ä p. 1069 will be taken into
account.
Notes
504 Ä p. 691/Ä p. 704.

Configuration

[Default]
control setpoint
4)
[A1 = 05.84
[kW]]
12269 Setp. 4 load 2 Determined by If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE and neither [Setp. 2 load] nor
LogicsManager [Setp. 3 load] is true, the frequency setpoint 4 will be enabled, i.e. the setting
(Setpoint 4 load) 87.75 of parameter 5609 Ä p. 320/Ä p. 1070 overrides the setting of param‐
eter 5539 Ä p. 318/Ä p. 1069.
[(0 & 1) & 1]
Notes
504 Ä p. 691/Ä p. 704.
4.4.4.5.3 Configure: Warm-up

[Default]
5532 Warm-up load 2 0 to 100% The maximum load is limited to this percentage of the generator rated power
limit (parameter 1752 Ä p. 497) until the warm-up time (parameter 5534 Ä p. 320)
[15%] has expired or the warm-up temperature threshold (parameter 5546 Ä p. 320)
has been exceeded.
5534 Warm-up time 2 0 to 9999 s The maximum load is limited to the value configured in param‐
eter 5532 Ä p. 320 for the time configured here.
[0 s]
Notes
This parameter is only effective if "Warm-up mode" (param‐
eter 5533 Ä p. 320) is configured to "Time controlled".
5533 Warm-up mode 2 Analog val contr The maximum load is limited to the value configured in parameter
5532 Ä p. 320 until the temperature measured according to the setting in
parameter 5538 Ä p. 321/Ä p. 1070 has exceeded the threshold configured in
parameter 5546 Ä p. 320.
[Time con‐ The maximum load is limited to the value configured in param‐
trolled] eter 5532 Ä p. 320 until the time configured in parameter 5534 Ä p. 320 has
expired.
5546 Warm-up 2 0 to 1000 °C The maximum load is limited to the value configured in parameter
threshold 5532 Ä p. 320 until the temperature has exceeded the threshold configured
[80 °C] here.
Notes
This parameter is only effective if "Warm-up mode" (param‐
eter 5533 Ä p. 320) is configured to "Analog val contr".

Configuration

[Default]
5538 AM Warm-up 2 Determined by The engine warm-up criterion may be selected from the available data
criterion AnalogManager sources.
81.02
Notes
[A1 = 10.01
ZERO] This parameter is only effective if "Warm-up mode" (param‐
eter 5533 Ä p. 320) is configured to "Analog val contr".
4.4.4.5.4 Derating And Uprating Of Power

General notes The current active power setpoint can be derated to a defined
value according to the application.
To ensure high flexibility the easYgen-XT offer the following
derating functions:
n Direct derating
(derating to a value of an analog manager)
n Derating according to a characteristic curve
(derating according to a configured e.g. temperature character‐
istic)
n J1939 (ECU) derating
(derating driven by ECU to prevent knocking of the engine)
n Frequency depending derating
(requirement of some grid codes; described in chapter
Ä Chapter 4.4.4.5 “Load Control” on page 313)
Application fields Derating examples:

n A fire pump is mechanically connected to an engine by a
clutch. In this case the engine shall provide a limited amount of
electrical power for the load sharing.
n An asynchronous load sharing is required. It is possible to
operate an engine with limited power (e.g. if there is a new
engine or after maintenance).
Uprating example:
n A single engine shall run with a higher load than the others e.g.
for load test.

Configuration
Block Diagram
Fig. 190: Derating of Active Power
Derating priority
If more than one derating function is configured the
one which calculates the lowest setpoint becomes
effective.

Configuration
Direct Derating
General notes The idea of direct derating of power is that the user can control
with an analog value, usually from outside, the amount of reduc‐
tion. For this purposes mainly an analog input would be taken.
Additionally in some applications are uprating desired, for example
during load sharing procedures, which can be as well executed in
determined circumstances.
Derating If parameter Direct Derating (ID15149) is enabled, the output value

of the AnalogManager AM Derating source (ID15147) determines
the derating directly. This derating value is also provided as Ana‐
logManager variable under "81.21 AM Derating source". For
derating the active power setpoint, the value shall vary between
100% (no derating) and 0% (full derating). The derating function
parameters 15143, 15144, 15145 are not in use.
Uprating If parameter Direct Derating (ID 15149 Ä p. 328) is enabled, the

output value of the AnalogManager AM Derating source (ID15147)
determines the uprating directly. This value is also provided as
AnalogManager variable under "81.21 AM Derating source". For
uprating the value shall vary between 100% (no uprating) and
higher (uprating begins). The scaling with parameters 15143,
15144, 15145 is not in use.
Combined Derating and Uprating If parameter Direct Derating (ID15149) is enabled, the output value
of the AnalogManager AM Derating source (ID 15147 Ä p. 328/
Ä p. 1069) determines the derating/uprating directly. This value is
also provided as AnalogManager variable under "81.21 AM
Derating source".
For derating the active power setpoint goes under 100%, for
uprating the value goes over 100%, and with exact value of 100%
the normal setpoint becomes active.
Derating With Characteristic Curve

General notes Some application require a functionality to reduce the active power
dependent on a well defined measured value. This could be for
example a temperature measurement: The load should decrease
with higher temperatures according to a configured characteristic.
If parameter "Direct derating" (ID 15149 Ä p. 328) is OFF, the Log‐
icsManager “Free derating" (ID 15146 Ä p. 328/Ä p. 1038)
becomes TRUE and the analog value of power exceeds the value
“Start derating at” (ID 15143 Ä p. 328), the unit begins to reduce
the present active power setpoint. The grade of reducing depends
on the value “Stop derating at” (ID 15144 Ä p. 328) and the value
of “Max. power deviation” (ID 15145 Ä p. 328) which are configu‐
rable.
If the LogicsManager "Free derating" becomes FALSE, the unit
ramps back to its original setpoint. If derating/uprating is active, the
display shows the indication “Derating”/"Uprating".
The derating/uprating function can be used in islanded operation,
too. The available rated power from an engine can be reduced
(derated) or increased (uprated) with an analog value without
adjusting a parameter value. With this function the engine can be
individually loaded within of an multiple gen islanded operation
(asynchronous load sharing).

Configuration
Freely scalable derating characteristic The easYgen-XT offers a characteristic which is linearly
decreasing the momentary active power setpoint according to the
value offered by the AnalogManager 15147 Ä p. 328/Ä p. 1069.
The characteristic is defined by the following parameters:
n 15143: “Start derating at”
n 15144: “Stop derating at”
n 15145: “Maximal power deviation”
When the LogicsManager "Free derating" becomes active and the
analog value crosses the reducing start value, the configured
derating line becomes active. If the derating line falls below the
active power setpoint the derating becomes effective. The grade of
reduction depends on the reducing stop value and the power devi‐
ation freely configurable. If the LogicsManager "Power Reduction"
becomes FALSE, the unit shall ramp back to its original setpoint.
To become more familiar please look at the examples below:

Configuration
Example 1: Mains Parallel Opera‐ n Rated generator power = 200 kW

tion (setpoint = below rated power) n Current power setpoint of the generator = 150 kW (75%)
n Start derating at = 80 °C water temperature (i.e. analog input
AI 01 is defined as free derating source by parameter
15147)
n Stop derating at = 90 °C water temperature
n Max. power deviation = 40% (80 kW)
Fig. 191: Derating: Mains parallel operation; setpoint below rated power
If the engine is running and the LogicsManager "Free derating" is
TRUE, the unit monitors the water temperature. If the water tem‐
perature remains below the value “Start derating at”, the reduction
becomes not active and remains on 0%. If the water temperature
increases and so exceeds the value “Start derating at” the reduc‐
tion becomes active (the unit starts to derate the current active
power setpoint). The rate of reduction (slope) is determined by
the values of “Start derating at”, “Stop derating at”, and "Max.
power deviation" ("Max. power deviation" also defines the min‐
imum power).
In this example the power reduction would increase and so
reduce power from 75% at 86.5 °C down to 60% = 120 kW at
90 °C. Temperature over 90 °C would cause the same reduction
of 40% in this example. So it is guaranteed that the engine is not
running with too less load.
A Setpoint below the Minimum (e.g. 55%) would not run into
reduction.
With a smaller Maximum deviation (e.g. 20%) Minimum would be
higher than Setpoint and so not cause reduction.

Configuration
Example 2: Mains Parallel Opera‐ n Rated generator power = 200 kW

tion (setpoint = rated power) n Current power setpoint of the generator = 200 kW (100%)
15147)
n Max. power deviation = 40% (80 kW)
Fig. 192: Derating: Mains parallel operation; setpoint = rated power

If the engine is running and the LogicsManager "Free derating" is
TRUE, the unit monitors the water temperature. If the water tem‐
perature remains below the value “Start derating at”, the reduction
becomes not active and remains on 0%. If the water temperature
increases and so exceeds the value “Start derating at” the reduc‐
tion becomes active (the unit starts to derate the current active
power setpoint). The rate of reduction (slope) is determined by
the values of “Start derating at”, “Stop derating at”, and "Max.
power deviation" ("Max. power deviation" also defines the min‐
imum power).
The power reduction would increase and so reduce power from
100% at 80 °C down to 60% = 120 kW at 90 °C. Temperature
over 90 °C would cause the same reduction of 40% in this
example. So it is guaranteed that the engine is not running with
too less load.

Configuration
Example 3: Islanded Parallel Oper‐ n Rated generator power = 200 kW

ation (IOP) n Current average utilization of all generators = 95%
15147)
n Max. power deviation = 40%
Fig. 193: Derating: Islanded parallel operation

In islanded parallel operation the derating factor is correlated to
the utilization factor of all engines! This becomes the new Max‐
imum for derating.
The engine is running with 95% (190 kW). If the LogicsManager is
enabled and temperature has reached 80 °C the derating
becomes effective (the unit starts to derate the current active
power setpoint). If the temperature is 90 °C or higher the max‐
imum reduction value of 40% becomes active. The current power
of 95% will be reduced by 40% to 60%.
95% x 0.6 = 57% ≙ 0.57
This engine will run now with 200 kW x 0.57 = 114 kW.
In islanded parallel operation the derating is limited

to 50%. It is not possible to get the utilization factor
lower than 50% by derating function.
If the derating signals are digital (e.g. different
relay outputs from a ripple control receiver; refer to
Ä Chapter 6.3.13 “Ripple Control Receiver”
on page 643), the digital signals can be trans‐
formed to an analog signal with a simple set of
resistors.
The derating of power has an impact on the Load-
Dependent Start/Stop functionality (refer to
Ä Chapter 6.2.1.1 “Configuring Load-Dependent
Start/Stop” on page 606): The start of the next
generator will be shifted.

Configuration
Derating Parameters
[Default]
15149 Direct derating 2 On Only the analog source is used for the up-/derating. The parameters 15143,
on/off 15144, and 15145 are not visible neither in the HMI nor in ToolKit.
[Off] The free derating function uses the parameters 15143, 15144, and 15145 for
the calculation from the derating value. This parameters are visible in the HMI
and ToolKit.
15143 Start derating at 2 -032000 to This parameter defines the starting point when the derating becomes active.
032000 The value applies to the analog source (parameter 15147 Ä p. 328/Ä p. 1069).
[1000] Value of the analog source which starts derating.
15144 Stop derating at 2 -032000 to This parameter defines (in combination with parameter 15143 Ä p. 328) the
032000 ramp of the derating function.
[0] Value of the analog source which ends derating.
15145 Max. power 2 1.0 to 100.0% This parameter defines the maximal power deviation of the derating function.
deviation That means it determines also the minimal power while derating is active.
[100.0%]
100% minus this value is the lowest P value reachable by free derating.
The configured percentage for the max. power deviation refers to the gener‐
ator rated active power (parameter 1752 Ä p. 497).
15146 Free derating 2 Determined by This LogicsManager equation releases the free derating function.
LogicsManager
87.60
[(02.01 & 1] & 1]
15147 AM Derating 2 Determined by This parameter defines the analog source [Analog input 1] which controls the
source AnalogManager derating function.
81.21
[A1 = 06.01
Analog input 1]
15142 J1939 derating 2 To prevent knocking in the engine, some ECUs (Engine Control Unit) transmit
(see a J1939 CAN message to derate the power (in percentage of rated power).
chapter The easYgen is able to accept this message and to derate the power
below according to this message. If derating is active, the display shows the indica‐
too) tion “Derating”.
On The derate command issued from the ECU via J1939 message is accepted.
[Off] The derate command via ECU is ignored.
Indication of derating Where? What? Remarks
HMI "Derating ID 13281 (for protocols state indication)

active"
"Uprating ID 13287 (for protocols state indication)

active"
Value of The value is representing the derating in

derating percent (not the resulting setpoint). For
this reason this value becomes negative
in case of uprating.
As LM command 05.16 for If derating is active “Derating active” is

variable derating shown in the status message and com‐
mand variable 05.16 becomes active.
05.17 for If uprating is active “Uprating active” is

uprating shown in the status message and com‐
mand variable 05.17 becomes active.
Event list entry
The value of derating is shown under “Status menu / Next page

è Setpoints è Derating”. In case of derating this value has posi‐
tive in case of uprating has negative sign.

Configuration
J1939 (ECU) Derating

General notes In some conditions -- for example when knocking of the engine is
detected -- the ECU (Engine Control Unit) is requesting a load
reduction via J1939 standard message SPN 3644. This message
is only supported by some ECUs e.g. Woodward EGS.
To allow J1939 ECU derating parameter 15142 “J1939 derating ”
must be configured to [ON]. The derating value of SPN 3644 is
defined as a percentage value related to rated power, with 0% = no
derating and 100% = maximum derating (= no load).
If parameter 15142 “J1939 derating ” is on and the power P is
limited to:
Plim = (100% - derating value) x Prated/ 100%
In islanded parallel operation this behavior does

not meet exactly the derating required by the ECU.
Because of the influence of load share, in the first
moment the derating is stronger than required by
the ECU.

[Default]
15142 J1939 derating 2 To prevent knocking in the engine, some ECUs (Engine Control Unit) transmit
a J1939 CAN message to derate the power (in percentage of rated power).
The easYgen is able to accept this message and to derate the power
according to this message. If derating is active, the display shows the indica‐
tion “Derating”.
On The derate command issued from the ECU via J1939 message is accepted.
[Off] The derate command via ECU is ignored.
4.4.4.5.5 Active Power – Frequency Function P(f)

Introduction The FNN VDE-AR-N 4105 / 4110 requests an active power control
to stabilize the grid during mains faults. To maintain this the
easYgen can be configured to:
The FNN VDE-AR-N 4105 / 4110 requests an active power control
to stabilize the grid during mains faults. To maintain this the
easYgen can be configured to:
n f depending derating of power OR
n f depending uprating of power OR
n both.
The reference for the uprating or derating power can be calculated
out of the actual power or the rated power. This is differently
treated in grid codes 4105 and 4110.

Configuration
Function
Fig. 194: De/Uprating of active power setpoint due mains stabilization
Derating: If the mains frequency exceeds the f start value ID 5782 the device
calculates a power reduction in relation to the configured rate.
If the mains frequency exceeds the f stop value ID 5095 the calcu‐
lation will be disabled and the active power controller regulates its
original active power setpoint. Should the active power setpoint be
changed meanwhile the mains failure power ramp will be activated.
Uprating If the mains frequency underruns the f start value ID 5094 the
device calculates a power increase in relation to the configured
rate. If the mains frequency exceeds the f stop value ID 5095 the
calculation will be disabled and the active power controller regu‐
lates its original active power setpoint. Should the active power set‐
point be changed meanwhile the mains failure power ramp will be
activated.

Configuration
Frequency value for up/derating:

According to the VDE-AR-N 4110 a 200ms moving average mains
frequency value is used. The frequency can be picked up under ID
236 or is usable via the AnalogManager variable “02.90 Mains freq.
200ms [Hz]”.

[Default]
5807 Up/derating based Rated power The reference for the active power derating/uprating is adjustable with this
on parameter.
[Actual power]
Rated power: In the moment of up/derating start the engine rated power is
taken and from this value the percentage rating is calculated.
Actual power: In the moment of up/derating start the actual power is stored
and from this value the percentage rating is calculated.
Derating
[Default]
5781 Function On The f depending derating of power can be enabled here.

[Off] On: Active power derating is enabled.
Off: Active power derating is disabled
5782 f start value 15 to 85Hz If the mains frequency is higher than the start value the frequency depending
derating function is enabled.
[50.20Hz]
5783 f stop value 15 to 85Hz The frequency depending derating function stops, if the mains frequency is
lower than the stop value.
[50.15Hz]
5784 f dep.derating 1 to 100% Depending on the actual mains frequency, the generator active power
decreases with the gradient value in relation to the active power the reference
[40%] value.
5785 Hold max. derating On It can be determined, whether the max. calculated reduction value shall be
hold. In that case the last highest reduction rate is kept until the the f-stop
[Off] value is underrun.
[Off]: The reduction is executed along the reduction line.
[On]: The reduction is executed and hold along the reduction line. With
underrun the F stop value the reduction is reset.
Uprating
[Default]
5093 Function On The f depending uprating of power can be enabled here.

[Off] On: Active power uprating is enabled.
[Off]: Active power uprating is disabled
5094 f start value 15 to 85Hz If the mains frequency is lower than the start value the frequency depending
uprating function is enabled.
[49.8Hz]

Configuration

[Default]
5095 f stop value 15 to 85Hz The frequency depending uprating function stops, if the mains frequency is
higher than the stop value.
[49.85Hz]
5096 f dep.uprating 1 to 100% Depending on the actual mains frequency, the generator active power
increases with the gradient value in relation to the active power the reference
[40%] value.
Configuration Test possibility for f dependent up/derating
For test purposes it is possible to configure a "Mains voltage test

frequency" which is passed to the uprating and derating character‐
istics.

[Default]
5808 Enable mains test fre‐ On For test purposes it is possible to configure a "Mains voltage test frequency"
quency which is passed to the uprating and derating characteristics.
[Off]
On:The mains test frequency is used for f- dependent up-/derating instead of
the measured mains frequency.
[Off]: The test frequency is disabled and the measured mains frequency is
used.
Note:Enable mains test frequency" is reset to Off automatically after 1 hour.
5809 Mains test frequency 15 to 85Hz If parameter 5808 is “On” this value is used for f- dependent up-/derating
instead of measured mains frequency.
[50.00Hz]
Start conditions The power derating function becomes active, if the following condi‐
tions are true:
n Mains frequency > FStart (parameter 5782 Ä p. 331) AND
n Mains parallel operation active (MCB, GCB and if applicable
GGB are closed) AND
n easYgen is in AUTOMATIC mode AND
n The corresponding controller functions are switched "On"
Stop conditions The power derating function becomes inactive and will be reset, if
at least one of the following conditions is true:
n Mains frequency < FStop (parameter 5783 Ä p. 331) OR
n Mains parallel operation not active (MCB, GCB and if appli‐
cable GGB are open) OR
n easYgen is not in AUTOMATIC mode OR
n The corresponding controller functions are switched "Off"
AnalogManager sources:
These analog variables indicate the derating respectively uprating
percent value:
n 05.28 P derating(f) [%] (same value as 10341)
n 05.48 P uprating(f) [%] (same value as 10357)

Configuration
Visualization Values which indicate the actual active power stored when the
derating respectively uprating function has started:
n 4613 f dep. Uprating P reference [%]
n 10357 f dep. Uprating P reference [%]
Values which indicate the derating respectively uprating percent
value:
n 10341 Freq. dep. derating of power [%]
n 10356 Freq. dep. Uprating of power [%]
Values which indicate the resulting setpoint:
n 10358 Setpoint derating of power [kW]
n 10359 Setpoint uprating of power [kW]
Examples Power Derating

If the frequency increases the value FStart (Parameter
5782 Ä p. 331), the momentary power of the generator will be
memorized by the controller as an internal value PM. (P measured)
and indicated at “4613 f dep. Derating P reference” [%]. Now, the
power will be derated with a gradient R [%/Hz](parameter
5784 Ä p. 331).
All examples are using the following values:

n Prated = 200 kW
n PM = 130 kW
n R = 40%/Hz (parameter 5784 Ä p. 331)
n FStart = 50.20 Hz (parameter 5782 Ä p. 331)
n FMains = 50.50 Hz
The power derating ΔP may be calculated using the following for‐
mulas:
n ΔPkW = PM [kW] x R [%/Hz] x (FMains [Hz] - FStart [Hz]) / 100
[%]
n ΔP% = PM [%] x R [%/Hz] x (FMains [Hz] - FStart [Hz]) / 100 [%]
Example 1: Power derating with “5807 n The power derating ΔPkW is calculated as follows:
Up/derating based on" Actual power – ΔPkW = 130 kW x 40 %/Hz x (50.50 Hz - 50.20 Hz] / 100%
= 15.6 kW
– “10358 Setpoint derating of power” indicates 114.4 kW
(130 kW – 15.6 kW)
–
n The power derating ΔP% is calculated as follows:
– ΔP% = 65 % x 40 %/Hz x (50.50 Hz - 50.20 Hz] / 100% =
7.8 %
– “10341 Freq. dep. derating of power” and “05.28 P
derating(f) [%]” indicates 7.8 %
The derating becomes inactive, if the frequency becomes lower
than FStop (Parameter 5783 Ä p. 331) ). (If the frequency becomes
too high, the frequency monitoring function trips.)

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Controller > PID {x} Control
Example 2: Power derating with “5807 n The power derating ΔP may be calculated using the following
Up/derating based on" Rated power formulas: The power derating ΔPkW is calculated as follows:
– ΔPkW = 200 kW x 40 %/Hz x (50.50 Hz - 50.20 Hz] / 100%
= 24 kW
– “10358 Setpoint derating of power” indicates 104 kW (130
kW – 24 kW).
n The power derating ΔP% is calculated as follows:
– ΔP[%] = 100 % x 40 %/Hz x (50.50 Hz - 50.20 Hz] / 100 % =
12 %
– “10341 Freq. dep. derating of power” and “05.28 P
derating(f) [%]” indicates 12 %
The derating becomes inactive, if the frequency becomes lower
than FStop (Parameter 5783 Ä p. 331). (If the frequency becomes
too high, the frequency monitoring function trips.)
Example 3: Explanation of Parameter If the frequency decreases, while the derating is still active, the
“5785 Hold max.derating”: behavior depends on parameter “Hold max.derating” (parameter
5785 Ä p. 331)
The following assumptions are made:
n The corresponding parameters are set to default
n Derating has started with FStart = 50.20 Hz with PM = 130 kW
n The current frequency is 50.70 Hz ￫ reduction ΔP = 26 kW cur‐
rent power = 104 kW
Now the measured frequency decreases to 50.50 Hz:
n Hold max. derating” (parameter 5785 Ä p. 331) = Off
The derating ΔP decreases to 15.6 kW according to the gra‐
dient 40 %/Hz the power is increasing to 114.4 kW.
n Hold max. derating” (parameter 5785 Ä p. 331) = On
The derating still remains at 26 kW the power remains at 104
kW. During an active derating process, the power will never
increase again. The power can only increase again if the
derating becomes inactive, that means that the measured fre‐
quency has reached FStop.
4.4.4.6 PID {x} Control

General notes The easYgen provides three additional freely configurable PID con‐
trollers. These controllers are intended and optimized for slow pro‐
cesses, like temperature control for heating systems (CHPO appli‐
cations). The controller can either operate as a PID analog
controller or a three-position controller.

[Default]
16338 Description 2 user-defined This text will be displayed on the Setpoints screens. The text may have 1
through 16 characters.
16339 [PID controller
{x}]
16348
Notes
5571 PID{x} control 2 On The PID controller is enabled.

5584

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Controller > PID {x} Control

[Default]
5670 [Off] No control is carried out.
5580 PID{x} 2 If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the PID {x} controller will be
ctrl.release PID{x} Deter‐ released.
5593 mined by Logi‐
csManager
5679
87.17, 87.18,
87.19
[(0 & 1) & 1]
=
11406/11407/11
408
Notes
5585 [1.000] trolled.
5671 The farther out of tolerance the process is the larger the response action is to
5586 [0.100] over time by shifting the proportioning band.
5672 The integral gain automatically changes the output signal until the process
variable and the setpoint are the same. The integral gain constant must be
greater than the derivative time constant.
If the integral gain constant is too large, the engine will continually oscillate. If
the integral gain constant is too small, the engine will take too long to settle at
a steady state.
this parameter, the stability of the system is increased. The controller will
5587 [0.001] attempt to slow down the action of the actuator in an attempt to prevent
5673 excessive overshoot or undershoot. Essentially this is the brake for the
process.
5575 Time pulse min‐ 1 0.01 to 2.00 s A minimum pulse on time must be configured here. The shortest possible
imum pulse time should be configured, but the actuator should still react safe, to
5588 [0.05 s] limit overshoot of the desired speed reference point. (Only three-position con‐
5674 troller)
5576 Deadband 1 0 to 32000 Shows the adjust range around the setpoint value when no displace impulse
is issued. This avoids an unnecessary abrasion of relay contacts for higher/
5589 [10] lower. (Only three-position controller)
5675
5578 PID{x} control 2 Determined by The PID {x} control actual value may be selected from the available analog
actual value AnalogManager data sources. It is possible to select all data sources ( Ä Chapter 9.4.1 “Data
5591 Sources AM” on page 1042).
81.14, 81.16,
5677 81.18: [A1 =
10.01 ZERO]
5577 PID{x} control 2 Determined by The PID {x} control setpoint source may be selected from the available analog
setpoint AnalogManager data sources. It is possible to select all data sources ( Ä Chapter 9.4.1 “Data
5590 Sources AM” on page 1042).
81.13, 81.15,
5676 81.17: [A1 =
05.75/76/77 Int.
PID{x} setpoint]
5579 Int. PID{x} con‐ 1 -32000 to 32000 The internal setpoint is defined in this screen. This value is the reference for
trol setpoint the PID {x} controller.
5592 [0]
5678

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Controller > Discrete Raise/Low Function

[Default]
5581 PID{x} control 2 0 to 100% The value entered for this parameter is the start reference point for the analog
initial state output to the controller as long as the LogicsManager is false. If the PID con‐
5594 [50%] troller has been disabled (e.g. Parameter 5571 Ä p. 334), the bias output will
5680 change to 0 %.
5582 Sampling time 2 1 to 360 s The sampling time is configured here. This is the time between two consecu‐
tive samples.
5595 [1 s]
The sampling time shall be configured high enough that the actual value can
5681 react in case e.g. a temperature just shifts slowly.
5692 Actuator run 2 0.1 to 999.0 s The actuator run time is configured here. This is the time the actuator needs
time to move from fully closed to fully open. This information is necessary because
5693 [30.0 s] the controller does not receive a feedback of the actuator position and needs
5694 this value to calculate the desired actuator position.
5734 PID{x} control PI 1 0 to 32000 The PI band is configured here to encounter excessive overshoot of the
band process value when starting up. The PI band defines the range around the
5735 [2000] setpoint, in which the I portion of the PID controller is active.
5736 If the actual value is outside of this band, the I portion is reduced to a min‐
imum value. The PI band is not that important for three-position controllers
and should be disabled by entering a high value (e.g. default value).
5737 PID{x} control 2 1 to 32000 The different setpoint values are supplied to the controller via this ramp to
setpoint ramp prevent an overshoot of the process value when enabling the controller.
5738 [10]
5739 the setpoint value. The faster the change in the setpoint is to be carried out,
the greater the value entered here must be.
7494 Unit 2 User-defined up This parameter is assigning a unit text to the displayed analog value.
to 6 characters
7495 text Notes
7496 [______] This parameter may only be configured using ToolKit.
The max. number of characters is 39 but depends on numbers of Bytes for
each character. The Bytes/character are defined by the font of the currently
selected language.
Up to six characters are best for display/HMI; more will override screen
border/frame. Please verify the length on the display for best view!
4.4.4.7 Discrete Raise/Low Function

General notes The frequency / load and voltage / reactive power setpoints may be
raised and lowered using the LogicsManager functionality, i.e. it is
possible to use LogicsManager command variables to raise and
lower these setpoints. In this case the discrete raise/lower function
always starts with the rated value (frequency / load and voltage /
reactive power).
Most commonly a button may be used to energize a discrete input
on the control, which is used again as a LogicsManager command
variable to enable the respective LogicsManager function to
change the setpoint.
Frequency and voltage may be adjusted within the configured
operating limits ( Ä Chapter 4.5.1.1 “ Generator Operating Ranges:
Voltage / Frequency / Busbar” on page 367). Active power may be
adjusted between 0 and the configured load control setpoint max‐
imum (parameter 5523 Ä p. 317). The power factor may be
adjusted between 0.71 leading and 0.71 lagging.

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Controller > Discrete Raise/Low Function

[Default]
12900 Discrete f/P + 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the frequency /
LogicsManager load setpoint will be raised.
86.21
[(0 & 1) & 1]
Notes
12901 Discrete f/P - 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the frequency /
LogicsManager load setpoint will be lowered.
86.22
[(0 & 1) & 1]
Notes
12902 Discrete V/PF + 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the voltage /
LogicsManager reactive power setpoint will be raised.
86.23
[(0 & 1) & 1]
Notes
12903 Discrete V/PF - 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the voltage /
LogicsManager reactive power setpoint will be lowered.
86.24
[(0 & 1) & 1]
Notes
5024 Discrete ramp f 2 000.01 ... Configurable ramp rate for frequency setpoint raise and lower commands.
+/- 100.00 %/s
[000.07 %/s]
5025 Discrete ramp V 2 000.01 ... Configurable ramp rate for voltage setpoint raise and lower commands.
+/- 100.00 %/s
[000.70 %/s]
5026 Discrete ramp P 2 000.01 ... Configurable ramp rate for active power setpoint raise and lower commands.
+/- 100.00 %/s
[003.00 %/s]
5027 Discrete ramp 2 000.01 ... Configurable ramp rate for Power Factor (PF) setpoint raise and lower com‐
Power Factor 100.00 %/s mands.
+/-
[007.50 %/s]

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Operation Modes > Operation Modes: General
4.4.5 Configure Operation Modes

4.4.5.1 Operation Modes: General
Priority of operation modes

The priority of operation modes is well defined from
highest to lowest priority:
– “STOP” is higher than
– “MANUAL” is higher than
– “AUTOMATIC” is higher than
– “TEST”

[Default]
1795 Startup in mode 2 If the controller is powered down, the unit will start in the following configured
mode when it is powered up again.
(Operating
mode after [STOP] The unit starts in the STOP operating mode.
applying the
power supply ) AUTO The unit starts in the AUTOMATIC operating mode.
MAN The unit starts in the MANUAL operating mode.
Last The unit starts in the last operating mode the control was in prior to being de-
energized.
TEST The unit starts in the TEST operating mode.
Notes
For the selection of the operating mode via the LogicsManager (if two dif‐
ferent operating modes have been selected simultaneously) the control unit
will prioritize the modes as follows:
n 1. STOP
n 2. MANUAL
n 3. AUTOMATIC
n 4. TEST
12510 Operat. mode 2 WARNING! In Operation mode AUTO (intentionally):

AUTO
n the STOP button on front panel is without function and
(Activate oper‐
ating mode n the soft buttons for operation mode selection are not displayed.
AUTOMATIC )
Notes
If both Operation mode AUTO and 12120 Ä p. 340/Ä p. 1035 Start req in
AUTO are active the generator will start automatically with acknowledgment
of the latest failure.
Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the unit will
LogicsManager change into operating mode AUTOMATIC.
86.16
Notes
[(0 & 1) & 1]
12520 Operat. mode 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the unit will
MAN LogicsManager change into operating mode MANUAL.
86.17
(Activate oper‐ If MANUAL mode is selected via the LogicsManager it is not possible to
ating mode [(0 & 1) & 1] change operating modes via the front panel.
MANUAL)
= 10716 Notes

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Operation Modes > Operation Mode AUTO - Auto...

[Default]
STOP LogicsManager change into operating mode STOP.
86.18
(Activate oper‐ If STOP mode is selected via the LogicsManager it is not possible to change
ating mode [(0 & 1) & 1] operating modes via the front panel.
STOP)
= 10717 Notes
TEST LogicsManager change into operating mode TEST.
86.29
(Activate oper‐ If TEST mode is selected via the LogicsManager it is not possible to change
ating mode [(0 & 1) & 1] operating modes via the front panel.
TEST)
= 12272 Notes
4.4.5.2 Operation Mode AUTO - Automatic Run

General notes The start of the engine can be performed via the following different
logical conditions.
n A discrete input
n A temperature level
n An interface start condition
n A start request from the LDSS function
n A timer
n Any logical combination
If this logical output becomes TRUE in AUTOMATIC operating
mode, the generator starts and the GCB will be closed. The simul‐
taneous activation of other LogicsManager outputs (e.g. Stop req.
in Auto) may affect this function.
The breaker handling depends on the configured application mode
and breaker logic.
Refer to Fig. 195 and Ä Chapter 9.3.4 “Logical

Outputs” on page 1027 for the priority of the logical
outputs in case that more than one logical output is
TRUE.

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Operation Modes > Operation Mode AUTO - Auto...
Engine start conditions
Fig. 195: Automatic run - engine start conditions

[Default]
12120 Start req. in 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the control
AUTO LogicsManager issues a start request in AUTOMATIC mode.
86.09
(Start request in Notes
operation mode [(09.02 Discrete
AUTOMATIC) input OR 0) OR For information on the LogicsManager and its default settings see Ä Chapter
04.13 Remote 9.3.1 “LogicsManager Overview” on page 986.
request]
≥1: math. "OR"
= 10708
12190 Stop req. in 2 Determined by If this logical output becomes TRUE, it inhibits all other start processes (e.g.
AUTO LogicsManager Start req. in Auto, emergency power, etc.). Stopping of the engine can be initi‐
86.10 ated externally via a discrete input or any logical combination.
(Stop request in
operation mode [(0 & 1) & 1] Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the control
AUTOMATIC) issues a stop request in AUTOMATIC mode.
= 10709
Notes
It is possible to interrupt an already activated emergency run.
12540 Start w/o load 2 Determined by If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE switching from mains to generator
LogicsManager supply following an engine start is prevented (the GCB close operation is
(Start without 86.19 blocked).
assuming load )
[(0 & 1) & 1] This function may be used to perform a test operation. If an emergency power
case occurs meanwhile, it is still possible to change to generator operation.
= 10718
If this condition becomes TRUE in islanded operation, the GCB cannot be
opened before the MCB has been closed.
Notes

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Operation Modes > Operation Mode TEST
4.4.5.3 Operation Mode TEST

Operation mode TEST gives the opportunity to test the genset. It
can be activated via HMI button “TEST” or parameter 4672 “Test
run mode” .
Fig. 196: TEST button When the Test Run is time restricted:
– The remaining time is displayed on HMI.
– The device can change its operating mode
after execution of the TEST mode.
In TEST mode the breakers are operated like in

the application mode configured. The handling in
the setpoint screen is be the same like in the
AUTOMATIC mode.
Emergency run (AMF) and sprinkler run -- if config‐
ured -- both are fully supported.

[Default]
4672 TEST run mode 2 [No load w/o With enabling the operation mode TEST, the engine starts automatically. The
time] GCB remains open.
OFF It is not possible to enable the operation mode TEST.
No load w. time With enabling the operation mode TEST, the engine starts automatically. The
GCB remains open. After a configurable time (4679 Ä p. 341), the device
switches to the operation mode configured with parameter 4680 Ä p. 341
“Operation mode after TEST” .
Load w/o time With enabling the operation mode TEST, the engine starts automatically. The
GCB will be closed according to the configured “Breaker transition mode”
(3411 Ä p. 252).
If mains parallel operation is configured, the current active and reactive power
setpoint is controlled.
Load with time With enabling the operation mode TEST, the engine starts automatically. The
GCB will be closed according to the configured “Breaker transition mode”
(3411 Ä p. 252).
If mains parallel operation is configured, the current active and reactive power
setpoint is controlled. After a configurable time (4679 Ä p. 341), the device
switches to the operation mode configured with parameter 4680 Ä p. 341
“Operation mode after TEST” .
Breaker access With enabling the operation mode TEST, the engine starts automatically.
From there on the breakers can be operated manually according to the con‐
figured „Breaker transition mode“ (3411 Ä p. 252).
Notes
In breaker transition mode “parallel” the MCB open and close commands are
not supported.
4679 TEST mode 2 [60 s] This is the time duration for the time restricted TEST mode.
time restriction
0..9999 s
4680 Operation mode 2 This is the operation mode, on which the genset control changes after the
after TEST time restricted TEST run.
After the TEST run ...

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Operation Modes > Critical Mode

[Default]
[STOP] ... the genset control switches back to the STOP operation mode.
Last ... the genset control switches back to the latest operation mode.
MAN ... the genset control switches back to the MANUAL operation mode.
AUTO ... the genset control switches back to the AUTOMATIC operation mode.
Control in TEST mode is application specific:
Breaker Transition Symbol Available functionality in TEST mode

Mode
Parallel n The MCB is not active

n With the GCB button the load test can be
started and interrupted
n If the GCB trips the load test is interrupted
Interchange n With the GCB button and the MCB button the
load test can be started and interrupted
n The load transfer is similar to the AUTO‐
MATIC mode
and the MCB will be closed if the condition
matches:
– Release MCB
– Mains okay
(similar to the closing in AUTOMATIC mode)
Closed transition / n With the GCB button and the MCB button the
Open transition load test can be started and interrupted
and the MCB will be closed if the condition
matches:
– Release MCB
– Mains okay
(similar to the closing in AUTOMATIC mode)
External n The MCB button isn't active

n With the GCB button the load test can be
started and interrupted
n Only the GCB open logic is active similar to
AUTOMATIC mode
4.4.5.4 Critical Mode

The critical mode may be used to operate a fire engine pump or
any other critical operation which does not allow a shutdown of the
genset under any alarm conditions.
The LogicsManager is used to define the conditions that will enable
the critical mode like a discrete input (for conditions and explana‐
tion of programming refer to Ä Chapter 9.3.1 “LogicsManager
Overview” on page 986).

Configuration
Alarm classes When critical mode is enabled the alarm classes are reclassified as
follows:
Alarm classes
Normal operation A B C D E F
Critical mode A B B B B B
During the postrun time all shutdown alarms become active again.
Critical mode "On" A critical mode will be initiated/started once the critical mode oper‐
ation LogicsManager output becomes TRUE (logic "1"). The "Crit‐
ical mode" message is displayed on the display screen. If the
engine is not already running, the controller will attempt to start the
engine as configured (parameter 4102 Ä p. 194). All shutdown
alarms become warning messages (see above).
Critical mode "Off" A critical mode will be interrupted/stopped once critical mode oper‐
ation LogicsManager output becomes FALSE (logic "0") and the
postrun time has expired. During the postrun time all shutdown
alarms become active again.
If the operation mode changes to STOP, the postrun time will still
be performed.
Refer to Ä Chapter 9.3.4 “Logical Outputs”

on page 1027 for more information about the priori‐
ties of the logical outputs.
4.4.5.4.1 Critical Operation At Busbar

The fire engine pump mentioned before or other critical operation
is connected to the busbar, i.e. it requires a closed GCB to be sup‐
plied by the generator during critical operation.
Parameter 4100 Ä p. 348 (Close GCB in critical mode) should be
configured to "Yes" and an external provision for load reduction
should be provided. This ensures the pump operation of a sprinkler
system.
Application and breaker transition mode remain as

configured.
A mains parallel operation is possible.

Configuration
The GCB will not be closed if the load is supplied

by the mains until the mains fail and the MCB
remains closed because emergency run (param‐
eter 2802 Ä p. 365) is disabled.
Fig. 197: Critical operation at busbar
Critical mode during mains supply If critical mode is enabled during mains supply (MCB is closed), the
generator will be started (if not already running) and the GCB will
be closed.
n The "Critical mode" message is displayed on the display
screen. All shutdown alarms become warning messages.
n If critical mode is disabled again, all shutdown alarms become
active again.
If the genset was not running before critical mode has been ena‐
bled, it will be stopped after the critical mode postrun time (param‐
eter 4102 Ä p. 194) has expired. MCB operation will be performed
according to the configured transition mode.
Emergency power during critical mode If there is a mains failure during critical mode, the "Emerg/Critical"
message is displayed on the display screen after the mains fail
delay time (parameter 2800 Ä p. 365) has expired.
All shutdown alarms become warning messages.
n Critical mode ends before mains recovery:
– The emergency power operation will be continued and all
shutdown alarms become active again.
– If the mains returns, the unit transfers the load from gener‐
ator supply to mains supply after the mains settling delay
expires.
n Emergency power operation ends before the end of the critical
mode:
– The critical mode is maintained and the load is transferred
from generator supply to mains supply after the mains set‐
tling delay expires.
– If open transition mode is configured, the GCB will not be
opened to prevent a dead busbar.
– The engine remains running until the conditions for the crit‐
ical mode are no longer existent.
– If the genset was not running before critical mode has been
enabled, it will be stopped after cool down time (param‐
eter 3316 Ä p. 195) has expired.
– The GCB will take the same state as it had before the crit‐
ical mode has been enabled.
Critical mode during emergency An emergency power operation is active (load is supplied by the
power generator, GCB is closed, MCB is open). If critical mode is enabled
now, the GCB remains closed and the "Emerg/Critical" message is
displayed on the display screen. All shutdown alarms become
warning messages.

Configuration

– If the mains return, the unit transfers the load from gener‐
expires, if Enable MCB (parameter 12923 Ä p. 263/
Ä p. 1038) has been enabled.
mode:
– The engine remains running until the conditions for the crit‐
ical mode are no longer existent.
Start request during critical mode The critical mode operation has a higher priority than the remote
request (Start/Stop request in AUTO). Therefore, the remote
request cannot start or stop the engine and has no effect on the
breaker positions. The "Critical mode" message is displayed on the
display screen and all shutdown alarms become warning alarms.
n Critical mode ends before the start request is terminated:
– The engine continues running. All shutdown alarms will
become active again.
– By resetting the start request the GCB will be opened and
the engine will be stopped.
n Start request will be terminated before the critical mode is ter‐
minated:
– The critical mode operation is continued.
– The engine keeps running until the conditions for the critical
mode are no longer fulfilled and all shutdown alarms will
4.4.5.4.2 Critical Operation At The Generator

The fire engine pump mentioned before or other critical operation
is connected to the generator, i.e. it does not require a closed GCB
to be supplied by the generator during critical operation.
Parameter 4100 Ä p. 348 (Close GCB in critical mode) should be
configured to "No". This ensures an open GCB during critical
mode. A closed GCB is possible in case of an emergency opera‐
tion.

Configuration
Fig. 198: Critical operation at the gen‐

erator
Critical mode during mains supply If critical mode is enabled during mains supply (MCB is closed), the
generator will be started (if not already running) and operated with
open GCB. The "Critical mode" message is displayed on the dis‐
play screen. All shutdown alarms become warning messages.
If critical mode is disabled again, all shutdown alarms become
active again. If the genset was not running before critical mode has
been enabled, it will be stopped after the critical mode postrun time
(parameter 4102 Ä p. 194) has expired.
Emergency power during critical mode If there is a mains failure during critical mode, the MCB will be
opened after the mains fail delay time (parameter 2800 Ä p. 365)
has expired and the GCB will be closed. It is not necessary to con‐
figure parameter 4101 Ä p. 366 (Break emerg. in critical mode)
because the critical operation is already supplied. The "Emerg/Crit‐
ical" message is displayed on the display screen and all shutdown
alarms become warning messages.
– If the mains returns, the unit transfers the load from gener‐
expires.
mode:
– The GCB will be opened without unloading (transition mode
interchange or parallel).
– All shutdown alarms become active again.
Critical mode during emergency An emergency power operation is active (load is supplied by the
power generator, GCB is closed, MCB is open). If critical mode is enabled
now, the GCB will be opened dependent on the setting of the
parameter 4101 Ä p. 366 (Break emerg. in critical mode) and a
closure of the GCB is prevented for this time. The "Emerg/Critical"
message is displayed on the display screen and all shutdown
alarms become warning messages.

Configuration

– If the mains return, the unit transfers the load from gener‐
expires.
mode:
– The GCB will be opened without unloading (transition mode
interchange or parallel).
– All shutdown alarms become active again.
Start request during critical mode The critical mode operation has a higher priority than the remote
request (Start/Stop request in AUTO). Therefore, the remote
request cannot start or stop the engine and has no effect on the
breaker positions. The "Critical mode" message is displayed on the
display screen and all shutdown alarms become warning alarms.
– The engine continues running and a change to generator or
parallel operation is performed.
– All shutdown alarms will become active again.
minated:
– The critical mode operation is continued. The engine keeps
running until the conditions for the critical mode are no
longer fulfilled and all shutdown alarms will become active
again.
– The GCB will take on the same state as it has before the
critical mode has been enabled.
Critical mode during start request The generator supplies the load and the GCB is closed. If critical
mode is enabled, the MCB will be operated according to the config‐
ured transition mode (parameter 3411 Ä p. 252). The GCB will be
opened without unloading (transition mode interchange or parallel).
The "Critical mode" message is displayed on the display screen
and all shutdown alarms become warning alarms.

Configuration
Configure Application > Configure Operation Modes > Load Dependent Start/Stop ...

– The engine continues running and a change to generator or
parallel operation is performed.
– All shutdown alarms will become active again.
minated:
– The critical mode operation is continued.
– The engine keeps running until the conditions for the critical
mode are no longer fulfilled and all shutdown alarms will
Critical mode during islanded opera‐ The busbar is supplied by the generator and emergency run
tion (parameter 2802 Ä p. 365) is disabled. If the critical mode is ena‐
bled, the GCB will be opened although the MCB is not enabled.
This will cause a dead busbar.
4.4.5.4.3 Parameters
[Default]
12220 Critical mode 2 Determined by If this logical output becomes TRUE in AUTOMATIC operating mode, it starts
LogicsManager the critical mode.
86.28
Notes
[(0 & !05.08
Start fail) & ! For information on the LogicsManager and its default settings see Ä Chapter
09.01 DI01] 9.3.1 “LogicsManager Overview” on page 986.
= 11607
4109 Critical mode 2 0 to 6000 s The critical mode operation is continued for the time configured here after the
postrun critical mode request has been terminated.
[600 s]
The message "Cool down" is displayed and the LogicsManager command
variable 04.10 becomes TRUE.
4100 Close GCB in 2 Yes If a critical mode operation is detected the GCB will close.
critical mode
[No] The GCB cannot be closed during a critical mode operation.
Notes
This parameter only applies to application mode to .
4105 Critical mode 2 Yes The critical mode alarm classes will override the normal operation alarm
alarm class classes when in MANUAL operation mode so alarm classes become
MAN restricted to WARNING level - NO engine shut down. LogicsManager output
12220 Ä p. 348/Ä p. 1035 becomes TRUE.
(Critical mode
alarm classes [No] The alarm classes will not be changed in the MANUAL operating mode e.g.
active in engine shut down is possible!
MANUAL oper‐
ating mode )
4.4.5.5 Load Dependent Start/Stop (LDSS)

General notes Load-dependent start/stop may either be performed according to a
system reserve power or the generator load depending on the con‐
figuration of the "Start stop mode" (parameter 5752 Ä p. 353).

Configuration
Refer to Ä Chapter 9.6.1 “Load Dependent Start

Stop (LDSS) Formulas” on page 1093 for all for‐
mulas related to the LDSS function.
4.4.5.5.1 Generator Load

If the "Start stop mode" (parameter 5752 Ä p. 353) is configured to
“Generator load” , load-dependent start stop is performed in a way
that the next genset will be started if all gensets in operation reach
the maximum generator load (parameter 5762 Ä p. 357 or
5770 Ä p. 360 "IOP/MOP Max. generator load"), a configured per‐
centage (e.g. 80%) of the rated power. In order to stop one gener‐
ator, the load of all gensets in operation must fall below the min‐
imum generator load (parameter 5763 Ä p. 357 or 5771 Ä p. 360
"IOP/MOP Min. generator load"), a configured percentage (e.g.
30%) of the rated power. There are different setpoints for islanded
and mains parallel operation.
The LDSS algorithm acting on “Generator load” offers different
dynamic levels:
n With higher dynamic the efficiency can be increased, but the
change of generators becomes more frequent.
n With lower dynamic the efficiency can be lower for the first
couple of engines, but overall the change of generators
becomes less frequent.
Three levels of Dynamic High:

n After removing of generator rated power the new generator
load level shall not lay higher than 75% within the Add-on /
Add-off band.
Moderate:
load level shall not lay over 50% within the Add-on / Add-off
band.
Low:
load level shall not lay over 25% within the Add-on / Add-off
band
An additional dynamic parameter (parameter 5757 Ä p. 357 or
5758 Ä p. 360 "IOP/MOP Dynamic") with levels "Low", Moderate",
and "High" prevents the gensets from being started and stopped
continuously if only a few gensets are in operation.
This function provides an easy calculation for the start of the next
genset.
– Refer to the description of the dynamic param‐

eters for detailed information.
The following parameters need to configured for this operation:

Configuration
Parameter ID Parameter text Note
5757 IOP Dynamic only for islanded opera‐

tion
5758 MOP Dynamic only for mains parallel

operation
5767 MOP Minimum load only for mains parallel

operation
5769 MOP Hysteresis only for mains parallel

operation
5770 MOP Max. generator only for mains parallel

load operation
Table 87: Load-dependent start/stop - parameters for generator

load operation
Islanded operation (IOP) If the configured maximum generator capacity utilization is

exceeded, another genset will be added.
n PGNreal active > Pmax. load islanded
If the configured minimum generator capacity utilization has been
fallen below, a genset will be stopped depending on the dynamic
setting (parameter 5757 Ä p. 357).
n PGN real active < Pmin. load islanded
Mains parallel operation (MOP) If the required generator load setpoint for the control at the mains
interchange point exceeds the MOP minimum load threshold
(parameter 5767 Ä p. 359), the first genset will be added.
n PMNsetpoint – PMNreal > PMOPminimum
If at least one genset is supplying the load in parallel with the
mains and the total generator load exceeds the MOP maximum
generator load threshold (parameter 5770 Ä p. 360), another
genset will be added.
n PGNreal active > Pmax. load parallel
If at least two gensets are supplying the load in parallel with the
mains and the configured minimum generator capacity utilization
has been fallen below, a genset will be stopped depending on the
dynamic setting (parameter 5758 Ä p. 360)
n PGNreal active < Pmin. load parallel
If one genset is supplying the load in parallel with the mains and
the generator load exceeds the MOP minimum load threshold
(parameter 5767 Ä p. 359) minus the hysteresis (param‐
eter 5769 Ä p. 359), the genset will be stopped.
The hysteresis is intended to prevent frequent starting and stop‐
ping of gensets in case of small load variations.
n PMNsetpoint – PMNreal + PGN real active < PMOP minimum – Physteresis
MOP

Configuration
4.4.5.5.2 System Reserve Power

If the "Start stop mode" (parameter 5752 Ä p. 353) is configured to
"Reserve power", load-dependent start stop is performed in a way
that a configured minimum reserve power is maintained in the
system. This means that there is always enough reserve power for
load swings on the busbar regardless of the generator load. The
actual reserve power in the system is the total rated power of all
gensets on the busbar minus the actual total generator real power.
This functionality provides high system reliability and is intended
for applications that require a dedicated reserve power on the
busbar, independent of the number of gensets on the busbar.
The following parameters need to configured for this operation:
Parameter ID Parameter text Note
5760 IOP Reserve power only for islanded opera‐

tion
5761 IOP Hysteresis only for islanded opera‐

tion
5767 MOP Minimum load only for mains parallel

operation
5768 MOP Reserve power only for mains parallel

operation
5769 MOP Hysteresis only for mains parallel

operation
Table 88: Load-dependent start/stop - parameters for reserve

power operation
Islanded operation (IOP) n PReserve = Prated active – P GN real active

n Prated active = PRatedGen[1] + PRatedGen [2] + … + PRatedGen [n]
(total rated power of all gensets on the busbar in the system)
n P GN real active = PActualGen [1] + PActualGen [2] + … + PActualGen [n]
(total actual load of all gensets on the busbar in the system)
If the reserve power falls below the IOP reserve power threshold
(parameter 5760 Ä p. 356), another genset will be added.
n PReserve < PReserve IOP
If the reserve power exceeds the IOP reserve power threshold
(parameter 5760 Ä p. 356) plus the hysteresis (param‐
eter 5761 Ä p. 356) plus the rated load of the genset, the genset
will be stopped.
n Preserve > Preserve islanded IOP + Physteresis IOP + PRatedGen
Mains parallel operation (MOP) n Preserve = Prated active – PGN real active
n Prated active = PRatedGen [1] + PRatedGen [2] + … + PRatedGen [n]
(total rated power of all gensets on the busbar in the system)
n PGN real active = PActualGen [1] + PActualGen [2] + … + PActualGen [n]
(total actual load of all gensets on the busbar in the system)

Configuration
If the required generator load setpoint for the control at the mains
interchange point exceeds the MOP minimum load threshold
(parameter 5767 Ä p. 359), the first genset will be added.
n PMN setpoint – PMN real > PMOP minimum
If at least one genset is supplying the load in parallel with the
mains and the reserve power falls below the reserve power
threshold (parameter 5768 Ä p. 359), another genset will be
added.
n Preserve < Preserve parallel
If at least two gensets are supplying the load in parallel with the
mains and the reserve power exceeds the MOP reserve power
threshold (parameter 5768 Ä p. 359) plus the hysteresis (param‐
eter 5769 Ä p. 359) plus the rated load of the genset, the genset
will be stopped.
n Preserve > Preserve parallel + Physteresis MOP + PRatedGen
If one genset is supplying the load in parallel with the mains and
the generator load exceeds the MOP minimum load threshold
(parameter 5767 Ä p. 359) minus the hysteresis (param‐
eter 5769 Ä p. 359), the genset will be stopped.
n PMN setpoint – PMN real + PGN real active < PMOP minimum – Physteresis MOP
4.4.5.5.3 Generator Selection

General notes If a genset is to be started, the genset with the highest priority con‐
figured will be started. If a genset is to be stopped, the genset with
the lowest priority configured will be stopped.
If all gensets have the same priority, the next genset is selected
according to the size of engine, i.e. the genset combination, which
allows an optimum efficiency will be used.
If all gensets have the same rated load or this parameter is disa‐
bled, the remaining hours until the next maintenance are consid‐
ered. If these are also the same, the genset with the lowest gener‐
ator number will be started first or stopped last.
Priority order:
n 1. Priority (parameter 5751 Ä p. 353)
n 2. Efficiency (size of engines) (parameter 5754 Ä p. 354)
n 3. Service hours (parameter 5755 Ä p. 354)
n 4. Generator (device) number (parameter 1702 Ä p. 181)
The load-dependent start/stop function requires the following con‐
ditions have been met:
n The control has been placed in AUTOMATIC operating mode
n A start request (Start req. in AUTO, Emergency run) is active
n All LDSS parameters are configured identically for all members
at the load share line ( Ä Chapter 4.5.6.14 “Multi-Unit Param‐
eter Alignment” on page 483)

Configuration
n The mains interchange load control (import/export power) has

been enabled or the gensets are in islanded operation
n The conditions of the LogicsManager function "Load-
dependent start/stop" have been fulfilled

[Default]
12930 LD start stop 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the load-
LogicsManager dependent start/stop function is enabled.
(Load- 86.86
dependent start Notes
stop) [(0 & 1) & 1]
5752 Start stop mode 2 [Reserve power] Load-dependent start stop is performed in a way that a configured minimum
reserve power is maintained in the system. The reserve power is the total
generator rated power minus the total actual generator power.
If the reserve power falls below the threshold, another genset will be started.
If the reserve power is sufficient to stop one genset without falling below the
threshold, a genset will be stopped.
Generator load Load-dependent start stop is performed in a way that a configured maximum
generator capacity utilization is not exceeded.
If the generator capacity utilization exceeds this threshold, another genset will
be started. If the generator capacity utilization is low enough to stop one
genset without exceeding the threshold again, a genset will be stopped.
5753 Dead busbar 2 [All] All available gensets will be started in case of a dead busbar and remain con‐
start mode nected to the busbar for the minimum running time (param‐
eter 5759 Ä p. 355). Then the gensets will be stopped according to the con‐
figured LDSS procedure. The start delay is configured in
parameter 2800 Ä p. 365 (Mains fail delay time).
LDSS The start of the gensets will be performed according to the configured LDSS
priority in case of a dead busbar.
Notes
This function cannot be used as an emergency power function in mains par‐
allel operations because it cannot control the MCB operation.
If the MCB should be operated, the emergency run function (parameter
2802 Ä p. 365) must be enabled.
5751 Base priority 2 1 to 32 The priority of the genset in the load-dependent start/stop network is config‐
ured with this parameter ( Ä Chapter 4.4.5.5.3 “Generator Selection”
[5] on page 352). The lower the number configured here, the higher the priority.
This priority may be overridden by the LDSS Priority parameters (parameters
12924 Ä p. 353/Ä p. 1038, 12925 Ä p. 353/Ä p. 1038, and 12926 Ä p. 353/
Ä p. 1038).
12926 LDSS Priority 2 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the load-
LogicsManager dependent start/stop priority will be set to 2 (the highest priority is valid).
86.90
Notes
[(0 & 1) & 1]
86.91
Notes
[(0 & 1) & 1]
86.92
Notes
[(0 & 1) & 1]

Configuration

[Default]
5754 Fit size of 2 This parameter defines whether the start/stop priority order ( Ä Chapter
engine 4.4.5.5.3 “Generator Selection” on page 352) considers the size of the engine
(generator rated power) or not. In case of different sized gensets, the control
can start a genset combination which results in optimum efficiency.
The fuel efficiency may be optimized when this parameter is enabled. This
parameter may be disabled if all generators have the same size.
Notes
The algorithm prefers one large engine instead of multiple small engines,
even if this does not match the best possible efficiency.
If an engine selection yields a condition, in which multiple small engines with
its rated power cover exactly the rated power of an possible bigger engine,
the bigger engine is preferred
Yes The priority order considers the engine size for the start of the next engine for
gensets with the same priority.
[No] The priority order does not consider the rated power of the engines to fit the
best size of engines.
5755 Fit service hours 2 With this parameter the LDSS function can be configured to start and stop
redundant engines according to their engine running hours with different
methods.
[Off] The engine running hours are not considered when evaluating the engines to
be started for gensets with same priority. The parameter 5756 Ä p. 354
“Changes of engines” has no influence and can be ignored.
Staggered The remaining hours until the next service is required are considered when
evaluating the engines to be started for gensets with same priority. The gen‐
sets are utilized in a way that the maintenance may be performed at different
times to ensure that not all gensets have a downtime due to a maintenance at
the same time. The genset with the lowest hours until the next service will be
started first.
Notes
To run this functionality properly the maintenance call must be acknowledged
accordingly.
Equal The remaining hours until the next service is required are considered when
sets are utilized in a way that the maintenance may be performed at the same
time for all gensets. The genset with the highest hours until the next service
will be started first.
Notes
To run this functionality properly the maintenance call must be acknowledged
accordingly.
Period of use The “period of use hours” (parameters 15723 Ä p. 1058) are considered when
sets are utilized in a way that the period of use hours are equalized over time
for all participating gensets. The genset with the lowest period of use hours
will be started first.
5756 Changes of 2 Load dependent start stop: Changes of engine

engine
With setting "Off" no time slot is considered and the change of engine is
related directly on the passed engine hours. With a configured time slot
(32/64/128 h) a minimum of passed engine running hours is taken into
account before changing the gensets.
If LDSS is configured to act on best possible equal maintenance hours or
"period of use" hours, the change of engines can be determined by given time
slots. The LDSS therefore creates an individual unit’s time group for each
engine. Refer to manual chapter “Engine time groups” for more details.
Notes
If the LDSS function “Fit service hours” (parameter 5755 Ä p. 354) is ena‐
bled with "Equal" or "Period of use" hours, this configuration gets valid. Other‐
wise this parameter can be ignored.
For more details go to chapter Ä Chapter 9.4.1.10 “Group 11: Engine Values”
on page 1058.

Configuration

[Default]
[Off] No engine change will be performed. The engines are selected according to
the setting of parameter 5755 Ä p. 354 (Fit service hours) with 1 hour spacing
in case of load changes.
All 32/64/128 h All relevant engines are changed with a 32/64/128 hour spacing.
Example 1
n "Changes of engines" is configured to "All 64h"

n Generator 1 has 262 maintenance hours remaining
n The time group for generator 1 is calculated as: 262h/64h = 4.09 = Time
group 4
group 4
n Both generators are in time group 4.
Time group 4 consists of any generator that the time group calculation
total ranges from 4.00 through 4.99.
In this instance the assigned generator number is used to determine which
generator is brought online. Generator 1 will be started.
Example 2
n "Changes of engines" is configured to "All 64h"

group 4
group 5
group 4
n Generators 1 and 3 are in time group 4.
n Time group 4 consists of any generator that the time group calculation
n Generator 2 is in time group 5.
n Time group 5 consists of any generator that the time group calculation
In this instance the largest time group will determine which generator is
brought online. Generator 2 will be started because it is in time group 5.
5777 LDSS sort pri‐ 2 On The priority is considered in each moment.

ority always
The priority will be changed depending on priority input and running hours
even with constant load.
Notes
This parameter is only effective if [Start stop mode] (parameter
5752 Ä p. 353) is configured to [Reserve power].
This feature can cause more start and stop sequences, even there is only one
additional generator brought into the LDSS system.
[Off] The priority is depending on priority input and running hours but only consid‐
ered, if the nominal power in the system changes. The nominal power
changes when another generator is to stop or to start anyway.
Notes
This setting causes less generator changes and brings more calmness in the
system.
5759 Minimum run‐ 2 0 to 32000 s If a genset has been started by the LDSS function, it continues to operate at
ning time least for this time even if it would have been stopped before.
[180 s]
This timer is started with the closure of the GCB. If an emergency run is
active ( Ä Chapter 4.4.6 “Emergency Run” on page 364) and the mains
return, this timer will be overridden and the load is transferred back to the
mains after the mains settling time (parameter 2801 Ä p. 417) has expired.

Configuration
4.4.5.5.4 Islanded Parallel Operation (IOP)

General notes In case of an islanded parallel operation (MCB open), the first
genset will be connected to the de-energized busbar.
At least one genset must be in operation in

islanded operation.
There are dedicated LDSS parameters for islanded parallel opera‐

tion because the supply of the load is important here.

[Default]
5760 IOP Reserve 2 1 to 999999 kW The value configured for the reserve power determines when an additional
power generator will be started. The reserve power is the desired spinning reserve
[100 kW] of a generator or generators. The reserve power is usually estimated as the
largest load swing that a power plant may encounter during the time it takes
to bring an additional generator online.
The available generator power is calculated by adding up the generator real
power ratings of all generators with closed GCBs. The reserve generator
power is calculated by subtracting the power currently being produced by all
generators with closed GCBs from the total available generator power.
If the actual reserve power of the generators is less than the value configured
in this parameter, the next generator will be started.
Currently available total generator rated real power
‒ Currently available total generator actual real power
= Reserve power
Notes
This parameter is only effective if start stop mode (parameter 5752 Ä p. 353)
is configured to "Reserve power".
5648 IOP Reserve 2 1 to 999999 kW The value configured for the reserve power determines when an additional
power 2 generator will be started. The reserve power is the desired spinning reserve
[200 kW] of a generator or generators. The reserve power is usually estimated as the
largest load swing that a power plant may encounter during the time it takes
to bring an additional generator online.
The available generator power is calculated by adding up the generator real
power ratings of all generators with closed GCBs. The reserve generator
power is calculated by subtracting the power currently being produced by all
generators with closed GCBs from the total available generator power.
If the actual reserve power of the generators is less than the value configured
in this parameter, the next generator will be started.
Currently available total generator rated real power
‒ Currently available total generator actual real power
= Reserve power
Notes
12604 IOP Reserve 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the 'IOP
power 2 LogicsManager Reseve power 2' (parameter 5648 Ä p. 356) is used instead of the 'IOP
86.41 Reseve power' (parameter 5760 Ä p. 356).
[(0 & 1) & 1] Notes
5761 IOP Hysteresis 2 1 to 65000 kW If the reserve power is sufficient to stop one genset without falling below the
threshold and the hysteresis configured here, a genset will be stopped.
[20 kW]

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
5762 IOP Max. gener‐ 2 0 to 100% If the generator load exceeds the threshold configured here, the load-
ator load dependent start/stop function will start another genset.
[70%]
Notes
is configured to "Generator load".
The maximum generator load must be configured higher then the minimum
generator load for proper operation.
5763 IOP Min. gener‐ 2 0 to 100% If the generator load falls below the threshold configured here, the load-
ator load dependent start/stop function will stop a genset. If only a few gensets are
[30%] operating in a multi-genset application, the IOP Dynamic (param‐
eter 5757 Ä p. 357) will also be considered when stopping a genset.
Notes
5757 IOP Dynamic 2 The dynamic determines when to start or stop the next genset and shows the
following behavior:
Starting genset
The control requests a certain amount of additional load depending on the
dynamic. It may start two or more gensets to supply the required load. Also
refer to the following example.
Stopping genset
The dynamic determines how soon a genset will be stopped. It prevents con‐
tinuous start and stop if only a few gensets are in operation. In this case, the
remaining gensets would not reach the maximum limit if one genset stops (if,
for example, two gensets with 100 kW rated load, a minimum load of 40 %
and a maximum load of 70 % are operated, the second genset will be shut
down if both reach 40 kW and the remaining engine would operate with
80 kW and request the next engine and so on). The more gensets are run‐
ning, the less the influence of this parameter. Also refer to the following
example.
[Low] Starting genset

A larger genset is requested and it will take longer until the next change is
required. The engines are operated with more reserve power. The requested
load is calculated so that the gensets will be loaded with 25 % of the range
between minimum and maximum generator load (parameters 5762 Ä p. 357
& 5763 Ä p. 357) after the new genset has been started.
Stopping genset
The genset will shut down at a lower limit and be operated longer. The
number of gensets in operation will remain constant for a wider range of load.
The load on the remaining gensets must not exceed 25 % of the range
& 5763 Ä p. 357).
Moderate Starting genset

A medium genset is requested. The requested load is calaculated so that the
gensets will be loaded with 50 % of the range between minimum and max‐
imum generator load (parameters 5762 Ä p. 357 & 5763 Ä p. 357) after the
new genset has been started.
Stopping genset
& 5763 Ä p. 357).

Configuration

[Default]
High Starting genset

A smaller genset is requested to operate the engines with higher efficiency.
This may lead to more frequent starts and stops. The requested load is cala‐
culated so that the gensets will be loaded with 75 % of the range between
minimum and maximum generator load (parameters 5762 Ä p. 357 &
5763 Ä p. 357) after the new genset has been started.
Stopping genset
The genset will be shut down earlier. This may lead to more frequent starts
and stops. The load on the remaining gensets must not exceed 75 % of the
range between minimum and maximum generator load (parameters
5762 Ä p. 357 & 5763 Ä p. 357).
Notes
Example (Starting genset)

A plant made up of several gensets with a rated power of 50, 100, and
200 kW is configured to a maximum generator load of 70 % and a minimum
generator load of 40 %. One genset with 200 kW is running and the actual
load reaches 140 kW. This is the 70 % maximum load limit of the running
genset and requires the start of the next genset.
n Low: a total generator rated power of 294.7 kW is requested and a

100 kW genset will be started.
n Moderate: a total generator rated power of 254.5 kW is requested and a
n High: a total generator rated power of 224.0 kW is requested and a
Refer to Ä Chapter 9.6.1 “Load Dependent Start Stop (LDSS) Formulas”
on page 1093 for details about the formulas used for calculation.
Example (Stopping genset)
Two gensets with the same rated power are configured to a maximum gener‐
ator load of 70 % and a minimum generator load of 40 %.
The following example shows the load level before stopping the second
genset and the resulting load level for the first genset depending on the
dynamic setting.
n Low:
Load level before stopping: 23.75%
Resulting load level for remaining engine:
47.5% (25% of the difference between 70 and 40%)
n Moderate:
55% (50% of the difference between 70 and 40%)
n High:
62.5% (75% of the difference between 70 and 40%)
5764 IOP Add on 2 0 to 32000 s Load swings may exceed the threshold momentarily. In order to prevent the
delay engine from starting due to short-term load swings, a delay time may be con‐
[10 s] figured.
The LDSS criterion for adding load must be exceeded without interruption for
this delay time, configured in seconds, prior to a start command being issued.
If the LDSS criterion for adding load is fallen below before the delay time
expires, the delay time is reset and a start command is not issued.
5765 IOP Add on 2 0 to 32000 s The command to start the next genset in case a genset exceeds rated load
delay at rated will be issued after the delay configured here has expired.
load [3 s]

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
This parameter becomes only effective in case a genset exceeds rated load
to achieve a faster start and overrides parameter 5764 Ä p. 358.
5766 IOP Add off 2 0 to 32000 s Load swings may fall below the threshold momentarily. In order to prevent the
delay engine from stopping due to short-term load swings, a delay time may be con‐
[60 s] figured.
The load must remain below the hysteresis setpoint without interruption for
the delay time, configured in seconds, prior to a stop command being issued.
If the load exceeds the hysteresis setpoint before the delay time expires, the
delay time is reset and a stop command is not issued.
4.4.5.5.5 Mains Parallel Operation

General notes In case of a mains parallel operation (MCB closed), load-
dependent start stop is only enabled, if the gensets participates in
load sharing at the interchange point (all participating gensets must
be configured to the same setpoint).
A minimum load threshold must be exceeded to

start the first genset, i.e. a genset will only be
started if a minimum load would be demanded
from the generator.
There are dedicated LDSS parameters for mains
parallel operation.

[Default]
5767 MOP Minimum 2 0 to 65000 kW For the mains interchange (import/export) real power control to function, a
load minimum generator power setpoint value is required to start the first genset.
[10 kW]
In many cases, it is desirable that the engine is prevented from starting unless
the generator will operate at a specific kW level or higher to ensure a reason‐
able degree of efficiency.
Example
The mains interchange must reach a level that will permit an 80 kW generator
to operate at a minimum load of 40 kW prior to the engine starting.
5769 MOP Hysteresis 2 0 to 65000 kW Start stop mode configured to "Reserve power":
[10 kW] If the reserve power is sufficient to stop one genset without falling below the
reserve power threshold and the hysteresis configured here, a genset will be
stopped.
If the generator load falls below the minimum load threshold minus the hyste‐
resis configured here, the last genset will be stopped.
Notes
The importance of this parameter depends on the setting of the start stop
mode (parameter 5752 Ä p. 353).
5768 MOP Reserve 2 0 to 999999 kW

power The minimum reserve power in mains parallel operation is configured here.
[50 kW] This is the maximum expected load swing on the busbar, which shall be sup‐
ported by the gensets.
If the reserve power falls below this value, the load-dependent start/stop func‐
tion will start another genset.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
5649 MOP Reserve 2 0 to 999999 kW

power 2 The minimum reserve power in mains parallel operation is configured here.
[100 kW] This is the maximum expected load swing on the busbar, which shall be sup‐
ported by the gensets.
If the reserve power falls below this value, the load-dependent start/stop func‐
tion will start another genset.
Notes
12605 MOP Reserve 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the 'MOP
power 2 LogicsManager Reseve power 2' (parameter 5649 Ä p. 360) is used instead of the 'MOP
86.42 Reseve power' (parameter 5768 Ä p. 359).
[(0 & 1) & 1] Notes
5770 MOP Max. gen‐ 2 0 to 100% If the generator load exceeds the threshold configured here, the load-
erator load dependent start/stop function will start another genset.
[70%]
Notes
5771 MOP Min. gen‐ 2 0 to 100% If the generator load falls below the threshold configured here, the load-
erator load dependent start/stop function will stop a genset.
[30%]
If only a few gensets are operating in a multi-genset application, the MOP
Dynamic (parameter 5758 Ä p. 360) will also be considered when stopping a
genset.
Notes
5758 MOP Dynamic 2 The dynamic determines when to start or stop the next genset and shows the
following behavior:
Starting genset
The Dynamic is only considered for the start sequence if "Fit size of engines"
is enabled (refer to parameter 5754 Ä p. 354).
The control requests a certain amount of additional load depending on the
dynamic. It may start two or more gensets to supply the required load.
Stopping genset
The dynamic determines how soon a genset will be stopped. It prevents con‐
tinuous start and stop if only a few gensets are in operation.
In this case, the remaining gensets would not reach the maximum limit if one
genset stops (if, for example, two gensets with 100 kW rated load, a minimum
load of 40 % and a maximum load of 70 % are operated, the second genset
will be shut down if both reach 40 kW and the remaining engine would
operate with 80 kW and request the next engine and so on).
The more gensets are running, the less the influence of this parameter. Also
refer to the following example.

Configuration

[Default]
[Low] Starting genset

A larger genset is requested and it will take longer until the next change is
required. The engines are operated with more reserve power. The requested
load is calaculated so that the gensets will be loaded with 25 % of the range
& 5763 Ä p. 357) after the new genset has been started.
Stopping genset
The genset will shut down at a lower limit and be operated longer. The
number of gensets in operation will remain constant for a wider range of load.
& 5763 Ä p. 357).
Moderate Starting genset

A medium genset is requested. The requested load is calaculated so that the
gensets will be loaded with 50 % of the range between minimum and max‐
imum generator load (parameters 5762 Ä p. 357 & 5763 Ä p. 357) after the
new genset has been started.
Stopping genset
& 5763 Ä p. 357).
High Starting genset

A smaller genset is requested to operate the engines with higher efficiency.
This may lead to more frequent starts and stops. The requested load is cala‐
culated so that the gensets will be loaded with 75 % of the range between
minimum and maximum generator load (parameters 5762 Ä p. 357 &
5763 Ä p. 357) after the new genset has been started.
Stopping genset
The genset will be shut down earlier. This may lead to more frequent starts
and stops. The load on the remaining gensets must not exceed 75 % of the
range between minimum and maximum generator load (parameters
5762 Ä p. 357 & 5763 Ä p. 357).
Notes
Refer to parameter 5757 Ä p. 357 for examples on stating and stopping a
genset depending on the dynamic setting.
5772 MOP Add on 2 0 to 32000 s Load swings may exceed the threshold momentarily. In order to prevent the
delay engine from starting due to short-term load swings, a delay time may be con‐
[20 s] figured.
The LDSS criterion for adding load must be exceeded without interruption for
this delay time, configured in seconds, prior to a start command being issued.
If the LDSS criterion for adding load is fallen below before the delay time
expires, the delay time is reset and a start command is not issued.
5773 MOP Add on 2 0 to 32000 s The command to start the next genset in case a genset exceeds rated load
delay at rated will be issued after the delay configured here has expired.
load [3 s]
Notes
5774 MOP Add off 2 0 to 32000 s Load swings may fall below the threshold momentarily. In order to prevent the
delay engine from stopping due to short-term load swings, a delay time may be con‐
[60 s] figured.
The load must remain below the hysteresis setpoint without interruption for
the delay time, configured in seconds, prior to a stop command being issued.
If the load exceeds the hysteresis setpoint before the delay time expires, the
delay time is reset and a stop command is not issued.

Configuration
4.4.5.5.6 LDSS with predicted load

For further information, please refer to application examples to
Ä Chapter 6.3.16 “LDSS with predicted load” on page 664.
Introduction In case of a mains failure, the usual LDSS function of the easYgen
starts either one or all generators. This is done so because during
the mains failure the consumer load information is lost. The LDSS
with predicted load (LDSS PL) can start the correct amount of gen‐
erators based on the last mains power measurements (5-minutes
average value).
The LDSS PL takes the 5-minutes average value as mains load
into account and passes it to the LDSS function as consumer load.
The LDSS function can thereby start the correct amount of gensets
according to that predicted load. A prerequisite for this function is
the availability of a group breaker (GGB) in the application. The
GGB allows to switch the correct amount of generators onto the
load.
n The LDSS PL differentiates two source modes as base for the
predicted consumer load calculation:
– 1. Internal source mode: The mains power and breaker
handling is provided by the easYgenXT.
– 2. External source mode: The mains power, the MCB and
GGB control is provided by an external device (e.g. ATS),
connected via CANopen with easYgen.
General To the time the engines are not started and the mains is feeding
the load the LDSS PL calculates a mains load with a 5-minute
average value. This load value is passed to the LDSS function as
consumer load. So the LDSS can determine the correct amount of
engines which must be started if a start command becomes active.
See Ä “General” on page 362: Switches are in “Pos.1” and “Pos.
A”.
In the moment the start request becomes active the average load
calculation is frozen. See Ä “General” on page 362: switches are
in “Pos.2” and “Pos. A”.
If all requested engines are successful started and have closed
their GCBs the LDSS PL gives the release for closing the GGB.
From this time on the 5-minute average load calculation will be fed
with the easYgen calculated generator load. See Ä “General”
on page 362: switches are in “Pos.3”; “Pos. B”
The LDSS function now does not differ anymore to the original
function. There will be started and stopped the correct generators
according to the common LDSS parameters.
The External and Internal Source There is an external and an internal mode available:
Mode
The external source mode is dedicated for external installed ATS
controls which measure the mains power. The system allows up to
5 ATS controls at the Interchange point.
In this mode, external ATS controls send information via CANopen
RPDO messages. The easYgen provides information going to the
ATS control.

Configuration
Fig. 199: External mode

The internal source mode is dedicated to use the own mains power
measurement assigned via Analogmanager .
Fig. 200: Internal mode

The external ATS control sends information in CANopen RPDO
messages. The easYgen provides information going to the ATS
control.

Configuration
Configure Application > Emergency Run

[Default]
15026 LDSS with pre‐ 2 Determined by If the conditions of this LogicsManager have been fulfilled LDSS is working
dicted load LogicsManager with predicted load. Otherwise LDSS is working normally.
86.36
[(0 & 1) & 1]
9066 Predicted load 2 internal Internal: LDSS with predicted load is using internal data. (LM 86.09 “Start req.
source in AUTO” and AM 81.30 “Consumer load [kW]”)
[external]
External: LDSS with predicted load is expected data from external via RPDOs
9059 AM Consumer 2 AnalogManager The result (81.30) of this analog manager provides the load for the load pre‐
load [kW] diction in internal source mode
[ Ä Chapter
9.4.3 “Factory
Settings”
on page 1068]
4.4.6 Emergency Run

General notes
The automatically start by mains trip is possible
only in application mode , , , ,
and (2 power circuit breakers).
If the LogicsManager outputs 'Stop request in
AUTO' or 'Inhibit emergency run' are TRUE, an
emergency power operation may be prevented or
interrupted from an external source.
Prerequisites
– The emergency power function can only be
activated for synchronous generators with
– Emergency power is carried out in operating
mode AUTOMATIC regardless of the status of
the LogicsManager output 'Start request in
AUTO' (LogicsManager).
The display indicates "Emergency run" during emergency power

operation.
The following principles are observed in case of an emergency
power operation:
n If an emergency power operation is initiated, the engine is
started automatically, unless the start sequence is interrupted
via an alarm or prevented via the LogicsManager or the oper‐
ating mode is changed.
n The GCB can be closed regardless of the engine delay time if
the generator frequency and voltage are within the configured
operating limits ( Ä Chapter 4.5.1.1 “ Generator Operating
Ranges: Voltage / Frequency / Busbar” on page 367) if the
parameter "Undelay close GCB" (parameter 12210 Ä p. 257/
Ä p. 1035) has been set accordingly (default setting).
n If the mains return during an emergency power operation (GCB
is closed), the mains settling time (parameter 2801 Ä p. 417)
must expire before the load is transferred from the generator to
mains operation.

Configuration
Activation of emergency power

If the mains are not within the configured fre‐
quency and voltage operating limits ( Ä Chapter
4.5.3.4 “Mains Operating Ranges” on page 418)
for at least the time configured in the parameter
"Mains fail delay time" (parameter 2800 Ä p. 365),
an emergency power operation is activated.
MCB malfunction
An emergency power operation will be performed,
if the control is not able to close or recluse the
MCB and the alarm "Fail to close MCB" occurs.
Mains rotation field alarm

If the mains returns after a mains failure with a
reversed rotation direction the generator remains
in emergency power operation until the mains rota‐
tion matches the rotation of the generator set.
The generator will not start upon a mains rotation
field alarm, but it will keep on running if it has
already started.
The following parameters only apply to application

mode , , , , and .

[Default]
2802 Emergency run 2 [On] If the unit is in the AUTOMATIC operating mode and a mains fault occurs
according to the following parameters, the engine is started and an automatic
emergency operation is carried out.
Off No emergency operation is carried out.
2800 Mains fail delay 2 0.00 to 99.99 To start the engine and to carry out an emergency operation the monitored
time mains must be failed continuously for the minimum period of time set with this
[3.00 s] parameter.
(Mains failure
start delay) Notes
This delay time starts only if the easYgen is in AUTOMATIC operating mode
and emergency power is activated.
3408 Emerg. start 2 [Yes]/No Emergency power operations may be configured with the failure of the MCB
with MCB failure in addition to a loss of power on the mains supply.
Notes
An MCB breaker alarm is indicated if parameter "MCB monitoring" (param‐
eter 2620 Ä p. 462) is configured "On".
12200 Inhibit emer‐ 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the emergency
gency run LogicsManager power operation will be terminated or blocked.
86.11
(Inhibit emerg. Notes
run) [(0 & 1) & 1]
It is possible to interrupt an already activated emergency run.
= 10710

Configuration

[Default]
4101 Break emerg. in 2 0 to 999 s The emergency power operations are overridden for the configured time
critical mode when the critical mode starts in order to supply the complete generator power
[5 s] to the sprinkler pump.
(Override emer‐
gency opera‐
tions in critical
mode)
2805 Emergency start 2 — In the application mode GCB/LS5 the easYgen provides an emergency run
Seg No 1-16 according to the configured segments. If the operating range of the particular
segment is lost, the easYgen starts and closes the GCB. When the easYgen
has recognized being parallel to mains it ramps down and opens the breaker
with cooldown. The entry is bitwise. ToolKit offers therefore a more comfort‐
able configuration. In the easYgen display must be entered a hexadecimal
value related to the segment number.
Notes
Notes
Notes
Notes

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Configure Generator Monito... > Generator Operating Range...
4.5 Configure Monitoring
Replacement: "Delayed by engine speed"

becomes "Enabled"
Formerly (non-XT easYgen) several monitoring
functions could be delayed each by use of param‐
eter "Delayed by engine speed". Exchanging it by
the new parameter "Enabled" introduces the one-
change-switch of all monitoring functions by Logi‐
csManager 11459 LM 87.70 Release Engine Moni‐
toring.
With software revision 1.13 or higher each moni‐
toring LogicsManager can be enabled alternatively
by one of 32 Flags.
Factory settings ensure same behavior of each
affected monitoring function as of non-XT easYgen
series before.
4.5.1 Configure Generator Monitoring

4.5.1.1 Generator Operating Ranges: Voltage / Frequency / Busbar
The operating voltage/frequency/busbar parame‐

ters are used to check if the values are in range
when performing a dead bus closure and synchro‐
nization of the generator. Busbar 1 must be within
this ranges to synchronize the generator to the
busbar.
It is recommended to configure the operating limits
within the monitoring limits.

[Default]
5800 Upper voltage 2 100 to 150% The maximum permissible positive deviation of the generator voltage from the
limit generator rated voltage (parameter 1766 Ä p. 497) is configured here.
[110%]
(Generator max‐ This value may be used as a voltage limit switch. The conditional state of this
imum operating (Hysteresis: 1%) switch may be used as a command variable for the LogicsManager (02.03).
voltage limit)
5801 Lower voltage 2 50 to 100% The maximum permissible negative deviation of the generator voltage from
limit the generator rated voltage (parameter 1766 Ä p. 497) is configured here.
[90%]
(Generator min‐ This value may be used as a voltage limit switch. The conditional state of this
imum operating (Hysteresis: 1%) switch may be used as a command variable for the LogicsManager (02.03).
voltage limit)

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Configure Generator Monito... > Generator Operating Range...

[Default]
5802 Upper fre‐ 2 100.0 to 150.0% The maximum permissible positive deviation of the generator frequency from
quency limit the rated system frequency (parameter 1750 Ä p. 496) is configured here.
[105.0%]
(Generator max‐ This value may be used as a frequency limit switch. The conditional state of
imum operating (Hysteresis: this switch may be used as a command variable for the LogicsManager
frequency limit) 0.05%) (02.04).
5803 Lower fre‐ 2 50.0 to 100.0% The maximum permissible negative deviation of the generator frequency from
quency limit the rated system frequency (parameter 1750 Ä p. 496) is configured here.
[95.0%]
(Generator min‐ This value may be used as a frequency limit switch. The conditional state of
imum operating (Hysteresis: this switch may be used as a command variable for the LogicsManager
frequency limit) 0.05%) (02.04).
Table 89: Parameter settings: Voltage/frequency
Busbar monitoring Busbar monitoring compares the actual voltage and frequency of
the busbar with the configured generator operating ranges. The
voltage operating range is configured with the "Upper voltage
Limit" and "Lower voltage limit" parameter. The frequency oper‐
ating range is configured with the "Upper frequency limit" and
"Lower frequency limit" parameter. If the measured busbar voltage
or frequency deviates from the operating range for a time
exceeding the configurable delay, an alarm will be issued.

[Default]
5118 Monitoring 2 On Monitoring is enabled
[Off] Monitoring is disabled
5122 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If one of the monitored values exceeds the threshold value for the delay time
configured here, an alarm will be issued.
[10.00 s]
5119 Alarm class 2 Class Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what
A/B/C/D/E/F, action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Control
Notes
[B]
on page 1078
5120 Self acknowl‐ 2 Yes The control unit automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
edge longer detected.
[No] The control unit does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault condi‐
tion is no longer detected.
Table 90: Parameter settings: Busbar

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Configure Generator Monito... > Generator Voltage Monitori...
4.5.1.2 Generator Voltage Monitoring

[Default]
1770 Generator 2 The unit can either monitor the phase-neutral (wye) voltages or the phase-
voltage moni‐ phase (delta) voltages.
toring
If the controller is used in a compensated or isolated network, voltage protec‐
tion monitoring should be configured as phase-neutral to prevent earth-faults
resulting in tripping of the voltage protections.
[Phase - phase] The phase-phase voltage will be monitored and all subsequent parameters
concerning voltage monitoring "generator" are referred to this value (VL-L).
Phase - neutral The phase-neutral voltage will be monitored and all subsequent parameters
concerning voltage monitoring "generator" are referred to this value (VL-N).
Notes
WARNING: This parameter defines how the protective functions operate.
Table 91: Settings: Generator Voltage Monitoring
4.5.1.2.1 Generator Overvoltage (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 59

General notes Voltage is monitored according to how the parameter "Generator
voltage measuring" (parameter 1851 Ä p. 498) is configured. This
controller provides the user with two alarm levels for generator
overvoltage. Both alarms are definite time alarms.
Monitoring for overvoltage faults is performed in two steps.
If this protective function is triggered, the display

indicates "Gen. overvoltage 1" or "Gen. over‐
voltage 2" and the logical command variable
"06.05" or "06.06" will be enabled.
Refer to Ä Chapter 9.1.1 “Triggering Characteristics” on page 757

for the triggering characteristic of this monitoring function. The dia‐
grams listed there show a frequency trend and the associated
pickup times and length of the alarms.
The parameter limits listed below have identical

setting ranges. Each parameter may be configured
with different settings to create unique trip charac‐
teristics for specific thresholds.

[Default]
2000 Monitoring 2 [On] Overvoltage monitoring is carried out according to the following parameters.
Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may be configured inde‐
2006 pendent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1 limit < limit 2).
Off Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
2004 Limit 2 50.0 to 150.0% The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are
defined here.
2010 2004: [108.0%]
If this value is reached or exceeded for at least the delay time without inter‐
2010: [112.0%] ruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
(Hysteresis:
0.7%)

Configuration

[Default]
(Reset Delay: Notes
80 ms)
This value refers to the System rated frequency (parameter 1766 Ä p. 497).
2005 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored generator voltage value exceeds the threshold value for the
delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued.
2011 2005: [5.00 s]
Notes
2011: [0.30 s]
If the monitored generator voltage falls below the threshold (minus the hyste‐
resis) before the delay expires the time will be reset.
2007 Control
Notes
2001: [B]
2007: [F] on page 1078
2008
2003 Enabled 2 [Always] Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled.
2009 87.70 Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine monitoring is ena‐
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.1.2.2 Generator Undervoltage (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 27

General notes Voltage is monitored according to how the parameter "Generator
voltage measuring" (parameter 1851 Ä p. 498) is configured. This
controller provides the user with two alarm levels for generator
undervoltage. Both alarms are definite time alarms.
Monitoring for undervoltage faults is performed in two steps.

indicates "Gen. undervoltage 1" or "Gen. under‐



Configuration
This monitoring function is disabled when the idle

mode ( Ä Chapter 4.4.1.4 “Idle Mode”
on page 199) is active.

[Default]
2050 Monitoring 2 [On] Undervoltage monitoring is carried out according to the following parameters.
2056 pendent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1 limit < limit 2).
defined here.
2060 2054: [92.0%]
(Hysteresis:
Notes
0.7%)
(Reset Delay:
80 ms)
2055 Delay 2 0.00 to 999 s If the monitored generator voltage value falls below the threshold value for the
2061 2055: [5.00 s]
Notes
2061: [0.30 s]
If the monitored generator voltage exceeds the threshold (plus the hysteresis)
before the delay expires the time will be reset.
2057 Control
Notes
2051: [B]
2057: [F] on page 1078
2058
2053 Enabled 2 Always Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled.
2059 [87.70 Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine monitoring is ena‐
LM:Eng.mon] bled. This is determined through the LogicsManager equation "Release
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.1.2.3 Generator Voltage Asymmetry

General notes The voltage asymmetry monitors absolute value of all three phase-
phase voltage difference: dV1=|V12- V23|, dV2=|V23- V31| and dV3=|
V31- V12|. If one of measured dV1, dV2 or dV3 exceeds a configured
permissible asymmetrical limit, an alarm is issued.
The percentage of permissible asymmetrical limit refers to the gen‐
erator rated voltage.

Configuration

indicates "Gen. volt. asymmetry" and the logical
command variable "06.18" will be enabled.

for the triggering characteristic of this monitoring function.
This monitoring function is only enabled if Gener‐

ator voltage measuring (parameter 1851 Ä p. 498)
is configured to "3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W".

[Default]
3900 Monitoring 2 [On] Voltage asymmetry monitoring is carried out according to the following
parameters.
Off No monitoring is carried out.
defined here.
[10.0%]
(Hysteresis: ruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
0.5%)
Notes
(Reset Delay:
80 ms) This value refers to the Generator rated voltage (parameter 1766 Ä p. 497).
3904 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored generator voltage asymmetry exceeds the threshold value for
the delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued.
[5.00 s]
Notes
If the monitored generator voltage asymmetry falls below the threshold (minus
the hysteresis) before the delay expires the time will be reset
Control
Notes
[F]
on page 1078
[87.70 Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine monitoring is ena‐
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Configure Generator Monito... > Generator Frequency Monito...
4.5.1.3 Generator Frequency Monitoring

4.5.1.3.1 Plausibility Check of Voltages' AC Wiring
General Notes The easYgen-3000XT detects the frequency out of up to six vol‐
tages (L1-N, L2-N, L3-N, L1-L2, L2-L3 and L3-L1). The frequency
measurement (of all three systems) additionally checks the values
on plausibility. With this monitoring the easYgen can detect wrong
wiring issues.
Wrong Wiring Issue

It might occur that for example a generator fre‐
quency is measured even if the generator is not
running. This can happen e.g. if PE (terminal 61) is
not connected, the generator neutral connection is
broken, and mains is energized with 1Ph2W con‐
nection. In this case a potential shift occurs which
could lead to "ghostly" voltages at the generator (or
busbar, or mains) phase-neutral system. This vol‐
tages lead to a frequency measurement even if no
voltage is detected in the generator phase-phase
system.
The “Plausibility AC wiring ” monitoring is introduced to indicate

such situations at generator, busbar, and mains measurement.
These alarms are tripping if only "Phase-Phase" or only "Phase-
Neutral" frequency is detected. If such an alarm ("Gen. AC wiring",
"Busbar 1 AC wiring" or "Mains AC wiring" has tripped please
check all "Phase-Phase" and "Phase-Neutral" voltages via HMI or
Toolkit to get more information and check the AC wiring.
This “Plausibility AC wiring ” monitoring function is

only active if the wiring can provide "Phase-Phase"
and "Phase-Neutral" values.
The plausibility monitoring offers one setting for all three measure‐
ment systems. The Monitor is placed under: “Parameter
è Configure: Monitoring è Miscellaneous: Other monitoring” .The
alarm indications are called Gen. .../Busbar .../Mains AC wiring
(see Ä Chapter 9.5.3 “Status Messages” on page 1079).

[Default]
1964 Monitoring 2 [On] Enabling Plausibility AC Wiring monitoring.
Off Monitoring is disabled
1965 Delay 2 00.2 to 99.99 s If the monitored value undershoots the threshold value for the delay time con‐
figured here, an alarm will be issued.
[00.30]
1966 Alarm class 2 Class A, B, C, Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what
D, E, F, Control action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
[Class B ]
1967 Self acknowl‐ 2 [Yes] The control unit automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
No The control unit does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault condi‐

Configuration

[Default]
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.1.3.2 Generator Overfrequency (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 81O

General notes This controller provides the user with two alarm levels for generator
overfrequency. Both alarms are definite time alarms.
Monitoring for overfrequency faults is performed in two steps.

indicates "Gen. overfrequency 1" or "Gen. overfre‐
quency 2" and the logical command variable



[Default]
1900 Monitoring 2 [On]

Overfrequency monitoring is carried out according to the following parame‐
1906 ters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may be configured
independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1 limit < limit 2).
defined here.
1910 1904: [110.0%]
(Hysteresis:
Notes
0.05 Hz)
(Reset Delay:
80 ms)
1905 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored generator frequency value exceeds the threshold value for
1911 1905: [1.50 s]
1911: [0.30 s]
Notes
If the monitored generator frequency falls below the threshold (minus the hys‐
teresis) before the delay expires the time will be reset.

Configuration

[Default]
1907 Control
1901: [B]
1907: [F]
Notes
on page 1078
1908
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.1.3.3 Generator Underfrequency (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 81O

General notes This controller provides the user with two alarm levels for generator
underfrequency. Both alarms are definite time alarms.
Monitoring for underfrequency faults is performed in two steps.

indicates "Gen. underfrequency 1" or "Gen. under‐
frequency 2" and the logical command variable



Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Configure Generator Monito... > Generator Current Monitori...

[Default]
1950 Monitoring 2 [On]

Underfrequency monitoring is carried out according to the following parame‐
1956 ters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may be configured
independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1 limit < limit 2).
defined here.
1960 1954: [90.0%]
If this value is reached or lower for at least the delay time without interruption,
1960: [84.0%] the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
(Hysteresis:
Notes
0.05 Hz)
(Reset Delay:
80 ms)
1955 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored generator frequency value falls below the threshold value for
1961 1955: [5.00 s]
1961: [0.30 s]
Notes
If the monitored generator frequency falls below the threshold (plus the hyste‐
1957 Control
1951: [B]
1957: [F]
Notes
on page 1078
1958
1959 [ 87.70 Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine monitoring is ena‐
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.1.4 Generator Current Monitoring

4.5.1.4.1 Generator Time-Overcurrent (Level 1, 2 & 3) ANSI# 50/51
General notes Current is monitored according to how the parameter "Generator
current measuring" (parameter 1850 Ä p. 498) is configured. This
controller provides the user with three definite time alarm levels for
generator overcurrent faults.
Monitoring of the maximum phase current is performed in three
steps. Every step can be provided with a delay time independent of
the other steps.

Configuration

indicates "Gen. overcurrent 1", "Gen. overcur‐
rent 2", or "Gen. overcurrent 3" and the logical
command variable "06.09", "06.10.", or "06.11" will
be enabled.


[Default]
2200 Monitoring 2 [On] Overcurrent monitoring is carried out according to the following parameters.
Monitoring is performed at three levels. All three values may be configured
2206 independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1 < Level 2 < Level 3).
2212
Off Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit, Level 2 limit, and/or Level 3 limit.
defined here.
2210 2204: [110.0%]
2216 2210: [150.0%] ruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
2216: [250.0%]
Notes
(Hysteresis: 1%)
(Reset Delay: 1
s)
2205 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored generator current exceeds the threshold value for the delay
time configured here, an alarm will be issued.
2211 2205: [30.00 s]
Notes
2217 2211: [1.00 s]
If the monitored generator current falls below the threshold (minus the hyste‐
2217: [0.40 s]
2224 Voltage restraint 2 Yes The control provides voltage restrained overcurrent relay according to ANSI
monitoring 51 V individually for each generator current monitoring function.
2225
For details refer to Ä Chapter 4.5.1.4.3 “Generator Voltage Restrained Over‐
2226 current Monitoring - ANSI #51V” on page 381.
[No] Voltage restrained monitoring is disabled.
2207 Control
Notes
2213 2201: [E]
2207: [F] on page 1078
2213: [F]
2208
2214
2215
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:

Configuration
4.5.1.4.2 Generator Inverse Time-Overcurrent ANSI# IEC 255

General notes The current produced by the generator is monitored depending on
how parameter "Generator current measuring" (param‐
eter 1850 Ä p. 498) is configured. If an overcurrent condition is
detected, the fault recognition time is determined by the configured
tripping characteristic curve and the measured current.
The tripping time is faster as the measured current increases in
magnitude according to a defined curve. According to IEC 255
three different characteristics are available.
If this protective function is triggered, the display indicates "Inv.
time overcurr." and the logical command variable "06.22" will be
enabled.
n "Normal inverse" characteristic:
t = 0.14 / (I/IP)0.02 - 1) * tP[s]
n "Highly inverse" characteristic:
t = 13.5 / (I/IP) - 1) * tP[s]
n "Extremely inverse" characteristic:
t = 80 / (I/IP)2 - 1) * tP[s]
Variables:
n t =tripping time
n tP = setting value time
n I = measured fault current
n IP = setting value current
Please take into account during configuration:
n for Istart:
Istart > In and Istart > IP
n for IP the smaller IP is, the steeper is the slope of the tripping
curve
The maximum tripping time is 327 s. If a tripping

time greater than 327 s is configured, an overcur‐
rent fault condition will not be recognized.

Configuration
Characteristics
Fig. 201: "Normal inverse" characteristic
Fig. 202: "Highly inverse" characteristic

Configuration
Fig. 203: "Extremely inverse" characteristic

[Default]
4030 Monitoring 2 [On] Overcurrent monitoring is carried out according to the following parameters.
4034 Inverse time 2 Selection of the used overcurrent characteristic.

characteristic
[Normal] The "normal inverse" tripping curve will be used
High The "highly inverse" tripping curve will be used
Extreme The "extremely inverse" tripping curve will be used.
4035 Inverse time 2 0.01 to 5.00 s Time constant Tp used to calculate the characteristics.
overcurrent Tp=
[0.06 s]
4036 Inverse time 2 10.0 to 300.0% Current constant IP used to calculate the characteristics.
overcurr. IP =
[100.0%]
4037 Inv time over‐ 2 100.0 to 300.0% Lower tripping value for inverse time-overcurrent protection. If the monitored
curr. Istart = current is less than Istart, the inverse time-overcurrent protection does not trip.
[115.0%] If Istart is less than IP, IP is used as the lower tripping value.
(Hysteresis: 1%)
(Reset Delay: 1
s)
Control
Notes
[F]
on page 1078

Configuration

[Default]
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.1.4.3 Generator Voltage Restrained Overcurrent Monitoring - ANSI #51V

General Notes This function is an add-on to the over current monitoring and
decreases the activation limit dependent on the amount of voltage
dip. Especially in near to generator located over currents it can
lead to situations, where the failure current remains under the gen‐
erator rated current. In this case a normal over current monitoring
does not trip. The voltage restraint over current monitoring con‐
siders this and decreases the configured over current limit
according to a modification factor, that it comes to a trip.
The considered voltages are either the single phase-phase or
phase-neutral voltages. (Refer to "Generator voltage monitoring"
1770 Ä p. 369). The monitor takes always the lowest considered
voltage into account for calculating the modification factor.
Voltage restraint over current monitoring can be activated individu‐
ally for “Generator over current (limit 1-3)” and Generator inverse
time over current, if the according parameter 2227 “Voltage
restraint monitoring” is switched to “Yes”.
The modification factor depends on the measured voltage in per‐
cent of rated voltage. It is defined by a characteristic which is
defined by three parameters (ID 2230, 2231, 2232 cf. figure). This
characteristic is taken into account for all over current monitoring
functions, if enabled.

Configuration
Fig. 204: Example for generator voltage restraint overcurrent char‐

acteristic
Beginning at a voltage dip of 95% rated voltage (configured by

2231), the modification factor will be linearly reduced (cf. figure 86).
If the voltage reaches 25% or less (configured by 2230) the modifi‐
cation factor will remain at 25% (configured by 2232).
Now the effective limit is calculated as:
Effective limit [%] = Limit [%] * Modification Factor [%]/ 100[%]
Supposed the configured limit of an over current monitor is 110%
and the measured voltage is 25%:
Effective limit [%] =110% * 25%/100% = 27.5%
The V (voltage) start value configuration must be

entered higher as the V stop value configuration.
Otherwise the function does not work properly!

[Default]
2231 V start current 2 5.0 ... 100.0% Voltage for starting current limitation reduction
lim. reduction
[95.0%]
2230 V stop current 2 5.0 ... 100.0% Voltage for stopping current limitation reduction
lim. reduction
[25.0%]
2232 Min. factor limit 2 5.0 ... 100.0% Minimum factor limit for current limitation reduction
overcurrent
[25.0%]

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Configure Generator Monito... > Generator Power Monitoring
4.5.1.5 Generator Power Monitoring

4.5.1.5.1 Generator Overload IOP (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 32
General notes
IOP = islanded Operation in Parallel
The power produced by the generator is calculated from the

voltage and current values measured in accordance with how
parameters "Generator voltage measuring" (parameter
1851 Ä p. 498) and "Generator current measuring" (param‐
eter 1850 Ä p. 498) are configured. The controller monitors if the
system is in a mains parallel or an islanded operation.
When the controller detects that the system is operating islanded
from the mains, the Generator Overload MOP (refer to Ä Chapter
4.5.1.5.2 “Generator Overload MOP (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 32”
on page 384) monitoring is disabled. If the measured generator
real power during an islanded operation is above the configured
limit an alarm will be issued.

indicates "Gen. Overload IOP 1" or "Gen. Over‐
load IOP 2" and the logical command variable


[Default]
2300 Monitoring 2 [On] Overload monitoring is carried out according to the following parameters.
Monitoring is performed at two levels.
2306
Both values may be configured independent from each other (prerequisite:
Level 1 limit < Level 2 limit).
defined here.
2310 2304: [110.0%]
(Hysteresis: 1%)
Notes
(Reset Delay:
This value refers to the Generator rated active power (param‐
80 ms)
eter 1752 Ä p. 497).
2305 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored generator load exceeds the threshold value for the delay time
2311 2305: [11.00 s]
Notes
2311: [0.10 s]
If the monitored generator load falls below the threshold (minus the hyste‐
2307 Control
Notes
2301: [B]
2307: [D] on page 1078
edge detected.
2308

Configuration

[Default]
no longer detected.
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.1.5.2 Generator Overload MOP (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 32

General notes
MOP = Mains Parallel Operation
The power produced by the generator is calculated from the

parameters "Generator voltage measuring" (param‐
eter 1851 Ä p. 498) and "Generator current measuring" (param‐
eter 1850 Ä p. 498) are configured.
The controller monitors if the system is in a mains parallel or an
islanded operation. When the controller detects that the system is
operating parallel with the mains, the Generator Overload IOP
(refer to Ä Chapter 4.5.1.5.1 “Generator Overload IOP (Level 1 &
2) ANSI# 32” on page 383) monitoring is disabled. If the measured
generator real power during a mains parallel operation is above the
configured limit an alarm will be issued.

indicates "Gen. Overload MOP 1" or "Gen. Over‐
load MOP 2" and the logical command variable


[Default]
2350 Monitoring 2 [On] Overload monitoring is carried out according to the following parameters.
Monitoring is performed at two levels.
2356
Level 1 limit < Level 2 limit).

Configuration

[Default]
defined here.
2360 2354: [105.0%]
(Hysteresis: 1%)
Notes
(Reset Delay:
This value refers to the Generator rated active power (param‐
80 ms)
eter 1752 Ä p. 497).
2355 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored generator load exceeds the threshold value for the delay time
2361 2355: [5.00 s]
Notes
2361: [0.10 s]
If the monitored generator load falls below the threshold (minus the hyste‐
2357 Control
Notes
2351: [B]
2357: [D] on page 1078
edge detected.
2358
no longer detected.
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.1.5.3 Generator Reverse/Reduced Power (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 32R/F

General notes The power produced by the generator is calculated from the
parameters "Generator voltage measuring" (param‐
eter 1851 Ä p. 498) and "Generator current measuring" (parameter
1850 Ä p. 498) are configured.
The generator power limits may be configured for reduced power
and/or reverse power depending on the threshold values entered.
The note below explains how a reduced or reverse power limit is
configured.
If the single-phase or three-phase measured real power is below
the configured limit of the reduced load or below the configured
value of the reverse power, an alarm will be issued.

indicates "Gen. rev./red. pwr.1" or "Gen. rev./
red. pwr.2" and the logical command variable

Configuration

Definition
– Reduced power Fault initiated if the monitored
real power falls below the configured (positive)
limit.
– Reverse power Fault initiated if the direction of
the monitored real power reverses and the
configured (negative) limit is exceeded.
Configuration examples The values for reverse /reduced power monitoring can be config‐
ured as follows:
n Level 1 limit = Positive and Level 2 limit = Positive
(whereas Level 1 limit > Level 2 limit > 0 %)
n Both limits are configured for reduced power monitoring.
Example n Rated power is 100 kW, Level 1 limit = 5 % > Level 2 limit =
3%
n Tripping if real power falls below 5 kW (Level 1 limit) or 3 kW
(Level 2 limit)
n Level 1 limit = Negative and Level 2 limit = Negative

(whereas Level 2 limit < Level 1 limit < 0%)
Both limits are configured for reverse power monitoring.
Example n Rated power is 100 kW, Level 1 limit = -3 % > Level 2 limit =
-5 %
n Tripping if real power falls below -3 kW (Level 1 limit)
or -5 kW (Level 2 limit)
n Level 1 limit = Positive and Level 2 limit = Negative

(whereas Level 1 limit > 0 % > Level 2 limit)
n Level 1 is configured for reduced power monitoring and
n Level 2 is configured for reverse power monitoring.
Example n Rated power is 100 kW, Level 1 limit = 3 % > Level 2 limit =
-5 %
n Tripping if real power falls below 3 kW (Level 1 limit)
or -5 kW (Level 2 limit)

[Default]
2250 Monitoring 2 [On] Reverse/reduced power monitoring is carried out according to the following
parameters.
2256
Both values may be configured independent from each other.
2254 Limit 2 -99.9 to 99.9% The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are
defined here.
2260 2254: [-3.0%]
If this value is reached or fallen below for at least the delay time without inter‐
2260: [-5.0%] ruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
(Hysteresis: 1%)

Configuration

[Default]
(Reset Delay: Notes
80 ms)
This value refers to the Generator rated active power (parameter
1752 Ä p. 497).
2255 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored generator power falls below the threshold value for the delay
2261 2255: [5.00 s]
Notes
2261: [5.00 s]
If the monitored generator power exceeds or falls below the threshold (plus/
minus the hysteresis) again before the delay expires the time will be reset.
2257 Control
Notes
2251: [B]
2257: [F] on page 1078
2258
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.1.5.4 Generator Unbalanced Load (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 46

General notes Unbalanced load is monitored according to how the parameters
"Generator voltage measuring" (parameter 1851 Ä p. 498) and
"Generator current measuring" (parameter 1850 Ä p. 498) are con‐
figured. The unbalanced load alarm monitors the individual phase
currents of the generator. The percentage threshold value is the
permissible variation of one phase from the average measured cur‐
rent of all three phases.

indicates "Unbalanced load 1" or "Unbal‐
anced load 2" and the logical command variable


Configuration
This monitoring function is only enabled when

Generator voltage measuring (param‐
eter 1851 Ä p. 498) is configured to "3Ph 4W",
"3Ph 4W OD", or "3Ph 3W" and Generator current
measuring (parameter 1850 Ä p. 498) is config‐
ured to "L1 L2 L3".
Formulas
Phase L1 Phase L2 Phase L3
Exceeding IL1 ≥ (3 * IN * PA + IL2 + IL3) / 2 IL2 ≥ (3 * IN * PA + IL1 + IL3) / 2 IL3 ≥ (3 * IN * PA + IL1 + IL2) / 2
Falling below IL1 ≤ (IL2 + IL3- 3 * IN * PA) / 2 IL2 ≤ (IL1 + IL3- 3 * IN * PA) / 2 IL3 ≤ (IL1 + IL2- 3 * IN * PA) / 2
Examples
Exceeding a limit value n Current in phase L1 = current in phase L3

n Current in phase L2 has been exceeded
n PA = tripping value percentage (example 10 %)
n IN = rated current (example 300 A)
Tripping value for phase L2:
n IL2 ≥ (3 * IN * PA + IL1 + IL3) / 2
= (3 * 300 A * 10% + 300 A + 300 A) / 2
= ((3 * 300 A * 10) / 100 + 300 A + 300 A) / 2
= 345 A
Falling below a limit value n Current in phase L2 = current in phase L3

n Current in phase L1 has been undershot
n PA = tripping value percentage (example 10 %)
n IN = rated current (example 300 A)
Tripping value for phase L1:
n IL1 ≤ (IL2 + IL3- 3 * IN * PA) / 2
= (300 A + 300 A - 3 * 300 A * 10%) / 2
= (300 A + 300 A - (3 * 300 A * 10) / 100)) / 2
= 255 A

[Default]
2400 Monitoring 2 [On] Unbalanced load monitoring is carried out according to the following parame‐
ters. Monitoring is performed at two levels.
2406
Both values may be configured independent from each other (condition:
Level 1 < Level 2).
Off No monitoring is carried out for either Level 1 limit or Level 2 limit.
defined here.
2410 2404: [10.0%]
(Hysteresis:
0.5%)

Configuration

[Default]
(Reset Delay: Notes
80 ms)
This value refers to the "Generator rated current" (parameter 1754 Ä p. 497)
2405 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored current exceeds the threshold value for the delay time config‐
ured here, an alarm will be issued.
2411 2405: [5.00 s]
Notes
2411: [1.00 s]
If the monitored current falls below the threshold (minus the hysteresis)
2407 Control
Notes
2401: [B]
2407: [E] on page 1078
2408
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.1.5.5 Load sharing

Active power load sharing mismatch
[Default]
5100 Monitoring 2 On Load share monitoring is carried out according to the following parameters.
[Off] Monitoring is disabled.
4841 Limit 2 1.0 to 100.0% The percentage value that is to be monitored for the threshold limit is defined
here.
[30.0%]
ruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Notes
This value is rated to the absolute difference between generator rated power
(parameter 1752 Ä p. 497) and the percent average power of the other
devices. The generator rated power is modified by the derating factor if
derating is activated.
5104 Delay 2 1.0 to 999.9 s If the monitored generator power value exceeds the threshold value for the
[10.0 s]
Notes
If the monitored generator power falls below the threshold (minus the hyste‐
Control

Configuration

[Default]
[B] Notes
on page 1078
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
Reactive power load sharing mis‐

match
[Default]
5106 Monitoring 2 On Load share monitoring is carried out according to the following parameters.
4842 Limit 2 1.0 to 100.0% The percentage value that is to be monitored for the threshold limit is defined
here.
[30.0%]
Notes
This value is rated to the absolute difference between generator rated reac‐
tive power (parameter 1758 Ä p. 497) and the percent average reactive
power of the other devices. The generator rated reactive power is modified by
the derating factor if derating is activated.
5110 Delay 2 1.0 to 999.9 s If the monitored generator power value exceeds the threshold value for the
[10.0 s]
Notes
If the monitored generator power falls below the threshold (minus the hyste‐
Control
Notes
[B]
on page 1078

Configuration

[Default]
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.1.5.6 Engine/Generator Active Power Mismatch

General notes If enabled, this monitoring function becomes only active if gener‐
ator power control is enabled (refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.4.5 “Load
Control” on page 313). If the measured generator power deviates
from the power setpoint by a value exceeding the limit configured
in parameter 2925 Ä p. 391 for a time exceeding the delay config‐
ured in parameter 2923 Ä p. 391, an alarm will be issued.

indicates "Gen act.pwr mismatch" and the logical

[Default]
2920 Monitoring 2 [On] Monitoring of the generator active power mismatch is carried out according to
the following parameters.
Off Monitoring is disabled.
2925 Limit 2 1.0 to 30.0% If the difference between the measured generator power and the power set‐
point exceeds this value for at least the delay time (parameter 2923 Ä p. 391)
[5.0%] without interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Notes
This value refers to the generator rated active power (parameter
1752 Ä p. 497).
2923 Delay 2 3 to 9999 s If the monitored active power mismatch exceeds the threshold value config‐
ured in parameter 2925 Ä p. 391 for the delay time configured here, an alarm
[30 s] will be issued.
Notes
If the monitored active power mismatch falls below the threshold (minus the
hysteresis) before the delay expires the time will be reset.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078

Configuration

[Default]
4.5.1.5.7 Engine/Generator Unloading Mismatch

General notes This monitoring function is always enabled and becomes active
when a stop command is issued. Following a stop command, the
controller tries to reduce the power before opening the GCB. If the
power falls below the unload limit (parameter 3125 Ä p. 392)
before the delay (parameter 3123 Ä p. 392) expires, a "GCB open"
command will be issued. If the controller fails to reduce the power
to fall below the unload limit (parameter 3125 Ä p. 392) before the
delay (parameter 3123 Ä p. 392) expires, a "GCB open" command
will be issued together with an alarm.

indicates "Gen. unloading fault" and the logical

[Default]
3120 Monitoring 2 [On] Monitoring of engine unloading is carried out according to the following
parameters.
3125 Unload limit 2 0.5 to 99.9% If the monitored generator power falls below this value, a "GCB open" com‐
mand will be issued.
[3.0%]
Notes
This value refers to the generator rated active power (parameter
1752 Ä p. 497).
3123 Delay 2 3 to 999 s If the monitored generator power does not fall below the limit configured in
parameter 3125 Ä p. 392 before the time configured here expires, a "GCB
[60 s] open" command will be issued together with an alarm.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Configure Generator Monito... > Other Monitoring
4.5.1.6 Other Monitoring

4.5.1.6.1 Power Factor - configure generator power factor monitoring
Generator Lagging Power Factor (Level 1 & 2)
General notes The power factor is monitored for becoming more lagging (i.e.
inductive) than an adjustable limit. This limit may be a lagging or
leading power factor limit. There are two lagging power factor
alarm levels available in the control. This monitoring function may
be used for monitoring an overexcitation with a warning and a shut‐
down alarm level. Both alarms are definite time alarms.
The power factor monitoring

– is activated,
if the generator current expires 5% rated Gen‐
erator current and
– is blocked,
if the generator current underrun 3% rated
Generator current.
Fig. 205 shows an example of a leading and a lagging power factor

limit and the power factor range, for which the lagging power factor
monitoring issues an alarm.

indicates "Gen. PF lagging 1" or "Gen. PF lag‐
ging 2" and the logical command variable "06.25"
or "06.26" will be enabled.
Power Factor
Leading (capacitive) Lagging (inductive)
More lagging than a leading More lagging than a lagging

PF limit of -0.40 PF limit of +0.85
-0.40 +0.85
-0.50 -0.75 1.00 +0.75 +0.50
Import Inductive Power Export Inductive Power
Fig. 205: Generator lagging power factor

[Default]
2325 Monitoring 2 [On] Generator lagging power factor monitoring is carried out according to the fol‐
lowing parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may be
2331 configured independent from each other.
2329 Limit 2 -0.999 to 1.000 The values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are defined here.
2335 2329 [+ 0.900] Notes
2335: [+ 0.700] If the power factor becomes more lagging (i.e. inductive, Fig. 205) than a lag‐
ging PF value (positive) or a leading PF value (negative) for at least the delay
(Hysteresis:
time (parameters 2330 Ä p. 393 or 2336 Ä p. 393) without interruption, the
0.02%)
action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
(Reset Delay:
80 ms)
2330 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored generator power factor is more lagging than the configured
limit for the delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued.
2336 2330: [30.00 s]

Configuration

[Default]
2336: [10.00 s] Notes
If the monitored generator power factor returns within the limit before the
delay expires the time will be reset.
2332 Control
Notes
2326: [B]
2332: [B] on page 1078
2333
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
Generator Leading Power Factor (Level 1 & 2)

General notes The power factor is monitored for becoming more leading (i.e.
capacitive) than an adjustable limit. This limit may be a leading or
lagging power factor limit. There are two leading power factor
be used for monitoring an under excitation with a warning and a
shutdown alarm level. Both alarms are definite time alarms.
Refer to Ä Chapter 6.3.1 “Generator Excitation Protection”
on page 609 for a detailed description of this monitoring function.
The power factor monitoring

– is activated,
if the generator current expires 5% rated Gen‐
erator current and
– is blocked,
if the generator current underruns 3% rated
Generator current.

limit and the power factor range, for which the leading power factor

indicates "Gen. PF leading 1" or
"Gen. PF leading 2" and the logical command vari‐
able "06.27" or "06.28" will be enabled.

Configuration
Fig. 206: Generator leading power factor

[Default]
2375 Monitoring 2 [On] Generator leading power factor monitoring is carried out according to the fol‐
lowing parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may be
2381 configured independent from each other.
2385 2379: [- 0.900] Notes
2385: [- 0.700] If the power factor becomes more leading (i.e. capacitive, Fig. 206) than a
leading PF value (negative) or a lagging PF value (positive) for at least the
(Hysteresis:
delay time (parameters 2380 Ä p. 395 or 2386 Ä p. 395) without interruption,
0.02%)
the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
(Reset Delay:
80 ms)
2380 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored generator power factor is more leading than the configured
2386 2380: [30.00 s]
Notes
2386: [10.00 s]
If the monitored generator power factor returns within the limit before the
delay expires the time will be reset.
2382 Control
Notes
2376: [B]
2382: [B] on page 1078
2383
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:

Configuration
4.5.1.6.2 Miscellaneous
Generator Ground Fault (Level 1 & 2)
General notes
The generator ground fault is determined differ‐
ently depending on the following configuration
options:
– Mains current input is configured for mains cur‐
rent
(calculated ground fault)
– Mains current input is configured for ground
current
(measured ground fault)
Refer to parameter 1854 Ä p. 496.
Calculated ground fault The current produced by the generator is monitored depending on
how parameter "Generator current measuring" (parameter
1850 Ä p. 498) is configured. The measured three conductor cur‐
rents IGen-L1, IGen-L2 and IGen-L3 are vectorially totaled (IS =
IGen-L1 + IGen-L2 + IGen-L3) and compared with the configured
fault limit (the calculated actual value is indicated in the display). If
the measured value exceeds the fault threshold limit, a ground fault
is present, and an alarm is issued.

indicates "Ground fault 1" or "Ground fault 2" and
the logical command variable "06.19" or "06.20"
will be enabled.
Fig. 207: Generator ground fault - The ground fault protection zone is determined by
schematic the location where the generator current trans‐
former are physically installed.
Test Short-circuit one of the three generator current transformers

while the generator is at full load.
ð The measured current should read 100% of rated on the
two phases that do not have their current transformers
short-circuited.
The ground current calculation does not take current on the neutral
conductor into consideration. In order for the controller to be able
to perform calculated ground fault current protection accurately, the
neutral conductor must not conduct current.
The fault threshold value is configured as a percentage. This per‐
centage threshold refers to the generator rated current (param‐
eter 1754 Ä p. 497). Due to unavoidable load asymmetries, the
minimum value for this parameter should be 10% or greater.

Configuration
Calculation
Fig. 208: Generator ground fault - calculation

1 No ground fault
2 Ground fault (with vectorial calculation)
3 Ground fault (IS = ground fault current)
The ground current IS is calculated geometrically/vectorially. The
pointers for phase currents IL1 and IL2 are parallel shifted and
lined up as shown in (Fig. 208/1).
The pointer between the neutral point and the point of the shifted
pointer IL2' results is the sum current IS as shown in (Fig. 208/2).
In order to be able to add the pointers vectorially, these must be
divided into their X- and Y-coordinates (IL2X, IL2Y, IL3X and IL3Y).
The ground fault current may be calculated using the following for‐
mula:
n (IL1rated + IL2rated + IL3rated) - (IL1measured + IL2measured + IL3measured) /
1.73 = IS
n (7 A + 7 A + 7 A) – (7A + 6.5 A + 6 A) / 1.73 = 0.866 A
Results of a calculation example:
n Phase current IL1 = IRated = 7 A
n Phase current IL2 = 6.5 A
n Phase current IL3 = 6 A
Measured ground fault Ground fault current is actively measured when the mains current
input is configured to monitor for ground current. The ground fault
threshold is configured as a percentage of the value entered for
parameter "Generator rated current" (parameter 1754 Ä p. 497).
The ground fault protection zone is determined by

the physical installation location of the generator
current transformer.

[Default]
3250 Monitoring 2 On Ground current monitoring is carried out according to the following parame‐
ters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may be configured
3256 independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1 < Level 2).
[Off] Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.

Configuration

[Default]
3254 Limit 2 0 to 300% The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are
defined here.
3260 3254: [10%]
3260: [30%] ruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
(Hysteresis: 1%)
Notes
(Reset Delay:
This value refers to the Generator rated current of the generator (param‐
80 ms)
eter 1754 Ä p. 497), if the ground current is calculated from the generator
current values.
It refers to the parameter "Generator rated current" (parameter
1754 Ä p. 497), if the ground current is measured directly.
The ground fault threshold shall not exceed the mains/ground current meas‐
uring range (approx. 1.5 × Irated; Ä Chapter 8.1 “Technical Data”
on page 745).
3255 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored ground fault exceeds the threshold value for the delay time
3261 3255: [0.20 s]
Notes
3261: [0.10 s]
If the monitored ground fault falls below the threshold (minus the hysteresis)
3257 Control
Notes
3251: [B]
3257: [F] on page 1078
3258
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:

Configuration
Generator Phase Rotation

General notes
NOTICE!
Damage to the control unit and/or generation
equipment
– Ensure that the control unit is properly con‐
nected to phase voltages on both sides of the
circuit breaker(s) during installation.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the con‐
trol unit and/or generation equipment due to the
breaker closing asynchronously or with mis‐
matched phase rotations. Also ensure that phase
rotation monitoring is enabled at all connected
components (engine, generator, breakers, cable,
busbars, etc.).
This function will block a connection of systems
with mismatched phases only under the following
conditions:
– The voltages being measured are wired cor‐
rectly with respect to the phase rotation at the
measuring points (i.e. the potential trans‐
formers in on both sides of the circuit breaker)
– The voltages being measured are wired so that
angular phase shifts or any interruptions from
the measuring point to the control unit do not
exist
– The voltages being measured are wired to the
correct terminals of the control unit (i.e. L1
phase of the generator is connected with the
terminal of the control unit which is intended for
the generator L1 phase)
– The configured alarm class is of class C, D, E,
or F (shutdown alarm).
Correct phase rotation of the phase voltages ensures that damage

will not occur during a breaker closure to either the mains or the
generator. The voltage phase rotation alarm checks the phase
rotation of the measured voltages and the configured phase rota‐
tion to ensure they are identical.
The directions of rotation are differentiated as "clockwise" and
"counter clockwise". With a clockwise field the direction of rotation
is "L1-L2-L3"; with a counter clockwise field the direction of rotation
is "L1-L3-L2". If the control is configured for a clockwise rotation
and the measured voltages are monitored as counterclockwise, the
alarm will be initiated.

Configuration
The direction of configured rotation being moni‐

tored by the control unit is displayed on the screen.
indicates "Gen.ph.rot. mismatch" and the logical
is configured to "3Ph 4W", "3Ph 3W", or "3Ph 4W
OD" and the measured voltage exceeds 50 % of
the rated voltage (parameter 1766 Ä p. 497) or if
eter 1851 Ä p. 498) is configured to "1Ph 2W" (in
this case, the phase rotation is not evaluated, but
defined by the 1Ph2W phase rotation (param‐
eter 1859 Ä p. 496)).

[Default]
3950 Monitoring 2 [On] Phase rotation monitoring is carried out according to the following parame‐
ters.
Notes
The phase rotation monitor is internally configured with a two seconds delay,
so that the expected response time is less than three seconds.
3954 Generator 2 [CW] The three-phase measured generator voltage is rotating CW (clock-wise; that
phase rotation means the voltage rotates in L1-L2-L3 direction; standard setting).
CCW The three-phase measured generator voltage is rotating CCW (counter clock-
wise; that means the voltage rotates in L1-L3-L2 direction).
Control
[F]
Notes
on page 1078
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:

Configuration
Busbar Phase Rotation

General notes
NOTICE!
equipment
– Ensure that the control unit is properly con‐
nected to phase voltages on both sides of the
circuit breaker(s) during installation.
trol unit and/or generation equipment due to the
breaker closing asynchronously or with mis‐
matched phase rotations. Also ensure that phase
rotation monitoring is enabled at all connected
components (engine, generator, breakers, cable,
busbars, etc.).
conditions:
measuring points (i.e. the potential trans‐
formers in on both sides of the circuit breaker)
– The voltages being measured are wired so that
angular phase shifts or any interruptions from
the measuring point to the control unit do not
exist
– The voltages being measured are wired to the
correct terminals of the control unit (i.e. L1
phase of the generator is connected with the
terminal of the control unit which is intended for
the generator L1 phase)
– The configured alarm class is of class C, D, E,
or F (shutdown alarm).

rotation of the measured voltages and the configured phase rota‐
tion to ensure they are identical.
is "L1-L3-L2". If the control is configured for a clockwise rotation
and the measured voltages are monitored as counterclockwise, the

Configuration
The direction of configured rotation being moni‐

tored by the control unit is displayed on the screen.
indicates "Gen.ph.rot. mismatch" and the logical
is configured to "3Ph 4W", "3Ph 3W", or "3Ph 4W
OD" and the measured voltage exceeds 50 % of
the rated voltage (parameter 1766 Ä p. 497) or if
eter 1851 Ä p. 498) is configured to "1Ph 2W" (in
this case, the phase rotation is not evaluated, but
defined by the 1Ph2W phase rotation (param‐
eter 1859 Ä p. 496)).

[Default]
ters.
Notes
The phase rotation monitor is internally configured with a two seconds delay,
so that the expected response time is less than three seconds.
1925 Busbar phase 2 [CW] The three-phase measured generator voltage is rotating CW (clock-wise; that
rotation means the voltage rotates in L1-L2-L3 direction; standard setting).
CCW The three-phase measured generator voltage is rotating CCW (counter clock-
Control
[F]
Notes
on page 1078
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:

Configuration
4.5.1.6.3 Pole Slip Monitoring

General notes There are different circumstances possible to bring a synchronous
generator into a pole slip situation. This monitor here is established
for pole slip cases, when the genset is running parallel to grid.
Because in mains instability situations in conjunction with being
longer parallel to grid (VDE-AR-N 4105/4110) it can lead to situa‐
tions that the synchronous generator goes through pole-slips.
These pole slips stress the genset mechanically very hard and
must be monitored. Finally the generator is to decouple from
mains, if the pole-slip rate reaches a scale which damages the
genset.
Because the easYgenXT is connected on measurement CTs the
device follows a monitoring method based on power measurement
in conjunction with other circumstances.
Function A pole slip situation is detected through observing the power output
of the generator in a special moment (refer to release pole slip). In
this moment when the power changes from positive to negative
and back to positive one pole slip event is detected.
Release pole slip
(Prerequisites to observe a pole slip situation)
n The monitoring is enabled (ON)
n The mains parallel operation is detected (GCB closed, MCB
closed and “GGB closed”)
n The Generator active power is higher than a configurable “Min.
active power threshold”
n The difference between active power and active power set
point is higher than the threshold. If the active power controller
is not active (external active power control), the threshold must
be set to 0%.
Trigger condition for a pole slip event
(Trigger the pole slip event counter +1)
n The active power has changed from positive to negative and
back to positive.
AND(If Pole slip with current limit is enabled)
n The generator current has surpassed a configurable limit
AND(If Pole slip with pickup is enabled)
n A configurable difference is detected between pickup speed
and the measured generator frequency.
Trigger pole slip alarm
If during released pole slip monitoring no pole slip event is encoun‐
tered anymore for a configurable time the event counter is reset.
Reset pole slip event counter
If, during released pole slip monitoring, no pole slip event is
encountered anymore for a configurable time, the event counter is
reset.

[Default]
2416 Monitoring 2 On Enabling the pole slip monitoring.

On: Monitoring is enabled
[Off] Off: Monitoring is disabled

Configuration

[Default]
2417 Min. active 2 0 to 150% With reaching once this minimum active power in parallel operation the pole
power slip monitoring is released. The entry is related to generator rated power.
[10%]
2418 Limit act. power 2 0 to 150% This difference between real power and set point triggers the monitoring. If
difference the difference is higher than the configured threshold the pole slip events are
[10%] taken into account.
2426 Pole slip with 2 On Use additional the generator current limit for detecting pole slip events.
current limit
On: Current limit is additional used for pole slip detection
[Off] Off: Current limit is not used
2427 Generator cur‐ 2 50 to 200% If the generator current is higher than the threshold during active power
rent limit decreasing the current condition for pole slip events is matched.
[110%]
2428 Pole slip with 2 On Use additional the difference between pickup and generator frequency for
pickup detecting pole slip events
On: Use the difference between pickup and frequency
[Off] Off: Difference between pickup and frequency is not used
2429 Speed/freq. dif‐ 2 0.5 to 9.9Hz If the difference between speed and frequency is higher than the threshold
ference the pickup condition for pole slip events is matched. The pickup speed is cal‐
[2.0Hz] culated to frequency for the compare with the generator frequency from the
AC measurement.
2419 Number of pole 2 1 to 10 This is the maximum allowed number of pole slips to trigger the alarm.
slip events
[2]
2420 Reset time pole 2 10 to 999s During released pole slip monitoring and with a pole slip counter which is not
slip events increased anymore for this time, the pole slip counter will be reset.
[60s]
2421 Alarm class 2 Class A-F/ Pole slip alarm class Default alarm class D opens the GCB and stops the
Control engine after cooldown timer.
[Class D]
2422 Self-acknowl‐ 2 No/Yes Self-acknowledge pole slip alarm

edge
[No]
2423 Mns. decoupling 2 On Use pole slip monitoring for mains decoupling
by pole slip
[Off]
Alarm The device indicates and stores the text "Pole slip" (ID2425).
Visualization The device indicates "Number of pole slip events" in ToolKit

(ID2425).
LogicsManager The device provides the LM command variable "LM 06.36 Gen
pole slip" (10674).
AnalogManager The device provides the AM variable "AM 01.86 Number pole slip"
(9765).

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Configure Engine Monitor > Engine Overspeed (Level 1 ...
4.5.2 Configure Engine Monitor

4.5.2.1 Engine Overspeed (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 12
General notes The speed measured by the magnetic pickup unit (MPU) is moni‐
tored for overspeed. If the MPU is disabled, the speed may only be
monitored using the generator overfrequency monitoring. If the
MPU speed exceeds the overspeed limits the configured alarms
will be initiated.

indicates "Overspeed 1" or "Overspeed 2" and the
logical command variable "05.01" or "05.02" will be
enabled.


[Default]
2100 Monitoring 2 [On] Overspeed monitoring is carried out according to the following parameters.
2106 pendent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1 > Level 2).
2104 Limit 2 0 to 9,999 rpm The revolutions per minute (rpm) values that are to be monitored for each
threshold limit are defined here.
2110 2104: [1,850.0
rpm] If this value is reached or exceeded for at least the delay time without inter‐
2110: [1,900.0
rpm]
(Hysteresis: 50
rpm)
(Reset Delay: 1
s)
2105 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored engine speed exceeds the threshold value for the delay time
2111 2105: [1.00 s]
Notes
2111: [0.10 s]
If the monitored engine speed falls below the threshold (minus the hysteresis)
2107 Control
Notes
2101: [B]
2107: [F] on page 1078
2108
2109

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Configure Engine Monitor > Engine Underspeed (Level 1...

[Default]
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.2.2 Engine Underspeed (Level 1 & 2)

General notes The speed measured by the magnetic pickup unit (MPU) is moni‐
tored for underspeed. If the MPU is disabled or not available, the
speed may only be monitored using the generator underfrequency
monitoring. If the MPU speed falls below the underspeed limits the
configured alarms will be initiated.

indicates "Underspeed 1" or "Underspeed 2" and
the logical command variable "05.03" or "05.04"
will be enabled.


[Default]
2150 Monitoring 2 [On] Underspeed monitoring is carried out according to the following parameters.
2156 pendent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1 > Level 2).
2154 Limit 2 0 to 9999 rpm The percentage values that are to be monitored for each threshold limit are
defined here.
2160 2154: [1,300.0
rpm] If this value is reached or exceeded for at least the delay time without inter‐
2160: [1,250.0
rpm]
(Hysteresis: 50
rpm)
(Reset Delay: 1
s)
2155 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored engine speed falls below the threshold value for the delay
2161 2155: [1.00 s]
Notes
2161: [0.10 s]
If the monitored engine speed exceeds the threshold (plus the hysteresis)
again before the delay expires the time will be reset.
2157 Control
Notes
2151: [B]
2157: [F] on page 1078
2158

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Configure Engine Monitor > Engine/Generator Speed Det...

[Default]
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.2.3 Engine/Generator Speed Detection

General notes Speed detection checks if the generator voltage frequency f (deter‐
mined from the measured generator voltage) differs from the
measured engine speed n (determined from the Pickup signal or
the speed measured via ECU/J1939) and determines a difference
(Δf-n).
If the two frequencies are not identical (Δf-n ≠ 0) and the monitored
frequency mismatch reaches or exceeds the threshold, an alarm is
output. Additionally the LogicsManager output "Firing speed" is
checked upon its logical status with respect to the measuring
values "generator frequency" and "Pickup speed".

indicates "Speed/freq. mismatch" and the logical

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Configure Engine Monitor > Engine/Generator Speed Det...
Speed/frequency mismatch (n/f mismatch) is car‐

ried out if:
1. A MPU is connected to the control and param‐
eter "Speed pickup" (parameter 1600 Ä p. 198), is
configured On.
2. The speed is measured via ECU/J1939.
The following is valid:
The measurement via Pickup is enabled (On):
Mismatch monitoring is carried out using the
engine speed from the Pickup and the generator
frequency. If the speed/frequency mismatch or the
LogicsManager is enabled and the frequency is
outside of the configured limit, an alarm will be
issued.
The measurement via Pickup is disabled (Off):
Mismatch monitoring is carried out using the gen‐
erator frequency and the LogicsManager. If the
LogicsManager output is enabled and the fre‐
quency is outside of the configured limit, an alarm
will be issued.

[Default]
2450 Monitoring 2 [On] Monitoring of the speed/frequency/LogicsManager mismatch (n/f/LM mis‐

match) is carried out according to the following parameters.
2454 Speed/ 2 1.5 to 8.5 Hz The frequency mismatch that is to be monitored is defined here.
frequency mis‐
match limit [5.0 Hz] If the monitored frequency mismatch reaches or exceeds this value for at
least the delay time without interruption, the action specified by the alarm
class is initiated.
Notes
The LogicsManager is monitored with respect to his status.
2455 Delay 2 1 to 99 s If the monitored frequency mismatch exceeds the threshold value for the
[1.00 s]
Notes
If the monitored frequency mismatch falls below the threshold (minus the hys‐
teresis) before the delay expires the time will be reset.
2453 Activation fre‐ 2 15 to 85 Hz The speed/frequency mismatch monitoring is enabled at this generator fre‐
quency quency.
[20 Hz]
Control
[E]
Notes
on page 1078

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Configure Engine Monitor > Engine Shutdown Malfunctio...

[Default]
[ 87.70 Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine monitoring is ena‐
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.2.4 Engine Start Failure

General notes If it is not possible to start the engine within a configured number of
start attempts (refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.1.2 “Engine Start/Stop”
on page 188), an alarm will be initiated.

indicates "Start fail" and the logical command vari‐
able "05.08" will be enabled.

[Default]
3303 Monitoring 2 [On] Monitoring of the start sequence is carried out according to the following
parameters.
Control
[F]
Notes
on page 1078
4.5.2.5 Engine Shutdown Malfunction

General notes If it is not possible to stop the engine within a configured time, an

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Configure Engine Monitor > Engine Unintended Stop

indicates "Eng. stop malfunct." and the logical
We recommend to assign this monitoring function

to a discrete output to be able to shutdown the
engine with an external device to provide a shut‐
down redundancy.

[Default]
2500 Monitoring 2 [On] Monitoring of the stop sequence is carried out according to the following
parameters.
2503 Maximum stop 2 3 to 999 s The maximum permissible time between the output of a stop command and
delay the reply that the engine is stopped successfully is defined here.
[30 s]
Notes
If the engine cannot be stopped within this time (this means speed via the
Pickup, frequency via the generator voltage, or the LogicsManager is
detected) the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
Control
[F]
Notes
on page 1078
4.5.2.6 Engine Unintended Stop

General notes If an engine stop has been detected without a stop command being
issued, an alarm will be initiated.

indicates "Unintended stop" and the logical com‐
mand variable "05.05" will be enabled.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Configure Engine Monitor > Engine Charge Alternator (...

[Default]
2650 Monitoring 2 [On] Monitoring of an unintended stop is carried out according to the following
parameters.
Control
[F]
Notes
on page 1078
4.5.2.7 Engine Charge Alternator (D+)

General notes The charge alternator monitoring issues an alarm if the voltage
measured at the auxiliary excitation input D+ (terminal 65) falls
below a fix limit.
The fix limit depends on the power supply voltage. If a power
supply voltage exceeding 15 V is detected, the unit assumes a
24 V system and uses a limit of 20 V. If a power supply voltage
below 15 V is detected, the unit assumes a 12 V system and uses
a limit of 9 V.

indicates "Charge alt. low volt" and the logical com‐

[Default]
4050 Monitoring 2 On Monitoring of the charge alternator is carried out according to the following
parameters.
4055 Delay 2 2 to 9999 s If the voltage measured at the auxiliary excitation input D+ falls below a fixed
limit for the time defined here, an alarm will be issued.
[10 s]
If the voltage returns within the limit before the delay time expires, the delay
time will be reset.
A/B/C/D/E/F action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
[B]
Notes
on page 1078

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Configure Engine Monitor > Cylinder Temperature

[Default]
[ 87.70 Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine monitoring is ena‐
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.2.8 Cylinder Temperature

General Notes
Up to 20 temperatures monitored!
Gas engines needs to be monitored for equal exhaust or cylinder

head temperatures. If one cylinder temperature deviates too much
from the others, something must be wrong. This could be for
example a failed spark plug or a too hot combustion.
The easYgen-3000XT series provides a monitor which supervises

the deviation of a single temperature to the average temperature of
a group. Whereby either one average temperature exists (inline
engine) or two average temperatures are available (V-engine with
two banks).
Fig. 209: Cylinder Temperature Monitoring

The monitor is configurable for:
n overrun,
n underrun

Configuration
n or both.
n Two monitoring levels per temperature measurement.
– The both levels can be individually activated by different
power limits.
The temperatures could be provided by either CAN J1939 (SPN
1137 - 1156, 20 ports) for example Axiomatic Thermocouple
Scanner or by External Analog Inputs (AI1 - AI16, 16 ports) for
example Phoenix Temperature Module.
Monitoring Function
The monitor compares the single temperature deviations from the
average temperature of the according bank. An inline engine has
only one group (one bank), so all temperatures are usually allo‐
cated to bank 1. A V-engine has two groups (two banks), so the
single temperatures are distributed to bank 1 and bank 2. The
monitoring mode is valid for all temperatures. The monitoring mode
can be 'Off', 'Overrun', 'Underrun' or 'Overrun and Underrun'. The
mode is valid for all banks.
The monitoring generally is released by a LogicsManager equa‐
tion. Each monitoring level (level 1 or 2) can be separately
released by a configurable generator power.
Fig. 210: Status Cylinder Temperature

A cylinder with sensor defect is removed from the
average temperature calculation and trips an inde‐
pendent alarm!
Alarm System / Eventlogger The alarm system provides three alarm messages:
n Cylinder temperature level 1
n Cylinder temperature level 2
n Wire break
Command Variables The easYgen provides LogicsManager command variables:

n 87.71 LM: Release cyl. temp.
n 05.18 Cyl. temp. lev. 1
n 05.19 Cyl. temp. lev. 2
n 05.20 Cyl. temp.wire break
Analog Variables The easYgen provides AnalogManager variables::

n 11.56 Average Cyl. Temp. Bank 1
n 11.57 Average Cyl. Temp. Bank 2
– The hysteresis for the temperature limit is 2°C.

– The hysteresis for the power limit is 1% rated
generator power.

Configuration
Alarm Screen
n The square is dotted, if the according cylinder is not configured
n The square contains an arrow-up, if the limit is exceeded
n The square contains an arrow-down, if limit is below target
n The square contains a '!' exclamation point sign, if the sensor is
missing (wire break) or error was detected
n If an alarm occurs and the monitor is still active, the new alarm
is linked by logic 'OR' to the others
n The monitor ignores values of cylinders with wire break or
sensor defect
n The alarm trip displaying is removed, if the alarm of the
according level was successful acknowledged
Fig. 211: Cylinder temperature screen n The wire break trip has a higher priority as the limit monitoring.
That means: with up-coming wire break only the according trip
bits are RESET. Other cylinders not touched.
General monitoring
[Default]
15158 Release 2 Determined by True: The temperature deviation monitoring is released.

cyl.temp. LogicsManager
87.71 False: The temperature deviation monitoring is blocked.
[(0 & 1) & 1;
tON = 0.00; tOFF
= 0.00]
= 11460
8876 Monitoring at 2 [Off] The monitoring is deactivated. The alarm screen is not displayed.
Overrun The single temperatures are monitored on maximum deviation in direction of

higher temperatures.
Underrun The single temperatures are monitored on maximum deviation in direction of

lower temperatures.
Both The single temperatures are monitored on maximum deviation in direction of

lower and higher temperatures.
8877 Source cylinder 2 Ext.AIN The temperatures are taken from external temperature module (Phoenix, AI1
temperature - AI16, 16 ports).
[J1939] The temperatures are taken from the J1939 protocol. (SPN 1137 - 1156, 20
ports).
Notes
Parameter available only if external sources for cylinder temperature are con‐
nected.
Level 1
[Default]
8878 Minimum gener‐ 2 000.0 ... 150.0% When the generator power exceeds this value the level 1 monitoring is acti‐
ator power vated.
[30.0%]
Respectively the level 1 is deactivated, if the power level is undershoot.
8879 Limit 2 0000 ... 9999° C Threshold level 1
[100° C]
8880 Delay 2 0000 ... 9999 s Time between *** exceeds limits and *** is activated.
[60 s]

Configuration

[Default]
8881 Alarm class 2 Class Each limit may be assigned to an independent alarm class that specifies what
Control
[B] For additional information refer to. Ä Chapter 9.5.1 “Alarm Classes”
on page 1078.
Level 2
[Default]
8883 Minimum gener‐ 2 000.0 ... 150.0% When the generator power exceeds this value the level 2 monitoring is acti‐
ator power vated.
[30.0%]
Respectively the level 2 is deactivated, if the power level is undershoot.
8884 Limit 2 0000 ... 9999° C Threshold level 2
[150° C]
Control
on page 1078.
[60 s]
Wirebreak Cylinder Temperature

[Default]
[2 s]
Control
on page 1078.

Configuration

[Default]
Temperature X Bank
[Default]
8856 Bank selct cyl‐ 2 [Off] The temperature does not exist.
inder {x}
to Bank 1 The temperature exists and is located in cylinder bank 1.
8875 Bank 2 The temperature exists and is located in cylinder bank 2.
Cylinder status Each cylinder is represented by a 2-bit combination that has the
following meanings:
n 00 - OK
n 01 - Overrun
n 10 - Underrun
n 11 - Error/missing
These two bits are carried by parameters ID 3352 ..3354 for the
cylinders of bank 1 and ID 3355..3357 for the cylinders of bank 2:
Bank Cyl‐ ID Bits Bank Cyl‐ ID Bits

inder inder
1 1 3352 0..1 2 1 3355 0..1
2 2..3 2 2..3
... ... ... ...
8 14..15 8 14..15
9 3353 0..1 9 3356 0..1
10 2..3 10 2..3
... ... ... ...
16 14..15 16 14..15
17 3354 0..1 17 3357 0..1
18 2..3 18 2..3
19 4..5 19 4..5
20 6..7 20 6..7
(not in 8..15 (not in 8..15

use) use)

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Blocking of Mains Protecti...
4.5.3 Mains
4.5.3.1 General Mains Monitoring
[Default]
1771 Mains voltage 2 The unit can either monitor the wye voltages (phase-neutral) or the delta vol‐
monitoring tages (phase-phase). The monitoring of the wye voltage is above all neces‐
sary to avoid earth-faults in a compensated or isolated network resulting in
the tripping of the voltage protection.
[Phase - phase] The phase-phase voltage will be monitored and all subsequent parameters
concerning voltage monitoring "mains" are referred to this value (VL-L).
Phase - neutral The phase-neutral voltage will be monitored and all subsequent parameters
concerning voltage monitoring "mains" are referred to this value (VL-N).
All The phase-phase and phase-neutral voltage will be monitored and all subse‐
quent parameters concerning voltage monitoring "mains" are referred to this
value (VL-L & VL-N).
This setting is only effective if "Mains voltage measuring" (parameter
1853 Ä p. 501) is configured to "3Ph 4W".
Notes
WARNING: This parameter influences the protective functions.
Please be aware that if "Mains voltage monitoring" (parameter
1771 Ä p. 417) is configured to "All" and the function Ä Chapter 4.5.3.10
“Mains Voltage Increase” on page 433 is used, that this function only monitors
"Phase - neutral".
2801 Mains settling 2 0 to 9999 s To end the emergency operation, the monitored mains must be within the
time configured operating parameters without interruption for the minimum period
[20 s] of time set with this parameter without interruption.
This parameter permits delaying the switching of the load from the generator
to the mains.
The display indicates "Mains settling" during this time.
4.5.3.2 Mains Monitoring Hysteresis Voltage / Frequency

Introduction A drop-off ratio (Hysteresis) is configurable to run VDE-AR-N
4105 / 4110 tests. This is provided through 2 new parameter which
are generally acting on mains decoupling voltage limits respec‐
tively frequency limits.

[Default]
2964 Hyst. Voltage 2 0 to 10.0% Hysteresis for:

monitoring
[1.5%] n Mains Under voltage limit 1 + 2
n Mains Over voltage limit 1 + 2
2965 Hyst. Frequency 2 0 to 2.0% Hysteresis for:

monitoring
[0.1%] n Mains Under frequency limit 1 + 2
n Mains Over frequency limit 1 + 2
4.5.3.3 Blocking of Mains Protection

General notes The operator can deactivate the mains monitoring features and the
decoupling function. A dedicated LogicsManager is installed to dis‐
able all mains monitoring and the decoupling function.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Operating Ranges
Already latched alarms (self acknowledge = No)

are not removed from the alarm list by this func‐
tion.
Following functions are blocked:

n Mains decoupling
n Mains over frequency 1&2
n Mains under frequency 1&2
n Mains over voltage 1&2
n Mains under voltage 1&2
n Mains voltage increase (10 minutes average value)
n Mains Time-dependent Voltage (FRT)
n Mains Q(V) Monitoring
n Mains phase shift
n Mains df/dt

[Default]
15159 Disable mains 2 Determined by Switch to disable

monitoring LogicsManager
87.72 n all mains monitoring functions and
[(0 & 1) & 1] n the mains decoupling function.
tON = 0.00; tOFF

= 0.00]
= 11461
4.5.3.4 Mains Operating Ranges

4.5.3.4.1 General Mains Operating Range
General notes
The mains operating voltage/frequency parameters
are used to trigger mains failure conditions and
activate an emergency run.
The mains values must be within this ranges to
synchronize the mains circuit breaker. It is recom‐
mended to configure the operating limits within the
monitoring limits.
Example If the mains rated voltage is 400 V, the upper voltage limit is 110 %
(of the mains rated voltage, i.e. 440 V), and the hysteresis for the
upper voltage limit is 5 % (of the mains rated voltage, i.e. 20 V), the
mains voltage will be considered as being out of the operating
limits as soon as it exceeds 440 V and will be considered as being
within the operating limits again as soon as it falls below 420 V
(440 V – 20 V).

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Operating Ranges
If the rated system frequency is 50 Hz, the lower frequency limit is

90 % (of the rated system frequency, i.e. 45 Hz), and the hyste‐
resis for the lower frequency limit is 5 % (of the rated system fre‐
quency, i.e. 2.5 Hz), the mains frequency will be considered as
being out of the operating limits as soon as it falls below 45 Hz and
will be considered as being within the operating limits again as
soon as it exceeds 47.5 Hz (45 Hz + 2.5 Hz).

[Default]
5810 Upper voltage 2 100 to 150% The maximum permissible positive deviation of the mains voltage from the
limit mains rated voltage (parameter 1768 Ä p. 501) is configured here.
[110%]
This value may be used as a voltage limit switch. The conditional state of this
switch may be used as a command variable for the LogicsManager (02.09).
5814 Hysteresis 2 0 to 50% If the mains voltage has exceeded the limit configured in param‐
upper voltage eter 5810 Ä p. 419, the voltage must fall below the limit and the value config‐
limit [2%] ured here, to be considered as being within the operating limits again.
5811 Lower voltage 2 50 to 100% The maximum permissible negative deviation of the mains voltage from the
limit mains rated voltage (parameter 1768 Ä p. 501) is configured here.
[90%]
This value may be used as a voltage limit switch. The conditional state of this
5815 Hysteresis lower 2 0 to 50% If the mains voltage has fallen below the limit configured in param‐
voltage limit eter 5811 Ä p. 419, the voltage must exceed the limit and the value config‐
[2%] ured here, to be considered as being within the operating limits again.
5812 Upper fre‐ 2 66.7¹ to 150.0% The maximum permissible positive deviation of the mains frequency from the
quency limit rated system frequency (parameter 1750 Ä p. 496) is configured here.
[110.0%]
This value may be used as a frequency limit switch. The conditional state of
this switch may be used as a command variable for the LogicsManager
(02.10).
Notes
¹ The lowest measurable frequency is 40 Hz.
66.7 % of 60 Hz is 40 Hz. Equivalent for 50 Hz don't go below 80 %.
5816 Hysteresis 2 0 to 50.0% If the mains frequency has exceeded the limit configured in param‐
upper frequency eter 5812 Ä p. 419, the frequency must fall below the limit and the value con‐
limit [0.5%] figured here, to be considered as being within the operating limits again.
5813 Lower fre‐ 2 66.7¹ to 100.0% The maximum permissible negative deviation of the mains frequency from the
quency limit rated system frequency (parameter 1750 Ä p. 496) is configured here. This
[90.0%] value may be used as a frequency limit switch. The conditional state of this
Notes
¹ The lowest measurable frequency is 40 Hz.
66.7 % of 60 Hz is 40 Hz. Equivalent for 50 Hz don't go below 80 %.
5817 Hysteresis lower 2 0 to 50.0% If the mains frequency has exceeded the limit configured in param‐
frequency limit eter 5813 Ä p. 419, the frequency must raise above the limit and the value
[0.5%] configured here, to be considered as being within the operating limits again.
4.5.3.4.2 Reconnecting Mains Operating Range

Introduction After mains decoupling from the power generation device, with
under-/over frequency or under-/over voltage, the automatic recon‐
nection to the grid after the mains settling time is only possible, if
the mains is within the following operation ranges.
The operation ranges for mains reconnecting uses the voltages
according to the configured mains voltage monitoring (ID 1771
Mains voltage monitoring, phase-phase/phase-neutral/All). Only if
all considered voltages are back in band the synchronization to
mains will be executed.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Decoupling

[Default]
5818 Upper voltage 2 100 to 150% The maximum permissible positive deviation of the mains voltage from the
limit mains rated voltage after mains decoupling.
[105%]
5819 Lower voltage 2 50 to 100% The maximum permissible negative deviation of the mains voltage from the
limit mains rated voltage after mains decoupling.
[95%]
5821 Upper fre‐ 2 66,7 to 150% The maximum permissible positive deviation of the mains voltage from the
quency limit mains rated voltage after mains decoupling.
[100.2%]
5822 Lower fre‐ 2 66.7to 100% The maximum permissible negative deviation of the mains voltage from the
quency limit mains rated voltage after mains decoupling.
[99.8%]
4.5.3.5 Mains Decoupling

General notes The mains decoupling function is intended for use in a mains par‐
allel operation and monitors a series of subordinate mains protec‐
tion thresholds. If a threshold is exceeded, the genset control ini‐
tiates a breaker opening and separates the generator(s) from the
mains at the defined breaker.
The following thresholds are monitored:
n Overfrequency level 2 ( Ä Chapter 4.5.3.6 “Mains Overfre‐
quency (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 81O” on page 428)
n Underfrequency level 2 ( Ä Chapter 4.5.3.7 “Mains Underfre‐
quency (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 81U” on page 429)
n Overvoltage level 2 ( Ä Chapter 4.5.3.8 “Mains Overvoltage
(Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 59” on page 430)
n Undervoltage level 2 ( Ä Chapter 4.5.3.9 “Mains Undervoltage
(Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 27” on page 432)
n Mains phase shift / df/dt (ROCOF) ( Ä Chapter 4.5.3.13
“Change Of Frequency” on page 445)
If one of these protective functions is triggered, the display indi‐
cates "Mains decoupling" (the logical command variable "07.25"
will be enabled) and the active level 2 alarm.
The mains decoupling function is optimized on the

both relay outputs "GCB open" and "MCB open". In
case of using a free relay output in conjunction
with the command variable 07.25 an additional
delay time of up to 20 ms is to consider.
Managing Breaker Open alarm When the mains decoupling function detects a breaker open
failure, the according breaker alarm will be triggered as long the
monitoring function is activated. Additionally in cases where the
decoupling mode has to change over to the other breaker,
(GCB®MCB, MCB®GCB), the alarm text “Decoupling
GCB«MCB“ is indicated. The breaker open alarm already occurs
after the mains decoupling feedback delay (refer to ID
3113 Ä p. 421).

Configuration

[Default]
12922 Ext. mns. 2 Determined by The unit may be configured to decouple from the mains when commanded by
decoupl. LogicsManager an external device.
86.27
(External mains Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, an external
decoupling) [(0 & 1) & 1] mains failure is issued.
Notes
12942 Enable mains 2 Determined by Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled, the mains
decoupl. LogicsManager decoupling function is enabled.
87.31
(Enable mains
decoupling) [(02.02 & 1) & 1]
Notes
3110 Mains decou‐ 2 Off Mains decoupling monitoring is disabled.
pling
[GCB] Mains decoupling is carried out according to the following parameters. If one
of the subordinate monitoring functions is triggered, the GCB will be opened.
If the unit is operated in parallel with the mains and the MCB opens, the GCB
will be closed again.
GCB->MCB Mains decoupling is carried out according to the following parameters. If one
of the subordinate monitoring functions is triggered, the GCB will be opened.
If the reply "GCB open" is not present within the delay configured in param‐
eter 3113 Ä p. 421, the MCB will be opened as well.
MCB Mains decoupling is carried out according to the following parameters. If one
of the subordinate monitoring functions is triggered, the MCB will be opened.
MCB->GCB Mains decoupling is carried out according to the following parameters. If one
of the subordinate monitoring functions is triggered, the MCB will be opened.
If the reply "MCB open" is not present within the delay configured in param‐
eter 3113 Ä p. 421, the GCB will be opened as well.
GCB/MCB by Mains decoupling is carried out. If one of the subordinate monitoring functions
LM is triggered, a breaker will be opened, which is determined by the LogicsMan‐
ager equation "15160 Ä p. 421/Ä p. 1038 LM mains decoupling MCB". If it's
status is TRUE, the MCB will be opened. If it's status is FALSE, the GCB will
be opened.
15160 Mains decou‐ 2 Determined by FALSE: If the decoupling is triggered, the GCB will be opened.
pling MCB LogicsManager
87.73 TRUE: If the decoupling is triggered, the MCB will be opened.
[(0 & 1) & 1] Only available in Mains decoupling mode "GCB/MCB by LM".
3113 Mains decou‐ 2 0.2 to 99.9 s If the open signal from the respective circuit breaker cannot be detected
pling feedback within the time configured here, the mains decoupling function performs the
delay [0.4 s] action as configured in parameter 3110 Ä p. 421.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078.
edge detected.
no longer detected.
8848 Mns. decoupling 2 The mains overvoltage 1 alarm can be linked to the mains decoupling func‐
by overfreq. 1 tion, if required.

Configuration

[Default]
On The mains overvoltage 1 trip is linked to the mains decoupling function with all
its consequences.
[Off] The mains overvoltage 1 trip is ignored in the mains decoupling function.
Notes
It is recommended to configure the operating limits (parameter 5810 Ä p. 419
to 5817 Ä p. 419) within the monitoring limits.
by overvolt. 1 tion, if required.
its consequences.
Notes
2423 Mains decou‐ 2 On The QV monitoring function is linked to the mains decoupling function with all
pling by pole its consequences and is assigned to "Delay step 1" (parameter
slip 3283 Ä p. 444).
[Off] The QV monitoring function is ignored in the mains decoupling function.
pling by QV its consequences and is assigned to "Delay step 1" (parameter
3283 Ä p. 444).
4989 Mns. decoupl. 2 On Time-dependent voltage monitoring does cause a decoupling.

by time-dep.
volt. [Off] Time-dependent voltage monitoring does not cause a decoupling.
8847 Mns. decoupling 2 The mains undervoltage 1 alarm can be linked to the mains decoupling func‐
by underfreq. 1 tion, if required.
On The mains undervoltage 1 trip is linked to the mains decoupling function with
all its consequences.
[Off] The mains undervoltage 1 trip is ignored in the mains decoupling function.
Notes
by undervolt. 1 tion, if required.
Notes
8808 Mns. decoupl. 2 On Voltage increase monitoring does cause a decoupling.

by volt. increase
[Off] Voltage increase monitoring does not cause a decoupling.
1733 Test 2 On Activates a test mode which allows a comfortable mains decoupling test.

Configuration

[Default]
[Off] Deactivates the test mode. Mains decoupling is working normal.
Notes
When the test mode is activated a mains decoupling according to the para‐
metrization is triggered, once a mains failure is detected. Thereby the states
of things of the breaker reply are irrelevant.
A retriggering of the mains decoupling can be performed after 0.5 s + "Mns.
decoupling feedback delay" (parameter 3113 Ä p. 421) without leaving the
test mode. As long as the codelevel is ≥ 2 it is possible to switch-off the test
mode manually.
The test mode switches off automatically after one hour since having turned
on or after switching on the operation magnet (engine should start).
4.5.3.5.1 Setup Grid Code AR-–4105

General notes The German Grid Code VDE-AR-N 4105 instructs the handling of
electrical energy sources running parallel to the low voltage grid.
This rule has an impact with some items on the genset control. A
more detailed description relating to that VDE rule is done through
the separated application note “easYgen-3000_VDE-AR-N 4105”
on the manual CD of this product.
Here are some functions which have to be covered according to
the 4105 rule:
n The mains decoupling is executed through following monitors:
– Mains under voltage V<
– Mains over voltage V>
– Mains under frequency f<
– Mains over frequency f>
n Recognizing isolation operation (other decoupling argument)
– Phase shift OR
– df/dt
n Button for Testing the Decoupling Facility
n Single-failure-security including self-monitoring
The VDE-AR-N 4105 demands a Single-failure-proof of the mains

decoupling function. That means that the decoupling of the gener‐
ator from the mains must be always ensured, even if a single ele‐
ment in the system fails. So the system must contain two circuit
breakers with two independent monitoring functions acting individu‐
ally on each breaker. From the perspective of the network provider
that rule pursuits the mains protection but not the availability of the
electrical source, so in case of doubt the generator should be
decoupled from mains.
Woodward solves this requirement with the use of a minimum of
two units acting as a system (for example two easYgens or an
easYgen and an LS-5 with 4105 functionality). The system allows
incorporating more units, so that the availability of the generator
can still be increased.
The demanded two breakers in series are realized through the use
of a GCB and a MCB. If only a GCB is available, the customer
must install another circuit breaker in addition.

Configuration
An important item of the VDE-AR-N 4105 is the Single-Failure-

Diagnostic, at which a minimum of two units exchange their meas‐
urement data and settings over communication interface (usually
CANbus). This allows determining, if the Single-Failure-Proof is
lost and the unit can issue an alarm.
Using Ethernet?
To us Ethernet communication interface for Single-
failure-proof it is mandatory that load-share is
using Ethernet, too. For interface selection refer to
Ä Chapter 4.4.4.3.5 “Load-Share Interface”
on page 299.
Enable 4105 monitoring Monitoring according VDE AR-N 4105 per default is [Off]. It can be
enabled via ToolKit “Configure Monitoring
è Mains: Other monitoring è Setup VDE-AR-N 4105” or via Menu
(see screen Fig. 212).
Fig. 212: Select mains decoupling

4105
Monitoring according AR-–4105

[Default]
3297 Monitoring 2 [Off] The diagnostic function is disabled, no related monitoring is executed.
If the diagnostic function is enabled, the related messages can be received

via CAN 1, CAN 3 or Ethernet.
Notes
The following alarms can be triggered:
n Missing member 4105

n Para. alignment 4105
n Meas.difference 4105
3298 Monitoring 2 Single The diagnostic function is related to one partner unit.
mode
[Multi] The diagnostic function is executed with according partner units.
3299 Device number 2 [01] The device ID of the expected partner unit. This configuration is only valid, if
partner the mode 'single' is enabled.
01 to 64

Configuration

[Default]
1828 Voltage differ‐ 2 [4.0%] This is the voltage measurement tolerance for all participating 4105 partners
ence relating to the mains rated voltage measurement (refer to ID1768 Ä p. 501).
2.0 to 9.9% This is a part within the 4105 diagnostic.
1836 Frequency dif‐ 2 [1.0%] This is the frequency measurement tolerance for all participating 4105 part‐
ference ners relating to the system rated frequency measurement. (refer to
0.5 to 9.9% ID1750 Ä p. 496). This is a part within the 4105 diagnostic.
Monitoring Missing Member AR-–4105

[Default]
5125 Alarm class 2 [C] The alarm class specifies what action should be taken in case of missing
communication with devices(s) being member(s) of the AR-–4105 system.
A to F, control
Notes
on page 1078.
edge detected.

Configuration
Monitoring Parameter Alignment VDE The following parameters are compared for monitoring its align‐
AR-–4105 ment:
Control Parameter ID Parameter
Mains Decoupling 3110 Mains Decoupling
Overfrequency level 2 2856 Monitoring
2860 Limit
2861 Delay
Underfrequency level 2 2906 Monitoring
2910 Limit
2911 Delay
Overvoltage level 2 2956 Monitoring
2960 Limit
2961 Delay
Undervoltage level 2 3006 Monitoring
3010 Limit
3011 Delay
Mains voltage increase 8806 Monitoring
8808 Mains decoupling

volt.incr.
8807 Limit
Change of frequency 3058 Change of frequency
3054 Phase shift: Limit 1-

phase
3055 Phase shift: Limit 3-

phase
3104 Limit (df/dt)
3105 Delay (df/dt)
Disable mains monitoring 15159 Set TRUE
Notes
In applications with LS-5,
this LogicsManager must
be permanent FALSE.
Otherwise the LS-5
parameter alignment
alarm will remain.
Table 92: VDE 4105 alignment: Supervised parameters

[Default]
5131 Alarm class 2 [C] The alarm class specifies what action should be taken if the parameter align‐
ment between the communication devices(s) of the AR-–4105 system is
A to F, control active.
Notes
on page 1078.

Configuration

[Default]
edge detected.
Table 93: VDE 4105 alignment: Monitoring
Monitoring Measurement Difference

AR-–4105
[Default]
5137 Alarm class 2 [C] The alarm class specifies what action should be taken if the measurement dif‐
ference (frequency, 1836 Ä p. 425 or voltage, 1828 Ä p. 425) between the
A to F, control communication devices(s) of the AR-–4105 system differ more than allowed.
Notes
on page 1078.
edge detected.
4.5.3.5.2 Setup Grid Code BDEW (medium voltage guideline)

The BDEW Grid Code instructs the handling of electrical energy
sources running parallel to the medium voltage grid. This rule has
an impact with some items on the genset control. A more detailed
description relating to that BDEW technical guideline can be
ordered directly by the BDEW Germany. With easYgen-3000...
genset control series functions which have to be covered according
to this BDEW rule are supported.
The mains decoupling is executed through following monitors:
n Mains under voltage V<
n Mains under voltage V<<
n Mains over voltage V>
n Mains over voltage V>>
n Mains under frequency f<
n Mains over frequency f>
n Q(V) Monitoring
n Mains Time-Dependent Voltage (FRT)
The Change of frequency monitors (vector/phase shift or df/dt) is
not directly required by BDEW. These monitors are depending on
the according network providers.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Overfrequency (Level...
Other functions related to the BDEW guideline:

n Frequency Depending Derating Of Power. Refer to Ä Chapter
4.4.4.5.5 “Active Power – Frequency Function P(f)”
n Reactive Power Control, alternatively:
– Power Factor Control. Refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.4.2 “Power
Factor Control” on page 276 for details.
– Power Factor Characteristic. Refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.4.2.4
“Power Factor Characteristic” on page 282 for details.
4.5.3.6 Mains Overfrequency (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 81O

General notes There are two overfrequency alarm levels available in the control.
Both alarms are definite time alarms and are illustrated in the figure
below. The figure diagrams a frequency trend and the associated
pickup times and length of the alarms. Monitoring of the frequency
is accomplished in two steps.

indicates "Mains overfreq. 1" or "Mains overfreq. 2"
and the logical command variable "07.06" or
"07.07" will be enabled.

The mains overfrequency Level 2 limit configura‐

tion parameters are located below the mains
decoupling function menu on the display.

[Default]
2850 Monitoring 2 [On] Overfrequency monitoring is carried out according to the following parame‐
ters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may be configured
2856 independent from each other (prerequisite: limit 1 < Level 2 limit).
defined here.
2860 2854: [100.4%]
(Hysteresis:
Notes
0.05 Hz)
(Reset Delay:
80 ms)
2855 Delay 2 0.00 to 99.99 s If the monitored mains frequency value exceeds the threshold value for the
2861 [0.06 s]
Notes
If the monitored mains frequency falls below the threshold (minus the hyste‐
2857 Control
2851: [A]

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Underfrequency (Leve...

[Default]
2857: [B] Notes
on page 1078
2858
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.3.7 Mains Underfrequency (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 81U

General notes There are two underfrequency alarm levels available in the control.
Both alarms are definite time alarms and are illustrated in the figure
below. The figure diagrams a frequency trend and the associated
pickup times and length of the alarms. Monitoring of the frequency
is performed in two steps.

indicates "Mains underfreq. 1" or "Mains under‐
freq. 2" and the logical command variable "07.08"

The mains underfrequency Level 2 limit configura‐

tion parameters are located below the mains
decoupling function menu on the display.

[Default]
2900 Monitoring 2 [On] Underfrequency monitoring is carried out according to the following parame‐
ters. Monitoring is performed at two levels.
2906
Level 1 > Level 2).
Off Monitoring is disabled for limit 1 and/or Level 2 limit.
defined here.
2910 2904: [99.6%]
If this value is reached or fallen below for at least the delay time without inter‐

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Overvoltage (Level 1...

[Default]
(Hysteresis: Notes
0.05 Hz)
(Reset Delay:
80 ms)
2905 Delay 2 0.00 to 99.99 s If the monitored mains frequency value falls below the threshold value for the
2911 2905: [1.50 s]
Notes
2911: [0.06 s]
If the monitored mains frequency exceeds the threshold (plus the hysteresis)
2907 Control
Notes
2901: [A]
2907: [B] on page 1078
2908
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.3.8 Mains Overvoltage (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 59

General notes Voltage is monitored depending on parameter "Mains voltage
measuring" (parameter 1853 Ä p. 501). There are two overvoltage
alarm levels available in the control. Both alarms are definite time
alarms and are illustrated in the figure below. The figure diagrams
a frequency trend and the associated pickup times and length of
the alarms. Monitoring of the voltage is done in two steps.

indicates "Mains overvoltage 1" or "Mains over‐

The mains overvoltage Level 2 limit configuration

parameters are located below the mains decou‐
pling function menu on the display.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Overvoltage (Level 1...

[Default]
2950 Monitoring 2 [On] Overvoltage monitoring is carried out according to the following parameters.
2956 pendent from each other (prerequisite: limit 1 < Level 2 limit).
defined here.
2960 2954: [108.0%]
(Hysteresis:
Notes
0.7%)
This value refers to the Mains rated voltage (parameter 1768 Ä p. 501).
(Reset Delay:
80 ms)
2955 Delay 2 0.00 to 999.00 s If the monitored mains voltage exceeds the threshold value for the delay time
2961 2955: [1.50 s]
Notes
2961: [0.06 s]
If the monitored mains voltage falls below the threshold (minus the hysteresis)
2957 Control
Notes
2951: [A]
2957: [B] on page 1078
2958
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
by overvolt. 1 tion, if required.
its consequences.
Notes

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Undervoltage (Level ...
4.5.3.9 Mains Undervoltage (Level 1 & 2) ANSI# 27

General notes Voltage is monitored depending on parameter "Mains voltage
measuring" (parameter 1853 Ä p. 501). There are two under‐
voltage alarm levels available in the control. Both alarms are defi‐
nite time alarms and are illustrated in the figure below. The figure
diagrams a frequency trend and the associated pickup times and
length of the alarms. Monitoring of the voltage is done in two steps.

indicates "Mains undervoltage 1" or "Mains under‐
Refer Ä Chapter 9.1.1 “Triggering Characteristics” on page 757

The mains undervoltage Level 2 limit configuration

parameters are located below the mains decou‐
pling function menu on the display.

[Default]
3000 Monitoring 2 [On] Undervoltage monitoring is carried out according to the following parameters.
3006 pendent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1 limit < Level 2 limit).
defined here.
3010 3004: [92.0%]
(Hysteresis:
Notes
0.7%)
This value refers to the "Mains rated voltage" (parameter 1768 Ä p. 501).
(Reset Delay:
80 ms) Minimum value follows BDEW requirement.
3005 Delay 2 0.00 to 99.99 s If the monitored mains voltage falls below the threshold value for the delay
3011 3005: [1.50 s]
Notes
3011: [0.06 s]
If the monitored mains voltage exceeds the threshold (plus the hysteresis)
3007 Control
Notes
3001: [A]
3007: [B] on page 1078
3008

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Voltage Increase

[Default]
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
by undervolt. 1 tion, if required.
Notes
4.5.3.10 Mains Voltage Increase

General notes Voltage is monitored depending on parameter "Monitoring" (param‐
eter 8806 Ä p. 434). This function allows the monitoring of the
voltage quality over a longer time period. It is realized as a 10
minute moving average. The function is only active, if mains is
within the operating range. If "Mains voltage measuring" (param‐
eter 1853 Ä p. 501) is configured to a three-phase measurement,
the slow voltage increase alarm is monitoring the individual three-
phase voltages of the mains according to parameter “AND charac‐
teristics” (parameter 8849 Ä p. 434). The parameter "Mains decou‐
pling volt. incr." (parameter 8808 Ä p. 435) determines if a voltage
increase shall trigger a mains decoupling or not.

indicates "Mains volt. increase". The alarm can be
incorporated into the mains decoupling function.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Voltage Increase
The average is set to "Mains rated voltage"

(parameter 1768 Ä p. 501) if:
– Frequency is not in the operating range OR
– Monitoring (parameter 8806 Ä p. 434) is "Off"
OR
– Monitoring is "Delayed by engine speed"
(parameter 8833 Ä p. 435) OR
– Monitoring is tripped AND the measured
voltage is again in the operating range
Back synchronization is only possible, if:
– The 10 minute average value is smaller than
the defined limit AND
– The actual measured value is inside the oper‐
ating range AND
– The mains settling time is over
Please be aware that if "Mains voltage monitoring"

(parameter 1771 Ä p. 417) is configured to "All"
and the mains voltage increase monitoring (param‐
eter 8806 Ä p. 434) is used, that this function only
monitors "Phase - neutral".

[Default]
8806 Monitoring 2 On Voltage increase monitoring is carried out according to the following parame‐
ters.
[Off] No monitoring is carried out.
8807 Limit 2 100 to 150% The percentage voltage value that is to be monitored is defined here.
[110%] If the average voltage over 10 minutes is higher, the action specified by the
alarm class is initiated.
Notes
This value refers to the "Mains rated voltage" (parameter 1768 Ä p. 501).
8849 AND character‐ 2 On If the 10 minute voltage averages of all phases exceed the limit, the moni‐
istics toring is tripping.
[Off] If the 10 minute voltage average of at least one phase exceeds the limit, the
monitoring is tripping.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Time-Dependent Volta...

[Default]
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
8808 Mns. decoupl. 2 On Voltage increase monitoring does cause a decoupling.

by volt. increase
[Off] Voltage increase monitoring does not cause a decoupling.
8850 Volt. incr. 0 — This visualization value shows the current 10 minute average voltage.
average
4.5.3.11 Mains Time-Dependent Voltage

General notes
Two Time Dependent Mains Voltage Monitors
Available
Both monitors behave similar but each with a sep‐
arate Fault-Ride-Through (FRT) curve.
Example of a Time Dependent

Mains Voltage Curve
Fig. 213: Time-dependent voltage monitoring curve

P1 0.00 s ￫ 45.0% P5 1.50 s ￫ 90.0%
P2 0.15 s ￫ 45.0% P6 3.00 s ￫ 90.0%
P3 0.15 s ￫ 70.0% P7 4.00 s ￫ 90.0%
P4 0.70 s ￫ 70.0%

Configuration
Fallback threshold 90.0% Fallback time 1.00 s

Initial threshold 80.0%
General settings for Mains decoupling

and Monitoring Voltage 1 - 3 Find parameters ...
Find parameters in two menus:
– “Configuration è Configure Monitoring
è Mains decoupling è General ...”
– “Configuration è Configure Monitoring
è Mains: Frequency / Voltage
è ... time-dependent voltage”

[Default]
4989 Mns. decoupl. 2 Mains decoupling by FRT monitoring.

by time-dep.
volt. On Time-dependent voltage monitoring does cause a decoupling.
[Off] Time-dependent voltage monitoring does not cause a decoupling.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078
Table 94: Time Dependent Voltage Monitoring settings
4.5.3.11.1 Time Dependent Mains Voltage Monitor 1

This monitoring function is supporting a dynamic stabilization of
mains. To maintain the VDE-AR-N 4105 and VDE-AR-N 4110 grid
code (2019) up to 3 FRT (Fault-Ride-Through) curves can be
defined.
The voltage is monitored depending on parameter "Mains voltage
measuring" (parameter 1853 Ä p. 501).
Furthermore it can be configured either as undervoltage or over‐
voltage monitoring ( “underrun” or “overrun” selected with param‐
eter "Monitoring at 4953 Ä p. 438). If the measured voltage of at
least N phase (N is defined with parameter 4960) falls below/
exceeds the configured "Initial threshold" (parameter
4970 Ä p. 438), the time-dependent voltage monitoring sequence
starts and the voltage threshold will change in time according to
the configured threshold curve points (see figure Fig. 213).

Configuration
If the measured voltage falls below/exceeds this curve, the moni‐

toring function triggers and LogicsManager 07.28 becomes TRUE.
The mains decoupling function is incorporated, if configured. If the
measured voltage falls below/exceeds the configured "Fallback
threshold" (parameter 4978 Ä p. 438) for at least the configured
"Fallback time" (parameter 4968 Ä p. 438), the time-dependent
voltage monitoring sequence will be reset.
The threshold curve results from seven configurable points and a
linear interpolation between these points. Fig. 213 shows an
example of a Low-Voltage-Ride-Through (LVRT) curve for time-
dependent voltage monitoring. The curve is configured by default
according to a typical grid code requirement.
Rules for configuration

The time points should always have an ascending
order. The fallback threshold (parameter
4978 Ä p. 438) should always be configured to a
value higher/lower than the initial threshold
The monitoring on undervoltage over the undervoltage curve (or

overvoltage or overvoltage curve) is always active, if the
“Monitoring” (parameter 4950 Ä p. 438) is enabled. A mains
decoupling is only executed, if the generator runs parallel to mains.
The monitor behaves according to the configured “AND
characteristic” (parameter 4960). When the AND characteristic is
configured to "On", all 3 phases are taken into account. Only if all
phases are below/above the configurable curve, the monitor will
trip. When the AND characteristic is configured to "Off", the single
phases are taken into account. Even if only one phase runs below/
above the configurable curve, the monitor will trip.
The monitoring starts with passing the initial threshold. The tripping
time is determined by the voltage deviation and its according curve
location. The monitoring is disabled, if the voltage value (values)
have crossed the fallback threshold. The monitor trips the Logi‐
csManager 07.28 command variable 10877.
FRT Monitoring Characteristic The monitoring type influences the FRT:

Parameter "Mains voltage monitoring" 1771 Ä p. 417 determines,
if the Ph-Ph, Ph-N, or all measurements are used.
If type "All" is available and configured, and 3Ph4W is configured,
"Time dependent Voltage Monitoring" is calculated with phase-
phase and phase-neutral voltages. If All and 1Ph3W is configured,
only PH-N values are used.
The mains time-dependent monitoring works with configurable FRT
characteristics. In conjunction with mains voltage measuring
(ID1853) and mains voltage monitoring (see section before) dif‐
ferent monitoring procedures take place.

Configuration
Bloking ROCOF Monitor During Due the higher prioritization of the Dynamic Mains Stabilization
Dynamic Mains Stabilization (FRT) as the ROCOF monitor, the ROCOF monitor must be disa‐
bled for longest 5 seconds when any FRT curve was initiated.
Therefore each FRT (=Time-dependent voltage monitoring) func‐
tion provides a flag. The flag is set, if the particular initiation
threshold is passed. The flag is reset if all monitored voltages are
back in band (parameter 4978 Ä p. 438).
The 3 flags are OR’ed and results in one “FRT initiated” flag. This
flag will be kept TRUE for maximal 5 seconds. Finally this ROCOF
blocking flag will be inverted and entered as LM Command Vari‐
able “07.34 FRT ROCOF enable”.
Time-dep. voltage 1
[Default]
4950 Monitoring 2 On Time-dependent voltage monitoring is carried out according to the following
parameters.
4960 Characteristics 2 The mains time-dependent monitoring works with different characteristics.
[1-phase] Uses the lowest/highest phase for triggering the alarm. If "1771 Mains voltage
monitoring" is configured to “All”, the alarm will be triggered if at least one
phase L-L or at least one phases L-N is out of range and will be reset if all
phases of L-L and all phases of L-N are in range.
2-phase Uses the two lowest/highest phases for triggering the alarm. If "1771 Mains
voltage monitoring" is configured to “All”, the alarm will be triggered if at least
two phases L-L or at least two phases L-N are out of range and will be reset if
at least two phases of L-L and at least two phases of L-N are in range.
3-phase Uses all three phases (symmetric condition) for triggering the alarm. If "1771
Mains voltage monitoring" is configured to “All”, the alarm will be triggered if
all phases L-L or all phases L-N are out of range and will be reset if at least
one phase of L-L and at least one phase of L-N is in range.
4953 Monitoring at 2 Selects whether the system shall do over- or undervoltage monitoring.
[Underrun] The undervoltage monitoring is carried out (The monitoring function triggers if
the measured voltage is below the curve).
Overrun The overvoltage monitoring is carried out (The monitoring function triggers if
the measured voltage exceeds the curve).
4970 Init threshold 2 0.0 to 150.0% The time-dependent voltage monitoring initial threshold is configured here. If
the measured voltage falls below/exceeds this threshold, the monitoring
[80.0%] sequence starts and the voltage threshold will change in time according to the
configured threshold curve points.
If the measured voltage falls below/exceeds this curve, the monitoring func‐
tion triggers and the configured relay will energize.
4978 Fallback 2 0.0 to 150.0% The time-dependent voltage monitoring fallback voltage is configured here. If
threshold the measured voltage falls below/exceeds the voltage configured here for at
[90.0%] least the configured "Fallback time", the monitoring sequence will be reset.
Notes
This parameter should always be configured to a value higher/lower than the
"Init threshold" (parameter 4970 Ä p. 438) for proper operation.
The parameter "Point 7 voltage" (parameter 4977 Ä p. 439) is used as fall‐
back threshold if it is configured to a value higher/lower than the parameter
"Fallback threshold" (parameter 4978 Ä p. 438).
4968 Fallback time 2 0.00 to 320.00 s The time-dependent voltage monitoring fallback time is configured here. If the
measured voltage falls below/exceeds the configured "Fallback threshold"
[1.00 s] (parameter 4978 Ä p. 438) for at least the time configured here, the moni‐
toring sequence will be reset.

Configuration

[Default]
4971 Point {x} voltage 2 0.0 to 150.0% The voltage values of time-dependent voltage monitoring voltage points are
configured here.
4972 [x = 1 to 7] 4971: [45.0%]
4973 4972: [45.0%]
4974 4973: [70.0%]
4975 4974: [70.0%]
4976 4975: [90.0%]
4977 4976: [90.0%]
4977: [90.0%]
Notes
Please avoid a setting between 0.1% and 5.0%.
4961 Point {x} time 2 0.00 to 320.00 s The time values of time-dependent voltage monitoring time points are config‐
ured here.
4962 [x = 1 to 7] 4961: [0.00 s]
4963 4962: [0.15 s]
4964 4963: [0.15 s]
4965 4964: [0.70 s]
4966 4965: [1.50 s]
4967 4966: [3.00 s]
4967: [4.00 s]

The Time dependent voltage monitoring 2 is an additional inde‐
pendent FRT monitoring, which behaves like the Time dependent
voltage monitoring 1 described in the previous chapter.
It serves a LogicsManager 07.31 command variable "Time-dep.
voltage 2" 11750 to trip a relay or to incorporate the monitoring into
the mains decoupling feature of the device.
The alarm class and the self-acknowledge feature is taken from the
original time dependent voltage monitoring (see Ä “General set‐
tings for Mains decoupling and Monitoring Voltage 1 - 3”
on page 436.
Time-dep. voltage 2
[Default]
4954 Monitoring 2 On Time-dependent voltage 2 monitoring is carried out according to the following
parameters.
Notes. It is an additional independent FRT monitoring. It serves a LogicsMan‐

ager command variable to trip a relay or to incorporate the monitoring into the
mains decoupling function of the device. The alarm class and the self-
acknowledge setting is shared with the other time dependent voltage moni‐
toring. (Id 4951 and Id 4959)
[Underrun] The undervoltage monitoring is carried out (The monitoring function triggers if
Overrun The overvoltage monitoring is carried out (The monitoring function triggers if

Configuration

[Default]
4990 Init threshold 2 0.0 to 200.0% The time-dependent voltage 2 monitoring initial threshold is configured here.
If the measured voltage falls below/exceeds this threshold, the monitoring
configured threshold curve points.
If the measured voltage 2 falls below/exceeds this curve, the monitoring func‐
tion triggers and the configured relay will energize.
4998 Fallback 2 0.0 to 200.0% The time-dependent voltage 2 monitoring fallback voltage is configured here.
threshold If the measured voltage falls below/exceeds the voltage configured here for at
[90.0%] least the configured "Fallback time" (parameter 4988 Ä p. 440), the moni‐
Notes
"Fallback threshold" (parameter 4998 Ä p. 440/Ä p. 441).
4988 Fallback time 2 0.00 to 320.00 s The time-dependent voltage 2 monitoring fallback time is configured here. If
the measured voltage falls below/exceeds the configured "Fallback threshold"
[1.00 s] (parameter 4998 Ä p. 440/Ä p. 441) for at least the time configured here, the
monitoring sequence will be reset.
4991 Point {x} voltage 2 0.0 to 200.0% The voltage values of time-dependent voltage 2 monitoring voltage points are
(2) configured here.
4992 4991: [10.0%]
[x = 1 to 7]
4993 4992: [10.0%]
4994 4993: [90.0%]
4995 4994: [90.0%]
4996 4995: [90.0%]
4997 4996: [90.0%]
4997: [90.0%]
Notes
Please avoid a setting between 0.1% and 5.0%.
4981 Point {x} time 2 0.00 to 320.00 s The time values of time-dependent voltage 2 monitoring time points are con‐
figured here.
4982 [x = 1 to 7] 4981: [0.00 s]
4983 4982: [0.15 s]
4984 4983: [1.50 s]
4985 4984: [10.00 s]
4986 4985: [20.00 s]
4987 4986: [30.00 s]
4987: [40.00 s]

Configuration

The Time dependent voltage monitoring 3 is an additional inde‐
pendent FRT monitoring, which behaves like the Time dependent
voltage monitoring 1 described in the previous chapter.
It serves a LogicsManager 07.33 command variable "Time-dep.
voltage 3" 11750 to trip a relay or to incorporate the monitoring into
the mains decoupling feature of the device.
The alarm class and the self-acknowledge feature is taken from the
original time dependent voltage monitoring (see Ä “General set‐
tings for Mains decoupling and Monitoring Voltage 1 - 3”
on page 436.
Time-dep. voltage 3
[Default]
9130 Monitoring 2 On Enabling the time-dependent voltage monitoring 3. It is an additional inde‐

pendent FRT monitoring. It serves a LogicsManager command variable to trip
a relay or to incorporate the monitoring into the mains decoupling function of
the device. The alarm class and the self-acknowledge setting is shared with
the other time dependent voltage monitoring. (Id 4951 and Id 4959)
Notes. It is an additional independent FRT monitoring. It serves a LogicsMan‐

ager command variable to trip a relay or to incorporate the monitoring into the
mains decoupling function of the device. The alarm class and the self-
acknowledge setting is shared with the other time dependent voltage moni‐
toring. (Id 4951 and Id 4959)
Underrun The undervoltage monitoring is carried out (The monitoring function triggers if
[Overrun] The overvoltage monitoring is carried out (The monitoring function triggers if
9148 Init threshold 2 0.0 to 200.0% The time-dependent voltage monitoring initial threshold is configured here. If
the measured voltage falls below/exceeds this threshold, the monitoring
configured threshold curve points. If the measured voltage falls below/
exceeds this curve, the monitoring function triggers and the configured alarm /
decoupling will be initiated.
4998 Fallback 2 0.0 to 200.0% The time-dependent voltage monitoring fallback voltage is configured here. If
threshold the measured voltage falls below/exceeds the voltage configured here for at
[110.0%] least the configured "Fallback time" (parameter 4988 Ä p. 440), the moni‐

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
"Fallback threshold" (parameter 4998 Ä p. 440/Ä p. 441).
9147 Fallback time 2 0.00 to 320.00 s The time-dependent voltage monitoring fallback time is configured here. If the
measured voltage falls below/exceeds the configured "Fallback threshold"
[1.00 s] (parameter 4998 Ä p. 440/Ä p. 441) for at least the time configured here, the
monitoring sequence will be reset.
9149 Point {x} voltage 2 0.0 to 150.0% The voltage values of time-dependent voltage monitoring voltage points are
(2) configured here.
9150 9149: [125.0%]
[x = 1 to 7]
9151 9150: [125.0%]
9152 9151: [120.0%]
9153 9152: [120.0%]
9154 9153: [115.0%]
9155 9154: [115.0%]
9155: [110.0%]
Notes
Avoid a setting between 0.1% and 5.0%.
9140 Point {x} time 2 0.00 to 320.00 s The time values of time-dependent voltage monitoring time points are config‐
ured here.
9141 [x = 1 to 7] 9140: [0.00 s]
9142 9141: [0.10 s]
9143 9142: [1.10 s]
9144 9143: [5.00 s]
9145 9144: [5.00 s]
9146 9145: [60.00 s]
9146: [60.00 s]
4.5.3.11.4 Time dependent voltage monitoring – Decoupling Function

The 3 Time dependent voltage monitorings can be allocated to the
mains decoupling function. With a configuration general all 3 FRT
monitors are included.

[Default]
4989 Mns. decoupl. 2 Mains decoupling by FRT monitoring.

by time-dep.
volt. On Time-dependent voltage monitoring does cause a decoupling.
[Off] Time-dependent voltage monitoring does not cause a decoupling.
Alarm flags (latched) Time dependent voltage 1 (FRT1) is LM flag 07.28, ID10877
Time dependent voltage 2 (FRT2) is LM flag 07.31, ID11750
Time dependent voltage 3 (FRT3) is LM flag 07.33, ID11751
For details, refer to Ä Chapter 9.4.1.6 “Group 07: J1939 Values 1”
on page 1052.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > QV Monitoring
4.5.3.12 QV Monitoring
General notes In case of mains undervoltage some grid codes require a special
monitoring function to avoid the import of inductive reactive power
at the mains interchange point. The monitoring function measures
close to the generator. For this reason the QV monitoring is a func‐
tion of generator voltage and generator reactive power.
QV monitoring is triggered if the following conditions are fulfilled:
(Refer to Fig. 214 for details)
n QV monitoring is configured to "On" (parameter 3292 Ä p. 444)
n Measured reactive power is higher than the configured “Reac‐
tive power threshold” (parameter 3291 Ä p. 444)
n Measured voltages are below the configured “Limit under‐
voltage” (parameter 3285 Ä p. 444)
As a result Timer 1 and Timer 2 are starting. If the delay time
"Delay step 1" (parameter 3283 Ä p. 444) has exceeded, Logi‐
csManager 07.29 becomes TRUE and the corresponding alarm
message "QV monitoring 1" is indicated. If the delay time "Delay
step 2" (parameter 3284 Ä p. 444) has exceeded, LogicsManager
07.30 becomes TRUE and the corresponding alarm message "QV
monitoring 2" is indicated.
If parameter “Mains decoupling by QV” (parameter 3296 Ä p. 445)
is configured to "On" the decoupling function is assigned to “Delay
step 1” (parameter 3283 Ä p. 444).
– The LogicsManager command flags 07.29 and

07.30 can be additionally used to cause other
actions according to the corresponding regula‐
tions of the grid.
– The QV Monitoring function according the
German grid code VDE-AR-N 4105 depends
on the parameter 1770 Ä p. 369 "phase-
phase/phase-neutral monitoring".

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > QV Monitoring
Fig. 214: QV monitoring - schematic

[Default]
3292 Monitoring 2 On QV monitoring is carried out according to the following parameters.
3285 Limit under‐ 2 45 to 150% The percentage voltage value that is to be monitored is defined here.
voltage
[85%] If the voltages of all phases (one phase in 1Ph 2W system) are below this
limit, the voltage condition for tripping the monitoring function is TRUE.
Notes
This value refers to the "Generator rated voltage" (parameter 1766 Ä p. 497).
3291 Reactive power 2 2 to 100% The percentage reactive value that is to be monitored is defined here.
threshold
[5%] If the absolute value of reactive power Q is higher than this threshold, the
reactive power condition for tripping the monitoring function is TRUE.
Notes
This value refers to the "Gen. rated react. power [kvar]" (parameter
1758 Ä p. 497).
3283 Delay step 1 2 0.10 to 99.99 s If the QV monitoring conditions are met, for the delay time configured here, an
alarm "QV monitoring 1" will be issued and LogicsManager 07.29 becomes
[0.50 s] TRUE.
Notes
The decoupling function is only activated if "Mains decoupling by QV" (param‐
eter 3296 Ä p. 445) is configured to "On".
3284 Delay step 2 2 0.10 to 99.99 s If the QV monitoring conditions are met, for the delay time configured here, an
alarm "QV monitoring 2" will be issued and LogicsManager 07.30 becomes
[1.50 s] TRUE.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Change Of Frequency

[Default]
3280 Alarm class 2 Class The alarm class specifies what action should be taken when at least one
A/B/C/D/E/F, delay has been exceeded.
Control
[B]
Notes
The alarm class is valid for parameter 3283 Ä p. 444 and 3284 Ä p. 444.
on page 1078
Notes
The self acknowledge is valid for parameter 3283 Ä p. 444 and
3284 Ä p. 444.
pling by QV its consequences and is assigned to "Delay step 1" (parameter
3283 Ä p. 444).
4.5.3.13 Change Of Frequency

Phase shift A vector/phase shift is defined as the sudden variation of the
voltage curve which may be caused by a major generator load
change. It usually occurs, if the utility opens the MCB, which
causes a load change for the genset.
The genset control measures the duration of a cycle, where a new
measurement is started with each voltage passing through zero.
The measured cycle duration will be compared with an internal
quartz-calibrated reference time to determine the cycle duration dif‐
ference of the voltage signal.
The phase shift monitoring is a very sensitive func‐

tionality and reacts according to the settings on
each sinus wave constellation.
Please be aware that under special circumstances
it may come to a phase shift trip, when switching
elements are taken into the mains measurement
lines because mains voltage sensing lines are
switched nearby the genset control.
A vector/phase shift as shown in Fig. 215 causes a premature or

delayed zero passage. The determined cycle duration difference
corresponds with the occurring phase shift angle.
The monitoring may be carried out three-phased or one/three-
phased. Different limits may be configured for one-phase and
three-phase monitoring. The vector/phase shift monitor can also be
used as an additional method to decouple from the mains. Vector/
Fig. 215: Phase shift phase shift monitoring is only enabled after the monitored voltage
exceeds 50% of the PT secondary rated voltage.

Configuration
Function "Voltage cycle duration not within the per‐

missible range"
The voltage cycle duration exceeds the configured
limit value for the phase/vector shift. The result is,
that the power circuit breaker that disconnects from
the mains, is opened, the message "Mains phase
shift" is displayed, and the logical command vari‐
able "07.14" is enabled.
The prerequisite for phase/vector shift monitoring
is that the generator is operating in a mains par‐
allel operation (the MCB and GCB are both
closed).
df/dt (ROCOF) df/dt (rate of change of frequency) monitoring measures the sta‐
bility of the frequency. The frequency of a source will vary due to
changing loads and other effects. The rate of these frequency
changes due to the load variances is relatively high compared to
those of a large network.
Function "Rate of change of frequency not within

permissible limits"
The control unit calculates the unit of measure per
unit of time. The df/dt is measured over 4 sine
waves to ensure that it is differentiated from a
phase shift. This results in a minimum response
time of approximately 100 ms (at 50 Hz).

[Default]
3058 Change of fre‐ 2 Off Monitoring is disabled.

quency
[Phase shift] Phase shift monitoring is carried out according to the parameters described in
Ä “Phase shift” on page 445.
df/dt df/dt monitoring is carried out according to the parameters described in
Ä “df/dt (ROCOF)” on page 446.
Phase shift df/dt Phase shift monitoring and df/dt monitoring is carried out. Tripping occurs if
phase shift or df/dt is triggered.
3053 Phase shift: 2 [1- and 3 phase] During single-phase voltage phase/vector shift monitoring, tripping occurs if
Monitoring the phase/vector shift exceeds the configured threshold value (param‐
eter 3054 Ä p. 447) in at least one of the three phases.
3 phase During three-phase voltage phase/vector shift monitoring, tripping occurs only
if the phase/vector shift exceeds the specified threshold value (param‐
eter 3055 Ä p. 447) in all three phases within 2 cycles.
Notes
If a phase/vector shift occurs in one or two phases, the single-phase
threshold value (parameter 3054 Ä p. 447) is taken into consideration; if a
phase/vector shift occurs in all three phases, the three-phase threshold value
(parameter 3055 Ä p. 447) is taken into consideration. Single phase moni‐
toring is very sensitive and may lead to nuisance tripping if the selected
phase angle settings are too small.
3 phase mains phase shift monitoring is only enabled if Mains voltage meas‐
uring (parameter 1853 Ä p. 501) is configured to "3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W".

Configuration

[Default]
3054 Phase shift: 2 3 to 30° If the electrical angle of the mains voltage shifts more than this configured
Limit 1 phase value in any single phase, an alarm with the class configured in param‐
[20°] eter 3051 Ä p. 447 is initiated.
Depending on the configured mains decoupling procedure (param‐
eter 3110 Ä p. 421), the GCB, MCB, or an external CB will be opened.
3055 Phase shift: 2 3 to 30° If the electrical angle of the mains voltage shifts more than this configured
Limit 3 phase value in all three phases, an alarm with the class configured in param‐
[8°] eter 3051 Ä p. 447 is initiated.
Depending on the configured mains decoupling procedure (param‐
eter 3110 Ä p. 421), the GCB, MCB, or an external CB will be opened.
3051 Phase shift: 2 Class Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what
Alarm class A/B/C/D/E/F, action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Control
Notes
[B]
on page 1078.
3052 Phase shift: Self 2 [Yes] The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no longer
No The control does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault condition is
3056 Phase shift: 2 [Always] Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled.
Enabled
engine monitoring".
For xx = 1 to 32: Defining of an own release flag through Logicsmanager equations.

96.{xx}
LM: Flag{xx}
FRT ROCOF The dynamic mains stabilization according to VDE-AR-N 4110/4105 requires
enable a temporary blocking of the ROCOF monitor. Please refer to the according
VDE-AR-N rule.
3104 df/dt: df/dt Limit 2 0.1 to 9.9 Hz/s The df/dt threshold is defined here. If this value is reached or exceeded for at
least the delay time without interruption, an alarm with the class configured in
[2.6 Hz/s] parameter 3101 Ä p. 447 is initiated.
(Hysteresis: 0.1 Depending on the configured mains decoupling procedure (param‐
Hz/s) eter 3110 Ä p. 421), the GCB, MCB, or an external CB will be opened.
(Reset Delay:
80 ms)
3105 df/dt: Delay 2 0.10 to 2.00 s If the monitored rate of df/dt exceeds the threshold value for the delay time
[0.10 s]
If the monitored df/dt exceeds the threshold (plus the hysteresis) again before
the delay expires the time will be reset.
3101 df/dt: Alarm 2 Class Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what
class A/B/C/D/E/F, action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Control
Notes
[B]
on page 1078.
3102 df/dt: Self 2 Yes The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no longer
3103 df/dt: Enabled 2 [Always] Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Voltage Phase Rotat...

[Default]
engine monitoring".
For xx = 1 to 32: Defining of an own release flag through Logicsmanager equations.

96.{xx}
LM: Flag{xx}
FRT ROCOF The dynamic mains stabilization according to VDE-AR-N 4110/4105 requires
enable a temporary blocking of the ROCOF monitor. Please refer to the according
VDE-AR-N rule.
4.5.3.14 Mains Voltage Phase Rotation

General notes
NOTICE!
equipment
– Please ensure during installation that all vol‐
tages applied to this unit are wired correctly to
both sides of the circuit breaker.
trol unit and/or generation equipment due to
closing the breaker asynchronous or with mis‐
matched phase rotations and phase rotation moni‐
toring enabled at all connected components
(engine, generator, breakers, cable, busbars, etc.).
conditions:
measuring points (i.e. the voltage transformer
in front and behind the circuit breaker)
– The measuring voltages are wired without
angular phase shift or interruption from the
measuring point to the control unit
– The measuring voltages are wired to the cor‐
rect terminals of the control unit (i.e. L1 of the
generator is connected with the terminal of the
control unit which is intended for the L1 of the
generator)
– The LogicsManager function "Enable MCB"
(refer to parameter 12923 Ä p. 263/Ä p. 1038)
is false in case of a incorrect rotation field

rotation of the voltages and the configured phase rotation to ensure
they are identical.
is "L1-L3-L2".

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Voltage Phase Rotat...
If the control is configured for a clockwise rotation and the voltages

into the unit are calculated as counterclockwise the alarm will be
initiated. The direction of configured rotation being monitored by
the control unit is displayed on the screen.

indicates "Mns.ph.rot. mismatch" and the logical
This monitoring function is only enabled if Mains

voltage measuring (parameter 1853 Ä p. 501) is
configured to "3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W" and the
measured voltage exceeds 50 % of the rated
voltage (parameter 1768 Ä p. 501) or if Mains
voltage measuring (parameter 1853 Ä p. 501) is
configured to "1Ph 2W" (in this case, the phase
rotation is not evaluated, but defined by the
1Ph2W phase rotation (param‐
eter 1859 Ä p. 496)).

[Default]
ters.
3974 Mains phase 2 [CW] The three-phase measured mains voltage is rotating CW (clock-wise; that
rotation means the voltage rotates in L1-L2-L3 direction; standard setting).
CCW The three-phase measured mains voltage is rotating CCW (counter clock-
Control
[B]
Notes
CAUTION: If an alarm class that leads to an engine shutdown (alarm class C
or higher) is configured into this parameter, a main phase rotation alarm may
lead to a genset shutdown due to an alarm of class C or higher.
on page 1078
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Import Power (Level ...
4.5.3.15 Mains Import Power (Level 1 & 2)

General notes
It is possible to monitor two independently configurable mains
import power limit values. This function makes it possible to initiate
external load shedding.

indicates "Mains import power 1" or
"Mains import power 2" and the logical command
variable "07.21" or "07.22" will be enabled.

[Default]
3200 Monitoring 2 On Mains import power monitoring is carried out according to the following
parameters. Monitoring is performed at two levels. Both values may be con‐
3206 figured independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1 limit < Level 2
limit).
3215 Monitoring at 2 [Overrun] The monitored value must exceed the limit to be considered as out of limits.
3216 Underrun The monitored value must fall below the limit to be considered as out of limits.
3204 Limit 2 0 to +150.00% If this threshold value has been exceeded or fallen below (depending on the
setting of parameter 3215 Ä p. 450 or 3216 Ä p. 450) for at least the delay
3210 3204: [80.00%] time (parameter 3205 Ä p. 450 or 3211 Ä p. 450), the action specified by the
3210: [100.00%] alarm class is initiated.
Notes
This value refers to the Mains rated active power (parameter 1748 Ä p. 501).
3213 Hysteresis 2 0 to 99.99% The monitored mains power level must return within the limits configured in
parameter 3204 Ä p. 450 or 3210 Ä p. 450 plus or minus (depending on the
3214 [0.01%] setting of parameter 3215 Ä p. 450 or 3216 Ä p. 450) the value configured
(Reset Delay: here, to reset the alarm.
80 ms)
3205 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored mains import power falls below or exceeds (depending on the
setting of parameter 3215 Ä p. 450 or 3216 Ä p. 450) the threshold value for
3211 [1.00 s] the delay time configured here, an alarm will be issued.
Notes
If the monitored mains import power exceeds or falls below the threshold
(plus or minus the hysteresis configured in parameter 3213 Ä p. 450 or
3214 Ä p. 450) before the delay expires the time will be reset.
3207 Control
Notes
3201: [A]
3207: [B] on page 1078
3202 Self acknowl‐ 2 3202: [Yes] The control unit automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
3208
3208: [No] The control unit does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault condi‐
3209

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Export Power (Level ...

[Default]
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.3.16 Mains Export Power (Level 1 & 2)

General notes It is possible to monitor two independently configurable mains
export power limit values. This function makes it possible to initiate
external load shedding.

indicates "Mains export power 1" or
"Mains export power 2" and the logical command
variable "07.23" or "07.24" will be enabled.

[Default]
3225 Monitoring 2 On Mains export power monitoring is carried out according to the following
3233 figured independent from each other (prerequisite: Level 1 limit < Level 2
limit).
3232 Monitoring at 2 [Overrun] The monitored value must exceed the limit to be considered as out of limits.
3240 Underrun The monitored value must fall below the limit to be considered as out of limits.
3229 Limit 2 0 to +150.00% If this threshold value has been exceeded or fallen below (depending on the
setting of parameter 3232 Ä p. 451 or 3240 Ä p. 451) for at least the delay
3237 3229: [80.00%] time (parameter 3230 Ä p. 451 or 3238 Ä p. 451), the action specified by the
3237: [100.00%] alarm class is initiated.
Notes
This value refers to the Mains rated active power (parameter 1748 Ä p. 501).
3231 Hysteresis 2 0 to 99.99% The monitored mains power level must return within the limits configured in
parameter 3229 Ä p. 451 or 3237 Ä p. 451 plus or minus (depending on the
3239 [0.01%] setting of parameter 3232 Ä p. 451 or 3240 Ä p. 451) the value configured
(Reset Delay: here, to reset the alarm.
80 ms)
3230 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored mains export power falls below or exceeds (depending on the
setting of ns export power falls below or exceeds (depending on the setting of
3238 [1.00 s] parameter 3232 Ä p. 451 or 3240 Ä p. 451) the threshold value for the delay
Notes
If the monitored mains import power exceeds or falls below the threshold
(plus or minus the hysteresis configured in parameter 3231 Ä p. 451 or
3239 Ä p. 451) before the delay expires the time will be reset.
3234 Control
Notes
3226: [A]
3234: [B] on page 1078

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Engine/Mains Active Power ...

[Default]
3227 Self acknowl‐ 2 3227: [Yes] The control unit automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
3235
3235: [No] The control unit does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault condi‐
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.3.17 Engine/Mains Active Power Mismatch

General notes If enabled, this monitoring function becomes only active if gener‐
ator power control is enabled and the active power setpoint is con‐
figured to "Import" or "Export" (refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.4.5 “Load
Control” on page 313). If the measured import or export power
deviates from the power setpoint by a value exceeding the limit
configured in parameter 2935 Ä p. 452 for a time exceeding the
delay configured in parameter 2933 Ä p. 452, an alarm will be
issued.

indicates "Mns act.pwr mismatch" and the logical

[Default]
2930 Monitoring 2 [On] On Monitoring of the mains active power mismatch is carried out according to
the following parameters.
2935 Limit 2 1.0 to 99.9% If the difference between the measured import or export power and the power
setpoint exceeds this value for at least the delay time (param‐
[5.0%] eter 2933 Ä p. 452) without interruption, the action specified by the alarm
class is initiated.
Notes
This value refers to the mains rated active power (parameter 1748 Ä p. 501).
2933 Delay 2 3 to 9999 s If the monitored active power mismatch exceeds the threshold value config‐
ured in parameter 2935 Ä p. 452 for the delay time configured here, an alarm
[30 s] will be issued.
Notes
If the monitored active power mismatch falls below the threshold (minus the
hysteresis) before the delay expires the time will be reset.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Lagging Power Factor...

[Default]
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.3.18 Mains Lagging Power Factor (Level 1 & 2)

General notes The power factor is monitored for becoming more lagging (i.e.
inductive) than an adjustable limit. This limit may be a lagging or
leading power factor limit. There are two lagging power factor
be used for monitoring or controlling the power factor compensa‐
tion. Both alarms are definite time alarms.
Power Factor
Leading (capacitive) Lagging (inductive)
More lagging than a leading More lagging than a lagging

PF limit of -0.40 PF limit of +0.85
-0.40 +0.85
-0.50 -0.75 1.00 +0.75 +0.50
Import Inductive Power Export Inductive Power
Fig. 216: Mains lagging power factor

limit and the power factor range, for which the lagging power factor

indicates "Mains PF lagging 1" or "Mains PF lag‐
ging 2" and the logical command variable "07.17"

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Leading Power Factor...

[Default]
2975 Monitoring 2 On Mains lagging power factor monitoring is carried out according to the following
2980 figured independent from each other.
2983 2978: [+ 0.900] Notes
2983: [+ 0.800] If the power factor becomes more lagging (i.e. inductive, Fig. 216) than a lag‐
ging PF value (pos.) or a leading PF value (neg.) for at least the delay time
(parameters 2979 Ä p. 454 or 2984 Ä p. 454) without interruption, the logical
command variables 07.17 (level 1) or 07.18 (level 2) are enabled and the
2989 Hysteresis 2 0.0 to 0.99 The monitored power factor must return within the limits configured in param‐
eter 2978 Ä p. 454 or 2983 Ä p. 454 minus the value configured here, to
2990 [0.02] reset the alarm.
(Reset Delay:
80 ms)
2979 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored generator power factor is more lagging than the configured
2984 2979: [30.00 s]
Notes
2984: [1.00 s]
If the monitored generator power factor returns within the limit (minus the
Hysteresis configured in parameter 2989 Ä p. 454 or 2990 Ä p. 454) before
2988 Control
Notes
[B]
on page 1078
2981
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.3.19 Mains Leading Power Factor (Level 1 & 2)

General notes The power factor is monitored for becoming more leading (i.e.
capacitive) than an adjustable limit. This limit may be a leading or
lagging power factor limit. There are two leading power factor
be used for monitoring or controlling the power factor compensa‐
tion. Both alarms are definite time alarms.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Mains > Mains Leading Power Factor...
Fig. 217: Mains leading power factor

limit and the power factor range, for which the leading power factor

indicates "Mains PF leading 1" or
"Mains PF leading 2" and the logical command var‐
iable "07.19" or "07.20" will be enabled.

[Default]
3025 Monitoring 2 On Mains leading power factor monitoring is carried out according to the following
3030 figured independent from each other.
3033 3028: [- 0.900] Notes
3033: [- 0.800] If the power factor becomes more leading (i.e. inductive, Fig. 217) than a
leading PF value (pos.) or a leading PF value (neg.) for at least the delay time
(parameters 3029 Ä p. 455 or 3034 Ä p. 455) without interruption, the logical
command variables 07.17 (level 1) or 07.18 (level 2) are enabled and the
3039 Hysteresis 2 0.0 to 0.99 The monitored power factor must return within the limits configured in param‐
eter 3028 Ä p. 455 or 3033 Ä p. 455 minus the value configured here, to
3040 [0.02] reset the alarm.
(Reset Delay:
80 ms)
3029 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored generator power factor is more leading than the configured
3034 3029: [10.00 s]
Notes
3034: [1.00 s]
If the monitored generator power factor returns within the limit (minus the
Hysteresis configured in parameter 3039 Ä p. 455 or 3033 Ä p. 455) before
3038 Control
Notes
[B]
on page 1078
3031

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Breaker > Configure GCB

[Default]
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.4 Breaker
4.5.4.1 Configure GCB
General notes Circuit breaker monitoring contains two alarms: A "breaker reclose"
alarm and a "breaker open" alarm.
"Breaker reclose alarm"
If the control initiates a close of the breaker and the breaker fails to
close after the configured number of attempts the monitoring CB
alarm will be initiated (refer to parameter "GCB maximum closing
attempts", parameter 3418 Ä p. 457).

indicates "GCB fail to close" and the logical com‐
"Breaker open alarm"

If the control is attempting to open the circuit breaker and it fails to
see that the CB is open within the configured time in seconds after
issuing the breaker open command then the monitoring CB alarm
will be initiated (refer to parameter "GCB open monitoring", param‐
eter 3420 Ä p. 457).
NOTICE!
If load-dependent start/stop (refer to Ä Chapter
4.4.5.5 “Load Dependent Start/Stop (LDSS)”
on page 348) is enabled, this monitoring function
must be configured with a shutdown alarm class C,
D, E, or F) or disable load-dependent start/stop if
triggered to ensure that the next engine will be
started.

indicates "GCB fail to open" and the logical com‐

[Default]
2600 Monitoring 2 [On] Monitoring of the GCB is carried out according to the following parameters.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Breaker > Configure GCB 50BF

[Default]
2601 GCB Alarm 2 Class Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what
class A/B/C/D/E/F/ action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078
3418 GCB maximum 2 1 to 10 The maximum number of breaker closing attempts is configured in this
closing attempts parameter (relay output "Command: close GCB").
[5]
When the breaker reaches the configured number of attempts, a "GCB fail to
close" alarm is issued.
The counter for the closure attempts will be reset as soon as the "Reply GCB"
is de-energized for at least 5 seconds to signal a closed GCB.
3420 GCB open mon‐ 2 0.10 to 5.00 s If the "Reply GCB" is not detected as energized once this timer expires, a
itoring "GCB fail to open" alarm is issued. This timer initiates as soon as the "open
[2.00 s] breaker" sequence begins. The alarm configured in parameter 2601 Ä p. 457
is issued.
4.5.4.2 Configure GCB 50BF

General notes 50BF is a breaker monitoring function which is tripping if the
breaker reply is indicating an open breaker but there is still a cur‐
rent measured which is exceeding a configurable threshold. It is a
kind of plausibility check between breaker reply and measurement.
This monitoring function is only working if the

measured current is below 320% of rated current.

[Default]
2600 Monitoring 2 [On] Monitoring of the GCB 50BF is carried out according to the following parame‐
ters.
1930 Limit 2 2 to 100 % If the average generator current has reached or exceeded this limit for at least
the delay time without interruption and the breaker reply indicates open, the
[2.00 %] action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
1931 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.90 s If the conditions are fullfilled for the time configured here, an alarm will be
issued.
[0.20 s]
The message "GCB failure 50BF" is issued and the logical command variable
A/B/C/D/E/F/ action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Breaker > Synchronization GCB

[Default]
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} LM: Example: 96.01 LM: Flag1, 96.02 LM: Flag2, ..., 96.32 LM: Flag32
Flag{xx}
4.5.4.3 Synchronization GCB

General notes
NOTICE!
started.

[Default]
3060 Monitoring 2 [On] Monitoring of the GCB synchronization is carried out according to the fol‐
lowing parameters.
3063 Delay 2 3 to 999 s If it was not possible to synchronize the GCB within the time configured here,
an alarm will be issued.
[60 s]
The message "GCB syn. timeout" is issued and the logical command variable
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Breaker > Configure GGB
4.5.4.4 Configure GGB

General notes
tion mode , , , , and .
Circuit breaker monitoring contains two alarms: A breaker reclose

alarm and a breaker open alarm.
If the control unit initiates a close of the breaker and the breaker
fails to close after the configured number of attempts the moni‐
toring CB alarm will be initiated.
n Refer to parameter "GGB maximum closing attempts", param‐
eter 3087 Ä p. 460.

indicates "GGB fail to close" and the logical com‐

If the control unit is attempting to open the circuit breaker and it
fails to see that the CB is open within the configured time in sec‐
onds after issuing the breaker open command then the monitoring
CB alarm will be initiated.
n Refer to parameter "GGB open monitoring", param‐
eter 3088 Ä p. 460.

indicates "GGB fail to open" and the logical com‐

[Default]
3085 GGB monitoring 2 [On] Monitoring of the GGB is carried out according to the following parameters.
3086 GGB Alarm 2 Class Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what
class A/B/C/D/E/F, action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Breaker > Configure MCB

[Default]
3087 GGB maximum 2 1 to 10 The maximum number of breaker closing attempts is configured in this
closing attempts parameter (relay output "Command: close GGB").
[5]
When the breaker reaches the configured number of attempts, an "GGB fail
to close" alarm is issued.
The counter for the closure attempts will be reset as soon as the "Reply GGB"
is de-energized for at least 5 seconds to signal a closed GGB.
3088 GGB open mon‐ 2 0.10 to 5.00 s If the "Reply GGB" is not detected as energized once this timer expires, an
itoring "GGB fail to open" alarm is issued.
[2.00 s]
This timer initiates as soon as the "open breaker" sequence begins. The
alarm configured in parameter 3086 Ä p. 459 is issued.
4.5.4.5 Synchronization GGB

[Default]
3080 Monitoring 2 On Monitoring of the GGB synchronization is carried out according to the fol‐
lowing parameters.
3083 Delay 2 3 to 999 s If it was not possible to synchronize the GGB within the time configured here,
[30 s]
The message "GGB syn. timeout" is issued and the logical command variable
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078
4.5.4.6 Configure MCB

General notes
If an alarm is detected when attempting to close
the MCB, an emergency power operation will be
carried out if the "Emergency start with MCB
failure" is "On".
If an alarm class higher than 'B' class has been
selected it will not be possible to start the engine
with the setting "Emergency start with MCB failure"
(parameter 3408 Ä p. 365) = configured as "On" in
an emergency power condition.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Breaker > Configure MCB

Circuit breaker monitoring contains two alarms: A breaker reclose

alarm and a breaker open alarm.
If the control unit initiates a close of the breaker and the breaker
fails to close after the configured number of attempts the moni‐
toring CB alarm will be initiated.
n Refer to parameter "MCB maximum closing attempts", param‐
eter 3419 Ä p. 462.

indicates "MCB fail to close" and the logical com‐

If the control unit is attempting to open the circuit breaker and it
fails to see that the CB is open within the configured time in sec‐
onds after issuing the breaker open command then the monitoring
CB alarm will be initiated.
n Refer to parameter "MCB open monitoring", param‐
eter 3421 Ä p. 462.

indicates "MCB fail to open" and the logical com‐
Fault at 'closing the MCB' Alarm classes A & B

n Parameter 2802 Ä p. 365 "Emergency run" = Off;
If the MCB cannot be closed, the busbar remains without
voltage, until the MCB breaker fault is acknowledged.
The control continues attempting to close the MCB.
n Parameter 2802 Ä p. 365 "Emergency run" = On, param‐
eter 3408 Ä p. 365 "Emergency start with MCB failure" = Off;
If the MCB cannot be closed, the busbar remains without
voltage, until the MCB breaker fault is acknowledged.
The control continues attempting to close the MCB.
n Parameter 2802 Ä p. 365 "Emergency run" = On, param‐
eter 3408 Ä p. 365 "Emergency start with MCB failure" = On;
If the MCB cannot be closed, an emergency power operation is
initiated (the engine is started and the GCB is closed; the
busbar is supplied by the generator).
If the alarm is acknowledged and if the MCB can be closed, the
load is switched to mains supply and the emergency power
operation terminates.
Fault at 'opening the MCB' This alarm class has the following influence to the function of the
unit:

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Breaker > Synchronization MCB
n This fault is processed according to the action described within

the alarm classes. As long as the reply is present that the MCB
is still closed, the GCB cannot be closed.

[Default]
2620 MCB monitoring 2 [On] Monitoring of the MCB is carried out according to the following parameters.
2621 MCB Alarm 2 Class Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what
class A/B/C/D/E/F/ action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078
3419 MCB maximum 2 1 to 10 The maximum number of breaker closing attempts is configured in this
closing attempts parameter (relay output "Command: close MCB").
[5]
When the breaker reaches the configured number of attempts, an "MCB fail
to close" alarm is issued.
The counter for the closure attempts will be reset as soon as the "Reply MCB"
is de-energized for at least 5 seconds to signal a closed MCB.
3421 MCB open mon‐ 2 0.10 to 5.00 s If the "Reply MCB" is not detected as energized once this timer expires, an
itoring "MCB fail to open" alarm is issued.
[2.00 s]
This timer initiates as soon as the "open breaker" sequence begins. The
alarm configured in parameter 2621 Ä p. 462 is issued.
4.5.4.7 Synchronization MCB

[Default]
3070 Monitoring 2 [On] Monitoring of the MCB synchronization is carried out according to the fol‐
lowing parameters.
3073 Timeout 2 3 to 999 s If it was not possible to synchronize the MCB within the time configured here,
[60 s]
The message "MCB syn. timeout" is issued and the logical command variable
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Breaker > MCB plausibility
4.5.4.8 Configure MCB 50BF

50BF is a breaker monitoring function which is tripping if the
breaker reply is indicating an open breaker but there is still a cur‐
rent measured which is exceeding a configurable threshold. It is a
kind of plausibility check between a breaker reply and a measure‐
ment.
This monitoring function is only working if the

measured current is below 320% of rated current!

[Default]
1934 Monitoring 2 [Off] Monitoring is disabled.
On Monitoring of the MCB 50BF is carried out according to the following parame‐
ters.
1935 Limit 2 2 to 100 % If the mains current has reached or exceeded this limit for at least the delay
time without interruption and the breaker reply indicates open, the action
[2.00 %] specified by the alarm class is initiated.
1936 Delay 2 3 to 999 s If the conditions are fulfilled for the time configured here, an alarm will be
issued.
[60 s]
The message "MCB failure 50BF" is issued and the logical command variable
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078
engine monitoring".
Flag{xx}
4.5.4.9 MCB plausibility
If breaker mode GCB/MCB is configured, this

alarm trips (according to the monitor settings) if the
number of closed MCBs is different to the number
of easYgen devices in the same segment.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Breaker > Configure Neutral Contactor

[Default]
1941 Monitoring 2 [Off] Monitoring is disabled.
On Monitoring of the MCB plausibility is carried out according to the following

parameters.
1942 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.90 s If the conditions are fulfilled for this time the alarm "MCB plausibility" will trip
and the command variable 08.48 becomes active.
[0.20 s]
1943 Alarm class 2 Class An alarm can be assigned that specifies what action should be taken when
A/B/C/D/E/F, the conditions are fulfilled.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078
engine monitoring".
Flag{xx}
4.5.4.10 Configure Neutral Contactor

General notes The monitoring of the Neutral Contactor (NC) feedback "Neutral
contactor reply mismatch" 17.09 is performed always, if the Neutral
Interlocking (parameter 1840 Ä p. 267) and the Monitoring function
are enabled (parameter 5148 Ä p. 464). The monitor checks, if the
feedback behaves according to the NC command. With a configu‐
rable delay time, the alarm is activated with a general alarm text.
Open failure or closure failure are not differentiated.
Please refer to Ä Chapter 6.3.14 “Neutral Interlocking”
on page 646 for more details.

[Default]
5148 Monitoring 2 On Monitoring of the Neutral Contactor is carried out according to the following
parameters, if the Neutral Interlocking function (parameter 1840 Ä p. 267) is
enabled .
5152 Delay 2 0.10 ... 5.00 s Period of continuous failure signal before tripping a failure.
[2.00 s]
5149 Alarm class 2 Class This function may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies
A/B/C/D/E/F/ what action should be taken when this function triggers an alarm.
CONTROL
[B]

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Flexible Limits

[Default]
Notes
on page 1078.
edge detected.
5153 Alarm text - [N-cont. reply Text is visible in display during alarm is detected.
mism.]
4.5.5 Flexible Limits

General notes
CAUTION!
Hazards due to improper configuration of protec‐
tive functions
Flexible Limits must not be used for protective
functions, because the monitoring function is not
guaranteed beyond an exceeding of 320 %.
It is not possible to monitor temperature values in

Degree Fahrenheit and pressure values in psi.
Although parameters 3631 Ä p. 213 or
3630 Ä p. 213 are configured to a value display in
°F or psi, flexible limit monitoring always refers to
the value in Degree Celsius or bar (J1939 protocol:
kPa).
This control unit offers 40 flexible limits. They may be used for
"limit switch" functions of all measured analog values. It is possible
to choose between alarm (warning and shutdown) and control
operation via the LogicsManager.
If an alarm class is triggered, the display indicates "Flexible limit
{x}", where {x} indicates the flexible limit 1 to 40, or the text config‐
ured using ToolKit and the logical command variable "15.{x}" will
be enabled.
The flexible limits 25 through 32 are configurable

additionally with a 'Fallback time' e.g., for load
shedding.
The flexible limits 33 through 40 are disabled

during idle mode operation (refer to Ä Chapter
4.4.1.4 “Idle Mode” on page 199).
The following parameter description refers to flexible limit 1. The

flexible limits 2 through 40 are configured accordingly. The param‐
eter IDs of the flexible limits 2 through 40 are listed below.

Configuration

[Default]
4208 Description 2 user defined (up

to 39 charac‐
ters)
A description for the respective flexible limit may be entered here. The
[Flex. limit {x}] description may have 4 through 20 characters and is displayed instead of the
default text if this limit is exceeded.
Notes
blank in between are NOT visible as headline on detail screen. Selection
screen on HMI/display works fine with up to 30 characters; others are over‐
written by mandatory screen symbols.
character.
4200 Monitoring 2 On Monitoring of the limit {x} is carried out according to the following parameters.
4204 Monitoring at 2 [Overrun] The monitored value must exceed the threshold limit for a fault to be recog‐
nized.
Underrun The monitored value must fall below the threshold limit for a fault to be recog‐
nized.
4205 Limit 2 -21000000.00 to The threshold limit of the value to be monitored is defined by this parameter.
21000000.00 If this value is reached or exceeded / fallen below (dependent on param‐
eter 4207 Ä p. 466) for at least the delay time configured in param‐
[100] eter 4207 Ä p. 466 the action specified by the alarm class is initiated after the
configured delay expires.
The entry format of the threshold depends on the respective analog value.
expressed as a percentage of this reference value (-320.00 % to 320.00 %). If
an analog input is monitored, the threshold refers to the display value format
(refer to Ä Chapter 9.4.2.12 “Display Value Format” on page 1067).
Notes
Refer to Ä “Examples” on page 468 for examples on how to configure the
limit.
4216 Hysteresis 2 0 to During monitoring, the actual value must exceed or fall below one of the limits
21000000.00 defined in parameter 4205 Ä p. 466 to be recognized as out of permissible
limits. For a value to register as having returned to the permissible limits, the
[1.00] monitored value must rise above or fall below this value for the hysteresis.
The format for entering the hysteresis depends on the monitored analog input
and corresponds with the one of the threshold listed in param‐
eter 4205 Ä p. 466.
4207 Delay 2 0.02 to If the monitored value exceeds or falls below the threshold value for the delay
99999.99 s time configured here, an alarm will be issued. If the monitored value falls
below the threshold (plus/minus the hysteresis, dependent on param‐
[1.00 s] eter 4204 Ä p. 466) before the delay expires the time will be reset.
Beginning: For flexible limit 25 ... 32 only; sample refers to flexible limit #25.
6646 Fallback time 2 00.02 to 327.00 If the monitored value exceeds or falls below the threshold value, a counter
s will start and finally disable the alarm. If the monitored value comes back into
the threshold value (plus/minus the hysteresis) before the fallback time
[1.00 s] expires the time will be reset.
End: For flexible limit 25 ... 32 only; sample referred to flexible limit #25.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078

Configuration

[Default]
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4206 AM FlexLim 1 2 Determined by Any possible data sources may be selected. Analog and digital OUT value/
source AnalogManager signal are available as sources for AnalogManager and LogicsManager.
82.01
Refer to Ä Chapter 9.4.1 “Data Sources AM” on page 1042 for a list of all data
[A1 = 10.01 sources.
ZERO]
Parameter IDs
Flexible Descrip‐ Moni‐ Monitored Moni‐ Limit Hyste‐ Delay Alarm Self Enabled
limit # tion toring analog toring at resis class acknowl‐
value Fallback edge
1 4208 4200 4206 4204 4205 4216 4207 4201 4202 4203
2 4225 4217 4223 4221 4222 4233 4224 4218 4219 4220
3 4242 4234 4240 4238 4239 4250 4241 4235 4236 4237
4 4259 4251 4257 4255 4256 4267 4258 4252 4253 4254
5 7108 4270 4276 4274 4275 4278 4277 4271 4272 4273
6 7116 4280 4286 4284 4285 4288 4287 4281 4282 4283
7 7124 4290 4296 4294 4295 4298 4297 4291 4292 4293
8 7132 6000 6006 6004 6005 6008 6007 6001 6002 6003
9 7140 6010 6016 6014 6015 6018 6017 6011 6012 6013
10 7148 6020 6026 6024 6025 6028 6027 6021 6022 6023
11 7156 6030 6036 6034 6035 6038 6037 6031 6032 6033
12 7164 6040 6046 6044 6045 6048 6047 6041 6042 6043
13 7172 6050 6056 6054 6055 6058 6057 6051 6052 6053
14 7180 6060 6066 6064 6065 6068 6067 6061 6062 6062
15 7188 6070 6076 6074 6075 6078 6077 6071 6072 6073
16 7196 6080 6086 6084 6085 6088 6087 6081 6082 6083
17 7204 6090 6096 6094 6095 6098 6097 6091 6092 6093
18 7212 6100 6106 6104 6105 6108 6107 6101 6102 6103
19 7220 6110 6116 6114 6115 6118 6117 6111 6112 6113
20 7228 6120 6126 6124 6125 6128 6127 6121 6122 6123
21 7236 6130 6136 6134 6135 6138 6137 6131 6132 6133
22 7244 6140 6146 6144 6145 6148 6147 6141 6142 6143

Configuration
Flexible Descrip‐ Moni‐ Monitored Moni‐ Limit Hyste‐ Delay Alarm Self Enabled
limit # tion toring analog toring at resis class acknowl‐
value Fallback edge
23 7252 6150 6156 6154 6155 6158 6157 6151 6152 6153
24 7260 6160 6166 6164 6165 6168 6167 6161 6162 6163
25 7268 6170 6176 6174 6175 6178 6177 6171 6172 6173
6646
26 7276 6180 6186 6184 6185 6188 6187 6181 6182 6183
6647
27 7284 6190 6196 6194 6195 6108 6197 6191 6192 6193
6648
28 7292 6200 6206 6204 6205 6208 6207 6201 6202 6203
6649
29 7300 6210 6216 6214 6215 6218 6217 6211 6212 6213
6650
30 7308 6220 6226 6224 6225 6228 6227 6221 6222 6223
6651
31 7316 6230 6236 6234 6235 6238 6237 6231 6232 6233
6652
32 7324 6240 6246 6244 6245 6248 6247 6241 6242 6243
6653
33 7332 6250 6256 6254 6255 6258 6257 6251 6252 6253
34 7340 6260 6266 6264 6265 6268 6267 6261 6262 6263
35 7348 6270 6276 6274 6275 6278 6277 6271 6272 6273
36 7356 6280 6286 6284 6285 6288 6287 6281 6282 6283
37 7364 6290 6296 6294 6295 6298 6297 6291 6292 6293
38 7372 6300 6306 6304 6305 6308 6307 6301 6302 6303
39 7380 6310 6316 6314 6315 6318 6317 6311 6312 6313
40 7388 6320 6326 6324 6325 6328 6327 6321 6322 6323
Table 95: Flexible limits - parameter IDs
Examples
Example value Desired limit Reference value / display value Limit entry format
01.24 Total generator real 160 kW Generator rated real power 8000 (= 80.00%)
power in % (parameter 1752 Ä p. 497) =
200 kW
01.09 Generator frequency in 51.5 Hz Rated frequency (param‐ 10300 (= 103.00%)

% eter 1750 Ä p. 496) = 50 Hz
11.01 Engine speed 1256 rpm Rated speed (param‐ 08373 (= 83.73%)
eter 1601 Ä p. 505) = 1500
rpm
06.03 Analog input 3 (config‐ 4.25 bar Display in 0.01 bar 00425 (= 4.25 bar)
ured to VDO 5 bar)

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > General monitoring settings
Example value Desired limit Reference value / display value Limit entry format
06.02 Analog input 2 (config‐ 123 °C Display in °C 00123 (= 123 °C)

ured to VDO 150 °C)
06.03. Analog input 3 (config‐ 10 mm Display in 0.000 m 00010 (= 0.010 mm)

ured to Linear, Value at 0% = 0,
Value at 100% = 1000) (parameter 1035 Ä p. 217/
Ä p. 645 configured to 0.000
m)
Table 96: Flexible limits - analog value examples
The flexible limits must be used to monitor analog inputs like oil
pressure or coolant temperature for example. We recommend to
change the flexible limit description accordingly.
The table below gives some configuration examples. The analog
inputs must be configured accordingly.
Parameter Example for low oil pressure monitoring Example for high coolant temperature
monitoring
Description Oil pressure Coolant temp.
Monitoring On On
Monitored data source 06.01 Analog input 1 06.02 Analog input 2
Monitoring at Underrun Overrun
Limit 200 (2.00 bar) 80 (80 °C)
Hysteresis 10 2
Delay 0.50 s 3s
Alarm class F B
Self acknowledgment No No
Delayed by engine speed Yes No
Table 97: Flexible limits - configuration examples
4.5.6 Miscellaneous
4.5.6.1 General monitoring settings

[Default]
1756 Time until horn 0 0 to 1,000 s After each alarm of alarm class B through F occurs, the alarm LED flashes
reset and the horn (command variable 03.05) is enabled. After the delay time "time
[180 s] until horn reset" has expired, the horn (command variable 03.05) is disabled.
The alarm LED flashes until the alarm has been acknowledged either via the
push button, the LogicsManager, or the interface.
Notes
If this parameter is configured to 0, the horn will remain active until it will be
acknowledged.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > Free Configurable Alarms

[Default]
12490 Ext. acknowl‐ 2 Determined by It is possible to acknowledge all alarms simultaneously from remote, e.g. with
edge LogicsManager a discrete input. The logical output of the LogicsManager has to become
86.15 TRUE twice.
(External
acknowledg‐ [(09.05 Discrete The first time is for acknowledging the horn, the second for all alarm mes‐
ment of alarms) input 5 & 1) OR sages. The On-delay time is the minimum time the input signals have to be
04.14 Remota "1". The Off-delay time is the time how long the input conditions have to be
acknowledge] "0" before the next high signal is accepted.
= 10714 Once the conditions of the LogicsManager have been fulfilled the alarms will
be acknowledged.
The first high signal into the discrete input acknowledges the command vari‐
able 03.05 (horn).
The second high signal acknowledges all inactive alarm messages.
Notes
1849 Stop mode with 2 If operating mode is not fixed via LogicsManager (see chapter Ä Chapter 6.3.5 “Performing
stopping alarm Remote Start/Stop And Acknowledgment” on page 615 for details) with this parameter it can be
decided if the operation mode changes to STOP mode when a shutdown alarm of class C, D, E,
F occurs.
No A shut down alarm does not cause an operating mode change.

This can be useful in applications with remote control, where the operator
wants to acknowledge alarms and restart the engine without the need to
change operating mode in the easYgen.
Notes
If the shut down alarm disappears, generator can start automatically!
[Yes] Each shut down alarm (class C, D, E, F) will change operating mode to
STOP.
Notes
LM 12510 Ä p. 338/Ä p. 1037, 12520 Ä p. 338/Ä p. 1037, 12530 Ä p. 339/
Ä p. 1037 do have priority.
5775 IOP Delayed 2 0 to 9999 s This parameter gives a load sharing participant the opportunity to delay the
unload. Alarm unload if an shutdown alarm of alarm class C or E occurs. The time gained
C,E [0 s] gives another generator the chance to participate in the load sharing network.
The time configured here delays the triggering of alarm class C and E. A set‐
ting of 0 s deactivates this function.
Notes
on page 1078
4.5.6.2 Free Configurable Alarms

General Notes The easYgen-XT provides 16 freely configurable alarms.
Each alarm is configurable by:
n A LogicsManager equation
n Alarm text/description (configurable with ToolKit only)
n Delay time
n Alarm class
n Self acknowledgment
n Being enabled depending on Engine Monitoring LM 87.70
(selectable)

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > Free Configurable Alarms
Free Alarm 1 for example

[Default]
8120 Free alarm 1 2 Determined by This LogicsManager is used to select the source of monitoring.
LogicsManager
88.01 Notes
[02.01 FALSE & For information on the LogicsManager and its default settings see Ä Chapter
1 & 1] 9.3.1 “LogicsManager Overview” on page 986.
= 11550
8121 Alarm class 2 Class The assigned independent alarm class specifies what action should be taken
A/B/C/D/E/F, when the alarm becomes TRUE.
Control
[Class B]
8122 Self acknowl‐ 2 Yes/No The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no longer
edge detected.
[No] The control does not automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
longer detected. The alarm must be acknowledged and reset by manually
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
8236 Delay 2 0.02 to Period before alarm becomes TRUE.

99999.99 s
[1.00 s]
6680 Description 2 [Free alarm 1] Text is configurable by ToolKit.

...((30 charac‐ Notes
ters))*
*) The max. number of characters is 48 but 30 characters can be read on
easYgen HMI without restrictions.
Parameter IDs
Free alarm # Description LogicsManager Alarm class Self acknowl‐ Enabled Delay
edge
1 6680 8120 8121 8122 8123 8236
2 6681 8124 8125 8126 8127 8237
3 6682 8128 8129 8130 8131 8238
4 6683 8132 8133 8134 8135 8239
5 6688 8136 8137 8138 8139 8240
6 6689 8140 8141 8142 8143 8241
7 6690 8144 8145 8146 8147 8242
8 6691 8148 8149 8152 8153 8243
9 6692 8154 8155 8156 8157 8244
10 6693 8158 8159 8161 8163 8245
11 6694 8165 8167 8168 8169 8246
12 6695 8170 8171 8172 8173 8247

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > CAN Interface 1
Free alarm # Description LogicsManager Alarm class Self acknowl‐ Enabled Delay
edge
13 6696 8174 8175 8176 8177 8248
14 6697 8178 8179 8180 8181 8249
15 6698 8182 8183 8184 8185 8250
16 6699 8186 8187 8188 8189 8251
Table 98: Free alarms - parameter IDs
4.5.6.3 CAN Interface 1

General notes The CANopen interface 1 is monitored. If the interface does not
receive a Receive Process Data Object (RPDO) before the delay
expires, an alarm will be initiated.

indicates "CANopen interface 1" and the logical

[Default]
3150 Monitoring 2 On CANopen interface 1 monitoring is carried out according to the following
parameters.
3154 Delay 2 0.01 to 650.00 s The maximum receiving break is configured with this parameter.
[0.20 s] If the interface does not receive an RPDO within this time, the action specified
by the alarm class is initiated. The delay timer is re-initialized after every mes‐
sage is received.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > CAN Interface 2

General notes
The CANopen interface 2 is monitored. If the interface does not
receive a message from the external expansion board (Node-ID)
before the delay expires, an alarm will be initiated. This is indicated
in menu “Next Page/STATUS MENU è Diagnostic è Interfaces
è CAN è CAN 2 state”

Fig. 218: CAN2 state If you are not using the exact amount of external
I/O modules you have defined, the monitoring
function does not work correctly.

[Default]
parameters.
[0.20 s] If the interface does not receive message from the external expansion board
(Node-ID) within this time, the action specified by the alarm class is initiated.
The delay timer is re-initialized after every message is received.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > CAN Interface 2 - J1939 In...

General notes The CANopen interface 3 is monitored. If the interface does not
receive a Receive Process Data Object (RPDO) before the delay
expires, an alarm will be initiated.


[Default]
parameters.
[0.20 s] If the interface does not receive an RPDO within this time, the action specified
by the alarm class is initiated. The delay timer is re-initialized after every mes‐
sage is received.
Control
Notes
[B]
on page 1078
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.6.6 CAN Interface 2 - J1939 Interface

General notes This monitor function can monitor messages of up to 4 different
J1939 devices separately by their source addresses.
If the easYgen doesn’t receive any message from the corre‐
sponding device within the configured time the command variable
08.10 “CAN fault J1939” becomes active. Additionally a specific
alarm 08.37: “J1939 ECU timeout”, 08.38: “J1939 dev. 1 timeout”,
08.39: “J1939 dev. 2 timeout”, or 08.40: “J1939 dev. 3 timeout” will
be triggered.

Configuration
ECU settings
[Default]
15172 Monitoring 2 On Monitoring of the ECU's CAN messages is carried out according to the fol‐
lowing parameters. The address of the ECU is taken from parameter “Engine
control address” (15107 Ä p. 528)
15176 Delay 2 0.02 to 999 s The delay is configured with this parameter. If the interface does not receive a
CAN message from the ECU within this delay time, the action specified by the
[1 s] alarm class is initiated.
The delay timer is re-initialized if any message from the ECU is received.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
Table 99: J1939 Monitoring
Device 1 settings
[Default]
15177 Monitoring 2 On Monitoring of the CAN messages of device 1 is carried out according to the
following parameters.
15178 Address 2 0 to 255 s This device address is monitored.

[1 s]
CAN message from device 1 within this delay time, the action specified by the
The delay timer is re-initialized if any message from the device 1 is received.
Control
Notes
[B]
on page 1078

Configuration

[Default]
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
Table 100: J1939 Monitoring: Device 1
Device 2 settings
[Default]
15184 Address 2 0-255 s This device address is monitored.

[1 s]
Control
Notes
[B]
on page 1078
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > J1939 Interface - Red (Sto...
Device 3 settings
[Default]
15190 Address 2 0 to 255 s This device address is monitored.

[1 s]
Control
Notes
[B]
on page 1078
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.6.7 J1939 Interface - Red (Stop) Alarm

General notes This monitor monitors, whether a specific alarm bit is received from
the CAN J1939 interface. This enables to configure the easYgen in
a way that a reaction is caused by this bit (e.g. warning, shutdown).

indicates "Red stop lamp" and the logical com‐

[Default]
15115 Monitoring 2 On Monitoring of the Red Stop Lamp message from the ECU is carried out
according to the following parameters.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > J1939 Interface - Amber Wa...

[Default]
15119 Delay 2 0 to 999 s The red stop lamp delay is configured with this parameter.
[2 s] If the ECU sends the Red Stop Lamp On message, the action specified by
the alarm class is initiated after the delay configured here expires.
Control
[A]
Notes
on page 1078
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.6.8 J1939 Interface - Amber Warning Alarm


indicates "Amber warning lamp" and the logical

[Default]
15120 Monitoring 2 On Monitoring of the Amber Warning Lamp message from the ECU is carried out
15124 Delay 2 0 to 999 s The amber warning lamp delay is configured with this parameter.
[2 s] If the ECU sends the Amber Warning Lamp On message, the action specified
by the alarm class is initiated after the delay configured here expires.
Control
[A]

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > J1939 Interface - Protect ...

[Default]
Notes
on page 1078
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.6.9 J1939 Interface - Protect Alarm


indicates "Protection lamp DM1" and the logical

[Default]
1914 Monitoring 2 On Monitoring of the protection Lamp message from the ECU is carried out
1915 Delay 2 0 to 999 s The protection lamp delay is configured with this parameter.
[2 s] If the ECU sends the Protection Lamp On message, the action specified by
the alarm class is initiated after the delay configured here expires.
1916 Alarm class 2 Class An alarm can be assigned, that specifies what action should be taken when
A/B/C/D/E/F/ the conditions are fulfilled.
Control
[A]
Notes
on page 1078

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > J1939 Interface - Emission...

[Default]
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.6.10 J1939 Interface - Emission/Malfunction Alarm


indicates "Emission lamp DM1" and the logical

[Default]
1919 Monitoring 2 On Monitoring of the Emission Warning Lamp message from the ECU is carried
out according to the following parameters.
1920 Delay 2 0 to 999 s The Emission warning lamp delay is configured with this parameter.
[2 s] If the ECU sends the Emission Warning Lamp On message, the action speci‐
fied by the alarm class is initiated after the delay configured here expires.
1921 Alarm class 2 Class An alarm can be assigned, that specifies what action should be taken when
A/B/C/D/E/F/ the conditions are fulfilled.
Control
[A]
Notes
on page 1078
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > Battery Overvoltage (Level...
4.5.6.11 J1939 Interface – DM1 Alarms

This monitor is a switch to transfer the content of the DM1 alarm
message onto the alarm screen of the easYgen. The event log is
as well considered.

[Default]
15156 Monitoring 2 Most of the J1939 devices release a standardized DM1 message as an error
message on the CAN bus. These messages can be entered into the alarm list
of the easYgen. The alarm class is fixed to alarm class A.
A J1939 device CAN monitor the states of his inputs. When a error occurs a
DM1 message is released.
[On] DM1 messages will be recorded in the alarm list.
Off DM1 messages will be not recorded in the alarm list.
Notes
Only known SPNs can be recorded in the alarm list. These are J1939
Standard SPNs which also can be visualized. Manufacturer specific SPNs will
be ignored.
4.5.6.12 Battery Overvoltage (Level 1 & 2)

General notes There are two battery overvoltage alarm levels available in the con‐
trol. Both alarms are definite time alarms and. Monitoring of the
voltage is done in two steps.

indicates "Bat. overvoltage 1" or "Bat. over‐


[Default]
3450 Monitoring 2 3450: [On] Overvoltage monitoring of the battery voltage is carried out according to the
following parameters. Both values may be configured independent from each
3456 3456: [Off] other (prerequisite: Level 1 > Level 2).
(Hysteresis: 0.1
Monitoring is disabled for Level 1 limit and/or Level 2 limit.
V)
(Reset Delay:
1s)
3454 Limit 2 8.0 to 42.0 V The threshold values that are to be monitored are defined here.
3460 3454: [32.0 V] If the monitored battery voltage reaches or exceeds this value for at least the
delay time without interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is initi‐
3460: [35.0 V] ated.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > Battery Undervoltage (Leve...

[Default]
3455 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the monitored battery voltage exceeds the threshold value for the delay time
3461 3455: [5.00 s]
3461: [1.00 s]
Notes
If the monitored battery voltage falls below the threshold (minus the hyste‐
3457 Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078
3458
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.6.13 Battery Undervoltage (Level 1 & 2)

General notes There are two battery undervoltage alarm levels available in the
control. Both alarms are definite time alarms. Monitoring of the
voltage is done in two steps.

indicates "Bat. undervoltage 1" or "Bat. under‐


[Default]
3500 Monitoring 2 [On] Undervoltage monitoring of the battery voltage is carried out according to the
following parameters. Both values may be configured independent from each
3506 other (prerequisite: Level 1 > Level 2).

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > Multi-Unit Parameter Alig...

[Default]
3504 Limit 2 8.0 to 42.0 V The threshold values that are to be monitored are defined here.
3510 3504: [24.0 V] If the monitored battery voltage reaches or falls below this value for at least
the delay time without interruption, the action specified by the alarm class is
3510: [20.0 V] initiated.
(Hysteresis: 0.1
Notes
V)
The default monitoring limit for battery undervoltage is 24 Vdc after 60 sec‐
(Reset Delay:
onds.
1s)
This is because in normal operation the terminal voltage is approximately
26 Vdc (alternator charged battery).
3505 Delay 2 0.02 to 99.99 s If the battery voltage falls below the threshold value for the delay time config‐
ured here, an alarm will be issued.
3511 3505: [60.00 s]
Notes
3511: [10.00 s]
If the battery voltage exceeds the threshold (plus the hysteresis) again before
3507 Control
Notes
[B]
on page 1078
3508
engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
4.5.6.14 Multi-Unit Parameter Alignment

General notes The multi-unit parameter alignment functionality requires that the
relevant parameters are all configured identically at all participating
units.
If at least one of these parameters is configured

different in at least one of the units, the display
indicates "Parameter alignment" on all units and
the logical command variable "08.16" will be ena‐
bled. To identify different configured units, please
use the diagnostic screen "Genset parameter
alignment": “Next Page / Status Menu
è System Overview / Multi-unit
è Genset parameter alignment”
This alarm is always self-acknowledging, i.e. the control automati‐

cally clears the alarm if it is no longer valid.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > Multi-Unit Parameter Alig...
The setting of the following parameters will be monitored:
Parameter ID
Start stop mode 5752 Ä p. 353
Dead busbar start mode 5753 Ä p. 353
Fit size of engine 5754 Ä p. 354
Fit service hours 5755 Ä p. 354
Changes of engines 5756 Ä p. 354
IOP Reserve power or IOP Reserve power 2 if enabled 3 5760 Ä p. 356 or

5648 Ä p. 356
IOP Hysteresis 5761 Ä p. 356
IOP Max. generator load 5762 Ä p. 357
IOP Min. generator load 5763 Ä p. 357
IOP Dynamic 5757 Ä p. 357
IOP Add on delay 5764 Ä p. 358
IOP Add on delay at rated load 5765 Ä p. 358
IOP Add off delay 5766 Ä p. 359
MOP Minimum load 5767 Ä p. 359
MOP Reserve power or MOP Reserve power 2 if enabled 5768 Ä p. 359 or

5649 Ä p. 360
MOP Hysteresis 5769 Ä p. 359
MOP Max. generator load 5770 Ä p. 360
MOP Min. generator load 5771 Ä p. 360
MOP Dynamic 5758 Ä p. 360
MOP Add on delay 5772 Ä p. 361
MOP Add on delay at rated load 5773 Ä p. 361
MOP Add off delay 5774 Ä p. 361
LDSS sort priority always 5777 Ä p. 355/

Ä p. 606
Transfer rate LS fast message 9921 Ä p. 545
Table 103: Multi-unit parameter alignment - monitored parameters

[Default]
4070 Monitoring 2 [On] Multi-unit parameter alignment monitoring is carried out.
4071 Alarm class 2 Alarm class This function may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies
Class what action should be taken when this function triggers an alarm.
A/B/C/D/E/F,
Control
[B]

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > Multi-Unit Missing easYgen

[Default]
Notes
on page 1078.
4076 Delay 2 Yes The control automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no longer
detected.
4078 Enabled 2 87.70 Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until engine monitoring is ena‐
LM:Eng.mon bled.
This is determined through the LogicsManager equation "Release engine
monitoring". For xx = 1 to 32: 96.{xx} LM: Flag{xx}
The monitoring is executed, if the LogicsManager "Flag {xx}" is TRUE.
Example: 96.01 LM: Flag1, 96.02 LM: Flag2, ..., 96.32 LM: Flag32
[Always] Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled.
4077 Self acknowl‐ 2 0.02 to 999.99 s Parameter alignment monitoring delay

edge
3.00 If a parameter alignment error occurs, the alarm will be delayed by a basic
delay time (depending on the communication method) plus the delay time
defined here.
4.5.6.15 Multi-Unit Missing easYgen

General notes The multi-unit missing easYgen monitoring function checks
whether all participating units are available (sending data on the
load share line).
If the number of available units is less than the number of dis‐
played "Monitored easYgen" 9925 Ä p. 489 (initiated by parameter
13334 Ä p. 489 System update) for at least the delay time, the dis‐
play indicates "Missing easYgen" and the logical command varia‐
bles "08.17" and "08.27" will be enabled.
After energizing the easYgen, a delay is started,

which allows a possible "Missing easYgen" alarm
to become active. This delay depends on the
Node-ID of the easYgen (param‐
eter 8952 Ä p. 533) and the transfer rate of a load
share fast message (parameter 9921 Ä p. 545)
and may last for approx. 140 seconds for a high
Node-ID (e.g. 127). This delay serves for detecting
the Master of a CAN bus* connection. Approxi‐
mately two minutes after energizing the easYgen,
the alarm delay will be set to a fix time, which
depends on the setting of param‐
eter 9921 Ä p. 545 (Transfer rate LS fast mes‐
sage) and is in the range between 3 to 12 sec‐
onds.
*) CAN bus connection is preferred but
[9924 Load share Interface] offers Ethernet con‐

nection to be used instead.
During [System update] the alarm is disabled.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > Multi-Unit Missing LS-5
If the easYgen is configured to the application

modes to , the monitoring function also
checks the participating LS-5 units.

[Default]
4060 Monitoring 2 On Multi-unit missing members monitoring is carried out.
A/B/C/D/E/F, what action should be taken when this function triggers an alarm.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078.
edge detected.
4.5.6.16 Multi-Unit Missing LS-5

General notes
If the easYgen is configured to the application
modes and , the monitoring function also
checks the participating LS-5 units.
The multi-unit missing LS-5 monitoring function works as described

above for "Missing easYgen".
If the number of available units is less than the number of dis‐
played "Monitored LS-5" 9926 Ä p. 489 (initiated by parameter
13334 Ä p. 489 System update) for at least the delay time, the dis‐
play indicates "Missing LS-5" and the logical command variables
"08.17" and "08.28" will be enabled.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > Communication Management
After energizing the easYgen, a delay is started,

which allows a possible "Missing LS-5" alarm to
become active. This delay depends on the Node-
ID of the LS-5 (parameter 8952 Ä p. 533) and the
transfer rate of a load share fast message (param‐
eter 9921 Ä p. 545) and may last for approx.
140 seconds for a high Node-ID (e.g. 127). This
delay serves for detecting the Master of a CAN
bus* connection. Approximately two minutes after
energizing the easYgen, the alarm delay will be set
to a fix time, which depends on the setting of
parameter 9921 Ä p. 545 (Transfer rate LS fast
message) and is in the range between 3 to 12 sec‐
onds.
*) Use CAN bus connection selected with
[9924 Load share Interface]. Ethernet connection
is not possible with LS-5.
During [System update] the alarm is disabled.

[Default]
4066 Monitoring 2 On Multi-unit missing members monitoring is carried out.
A/B/C/D/E/F, what action should be taken when this function triggers an alarm.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078.
edge detected.
4.5.6.17 Communication Management

4.5.6.17.1 System Update
General notes The easYgen device provides a function to monitor the communi‐
cation members on the load share bus. The monitor recognizes not
only missing members, it monitors also a defined constellation of
members. This constellation was registered before by executing a
“system update” order [13334 Syst. update].
The system update function teaches-in all members with the cur‐
rent member constellation on the load share bus. Additionally the
missing member monitor of each participant is loaded with the cor‐
rect amount of number.

Configuration
The missing member monitor compares permanently the current

number of members with the amount of the last system update. If
the number of the current communicating members is smaller, the
missing member alarm trips and an according flag (08.17 Missing
members) is set. Usually this flag is incorporated in the frequency
droop LogicsManager 12904 Ä p. 312/Ä p. 1037.
The system update function incorporates as well the LS-5 mem‐

bers on the load share bus. So with the system update order the
amount and constellation of LS-5 in the load share bus is consid‐
ered. Deviations to the last system update are also monitored and
the amount of LS-5 member are loaded in the missing LS-5 mon‐
itor.
In the "non-XT" easYgen-3000 devices was only

checked, if minimum 1 LS-5 is connected. The cor‐
rect amount was checked in the LS-5 system only.
In the easYgen-3400XT/500XT is now monitored
also the LS-5 constellation. This improves trouble
shooting.
If a redundant Ethernet bus for load sharing is chosen (doesn't

work with LS-5: no Ethernet interface), the system update function
considers also the correct constellations of both busses. Addition‐
ally it gives insight and alerts, if the redundancy is lost or a new
member is not registered properly.
Diagnostic screen
The easYgen-XT provides an overview screen to
check all members on the load share bus and
helps trouble shooting. This screen “easYgen
diagnostic” should be watched, when the system
update is executed. It is located under
“Status Menu / Next page è Multi-unit
è Diagnostic devices” .
Availability The system update function is valid for:

n Load share and control information exchanged over CAN 3 bus
n Load share and control information exchanged over Ethernet
network A
n Load share and control information exchanged over redundant
Ethernet network B and C
n LS-5 control information exchanged over CAN 3 bus
How to initiate a system update Navigate to “Next page (Status Menu) è Multi-unit
è Diagnostic Devices”
The system update can be initiated by
n softkey button [Syst. upd.] in the HMI,
n ToolKit switch 13334 Ä p. 489 “System update” , or
n LogicsManager 86.35 with parameter 7801 Ä p. 489 “System
update” .

Configuration
NOTICE!
Please ensure, if you are using the LogicsManager
“7801 System update” or the parameter “13334
Syst. upd” ., that the signal goes false after exe‐
cuting. Otherwise, all buttons relating to system
update are locked.
The number of monitored easYgens is accessible

via communication interfaces. The system update
command can be initiated through a free control
flag.

[Default]
7801 System update 2 Determined by To select logical input(s) to cause a system update.
LogicsManager
86.35
[(0 & 1) & 1]
= 11974
13334 System update 2 Yes Network is checked for members and its states. Updated results become new
status.
[No] Check and update is disabled.
9925 Monitored -/- Latest result of Result of members count driven by system update parameter 13334.
easYgen members count
9926 Monitored LS-5 -/- Latest result of Result of members count driven by system update parameter 13334.
members count
Notes
Applies to the application modes , , , , , and
only.
Table 104: Parameter setting: System update
Monitoring of the “System update” depends on the following

parameters:

[Default]
7832 Monitoring 2 [On] Enabling to monitor the system if there are more devices against latest
updated system configuration.
Notes
To detect less easYgen devices against latest updated system configuration
use missing member monitor 4060 Ä p. 486.
To detect less LS-5 devices against latest updated system configuration use
missing member monitor 4066 Ä p. 487.
Control
[B]

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
on page 1078
7834 Self acknowl‐ -/- Yes The control unit automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
Table 105: Parameter setting: Monitoring system update
The device at which the system update has been initiated sends a
System update request for 30 seconds to all members on the load
share (system) bus.
During this time all members (including missing LS-5 and missing
easYgen) disable their missing member monitoring function and
observing which members are momentarily actively participating.
This condition will be fixed for this 30 seconds period and the
number of members will be stored in the missing member monitor
in all easYgens short before the 30 seconds are ending. Then the
missing member monitoring will be enabled again in all easYgens.
The system update procedure flag is available in

the LogicsManager system under 04.65 System
update active.
The number of accepted easYgen and LS-5 devices (and Load

Share Gateways LSG) is displayed in the according diagnostic
screens in HMI and ToolKit.
4.5.6.17.2 Diagnostic Screens: System Status

The diagnostic screens
The diagnostic screens are helping the operator to recognize the
current communication state of the load share and system bus.
The system update order is usually executed during watching
these screens. Because the update procedure fixes exactly that
state which is displayed in these screens.
Actually, the screens inform the operator, when there was any
alarm raised in order of a missing member alarm or a system
update alarm. With these information it should be easier to detect
the root cause for it.
Because of space restrictions on the easYgen display, the indica‐
tions in the easYgen is realized with symbols. Use ToolKit for text
Fig. 219: Diagnostic screen example indications.
(HMI)

Configuration
Fig. 220: Diagnostic screen example

(ToolKit)
Single Bus Topology Single bus topology means there is no redundant bus topology in
use. Single bus topologies are load share over CAN bus or over
Ethernet network A. The occurring cases here are restricted and
will be treated therefore separately.
System and Control bus

(CAN; Ethernet)
LED ToolKit: easYgen: Explanation

displayed text HMI
Unit available This device is recognized and monitored with the missing member
monitor according to the latest System Update order.
GREEN
Add Device This device is recognized but not registered according to the latest
system update order. Therefore, the missing member monitoring
does not observe the device.
YELLOW
System update is required!
Unit not recognized This device is not recognized according to the latest system update
order. (Missing Member Alarm)
RED
Not installed This device is neither recognized nor registered through the latest
system update order.
BLACK
( / ) Unit not recognized There is no device recognized according to the latest system
update. Communication error on network.
RED / BLACK
This unit is suspected.
(twinkling)
Notes
This is only displayed in the affected easYgen.
4.5.6.17.3 Practicing the System Update Functionality

Commissioning If the devices are connected to a network system, during the first
commissioning it is to observe in the diagnostic screens, whether
all devices are recognized. If all desired controls are recognized,
the system update order can be executed. If not all controls are
recognized do trouble shooting before you hit any system update
order.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > Operating Range Failure
Commissioning Executing system update

ð After 30 seconds all devices must be indicated with a
green lamp in the diagnostic screens. The correct
number of monitored easYgens must be indicated.
Adding a device If a device shall be added to an already running and commissioned

network, proceed as follows:
Adding a device 1. Connect the additional device onto the network.
2. Check the availability in the diagnostic screen
ð If everything is displayed correctly, ...
3. ... execute the system update order
ð After 30 seconds all devices must be indicated with a
green lamp in the diagnostic screens. The correct
number of monitored easYgens is indicated.
Removing a device If a device shall be removed from an already running and commis‐
sioned network, proceed as follows:
Removing a device 1. Execute the system update order
If you are removing the device before you hit

the system update order, you must know that
it will come to a missing member alarm with
the consequence that the system goes into a
droop function (if configured). If that has hap‐
pened, you can solve the issue by a system
update order. But do not forget to make a
system check via the diagnostic screens.
2. You have now 30 seconds time to remove the device, without

getting any consequences on the system
4.5.6.18 Operating Range Failure

General notes The operating range failure monitoring issues an Operating Range
Failure Alarm "Oper.range failed XX" (where XX is the number of
Check 01 to 12) if one of the following conditions is fulfilled.
Example: Check 4 failed causes “Oper.range failed 4” .
Only the first incoming operation range failure will

tripp an alarm. Because in most cases this will be
the root cause for eventually incoming further oper‐
ating range alarms. Any other operating range
alarm can only be tripped if there is no active or
latched operating range alarm.
If there are more than one failures only the first

incoming failure will be indicated and is available at
protocol 5014.
If there is no alarm this number is 0.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > Operating Range Failure
n Check 1: The easYgen tries to close the GCB, but the gener‐
ator is not within its operating range (parame‐
ters 5800 Ä p. 367, 5801 Ä p. 367, 5802 Ä p. 368, or
5803 Ä p. 368).
n Check 2: The easYgen tries to synchronize the GCB, but the
busbar is not within the generator operating range (parame‐
ters 5800 Ä p. 367, 5801 Ä p. 367, 5802 Ä p. 368, or
5803 Ä p. 368).
n Check 3: The easYgen tries close the GCB in breaker transi‐
tion mode "Open transition" with GCB and MCB open status. In
this condition the busbar is expected as dead, but the busbar
voltage is NOT below the dead busbar detection limit (param‐
eter 5820 Ä p. 500).
n Check 4: The easYgen wants to close the GCB onto a dead
busbar, but the device cannot close the breaker because there
is at least one neighbor device recognized with a closed GCB.
n Check 5: The easYgen tries to synchronize the GCB, the MCB
is closed, but mains and/or bussbar are not within its operating
range (parameters 5810 Ä p. 419, 5811 Ä p. 419,
5812 Ä p. 419, or 5813 Ä p. 419).
n Check 6: The easYgen wants close the GGB, but the generator
minimum power is not reached.
n Check 7: The easYgen wants close the GGB in the Open Tran‐
sition Mode, but the generator minimum power is not reached.
n Check 8: The easYgen wants synchronize the GGB , but the
generator minimum power is not reached.
n Check 9: (GGB control mode) The MCB or the GGB is closed
with min. one neighbor GCB is closed to the busbar. There is a
conflict, the external voltage monitoring of the Load Busbar sig‐
nals a "Dead load busbar", which cannot be the case.
n Check 10: The easYgen wants synchronize the GGB, the MCB
is closed, but the mains is not in operating range
n Check 11: The easYgen checks the plausibility of generator
and busbar, if GCB is closed and the engine runs without run-
up synchronization, but he operating range of generator OR
busbar is not matched.
n Check 12: The easYgen checks the phase rotation of gener‐
ator, busbar, and mains and a synchronisation shall be exe‐
cuted, but the phase rotation of all systems does not match.
(Synchronisation is blocked.)
Regarding Check 9 and 10: The GGB application

mode GCB/GGB/L-MCB is tapping the Load
busbar via the internal mains measurement. There‐
fore the check 10 is made via the load busbar con‐
dition. So the "load busbar" -OK flag is created out
of the mains operation ranges.
No alarm will be issued in idle mode. This monitoring function is

disabled below firing speed.

Configuration
Configure Monitoring > Miscellaneous > Load Share Interface Redun...
NOTICE!
started.

indicates "Operat. range failed" /("Operating Range
failed") and the logical command variable "06.31"
will be enabled.

[Default]
2660 Monitoring 2 [On] Monitoring of the operating range is carried out according to the following
parameters.
2663 Delay 2 1 to 999 s If one of the above mentioned conditions for an operating range failure is ful‐
filled, an alarm will be issued. If the respective condition is not fulfilled any‐
[30 s] more before the delay time expires, the delay time will be reset.
Control
[B]
Notes
on page 1078
Table 106: Operating Range Failure settings
4.5.6.19 Load Share Interface Redundancy is Lost

General Beside the automatic handling of redundand load share line mes‐
sages the easYgen can inform the operator if a redundand load
share communication line get lost. Preassumption for that is an
enabled redundand load share line like Ethernet B/C in conjunction
with a successful system update procedure.
If the according alarm has occurred the operator usually checks
the "Diagnostic devices" screen. Available on device display or
over ToolKit. There he will be informed which channel is affected.
Refer to system update for more information.

Configuration
Configure Measurement
Function If the parameter "9924 Load share interface" is configured to

"Ethernet B/C" and the system update was executed, the moni‐
toring becomes active. The monitor needs minimum
The devices observes if the both load share messages are cor‐
rectly receipt. If a channel fails the alarm "LS interf. redundancy" is
triggered.

[Default]
5017 Monitoring 2 The monitoring of the load share communication line redundancy can be ena‐
bled here.
On On: Monitoring is enabled
[Off] Off: Monitoring is disabled
5018 Alarm Class 2 A/B/C/D/E/F, Each limit may be assigned an independent alarm class that specifies what
Control action should be taken when the limit is surpassed.
[Class B]
5019 Delay 2 0.2 to 999.9s The redundancy lost error can be delayed according to the application.
[3.0s]
5020 Self Acknowl‐ 2 No No: The control unit does not automatically reset the alarm when the fault
edge condition is no longer detected.
[Yes] Yes: The control unit automatically clears the alarm if the fault condition is no
longer detected.
5021 Enabled 2 [Always] Always: Monitoring for this fault condition is continuously enabled.
87.70 87.70 LM:Eng.mon: Monitoring for fault conditions is not performed until
engine monitoring is enabled. This is determined through the LogicsManager
LM:Eng.mon equation "Release engine monitoring".
96.{xx} Example:
Table 107: Parameter: Monitoring
4.6 Configure Measurement

General notes
If the genset control is intended to operate a
genset in parallel to the mains, the mains voltage
measuring inputs must be connected.

Configuration
Configure Measurement > General measurement settin...
Dependencies
PF Power Factor
P Active Power [kW]
S Apparent power [kVA]
Q Reactive Power [kvar]
The AC power triangle illustrates the dependencies between active
power, apparent power, reactive power and power factor.
n PF = P/S = cos Φ
n Q = √(S2-P2)
n S = √(P2+Q2)
n P = S * PF
Fig. 221: AC power triangle
4.6.1 General measurement settings

[Default]
1750 System rated 2 50 / 60 Hz The rated frequency of the system is used as a reference figure for all fre‐
frequency quency related functions, which use a percentage value, like frequency moni‐
[50 Hz] toring, breaker operation windows or the AnalogManager.
1825 System rated 2 0.5 to 99999.9 This value specifies 100% of the system rated power, which is used for
active power system related indications and calculations.
[kW] [200.0 kW]
The AnalogManager 10.11 "System active nominal power" and 10.12
"System total real power" are related to this value or setting.
1858 1Ph2W voltage 3 [Phase - phase] The unit is configured for measuring phase-phase voltages if 1Ph 2W meas‐
measuring uring is selected.
Phase - neutral The unit is configured for measuring phase-neutral voltages if 1Ph 2W meas‐
uring is selected.
Notes
For information on measuring principles refer to Ä Chapter 3.3.5.1 “Generator
Voltage” on page 58.
Never configure the busbar measurement for phase-neutral, if the other sys‐
tems like mains and generator are configured as 3Ph 3W or 3Ph 4W. The
phase angle for synchronization would be not correct.
1859 1Ph2W phase 3 [CW] A clockwise rotation field is considered for 1Ph 2W measuring .
rotation
CCW A counter-clockwise rotation field is considered for 1Ph 2W measuring.
Notes
1854 Additional CT 2 [Mains current] / This parameter configures whether ground or mains current is measured on
input Ground current / terminals ½ or the input is disabled.
Off
1835 Ground current 2 1A Application specific ground current range must be selected e.g. for rated
range values.
[5A]
1810 Gnd. CT pri‐ 2 [500 A/x] CT ground current measuring primary rated value.
mary rated cur‐
rent 1..3200 A/x Notes
Available if parameter “1854 Additional CT input ” is set to [Ground current].
“A/x” : "/x" shows the relation to the current range which can be selected (1 A
or 5 A).

Configuration
Configure Measurement > Generator
4.6.2 Generator
[Default]
235 Generator type 2 The genset control supports two types of generators:
n synchronous generators
n asynchronous generators (induction generators)
[Synchronous] The unit provides all functions which are needed for synchronous generator
applications. islanded and mains parallel operation is supported.
Asynchronous The unit provides the special function of the asynchronous generator with:
n The speed is regulated with the speed signal from the MPU or
J1939/CAN input (as long as the GCB is open).
n The closing of the GCB is executed, if the speed is within the corre‐
sponding frequency range of the generator operating window. The
voltage and phase angle is ignored in this case.
n The generator monitoring (under/over frequency and under/overvoltage/
asymmetry) is switched off, until the generator breaker is closed.
n After opening the GCB, under/over frequency and under/overvoltage and
asymmetry monitoring is switched on again.
n The Frequency/MPU speed plausibility monitoring is only active, if the
GCB is closed.
n The synchroscope is not displayed in the asynchronous modus.
Notes
The asynchronous mode is used in slip synchronization only (Synchronization
GCB (parameter 5729 Ä p. 255) = Slip frequency.
Recommended settings
The asynchronous modus is normally used in mains parallel operation.
Please consider the following settings:
n Application mode (parameter 3444 Ä p. 251) = GCB

n Mains decoupling (parameter 3110 Ä p. 421) = GCB
n MPU input (parameter 1600 Ä p. 198) = On
n Generator operating frequency (parameter 5802 Ä p. 368,
5803 Ä p. 368)
Notes
The asynchron mode is not recommended for emergency power applications.
1766 Generator rated 2 50 to 650000 V This value refers to the rated voltage of the generator (generator voltage on
voltage data plate) and is the voltage measured on the potential transformer primary.
[400 V]
The generator rated voltage is used as a reference figure for all generator
voltage related functions, which use a percentage value, like generator
voltage monitoring, breaker operation windows or the AnalogManager.
1752 Gen. rated 2 0.5 to 99999.9 This value specifies the generator real power rating, which is used as a refer‐
active power kW ence figure for related functions. The generator rated active power is the gen‐
[kW] erator apparent power multiplied by the generator power factor (typically
[200.0 kW] ~0.8). These values are indicated in the generator data plate ( Ä “Dependen‐
cies” on page 496).
1758 Gen. rated 2 0.5 to 99999.9 This value specifies the generator reactive power rating, which is used as a
react. power kvar reference figure for related functions. The generator rated reactive power also
[kvar] depends on the generator values ( Ä “Dependencies” on page 496).
[200.0 kvar]
1754 Generator rated 2 1 to 32000 A This value specifies the generator rated current, which is used as a reference
current figure for related functions.
[300 A]

Configuration
Configure Measurement > Generator

[Default]
1851 Generator 2 3Ph 4W OD Measurement is performed Line-Neutral (Open Delta connected system). The
voltage meas‐ voltage is connected via transformer with 3 Wire.
uring
Phase voltages and the neutral must be connected for proper calculation.
Measurement, display and protection are adjusted according to the rules for
Open Delta connected systems.
Monitoring refers to the following voltages:
n VL12, VL23 and VL31
1Ph 3W Measurement is performed Line-Neutral (WYE connected system) and Line-

Line (Delta connected system). The protection depends on the setting of
Measurement, display, and protection are adjusted according to the rules for
single-phase systems.
n VL13 (parameter 1770 Ä p. 369 configured to "Phase-phase")

n VL1N, VL3N (parameter 1770 Ä p. 369 configured to "Phase-neutral")
1Ph 2W Measurement is performed Line-Neutral (WYE connected system) if param‐

eter 1858 Ä p. 496 is configured to "Phase - neutral" and Line-Line (Delta
connected system) if parameter 1858 Ä p. 496 is configured to "Phase -
phase".
phase-phase systems.
n VL1N, VL12
3Ph 3W Measurement is performed Line-Line (Delta connected system). Phase vol‐

tages must be connected for proper calculation.
Delta connected systems.
n VL12, VL23, VL31
[3Ph 4W] Measurement is performed Line-Neutral (WYE connected system) and Line-
WYE connected systems.
n VL12, VL23 and VL31 (parameter 1770 Ä p. 369 configured to "Phase-

phase")
n VL1N, VL2N and VL3N (parameter 1770 Ä p. 369 configured to "Phase-
neutral")
Notes
If this parameter is configured to 1Ph 3W, the generator and mains rated vol‐
tages (parameters 1766 Ä p. 497 and 1768 Ä p. 501) must be entered as
Line-Line (Delta) and the busbar 1 rated voltage (parameter 1781 Ä p. 500)
must be entered as Line-Neutral (WYE).
1850 Generator cur‐ 2 [L1 L2 L3 ] All three phases are monitored. Measurement, display and protection are
rent measuring adjusted according to the rules for 3-phase measurement. Monitoring refers
to the following currents: IL1, IL2, IL3

Configuration
Configure Measurement > Generator > Configure transformer

[Default]
Phase L{1/2/3} Only one phase is monitored. Measurement, display and protection are
adjusted according to the rules for single-phase measurement.
Monitoring refers to the selected phase.
Notes
This parameter is only effective if generator voltage measuring (param‐
eter 1851 Ä p. 498) is configured to "3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W".
Current” on page 76.
4.6.2.1 Configure transformer

General notes The setpoints for specific parameters will differ depending upon the
setting of parameter “Generator current range” 1830 Ä p. 499.
n 1830 = "1A": Current transformer with ../1 A rated current

[Default]
1801 Gen. PT primary 2 50 to 650000 V Some generator applications may require the use of potential transformers to
rated voltage facilitate measuring the voltages produced by the generator. The rating of the
[400 V] primary side of the potential transformer must be entered into this parameter.
(Generator
potential trans‐ If the application does not require potential transformers (i.e. the measured
former primary voltage is 690 V or less), then the measured voltage will be entered into this
voltage rating) parameter.
1800 Gen. PT secon‐ 2 50 to 690 V Some generator applications may require the use of potential transformers to
dary rated volt. facilitate measuring the voltages produced by the generator. The rating of the
[400 V] secondary side of the potential transformer must be entered into this param‐
(Generator eter.
potential trans‐
former secon‐ If the application does not require potential transformers (i.e. the measured
dary voltage voltage is 690 V or less), then the measured voltage will be entered into this
rating ) parameter.
1806 Gen. CT pri‐ 2 1 to 32000 A/x The input of the current transformer ratio is necessary for the indication and
mary rated cur‐ control of the actual monitored value.
rent [500 A/x]
Notes
(Generator cur‐
rent transformer The current transformers ratio should be selected so that at least 60% of the
primary rating) secondary current rating can be measured when the monitored system is at
100% of operating capacity (i.e. at 100% of system capacity a 5 A CT should
output 3 A).
If the current transformers are sized so that the percentage of the output is
lower, the loss of resolution may cause inaccuracies in the monitoring and
control functions and affect the functionality of the control.
“A/x” : "/x" shows the relation to the current range which can be selected (1 A
or 5 A).
1830 Generator cur‐ 2 1A The input range of the current transformer must be selected/defined.
rent range
[5 A]

Configuration
Configure Measurement > Busbar
4.6.3 Busbar
The busbar parameters in the device are often

named with the affix "1". This preparation is done
to avoid confusion e.g., if a model with a second
busbar measurement is introduced.

[Default]
1781 Busbar 1 rated 2 50 to 650000 V This value refers to the rated voltage of busbar 1 and is the voltage measured
voltage on the potential transformer primary.
[400 V]
If voltage measuring is configured to 1Ph 3W, the WYE voltage (VL1N) must
be entered here.
The busbar 1 potential transformer primary voltage is entered in this param‐
eter. The busbar rated voltage is used as a reference figure for all busbar
voltage related functions, which use a percentage value, like synchronization.
1856 Busbar 1 2 Busbar 1 measurement allows 1 phase or 3 phases to be measured with 2, 3,

voltage meas‐ or 4 wires connected.
uring
[3Ph 4W] Measurement is performed Line-Neutral (WYE connected system) and Line-
n VL12, VL23, and VL31 (parameter 1770 Ä p. 369 configured to "Phase-

phase")
n VL1N, VL2N, and VL3N (parameter 1770 Ä p. 369 configured to "Phase-
neutral")

n VL12, VL23, and VL31

eter 1858 Ä p. 496 is configured to "Phase - neutral" or Line-Line (Delta con‐
nected system) if parameter 1858 Ä p. 496 is configured to "Phase - phase".
n VL1N and VL12
1Ph 3W Measurement is performed Line-Neutral (WYE connected system) or Line-

single-phase systems.

n VL1N and VL3N (parameter 1770 Ä p. 369 configured to "Phase-neu‐
tral")
5820 Dead bus detec‐ 2 0 to 30% If the busbar voltage falls below this percentage of the busbar 1 rated voltage
tion max. volt. (parameter 1781 Ä p. 500), a dead bus condition is detected and the logical
[10%] command variable 02.21 (Busbar 1 is dead) becomes TRUE.

Configuration
Configure Measurement > Mains

[Default]
1813 Busb1 PT pri‐ 2 50 to 650000 V Some applications may require the use of potential transformers to facilitate
mary rated measuring the voltages to be monitored. The rating of the primary side of the
voltage [400 V] potential transformer must be entered into this parameter.
(Busbar 1 Notes
potential trans‐
former primary If the application does not require potential transformers (i.e. the measured
voltage rating ) voltage is 690 V or less), then the measured voltage will be entered into this
parameter.
1812 Busb1 PT sec‐ 2 50 to 690 V Some applications may require the use of potential transformers to facilitate
ondary rated measuring the busbar voltages. The rating of the secondary side of the poten‐
volt. [400 V] tial transformer must be entered into this parameter.
(Busbar 1 If the application does not require potential transformers (i.e. the measured
potential trans‐ voltage is 690 V or less), then the measured voltage will be entered into this
former secon‐ parameter.
dary voltage
rating )
4.6.4 Mains
[Default]
1768 Mains rated 2 50 to 650000 V This value refers to the rated voltage of the mains and is the voltage meas‐
voltage ured on the potential transformer primary.
[400 V]
The mains potential transformer primary voltage is entered in this parameter.
The mains rated voltage is used as a reference figure for all mains voltage
related functions, which use a percentage value, like mains voltage moni‐
toring, breaker operation windows or the AnalogManager.
1748 Mains rated 2 0.5 to 99999.9 This value specifies the mains real power rating, which is used as a reference
active power kW figure for related functions. The mains rated active power is a reference value
[kW] used by several monitoring and control functions ( Ä “Dependencies”
[200.0 kW] on page 496).
1746 Mains rated 2 0.5 to 99999.9 This value specifies the mains reactive power rating, which is used as a refer‐
react. pwr. kvar ence figure for related functions.
[kvar]
[200.0 kvar] The mains rated reactive power is a reference value used by several moni‐
toring and control functions( Ä “Dependencies” on page 496).
1785 Mains rated cur‐ 2 1 to 32000 A This value specifies the mains rated current, which is used as a reference
rent figure for related functions.
[300 A]
1853 Mains voltage 2 [3Ph 4W] Measurement is performed Line-Neutral (WYE connected system) and Line-
measuring Line (Delta connected system). The protection depends on the setting of
n VL12, VL23 and VL31 (parameter 1771 Ä p. 417 configured to "Phase-

phase")
n VL1N, VL2N and VL3N (parameter 1771 Ä p. 417 configured to "Phase-
neutral")
n VL12, VL23, VL31, VL1N, VL2N and VL3N (parameter 1771 Ä p. 417
configured to "All")

Configuration
Configure Measurement > Mains > Configure transformer

[Default]

n VL12, VL23, VL31

eter 1858 Ä p. 496 is configured to "Phase - neutral" and Line-Line (Delta
connected system) if parameter 1858 Ä p. 496 is configured to "Phase -
phase".
n VL1N, VL12
1Ph 3W Measurement is performed Line-Neutral (WYE connected system) and Line-

Line (Delta connected system).
The protection depends on the setting of parameter 1771 Ä p. 417. Measure‐
ment, display, and protection are adjusted according to the rules for single-
phase systems.

n VL1N, VL3N (parameter 1771 Ä p. 417 configured to "Phase-neutral")
n VL1N, VL3N (parameter 1771 Ä p. 417 configured to "All")
Notes
If this parameter is configured to 1Ph 3W, the generator and mains rated vol‐
tages (parameters 1766 Ä p. 497 and 1768 Ä p. 501) must be entered as
Line-Line (Delta) and the busbar 1 rated voltage (parameter 1781 Ä p. 500)
must be entered as Line-Neutral (WYE).
1852 Mains current 2 [Phase L1] / Phase L{1/2/3} Measurement is performed for the selected phase only. The
measuring Phase L2 / measurement and display refer to the selected phase.
Phase L3
The configured phase CT must be connected to perform current measure‐
ment.
Notes
For information on measuring principles refer to Ä Chapter 3.3.6.2 “Mains
Current” on page 79.
This parameter is only effective if mains voltage measuring (param‐
eter 1853 Ä p. 501) is configured to "3Ph 4W" or "3Ph 3W".

General notes The setpoints for specific parameters will differ depending upon the
setting of parameter “Mains current range” 1832 Ä p. 503.

Configuration
Configure Measurement > Mains > Configure transformer

[Default]
1804 Mains PT pri‐ 2 50 to 650000 V Some applications may require the use of potential transformers to facilitate
mary rated measuring the voltages to be monitored. The rating of the primary side of the
voltage [400 V] potential transformer must be entered into this parameter.
(Mains potential Notes
transformer pri‐
mary voltage If the application does not require potential transformers (i.e. the measured
rating voltage is 690 V or less), then the measured voltage will be entered into this
parameter.
1803 Mains PT sec‐ 2 50 to 690 V Some applications may require the use of potential transformers to facilitate
ondary rated measuring the mains voltages. The rating of the secondary side of the poten‐
volt. [400 V] tial transformer must be entered into this parameter.
(Mains potential If the application does not require potential transformers (i.e. the measured
transformer sec‐ voltage is 690 V or less), then the measured voltage will be entered into this
ondary voltage parameter.
rating)
1807 Mains CT pri‐ 2 1 to 32000 A/x The input of the current transformer ratio is necessary for the indication and
mary rated cur‐ control of the actual monitored value.
rent [500 A/x]
The current transformers ratio should be selected so that at least 60% of the
(Mains current secondary current rating can be measured when the monitored system is at
transformer pri‐ 100% of operating capacity (i.e. at 100% of system capacity a 5 A CT should
mary rating) output 3 A).
If the current transformers are sized so that the percentage of the output is
lower, the loss of resolution may cause inaccuracies in the monitoring and
control functions and affect the functionality of the control.
Notes
This screen is only visible if parameter 1854 Ä p. 496 is configured as Mains.
1832 Mains current 2 1A The input range of the current transformer must be selected/defined.
range
[5 A] Notes
This screen is only visible if parameter 1854 Ä p. 496 is configured as Mains.

Configuration
Configure Measurement > Mains > External Mains Active Power
4.6.4.2 External Mains Active Power

[Default]
2966 External mains 2 Yes The mains active power is coming from an external source.
active power
The following measurement values of the external mains active power
depend on the external mains reactive power measurement. So there is to dif‐
ferentiate between two cases:
Case 1: External mains reactive power measurement (parameter
2969 Ä p. 505) is disabled:
n The mains power factor is assumed as "1".

n The mains power factor monitoring is switched off.
n The mains power factor is not displayed.
n The mains total reactive power is not displayed.
Case 2: External mains reactive power measurement (parameter
2969 Ä p. 505) is enabled:
n The mains power factor is calculated.

n The mains total apparent power is calculated and displayed.
Notes
Mains power monitoring is not available.
Please make sure to assign the external mains active power to the corre‐
sponding analog data source (parameter 5780 Ä p. 504/Ä p. 1075). The
same data source must be used if the mains active power is requested via
interface.
[No] The mains active power is internally measured.
5780 AM Ext.mains 2 Determined by Typically an analog input is selected as data source which is connected to an
act.pwr AnalogManager external transducer.
81.19: [A1 =
06.01 Analog
input 1]
2967 Mains power 2 This parameter controls the resolution and the format.
meas. resolution
Selected resolu‐ Power at 100 % analog value
(Mains power tion
measurement
resolution) 0.01 kW 10.00 kW
0.1 kW 100.0 kW
[1 kW] 1000 kW
0.01 MW 10.00 MW
0.1 MW 100.0 MW

Configuration
Configure Measurement > Engine
4.6.4.3 External Mains Reactive Power

[Default]
2969 External mains 2 Yes The mains reactive power is coming from an external source. This power is
reactive power displayed and used for control purposes. The source is taken via AnalogMan‐
ager.
The following measurement values depend on the external mains active
power measurement. So there is to differentiate between two cases:
Case 2: External mains active power measurement (parameter
2966 Ä p. 504) is disabled:
n The mains power factor is assumed as "1".

n The mains active power monitoring is switched off.
n The mains total active power is not displayed.
Case 1: External mains active power measurement (parameter 2966) is ena‐
bled:
n The mains power factor is calculated.

n The mains total apparent power is calculated and displayed.
Notes
Mains power monitoring is not available.
Please make sure to assign the external mains reactive power to the corre‐
sponding analog data source (parameter 5794 Ä p. 505/Ä p. 1075). The
same data source must be used if the mains active power is requested via
interface.
[No] The mains reactive power is internally measured.
5794 AM Ext.mains 2 Determined by Typically an analog input is selected as data source (kvar value) which is con‐
RPower AnalogManager nected to an external transducer.
81.20: [A1 =
06.02 Analog
input 2]
2970 Mains react. 2 This parameter controls the resolution and the format.
power meas.
resolution Selected resolu‐ Power at 100 % analog value:
tion:
(Mains reactive
power measure‐ 0.01 kvar 10.00 kvar
ment resolution)
0.1 kW 100.0 kvar
[1 kvar] 1000 kvar
0.01 Mvar 10.00 Mvar
0.1 Mvar 100.0 Mvar
4.6.5 Engine
[Default]
1601 Engine rated 2 100 to 4,000 Number of revolutions per minute of the engine at rated engine speed. The
speed rpm speed control with an ECU via J1939 CAN bus refers to this value.
[1,500 rpm]

Configuration
Configure Interfaces > USB (Service Port) Interfa...
4.7 Configure Interfaces

Interfaces / Communication
easYgen-3400XT/3500XT-P1
Fig. 222: easYgen-3400XT/3500XT-P1 communication interfaces
4.7.1 USB (Service Port) Interface

There is no configuration to do for the USB Service Port but the
driver installer .exe from CD-ROM must be proceeded: “Software
è USB driver è Click here”

Configuration
Configure Interfaces > Modbus Protocol
USB Service Port

The USB service port is restricted for ToolKit com‐
munication, Woodward service communication,
and - if provided by factory side - read only files.
The “Automatic Reconnection” over USB is not
possible.
If connection over USB is lost, please reconnect
manually:
– 1. Wait until the easYgen-XT is recognized
again through the PC (as an external hard
drive)
– 2. Start via ToolKit at new by "Disconnect" and
then "Connect" again
4.7.2 RS-485 Interface

[Default]
3170 Baudrate 2 2.4 / 4.8 / 9.6 / This parameter defines the baud rate for communications. Please note, that
[19.2] / 38.4 / all participants on the bus must use the same baud rate.
56 / 115 kBaud
3171 Parity 2 [No] / Even / The used parity of the interface is set here.
Odd
3172 Stop bits 2 [One] / Two The number of stop bits is set here.
3173 Full-, half- 2 [Fullduplex] Fullduplex mode is enabled.

duplex mode
Half-duplex Half-duplex mode is enabled.
Modbus Interface
3188 ModBus Slave 2 0 to 255 The Modbus device address, which is used to identify the device via Modbus,
ID is entered here.
[1]
If "0" is configured here, the Modbus is disabled.
3189 Reply delay 2 0.00 to 2.55 s This is the minimum delay time between a request from the Modbus master
time and the sent response of the slave. This time is required in half-duplex mode.
[0.00 s]
9128 Password pro‐ 5 Off Password protection for Modbus RS 485 is not active.
tection
Notes
Take care for a protected access!
[On] Password protection for Modbus RS 485 is active.
4.7.3 Modbus Protocol
Data Format(s)
Modbus registers are read and written according to
the Modbus standard as Big-endian.
Composite data types like LOGMAN, ANALOG‐
MANAGER, and TEXT use separate descriptions.

Configuration

[Default]
3184 Modbus pro‐ 2 0 to 65535 A Modbus protocol may be selected by entering the data protocol ID here. If
tocol number an unknown data protocol ID is configured here, nothing will be transmitted.
Possible data protocol IDs (existing protocols) are listed in this Technical
Manual.
Instead of a Woodward protocol, a customer specific data protocol can be
selected. Such a protocol must have been uploaded onto the device and its
file name must fit the reserved range from protocol number 65100 to 65199.
Use Woodward “TelegramMapper” software to create your own Data Tele‐
grams.
Notes
Another protocol can be used after power-cycle of the control:
Change Modbus protocol number first, then power cycle!
[5010] Number of the Data Telegram to be used for communication (corresponds to

the file name [xxxx].scp).
Notes
All Date Telegrams described in this Technical Manual are device imple‐
mented: no separate scp-file (e.g. "5010.scp") needed.
3179 Detect a gap in 2 [On] If a received Modbus command has a gap between its byte of more than 5
a Modbus frame ms, this command is ignored.
Off The Modbus message is not checked.
3181 Power [W] 2 2 to 5 This setting adjusts the format of the 16 bit power values in the data telegram.
exponent 10^x
[3]
Notes
Valid for data telegram 5010 only!
Refer to Ä “Power measurement example” on page 510 for examples.
3182 Voltage [V] 2 -1 to 2 This setting adjusts the format of the 16 bit voltage values in the data tele‐
exponent 10^x gram.
[0]
Notes
Refer to Ä “Voltage measurement example” on page 510 for examples.
3183 Current [A] 2 -1 to 0 This setting adjusts the format of the 16 bit current values in the data tele‐
exponent 10^x gram.
[0]
Notes
Refer to Ä “Power measurement example” on page 510 for examples.

Configuration
Customer Written Data Protocols
Select standard or customized Data In many applications customers ask for self-definable protocols.
Protocol with parameter 3184 That means they want to create individual Modbus Address Point
“Modbus protocol number” lists for Modbus RTU and TCP. Therefore the address range
(4)50000 can be taken. The user will be able to arrange contents
from the easYgen database (Index No.), AnalogManager Varia‐
bles, and LogicsManager Command Variables to a customer spe‐
cific protocol. Therefore Woodward offers the TelegramMapper
software for free and enables easYgen-XT to import, make acces‐
sible, and proceed customer specific Modbus protocols.
The TelegramMapper software can be installed separately from
other Woodward software. After starting the program the HELP
file can guide through the required settings. Data from ...
n the AnalogManager variables,
n the LogicsManager command variables,
n and the easYgen database ...
of the particular easYgen model will be available/selectable.
The according data types must be defined and each address
entry can be commented. There is a maximum length of 300
addresses.
The final protocol can be saved with a protocol number from
65100 to 65199 used as file name(!) as an
n SCP-file for import into the easYgen device
n HTML-file for easy to read documentation of the (self) cre‐
ated data protocol
n MAP-file for further edits with the TelegramMapper software
To load your created Data Protocol(s) - the scp-file(s) - into your
easYgen device use ToolKit.
To switch to your Data Protocol and use it for communication:
Configure parameter 3184 Ä p. 508 “Modbus protocol number”
to your customer specific protocol number and power cycle the
control.
Summary: The self-mappable address range is defined with a
protocol number from 65100 to 65199 and has a maximum length
of 300 addresses. Communication using customer specific data
protocols is configurable similar to other already existing protocols
5003, 5011 etc. (“Parameter
è Configuration/Configure interfaces è Modbus protocol”).
Handling Customer Specific Protocols

It is possible to upload several protocols (*.scp
files) onto the easygen. Only one protocol can be
used at a time.

Configuration
Power measurement example
How to use “Power exponent ” Power measurement:

3181
n The measurement range is 0…250 kW
n Momentary measurement value = 198.5 kW (198.500 W)
Setting Meaning Calculation Transfer value Possible display

format
value 3181 (16 Bit, max. 32767)
2 102 198500 W / 102 W 1985 198.5 kW
3 103 198500 W / 103 W 198 198 kW
4 104 198500 W / 104 W 19 N/A
5 105 198500 W / 105 W 1 N/A
Table 108: Power measurement example
Voltage measurement example
How to use “Voltage exponent ” Voltage measurement:

3182
n The measurement range is 0…480 V
n Momentary measurement value = 477.8 V

format
(16 Bit, max. 32767)
-1 10-1 477.8 V / 10-1 W 4778 477.8 V
0 100 477.8 V / 100 V 477 477 V
1 101 477.8 V / 101 V 47 N/A
2 102 477.8 V / 102 V 4 N/A
Table 109: Voltage measurement example
Current measurement example
How to use “Current exponent” Current measurement:

3183
n The measurement range is 0…500 A
n Momentary measurement value = 345.4 A

format
(16 Bit, max. 32767)
-1 10-1 345.4 A / 10-1 A 3454 345.4 A
0 100 345.4 A / 100 A 345 345 A
Table 110: Current measurement example

Configuration
Configure Interfaces > CAN Interfaces > CAN Interface 1
4.7.4 CAN Interfaces

General notes
The CAN bus is a field bus and subject to various
disturbances. Therefore, it cannot be guaranteed
that every request will be answered. We recom‐
mend to repeat a request, which is not answered
within reasonable time.
COB-ID of SYNC/TIME messages

Parameters 9100 Ä p. 512 and 9101 Ä p. 513
use synchronization and time messages that
adhere to the following structure.
Bit number Value Meaning
31 (MSB) 0 Unit does not apply TIME message
1 Unit applies TIME message
30 0 Unit does not generate SYNC/TIME mes‐

sage
1 Unit generates SYNC/TIME message
29 X N/A
28-11 0 Always
10-0 (LSB) X Bits 10-0 of SYNC/TIME COB-ID
TIME synchronization message CANopen COB-ID TIME Time applied Time trans‐
master mitted
Off Bit 30 = 0; Bit 31 = 0 No No
Bit 30 = 1; Bit 31 = 0 Yes No
Bit 30 = 0; Bit 31 = 1 Yes No
Bit 30 = 1; Bit 31 = 1 Yes Yes
Default Bit 30 = 0; Bit 31 = 0 No No
Bit 30 = 1; Bit 31 = 0 No Yes
Bit 30 = 0; Bit 31 = 1 Yes No1
Bit 30 = 1; Bit 31 = 1 Yes Yes1
On Bit 30 = 0; Bit 31 = 0 No No
Bit 30 = 1; Bit 31 = 0 No Yes
Bit 30 = 0; Bit 31 = 1 Yes No
1 If CANopen master (lowest Node-ID).

Configuration

[Default]
3156 Baudrate 2 20 / 50 / 100 / This parameter defines the used baud rate. Please note, that all participants
125 / 250 / 500 / on the CAN bus must use the same baud rate.
800 / 1000
kBaud
[250 kBd]
1894 Align device no. 2 No If this parameter is configured to "Yes" the parameter “Node-ID CAN bus 1”
with Node-ID 8950 Ä p. 512 will be overwritten with the value of the “Device
[Yes] number ” 1702 Ä p. 181 and is not visible.
If configured to "No", parameter “Device number ” 1702 is visible and will not
be overwritten.
Notes
This is to avoid CAN ID conflict in multi unit systems if using the same ID
more than one time. This can cause CAN "Bus-Off" failure.
8950 Node-ID CAN 2 1 to 127 (dec) A number that is unique to the control must be set in this parameter so that
bus 1 this control unit can be correctly identified on the CAN bus.
[1]
This address number may only be used once on the CAN bus. All additional
addresses are calculated based on this unique device number.
Notes
We recommend to configure the Node-IDs for units, which participate in load
sharing, as low as possible to facilitate establishing of communication.
8993 CANopen 2 One bus participant must take over the network management and put the
Master other participants into "operational" mode. The easYgen is able to perform
this task.
[Default Master] The unit starts up in "operational" mode and sends a "Start_Remote_node"
message after a short delay (the delay is the Node-ID (param‐
eter 8950 Ä p. 512) in seconds, i.e. if the Node-ID is configured to 2, the
message will be sent after 2 seconds). If more than one easYgen is config‐
ured to Default Master, the unit with the lower Node-ID will take over control.
Therefore, the CAN bus devices, which are intended to act as Default Master
should be assigned a low Node-ID. No other device on the CAN bus (except
the easYgens) may operate as Master).
On The unit is the CANopen Master and automatically changes into operational
mode and transmits data.
Off The unit is a CANopen Slave. An external Master must change into opera‐
tional mode.
Notes
If this parameter is configured to "Off", the Master controller (for example a
PLC) must send a "Start_Remote_node" message to initiate the load share
message transmission of the easYgen.
If no "Start_Remote_node" message would be sent, the complete system
would not be operational.
9120 Producer heart‐ 2 0 to 65500 ms Independent from the CANopen Master configuration, the unit transmits a
beat time heartbeat message with this configured heartbeat cycle time.
[2000 ms]
If the producer heartbeat time is equal 0, the heartbeat will only be sent as
response to a remote frame request. The time configured here will be
rounded up to the next 20 ms step.
9100 COB-ID SYNC 2 1 to FFFFFFFF This parameter defines whether the unit generates the SYNC message or
Message hex not.
[80 hex] The message complies with CANopen specification: object 1005 hex; sub‐
index 0 defines the COB-ID of the synchronization object (SYNC).
Notes
The structure of this object is shown in Ä “COB-ID of SYNC/TIME messages”
on page 511
8940 Producer SYNC 2 0 to 65000 ms This is the cycle time of the SYNC message. If the unit is configured for this
Message time function (parameter 9100 Ä p. 512) it will send the SYNC message with this
[20 ms] interval. The time configured here will be rounded up to the next 10 ms step.

Configuration

[Default]
9101 COB-ID TIME 2 1 to FFFFFFFF This parameter defines whether the unit generates the TIME message or not.
Message hex
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1012 hex, subindex 0; defines
[100 hex] the COB-ID of the time object (TIME).
Notes
The structure of this object is shown in Ä “COB-ID of SYNC/TIME messages”
on page 511
9102 Cycle of TIME 2 1.0 to 6500.0 s This is the cycle time of the TIME message. If the unit is configured for this
sync. message function (parameter 9101 Ä p. 513) it will send the TIME message with this
[10.0 s] interval.
Notes
The structure of this object is shown in Ä “TIME synchronization message”
on page 511
9126 Password pro‐ 5 Off Password protection for CAN 1 is not active.
tection
Notes
[On] Password protection for CAN 1 is active.
4.7.4.1.1 Additional Server SDOs (Service Data Objects)

General notes
The first Node-ID is the standard Node-ID of CAN interface 1


[Default]
12801 2. Node-ID 2 0 to 127 (dec) In a multi-master application, each Master needs its own identifier (Node-ID)
from the unit. in order to send remote signals (i.e. remote start, stop, shut‐
[0] down, or acknowledge) to the unit.
The additional SDO channel will be made available by configuring this Node-
ID to a value different than zero. This is the additional CAN ID for the PLC.

Configuration
4.7.4.1.2 Receive PDO {x} (Process Data Object)

General notes RPDO mapping is carried out as shown in (Fig. 223).
Fig. 223: RPDO mapping principle
Parameters
9300 Ä p. 515/9310 Ä p. 515/9320 Ä p.
515/12805 Ä p. 515/12806 Ä p. 515 use com‐
munication parameters that adhere to the following
structure.
RPDO Objects can be remote signals (parameter
503; please refer to Ä “Remote control word 1”
on page 974 for details), DI states and AI meas‐
ured values.
31 (MSB) 0 PDO exists / is valid
1 PDO does not exist / is not valid
30 X N/A
29 X N/A
28-11 0 Always
10-0 (LSB) X Bits 10-0 of COB-ID
PDO valid / not valid allows to select, which PDOs

are used in the operational state.

Configuration

[Default]
9300 COB-ID 2 1 to FFFFFFFF This parameter contains the communication parameters for the PDOs, the
hex device is able to receive.
9310
[80000000 hex] Complies with CANopen specification: object 1400 hex (for RPDO 1, 1401
9320 hex for RPDO 2, 1402 hex for RPDO 3, 1403 hex for RPDO 4, and 1404 hex
12805 for RPDO 5), subindex 1.
12806 Notes
The structure of this object is shown in Ä Further information on page 514.
Do not configure an RPDO or TPDO with a COB-ID higher than 580 hex or
lower than 180 hex. These IDs are reserved for internal purposes.
9121 Event-timer 2 0 to 65500 ms This parameter configures the time, from which this PDO is marked as "not
existing". The time configured here will be rounded up to the next 5 ms step.
9122 [2000 ms] Received messages are processed by the control unit every 20 ms. Mes‐
9123 sages, which are sent faster, will be discarded. We recommend to configure
ten times the cycle time of the received data here.
9124
Notes
9125
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1400 hex (for RPDO 1, 1401
hex for RPDO 2, 1402 hex for RPDO 3, 1403 hex for RPDO 4, and 1404 for
RPDO 5), subindex 5
8970 Selected Data 2 0 to 65535 A data protocol may be selected by entering the data protocol ID here. If 0 is
Protocol configured here, the message assembled by the mapping parameters is
8971 [0] used. If an unknown data protocol ID is configured here, a failure is indicated
8972 by the CAN status bits. Possible data protocol IDs are:
8973 65000 IKD 1 – external DIs/DOs 1 through 8
65002
65003
9910 Number of 2 0 to 4 This parameter defines the number of valid entries within the mapping record.
Mapped Objects This number is also the number of the application variables, which shall be
9915 [0] received with the corresponding PDO.
9905
Notes
12821
for RPDO 5), subindex 0
9911 1. Mapped 2 0 to 65535 This parameter contains the information about the mapped application varia‐
Object bles. These entries describe the PDO contents by their index. The sub-index
9916 [0] is always 1. The length is determined automatically.
9906
Notes
12822
12832 hex for RPDO 2, 1602 hex for RPDO 3,1603 hex for RPDO 4, and 1604 hex
for RPDO 5), subindex 1.
9907
Notes
12823
9908
Notes
12824

Configuration

[Default]
9909
Notes
12825
4.7.4.1.3 Transmit PDO {x} (Process Data Object)

General notes TPDO mapping is carried out as shown in (Fig. 224).
CANopen allows to send 8 byte of data with each

Transmit PDO. These may be defined separately if
no pre-defined data protocol is used.
All data protocol parameters with a parameter ID
may be sent as an object with a CANopen
Transmit PDO.
The data length will be taken from the data byte
column (see Ä “The following data protocols are
implemented to be used” on page 769):
Fig. 224: TPDO mapping – 1,2 UNSIGNED16 or SIGNED16
– 3,4 UNSIGNED16 or SIGNED16
– 1,2,3,4 UNSIGNED32 or SIGNED32
– etc.
The object ID is identical with the parameter ID
when configuring via front panel or ToolKit.
Parameters
9600 Ä p. 517/9610 Ä p. 517/9620 Ä p.
517/9630 Ä p. 517/12792 Ä p. 517 use com‐
structure.
30 X N/A
29 X N/A
28-11 0 Always

Configuration

Transmission types
Parameters
9602 Ä p. 518/9612 Ä p. 518/9622 Ä p.
518/9632 Ä p. 518/12793 Ä p. 518 are used to
select one of the following transmission types.
Transmis‐ PDO transmission

sion type
Cyclic Acyclic Synchro‐ Asynchro‐ RTR only

nous nous
0 Will not be sent
1-240 X X
241-251 Will not be sent
252 Will not be sent
254 X
255 X
A value between 1 and 240 means that the PDO is

transferred synchronously and cyclically. The
transmission type indicating the number of SYNC
messages, which are necessary to trigger PDO
transmissions.
Transmit PDOs are always triggered by the fol‐
lowing SYNC upon reception of data independent
of the transmission types 0 to 240. For TPDOs,
transmission type 254 and 255 means, the applica‐
tion event is the event timer.

[Default]
9600 COB-ID 2 1 to FFFFFFFF This parameter contains the communication parameters for the PDOs the unit
hex is able to transmit. The unit transmits data (i.e. visualization data) on the CAN
9610 ID configured here.
[80000000 hex]
9620 Complies with CANopen specification: object 1800 hex for (TPDO 1, 1801
9630 hex for TPDO 2, 1802 hex for TPDO 3, 1803 hex for TPDO 4, and 1804 hex
for TPDO 5), subindex 1.
12792
Notes
The structure of this object is shown in Ä Further information on page 516
In case a LSG is part of CAN 1, do not configure COB-IDs 181 - 18E hex
because legacy devices are using same IDs but cannot be switched.

Configuration

[Default]
9602 Transmission 2 0 to 255 This parameter contains the communication parameters for the PDOs the unit
type is able to transmit. It defines whether the unit broadcasts all data automati‐
9612 [255] cally (value 254 or 255) or only upon request with the configured address of
9622 the COB-ID SYNC message (parameter 9100 Ä p. 512).
9632 Notes
12793 Complies with CANopen specification: object 1800 hex (for TPDO 1, 1801
hex for TPDO 2, 1802 hex for TPDO 3, 1803 hex for TPDO 4, and 1804 hex
The description of the transmission type is shown in Ä “Transmission types”
on page 517.
9604 Event timer 2 0 to 65535 ms This parameter contains the communication parameters for the PDOs the unit
is able to transmit. The broadcast cycle for the transmitted data is configured
9614 [20 ms] here. The time configured here will be rounded up to the next 5 ms step.
9624
Notes
9634
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1800 hex (for TPDO 1, 1801
for TPDO 5), subindex 5
8963 8962: [5003] used. If an unknown data protocol ID is configured here, a failure is indicated
8964 8963: [5008] by the CAN status bits.
8965 8964: [0] Possible data protocol IDs are:
8966 8965: [0]

8966: [0]
65000 IKD 1 – external DIs/DOs 1 through 8
5003 Data telegram (CAN and MODBUS)
5005 Data telegram (CAN mains values)
5010 Data telegram (MODBUS)
5011 Data telegram (CAN alarm values )
9609 Number of 2 0 to 4 This parameter contains the mapping for the PDOs the unit is able to
Mapped Objects transmit. This number is also the number of the application variables, which
9619 [0] shall be transmitted with the corresponding PDO.
9629
Notes
9639
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1A00 hex (for TPDO 1, 1A01
12799 hex for TPDO 2, 1A02 hex for TPDO 3, 1A03 hex for TPDO 4, and 1A04 hex
9625
Notes
9635
9626
Notes
9636

Configuration

[Default]
9627
Notes
9637
9628
Notes
9638

General notes
This CAN Interface is dedicated to
– J1939 devices and
– external CANopen devices with analog and/or
digital terminals.
General Settings
[Default]
3157 Baudrate 2 20 / 50 / 100 / This parameter defines the used baud rate.
125 / 250 kBaud
Notes
[250 kBd]
All participants on the CAN bus must use the same baud rate.
4.7.4.2.1 Expansion Modules at CANopen Interface

The CANopen interface at CAN 2 is very flexible.
The configuration of the expansion modules is split into two parts:
n One part is located at the CAN2 interface pages and defines
the Node IDs and the types of external devices and is
described here.
An application description explains the setup in detail (refer to
Ä Chapter 6.3.10 “Setup Expansion Modules at CAN 2”
on page 629).
n One other part is located at the external analog/digital inputs/
outputs pages and defines how many inputs/outputs are used
and the scaling of the analog types. Refer to chapters
Ä Chapter 4.4.2.4 “Analog Inputs” on page 212 for reference.

Configuration
n Six Node-IDs can be selected to be used with different combi‐

nations of external terminals ("# Node-ID", parameters
9930-9935)
n A number of well defined combinations is available for Wood‐
ward IKD and/or third party expansion modules from Phoenix
and WAGO: ("Select external terminals", parameter
15320 Ä p. 524)
This parameter defines the type and the maximal number of DI,
DO, AI, AO combinations.
n Alternatively new combinations can be implemented by
selecting "Ext.term.file" and define this separate file by
"Sequencer filename", parameter 15318 Ä p. 525.
Such files can be prepared by Woodward. Please ask you local
Woodward partner for an offer.
How to read the table ...

– "2 IKD: 16 X DI/DO": 2 devices with 8 DI/DO
each (2 x 8 = 16 DI/DO together)
– "P": Phoenix
– "W": Wago
– "_": separator for combinations with different
headers
For basic configuration see Ä Chapter 6.3.10

“Setup Expansion Modules at CAN 2”
on page 629 - especially the flow charts of
Ä “Configuration process help” on page 633ff
Combination selected by ... Terminal assigned to ...
Select # of 1st Node-ID 2nd Node-ID 3rd Node-ID 4th Node-ID 5th Node-ID 6th Node-ID
external termi‐
nals terminals: I/O ID 9930 ID 9931 ID 9932 ID 9933 ID 9934 ID 9935
ID 15320
DI/DO: Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs, only
1IKD 1 IKD: 8 x IKD1

DI/DO
DI/DO 1-8
2IKD 2 IKD: 16 x IKD1 IKD2

DI/DO
DI/DO 1-8 DI/DO 9-16
3IKD 3 IKD: 24 x IKD1 IKD2 IKD3

DI/DO
DI/DO 1-8 DI/DO 9-16 DI/DO 17-24
4IKD 4 IKD: 32 x IKD1 IKD2 IKD3 IKD4

DI/DO
DI/DO 1-8 DI/DO 9-16 DI/DO 17-24 DI/DO 25-32
P16D 1 Phoenix: 16 P16DIDO

x DI/DO
DI/DO 1-16
W16D 1 WAGO: 16 x W16DIDO

DI/DO
DI/DO 1-16
P32D 1 Phoenix: 32 P32DIDO

x DI/DO
DI/DO 1-32

Configuration
external termi‐
ID 15320
W32D 1 WAGO: 32 x W32DIDO

DI/DO
DI/DO 1-32
P16D_16D 2 Phoenix: 32 P16DIDO P16DIDO

x DI/DO
DI/DO 1-16 DI/DO 17-32
Table 111: Assignment of selectable Combinations CAN 2 (Node 1-6) used for DI/DO: Digital Inputs and Dig‐
ital Outputs, only
external termi‐
ID 15320
AI/AO: Analog Inputs and Analog Outputs, only
P16AI4AO 1 Phoenix: P16AI4AO

16 x AI / 4 x AI 1-16
AO
AO 1-4
W16AI4AO 1 WAGO: W16AI4AO

16 x AI / 4 x AI 1-16
AO
AO 1-4
Table 112: Assignment of selectable Combinations CAN 2 (Node 1-6) used for AI/AO: Analog Inputs and
Analog Outputs, only
external termi‐
ID 15320
DI/DO/AI/AO: Combinations of the expansion modules IKD and/or Phoenix
1IKD_ 1 IKD: IKD1 P16AI4AO

P16AI4AO
8 x DI/DO DI/DO 1-8 AI 1-16
1 Phoenix: AO 1-4
16 x AI / 4 x
AO
2IKD_ 2 IKD: IKD1 IKD2 P16AI4AO

P16AI4AO
16 x DI/DO DI/DO 1-8 DI/DO 9-16 AI 1-16
1 Phoenix: AO 1-4
16 x AI / 4 x
AO

Configuration
external termi‐
ID 15320
3IKD_ 3 IKD: IKD1 IKD2 IKD3 P16AI4AO

P16AI4AO
24 x DI/DO DI/DO 1-8 DI/DO 9-16 DI/DO 17-24 AI 1-16
1 Phoenix: AO 1-4
16 x AI / 4 x
AO
4IKD_ 4 IKD: IKD1 IKD2 IKD3 IKD4 P16AI4AO

P16AI4AO
32 x DI/DO DI/DO 1-8 DI/DO 9-16 DI/DO 17-24 DI/DO 25-32 AI 1-16
1 Phoenix: AO 1-4
16 x AI / 4 x
AO
P16D_16AI4A 1 Phoenix:: P16DIDO P16AI4AO

O
16 x DI/DO DI/DO 1-16 AI 1-16
1 Phoenix: AO 1-4
16 x AI / 4 x
AO
P16D16AI4AO 1 Phoenix: P16DIDO

16 x DI/DO DI/DO 1-16
16 x AI / 4 x P16AI4AO
AO
AI 1-16
AO 1-4
W16D16AI4A 1 WAGO: W16DIDO

O
16 x AI / 4 x W16AI4AO
AO
AI 1-16
AO 1-4
P32D16AI4AO 1 Phoenix,: P32DIDO

16 x AI / 4 x P16AI4AO
AO
AI 1-16
AO 1-4
W32D16AI4A 1 WAGO,: W32DIDO

O
16 x AI / 4 x W16AI4AO
AO
AI 1-16
AO 1-4
2P16D_16AI4 2 Phoenix: P16DIDO P16DIDO P16AI4AO

AO
1 Phoenix: AO 1-4
16 x AI / 4 x
AO

Configuration
external termi‐
ID 15320
P32D_16AI4A 1 Phoenix: P32DIDO P16AI4AO

O
32 x DI/DO DI/DO 1-32 AI 1-16
1 Phoenix: AO 1-4
16 x AI / 4 x
AO
DI/DO/AI/AO: Combinations of the expansion modules IKD and/or WAGO
W16AI4AO 1 Wago: W16AI4AO

16 x AI / 4 x AI 1-16
AO
AO 1-4
1IKD_W16AI4 1 IKD: IKD1 W16AI4AO

AO
8 x DI/DO DI/DO 1-8 AI 1-16
1 Wago: AO 1-4
16 x AI / 4 x
AO
2IKD_W16AI4 2 IKD: IKD1 IKD2 W16AI4AO

AO
1 Wago: AO 1-4
16 x AI / 4 x
AO
3IKD_W16AI4 3 IKD: IKD1 IKD2 IKD3 W16AI4AO

AO
24 x DI/DO DI/DO 1-8 DI/DO 9-16 DI/DO 17-24 AI 1-16
1 Wago: AO 1-4
16 x AI / 4 x
AO
4IKD_W16AI4 4 IKD: IKD1 IKD2 IKD3 IKD4 W16AI4AO

AO
32 x DI/DO DI/DO 1-8 DI/DO 9-16 DI/DO 17-24 DI/DO 25-32 AI 1-16
1 Wago: AO 1-4
16 x AI / 4 x
AO
Table 113: Assignment of selectable Combinations CAN 2 (Node 1-6) used for DI/DO/AI/AO: Combinations
of the expansion modules
If you need only four analog inputs, select

“P16AI4AO” and configure only four inputs to ON
at the configuration for the external analog inputs.
CANopen Settings and Procedure Proceed as follows to configure an external device:

n Connect external device(s)
n Check that WAGO devices are configured to default.
This is the case if the WAGO CAN-Coupler is new or if there
was any change in number or kind of WAGO modules.

Configuration
n Configure and check parameters at the easYgen (Select

external terminals, Node-ID, DI/DOs, AI/AOs)
Power up the device that the setting (15320 ) becomes effec‐
tive
n If WAGO terminals are connected and the configuration of the
external AIs and/or AOs is done, the easYgen must send a
configuration string to the WAGO coupler one time. This can
be done by setting parameter “Configure external devices”
15134 Ä p. 525 to "YES". This must be repeated if there is
any change in number or kind of WAGO modules.
n If you have changed parameter “Select external terminals ”
15320 Ä p. 524: re-power the device
n Set parameter “Configure external devices” 15134 Ä p. 525
to "Yes"
n Verify the successful configuration of the external device(s)
Update WAGO After Any Change!

The update procedure described above must be
repeated if there is any change in number or kind
of Wago modules.

[Default]
9940 This device 2 Node-ID 1-126 The Node-ID for the control unit (this device) is configured here.
[Node-ID 7]
9930 1st Node-ID 2 Node-ID 1-126 This Node-ID's are used for the communication with CANopen devices.
[Node-ID 1] Parameter 15320 Ä p. 524 "Select external terminals" offers often used pre-
settings and the possibility to point to a file containing customer specific set‐
9931 2nd Node-ID 2 Node-ID 1-126 tings.
[Node-ID 2]
9932 3rd Node-ID 2 Node-ID 1-126

[Node-ID 3]
9933 4th Node-ID 2 Node-ID 1-126

[Node-ID 4]

[Node-ID 5]

[Node-ID 6]
15320 Select external 2 Notes

terminals
A change of this parameter becomes only effective if the device is powered
up! and:
the external devices itself must be configured with the correct node ID.
[Off] No external CANopen device is supported on CAN2
Ext. term file File defined with parameter 15318 Ä p. 525 is active.
1IKD Selection of the combination of terminal(s) at the six pre-set Node-IDs.
2IKD For terminal description see table Ä Table 113 “Assignment of selectable
Combinations CAN 2 (Node 1-6) used for DI/DO/AI/AO: Combinations of the
3IKD expansion modules” on page 521 above.
4IKD
P16D

Configuration

[Default]
P32D
P16D_16D
P16AI4AO
1IKD_
P16AI4AO
2IKD_
P16AI4AO
3IKD_
P16AI4AO
4IKD_
P16AI4AO
P16D_16AI4AO
P16D16AI4AO
P32D16AI4AO
2P16D_16AI4A
O
P32D_16AI4AO
W16AI4AO
1IKD_W16AI4A
O
2IKD_W16AI4A
O
3IKD_W16AI4A
O
4IKD_W16AI4A
O
W16D
W32D
W16D16AI4AO
W32D16AI4AO
15318 Sequencer file‐ 2 [Filename.seq] Filename of a special additional file to define external devices (see NOTE
name Ä Further information on page 519).
Notes
This parameter takes only effect if parameter 15320 Ä p. 524 is configured to
“Ext.term.file”.
Please ask your Woodward partner for support / an offer.
15134 Configure 2 Yes This parameter starts the configuration of external Phoenix expansion boards.
external devices
[No] Notes
This parameter can only be used to configure Phoenix or Wago expansion
boards as describe above.
Refer to the IKD 1 Manual 37135 for configuring the IKD 1 expansion boards.
Changing the Node ID Changing the Node ID of a Wago terminal which is still configured:
n Set the new NODE-ID via DIP switches
n Load default values (via a temporary change in number or kind
of Wago modules-run configuration again.

Configuration
Configurable Wago devices

If configurable WAGO devices are used, the mode of the terminal
must be configured via the PC software WAGO I/O Check. These
configuration cannot be done via the easYgen parameters. Be
aware that the easYgen parameters for the corresponding chan‐
nels must be consistent with the Wago configuration done with the
WAGO I/O Check.
RTD device (750-451) To use the 8 channel RTD device (750-451) the following process
image must be configured via the Wago I/O-Check.
The following types are not supported: Ni1000

(high resolution), Ni1000 (TK5000), Pt1000 (EN
60751 high resolution), and 1200 Ohm.
Typ Expected format
Pt100 (EN 60751) default
Ni100 (EN 60751) default
Ni1000 (TK6180, DN 43760) default
Ni120 (Minco) default
5000 Ohm S5-FB250
Thermocouple device (750-458) for There is no intuitive setting in the easYgen-XT if a channel of the
voltage measurement Thermocouple (TC) device (750-458) is configured for voltage
measurement. But nevertheless it is possible.
Therefore a special scaling of the easYgen-XT parameters “Sender
value at display min.” and “Sender value at display max” is
required like described in the table below:
Voltage measuring “Sender value at dis‐ “Sender value at display max.”

range play min.”
+/- 30 mV -614.4 614.4
+/- 60 mV -307.2 307.2
+/- 120 mV -153.6 153.6

Configuration
4.7.4.2.2 J1939 Interface

General notes
For additional information refer to Ä Chapter 7.6 “
J1939 Protocol” on page 727.
Parameter 15102 “Device type ” allows to select
an ECU either by name or - for even more flexibility
- via an ECU file; then the name of the preferred
ECU file must be entered into parameter 15167
“ECU file name” . Please ask your local Woodward
partner for further information.

[Default]
15166 J1939 2 Off The J1939 interface is disabled. No messages will be received or transmitted.
[On] The J1939 interface is enabled.

The J1939 interface of this device may be operated with different engine con‐
trol units or analog input devices. J1939 values (e.g. from an ECU) can be
received and indicated
15102 Device type 2 The J1939 interface of this device may be operated with different engine con‐
trol units or analog input devices.
This parameter determines the type of the used ECU or that a special ECU
file designed for an ECU which is not listed here shall be used.
Notes
A change of this parameter takes only effect after repowering the devices!
ECU file This is to support ECUs which are not represented by the selection. Enter file
name with parameter 15167 “ECU file name” below.
[Standard] Standard J1939 coupling is enabled: J1939 data is displayed according to the
SAE J1939 standard.
This setting must be configured for all J1939 ECUs, which cannot be selected
here (e.g. Deutz (EMR3 & EMR4), John Deere, Daimler, Perkins, Iveco, Cat‐
erpillar, Liebherr, etc.).
Please refer to Ä Chapter 7.6 “ J1939 Protocol” on page 727 for details
and/or ask your local Woodward partner for an offer.
S6 Scania The Scania EMS/S6, S8 ECU is enabled: J1939 data according to the
SAE J1939 standard and some S6-specific data are considered.
EMR2 Deutz The Deutz EMR2 ECU is enabled: J1939 data according to the SAE J1939
standard and some EMR2-specific data are considered.
This setting is also recommended for Volvo EDC4.
EMS2 Volvo The Volvo EMS2 ECU is enabled: J1939 data according to the SAE J1939
standard and some EMS2-specific data are considered.
This setting is also recommended for Volvo EDC3 and EMS1.
ADEC ECU7 MTU The MTU ADEC ECU7 with SAM is enabled: J1939 data according to the
SAE J1939 standard and some ADEC-specific data are considered.
EGS Woodward The Woodward EGS ECU or E3-series or E6-series are enabled: J1939 data
according to the SAE J1939 standard and some EGS/E3/E6-specific data are
considered.
MFR/EDC7 MAN The MAN MFR/EDC7 ECU is enabled: J1939 data according to the
SAE J1939 standard and some EDC-specific data are considered.
EEM SISU The SISU EEM2/3 ECU is enabled: J1939 data according to the SAE J1939
standard and some EEM2/3-specific data are considered.
Cummins The Cummins ECU is enabled: J1939 data according to the SAE J1939
standard and some Cummins-specific data are considered.
This setting is also recommended for Cummins CM570 and CM850.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
Some Cummins setups need a special value for “Governor Gain” otherwise
they will shut down. In this cases please set the “Governor Gain” of the ECU
to “Internal” instead of “J1939” .
ADEC ECU8/ The MTU ADEC ECU8 with SmartConnect or the MTU ADEC ECU9 is ena‐
ECU9 MTU bled: J1939 data according to the SAE J1939 standard and some ADEC-spe‐
cific data are considered.
15167 ECU file name 2 [Filename.ecu] If “Device type” ID15102 is “ECU file” , the easYgen can communicate with
further ECUs. The correct file name with extension must be typed in and this
xxx.ecu file must be available "inside" the easYgen (flashed).
Notes
Please contact your local Woodward partner to enable communication with
your ECU (xxx.ecu file and ECU specific settings).
15106 J1939 own 2 0 to 255 The easYgen sends J1939 request and control messages with this source
address address. It must be changed for different ECU types according to the fol‐
[234] lowing table. The ECU listens only to control messages, if they are sent to the
correct address.
n S6 Scania: 39
n EMR2 Deutz: 3
n EMS2 Volvo: 17
n ADEC ECU7 MTU: 1
n EGS Woodward: 234
n MFR/EDC7 MAN: 253
n EEM SISU: N/A
n Cummins: 220
n ADEC ECU8/ECU9 MTU: 234
n Standard: Please refer to Ä Chapter 7.6 “ J1939 Protocol” on page 727
and to the manual of your J1939 ECU manufacturer.
Details may be found in the manual of the genset control and in Ä Chapter
7.6 “ J1939 Protocol” on page 727.
Notes
Changing this parameter becomes only effective after restarting the unit.
15107 Engine control 2 0 to 255 Configures the address of the J1939 device, which is controlled. The
address easYgen sends J1939 request and control messages with this destination
[0] address.
n S6 Scania: 0
n EMR2 Deutz: 0
n EMS2 Volvo: 0
n ADEC ECU7 MTU: 128
n EGS Woodward: 0
n MFR/EDC7 MAN: 39
n EEM SISU: 0/(1)
n Cummins: 0
n ADEC ECU8/ECU9 MTU: 0
n Standard: Please refer to Ä Chapter 7.6 “ J1939 Protocol” on page 727
and to the manual of your J1939 ECU manufacturer.
Details may be found in the manual of the genset control and in Ä Chapter
7.6 “ J1939 Protocol” on page 727.
15108 Reset previous 2 Yes If this parameter is set to "Yes", a DM3 message "Acknowledge passive
act. DTCs - DM3 faults" is sent. After that this parameter is reset automatically to "No".
[No]
As a result the alarms DTCs (Diagnostic Trouble Codes) of (DM2) which no
longer apply are cleared.

Configuration

[Default]
15133 Reset act. DTCs 2 Yes If this parameter is set to "Yes", a DM11 message "Acknowledge active
- DM11 faults" is sent. After that this parameter is reset automatically to "No".
[No]
As a result the alarms DTCs (Diagnostic Trouble Codes) of (DM1) which no
longer apply are cleared.
15103 SPN version 2 Version 1 / 2 / 3 The J1939 protocol provides 4 different versions for the conversion method of
the Suspect Parameter Number (SPN). This is important for a correct inter‐
[Version 1] pretation of the alarm messages (DM1 & DM2).
This parameter defines the version of the conversion method: Version 1, Ver‐
sion 2 or Version 3. Version 4 is detected automatically.
For details please refer to the manual of your J1939 ECU manufacturer.
15127 ECU remote 2 On The unit sends J1939 control messages to the ECU. Depending on the
controlled selected device type (parameter 15102 Ä p. 527), contains a specific selec‐
tion of commands.
[Off] The ECU remote control via the J1939 protocol will be disabled.
Notes
The unit sends J1939 control messages to the ECU. Depending on the
selected device type (parameter 15102 Ä p. 527), it contains a specific selec‐
tion of commands. Available messages are speed deviation and droop for
ECUs as well as engine start/stop, enable idle mode, rated speed switch and
preglow for some ECUs.
Refer to Ä Chapter 7.6 “ J1939 Protocol” on page 727 for more detailed
information.
5537 Speed deviation 2 0 to 1,400 rpm This parameter adjusts the range of the speed deviation around the rated
ECU speed, which is sent to the ECU.
[120 rpm]
It relates to the engine rated speed (parameter 1601 Ä p. 505).
There are two methods of sending the speed setpoint to the ECU: With a
speed offset and a speed setpoint. The frequency and power control must be
configured to "PID".
Speed offset
(S6 Scania, EMS2 Volvo, EGS Woodward, Cummins)
The easYgen sends a speed offset with a range of 0 to 100% (every 20 ms).
50% = rated speed.
There is also an internal speed offset configured in the ECU, this parameter
determines what corresponds with 0% or 100%. If there is a positive and a
negative speed offset, they should be symmetrical in the ECU.
We recommend to have the same speed offset configured in the ECU and in
this parameter here. A different setting will result in an additional "controller
gain".
How to test this parameter during commissioning:
Islanded operation
Disable the frequency controller and change parameter 5508 Ä p. 309 for the
initial state between 0 and 100%, the engine should change the speed as fol‐
lows:
n 0 = rated speed – negative speed offset from ECU

n 50 = rated speed
n 100 = rated speed + positive speed offset from ECU
Mains parallel operation
Check with the setpoint in the display if the engine is able to deliver the full
power.

Configuration

[Default]
Speed setpoint
(EMR2 Deutz, ADEC MTU, EGS Woodward, EEM SISU, Standard)
The easYgen sends a speed setpoint in rpm (every 10 ms) that varies around
the rated speed in the range of +/- the speed deviation.
How to test this parameter during commissioning:
Islanded operation
Disable the frequency controller and change parameter 5508 Ä p. 309 for the
initial state between 0 and 100%, the engine should change the speed as fol‐
lows:
n 0 = rated speed – speed deviation ECU

e.g.: 1,500 – 120 = 1,380 rpm
n 50 = rated speed
e.g.: = 1,500 rpm
n 100 = rated speed + speed deviation ECU
e.g.: 1,500 + 120 = 1,620 rpm
Mains parallel operation
Check with the setpoint in the display if the engine is able to deliver the full
power.
Keep this value as small as possible, i.e. do not enter a speed deviation of
500, if the engine varies only between 1,400 and 1,600 rpm.
Notes
The Woodward EGS ECU supports both types of speed deviation control and
may be configured either to "Speed offset" or "Speed setpoint".
In mains parallel operation, the EGS can be configured to receive a real
power setpoint from the easYgen to control the power. In this case, real
power control must be disabled in the easYgen.
This parameter is only visible if ECU remote controlled (param‐
eter 15127 Ä p. 529) is configured to "On".
4843 ECU Application 2 [Continuous] Prepared for MTU - 3B mode
Emergency Prepared for MTU - 3D mode
Notes
This parameter is only visible if "Device type" (parameter 15102 Ä p. 527) is
configured to "ADEC ECU8 MTU" and "ECU remote controlled" (parameter
15127 Ä p. 529) is configured to "On".
12939 ECU Power 2 [Low power mode] Prepared for MTU - Low mode
Mode
High power mode Prepared for MTU - High mode
Notes
This parameter is only visible if "Device type" (parameter 15102 Ä p. 527) is
configured to "ADEC ECU8 MTU" and "ECU remote controlled" (parameter
15127 Ä p. 529) is configured to "On".
15164 ECU seq. 2 Determined by This LogicsManager is prepared to pass binary information to the ECU. Right
B_IN_1 LogicsManager now it is only used for:
86.31
ADEC ECU 9 "Rapid Engine Start"
[(0 & 1) & 1]
If the easYgen is transmitting a start command and the result of “86.31 LM:
= 11647 ECU seq. B_IN_1 is:
False, the ECU9 will start with "Normal Engine Start"
True, the ECU9 will start with "Rapid Engine Start"

Configuration

[Default]
EMS2 Volvo “Override” (Engine restored operation)

If the result of “86.31 LM ECU seq. B_IN_1 is:
False: The Volvo override flag is only active if LM “04.27 Critical mode is
active”
True: The Volvo override flag is active independent of LM “04.27 Critical
mode is active”
Notes
15165 ECU seq. 2 Determined by This LogicsManager is prepared to pass binary information to the ECU. Right
B_IN_2 LogicsManager now it is not used.
86.32
Notes
[(0 & 1) & 1]
15162 AM ECU seq. 2 Determined by This LogicsManager is prepared to pass binary information to the ECU. Right
A_IN_1 AnalogManager now, it is not used.
81.22
mtu ECU9 “Alternate Droop Accelerator 1 Select”
[A1 = 10.01 ZERO]
If the result of AM 81.22 is:
-0, the ECU9 is running with “Normal droop”
-has a value 1 – 13, the ECU9 is running with an alternative droop
- is > 13 or negative, the ECU9 is running with “Normal droop”
Please be aware that the values assigned to this function must be whole-
numbers. If not, the decimals will be cut.
Notes
Refer to Ä Chapter 4.9 “Configure AnalogManager” on page 551 for explan‐
ation how to use the AnalogManager.
Refer to Ä Chapter 9.4.1 “Data Sources AM” on page 1042 for a list of all
data sources.
15163 AM ECU seq. 2 Determined by This AnalogManager is prepared to pass analog information to the ECU via
A_IN_2 AnalogManager J1939.
81.23
If this AnalogManager is used by an ECU its function will be described in the
[A1 = 10.01 ZERO] manual of the corresponding J1939 ECU. For more information please see
J1939 ECU description.
Notes
Refer to Ä Chapter 4.9 “Configure AnalogManager” on page 551 for explan‐
ation how to use the AnalogManager.
Refer to Ä Chapter 9.4.1 “Data Sources AM” on page 1042 for a list of all
data sources.
Table 114: J1939 Settings

General notes

Configuration
COB-ID SYNC/TIME messages

Parameters 9104 Ä p. 533 and 9105 Ä p. 533
use synchronization and time messages that
adhere to the following structure.
31 (MSB) X N/A
30 0 Unit does not generate

SYNC/TIME message
1 Unit generates SYNC/

TIME message
29 X N/A
28-11 0 Always
10-0 (LSB) X Bits 10-0 of SYNC/TIME

COB-ID
TIME synchronization message CANopen COB-ID TIME Time applied Time trans‐
master mitted
Off Bit 30 = 0; Bit 31 = 0 No No
Bit 30 = 1; Bit 31 = 0 Yes No
Bit 30 = 0; Bit 31 = 1 Yes No
Default Bit 30 = 0; Bit 31 = 0 No No
Bit 30 = 1; Bit 31 = 0 No Yes
Bit 30 = 0; Bit 31 = 1 Yes No1
Bit 30 = 1; Bit 31 = 1 Yes Yes1
On Bit 30 = 0; Bit 31 = 0 No No
Bit 30 = 1; Bit 31 = 0 No Yes
Bit 30 = 0; Bit 31 = 1 Yes No
1 If CANopen master (lowest Node-ID).

[Default]
3143 Baudrate 2 20 / 50 / 100 / This parameter defines the used baud rate. Please note, that all participants
125 / 250 / 500 / on the CAN bus must use the same baud rate.
800 / 1000
kBaud
[250 kBd]
1895 Align device no. 2 No If this parameter is configured to "Yes" the parameter “Node-ID CAN bus 3”
with Node-ID 8952 Ä p. 533 will be overwritten with the value of the “Device
[Yes] number ” 1702 Ä p. 181 and is not visible.
If configured to "No", parameter “Device number ” 1702 is visible and will not
be overwritten.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
This is to avoid CAN ID conflict in multi unit systems if using the same ID
more than one time. This can cause CAN "Bus-Off" failure.
8952 Node-ID CAN 2 1 to 127 (dec) A number that is unique to the control must be set in this parameter so that
bus 3 this control unit can be correctly identified on the CAN bus.
[1]
This address number may only be used once on the CAN bus. All additional
addresses are calculated based on this unique device number.
Notes
We recommend to configure the Node-IDs for units, which participate in load
sharing, as low as possible to facilitate establishing of communication.
For multiple genset applications please make sure to change parameter
1702 Ä p. 181 as well
8995 CANopen 2 One bus participant must take over the network management and put the
Master other participants into "operational" mode. The easYgen is able to perform
this task.
[Default Master] The unit starts up in "operational" mode and sends a "Start_Remote_node"
message after a short delay (the delay is the Node-ID (param‐
eter 8952 Ä p. 533) in seconds, i.e. if the Node-ID is configured to 2, the
message will be sent after 2 seconds). If more than one easYgen is config‐
ured to Default Master, the unit with the lower Node-ID will take over control.
Therefore, the CAN bus devices, which are intended to act as Default Master
should be assigned a low Node-ID. No other device on the CAN bus (except
the easYgens) may operate as Master).
On The unit is the CANopen Master and automatically changes into operational
mode and transmits data.
Off The unit is a CANopen Slave. An external Master must change into opera‐
tional mode.
Notes
If this parameter is configured to "Off", the Master controller (for example a
PLC) must send a "Start_Remote_node" message to initiate the load share
message transmission of the easYgen.
If no "Start_Remote_node" message would be sent, the complete system
would not be operational.
8953 Producer heart‐ 2 0 to 65500 ms Independent from the CANopen Master configuration, the unit transmits a
beat time heartbeat message with this configured heartbeat cycle time. If the producer
[2000 ms] heartbeat time is equal 0, the heartbeat will only be sent as response to a
remote frame request. The time configured here will be rounded up to the
next 20 ms step.
8967 COB-ID SYNC 2 0 to FFFFFFFF This parameter defines whether the unit generates the SYNC message or
Message hex not.
[80 hex] Complies with CANopen specification: object 1005, subindex 0; defines the
COB-ID of the synchronization object (SYNC).
Notes
The structure of this object is shown in Ä “COB-ID SYNC/TIME messages”
on page 532
8968 Producer SYNC 2 0 to 65000 ms This is the cycle time of the SYNC message. If the unit is configured for this
Message time function it will send the SYNC message with this interval. The time configured
[20 ms] here will be rounded up to the next 10 ms step.
9104 COB-ID TIME 2 1 to FFFFFFFF This parameter defines whether the unit generates the TIME message or not.
Message hex
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1012, subindex 0; defines the
[C0000100 hex] COB-ID of the time object (TIME).
Notes
The structure of this object is shown in Ä “COB-ID SYNC/TIME messages”
on page 532
9105 Cycle of TIME 2 1.0 to 6500.0 s This is the cycle time of the TIME message. If the unit is configured for this
sync. message function (parameter 9104 Ä p. 533) it will send the TIME message with this
[10.0 s] interval.

Configuration

[Default]
Notes
The structure of this object is shown in Ä “TIME synchronization message”
on page 532
9127 Password pro‐ 5 Off Password protection for CAN 3 is not active.
tection
Notes
[On] Password protection for CAN 3 is active.
4.7.4.3.1 Receive PDO {x} (Process Data Object)

General notes RPDO mapping is carried out as shown in (Fig. 225).
Fig. 225: RPDO mapping principle
COB-ID parameters
Parameters
12741 Ä p. 535/12751 Ä p. 535/12761 Ä p.
535/12771 Ä p. 535/12781 Ä p. 535 use com‐
structure.
RPDO Objects can be remote signals (parameter
503; please refer to Ä “Remote control word 1”
on page 974 for details), DI states and AI meas‐
ured values.
UNSIGNE MSB LSB

D 32
Bits Bits 31 30 29 28-11 10-0
11 bit ID 11 bit 0/1 X X 0000000 11 bit

ID 0000000 identifier
0000

Configuration
30 X N/A
29 X N/A
28-11 0 Always


[Default]
12741 COB-ID 2 1 to FFFFFFFF This parameter contains the communication parameters for the PDOs, the
hex device is able to receive.
12751
[80000000 hex] Complies with CANopen specification: object 1400 hex (for RPDO 1, 1401
12771 for RPDO 5), subindex 1.
12781 Notes
The structure of this object is shown in Ä “COB-ID parameters” on page 534.
12742 Event-timer 2 0 to 65535 ms This parameter configures the time, from which this PDO is marked as "not
existing". The time configured here will be rounded up to the next 5 ms step.
12752 [2000 ms] Received messages are processed by the control unit every 20 ms. Mes‐
12762 sages, which are sent faster, will be discarded. We recommend to configure
ten times the cycle time of the received data here.
12772
Notes
12782
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1400 (for RPDO 1, 1401 hex for
RPDO 2, 1402 hex for RPDO 3, 1403 hex for RPDO 4, and 1404 hex for
RPDO 5), subindex 5
12753 [0] used. If an unknown data protocol ID is configured here, a failure is indicated
12763 by the CAN status bits. Possible data protocol IDs are:
12744 Number of 2 0 to 4 This parameter defines the number of valid entries within the mapping record.
Mapped Objects This number is also the number of the application variables, which shall be
12754 [0] received with the corresponding PDO.
12764
Notes
12774
for RPDO 5), subindex 0
12765
12775

Configuration

[Default]
12785 Notes
hex for RPDO 2, 1602 hex for RPDO 3,1603 hex for RPDO 4, and 1604 hex
12766
Notes
12776
12767
Notes
12777
12768
Notes
12778
4.7.4.3.2 Transmit PDO {x} (Process Data Object)

General notes TPDO mapping is carried out as shown in (Fig. 226).
CANopen allows to send 8 byte of data with each

Transmit PDO. These may be defined separately if
no pre-defined data protocol is used.
All data protocol parameters with a parameter ID
may be sent as an object with a CANopen
Transmit PDO.
The data length will be taken from the data byte
column (see Ä “The following data protocols are
implemented to be used” on page 769):
Fig. 226: TPDO mapping – 1,2 UNSIGNED16 or SIGNED16
– etc.
The object ID is identical with the parameter ID
when configuring via front panel or ToolKit.

Configuration
COB-ID parameters
Parameters
12691 Ä p. 538/12701 Ä p. 538/12711 Ä p.
538/12721 Ä p. 538/12731 Ä p. 538 use com‐
structure.
UNSIGN MSB LSB

ED 32
Bits Bits 31 30 29 28-11 10-0
11 bit ID 11 bit ID 0/1 X X 0000000 11 bit

0000000 identifier
0000
30 X N/A
29 X N/A
28-11 0 Always

Transmission types
Parameters
12693 Ä p. 538/12703 Ä p. 538/12713 Ä p.
538/12723 Ä p. 538/12733 Ä p. 538 are used
to select one of the following transmission types.
Transmis‐ PDO transmission

sion type
Cyclic Acyclic Synchro‐ Asynchro‐ RTR only

nous nous
0 Will not be sent
1-240 X X
241-251 Will not be sent
254 X
255 X

Configuration
A value between 1 and 240 means that the PDO is

transferred synchronously and cyclically. The
transmission type indicating the number of SYNC,
which are necessary to trigger PDO transmissions.
Receive PDOs are always triggered by the fol‐
lowing SYNC upon reception of data independent
of the transmission types 0 to 240. For TPDOs,
transmission type 254 and 255 means, the applica‐
tion event is the event timer.

[Default]
12691 COB-ID 2 1 to FFFFFFFF This parameter contains the communication parameters for the PDOs the unit
hex is able to transmit. The unit transmits data (i.e. visualization data) on the CAN
12701 ID configured here.
[80000000 hex]
12711 Complies with CANopen specification: object 1800 hex for (TPDO 1, 1801
12731
Notes
The structure of this object is shown in Ä “COB-ID parameters” on page 537
In case a LSG is part of CAN 1, do not configure COB-IDs 181 - 18E hex
because legacy devices are using same IDs but cannot be switched.
12693 Transmission 2 0 to 255 This parameter contains the communication parameters for the PDOs the unit
type is able to transmit. It defines whether the unit broadcasts all data automati‐
12703 [255] cally (value 254 or 255) or only upon request with the configured address of
12713 the COB-ID SYNC message (parameter 9100 Ä p. 512).
12723 Notes
12733 Complies with CANopen specification: object 1800 hex (for TPDO 1, 1801
hex for TPDO 2, 1802 hex for TPDO 3, 1803 hex for TPDO 4, and 1804 hex
The description of the transmission type is shown in Ä “Transmission types”
on page 537.
12694 Event timer 2 0 to 65535 ms This parameter contains the communication parameters for the PDOs the unit
is able to transmit. The broadcast cycle for the transmitted data is configured
12704 [20 ms] here. The time configured here will be rounded up to the next 5 ms step.
12714
Notes
12724
Complies with CANopen specification: object 1800 hex (for TPDO 1, 1801
12702 8962: [5003] used. If an unknown data protocol ID is configured here, a failure is indicated
12712 8963: [5008] by the CAN status bits.
12722 8964: [0] Possible data protocol IDs are:
12732 8965: [0]

8966: [0]
5003 Data telegram (CAN and MODBUS)

Configuration
Configure Interfaces > Ethernet Interfaces

[Default]
5005 Data telegram (CAN mains values)
5010 Data telegram (MODBUS)
5011 Data telegram (CAN alarm values )
12695 Number of 2 0 to 4 This parameter contains the mapping for the PDOs the unit is able to
Mapped Objects transmit. This number is also the number of the application variables, which
12705 [0] shall be transmitted with the corresponding PDO.
12715
Notes
12725
12716
Notes
12726
12717
Notes
12727
12718
Notes
12728
12719
Notes
12729
4.7.5 Ethernet Interfaces

General notes The Ethernet network provides a fast communication capability to
different devices, like remote panel, PLC or SCADA systems. The
common protocol Modbus TCP is there for the preferred communi‐
cation protocol. Additionally the Ethernet connection supports the
Woodward protocol Servlink for ToolKit and other Woodward own
monitoring tools (like remote panel and SCADA visualization tool).
At least the easYgen provides a UDP protocol for system relevant
and time discrete information exchange.

Configuration
Configure Interfaces > Ethernet Interfaces > Ethernet Network A
Do not connect the easYgen with the internet as

long the security aspects are not considered. Con‐
sider an IP responsible person to discuss proper
security procedures like placing routers and fire
walls.
If the easYgen (or -system) shall be connected to
an already existing Ethernet network, a network
responsible person must arrange and allocate the
IP Addresses. He takes care about IP-Address, the
subnet mask, and when needed the gateway IP
Address.
ID Parameter CL Setting range [Default] Description
7488 and (Time needed to detect 12 "7488" x "7489" Notes

7489 "connection missing")
Should not be changed - otherwise please ask your Wood‐
ward sales support partner for a temporary code level
access.
Visible in ToolKit only.
The "Transmission rate" (ID 7488) multiplied with the number

of "Timeout cycles" (ID 7489) is the time it needs to detect
a"connection missing".
7488 Transmission rate [80 ms] The transmission rate defines the refresh rate (time) of the
UDP messages, for example load share messages.
80 to 400 ms
7489 Timeout cycles [5] The control monitors the expected amount of received UDP
messages. This entry is the number of LDSS messages that
2 to 10 can be lost before it is detected as "connection missing".
7485 Modbus/TCP Slave ID 2 [1] Your local Modbus device address, which is used to identify
the device via Modbus/TCP (Ethernet), must be entered
1 to 255 here.
9129 Password protection 5 Off Password protection for Ethernet is not active.
Notes
[On] Password protection for Ethernet is active.
4.7.5.1 Ethernet Network A

The actual IP address, subnet mask, gateway IP address (all hex
values) can be viewed under Next Page (Status Menu) / Diag‐
nostic / Interfaces / Ethernet / Ethernet A.
Fig. 227: Ethernet Network A screen

Configuration
Configure Interfaces > Ethernet Interfaces > Ethernet Network A
IP address Each port within the Ethernet network must have its own network
address. As long the Ethernet network is only used by the
easYgen-XT system, the address range is free configurable. For
better troubleshooting use the default Ethernet address range and
configure the single IP addresses according to their device num‐
bers.
Device part: Restrictions

The "device part" is the logical result of “IP
Address” AND NOT “Network Mask” . The bits
(dual system 02/12) of the device part must be dif‐
ferent from being all the same - neither all zero 02
nor all 12 (broadcast).
Please select your IP address accordingly.
Gateway IP address
The gateway IP address defines a node within a local area network
(LAN), which is directed to external networks. It is usually not
needed in an easYgen Ethernet network. Refer to your network
responsible contact person, if a gateway capability is required.
Fig. 228: Ethernet IP and gateway

addresses
HEX values
The addresses and subnet masks are known as
hex values but are displayed in HMI and ToolKit as
decimal values.
5330 IP address 2 [10, 31, 140, 0] Field 1,2,3,4 for IP address Ethernet port A. This setting will
be not valid automatically. The “Set IP address” parameter
5331 must be set to [ON] for enabling.
5332
Notes
5333
Device part bits are not allowed to be either all 00...2 or all
11...2 (broadcast).
7412 Set IP address 2 Off Set IP-Address Ethernet port A.
5334 Subnet mask 2 [255, 255, 240, 0] Set byte 1,2,3,4 of the subnet mask Ethernet port A. This set‐
ting will be not valid automatically. The “Set subnet mask”
5335 parameter must be set to [ON] for enabling.
5336
5337
7413 Set subnet mask 2 Off Set subnet mask Ethernet port A.

Configuration
Configure Interfaces > Ethernet Interfaces > Ethernet Network B
5338 Gateway IP 2 [0, 0, 0, 0] Field 1,2,3,4 for gateway IP-Address for Ethernet port A. This
setting will be not valid automatically. The “Set IP address”
5339 parameter must be set to [ON] for enabling. If 0.0.0.0 is set,
5340 the gateway's functionality is switched off.
5341
5342 Set Gateway IP 2 Off Set Gateway IP Address for Ethernet port A
address
4.7.5.2 Ethernet Network B

The actual IP address and subnet mask (all hex values) can be
viewed under Next Page (Status Menu) / Diagnostic / Interfaces /
Ethernet / Ethernet B.
Fig. 229: Ethernet Network B screen
bers.


Configuration
Configure Interfaces > Ethernet Interfaces > Ethernet Network C
HEX values
decimal values.
5430 IP address 2 [10, 31, 140, 0] Field 1,2,3,4 for IP address Ethernet port B. This setting will
5432
Notes
5433
11...2 (broadcast).
7414 Set IP address 2 Off Set IP-Address Ethernet port B.
5434 Subnet mask 2 [255, 255, 240, 0] Set byte 1,2,3,4 of the subnet mask Ethernet port B. This set‐
5436
5437
7415 Set subnet mask 2 Off Set subnet mask Ethernet port B.
4.7.5.3 Ethernet Network C

The actual IP address and subnet mask (all hex values) can be
Ethernet / Ethernet C.
Fig. 230: Ethernet Network C screen
bers.


Configuration
Configure Interfaces > Ethernet Interfaces > SNTP
HEX values
decimal values.
7418 IP address 2 [10, 31, 140, 0] Field 1,2,3,4 for IP address Ethernet port C. This setting will
7420
Notes
7421
11...2 (broadcast).
7416 Set IP address 2 Off Set IP-Address Ethernet port C.
7422 Subnet mask 2 [255, 255, 240, 0] Set byte 1,2,3,4 of the subnet mask Ethernet port C. This set‐
7424
7425
7417 Set subnet mask 2 Off Set subnet mask Ethernet port C.
4.7.5.4 SNTP
SNTP feature The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is a common proce‐
dure to synchronize clocks in computer systems via packaged
based communication networks. In this manner, the easYgen-XT
can be configured as a SNTP client. The easYgen-XT is also
usable as a SNTP server within the local area network by its own
IP address.
The SNTP functionality can be configured for three modes:

n External SNTP mode
The easYgen-XT requests time and date information from an
external SNTP server, marked with an own IP address.
n Load sharing mode
The easYgen-XT requests time and date information from the
easYgen with the smallest device number, if the load sharing
over Ethernet is enabled.
n Internal clock mode
The SNTP client mechanism is disabled. The own real time
clock determines clock and date.

Configuration
Configure Interfaces > Load Share Parameters
HEX values
decimal values.
7780 SNTP address 2 [10, 14, 128, 128] Set byte 1,2,3,4 of the IP address of the external SNTP-
Server.
7781 0 to 255 (4x)
7782
7783
7784 Rate 2 [1200s] Set the time rate of the SNTP-Server request.
60 to 6000
7785 Timeout 2 [60s] Set the timeout of the SNTP-Server. This feature is prepared
for the future and has currently no influence on the function.
30 to 600
7786 Mode 2 [Internal clock] The device provides different SNTP modes.
External SNTP Internal clock: The clock information comes from the internal
clock. The SNTP function is disabled.
Load share
External SNTP-Server: The clock information is receipt by an
external SNTP-Server.
Load share: The clock information is generated within the
easYgen system. A master (usually the device with the
smallest device number) serves all easYgens with time and
date information according to their request rate.
4.7.6 Load Share Parameters

[Default]
9921 Transfer rate LS 2 0.10 to 0.30 s The transfer rate defines the time delay between two fast CAN messages.
fast message
[0.10 s] In case of CAN systems with a high bus load (e.g. long distance between the
(CAN) units with low baud rate), a shorter transfer rate (higher time setting) helps to
reduce the bus load.
9920 Load Share 2 2xx hex / 3xx The first digit of the CAN ID or the range (i.e. 2xx means 200 through 2FF
CAN-ID hex / 4xx hex / hex) is configured here.
5xx hex
The last two digits will be assigned by the control with the settings from the
[5xx hex] device number (parameter 1702 Ä p. 181).

Configuration
Configure LogicsManager
4.8 Configure LogicsManager

Logical symbols
The easYgen LogicsManager screens show logical symbols

according to the IEC standard by default. However, it is also pos‐
sible to change the LogicsManager screens to ASA standard.

[Default]
4117 Use ASA sym‐ 2 Yes Symbols according to the ASA standard are used in LogicsManager screens.
bols
[No] Symbols according to the IEC standard are used in LogicsManager screens.
Refer to Ä Chapter 9.3.3 “Logical Symbols”

on page 1025 for a table of symbols according to
the different standards.
Refer to Ä Chapter 9.3.1 “LogicsManager Over‐
view” on page 986for an introduction how a Logi‐
csManager works.

Configuration
Internal flags Internal flags within the LogicsManager logical outputs may be pro‐
grammed and used for multiple functions.
Flag {x} Flag 1 Flag 2 Flag 3 Flag 4 Flag 5 Flag 6 Flag 7 Flag 8
Parameter 12230 12240 12250 12260 12270 12280 12290 12300

ID {yyyyy}
Result 10700 10701 10702 10702 10704 10705 10706 10707
Table 115: Flag parameter IDs (1 to 8)
Parameter 12910 12911 12912 12913 12914 12915 12916 12917

ID {yyyyy}
Result 11609 11610 11611 11612 11613 11614 11615 11616
Parameter 12231 12233 12235 12237 12241 12243 12245 12247

ID {yyyyy}
Result 12232 12234 12236 12238 12242 12244 12246 12248
Parameter 12251 12253 12255 12257 12261 12263 12265 12267

ID {yyyyy}
Result 12252 12254 12256 12258 12262 12264 12266 12268

[Default]
{yyyyy} Flag {x} 2 Determined by The flags may be used as auxiliary flags for complex combinations by using
LogicsManager the logical output of these flags as command variable for other logical out‐
{XX.XX} puts.
[(0 & 1) & 1] Notes
= {nnnnn} Flag 1 is also used as placeholder in other logical combinations.
Flag 8 is preset with a timer start and shows different default values.
{XX.XX} is a placeholder for the LogicsManager number
{nnnnn} is a placeholder for the parameter ID of the logical output of the Logi‐
csManager equation
For conditions and explanation of programming

please refer to Ä Chapter 9.3.1 “LogicsManager

Configuration
LS-5 related command flags In systems of easYgen together with LS-5 the LS-5 command flags
described below may be configured via easYgen LogicsManager to
send binary information to the LS-5 LogicsManager system. Within
the LS-5 these commands appear as LogicsManager command
variables as well.
LS5 command LS5 command 1 LS5 command 2 LS5 command 3 LS5 command 4 LS5 command 5 LS5 command 6
{x}
Parameter ID 12979 12980 12981 12982 12983 12984

{yyyyy}
Not applicable — —
for application
mode
Table 119: LS5 command flag IDs

[Default]
{yyyyy} LS5 command 2 Determined by All these single command variables of all easYgen devices are offered in the
{x} LogicsManager connected LS-5 units. In the LS-5 the flags appear in two ways:
{XX.XX}
n aligned (logical OR) and
[(0 & 1) & 1]
n individually.
= {nnnnn}
See drawing below.
Notes
The results can also be used within the easYgen own LogicsManager system
(LM: 24.23 to 24.28).
{XX.XX} is a placeholder for the LogicsManager number
{nnnnn} is a placeholder for the parameter ID of the logical output of the Logi‐
csManager equation

Configuration
Equations easYgen (1) Command variables LS5

LM 12979 LS5 command 1
LM 12980 LS5 command 2 28.01 Command 1 to LS5(OR)
28.06 Command 6 to LS5(OR)
Equations easYgen (2)

LM 12980 LS5 command 2 29.01 Command 1 easYgen 1
29.06 Command 6 easYgen 1
29.07 Command 1 easYgen 2

Equations easYgen (32) 29.08 Command 2 easYgen 2
Fig. 231: LM flags of easYgen transferred to LS-5
For conditions and explanation of programming

please refer to Ä Chapter 9.3.1 “LogicsManager
LogicsManager Timers: Set timers

Daily time setpoints - Timer 1, 2
Utilizing the LogicsManager it is possible to estab‐
lish specific times of the day that functions (i.e.
generator exerciser) can be enabled.
The two daily time setpoints are activated each
day at the configured time. Using the LogicsMan‐
ager these setpoints may be configured individu‐
ally or combined to create a time range.
Active time setpoint

lish specific days (and/or hours, minutes, seconds)
that functions (i.e. generator exerciser) can be
enabled. The active switching point is activated
only on a specified day (and/or hour, minute,
second).
The setpoints may be configured individually or
combined via the LogicsManager. You may con‐
figure for each month: daily, hourly, minutely,
and/or even secondly time setpoints depending on
how you combine the setpoints in the LogicsMan‐
ager.

Configuration
Active week days - weekly time setpoint

lish specific days of the week that functions (i.e.
generator exerciser) can be enabled.
The weekly time setpoint is enabled during the
indicated day from 0:00:00 hours to 23:59:59
hours.
Daily time setpoints - Timer 1, 2

[Default]
1652 Timer {x}: Hour 2 0 to 23 h Enter the hour of the daily time setpoint here.
1657 1652: [8 h] Example
1657: [17 h] n 0 = 0th hour of the day (midnight).
n 23 = 23rd hour of the day (11pm).
1651 Timer {x}: 2 0 to 59 min Enter the minute of the daily time setpoint here.
Minute
1656 [0 min] Example
n 0 = 0th minute of the hour.

1650 Timer {x}: 2 0 to 59 s Enter the second of the daily time setpoint here.
Second
1655 [0 s] Example
n 0 = 0th second of the minute.

Active time setpoint

[Default]
1663 Active day 2 Day 1 to 31 Enter the day of the active switch point here.
[1] The active time setpoint is enabled during the indicated day from 0:00:00
hours to 23:59:59 hours.
Example

1662 Active hour 2 0 to 23 h Enter the hour of the active switch point here.
[12 h] The active time setpoint is enabled every day during the indicated hour from
minute 0 to minute 59.
Example
n 0 = 0th hour of the day.

n 23 = 23rd hour of the day.

Configuration
Configure AnalogManager > Operations

[Default]
1661 Active minute 2 0 to 59 min Enter the minute of the active switch point here.
[0 min] The active time setpoint is enabled every hour during the indicated minute
from second 0 to second 59.
Example

1660 Active second 2 0 to 59 s Enter the second of the active switch point here.
[0 s] The active time setpoint is enabled every minute during the indicated second.
Example

Active week days - weekly time set‐

point
[Default]
Please select each of the active weekdays.
1670 Monday active 2 [Yes] The switch point is enabled every Monday.
No The switch point is disabled every Monday.
1671 Tuesday active 2 [Yes] The switch point is enabled every Tuesday.
No The switch point is disabled every Tuesday.
1672 Wednesday 2 [Yes] The switch point is enabled every Wednesday.

active
No The switch point is disabled every Wednesday
1673 Thursday active 2 [Yes] The switch point is enabled every Thursday.
No The switch point is disabled every Thursday.
1674 Friday active 2 [Yes] The switch point is enabled every Friday.
No The switch point is disabled every Friday.
1675 Saturday active 2 Yes The switch point is enabled every Saturday.
[No] The switch point is disabled every Saturday.
1676 Sunday active 2 Yes The switch point is enabled every Sunday.
[No] The switch point is disabled every Sunday.
4.9 Configure AnalogManager

4.9.1 Operations
An AnalogManager (AM) is a flexible sub-system to process and/or
generate both an analog output signal and a related digital output.
It offers a set of functions (Type) to select the preferred signal pro‐
cessing. According to the selected function the AM computes up to
two analog inputs and one constant for result. Up to two digital
inputs enable to control the process (internal logic allows to adjust
boolean signal).

Configuration
Inputs:
n Up to 2 analog variables (A1, A2) and
n 1 direct configurable constant (C1)
in conjunction with
n up to 2 Boolean information (L1, L2)*.
The AM processes the inputs listed above depending on the
selected "Type". The result is always provided in form of
n an analog value (AR) and
n a Boolean (BR).
There are two types of AnalogManagers:
n Freely usable AM to process signals and use the results for
output as control.
n Dedicated AM which analog result is directly accepted by (fixed
to) an according function (e.g. AO01).
For both freely and dedicated AM is valid:
n The analog result is accessible via the AnalogManager com‐
mand variable pool.
n The resulting Boolean is accessible via the LogicsManager
command variable pool.
Preferred AM Definition Procedure 1. Start with "Type"
ð Select AM type first to get the picture and the visual
understanding of available inputs, outputs, function, and
results.
2. Select analog inputs and set constant.
Besides internal and measured values there

are 16 “Free constants” available for more
flexibility. Refer to Ä Chapter 4.9.2 “Analog‐
Manager Constants” on page 561for details.
3. Prepare each digital input by selecting source (parameter)

and logical function.
4. Enter with "Apply"
ð Press [Apply] button to send current settings to device.
5. Use analog and boolean result for intended (re)action.

Configuration
Fig. 232: Display (HMI) AM14
Fig. 233: ToolKit AM14
*) Please be aware that the boolean information

passes an operator. So the input for the Analog‐
Manager function block is the result of this!
AnalogManager Description
Acronym Name Value
A1 Analog input 1 (variable) coming from selected analog parameter
A2 Analog input 2 (variable) coming from selected analog parameter
C1 Analog Constant input (constant) defined via HMI, ToolKit, or other (remote) interface
Notes
ToolKit can display input values between -9.9999e9 and +9.9999e9.

Other values will be handled correctly by the device but display will be
cropped
L1 Boolean (Logic) input 1 coming from selected digital parameter
L2 Boolean (Logic) input 2 coming from selected digital parameter
O1 Operator 1 (Operators-Unary 1) selected via HMI, ToolKit, or other (remote) interface
O2 Operator 2 (Operators-Unary 2) selected via HMI, ToolKit, or other (remote) interface
Type AnalogManager type (operation) selected via HMI, ToolKit, or other (remote) interface
BR Boolean result result/output of the boolean operation
Notes
Available as LogicsManager Variable ("result") e.g. as AM/LM input
AR Analog result result/output of the analog operation
Notes
Available as AnalogManager "result" e.g. as AM input

Configuration
AnalogManager Internal Values 1 to Internal values within the AnalogManager analogue and logical
16 outputs may be programmed and used for multiple functions.
Flag {x} Value 1 Value 2 Value 3 Value 4 Value 5 Value 6 Value 7 Value 8
Parameter 9640 9644 9648 9652 9656 9660 9664 9668

ID {yyyyy}
Description 9641 9645 9649 9653 9657 9661 9665 9669
Table 120: Internal Values parameter IDs (1 to 8)
Value {x} Value 9 Value 10 Value 11 Value 12 Value 13 Value 14 Value 15 Value 16
Parameter 9672 9676 9680 9684 9688 9692 9696 9700

ID {yyyyy}
Description 9673 9677 9681 9685 9689 9683 9697 9701
Table 121: Internal Values parameter IDs (9 to 16)
Default values
Factory settings of the internal values come with
Type = "Pass Through" so the analog result AR is
same as analog input A1 (Default: A1 = 10.01
ZERO). The boolean result BR is "FALSE".

[Default]
{yyyyy} AM Internal 2 Determined by The data source may be selected from the available data sources.
Value {x} AnalogManager
Notes
[A1 = 10.01
ZERO] Refer to Ä Chapter 9.4.1 “Data Sources AM” on page 1042 for a list of all
data sources.

[Default]
{yyyyy} Internal value 2 user-defined (up The text may have 0 through 22 characters.
{x}: Description 22 to charac‐
ters) Notes
[AM Internal This parameter may only be configured using ToolKit.
Value {x}]
character.
The analog and/or logic result can be used via

command variable 91.{x} AM Internal value {x}.

Configuration
Examples
Calculating with an AnalogManager
Fig. 234: screen shot HMI: AM subtraction sample
Acronym Name Value
A1 Analog input 1 Number: 06.01
Name: Analog Input 1
Value: 65.1252
Name: Analog Input 2
Value: 25.2360
C1 Analog constant input Value: 0
L1 Boolean input 1 Number: 02.01
Name: LM FALSE
Value: 0
Name: LM FALSE
Value: 0
O1 Operator 1 NOT [input will be inverted]
O2 Operator 2 NOT [input will be inverted]
Type Operation type SUBTRACTION
BR Boolean result (A1 - A2) x C1 > 0

(available as boolean result [91.01 AM Internal value 1])
AR Analog result (A1 - A2) x C1

(available as analog result [91.01 AM Internal value 1])

Configuration
Incrementing and comparing with

an AnalogManager
Fig. 235: screen shot HMI: AM increment sample
Acronym Name Value
Name: Internal value 3
Value: 25.0000
Name: ZERO
Value: 0
C1 Analog constant input Value: 1.000
Name: Time dependent voltage
Value: Result of LM 07.28
Name: Discrete input 7
Value: Result of LM 09.07
O1 Operator 1 L1 [passed]
O2 Operator 2 L2 [passed]
Type Operation type INCREMENT
BR Boolean result A1≧ A2 + (n[L1] x C1)*

*) Reset if L2 = TRUE
(available as boolean result [91.02 AM Internal value 2])
AR Analog result A2 + (n[L1] x C1)*

*) Reset if L2 = TRUE
(available as analog result [91.02 AM Internal value 2])

Configuration
The following AnalogManager opera‐

tions are available: New AnalogManager "Type" selected? Then: ...
Please be aware that the input values stay "as is"
(are NOT changed) if a new Type is selected.
Check all input settings A1, A2, C1, L1, L2, O1, O2
before applying!
Example:
If C1 = 0 and you select Type [Division], you would
ask the AnalogManager to divide by zero ...
AnalogManager Bitmap Function (Output)

Operation (Type)
Pass through Analog Result = A1

Boolean Result = L1
Constant Analog Result = C1

Boolean Result = L1
Summation Analog Result = (A1 + A2) * C1

Boolean Result goes TRUE, if Analog Result > 0
Subtraction Analog Result = (A1 - A2) * C1


Configuration

Operation (Type)
Limit Switch Analog Result = (A1 - A2)

L1 = FALSE -> Overrun mode: Boolean Result goes TRUE, if A1 > A2 Boolean Result
goes FALSE, if A1 <= (A2 - C1)
L1 = TRUE -> Underrun mode: Boolean Result goes TRUE, if A1 < A2 Boolean Result
goes FALSE, if A1 >= (A2 + C1)
C1 = Hysteresis
L1 = TRUE = Underrun mode, otherwise Overrun mode
L2 = Resets Hysteresis.
Compare with Analog Result = (A1 - A2)

delay on
Boolean Result goes TRUE, if A1 > A2 for the duration of C1 time [s], otherwise FALSE
C1 = Time Delay to switch on [s]
L2 = Reset Time Delay. Absolute value of C1 is taken as time [s] (no negative time).
Notes
Time is not latched, so C1 changes can be done during delay cycle.
Multiply Type A Analog Result = (A1 * A2) + C1

Multiply Type B Analog Result = A1 + (A2 * C1)

Multiply Type C Analog Result = A1 * A2 * C1

Divide Analog Result = (A1 / A2) * C1


Configuration

Operation (Type)
Switch Analog Result = A1, if L1 = TRUE

Analog Result = A2, if L1 = FALSE AND L2 = TRUE
Analog Result = C1, if L1 = FALSE AND L2 = FALSE
Notes
Icon shows switch positions L1/L2 as FALSE.
Common use could be to switch between A1 and A2: Set L2 = TRUE; use L1 to switch.
Maximum Analog Result = MAX(A1 , A2)

Boolean Result goes TRUE, if A1 > A2
Minimum Analog Result = MIN(A1, A2)

Boolean Result goes TRUE, if A1 < A2
In Band Analog Result = ABS(A1 - A2)

Boolean Result goes TRUE, if (ABS(A1 - A2) <= C1)
C1 = maximum tolerance for being "in band"
Ramp Analog Result = Ramp value

Boolean Result goes TRUE, if Ramp value equal end position
C1 determines rate/second. Absolute value of C1 is taken - no negative rate allowed
L1 holds ramp: If L1 goes TRUE, the current ramp output is stopped
L2 determines end value: If L2 goes TRUE, the end position is value A2, otherwise it is
A1.
Notes
Rate/second is not latched, so C1 changes can be done during ramp cycles.
Common use could be ramp up and down: Start ramping from A1 to A2 with gradient
C1 if L1 goes TRUE; then switch to ramping down back to A1 with the same gradient if
L2 goes TRUE.
Filter Analog Result = Filtered value of A1

Boolean Result = FALSE.
A1 = Value, which is to filter. A2 not used.
C1 is filter time (time constant) in [s]
L1 switches the filter. If L1 goes TRUE, the filter function is enabled, otherwise the filter
function is disabled and the Analog Result = A1
L2 not used. Absolute value of C1 is taken

Configuration

Operation (Type)
Notes
Time constant is not latched, so C1 changes can be done during filter cycles.
Filter formula: OUT[i] = a*IN[i] + (1-a)*OUT[i-1] , where OUT[i] is current output, IN[i] is
current input, and OUT[i-1] is previous output. a = (dT / (C1 + dT)), where dT is interval
of input/output change (== RATEGROUP)
Increment Analog Result = Analog Result + C1 on every L1 rising edge

Boolean Result goes TRUE, if Analog Result > = Value A1 (Limit)
A1 = Limit
A2 = Start Value after RESET
C1 = Increment per Step
L1 = Trigger for Increment
L2 = Reset to Start Value
Latch Analog Result = A1 on every L1 rising edge

A1 = Value 1
L1 = Saves Analog Result with rising edge
L2 = Resets Analog Result to 0 with rising edge
Timer Analog Result = Elapsed time [s]

Boolean Result goes TRUE, if Analog Result > = C1
C1 = Timer Compare [s]
L1 = If L1 goes TRUE, timer starts or continues to run, otherwise timer is stopped
L2 = Resets Analog Result to 0 with rising edge
Notes
Could be used e.g., for reading out values when a defined (failure) situation occurs
Maxtrack Analog Result = If A1 > Analog Result, the new result is A1

Boolean Result goes TRUE, if Analog Result > = C1
A1 = Tracked Value
A2 not used
C1 = Limit
L2 = Resets Analog Result to A2 with rising edge.
Mintrack Analog Result = If A1 < Analog Result, the new result is A1

Boolean Result goes TRUE, if Analog Result < = C1
A1 = Tracked Value
C1 = Limit
L2 = Resets Analog Result to A2 with rising edge.

Configuration
Configure AnalogManager > AnalogManager Constants

Operation (Type)
Delay Type A Mode "Delay On":

Analog Result = Remaining time [s] for Boolean Result to go to TRUE
Boolean Result goes TRUE, if L1 = TRUE for at least C1[s] time.
Mode "Delay Off:
Analog Result = Remaining time [s] for Boolean Result to go to FALSE
Boolean Result goes FALSE, if L1 = FALSE for at least C1[ms] time
C1 = Absolute value of C1 is taken as time in [s] (no negative time allowed)

L1 = Switching signal. The boolean result is delayed according to the mode in L2
L2 = TRUE = Mode "Delay Off"; = FALSE = Mode "Delay On"
Notes
Time is not latched, so C1 changes can be done during delay cycle.
Delay Type B Analog Result = Remaining time [s] to switch Boolean Result
Boolean Result = TRUE, if L1 was TRUE for at least A1 time [s]
Boolean Result = FALSE, if L1 was FALSE for at least A2 time [s]
A1 = Delay-On time [s], no negative time allowed
A2 = Delay-Off time [s], no negative time allowed
L1 = Switching signal. The boolean result is delayed according to the time A1 and A2
L2 = Resets Boolean result with rising edge
Notes
A1/A2 Time is not latched, so changes can be done during delay cycle.
Toggle Analog Result = Remaining time to switch Boolean Result

Boolean Result = Toggles with ON time = A1[ms] and OFF time = A2[s]
A1 = Delay-On time [ms], no negative time allowed
A2 = Delay-Off time [ms], no negative time allowed
L1 = Activates toggling, if TRUE. L2 = Resets remaining time to toggle with rising edge
Notes
A1/A2 Time is not latched, so changes can be done during delay cycle.
One Shot Analog Result = Remaining time to fall back to FALSE [s]
Boolean Result = L1 rising edge forces TRUE state for C1 time [s]
C1 = Absolute value of C1 is taken as time in [s] (no negative time allowed)
L1 = Activates boolean result to TRUE with rising edge
L2 = Resets remaining time for fall back with rising edge
Notes
Time is not latched, so C1 changes can be done during monoflop cycle.
4.9.2 AnalogManager Constants

General note For even more flexibility and use of "self explaining" parameters 16
constants can be defined. These constants are available as Ana‐
logManager input AM 13.01 to AM 13.16. Each parameter can be
named individually and its value can be defined in a wide range:

Configuration
Configure Counters
AnalogManager Constants 1 to 16 AnalogManager values may be used for multiple functions.
AM Con‐ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
stant #
Description 15567 15568 15569 15570 15571 15572 15572 15574
Value 15551 15552 15553 15554 15555 15556 15557 15558
AM {xx.yy} AM 13.01 AM 13.02 AM 13.03 AM 13.04 AM 13.05 AM 13.06 AM 13.07 AM 13.08
Table 122: AM Constant IDs (1 to 8)
AM Con‐ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
stant #
Description 15575 15576 15577 15578 15003 15004 15005 15006

{mmmmm}
Value 15559 15560 15561 15562 15563 15564 15565 15566

{nnnnn}
AM {xx.yy} AM 13.09 AM 13.10 AM 13.11 AM 13.12 AM 13.13 AM 13.14 AM 13.15 AM 13.16
Table 123: AM Constant IDs (9 to 16)
Constant's name
The AM inputs selectable for A1 or A2 come with
the predefined name of the Constant e.g. "13.01
Free constant 1" but not with the customizable AM
Description e.g. the value of 15567 Description
constant 1.

[Default]
{mmmm Description con‐ 2 user-defined (up The text may have 0 through 22 characters.
m} stant {#} 22 to charac‐
ters) Notes
[13.yy Free con‐ This parameter may only be configured using ToolKit.
stant {#}]
character.
{nnnnn} 13.yy Free con‐ 2 -21000.00 e3 to Preset value to be used as AM 13.yy.

stant {#} 21000.00 e3
[1]
4.10 Configure Counters

General notes The following chapters describe all available and configurable
counters of the device.
The standard/basic counters - available in all devices of this
product family - are described in the chapter Ä Chapter 4.10.1
“Generator Preset Values” on page 563. For special counters
please see the chapters following.

Configuration
Configure Counters > Generator Preset Values
4.10.1 Generator Preset Values

General notes
Maintenance call
A maintenance call will be issued if the configured
number of maintenance hours has expired or the
configured number of days has expired since the
last maintenance.
In case of a maintenance call, the display indicates
"Mainten. days exceeded" or "Mainten. hours
exceeded".

[Default]
2521 Gen.pos.active 2 000000.00 to This parameter defines the number of MWh of the counter. The number
energy preset 999999.00 MWh entered here will overwrite the current displayed value after confirming with
[0 MWh]
2510 Gen.pos.active 2 Yes The current value of this counter is overwritten with the value configured in
energy set "Gen.pos.active energy preset" (parameter 2521 Ä p. 563). After the counter
has been (re)set, this parameter changes back to "No" automatically.
[No] The value of this counter is not changed.
2523 Gen.pos.react.e 2 000000.00 to This parameter defines the number of positive Mvarh of the counter. The
nergy preset 999999.00 number entered here will overwrite the current displayed value after con‐
Mvarh firming with parameter 2511 Ä p. 563.
[0 Mvarh]
2511 Gen.pos.react.e 2 Yes The current value of this counter is overwritten with the value configured in
nergy set "Gen.pos.react.energy preset" (parameter 2523 Ä p. 563). After the counter
2527 Gen.neg.react.e 2 000000.00 to This parameter defines the number of negative Mvarh of the counter. The
nergy preset 999999.00 number entered here will overwrite the current displayed value after con‐
Mvarh firming with parameter 2513 Ä p. 563.
[0 Mvarh]
2513 Gen.neg.react.e 2 Yes The current value of this counter is overwritten with the value configured in
nergy set "Gen.neg.react.energy preset" (parameter 2527 Ä p. 563). After the counter
2541 Number of 2 0 to 65535 This parameter defines the number of times the control unit registers a start of
starts preset the generator set. The number entered here will overwrite the current dis‐
[0] played value after confirming with parameter 2542 Ä p. 563.
2542 Number of 2 Yes The current value of the start counter is overwritten with the value configured
starts set in "Number of starts preset" (parameter 2541 Ä p. 563). After the counter has
been (re)set, this parameter changes back to "No" automatically.

Configuration
Configure Counters > Service Reset Values
4.10.2 Service Reset Values

General notes
Maintenance call
A maintenance call will be issued if the configured
number of maintenance hours has expired or the
configured number of days has expired since the
last maintenance.
In case of a maintenance call, the display indicates
"Mainten. days exceeded" or "Mainten. hours
exceeded".
Displaying hours: operation / period of use

The easYgen device handles operating hours
internally in floating format. To indicate the oper‐
ating hours on a display or to provide it in the data
protocol the value is transferred into an integer var‐
iable. This can cause display errors within
4*10-6 % in relation to the absolute value.

[Default]
2550 Maintenance 2 0 to 9,999 h This parameter defines the remaining hours until the next maintenance call
hours occurs. Once the generator has been operated for the number of hours con‐
[300 h] figured here, a maintenance message is displayed.
If the maintenance counter is reset either by the push-buttons at the front
panel (refer to Ä Chapter 2.1 “Display And Status Indicators” on page 39), or
by configuring the parameter "Reset maintenance period hrs" to "Yes"
(parameter 2562 Ä p. 564), the maintenance counter is reset to the config‐
ured value.
Notes
To disable the "maintenance hours" counter configure "0" for this entry.
2562 Reset mainte‐ 2 Yes / No If this parameter is configured to "Yes" the maintenance "hours" counter is
nance period reset to the configured value. Once the counter "maintenance hours" has
hrs [No] been reset, the control unit changes this parameter to "No".
Notes
When using a specific code level in parameter 2567 Ä p. 565 to reset main‐
tenance hours this parameter can be blocked.
Notes
- menu path:
“Next page è Configure counters è (symbol: wrench)”

2551 Maintenance 2 0 to 999 d This parameter defines the remaining days until the next maintenance call
days occurs. Once the configured number of days has expired since the last main‐
[365 d] tenance, a maintenance message is displayed.
If the maintenance counter is reset either by the push-buttons at the front
panel (refer to Ä Chapter 2.1 “Display And Status Indicators” on page 39), or
by configuring the parameter "Reset maintenance period days" to "Yes"
(parameter 2563 Ä p. 564), the maintenance counter is reset to the config‐
ured value.
Notes
To disable the "maintenance days" counter configure "0" for this entry.
2563 Reset mainte‐ 2 Yes / No If this parameter is configured to "Yes" the "maintenance days" counter is
nance period reset to the configured value. Once the counter has been reset, the control
days [No] unit changes this parameter to "No".

Configuration
Configure Counters > Service Reset Values

[Default]
Notes
When using a specific code level in parameter 2567 Ä p. 565 to reset main‐
tenance days this parameter can be blocked.
Notes
- menu path:
“Next page è Configure counters è (symbol: wrench)”

2567 Code level for 2 This parameter determines the required code level for resetting the counter
reset maint. "Maintenance call in...". User with a lower code level may not access this
function.
The following code levels exist:
0 Operator
1 Service level
[2] Temporary commissioner
3 Commissioner
Notes
The code level defined here only affects the access via the front panel (HMI).
15154 Operation hours 2 This parameter configures the source for the operation hours.
source
[Internal]
The operation hours are counted internal from the easYgen
ECU/J1939 The operation hours are assumed from the connected ECU (via J1939 CAN
protocol).
2509 Operation hours 0 0 to 999,999.99 When setting the operating hours counter (refer to parameter
preset 2574 Ä p. 565), the counter always will be set up to the value configured
[0] here.
2574 Operation hours 01 Yes The current value of this counter is overwritten with the value configured in
set "Operation hours preset" (parameter 2509 Ä p. 565). After the counter has
been (re)set, this parameter changes back to "No" automatically.
Notes
1 The code level can be configured with "Codelevel set operation hours"
(parameter 2573 Ä p. 565). If your current code level does not match, this
parameter is not visible.
2573 Code level set 5 0 to 5 This parameter defines which codelevel is necessary to set the operation
operation hours hours (parameter 2574 Ä p. 565).
[2]
2515 Period of use 2 0 to 999,999.99 When setting the period of use hours counter (refer to parameter
preset 2579 Ä p. 565), the counter always will be set up to the value configured
[0] here.
2579 Period of use 01 Yes The current value of this counter is overwritten with the value configured in
set "Period of use preset" (parameter 2515 Ä p. 565). After the counter has been
(re)set, this parameter changes back to "No" automatically.
Notes
1 The code level can be configured with "Code level f. set period of use"
(parameter 2581 Ä p. 565). If your current code level does not match, this
parameter is not visible.
2581 Code level f. set 5 0 to 5 This parameter defines which codelevel is necessary to set the period of use
period of use hours (parameter 2579 Ä p. 565).
[2]

Configuration
Configure Counters > Counter Pulses and Transi...
4.10.3 Counter Pulses and Transistor Output

General notes The easYgen monitors the increase of energy. A pulse signal can
be configured to deliver a 20 ms pulse, if the defined amount of the
selected energy is reached. Two pulse monitors are available.
Together with the two transistor outputs (via LogicsManager) it is
easy to prepare energy counter pulses:
The frequency of the pulses is directly adjustable according to the
increase of the amount of active power hours or reactive power
hours. The length of the pulse and the logical condition are deter‐
mined through LogicsManager equation (This is usually the tran‐
sistor output equation).
– The pulse frequency has to be configured in a

way, that the pulses are not generating a con‐
stant signal, when the maximum increase of
power is measured.
– The pulse outputs of the energy counter are
not calibrated!
Pulse signal A parameters

[Default]
13460 Source 2 n Off Selecting the energy type for counter impulse signal A.
n ReactE‐
nergy-
n ReactE‐
nergy+
n ActiveE‐
nergy
[Off] Counter signal is disabled.
13462 One pulse for x 2 0.01 ... 100.00 Selecting the active energy amount per pulse for impulse signal A.
kWh / kvarh
[0.10]
9200 Pulse signal A: - 20 ms The generated pulse signal defined by 13460 and 13462 (above). Available
Command vari‐ as LogicsManager input.
able 31.01
12790 Transistor out 1 2 Determined by If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the Transistor out 1 output will be
[(0 & 1) & 1] Notes
= 99.33 / 11908 For information on the LogicsManager and its default settings see Ä Chapter
Pulse signal B parameters

[Default]
13461 Source 2 n Off Selecting the energy type for counter impulse signal B.
n ReactE‐
nergy-
n ReactE‐
nergy+
n ActiveE‐
nergy
[Off] Counter signal is disabled.

Configuration

[Default]
13463 One pulse for x 2 0.01 ... 100.00 Selecting the active energy amount per pulse for impulse signal B.
kWh / kvarh
[0.10]
9201 Pulse signal A: - 20 ms The generated pulse signal defined by 13461 and 13463 (above). Available
Command vari‐ as LogicsManager input.
able 31.02
12800 Transistor out 2 2 Determined by If this LogicsManager condition is TRUE, the Transistor out 2 output will be
[(0 & 1) & 1] Notes
= 99.34 / 11909 For information on the LogicsManager and its default settings see Ä Chapter
The pulse signals A/B can be selected as an input of a LogicsMan‐

ager equation (the transistor outputs 1 with ID 12790 and 2 with ID
12800 are recommended). The pulse signal (20 ms) is set for the
refresh time of the LogicsManager equation. To control the switch
pulse we propose to take the settings of the dedicated LogicsMan‐
ager equation and add 100 ms pulse (delay) time:
For a positive switch pulse configure the LogicsManager equation
with
n the delay-on time for starting the rising edge at 000.00 s and
n the delay-off time as a minimum pulse duration 000.10 s.
For a negative switch pulse configure the LogicsManager equation
n by adding a NOT block and setting
n the delay-off time for starting the falling edge at 000.00 s and
n the delay-on time as a minimum pulse duration 000.10 s.
Examples
Count kWh:
n Configure “Pulse signal A” 31.01
– select 13460 “Source” : ActiveEnergy
– set 13462 “One pulse for x kWh / kvarh” : 0.1
n Configure LM “Transistor out 1” (12790)
– select 31.01 Pulse signal A as input
– adjust time for pulse duration Delay OFF: 0.1
Count kvarh:
Fig. 236: Connecting transistor coun‐ n Configure “Pulse signal B” 31.02
ters – select 13461 Source: ReactEnergy+
– set 13463 One pulse for x kWh / kvarh: 0.1
n Configure LM “Transistor out 2” (12800)
– select 31.02 Pulse signal B as input
– adjust time for pulse duration Delay OFF: 0.1

Configuration

Operation
Power ON
5 Operation
In operation the genset controller can be manually or remote con‐
trolled.
Front panel access is described in chapter Ä Chapter 4.1 “Front
Panel Access” on page 112.
Access via ToolKit is described in chapter Ä Chapter 4.2.6 “View
And Set Values In ToolKit” on page 147.
Access via Remote Panel PR-3000XT is described in chapter and
the Technical Manual “37593 RP-3000XT” .
Access via PLC depends on the interface and the data telegram
used for communication.
For menu structure/menu tree see Ä “Menu struc‐

ture (menu tree)” on page 110.
5.1 Power ON
Behavior during starting The start-up procedure of the easYgen-XT device can be caused
easYgen-3000XT by the following reasons:
n Power ON
n Power cycling e.g. by 1701 Ä p. 181 “ Set factory default
values”
n Power is back after voltage drop
This process is visualized by the HMI of the plastic housing version
or the LEDs of the metal housing version.
Using the USB Service Port

With power ON and a PC/laptop connected via
USB service port it can happen that the USB
window that pops up doesn't show all files and/or
the correct available free memory at the device:
Please unplug/plug the USB connection after the
easYgen finished starting.
With power ON and connected USB service port it
can happen that a connected USB device is not
detected correctly: Please unplug/plug the USB
connection after the easYgen finished starting.
With power cycle of the easYgen-XT the USB con‐
nection is lost: Please unplug/plug and/or start
USB connection again after the easYgen finished
starting.

Operation
Change Operating Modes
... starting plastic housing (HMI) ver‐ Power ON from zero power
sion
n Buttons are illuminated
n Start-up screen appears
– the red bar at the bottom monitors the degree of fulfillment
n HOME screen appears with measured values and state infor‐
mation
– Illumination of buttons is disabled according to the default
settings STOP button still might be illuminated
– WARNING triangle is blinking if there are unacknowledged
alarm messages
Power cycling
n Warning LED is twinkling in a high frequency
n (afterwards the standard process of Power ON is executed:)
n Buttons are illuminated
n Start-up screen appears
– the red bar at the bottom monitors the degree of fulfillment
n HOME screen appears with the same measured values and
state information as before power cycling
... starting metal housing version Power ON from zero power

n LEDs are twinkling
n LEDs are illuminated according to the state of the genset con‐
trol
Power cycling
n Warning LED is twinkling in a high frequency
n (afterwards the standard process of Power ON is executed:)
n LEDs are twinkling
n LEDs are illuminated according to the state of the genset con‐
trol
5.2 Change Operating Modes

Startup The genset controls starts in the operating mode defined by
parameter 1795 [Startup in mode]. Refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.5 “Con‐
figure Operation Modes” on page 338 for details.
Select Operation Mode Operation modes can be selected via

n front panel buttons (plastic housing variant or Remote Panel
RP-3000XT or VNC client),
n HMI configuration (plastic housing variant or Remote Panel
RP-3000XT or VNC client),
n remote settings via interfaces, or
n ToolKit
The following chapters describe the manually front panel access.

Operation
Change Operating Modes > Operating Mode STOP
5.2.1 Operating Mode STOP

Usage
Use the STOP button to activate operating mode STOP.
Observe the notes on the system's reaction

upon activation of operating mode STOP as
listed below.
ð STOP LED is illuminated at the front panel; ToolKit home

page shows STOP icon left beside the prime mover.
System reaction In operating mode STOP neither the engine nor the GCB can be
operated. Dependent on the application mode the power circuit
breakers cannot be operated.
CAUTION!
Hazards due to improper use of operating mode
STOP
Selecting the operating mode STOP is not the
same as an EMERGENCY STOP.
In some cases the easYgen will perform additional
logic functions, such as an engine cool down
period, before the engine is stopped.
– For emergency stop functionality use an
EMERGENCY STOP discrete input, pro‐
grammed as an F class alarm.
If the operating mode STOP is selected while the engine was

already stopped the following applies:
n The GCB will not be closed.
n The fuel solenoid relay will not be enabled.
n The start request is ignored.
n The start push buttons (softkeys) are disabled.
n The engine/generator monitoring remains activated (exception:
all monitoring that is delayed by the engine speed).
If the operating mode STOP is selected while the engine was run‐
ning the following applies:
n Dependent on the current application mode a soft shut down
will be executed.
n Pressing the STOP button again opens the GCB.
n If the STOP button is pressed again, the cool down will be
interrupted.
If the operating mode STOP is selected while the engine performs
a cool down the following applies:
n Pressing the STOP button again causes an immediate stop of
the cool down and stops the engine.
If the conditions of the LogicsManager function

"Enable MCB" (parameter 12923 Ä p. 263/
Ä p. 1038) are TRUE, the MCB will be closed
again if it is open in STOP operating mode.

Operation
Change Operating Modes > Operating Mode MANUAL
5.2.2 Operating Mode MANUAL

General usage In the MANUAL operating mode (mode button “MAN” illuminated)
both the engine circuit breaker and the power circuit breaker can
be operated via the push buttons along the bottom of the display
(softkeys). Additionally the Start(I)/Stop(O) buttons can be used to
start or stop the engine.
Fig. 237: XT_MAN-buttons

1 Mode button: MAN
2 START button: Engine
3 STOP button: Engine
4 .. 6 Soft buttons: Breaker OPEN/CLOSE
Use the mode button “MAN” to activate operating mode

MANUAL.
ð The MAN button is illuminated
NOTICE!
The breakers will open immediately without power
reduction.
To open the breaker in a no-load condition, reduce
the load manually in the setpoints screen
( Ä Chapter 4.1.5 “Specialized Menu Screens”
on page 121).
Example for application mode A01

To start the engine:
Press the button [I] below the MAN button.

ð Success: The engine starts and the circular arrow and
the eye symbol appear.
Failure: No change in the display until the "start failure"
message appears.

Operation
Change Operating Modes > Operating Mode MANUAL
To stop the engine:
Press the button [0] right below the MAN button.

ð Success: The engine stops and the circular arrow and
the eye symbol disappear.
Failure: No change in the display until the "stop failure"
message appears.
Overview
Function/Status Symbol Available in application mode
Start/running 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
engine
Stop/stand still 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
engine
Breaker open 3
command is
issued or a clo‐
sure of the
breaker is
blocked
No defined 3
breaker state
Open the GCB 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Close the GCB 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Open the GGB1 3 3 3 3 3
Close the 3 3 3 3 3
GGB1
Open the MCB 3 3 3 3 3
Close the MCB 3 3 3 3 3
1 The GGB can not be operated via softkey.

Operation
Change Operating Modes > Operating Mode AUTOMATIC
Symbol Description
Generator or mains rotating field moves clockwise.
Generator or mains rotating field moves counter-clockwise.
Power is detected at the respective measuring point (gener‐

ator, busbar, or mains).
Indicates that the engine delayed monitoring has expired

and the monitoring functions are enabled.
Power is imported (at mains interchange).
Power is exported (at mains interchange).
Table 124: Status symbols
5.2.3 Operating Mode AUTOMATIC

General usage In the AUTOMATIC operating mode ( “AUTO” ), all engine, GCB,
and/or MCB functions are operated via an interface, or automati‐
cally by the control unit (i.e. a mains failure).
The function of the easYgen depends on the con‐

figuration of the unit and how the external signals
are used.
Use the button [AUTO] to activate operating mode AUTO‐

MATIC.
ð If mode change was successful the button [AUTO] is illu‐
minated.
For a more detailed description of the start/stop

sequence of the engine and the associated param‐
eters refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.5.2 “Operation Mode
AUTO - Automatic Run” on page 339.
The main functions are briefly described in the fol‐
lowing sections.
Start engine The engine is started via a remote start signal.

Prerequisites:
n The AUTOMATIC operating mode is enabled.
n The start request is enabled by the LogicsManager "Start req.
in AUTO".
n No shut down alarm is present. (for explanation of the alarm
classes refer to Ä Chapter 9.5.1 “Alarm Classes”
on page 1078).
n The engine is ready for operation.
n The GCB is open.

Operation
Change Operating Modes > Operating Mode TEST
Auto mains failure operation (AMF)

Auto mains failure operation is available in applica‐
If the AUTOMATIC operating mode is enabled and the mains fail,

the engine and the power circuit breakers will be operated
according to the current application mode.
Prerequisites:
n The AUTOMATIC operating mode is enabled.
n The parameter "Emergency power" is configured to "On".
n The configured mains failure limits are reached.
n The configured delay times have expired.
n No shut down alarm is present. (for explanation of the alarm
classes refer to Ä Chapter 9.5.1 “Alarm Classes”
on page 1078).
n The engine is ready for operation.
5.2.4 Operating Mode TEST

General usage The operating mode ( “TEST” ) usually is a temporary operating
mode. The idea is to test the genset.
TEST operating mode always starts the engine, when changing
into this mode independent on an AUTOMATIC start order. Addi‐
tionally the TEST operating mode supports the emergency and crit‐
ical run as well (if a mains failure occurs during the test run). The
operating mode TEST supports different sub modes so the oper‐
ator can choose if the breakers shall be closed during test run or
whether the operating mode is changed after the test run.
The function of the easYgen depends on the con‐

figuration of the unit and how the external signals
are used.
Use the button [TEST] to activate operating mode TEST.

ð If mode change was successful the button [TEST] is illu‐
minated.
The illumination of the button becomes

twinkling a short time before TEST run is
over.
For a more detailed description of the start/stop

sequence of the engine and the associated param‐
eters refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.5.3 “Operation Mode
TEST” on page 341.
The main functions are briefly described in the fol‐
lowing sections.

Operation
Restore Language Setting via...
5.3 Restore Language Setting via HMI, Buttons and Softkeys

In order to change the language setting via HMI, press the
(soft)keys in the following order:
Language parameter is on code level "0", so the

instruction will work with each code level.
Fig. 238: Front panel and display

1. Press button [HOME] once to return to the start screen
2. Press softkey [6] once to access the "Parameter" screen
3. Press softkey [3] once to access the "Configure language /
clock" screen
4. Press softkey [7] once to edit the language setting
5. Press softkeys [11] or [12] to select the desired language.
6. Press softkey [7] once to commit the language setting.
ð The desired display language is restored.

Application Field
Basic Applications > Application Mode A01 (None)
6 Application Field
Device status The following applications are described for devices with status
"factory settings". This is mandatory because parameters not
changed during sample setup may have influence to the devices'
behavior!
Live test requirement

If you want to use the same setup as described
with the sample, please ensure factory settings
status of the device before changing it.
Otherwise you have to take care that the changes
you did before do not "disturb" sample settings!
Application Modes
For application modes overview see chapter
Ä Chapter 2.2 “Application Modes Overview”
on page 39.
6.1 Basic Applications

6.1.1 Application Mode A01 (None)
This application mode ( ) may be used, where the breaker con‐
trol is done external. In this case, the easYgen will function as an
engine control with generator and engine protection. The control
does not operate any breaker. Emergency mode (AMF operation)
is not supported in this application mode.

Application Field
Basic Applications > Application Mode A01 (None)
Fig. 239: Application mode A01 (schematic)
The easYgen requires the feedback reply from

GCB and MCB in this application mode. These
replies are used to define, whether the easYgen
controls frequency, shares the load with other gen‐
sets or performs active load control.
The following feedback signals are used in this application mode

and fixed to the respective discrete inputs:
n DI 7 "Reply MCB" (mains parallel)
n DI 8 "Reply GCB" (normally closed (break) contact)

Engine operation in AUTOMATIC Engine starts, if

(basic function)
n The LogicsManager "Start req. in AUTO" is fulfilled (TRUE)
AND
n A shut down alarm is not present AND
n The engine is ready for operation
Engine stops, if

Application Field
Basic Applications > Application Mode A02 (GCB ...
n The reply GCB is open AND the LogicsManager "Start req. in

AUTO" is not fulfilled (FALSE) OR
n A shut down alarm occurs
Being parallel to mains or to other generator, the generator power
will be reduced before.
Refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.5.2 “Operation Mode

AUTO - Automatic Run” on page 339 for details.
6.1.2 Application Mode A02 (GCB open)

This application mode ( ) may be used for islanded operation
applications.
In this case, the easYgen will function as an engine control with
generator and engine protection. The control unit can only open
the GCB. Emergency mode (AMF operation) is not supported in
this application mode.

Application Field
Basic Applications > Application Mode A03 (GCB)

The following feedback signals and commands are used in this

application mode and fixed to the respective discrete inputs and
outputs:
n DO 7 "Command: GCB open"


(basic function)
AND
With successful start the GCB closure is released.
Engine stops, if
n The reply GCB is open AND the LogicsManager "Start req. in
AUTO" is not fulfilled (FALSE) OR
will be reduced before.

6.1.3 Application Mode A03 (GCB)

This application mode ( ) may be used in applications, where
only the GCB is operated by the easYgen.
If it is used for islanded or mains parallel operations, mains decou‐
pling should be performed by the GCB or an external provision.
The easYgen will function as an engine control with generator and
engine protection. The control unit can open and close the GCB.
Emergency mode (AMF operation) is not supported in this applica‐
tion mode.

Application Field
Basic Applications > Application Mode A03 (GCB)


outputs:
n DO 6 "Command: GCB close"
n DO 7 "Command: GCB open" (optionally)

Application Field
Basic Applications > Application Mode A04 (GCB/...


(basic function)
AND
With successful start the GCB closure is executed.
n If the voltage of generator and generator busbar is in range,
the GCB will be synchronized
If the voltage of generator is in range, and the gen‐

erator busbar is dead, and no other GCB is closed,
and the MCB is closed the GCB will not be closed
but an “operating range failure” occurs.
Engine stops, if
n The LogicsManager "Start req. in AUTO" is not fulfilled
(FALSE) OR
will be reduced, before the GCB will be opened.

6.1.4 Application Mode A04 (GCB/MCB)

This application mode ( ) may be used for mains parallel opera‐
tion. In this case, the easYgen will function as an engine control
with generator, mains and engine protection.
The control unit can open and close the GCB and the MCB. The
breaker transition modes “Open Transition”, “Closed Transition”,
“Interchange” and “Parallel” are possible.
The Emergency mode (AMF operation) is supported in this applica‐
tion mode.

Application Field

both circuit breakers in this application mode.
These replies are used to define, whether the
easYgen controls frequency, shares the load with
other gensets or performs active load control.

outputs:
n DO 8 "Command: MCB close"
n DO 9 "Command: MCB open"

(basic function)

Application Field

AND
According to the current active breaker transition mode the GCB
and MCB will be operated.
Engine stops, if
(FALSE) OR

Auto mains failure operation (AMF) in Engine starts, if

AUTOMATIC (basic function)
n The configured mains failure limits are reached AND
With successful start the MCB will be opened and the GCB will be
closed.
Engine stops, if
n The mains values are back in range AND
n The mains settling time is expired
6.1.5 Application Mode A05 (GCB/GGB)

This application mode ( ) may be used in applications, where a
common generator group breaker connects the generator busbar
with the load. The GGB is closed, if a configured generator power
is available. Depending on the GGB mode "ID3422", the GGB will
be opened or kept closed. The application can be an isolated oper‐
ation or a parallel to mains operation.
generator, mains and engine protection. The control unit can open
and close the GCB and the GGB.
The Emergency mode (AMF operation) is not supported in this
application.

Application Field
The easYgen requires the feedback reply from the

GCB, GGB and MCB in this application mode.
Load busbar connected to mains is signalized as
“reply MCB”. These replies are used to define,
whether the easYgen controls frequency, shares
the load with other gensets or performs active load
control.

outputs:
n DO 7 "Command: GCB open"
n DO 10 "Command: GGB close"
n DO 11 "Command: GGB open"

(basic function)
AND

Application Field

n If the voltage of generator is in range and the generator busbar
is dead and no other GCB is closed, the GCB will be closed
With configured generator power matched, the GGB closure is
executed.
n If the voltage of generator and load busbar is in range the GGB
will be synchronized
n If the voltage of generator is in range and the load busbar is
dead, the GGB will be closed
Engine stops, if
(FALSE) OR
Being parallel to mains or to other generator, the own generator
power will be reduced, before the GCB will be opened.
Depending on the GGB mode "ID3422", the GGB will be opened or
kept closed.

6.1.6 Application Mode A06 (GCB/GGB/MCB)

tion, where a common generator group breaker connects the gen‐
erator busbar with the load. In this case, the easYgen will function
as an engine control with generator, mains and engine protection.
The control unit can open and close the GCB, GGB and the MCB.
The GGB is closed, if a configured generator power is available.
kept closed. The breaker transition modes “Open Transition”,
“Closed Transition”, “Interchange” and “Parallel” are possible.

Application Field

GCB, GGB and MCB in this application mode.
These replies are used to define, whether the
easYgen controls frequency, shares the load with
other gensets or performs active load control.

outputs:
n DI 9 "Reply GGB" (normally closed (break) contact)
n DO 8 "Command: MCB close"
n DO 9 "Command: MCB open"

(basic function)

Application Field

AND
With configured generator power matched, the GGB and MCB will
be operated according to the current active breaker transition
mode.
Engine stops, if
(FALSE) OR
If all units stopped to the same time, the load will be transferred
back to mains according to the current active breaker transition
mode.
kept closed.


n The configured mains failure limits are reached AND
is dead, no other GCB is closed and the GGB is open, the
GCB will be closed
mode.
Engine stops, if
n The mains settling time is expired
The load will be transferred back to mains according to the current
active breaker transition mode.
kept closed.

Application Field
6.1.7 Application Mode A07 (GCB/LS5)

This application mode ( ) may be used in applications, where
several breakers as incoming mains breaker, generator group
breaker or tie breaker must be operated. In this case, the easYgen
will function as an engine control with generator and engine protec‐
tion.
The control unit can open and close the GCB. The CAN connected
LS-5 system operates all other breakers in the system. The appli‐
cation can be an isolated operation or a parallel to mains opera‐
tion. The LS-5 system runs independent on the easYgen (applica‐
tion mode “LS5”). The mains protection (mains decoupling) is
executed by the LS-5 at the interchange point(s).
The Emergency mode (AMF operation) is supported and depends
on configured segments which are monitored for “out of operating
range”. The LS-5 at the interchange point can provide the easYgen
with active power and reactive power measurement.

Application Field
Please note that the measured power of all LS-5s

in the same segment are accumulated if there a
several mains interchange points. The import/
export control is based on this accumulated power.
It is not possible to individually control the power at
the single mains interchange points in the same
segment.
The easYgen requires only the feedback reply

from the GCB in this application mode. The other
breaker replies are connected at the particular
LS-5. The LS-5 system informs the easYgen so,
that the easYgen can control frequency, share load
with other gensets or perform active load control.

outputs:
If a mains decoupling shall be executed via GCB,

the mains measurement must be wired to the
easYgen.
Refer to the LS-5 Manual 37527 for details on the

easYgen/LS-5 system configuration.

(basic function)
AND
Engine stops, if
(FALSE) OR

Application Field


n Minimum one configured segment is out of range AND
With successful start the GCB closure is executed.1
is dead, no other GCB is closed and the generator busbar is
not connected to mains, the GCB will be closed
Engine stops, if
n The mains settling time is expired2
The generator power will be reduced, before the GCB will be
opened.
1The LS-5 at the interchange point has to open the

MCB, if the mains fail.
2 The mains settling time runs in the LS-5 at the
interchange point. The easYgen indicates a run‐
ning mains settling time.
6.1.8 Application Mode A08 (GCB/L-MCB)

tion. In this case, the easYgen will function as an engine control
with generator and engine protection.
The control unit can open and close the GCB. The easYgen oper‐
ates the MCB with a LS-5 unit, running in a slave mode (applica‐
tion mode “L-MCB”). The breaker transition modes “Open Transi‐
tion”, “Closed Transition”, “Interchange” and “Parallel” are possible.
The mains protection (mains decoupling) is executed by the LS-5.
tion mode. The LS-5 can provide the easYgen with active power
and reactive power measurement.

Application Field
The easYgen requires only the feedback reply

from the GCB in this application mode. The MCB
feedback reply is connected at the LS-5. The LS-5
informs the easYgen so, that the easYgen(s) can
control frequency, share load with other gensets or
perform active load control.

outputs:

easYgen.

Application Field


(basic function)
AND
and MCB will be operated.1
Engine stops, if
(FALSE) OR


n The configured mains failure limits are reached AND2
With successful start the MCB will be opened and the GCB will be
closed.
Engine stops, if
n The mains values are back in range AND2
1The MCB is operated by the LS-5. The LS-5 itself

must be free of any alarm class C and E.
2 The mains failure limits are configured in the LS-5
(operating range system A).

Application Field
6.1.9 Application Mode A09 (GCB/GGB/L-MCB)

tion, where a common GGB shall be operated by the easYgen and
a MCB shall be operated far away. In this case, the easYgen will
function as an engine control with generator and engine protection.
The control unit can open and close the GCB and the GGB. The
GGB is closed, if a configured generator power is available.
kept closed. The breaker transition modes “Open Transition”,
“Closed Transition”, “Interchange” and “Parallel” are possible. The
easYgen operates the MCB with a LS-5 unit, running in a slave
mode (application mode “L-MCB”). The mains protection (mains
decoupling) is executed by the LS-5.
tion mode. The LS-5 can provide the easYgen(s) with active power
and reactive power measurement.

Application Field
The easYgen requires the feedback reply from the

GCB and GGB in this application mode. The MCB
feedback reply is connected at the LS-5. The LS-5
informs the easYgen so, that the easYgen(s) can

outputs:
n DI 9 "Reply GGB" (normally closed (break) contact)
The easYgen uses in this application mode the

mains voltage measuring to measure the load
busbar voltage. All measured values shown as
“mains” voltage are here in real the load busbar.

easYgen.


(basic function)
AND
GCB will be closed
mode.1
Engine stops, if
(FALSE) OR

Application Field
mode.
kept closed.


GCB will be closed
mode.
Engine stops, if
kept closed.
1The MCB is operated by the LS-5. The LS-5 itself

must be free of any alarm class C and E.

6.1.10 Application Mode A10 (GCB/L-GGB)

This application mode ( ) may be used in applications, where a
common generator group breaker connects the generator busbar
with the load. In this case, the easYgen will function as an engine
control with generator and engine protection.

Application Field
The control unit can open and close the GCB. The easYgen oper‐
ates the GGB with a LS-5 unit, running in a slave mode (applica‐
tion mode “L-GGB”). The GGB is closed, if a configured generator
power is available. The GGB opens, if the last GCB is opened. The
application must be an isolated operation.
The Emergency mode (AMF operation) is not supported in this
application mode.
This application mode supports only single- or mul‐

tiple generators, which run permanent in isolated
operation.
The easYgen requires the feedback reply of the

GCB and GGB in this application mode. These
controls frequency or shares the load.

outputs:


Application Field

(basic function)
AND
With configured generator power matched, the GGB closure is
executed.
Engine stops, if
(FALSE) OR
The GGB will be opened, if no GCB is closed anymore.

6.1.11 Application Mode A11 (GCB/L-GGB/L-MCB)

tion, where a common GGB and a MCB shall be operated by LS-5.
generator and engine protection.
The control unit can open and close the GCB. The GGB is closed,
if a configured generator power is available. The GGB opens, if the
last GCB is opened. The breaker transition modes “Open Transi‐
tion”, “Closed Transition”, “Interchange” and “Parallel” are possible.
The easYgen operates the GGB with a LS-5 unit, running in a
slave mode (application mode “L-GGB”). The easYgen operates
the MCB with a LS-5 unit, running in a slave mode (application
mode “L-MCB”). The mains protection (mains decoupling) is exe‐
cuted by the LS-5 of the MCB.
tion mode. The LS-5 of the MCB can provide the easYgen with
active power and reactive power measurement.

Application Field

GCB in this application mode. The GGB and MCB
feedback replies are connected at the particular
LS-5. The both LS-5 inform the easYgen so, that
the unit can control frequency, share load with
other gensets or perform active load control.

outputs:

easYgen.

Application Field


(basic function)
AND
GCB will be closed
mode.1
Engine stops, if
(FALSE) OR
mode.
kept closed.


GCB will be closed
mode.
Engine stops, if

Application Field

kept closed.
1The GGB and MCB are operated by particular

LS-5. Both LS-5 must be free of any alarm class C
and E.

6.1.12 Application Mode A12 (GCB/L-GGBMCB)

This application mode ( ) may be used to operate the breakers
GCB, GGB and MCB like in mode GCB/GGB/MCB ( ). But
instead operating the GGB and MCB directly over relays the unit
commands a single LS-5x2 (two breaker LS-5, series II) to operate
the GGB and MCB. The LS-5x2 acts as slave for the easYgen in
this mode.
These are dedicated modes for the easYgen-3500XT and the
LS-5x2. The LS-5x2 is to configure on:
n "CBA/CBB"
AND
n "L-GGBMCB" mode.
No other LS-5 is allowed to be installed in this application mode.
The bus segmenting is fixed through the application mode. If other
breakers are available (other GGBs, MCBs, or tie-breakers) refer
to GCB/LS5 mode.
In comparison to the GCB/GGB/MCB mode:
n The customer can save wiring effort
n The export/import control can be provided with a 3-phase
power measurement
Like in the GCB/GGB/MCB mode the GGB is closed, if a config‐
ured generator power is available on the busbar. Depending on the
GGB mode "ID3422", the GGB will be opened or kept closed. The
breaker transition modes “Open Transition”, “Closed Transition”,
“Interchange” and “Parallel” are possible. The mains protection
(mains decoupling) is maintained by the LS-5x2. If a mains decou‐
pling according to VDE-AR-N 4105 is required refer to chapter
Ä Chapter 4.5.3.5.1 “Setup Grid Code AR-–4105” on page 423 for
more insight.
The emergency mode (AMF operation) is also supported in this
application mode. The LS-5x2 provides the easYgen-XT with
active power and reactive power measurement. The online dia‐
gram of the easygen-XT shows the condition of the engine, the
own GCB, the GGB, and the MCB.

Application Field
As long as no mains decoupling for the GCB is required, the mains

measurement of the easYgen-XT must not be wired. The feedback
of the GGB and the MCB are detected by the LS-5 and the infor‐
mation is transferred to the easYgen-XT.

GCB in this application mode. The GGB and MCB
feedback replies are connected at the LS-5x2. The
LS-5 informs the easYgen so, that the unit can

outputs:

Application Field

easYgen.
Refer to the LS-5 II-series Manual 37649/37650 for

details on the easYgen/LS-5 system configuration.

(basic function)
AND
n A shut down alarm is not present
AND
GCB will be closed
mode.1
Engine stops, if
(FALSE) OR
mode.
kept closed.


n The configured mains failure limits are reached
AND2
n A shut down alarm is not present
AND

Application Field
Multiple Genset Applications

GCB will be closed
mode.
Engine stops, if
n The mains values are back in range
AND2
kept closed.
1The GGB and MCB are operated by particular

LS-5. Both LS-5 must be free of any alarm class C
and E.

6.2 Multiple Genset Applications

Overview In a multiple-unit mains parallel application, all easYgens need the
same signals for:
n Mains voltage and current
n Reply and release signal of the MCB
The open and close contacts from all controls must

be wired in parallel.

Application Field
Multiple Genset Applications > Configuration Example: Mul...
Fig. 251: Multiple genset application (schematic)
6.2.1 Configuration Example: Multiple Genset

Configuration example The following example describes the configuration of a typical
mains parallel operation with import/export power control at the
interchange point and load-dependent start/stop.
Multiple generators are to be operated in parallel to the mains
maintaining a stable power at the interchange point. The genera‐
tors shall be started depending on the momentary load at the plant.
An emergency operation in case of a mains failure is also intended.
The load dependent start/stop function (LDSS) shall be enabled
with a remote start request. LDSS shall depend on the reserve
power on the busbar. In case of a dead busbar (caused by a mains
failure) all capable generators shall be started and operated with
their minimum running time.
No generator priority is considered. Generator selection shall be
performed depending on the operating hours.
The following assumptions are valid for the example:
n 3 generators, each with 80 kW rated power, are available.
n The recommended minimum load for the generators is 40 kW.
n The minimum running time is 180 s.

Application Field
Multiple Genset Applications > Configuration Example: Mul... > Configuring Load-Dependent...
6.2.1.1 Configuring Load-Dependent Start/Stop

1. Either on the front panel or using ToolKit navigate to menu
“ Parameter è Configuration è Configure application
è Configure application modes
è Load dependent start/stop è General LDSS settings”.
2. Configure the parameters below.
ID Parameter Value Comment
5752 Start stop mode Reserve power The reserve power at the interchange point is to be considered for LDSS
5753 Dead busbar All All generators shall start in case of a dead busbar (mains failure)
start mode
5751 Base priority 5 The base priority for the genset is 5
5754 Fit size of engine No The generator rated power is not considered for LDSS
5755 Fit service hours Equal The remaining hours until next service are considered for LDSS
5756 Changes of Off No engine change will be performed

engines
5777 LDSS sort pri‐ Off LDSS priority follows settings without permanently refreshing.
ority always
5759 Minimum run‐ 180 s The minimum running time is 180 seconds
ning time
12930 LD start stop LM 86.86: TRUE Enables function LDSS
Table 125: General LDSS parameters
3. Configure the LogicsManager 86.86 function

[12930 LD start stop] as shown in ( Ä Chapter 6.2 “Multiple
Genset Applications” on page 604) to enable LDSS if a start
request in automatic operating mode or emergency mode are
enabled.
Fig. 252: LogicsManager function "LD

start stop"
LDSS parameters for mains parallel Additional assumptions are valid for mains parallel operation
operation (MOP):
n The first generator is only started if it is able to operate at a
minimum load of 40 kW.
n A hysteresis of 20 kW is required to avoid frequent starts and
stops.
n A reserve power of 10 kW on the busbar shall be maintained,
i.e. at least 10 kW of generator capacity are available for short
load peaks.
Higher load peaks are supported by the mains.
n The delay for adding another generator shall be 30 seconds.
n The delay for adding another generator shall be reduced to 10
seconds if a generator at the busbar is operating above its
rated load (accelerated start of the next generator).
n The delay for removing a generator from the busbar shall be 60
seconds.

Application Field
Multiple Genset Applications > Configuration Example: Mul... > Configuring Load-Dependent...

“ Load dependent start/stop è Mains parallel operation”.
2. Configure the parameters listed below.
5767 MOP Minimum 40 kW The minimum load in mains parallel operation is 40 kW

load
5769 MOP Hysteresis 20 kW The reserve power hysteresis in mains parallel operation is 20 kW
5768 MOP Reserve 10 kW The reserve power in mains parallel operation is 10 kW

power
5772 MOP Add on 30 s The add on delay in mains parallel operation is 20 seconds
delay
5773 MOP Add on 10 s The add on delay at rated load in mains parallel operation is 10 seconds
delay at rated
load
5774 MOP Add off 60 s The add off delay in mains parallel operation is 60 seconds
delay
Table 126: Parameter configuration for LDSS (MOP)
LDSS parameters for islanded opera‐ Additional assumptions are valid for islanded operation (IOP), i.e.
tion in case of an mains failure (emergency) operation:
n A reserve power of 80 kW on the busbar shall be maintained,
i.e. at least 2 generators are available in islanded operation for
redundancy because no supporting mains are present.
n A hysteresis of 20 kW is required to avoid frequent starts and
stops.
n The delay for adding another generator shall be 10 seconds.
n The delay for adding another generator shall be reduced to 3
seconds if a generator at the busbar is operating above its
rated load (accelerated start of the next generator).
n The delay for removing a generator from the busbar shall be
180 seconds.
“Parameter è Configuration è Configure application
è Configure application modes
è Load dependent start/stop è islanded operation”.
5760 IOP Reserve 80 kW The reserve power in islanded operation is 80 kW

power
5761 IOP Hysteresis 20 kW The reserve power hysteresis in islanded operation is 20 kW
5764 IOP Add on 10 s The add on delay in islanded operation is 10 seconds

delay
5765 IOP Add on 3s The add on delay at rated load in islanded operation is 3 seconds
delay at rated
load
5766 IOP Add off 180 s The add off delay in islanded operation is 180 seconds
delay
Table 127: Parameter configuration for LDSS (IOP)

Application Field
Multiple Genset Applications > Configuration Example: Mul... > Configuring Power Control
6.2.1.2 Configuring Automatic Operation

“PARAMETER è Configuration è Configure application
è Configure operation modes è Operation mode AUTO”.
2. Configure the LogicsManager 86.90 function
[12120 Start req in AUTO] as shown in (Fig. 253) to start
the generator in Automatic operating mode if discrete input
[DI 02] ("09.02 Discrete input 2") is energized or a remote
start request ("04.13 Remote request" = start via interface) is
issued.
Fig. 253: LogicsManager function

"Start req in AUTO"
6.2.1.3 Configuring Emergency Operation

Configure emergency operation to be initiated if the mains fails for
at least 3 seconds or the MCB cannot be closed.
Configure the parameters listed below.
2802 On/Off On Emergency operation is enabled
2800 Mains fail delay 3.00 s Emergency operation is initiated if the mains fail for a t least 3 seconds
time
3408 Emerg. start with Yes Emergency operation is initiated if the MCB fails to close
MCB failure
Table 128: Parameter configuration for emergency run
See Ä Chapter 4.4.6 “Emergency Run”

on page 364 for further settings possibilities.
6.2.1.4 Configuring Power Control

Configure the power controller to use the internal power setpoint 1,
which must be set to 0 kW import power.
“Configure load control”.
2. Configure the parameters listed below .
5539 AM ActPower Determined by The internal power setpoint 1 is used as load setpoint 1
81.05: [A1 =
05.54. Internal P
setp1 [kW]]
5526 Load setpoint 1 Import The internal power setpoint 1 is a import power value
5520 Int. load control 0 kW The internal power setpoint 1 is configured to 0 kW

setpoint 1
Table 129: Parameter configuration for import/export power control

Application Field
Special Applications > Generator Excitation Prote...
6.3 Special Applications

6.3.1 Generator Excitation Protection
The easYgen controller provides the user with power factor moni‐
toring. These monitoring functions permit for protection of the gen‐
erator over- and under-excitation. The power factor monitoring con‐
sists of a warning alarm and/or a shutdown alarm when enabled.
An alarm and the specified action will be initiated if the monitored
power factor surpasses the defined limits. Typically the generator
is monitored for loss of excitation and/or over excitation in a mains
parallel application.
When a generator plant is paralleled against a utility, it is possible
to control the power factor at a desired reference. When the plant
is operated in an island mode or islanded parallel application, it is
not possible to control the power factor. The load will dictate what
the power factor is due to the reactive nature of the load.
Fig. 254: Example - generator excitation protection

Fig. 254 shows a typical power factor (generator excitation) protec‐
tion range, where the desired range of operation (green area) is
from 0.7 lagging (inductive) to 0.8 leading (capacitive).
When the power factor exceeds either of these limits by entering
the yellow shaded areas starting at 0.7 lagging or 0.8 leading for
more than 30 seconds, a class B warning alarm is initiated.
If the power factor exceeds the desired range further and enters
the red shaded areas starting at 0.5 lagging or 0.6 leading for 1
second, a class E alarm is initiated and the generator is shut down.

Application Field
Special Applications > Configuring A Setpoint Con...
Configuration
In order to achieve the described protection, the power factor
monitoring parameters ( Ä Chapter 4.5.1.6.1.1 “Generator
Lagging Power Factor (Level 1 & 2)” on page 393 or
Ä Chapter 4.5.1.6.1.2 “Generator Leading Power Factor
(Level 1 & 2)” on page 394) have to be configured as shown
below.
Generator power factor lagging level 1 Generator power factor lagging level 2
ID Text Setting ID Text Setting
2325 Monitoring On 2331 Monitoring On
2329 Limit +0.700 2335 Limit +0.500
2330 Delay 30.00 s 2336 Delay 1.00 s
2326 Alarm class B 2332 Alarm class E
2327 Self acknowledge No 2333 Self acknowledge No
2328 87.70 LM:Eng.mon Yes 2334 87.70 LM:Eng.mon Yes
Generator power factor leading level 1 Generator power factor leading level 2
ID Text Setting ID Text Setting
2375 Monitoring On 2381 Monitoring On
2379 Limit -0.800 2385 Limit -0.600
2380 Delay 30.00 s 2386 Delay 1.00 s
2376 Alarm class B 2382 Alarm class E
2377 Self acknowledge No 2383 Self acknowledge No
2378 87.70 LM:Eng.mon Yes 2384 87.70 LM:Eng.mon Yes
6.3.2 Configuring A Setpoint Control Via Analog Input

The following example illustrates how to configure an easYgen to
use an external load setpoint via analog input [AI 03].
The external setpoint may be enabled using a switch, wired to dis‐
crete input [DI 09].
An analog 0 to 20 mA input is to be used where 4 mA corresponds
with 0 % power (0 MW), 12 mA corresponds with 50 % power
(1 MW), and 20 mA corresponds with 100 % power (2 MW).
Configuring the rated generator power

“Configure measurement”.
2. Configure the parameter listed in Ä Table 130 “Parameters
for rated generator power” on page 610.
1752 Gen. rated active 2000 Generator rated power of 2 MW

power [kW]
Table 130: Parameters for rated generator power

Application Field
Configuring the analog input for real

power setpoint
“Configure analog inputs è Analog input 3”.
1100 Type Linear A user-defined linear characteristic curve is to be used
1101 User defined min +0.00e0 A value of 0.00 is displayed at the minimum of the input range
display value
1102 User defined +2000.00e3 A value of 2000.00e3 is displayed at the maximum of the input range
max display
value
1139 Sender value at 4 The sender value at minimum display is 4 mA

display min.
1140 Sender value at 20 The sender value at maximum display is 20 mA

display max.
1120 Sender type 0 - 20 mA A 0 to 20 mA sender is used on the analog input
10116 Filter time con‐ Off No filter time constant is applied to the analog signal
stant
1135 Exponent for 0 The value of the analog input 3 is multiplied by 100=1.
protocol
1103 Monitoring wire Low If the analog signal falls below 2 mA, a wire break is indicated
break
1104 Wire break alarm Class B An alarm of class B will be issued in case of a wire break
class
1105 Self acknowl‐ No A wire break is not automatically cleared after it has been repaired
edge wire break
3636 Bargraph min‐ +0.00 The start value for the bargraph display of the analog input is 0.00
imum
3637 Bargraph max‐ +2000.00 The end value for the bargraph display of the analog input is 2000.00
imum
3. Configure the following parameters using ToolKit. They facili‐

tate a more detailed display of the analog value.
1125 Description ActivePower SP Analog input [AI 03] is labeled with "ActivePower SP (%)" on the display
1134 Unit % The unit "%" is shown on the display.
Configuring the load controller The load controller is to be configured that it uses a fixed load set‐
point 1 of 2 MW unless a switch energizes discrete input [DI 04] for
enabling a variable load setpoint 2, which is controlled by analog
input [AI 03].

Application Field

“Configure load control”.
5539 AM ActPower Determined by The internal power setpoint 1 is used as load setpoint 1
81.05
[A1 = 05.54.
Internal P setp1
[kW]]
5526 Load setpoint 1 Import The internal power setpoint 1 is a import power value
5520 Int. load control 2000.0 kW The internal power setpoint 1 is configured to 2 MW
setpoint 1
5540 AM ActPower Path Through of: Analog input 3 is used as load setpoint 2
SP2 [kW]
06.03 Analog
input 3
5527 Load setpoint 2 Steady The internal power setpoint 1 is a import power value
5521 Int. load control 1000.0 kW The internal power setpoint 1 is configured to 1 MW
setpoint 2
12919 Setp. 2 load FALSE LogicsManager is not enabling load setpoint 2
3. Configure the LogicsManager function 12919 "Setp. 2 load"

as shown in (Fig. 255) to enable load setpoint 2 if discrete
input [DI 09] is energized.
4. Continue similarly with setpoint 3 and setpoint 4

"Setp. 2 load"
Viewing the load setpoint on the

easYgen
1. After the unit is configured as described above, the "Setpoint"
screen may be viewed from the main screen by selecting
“Next page è Setpoints è Setpoints generator”.
Fig. 256: Screen "Setpoint"

Application Field
Special Applications > Creating Self-Toggling (Pu...
2. The "Analog inputs" screen may be viewed from the main

screen by selecting “Next page è Measured values
è Analog inputs/outputs”.
Fig. 257: Screen "Analog inputs"
6.3.3 Creating Self-Toggling (Pulsing) Relays
This function is set up with the LogicsManager.
This is a simple example of a relay output that toggles from ener‐

gized to de-energized in automatic mode with adjustable on and off
time.
This pulsing relay may be combined with a flexible limit, which can
be programmed with a function like low battery voltage to get a
blinking warning light.
n Relay 2 is the discrete output [DO 2] and Flag 5 is used as an
auxiliary flag.
n Relay 2 will be ON (energized) for 2 seconds and then OFF
(de-energized) for 2 seconds as long as the easYgen is in
automatic mode.
Configuring "Flag 5" for a pulsing

relay
Configure the LogicsManager function "Flag 5" as shown in
(Fig. 258).
ð In this example is the Delay ON time in the LogicsMan‐
ager of Flag 5 indicates how long the pause is. The Delay
OFF time of Relay 2 is the pulse duration.

"Flag 5"
Configuring "Relay 2" for a pulsing

relay
Configure the LogicsManager function "Relay 2" as shown in
(Fig. 259).

"Relay 2"

Application Field
Special Applications > Changing A Starter Battery...
6.3.4 Changing A Starter Battery Set
This function is set up with the LogicsManager.
The following programming example shows how two relay outputs

are energized in turns when discrete input 9 is energized.
At first discrete output 11 will be energized, then, discrete
output 12 will be energized, then discrete output 11 and so on.
This logic may be used to change between two starter battery sets
for each starting cycle.
Configuration Configure Relay 11 and Relay 12 as well as the Flags 2, 3, 4, and

5 as shown in the following example.
You may also use the discrete input, which starts the engine by
default [DI 02] or any other input command instead of discrete
input 9; for example the command variable 03.06 "Engine
released".
1. Configure the LogicsManager function "Relay 11" as shown
in (Fig. 260).

"Relay 11"
2. Configure the LogicsManager function "Relay 12" as shown

in (Fig. 261).

"Relay 12"
3. Configure the LogicsManager function "Flag 2" as shown in

(Fig. 262).

"Flag 2"

Application Field
Special Applications > Performing Remote Start/St...

(Fig. 263).

"Flag 3"

(Fig. 264).

"Flag 4"

(Fig. 265).

"Flag 5"
6.3.5 Performing Remote Start/Stop And Acknowledgment

The easYgen controller may be configured to perform start/stop/
shutdown/Acknowledgment functions remotely through the CAN
bus or Modbus. The required procedure is detailed in the following
steps.
Refer to Ä Chapter 4.1.1 “Basic Navigation”

on page 112 for a detailed description of the navi‐
gation through the various display screens.
A detailed description of the individual parameters
may be found in Ä Chapter 4.4.5.2 “Operation
Mode AUTO - Automatic Run” on page 339.
Be sure to enter the password for code level 2 or
higher to be able to access the required configura‐
tion screens.
Refer to Ä Chapter 4.2.1 “Install ToolKit”
on page 139 for a description of the installation,
configuration and usage of the ToolKit visualization
and configuration application.

Application Field
Special Applications > Performing Remote Start/St... > Operating Modes
Preliminary Conditions
We recommend to reset the unit to factory settings
before proceeding.
Refer to Ä Chapter 4.3.5 “System Management”
on page 180 for reference.
The LogicsManager factory settings are shown in
Ä Chapter 9.3.5 “Factory Settings” on page 1035.
6.3.5.1 Operating Modes

Two operating modes may be used with remote control:
n AUTOMATIC
n STOP
It is possible to fix the operating mode using the LogicsManager
function 86.16 "Operat. mode AUTO" (parameter 12510 Ä p. 338/
Ä p. 1037).
AUTOMATIC
The LogicsManager function "Operat. mode AUTO" (param‐
eter 12510 Ä p. 338/Ä p. 1037) can be configured as shown
in (Fig. 266).
ð AUTOMATIC operation mode is always enabled.
If an alarm of alarm class C through F occurs in AUTOMATIC

Fig. 266: LogicsManager function operating mode, the control does not return to STOP operating
"Operat. mode AUTO" mode. If the alarm is cleared after Acknowledgment a restart is ini‐
tiated.
It is also possible to configure a discrete input for controlling the
operating mode using the LogicsManager function 86.16 "Operat.
mode AUTO" (parameter 12510 Ä p. 338/Ä p. 1037) and 86.18
"Operat. mode STOP" (parameter 12530 Ä p. 339/Ä p. 1037).
The LogicsManager function "Operat. mode AUTO" (param‐
in (Fig. 267).
ð AUTOMATIC operation mode is enabled as soon as dis‐
crete input 9 is energized.

"Operat. mode AUTO"

Application Field
Special Applications > Performing Remote Start/St... > Setting Up A Test With Or ...
STOP
The LogicsManager function "Operat. mode STOP" (param‐
in (Fig. 268).
ð STOP operation mode is enabled as soon as discrete
input 9 is de-energized.

"Operat. mode STOP"
6.3.5.2 Setting Up A Test With Or Without Load

There are a lot of different opinions of the behavior of a proper test
mode. The easYgen controller is supporting the following two
modes:
n Test with load
n Test without load
Alternatives to the operation mode TEST

In cases the dedicated TEST operation mode shall
be not taken, the following procedure can be taken
to execute an TEST run in the operation mode
AUTOMATIC.
Test with load This is the LogicsManager function "Start req. in AUTO" (param‐
eter 12120 Ä p. 340/Ä p. 1035). No special message appears on
the display.
If the mains fail during start in auto, the unit keeps running until the
mains return and the mains settling time is expired or the condi‐
tions for "Start req. in AUTO" are FALSE again. The result
depends on which condition is active longer.
Test without load This is the LogicsManager function "Start w/o load" (param‐
eter 12540 Ä p. 340/Ä p. 1037/Ä p. 1037). If the conditions for this
LogicsManager function are TRUE, the engine will provide an auto‐
matic starting sequence and keep the generator running until this
function is FALSE again.
Then the unit will perform an automatic stop sequence and remain
in standby in auto mode.
The message "Start w/o load" is displayed during the test without
load. If the mains fails during test without load and the emergency
mode is enabled, the unit will take over the load.
The unit will open the MCB and close the GCB. When the mains
return, it will transfer the load back to the mains according to the
configured breaker transition mode after the mains settling timer
has expired. The engine will keep running until the conditions for
"Start w/o load" are FALSE again.
Example for test without load The engine shall start once a month and run for one hour without
overtaking the load. The test day shall be every fifteenth of a
month (with flag 2). A relay output can be configured to indicate if
this test is running, e.g. for a signal lamp.

Application Field
Special Applications > Performing Remote Start/St... > Remote Start/Stop, Shutdow...
1. Configure the parameters listed below to set up the timer.

1663 Active day 15 The active day is enabled every fifteenth of the month
1662 Active hour 10 The active hour is enabled between 10:00 and 11:00 am every day
Table 131: Timer configuration
2. Configure the LogicsManager function "Flag 2" (parameter

10701 Ä p. 547/Ä p. 1022/Ä p. 1027) as shown in
(Fig. 269).
ð Flag 2 becomes TRUE as soon as the configured active
day and active time is reached.

"Flag 2"
3. The LogicsManager function "Start without load" (parameter

12540 Ä p. 340/Ä p. 1037/Ä p. 1037) can be configured as
shown in (Fig. 270).
ð Start without load mode is enabled as soon as Flag 2
becomes TRUE.

"Start without load"
6.3.5.3 Remote Start/Stop, Shutdown, And Acknowledgment

The easYgen may be start, stop, shut down, or acknowledged
alarms with Modbus or CAN protocol via the interface.
Therefore, two logical command variables (04.13 and 04.14) have
to be configured with the LogicsManager. 03.40 can handle
Remote shutdown only.
n 04.13 Remote request
n 04.14 Remote acknowledge
n 03.40 Remote shutdown
A Remote shutdown 03.40 can be configured via LogicsManager
internal flag (e.g.12230 Flag 1) combined with a free alarm Logi‐
csManager (e.g. Free alarm 1) configured with shutdown alarm
class.
How to handle a Remote request 04.13 and a Remote acknowl‐
edge 04.14 is described below in detail.
Start request in AUTOMATIC oper‐

ating mode
“PARAMETER: è Configuration è Configure application
è Configure operation modes è Operation mode AUTO”.
2. Open the LogicsManager 12120 for entry "Start req in
AUTO".

Application Field
Special Applications > Performing Remote Start/St... > Remote Start/Stop, Shutdow...
3. Configure the LogicsManager function "Start req in AUTO" as

ð With this setting, the "Start req in AUTO" LogicsManager
output becomes TRUE as soon as the remote request
signal is enabled.

"Start req in AUTO" The LogicsManager commands 2 and 3 may be
used to configure additional conditions like discrete
inputs, which must be energized to be able to
issue the remote start request.
External Acknowledgment
“PARAMETER è Configuration è Configure monitoring
è Miscellaneous è General monitoring settings”.
2. Open the LogicsManager 86.15 for entry "Ext. acknowledge".
3. Configure the LogicsManager function "Ext. acknowledge" as
ð With this setting, the "Ext. acknowledge" LogicsManager
output becomes TRUE as soon as the remote acknowl‐
edge signal is enabled.

"Ext. acknowledge" The LogicsManager commands 2 and 3 may be
used to configure additional conditions like discrete
inputs, which must be energized to be able to
issue the remote acknowledge command.
Please refer to Ä Chapter 6.5 “Modbus Applications” on page 697

for a description of how to configure the LogicsManager functions
via Modbus.
All interfaces access the same bits. The command

variable "04.13 Remote request" remains enabled
in the easYgen until a new command is sent or the
power supply failed or is removed.
Remote start:
n The command variable "04.13 Remote request" changes to "1"
(high) if the start bit (ID 503, bit 0) changes from "0" to "1".
n The command variable "04.13 Remote request" changes to "0"
(low) if the stop bit (ID 503, bit 1) changes from "0" to "1"
(Fig. 273).

Application Field
Special Applications > Performing Remote Start/St...> Remote Start/Stop, Shutdow...
Acknowledgment:
n The command variable "04.14 Remote acknowledge" reflects
the Acknowledgment bit (ID 503, bit 4).
n An Acknowledgment is generally performed twice:
– 1st change of the logical output "External acknowledge"
from "0" to "1":
Silence horn
– 2nd change of the logical output "External acknowledge"
from "0" to "1":
Acknowledges all inactive alarms
System reaction
The easYgen does NOT react on the disabling of
the start bit, but only on the enabling of the stop
bit.
This has the advantage that it is not required to
maintain the connection established for the whole
time in case of a remote start.
The following figure shows the reaction of the command variable

on the various changes of the bits:
Fig. 273: Command variable

Enabling the bits may be performed with the following methods:
n Bit Enabling via Modbus Protocol and RS-485 Interface
n Bit Enabling via CANopen Protocol and CAN Interface 1
Bit enabling via Modbus protocol and The parameter Modbus Slave ID must be configured.
RS-485 interface
The control bits are sent on address 503 for a start via Modbus:
n Bit 0: Start
n Bit 1: Stop
n Bits 2 and 3: must be "0" (for the watchdog).
n Bit 4: Acknowledgment
n Bit 9: Shutdown command

Application Field
Special Applications > Connecting IKD 1 on CAN Bus
Please refer to Ä Chapter 6.5 “Modbus Applica‐

tions” on page 697 for a description of how to
enable control bits via Modbus.
Bit enabling via CANopen protocol

and CAN interface 1 For further information on the CANopen protocol
refer to Ä Chapter 7.5 “CANopen Protocol”
on page 725 and the CANopen file *.eds, which is
delivered with the unit.
Please refer to Ä Chapter 6.5 “Modbus Applica‐
tions” on page 697 for a description of how to
enable control bits via Modbus.
Remote Shutdown For controlling the device with Remote Shutdown 03.40 please run
setup as described above but with 03.40 instead of 04.14 and
using Bit 9 instead of Bit 0, 1, and 4.
Additionally
n define a free LM flag for 03.40 Remote Shutdown and
n take it as input for a Free alarm
n with a shutdown alarm class.
6.3.6 Connecting IKD 1 on CAN Bus
We recommend to connect external expansion

boards, like the Woodward IKD 1 to CAN bus 2.
This CAN bus offers preconfigured settings for
operating several expansion boards including the
IKD 1.
However, it is also possible to connect an IKD 1 to
CAN bus 1.
Refer to the Ä Chapter 4.7.4.1.3 “Transmit PDO {x} (Process Data

Object)” on page 516 and Ä Chapter 4.7.4.1.2 “Receive PDO {x}
(Process Data Object)” on page 514 for the configuration of the
parameters concerned.
Refer also to Ä Chapter 7.5 “CANopen Protocol” on page 725 for
a description of the data objects.
The easYgen may either be configured directly using the front
panel or externally using the ToolKit software.
Transmit PDO The easYgen must be configured for sending to data protocol
65000 (external DOs 1 to 8) and CAN ID 181 (hex) every 20 ms on
TPDO1.

Application Field
Special Applications > Connecting IKD 1 on CAN Bus
LSG connected on CAN 1

The upper described ID 181 (hex) can not be used
if a LSG and a legacy device like GCP 30, GCP
20, MFR-2 are connected on CAN 1! The legacy
devices are using IDs 181 - 18E (hex) but can not
be switched to another ID.
TPDO is used to send messages to an external device.

Configure TPDO1 as shown below.
9600 COB-ID 181 (hex) / 385 The COB-ID is configured to 181 (hex) or 385 (dec)
(dec)
9602 Transmission 255 Data is automatically broadcasted (transmission type 255)

type
9604 Event timer 20 ms The event timer is configured to 20 ms
8962 Selected Data 65000 Data protocol 65000 is selected

Protocol
Table 132: TPDO1 configuration
Fig. 274: TPDO configuration for IKD

1 (example HMI)
ð (Fig. 274) and ( Ä Table 132 “TPDO1 configuration”

on page 622) display the example TPDO configuration
for IKD 1.
Fig. 275: TPDO configuration for IKD

1 (example ToolKit)
Receive PDO The easYgen must be configured for receiving data on an RPDO.
The data received on CAN ID 201h is interpreted as data protocol
65000 (external DIs 1 to 8).

Application Field
Special Applications > Connecting IKD 1 on CAN Bus > Configuring an IKD 1 Expan...
Configure RPDO1 as shown below.

9300 COB-ID 201 (hex) / 513 The COB-ID is configured to 201 (hex) or 513 (dec)
(dec)
9121 Event timer 2000 ms The event timer is configured to 2000 ms
8970 Selected Data 65000 Data protocol 65000 is selected

Protocol
Table 133: RPDO1 configuration
Fig. 276: RPDO configuration for IKD

1 (example HMI)
ð (Fig. 276) and ( Ä Further information on page 623) dis‐

play the example RPDO configuration for IKD 1.
Fig. 277: RPDO configuration for IKD

1 (example ToolKit)
6.3.6.1 Configuring an IKD 1 Expansion Module

General notes The IKD 1 is an Woodward I/O expansion board. It can be con‐
nected via CAN bus to Woodward easYgen generator controllers
or DTSC 200 Automatic Transfer Switch Controllers. The configu‐
ration of the IKD 1 can be done with the IKD Configuration Tool
running on a PC/laptop, connected via serial interface to the IKD 1.
IKD Configuration Tool (P/N: 9927-2094) is a tool to quickly con‐
figure an IKD for connection with the easYgen series or DTSC 200.
It will check the parametrization of the IKD 1 and allows to set it to
one of the four different connection modes. The IKD Configuration
Tool replaces the LeoPC configuration tool.

Application Field
Special Applications > Connecting IKD 1 on CAN Bus> Configuring an IKD 1 Expan...
6.3.6.1.1 Installation
Prerequisites The following items are necessary before installing the software:
n PC with Windows operating system
n To connect the IKD to a serial port (RS232) on the PC
– Woodward DPC cable RS-232 (P/N: 5417-557)
n To connect the IKD to a USB port on the PC
– USB/RS-232 adaptor and a Woodward DPC cable RS-232
(P/N: 5417-557)
– Woodward DPC cable USB/RS-232 (P/N: 5417-1251)
Installation The following steps needs to be performed for installing the IKD
Configuration Tool
1. Uninstall any previous installation of IKD Configuration Tool
2. If software is not available on product CD-ROM: Please
download from Woodward web site
3. Unzip the *.zip file on your PC
ð You should get a directory named “publish”
4. Run the “setup.exe” from this directory
5. Follow the instructions given during installation
6. After installation the directory “publish” can be deleted
6.3.6.1.2 Quick Configuration

How to use Configuration Tool The following steps allow push-button configuration of IKD 1
1. Connect the IKD 1 to the PC/laptop as described above and
power it
2. Start the already installed IKD Configuration Tool
3. Select the COM port IKD 1 is connected to the PC/laptop
4. Press button “Connect” to connect to the IKD 1
5. Select CAN baud rate
6. Press one of the four preconfigured mode buttons (“IKD 1 on
Node-ID x”)
ð Settings will be transferred to the IKD 1
The Program Dialog Box On start of the configuration software, you should get the following
screen with fields, buttons and selectors available:

Application Field
Special Applications > Connecting IKD 1 on CAN Bus > Configuring an IKD 1 Expan...
1. “COM port”
ð Select between all serial ports your PC is providing. If
there is no serial port available, then this field is empty.
Select the COM port to which the IKD is connected.
(“COM1” for example)
2. “Connect”
ð Opens the selected serial port and tries to connect to the
IKD. If successful, it will read out the data from the IKD
but it won’t change any data on the IKD. It will populate
the “CAN Baud rate” field with the CAN baud rate the IKD
is currently configured. If the IKD is already configured to
one of the four different CAN node-IDs usable for an
easYgen, the corresponding button “IKD 1 on Node-ID x”
will be colored green.
3. “Disconnect”
ð Closes the serial port if it was opened. Must be used, if
accidentally the wrong COM port was selected and con‐
nected
Fig. 278: IKD Configuration Tool
4. “Status field” (yellow background)
ð Shows messages about the status of the connection
5. “IKD on Node-ID X”
ð Each of these four buttons has two functionalities:
1) After connecting, if the IKD 1 is already configured to
one of the four different CAN node-IDs usable for an
easYgen, the corresponding button will be colored green.
2) By pressing the button the program will configure the
IKD 1 to the selected node-ID and CAN baud rate. After
that it will read it out for check.
6. “CAN Baud rate”
ð This button has two functionalities:
1) After connecting it shows the currently configured CAN
baud rate of the IKD.
2) It can also be used to select the CAN baud rate. For
the easYgen configuration only 125 kBaud, 250 kBaud
and 500 kBaud is permissible.

Application Field
Special Applications > Connecting IKD 1 on CAN Bus > Configuration for a secon...
6.3.6.2 Configuration for a second IKD 1

To connect a second IKD 1 to the easYgen:
1. Set up TPDO2 for the easYgen on the front panel as shown
in ( Ä “ Transmit PDO” on page 621).
Fig. 279: TPDO configuration for 2nd

IKD 1 (example HMI)
ð Set up TPDO2 for the easYgen in ToolKit as shown in

( Ä “ Transmit PDO” on page 621).
Fig. 280: TPDO configuration for 2nd

IKD 1 (example ToolKit)
2. Set up RPDO2 for the easYgen on the front panel as shown

in ( Ä “ Receive PDO” on page 622).
Fig. 281: RPDO configuration for 2nd

IKD 1 (example HMI)
ð Set up RPDO2 for the easYgen in ToolKit as shown in

( Ä “ Receive PDO” on page 622).
Fig. 282: RPDO configuration for 2nd

IKD 1 (example ToolKit)

Application Field
Special Applications > Configuring A PWM Duty Cyc...
6.3.7 Configuring A PWM Duty Cycle For A CAT ADEM Controller

If a PWM signal shall be used with a CAT ADEM speed controller,
the duty cycle must be limited between 10% and 85%.
For this, the following settings must be made to the respective
analog output
The following parameter IDs and figures refer to

analog output 1.
Note, that another analog output may also be
used.
Configure the parameters as shown below.

5200 Data source [11.03] Speed A speed signal will be output

bias %
5201 Selected hard‐ PWM A PWM hardware type will be used

ware type
5208 Minimum hard‐ 10.00% The minimum output value is 10%

ware level
5209 Maximum hard‐ 85.00% The minimum output value is 85%

ware level
5210 PWM output 10.00 V The PWM output level is configured to 10 V

level
Table 134: PWM duty cycle configuration
ð The finished configuration in ToolKit is shown in

(Fig. 283).
Fig. 283: PWM duty cycle for a CAT ADEM controller (example
ToolKit)

Application Field
Special Applications > Connecting Analog Inputs I...
6.3.8 Wiring Self Powered Discrete Inputs

In order to create self-powered discrete inputs with plastic housing
variant:
1. Connect battery negative (B-) to ground and PE (ter‐
minal 61).
Fig. 284: Wiring self-powered discrete inputs

2. Connect DI common (terminal 66) to power supply 12/24 V
(terminal 63, minimum wire size 0.5 mm² (20 AWG)).
ð This enables to energize the discrete inputs against
ground.
The Protective Earth terminal 61 is not connected

on the sheet metal housing.
– Use the protective earth (PE) connector
housing instead.
6.3.9 Connecting Analog Inputs In Series

The analog inputs of the easYgen-3000XT series are galvanically
isolated to the power supply. This allows for example to share a
power setpoint 0/4 to 20 mA with up to three devices.
Make sure that the source can drive the resulting

burden.

Application Field
Special Applications > Setup Expansion Modules at...
Fig. 285: Connecting analog inputs in series

The graphic above shows the terminal numbers for the analog
input 3, but in principle it works for all analog inputs which support
a 0/4 to 20 mA signal.
6.3.10 Setup Expansion Modules at CAN 2

General notes The easYgen is supporting several expansion modules for external
analog and digital terminals. It is possible to connect up to four
Woodward IKDs for digital inputs and outputs and some third party
devices e.g. from Phoenix or WAGO for analog and digital inputs
and outputs. Also a combination of the devices listed is possible.
Configuring easYgen for expansion modules is split in two parts:
n One part is located at the external analog/digital inputs/outputs
pages and defines how many inputs/outputs are used and the
scaling of the analog types. Refer to chapters Ä Chapter
4.4.2.4 “Analog Inputs” on page 212 for reference.
n The other part is located at the CAN2 interface pages and
defines the Node IDs and the types of external devices. Refer
to chapter Ä Chapter 4.7.4.2.1 “Expansion Modules at CAN‐
open Interface” on page 519 for reference.
Additionally the external device must be configured to the correct
baud rate and Node ID. This could be done via DIP switches at
Phoenix and WAGO, for the IKD with a Woodward IKD configura‐
tion tool.
Supported external modules

There is a maximum of three Phoenix bus couplers
on the CAN bus. There is also a maximum of 16AI
4AO 32DI and 32DO, which must not exceeded in
all possible combinations.

Application Field
WAGO …
Field bus coupler for CAN Interface/Connector
750-337 (MCS) Terminals/clamps
750-338 (SUB-D ) SUB-D
WAGO Analog Inputs (2 x AI or 4 x AI)
Type P/N two channel ver‐ P/N four channel "Wire break" detection TYPE: Settings
sion version
(SE = Single ended, Diff = Differential)
Pt100 750-461 750-460/0001 T >849 °C: Overrun Pt DIN(R0)

T < -200 °C: Underrun Sender type: R0 = 100
Pt 1000 750-461/0003 750-460/0003 T >849 °C: Overrun Pt DIN(R0)

Ni 100 750-461/0004 T >250 °C: Overrun Ni DIN(R0)

Ni 1000 TK6180 750-461/0005 T >250 °C Overrun Ni DIN(R0)

10-1200 750-461/000-002 no Linear or table Sender type:

0-1200 Ohm
10-5000 Ohms 750-461/000-007 no Linear or table Sender type:

0-5000 Ohms
4-20 mA (SE) 750-466 750-455 Underrun Linear or table Sender type:

4-20 mA
0-20 mA (SE) 750-465 750-453 no Linear or table Sender type:

0-20 mA
0-20 mA (Diff) 750-452 no Linear or table Sender type:

0-20 mA
4-20 mA (Diff) 750-454 Underrun Linear or table Sender type:

4-20 mA
+/-10 V (Diff) 750-456 no Linear or table Sender type:

+/-10 V
0-10 V (SE) 750-467 750-468 no Linear or table Sender type:

0..10 V
Thermocouple 750-469xxx Overrun TC Type x Sender type: Ther‐

mocouple
(K, T, J, E, S, L) (standard format) Underrun: (approx. -49.8 °C)
Notes
If adjustable variant
(750-469/003-000) is used:
use “Wago-I/O-CHECK” to
adjust (default Type is "K").
For details refer to Ä “Config‐
urable WAGO devices”
on page 631
+/- 120 mV 750-469/000-003 no Linear or table Sender type:
Thermocouple

Application Field
WAGO Analog Inputs (8 x AI)
Type P/N eight channel ver‐ "Wire break" detection TYPE: Settings
sion
RTD 750-451 depends on the configured TYPE and Sender type: according to the type con‐
type figured by “Wago-I/O-CHECK”
Use “Wago-I/O-CHECK ” to configure the different
channels (Default type is PT100). For details refer to
Ä “Configurable WAGO devices” on page 631.
0/4 – 20 mA 750-496 4-20 mA: underrun TYPE: Linear or table Sender type: 4-20 mA or 0-20
mA
0-20 mA: no detection
Use “Wago-I/O-CHECK ” to configure the different
channels (Default type is 4-20 mA). For details refer
to Ä “Configurable WAGO devices” on page 631.
Thermocouple 750-458 Overrun TYPE: depends on the configured type Sender type:
depends on the configured type
Underrun (approx. -49.8 °C)
Note: if adjustable variant (750-469/003-000) is used
use “Wago-I/O-CHECK ” to adjust (Default type is
K). For details refer to Ä “Configurable WAGO
devices” on page 631.
WAGO Analog Outputs (2 x AO or 4 x AO)
Type P/N two channel ver‐ P/N four channel Comments Settings
sion version
0-20 mA 750-552 750-553 Selected Hardware type = mA
0-10 V 750-560, 750-559 Selected Hardware type = "V"

[10 bit (100 mW)]
750-550
WAGO Digital Inputs/Outputs (2 ... 16 x DI/DO)
# of DIs 2 x DI 4 x DI 8 X DI 16 X DI
P/N 750-400 750-402 750-430 750-1405
# of DOs 2 x DO 4 x DO 8 X DO 16 X DO
P/N 750-501 750-504 750-530 750-1504
There is a maximum of 16 WAGO analog inputs

and up to 4 WAGO analog outputs with up to 32
WAGO digital inputs and 32 WAGO digital outputs
or up to 4 IKDs.
For all configurations with WAGO devices at least
one WAGO CANopen fieldbus coupler 750-337 is
required!
Configurable WAGO devices If configurable WAGO devices are used, the mode of the terminal
must be configured via the PC software “Wago I/O Check” . This
configuration cannot be done via easYgen parameters. The
easYgen parameters for the corresponding channels must be con‐
sistent with the Wago configuration!

Application Field
RTD device (750-451)

Configure this 8 channel device RTD (750-451) via the “Wago I/O-
Check” with the following process image:
The following types are not supported: Ni1000

(high resolution), Ni1000 (TK5000), Pt1000 (EN
60751 high resolution), and 1200 Ohms.
Typ Expected format
Ni100 (EN 60751) default
Ni1000 (TK6180, DN 43760) default
Ni120 (Minco) default
5000 Ohms S5-FB250
Thermocouple device (750-458) for voltage measurement

There is no intuitive setting in the easYgen if a channel of the TC
device (750-458) is configured for voltage measurement. A special
scaling of the easYgen parameters “Sender value at display min.”
and “Sender value at display max” like in the table below is
required.
WAGO device Configure the according easYgen parameter

Voltage range “Sender value at display “Sender value at display
min.” max.”
+/- 30 mV -614.4 614.4
+/- 60 mV -307.2 307.2
+/- 120 mV -153.6 153.6
Combinations of modules All combinations of external terminals up to the maximum of 16AI,

4AO, 32DI, and 32DO are possible.
Selection is done by parameter “Select external
terminals ” 15320 Ä p. 524.
There is a maximum of three bus couplers on the

CAN bus for PHOENIX modules but (for the
moment) only one bus coupler on the CAN bus for
WAGO modules.
So WAGO devices must use one and the same
CAN address only.
The following table shows the possible configuration combination

of the "Type" settings (parameter 5851 Ä p. 231) and the "Sender
type" setting (parameter 5856 Ä p. 232) for Phoenix devices.

Application Field
Fig. 286: Supported Phoenix sender types
If Thermocouple is configured together with “Table

A”, “Table B“, or “Linear” the input works with a
range from -15 mV to 85mV. In this case the
values for parameters “Sender value at display
min./max.” must be entered in [mV] (e.g.: min:
0.00, max: 85.00).
Configuration process help The following flow charts step-by-step guide you through the con‐
figuration of external CANopen devices.
Configuration is the same for Phoenix/WAGO

The flow charts below use "P..." for Phoenix
external interfaces but it works similar with "W..."
for WAGO devices.

Application Field
Fig. 287: Configure expansion boards part 1

Application Field

Application Field

Application Field

Application Field
Special Applications > Phase Angle Compensation
6.3.11 Phase Angle Compensation
WARNING!
Check parameters!
Erroneous synchronization settings can destroy
the generator with destructive power!
Ensure the parameters are configured correctly!
Incorrect wiring of the system cannot be compen‐
sated for with this parameter.

Application Field
Special Applications > Phase Angle Compensation
General notes This feature allows the easYgen to adapt the phase angle meas‐
urement system according to the transformer type. The phase
angle of the "generator to busbar" and the "busbar to mains" meas‐
urement can be compensated . The phase angle compensation is
activated with the parameters "Phase angle compensation GCB"
(parameter 8825 Ä p. 256) and "Phase angle compensation MCB"
(parameter 8841 Ä p. 262) .
The controller provides an adjustment for a phase angle deviation
in a range of +/-180.0°. The range can be configured with the
parameters "Phase angle GCB" (parameter 8824 Ä p. 256) and
"Phase angle MCB" (parameter 8842 Ä p. 262). This parameters
compensate the phase angle deviation, which can be caused by
transformers (i.e. a delta to wye transformer) located within the
electrical system.
Example – phase angle compensation

GCB
The easYgen generator voltage is connected to the low voltage
side of a transformer with the vector group Dyn5. The easYgen
busbar voltage is connected to the high voltage side. Because of
the transformer, the phase angles between generator and busbar
differs due the closed GCB. The synchronization function of the
easYgen can be compensated by a configurable phase angle devi‐
ation.
Using vector group 5 (Dyn5) implies: α = 5 x 30° = 150°. Since
150° < 180° and the easYgen busbar measurement is connected
to the high voltage side, this results into "α" to be used as phase
difference. Configure parameter "Phase angle GCB" (parameter
8824 Ä p. 256) to "150°" to compensate the phase difference
between generator/busbar.
Fig. 292: Phase angle compensation

GCB

Application Field
Special Applications > Start/Stop Logic Mode "Off"
Example – phase angle compensation

MCB
The easYgen mains voltage is connected to the high voltage side
of a transformer with the vector group Yd11. The easYgen busbar
voltage is connected to the low voltage side. Because of the trans‐
former, the phase angles between mains and busbar differs due
the closed MCB. The synchronization function of the easYgen can
be compensated by a configurable phase angle deviation.
Using vector group 11 (Yd11) implies: α = 11 x 30° = 330°. Since
330° > 180° and the easYgen mains measurement is connected to
the high voltage side, this results into "-360° - α" to be used as
phase difference. Configure parameter "Phase angle MCB"
(parameter 8842 Ä p. 262) to "-30°" to compensate the phase dif‐
ference between mains/busbar.
Fig. 293: Phase angle compensation

MCB
6.3.12 Start/Stop Logic Mode "Off"

General notes The start/stop sequence in the easYgen is completely disabled.
This function is needed in applications where the control of the
start/stop logic is completely done by an external device (e.g.
PLC).
The LogicsManager “Release engine monitoring”

(parameter 12999 Ä p. 196/Ä p. 1038) has a spe‐
cial function, if the "Start/stop logic mode" (param‐
eter 3321 Ä p. 182) is configured to “Off”. When
the LogicsManager becomes TRUE, the delayed
monitoring function alarms are triggered, which are
delayed by the engine speed. If they become
FALSE all engine speed related monitoring func‐
tions are switched off. The LogicsManager "Start
req. in AUTO" (parameter 12120 Ä p. 340/
Ä p. 1035) gets a special function if the "Start/stop
logic mode" (parameter 3321 Ä p. 182) is config‐
ured to “Off”. When the LogicsManager becomes
TRUE the operational mode begins. With
becoming FALSE the operational mode will be left.

Application Field
To operate the easYgen in this configuration correctly, the fol‐

lowing needs to be done:
n The easYgen requires an external feedback, that the drive
system will be started. That is the precondition for the easYgen
to trigger the delayed monitoring function, which activates, after
a delay time, the speed related monitoring functions. (under‐
speed, underfrequency, undervoltage, etc.)
n The easYgen requires an external feedback, that the drive
system will be stopped. That is the precondition for the
easYgen to deactivate the speed related monitoring functions.
This avoids upcoming alarms due the drive system is stopped.
n The easYgen must be directed to switch into the active opera‐
tional mode or to exit this operational mode. The operational
mode proceeds with the actions according to the configured
application and transition modes.
Example

"Firing speed"
The following section shows a practical example, to explain in

detail the described above configuration.
Fig. 294 shows the LogicsManager “Release engine monitoring”
(parameter 12999 Ä p. 196/Ä p. 1038). The LogicsManager must
be configured as follows:
n The external start/stop device gives an feedback to the
easYgen via discrete input [DI 02] ("09.02 Discrete input 2")
Fig. 295: LogicsManager function that the drive system will be started or already is started.
"Release engine monitoring" n When simultaneously the firing speed ("87.68 LM: Firing
speed") is reached, the equation becomes TRUE and the
delayed monitoring function will be triggered.
n For security reasons a closed GCB ("04.06 GCB closed")
forces the monitoring too.

Application Field
Fig. 296: Start/Stop sequence - LogicsManager "Firing speed"

Drawing above shows the following:
n The frequency controller is triggered, if the engine speed (gen‐
erator frequency) reaches the "Start frequency control level"
(parameter 5516 Ä p. 312) and after the expired "Start fre‐
quency control delay" (parameter 5517 Ä p. 312) time. The fre‐
quency controller is switched off, if the engine speed (gener‐
ator frequency) falls below the “Release engine monitoring”
(parameter 12999 Ä p. 196/Ä p. 1038) level.
n The voltage controller is triggered, if the generator reaches the
"Start value" (parameter 5616 Ä p. 272) and after the expired
"Start delay" (parameter 5617 Ä p. 272) time. The voltage con‐
troller is switched off, if the engine speed (generator frequency)
falls below the “Release engine monitoring” (parameter
12999 Ä p. 196/Ä p. 1038) level.
n The delayed monitoring function is triggered when LogicsMan‐
ager "Release engine monitoring" (parameter 12999 Ä p. 196/
Ä p. 1038) becomes TRUE and after the "Engine monitoring
delay time" (parameter 3315 Ä p. 194). The delayed moni‐
toring function is switched off when LogicsManager "Release
engine monitoring" (parameter 12999 Ä p. 196/Ä p. 1038)
becomes FALSE.

Application Field
Special Applications > Ripple Control Receiver
To activate the operational mode in the easYgen, discrete input [DI

02] ("09.02 Discrete input 2") is used in the LogicsManager "Start
req. in AUTO" (parameter 12120 Ä p. 340/Ä p. 1035) .
With removing the start request in AUTOMATIC the operational
mode will be left.

"Start req. in AUTO"
Fig. 298: Start/Stop sequence - LogicsManager "Start req. in AUTO"

Fig. 298 shows the following:
n The closing (synchronization) of the GCB is triggered when
LogicsManager "Start req. in AUTO" (parameter
12120 Ä p. 340/Ä p. 1035) becomes TRUE.
n The opening (including power down ramping) of the GCB is
triggered when LogicsManager "Start req. in AUTO" (param‐
eter 12120 Ä p. 340/Ä p. 1035) becomes FALSE.
6.3.13 Ripple Control Receiver

General notes Decentralized energy producers can be obliged by power supply
companies to equip plants with a technical and operational provi‐
sion for remote-controlled reduction of the feed-in power to stabi‐
lize mains. Ripple control is one form of power limitation and is
used in many countries around the world.
Functionality The energy supply company provides a signal to the ripple control
receiver to reduce the feed-in power of the generating plant. The
ripple control receiver switches four relay contacts according to the
required energy power level. This relay contacts correspond for
example to the following energy power levels:

Application Field
n 100% (full feed-in) - Step 1

n 60% - Step 2
n 30% - Step 3
n 0% (no feed-in) - Step 4
The respective contact is closed for the duration of the reduction.
The reduction of the feed-in power must be established within a
certain time frame (depending on national regulations).
Derating of power The power reduction is realized by using the LogicsManager "Free
derating" (parameter 15146 Ä p. 328/Ä p. 1038). This function is
using an analog signal. For this reason the relay outputs of the
ripple control receiver must be converted into a corresponding
analog signal. We recommend a resistor array like shown in
Fig. 299 to convert the relay outputs into a analog signal (0 to 500
Ohms).
Fig. 299: Ripple control receiver wiring

R1 = 500 Ohms (or 560 parallel 4.7 k)
R2 = 300 Ohms (or 330 parallel 3.3 k)
R3 = 150 Ohms
Max. power Switched relay Corresponding Derating

ripple control analog value
[% of rated] receiver [% of rated]
100% Relay - Step 1 500 Ohms 0%

Application Field
Configuring the analog input for a

ripple control receiver
“Configure analog inputs è Analog input 1”.
1000 Type Linear A user-defined linear characteristic curve is to be used
1001 User defined min +100.00 A value of 100 is displayed at the minimum of the input range
display value
1002 User defined +0.00 A value of 0 is displayed at the maximum of the input range
max display
value
1039 Sender value at 0.000 The sender value at minimum display is 0 Ohms
display min.
1040 Sender value at 500.000 The sender value at maximum display is 500 Ohms
display max.
1020 Sender type 0 - 2000 Ohm A 0 to 2000 Ohms sender is used on the analog input
10113 Filter time con‐ 3 Filter time depending on the ambient conditions
stant
3632 Bargraph min‐ +0.00 The start value for the bargraph display of the analog input is 0
imum
3633 Bargraph max‐ +100.00 The end value for the bargraph display of the analog input is 100 and indi‐
imum cates the derating
3. Configure the following parameters using ToolKit. They facili‐

tate a more detailed display of the analog value.
1025 Description Derating Analog input [AI 01] is labeled with "Derating" on the display
1034 Unit % Text "%" is displayed for the unit
1035 Exponent for 0 Value displayed "as is" (without exponent)

protocol
Configuring the derating of power

“Configure load control è Derating of power”.
15149 Direct derating On Only the analog source is used for the derating
15147 AM Derating Determined by Defines [06.01 Analog Input AI 1] as the analog source which controls the
source AnalogManager derating function
81.21
Select "Pass through"
[A1 = 06.01
Analog input 1]
15142 J1939 derating Off The derate command via ECU is ignored

Application Field
Special Applications > Neutral Interlocking
3. Configure the LogicsManager function “87.60 Free derating”

as shown in (Fig. 300) to enable derating of power if discrete
input [DI 09] is energized.
Please configure "Alarm class" (parameter

1362 Ä p. 208) of discrete input [DI 09] to "Con‐
Fig. 300: LogicsManager function trol".
"Free derating"
Maximal power setpoint After the unit is configured as described above, the maximal power
setpoint looks like shown in Fig. 301.
Fig. 301: Maximal power setpoint
6.3.14 Neutral Interlocking

General Notes The Neutral Interlocking function controls in multiple-gen applica‐
tions the Neutral Contactor (NC) of each generator. The contactor
bridges the Neutral with the PE. The rule is that only one neutral of
the running generators in the same segment are bridged to earth.
The Logic ensures that with changing of generators or a lacking
neutral breaker the neutral link is passed over to another active
running generator. This requires information exchange between
the genset controls. The load share protocol in the easYgen pro‐
vides the according information.

Application Field
Application Examples
L3
L2
L1
N
GCB 1 GCB 2
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
G G
N N
NC 1 NC 2
Fig. 302: Wiring neutral Interlocking: GCB 3-pole
Fig. 303: Wiring neutral Interlocking: GCB 4-pole
Function Start and operating

The genset control closes principally after each successful start
(firing speed reached) the NC. The genset control proceeds with
closing the GCB, if the NC has been closed successfully. If the NC
closure was not successful the easYgen issues an alarm. The NC
and GCB closure procedure is blocked from now on, until the alarm
is acknowledged.

Application Field
When the GCB is closed the genset control begins to figure out,
whether the own NC can remain closed or must be opened. This
monitoring is done continuously.
As long the GCB is closed, the NC remains closed or is closed, if:
n No connection to mains is active
AND
n one of the following is TRUE
– the own NC is the only closed NC in the same segment
OR
– there is minimum one other NC in the same segment
closed but the own generator has a higher neutral inter‐
locking priority
OR
– there is minimum one other NC in the same segment
closed which has the same neutral interlocking priority but
the own genset control has a lower device number
In all other cases the NC is opened!
Running Generator without closed GCB

As long the engine/generator is running and the GCB is open the
NC will be closed or remains closed until the engine/generator is
stopped.
Neutral Contactor (NC) Feedback

The discrete input 12 (DI 12) is used as feedback of the Neutral
contactor and cannot be configured onto another discrete input. If
the input is energized, the neutral contactor is recognized as
closed.
Monitoring NC Feedback
The monitoring of the NC feedback is performed always, if the
Neutral Interlocking is enabled. The monitor checks, if the feed‐
back behaves according to the NC command. With a configurable
delay time the alarm is activated with a general alarm text. Open or
closure failure are not differentiated. The issued Alarm text is: "N-
cont. reply mism." (Neutral contactor has a reply mismatch).
Event logger and NC Feedback

If the Neutral Interlocking is enabled, following event entries shall
take place:
n Neutral cont. opened (with +)
n Neutral cont. closed (with +)
Priority for Closing NC

The priority for closing GCB is configurable. This priority is inde‐
pendent from the LDSS priority. The customer can freely decide
which generator shall get which priority.

Application Field
The advantage of this determination is that the

application is not fixed with rated power settings.
Maybe there are other circumstances which shall
determine the neutral interlocking priority.
Two LogicsManager variables give further information:

n 03.39 Close neutral contactor - status
n 08.37 Neutral contactor reply mismatch
Fig. 304: Flow Chart Neutral-Interlocking

Application Field
Special Applications > Run-Up Synchronization
6.3.15 Run-Up Synchronization

The generators are paralleled together by closing their circuit
breakers during the engine start sequence. Then after a certain
speed is achieved the voltage regulators are enabled and the gen‐
erators will produce voltage. The run-up synchronization method is
used to get several synchronous generators onto load in a very
short time. This time is determined by the engine start time and the
AVR on-excitation.
Another application for using run-up synchronization is the excita‐
tion of power transformers. In some cases the in-rush current of a
transformer may be more than one generator can supply when
closing the live generator to the dead transformer. Using this run-
up synchronization method allows the generator and transformer to
build up voltage gradually through the start without the large in-
rush.
---
The run-up synchronization supports also a GCB closure for mag‐
netizing a power transformer under defined circumstances, if the
prime mover is not controlled by the device.
General notes n The run-up synchronization is generally released by configura‐

tion.
n The run-up synchronization is supported in dedicated applica‐
tion Modes and breaker transition modes.
n To get the run-up synchronization procedure active the Logi‐
csManager "Run-up Synchronization" has to be set on TRUE.
n When run-up synchronization is enabled the easYgen evalu‐
ates before each start an open connection to mains. For the
case the generator would be connected to mains during run-up
synchronization the unit would automatically open the connec‐
tion to mains before start.
n The run-up synchronization requires an rpm speed source
(MPU or J1939).
n With enabling the run-up synchronization the command vari‐
able 03.24 "Excitation AVR" is usable. The activation can be
checked in the online diagram.
n The excitation can be simultaneous or individual. The simulta‐
neous excitation can reduce the cross currents between gener‐
ators in some critical situations.
n The run-up synchronization can be executed in two modes:
– Mode GCB: With starting the engines the GCB will be
closed.
– Mode GCB/GGB: With starting the engines the GCB and
GGB will be closed.
Multiple Genset Run-Up

Run-up synchronization can be interrupted by an
"Undelayed close" request!
Woodward strongly recommends to configure all
gensets of a run-up synchronization system simi‐
larly to run-up synchronization to suppress
aborting input.

Application Field
Special Applications > Run-Up Synchronization
Example applications The run-up synchronization can be applied in different applications.

The following figures show some examples.
Fig. 305: Run-up synchronization examples

A Single generator with power transformer without
GGB
B Multiple generators with load on busbar without
GGB
C Multiple generators with large transformer on
busbar without GGB
Fig. 306: Run-up synchronization examples

A Multiple generators with large load on busbar
with GGB
B Multiple generators with common transformer
and GGB
C Multiple generators with large transformer load
on busbar and GGB

Application Field
Special Applications > Run-Up Synchronization > Configuration
6.3.15.1 Configuration
Breaker modes The run-up synchronization can be used in following breaker
modes.
n Application mode GCB
n Application Mode GCB/MCB (GCB/L-MCB )
– Parallel
– Interchange
– Closed Transition
– Open Transition
n Application mode GCB/GGB (GCB/L-GGB )
n Application mode GCB/GGB/MCB (GCB/L-GGB/L-MCB
)
– Parallel
– Open Transition
– Closed transition
– Interchange
n Application mode GCB/LS5 (GCB/GGB/L-MCB )
Preconditions The following preconditions must be fulfilled to use the run-up syn‐
chronization.
n The run-up synchronization is enabled AND
n The MPU input is enabled AND
n The operating mode AUTOMATIC is active AND
n The LogicsManager “Run-up synchronization” is energized
AND
n An engine start command is active AND
n The unit recognizes a generator dead busbar situation AND
n No shutdown alarm is present
Interrupt conditions The run-up synchronization is interrupted by following conditions.

n The run-up synchronization is disabled OR
n The LogicsManager „Run-up synchronization“ is not TRUE OR
n A shutdown failure (alarm class C, D, E or F) is active OR
n An engine start command is not active OR
n The „Generator Group Breaker is closed” AND the run-up syn‐
chronization mode does not allow this
Behavior of the biasing signals During the run-up synchronization the frequency controller, the
voltage controller and the load sharing are disabled. To avoid a
reverse power condition shortly after activation of the excitation,
the biasing signals of the easYgen will behave with a droop (static)
curve.
The droop settings for the frequency f (parameter 5504 Ä p. 312)
and voltage V (parameter 5604 Ä p. 272) are used for this calcula‐
tion.
The initial state frequency decreases as active power increases
according to this formula:
n Initial State Frequency Deviation = Initial State Fre‐
quency*Active Power [%]*Droop f [%]
The initial state voltage decreases as reactive power increases
according to this formula:

Application Field
Special Applications > Run-Up Synchronization > Procedures
n Initial State Voltage Deviation = Initial State Voltage*Reactive

Power [%]*Droop V [%]
The frequency and voltage biasing is switched on, when the excita‐
tion is activated and the following triggered “Monitoring delay time”
(parameter 3315 Ä p. 194) has expired.
6.3.15.2 Procedures
6.3.15.2.1 Application Mode GCB
Fig. 307: Application mode GCB
Run-up synchronization GCB ID Parameter Setting range Proposal
3435 Run-up synchroni‐ Off / with GCB / with GCB

zation mode with GCB/GGB
3436 Minimum speed 0 to 4,000 rpm 350 rpm

for close GCB
3437 Speed for excita‐ 0 to 4,000 rpm 700 rpm

tion start
3438 Time of participa‐ 1 to 180 s 7s

tion
3442 Simultaneous On / Off Off

excitation
12937 Run up sync. LogicsManager DI 11
Table 135: Run-up synchronization
Preconditions for run-up synchronization:

Application Field
Special Applications > Run-Up Synchronization> Procedures
n GCB open
n MCB open (no mains connection)
n Engine(s) are stopped
n Run-up synchronization is released (LogicsManager)
With the start command the easYgen sets the solenoid valve, the
starter and closes the GCB. The unit displays "Run-up synchroni‐
zation". If the engine reaches the 700 rpm (speed for excitation
start) the easYgen activates the excitation. From now on moni‐
toring delay time is decremented from start value "Engine moni‐
toring delay time" (parameter 3315 Ä p. 194) until it is expired;
then:
n The underfrequency / overfrequency monitoring is activated
n The undervoltage monitoring is activated
n The pickup/frequency monitoring is activated
n The frequency and voltage controller is activated
Run-up synchronization acting on GCB and GGB

is not applicable in this application mode. The run-
up synchronization is inhibited.
6.3.15.2.2 Application Mode GCB/GGB
Fig. 308: Application mode GCB/GGB

Application Field


for close GCB

tion start

tion

excitation
12937 Run up sync. LogicsManager DI 11
ID Parameter Setting range Proposal
3440 Min. Generator 0.00 to 327.67 0.10 MW

power MW
12936 Bypass min. Pgen. LogicsManager —
3441 Voltage monitoring On / Off Off

load busbar
Table 137: GGB control

n GCB open
n GGB open
n MCB open
starter and closes the GCB. The unit displays "Run-up synchroni‐
zation". If the engine reaches the 700 rpm (speed for excitation
start) the easYgen activates the excitation. From now on moni‐
toring delay time is decremented from start value "Engine moni‐
toring delay time" (parameter 3315 Ä p. 194) until it is expired;
then:
n The closing of the GGB will be executed, if enough generator
power is available on generator busbar
Run-up synchronization GCB and ID Parameter Setting range Proposal

GGB
3435 Run-up synchroni‐ Off / with GCB / with GCB/GGB

n GCB open
n GGB open

Application Field
n MCB open
starter and closes the GCB and GGB. The unit displays "Run-up
synchronization". If the engine reaches the 600 rpm (speed for
excitation start) the easYgen activates the excitation. From now on
monitoring delay time is decremented from start value "Engine
monitoring delay time" (parameter 3315 Ä p. 194) until it is
expired; then:
6.3.15.2.3 Application Mode GCB/MCB
Fig. 309: Application mode GCB/MCB
The breaker transition mode makes no difference

during the run-up synchronization.

Application Field


for close GCB

tion start

tion

excitation
12937 Run up sync. LogicsManager Emergency run
Preconditions for run-up synchronization in emergency run:

n Mains OK
n GCB open
In this example the run-up synchronization shall be executed, if the
emergency start (AMF) becomes active. With the start command
the easYgen evaluates the condition of the MCB. If the MCB is
closed, the unit opens at first the MCB. After successful opening
the MCB the unit sets the solenoid valve, the starter and closes the
GCB. The unit displays "Run-up synchronization". If the engine
reaches the 600 rpm (speed for excitation start) the easYgen acti‐
vates the excitation. From now on monitoring delay time is decre‐
mented from start value "Engine monitoring delay time" (parameter
3315 Ä p. 194) until it is expired; then:
Run-up synchronization acting on GCB and GGB

is not applicable in this application mode. The run-
up synchronization is inhibited.
6.3.15.2.4 Run-Up Synchronization without Speed Sensor

General notes Application
n Step-up transformer with master and prime mover control
n No speed sensor (signal)
n Application Mode: "GCB", "GCB/LS-5" "GCB/MCB" or "GCB/L-
MCB"

Application Field
Fig. 310: Genset with separate master and prime mover control
In this application the run up synchronization supports a GCB clo‐
sure for magnetizing a power transformer. The engine is initiated
for start and controlled by an independent control device. The
easYgen can support this feature without any speed sensor input
as long the Start/Stop mode logic (ID3321) is configured on "Off".
This mode is only valid for applications in which no

parallel start of multiple gensets are required. This
mode only supports the single start of a genset
with its generator and its power transformer to get
it magnetized. If multiple gensets shall be started
together the easYgen Start/Stop mode logic must
be configured to Diesel, Gas or External and the
MPU (speed sensor signal) must be passed to the
easYgen.
To run the run-up synchronization correctly it is

mandatory FIRST to configure as described here.
AFTERWARDS please follow the "Special run-up
procedure".
For application correct run-up synchronization, please configure

the easYgen-XT as follows:
n Application mode must be set up to "GCB" or "GCB/LS-5"
n The run-up synchronization 3435 must be set up to "with GCB"

Application Field
n The Minimum speed for close GCB 3436 must be set up to "0"
rpm
n The Speed for excitation start 3437 must be set up to "0" rpm
n The Simultaneous excitation 3442 must be set up to "Off"
n The Start/Stop mode logic 3321 Ä p. 182 must be set up to
"Off"
n Check the Engine monitoring delay time 3315 Ä p. 194.
This time determines how long the easYgen-XT waits enabling
the generator monitoring after starting the run-up procedure.
The procedure for run-up a trans‐
former in the application shown above 1. The master control passes the run-up synchronization com‐
is: mand to the easYgen-XT: 12937 “Run-up sync”
2. The master control passes the Start command to the
easYgen-XT: 12120 Ä p. 340/Ä p. 1035 “Start request in
AUTO” )
ð If the MCB is open and the busbar is dead the easYgen-
XT closes the GCB
3. The master control initiates the prime mover start
4. The master control activates the monitoring delay time with
LogicsManager 12999 Ä p. 196/Ä p. 1038
ð The easygen-XT remains passive until the moment the
time delay is passed
5. If the the monitoring delay time expired
ð The easYgen-XT starts biasing frequency and voltage
according to its setpoint
6. The master control removes the run-up sync signal
ð Run-Up synchronization is done

Application Field
6.3.15.2.5 Application Mode GCB/GGB/MCB
Fig. 311: Application mode GCB/GGB/MCB
The breaker transition mode makes no difference

during the run-up synchronization.


for close GCB

tion start

tion

Application Field

excitation
3440 Min. Generator 0.00 to 327.67 —

power MW
3441 Voltage monitoring On / Off On

load busbar

n Mains OK
n GGB open or closed (depending on the GGB mode "ID3422")
n GGB open
In the example here the run-up synchronization shall be executed,
if the emergency start (AMF) becomes active. Depending on the
respective GGB mode, the GGB is opened. With the start com‐
mand the easYgen sets the solenoid valve, the starter and closes
the GCB. The unit displays "Run-up synchronization". If the engine
reaches the 600 rpm (speed for excitation start) the easYgen acti‐
vates the excitation. From now on monitoring delay time is decre‐
mented from start value "Engine monitoring delay time" (parameter
3315 Ä p. 194) until it is expired; then:
n The load will be transferred according to the configured
breaker transition mode
Run-up synchronization GCB and ID Parameter Setting range Proposal

GGB
3435 Run-up synchroni‐ Off / with GCB / with GCB/GGB

for close GCB

tion start

tion

excitation

Application Field
Special Applications > Run-Up Synchronization > Parameter Information
3440 Min. Generator 0.00 to 327.67 0.10 MW

power MW
3441 Voltage monitoring On / Off On

load busbar

n Mains OK
n GCB open (depending on the GGB mode "ID3422")
n GGB open
In this example, the run-up synchronization shall be executed, if
the emergency start (AMF) becomes active. With the start com‐
mand the easYgen evaluates the condition of the MCB. If the MCB
is closed, the unit opens the MCB first. After successfully opening
the MCB, the unit sets the solenoid valve and the starter and
closes the GCB and GGB. The unit displays "Run-up synchroniza‐
tion". If the engine reaches the 600 rpm (speed for excitation start),
the easYgen activates the excitation. From now on, monitoring
delay time is decremented from start value "Engine monitoring
delay time" (parameter 3315 Ä p. 194) until it is expired; then:
6.3.15.3 Parameter Information

The “Minimum speed for close GCB” The GCB (GGB) will be closed from the beginning on during the
(parameter 3436) is 0 rpm: run-up synchronization start. The advantage of this solution is a
clear defined start condition for all participating engines. It is rec‐
ommended for cases where all gensets are needed for the run-up
synchronization and no reserve genset is available.
The “Minimum speed for close GCB” The GCB (GGB) will be closed, when the starter has turned the
(parameter 3436) is higher than 0 crankshaft successfully. The level is usually set between 100 rpm
rpm: and under the firing speed level (450 rpm). The advantage of this
solution is to save time during the run-up procedure, if more gen‐
sets are started as needed. It is recommended for cases where
more gensets are available as needed for the run-up synchroniza‐
tion.
The “Speed for excitation” (parameter If the engine reaches the speed for excitation the excitation output
3437): will be issued. The speed for excitation must be higher than the
firing speed of the engine to make sure the start will be successful.
The “Simultaneous excitation” (param‐ If the simultaneous excitation is enabled, all participating units,
eter 3442): which match the speed limit for excitation will issue their excitation
command to the AVRs at the same time.

Application Field
Special Applications > Run-Up Synchronization > Commissioning Checklist
If the simultaneous excitation is disabled, all participating units,

which match the speed limit for excitation will issue their excitation
command to the AVRs independent of their neighbors.
The advantage of a simultaneous excitation is to minimize cross
currents between the generators during the run-up synchroniza‐
tion. The disadvantage of a simultaneous excitation is the demand
of a little bit more time until all units are available for excitation.
The simultaneous excitation makes sense, when high cross cur‐
rents are expected between the generators during run-up synchro‐
nization.
The “Time of participation” (parameter The time of participation is the maximum time an engine is
3438): accepted during the common run-up synchronization. When the
time is over, the single unit interrupts the run-up synchronization
and opens the GCB (GGB).
Recommendation:
n The time of participation should be never longer than the
starter time (parameter 3306 Ä p. 194)
n The time of participation should be long enough that the
engines can reach their speed for excitation in that time band
The “Engine monitoring delay time” The Engine monitoring delay time is also used in the run-up syn‐
(parameter 3315): chronization. It determines the time to wait between activating the
excitation and starting monitoring voltage and frequency. Usually
the closing of a GGB shall only be executed, when the monitoring
delay time is expired. In some cases like emergency run this time
can be bypassed to get the GGB faster closed.
6.3.15.4 Commissioning Checklist

The following checklist is guideline to commission the run-up syn‐
chronization mode.
n Select the right application mode according to your application.
Note that the feedback of the GCB, GGB and MCB is always
used according to the chosen application mode. The “Enable
MCB" LogicsManager must be considered in case of running
mains parallel.
n Select in case of the application mode GCB/MCB or
GCB/GGB/MCB the desired transition mode.
n Check at first all breaker feedbacks.
n In case of a GCB/MCB , GCB/GGB/MCB , GCB/L-MCB
, GCB/GGB/L-MCB or GCB/L-GGB/L-MCB appli‐
cation mode it is recommended to use the optional voltage
relay discrete input. Check the voltage relay input (dead load
busbar shall energize the input).
n Make sure that your emergency stop button works.
n Before trying any run-up synchronization function, check each
unit with a normal start by setting FALSE the LogicsManager
“Run-up synchronization”.

Application Field
Special Applications > LDSS with predicted load > Introduction
n Do a single start (without run-up synchronization) for each

engine to check:
– Starter
– Solenoid valve
– MPU input (speed)
– Excitation command
– Generator voltage measurement
– Optional voltage relay input
– Busbar voltage measurement
– Mains voltage measurement (depending on application
mode)
– Generator breaker control
– Generator group breaker control (depending on application
mode)
– Mains breaker control (depending on application mode)
n Check the synchronization of GCB, GGB and MCB by each
unit with single runs.
n Check the frequency, voltage, active power and power factor
control by each unit with single runs.
n Check the load share function with all units.
n Check the CAN communication between the single easYgens.
Make sure that each unit has its own device identifier and an
own Node-ID (usually ID 1, 2, 3 etc. and node identifier 1, 2, 3
etc.). The sequencing window gives you an overview.
n Before you begin with the run-up synchronization make sure,
that the physical connection to mains is really open. Later on, if
the easYgen shall open the MCB check this again.
n Before you do the first tries with run-up synchronization read
this manual and especially the chapter describing your espe‐
cially application.
n Consider, if you like a GCB closed before issue the crank com‐
mand (parameter 3437 is set to 0) or after the engine crank
shaft is definitely turning (parameter 3437 > 0).
n Consider, if you like simultaneously excitation (parameter 3442
= On] or not. Simultaneously excitation sequence is a little bit
longer but can avoid reverse power on the engines, if they very
differently come on speed.
n Consider the time of participation (parameter 3438), because
the time determines when a member will be removed from the
others to continue with a normal start.
6.3.16 LDSS with predicted load
6.3.16.1 Introduction
Please read the Ä Chapter 4.4.5.5.6 “LDSS with predicted load”
on page 362 first, before you continue. The chapter here shall give
you additional information to dedicated application.
Be aware of the two possible modes:

Application Field
Special Applications > LDSS with predicted load > Introduction
n Predict load source “Internal”:

The easYgen is autarkic handling the function. The easYgen
serves the GGB and the MCB.
n Predict load source “External”:
The easYgen cooperates with an external ATS control (e.g.
Woodward DTSC-200). The ATS control measures the mains
power and serves the MCB and GGB. The ATS device com‐
municates over CANopen with the easYgen.
We recommend to ask Woodward for a dedicated

application note with configuration examples, if you
want go for the external mode.
For parameter refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.5.5.6 “LDSS with predicted

load” on page 362. The easYgen informs the user with AnalogMan‐
ager variables and LogicsManager command variables about their
content.
For the relevant analog variables (10.73-10.78, 81.30 and group
21) refer to Ä Chapter 9.4 “AnalogManager Reference”
on page 1042.
For the relevant logic variables 04.68, 04.69, 86.36, groups 32 – 36
refer to Ä Chapter 9.3.2 “Logical Command Variables”
on page 988.

Application Field
Special Applications > LDSS with predicted load > Internal source mode (EG35...
6.3.16.2 Internal source mode (EG3500XT)

6.3.16.2.1 General
Fig. 312: Example of an application with predicted load source „internal“

Pre-assumption:
The LM ID12930 “LD start stop” is TRUE.
The Parameter ID9066 "Predicted load source” is configured as
“Internal”.
The LM ID15026 “LDSS with predicted load” is TRUE.
The AnalogManager ID9059 "Consumer load [kW]" passes the
mains active power (02.74 Mains active power [W] * -0.001) to the
LDSS PL function.
Fig. 313: Configuration AM Consumer load

Application Field
Fig. 314: Schematic of a predicted load with „internal“ source handling
The Procedure: As long as LM ID12120 “Start req in AUTO” is FALSE, the value of
the AM ID9059 "Consumer load [kW]" goes into the 5-minute
average power calculation which is passed to the LDSS.
In that moment the LM ID12120 “Start req in AUTO” becomes
TRUE, the last result of the 5-minute average calculation will be
kept.
So following procedure is started:
n The configuration ID5752 “Start stop mode” is ignored and
forced to “Reserve power”.
n The GGB close release will be internally blocked in the
easYgen and the “Inhibit ATS flag” LM 04.69 becomes true.
n The easYgen(s) starts in dead busbar start mode "LDSS", the
according amount of engines which are required to maintain
the consumer load. (The parameter ID5753 is ignored in that
moment).
If the rated power on the generator busbar is higher than the 5-
minute average value plus the active reserve power,
n the internal GGB close will be released and the “Inhibit ATS
flag” 04.69 becomes false.
– The GGB will be closed
n The generator load measurement easYgen is passed to the
LDSS. So the LDSS is now working like in the original mode.
n The configuration ID5752 “Start stop mode” is considered
again. So the start stop argue could change now.
n The 5-minute average value is now supplied by the real busbar
load. Thus the 5-minute average value is still tracked with the
consumer load.
The procedure is stopped from that moment on the LM ID12120
“Start req in AUTO” becomes FALSE. The generators will go into
cooldown and stop.

Application Field
Special Applications > LDSS with predicted load> Internal source mode (EG35...
6.3.16.2.2 Example “Emergency power unit” with internal GGB control

The example here shows what is to do if the easYgen shall start
the correct amount of engines in emergency mode. The GGB and
MCB is operated by the easYgen. The breaker transition mode is
“Open transition”.
To incorporate the easYgen emergency mode into

the procedure, the flag 04.09 “Emergency mode” is
to include in the LM ID12120 “Start req in AUTO”.
Fig. 315: Including the emergency mode as starting argue.

Application Field
Fig. 316: Example - GGB breaker handling with open transition.

The minimum generator power is set according to the largest
expected load. The GGB is released with the signal 04.69 “Inhibit
ATS”. Minimum generator power (ID3440) is set to the maximum
expected load.
Fig. 317: Bypass minimum Pgen. (12936) becomes active if “Inhibit

ATS” is false. That is the case if there is enough generator rated
power on busbar.

Application Field
Special Applications > LDSS with predicted load > External source mode
6.3.16.3 External source mode

6.3.16.3.1 General
The external source mode is basically running like the internal
source mode but the mains measurement, the MCB and GGB con‐
trol is provided by an external control. This control, usually an ATS
control (e.g. DTSC-200), sends the mains power and required con‐
dition flags as CANopen TPDO messages to the easYgen device.
Through configuration of the RPDO in the easYgen the mains
power and the condition flags are appearing automatically in the
LDSS PL function. The system allows to connect up to 5 ATS con‐
trols.
We recommend to ask Woodward for a dedicated

application note with configuration examples, if you
want go for the external mode.
The external mode contains up to 5 independent “5-minute

average value [kW]” calculations. Out of these values an “Average
load sum [kW]” is provided.
Fig. 318: The principle of the LDSS PL in external source mode
Pre-assumption The explanation here is performed for an application with one ATS
control. The principle is expandable on up to 5 ATS controls.
The LM ID12930 “LD start stop” is TRUE.
In the external mode the Parameter ID9066 "Predicted load
source” is configured as “External”.
The LM ID15026 “LDSS with predicted load” is TRUE.
The ATS control sends:
n The mains load 1 [kW]
n The MCB condition
n The mains condition

Application Field
n The GGB condition

n An ATS Start signal
The ATS start signal 04.68 is entered in the LM ID12120 “Start req
in AUTO”.
Fig. 319: Example of an application with predicted load source

„external“. Additionally, there is a hardwired inhbit signal from
easYgens to the ATS".
Inhibit Signal To inhibit the switching over of the ATS (e.g. DTCSs) before the
nominal power on bus matches the predicted load plus the active
reserve power the easYgens activate an inhibit signal.
For this reason every easYgen must have a relay configured with
the command variable 04.69 “Inhibit ATS”. These signals must be
hardwired as OR and connected to the ATS inhibit input.
The procedure As long as LM ID12120 “Start req in AUTO” is FALSE and the
MCB is closed, the RPDO1 Word2 (ID3372) load 1 [kW] goes into
the individual 5-minute average power calculation.
In the moment the mains fails [see RPDO1 Word1 (ID3371)] the
feeding of the 5-minute average value is stopped. So the last result
of average calculation will be kept. If the GGB is open [see RPDO1
Word1 (ID3371)] the value will be passed over as consumer load
to the LDSS function.
The ATS start signal from extern [see RPDO1 Word1 (ID3371)]
sets the LM command variable “ATS Start request” 04.68 on
TRUE. So the LM ID12120 “Start req in AUTO” becomes TRUE.
n So following procedure is started:
– The configuration ID5752 “Start stop mode” is ignored and
forced to “Reserve power”.
– The “Inhibit ATS flag” LM 04.69 becomes true.
– The easYgen(s) starts in dead busbar start mode "LDSS",
the according amount of engines which are required to
maintain the consumer load. (The parameter ID5753 is
ignored in that moment).
If the rated power on the generator busbar is higher than the 5-
minute average value plus the active reserve power,

Application Field
Special Applications > LDSS with predicted load> External source mode
n the “Inhibit ATS flag” 04.69 becomes false.

– The ATS closes the GGB
n The generator load measurement easYgen is passed to the
LDSS. So the LDSS is now working like in the original mode.
n The configuration ID5752 “Start stop mode” is considered
again. So the start stop argue could change now.
The procedure is stopped from that moment on the LM ID12120
“Start req in AUTO” becomes FALSE. The generators will go into
cooldown and stop.
The easYgen emergency mode ID2802 must be

disabled. The control over the start of the engines
is maintained by the ATS control.
6.3.16.3.2 LDSS PL CANopen Handling

The following chapter summarize the CANopen analog and binary
variables within the LDSS PL function. If the RPDO mapping is
configured the LDSS PL function is supported. Parallel to that the
easYgen makes the binary and analog variables available via the
Logics- and AnalogManager. (see table below). These values can
be taken for visualization or additional logical purposes.
Each ATS must send a transmit PDO with minimal two words
(INT16):
n “Word 1” with binary flags
– a. Bit 1-12 empty (0)
– b. Bit 13 GGB closed
– c. Bit 14 MCB closed
– d. Bit 15 Mains okay flag
– e. Bit 16 ATS start signal
n “Word 2” with the mains power [0.1 kW resolution] signed.
These two words are mapped inside the easYgen to according
database identifiers.
Binary flags from ATS (Word 1) The word with the binary flags is filled up on the last 4 bits. This
word is mapped in the easYgen to the according database index.
(According to the ATS number)
CAN LogicsManager Bit ID Function ID

Command Variable LDSS PL Descrip‐
tion Field
ATS1: 32.13 CAN1 RPDO1.1.13 13 11509 GGB closed 11573

RPDO 1
“Word 1” is 32.14 CAN1 RPDO1.1.14 14 11510 MCB closed 11574
mapped to
ID 3371 32.15 CAN1 RPDO1.1.15 15 11511 Mains OK 11575
32.16 CAN1 RPDO1.1.16 16 11512 ATS Start signal 11576

Application Field
CAN LogicsManager Bit ID Function ID

Command Variable LDSS PL Descrip‐
tion Field
ATS2: RPDO 33.13 CAN1 RPDO2.1.13 13 11513 GGB closed 11577

2 “Word 1” is
mapped to 33.14 CAN1 RPDO2.1.14 14 11514 MCB closed 11578
ID 3375
33.15 CAN1 RPDO2.1.15 15 11515 Mains OK 11579

3 “Word 1” is
ID 3379
34.15 CAN1 RPDO3.1.15 15 11519 Mains OK 11583

4 “Word 1” is
ID 3383
35.15 CAN1 RPDO4.1.15 15 11523 Mains OK 11587

5 “Word 1” is
ID 3387
36.15 CAN1 RPDO3.1.15 15 11527 Mains OK 11591
Table 144: If further ATS are in use:
Mains power [kW] from ATS (Word 2) The word with mains power is an 16INT signed. This word is
mapped in the easYgen to the according database index.
CAN AnalogManager Function

variable LDSS PL
ATS 1: 21.02 CAN1 RPDO1.2 Real power 1 [0.1kW]

RPDO 1 “Word 2” is
mapped to ID 3372
If further ATS are in use:

variable LDSS PL

mapped to ID 3376

mapped to ID 3380

Application Field
Special Applications > LDSS with predicted load > Tables

variable LDSS PL

mapped to ID 3384

mapped to ID 3388
6.3.16.3.3 Internally provided analog variables

These values can be assigned to the
analog variables of the Customer
screens for visualization.
10.73 Average load 1 [kW] 5 min average of “21.02 CAN1

RPDO1.2 “

RPDO2.2 “

RPDO3.2 “

RPDO4.2 “

RPDO5.2 “
10.78 Average load sum [kW] If LDSS PL external is active, 10.78 is

the load value which is passed to the
LDSS. It is the sum of all averages
(10.73 – 10.77) which have “Mains not
okay” and “GGB not closed”. In internal
mode it is the value of the 5 min.
average of the AM “Consumer load”.
81.30 AM Consumer load [kW] This analog variable provides the load
for the LDDS with load prediction in
internal source mode.
6.3.16.4 Tables
RPDO Summary RPDO configuration to get data from ATS 1:
Receive PDO Database Index AnalogManager variable Comment
RPDO1 Word1 3371 21.01 CAN1 RPDO1.1 Binary information
RPDO1 Word2 3372 21.02 CAN1 RPDO1.2 Real power [0.1kW]

Application Field
Special Applications > LDSS with predicted load > Tables
Internally provided LM Command Var‐ ID Function

iables
LMCV
04.68 ATS start request 11983 If this variable is true,

LDSS PL wants to start
the engines. This com‐
mand variable is incorpo‐
rated in the LM “Start
request in AUTO”.
04.69 Inhibit ATS 11984 This variable is true if

“04.68 ATS start request”
is true and the rated
power on the bus bar is
lower than the predicted
load (+ active reserve
power ). It is usually
passed internally to
release the GGB or
external to release the
ATS control.
86.36 LM: LDSS pre‐ 12606 Result of the LM LDSS

dicted with load prediction.

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control > Remote Start/Stop, Shutdow...
6.4 CANopen Applications

6.4.1 Remote Control
Refer to Ä Chapter 6.3.5 “Performing Remote

Start/Stop And Acknowledgment” on page 615 for
detailed information.
The easYgen may start, stop, shut down, or acknowledge alarms

with CAN/Modbus. Therefore, two logical command variables
(04.13 and 04.14) have to be configured with the LogicsManager.
03.40 can handle Remote shutdown only.
A Remote Shutdown 03.40 can be configured via LogicsManager
internal flag (e.g.12230 Flag 1) combined with a free alarm Logi‐
csManager (e.g. Free alarm 1) configured with shutdown alarm
class.
Two different methods to perform a remote start/stop/Acknowledg‐
ment using 04.13 Remote request and 04.14 Remote acknowledge
are detailed in the below.
These are "Remote start/stop/Acknowledgment via RPDO" and
"Remote start/stop/Acknowledgment via default SDO communica‐
tion channel". The advantages and the disadvantages of these two
methods are as follows.
RPDO Default SDO communication channel
Classical communication for CANopen devices Configuration process
One message Two messages
No validation of the received answer Validation answer, if message has been received by the unit
Only working in operational mode May take longer in case of communication with two messages
Table 145: Comparison
6.4.1.1.1 RPDO
Configure CAN interface 1 CANopen Master (parameter 8993 Ä p. 512) must be enabled, if
there is no PLC taking over the master function.
“Configure CAN interface è Configure CAN interface 1”.
2. Configure the parameter listed below.
8993 CANopen On CANopen Master is enabled.

Master

Application Field
Configure RPDO
“Configure CAN interface 1 è Receive PDO 1”.
9300 COB-ID 00000201 (hex) COB-ID set to 00000201.
9910 Number of 1 One mapped object is configured

Mapped Objects
9911 1. Mapped 00503 The 1st mapped object is set to control parameter 503.
Object
ð
Setting the COB-ID to 201 (hex) is exem‐
plary; usually, the PDOs are in the range
of 181 (hex) to 57F (hex).
With this setting, the Receive PDO is configured to over‐

take the received data coming in by COB-ID 201 into the
ID 503. The number of mapped objects is here 1.
Refer to Ä Chapter 9.2.19 “Additional

Data Identifier” on page 973 for a list of
additional parameter groups.
CANopen message The following table shows four data examples the device is
receiving on the CANopen bus. These data are sent as TPDO to
the device (COB-ID 201). The settings above map the received
data to the easYgen address ID 503.
ID (hex) Description Data (hex)
201 Remote Start 01 00
201 Remote Stop 02 00
201 Remote Acknowledge sequence of:

0000, 10 00; 0000, 1000
Notes
The message 1000hex must
be sent twice to acknowledge
an alarm completely. The first
rising edge (0000hex followed
by 1000hex) disables the horn
and the second rising edge
resets the alarm.
201 Remote Shutdown 00 02
6.4.1.1.2 Default SDO Communication Channel

Another possibility for a remote start/stop/Acknowledgment is to
send the request via default SDO communication channel. The
device listens to the CAN ID 600 (hex) + Node-ID internally to per‐
form the desired control, the reply is on CAN ID 580 (hex) + Node-
ID.

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control> Remote Start/Stop, Shutdow...
The following examples show the request format on CANopen with

different Node-IDs.
The request on the bus is sent via the control parameter ID 503 of
the device.
The value 2000 (hex) is calculated internally:
n 503 (dec) -- 1F7 (hex)
n 1F7+2000 (hex) = 21F7 (hex)
Please note that high and low bytes are

exchanged in the sent address. The data (hex)
shows the state of parameter 503 to achieve the
required control.
Node-ID 1 (standard value) The following table shows exemplary request data for the device
on the CANopen bus.
601 Remote Start 2B F7 21 01 01 00 00 00
601 Remote Stop 2B F7 21 01 02 00 00 00

2B F7 21 01 00 00 00 00, 2B
F7 21 01 10 00 00 00; 2B F7
21 01 00 00 00 00, 2B F7 21
01 10 00 00 00;
Notes
The message 2B F7 21 01 10
00 00 00 must be sent twice to
acknowledge an alarm com‐
pletely. The first rising edge
(2B F7 21 01 00 00 00 00 fol‐
lowed by 2B F7 21 01 10 00 00
00) disables the horn and the
second rising edge resets the
alarm.
601 Remote Shutdown 2B F7 21 01 00 02 00 00
Node-ID (not standard value) If the Node-ID of the device is intended to be different from the
standard value, the parameter "Node-ID CAN bus 1" (param‐
eter 8950 Ä p. 512) must be configured accordingly. Node-ID 2 is
used in the following example.
8950 Node-ID CAN 002 (hex) Node-ID set to 002.

bus 1
ð With this setting, the Node-ID of the CAN interface 1 is

set to 002.
The request on the bus is sent via the control parameter 503 of the
device.

Application Field
The hexadecimal value 2000 is calculated internally:

n 503 (dec) -- 1F7 (hex)
n 1F7 (hex) + 2000 (hex) = 21F7 (hex)

exchanged in the sent address.
The data (hex) shows the state of parameter 503 to achieve the
required control.
The following table shows exemplary request data for the device
on the CANopen bus.
602 Remote Start 2B F7 21 01 01 00 00 00
602 Remote Stop 2B F7 21 01 02 00 00 00

2B F7 21 01 00 00 00 00, 2B
F7 21 01 10 00 00 00; 2B F7
21 01 00 00 00 00, 2B F7 21
01 10 00 00 00;
Notes
The message 2B F7 21 01 10
00 00 00 must be sent twice to
acknowledge an alarm com‐
pletely. The first rising edge
(2B F7 21 01 00 00 00 00 fol‐
lowed by 2B F7 21 01 10 00 00
00) disables the horn and the
second rising edge resets the
alarm.
602 Remote Shutdown 2B F7 21 01 00 02 00 00
Additional SDO communication chan‐ It is also possible to allow several PLCs to start/stop/acknowledge
nels the unit in addition to the default SDO communication channel.
Four additional SDO communication channels are provided for this.
The additional SDO 127 (dec) is used in the following example.
“Configure CAN interface 1 è Additional Server SDOs”.
12801 2. Node-ID 127 (dec) = 7F SDO communication channel is configured to 127

(hex)
ð With this setting, an additional SDO communication

channel is configured to 127.
The control request is equal to the request via default SDO com‐
munication channel, but the device will listen to messages
including the configured address as well.
The device listens to the CAN ID 600 (hex) + 2. Node-ID internally
to perform the desired control, the reply from the easYgen is sent
on CAN ID 580 (hex) + 2. Node-ID.

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control > Transmitting A Frequency S...
n Receive CAN ID 67F (hex) (600 (hex) + 7F (hex))

n Receive CAN ID 5FF (hex) (580 (hex) + 7F (hex))
The same is valid for the additional SDO communication channels
3, 4, and 5.
The following table shows exemplary request data for the device
on the CANopen bus.
67F Remote Start 2B F7 21 01 01 00 00 00
67F Remote Stop 2B F7 21 01 02 00 00 00
67F Remote Acknowledge 2B F7 21 01 10 00 00 00
67F Remote Shutdown 2B F7 21 01 00 02 00 00
If parameters are written or read via two or more

SDO communication channels at the same time
(before the first has answered), the second one will
be refused.
6.4.1.2 Transmitting A Frequency Setpoint

It is possible to transmit a frequency setpoint value via the CAN‐
open protocol. Prerequisite for the use of a frequency setpoint via
an interface is the configuration of the frequency setpoint sources
with AnalogManager 5518 Ä p. 311/Ä p. 1068 for frequency set‐
point 1 or AnalogManager 5519 Ä p. 311/Ä p. 1068 for frequency
setpoint 2. Refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.4.4 “Frequency Control”
on page 308 for detailed information.
The respective frequency setpoint source is to be configured to
05.53 "Interface f setp [Hz]".
Two different methods to transmit a frequency setpoint via CAN‐
open are detailed below.
These are "Transmitting a frequency setpoint via RPDO" and
"Transmitting a frequency setpoint via default SDO communication
channel". The advantages and the disadvantages of these two

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control > Transmitting A Frequency S...
6.4.1.2.1 RPDO

Master
Configure RPDO

Mapped Objects
Object
ð
With this setting, the Receive PDO is set to the address,

for which the device is listening on the bus. The number
of mapped objects is 1 since 1 mapped object is used.
The request on the bus is sent with the control parameter
509 of the device as mapped object 1.

CANopen message The following table shows exemplary send data for the device on
the CANopen bus.
A frequency setpoint of 50.60 Hz is transmitted:
n 5060 (dec) = 13C4 (hex) ￫ C4 13 according to the CANopen
protocol
321 Remote F setpoint C4 13

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control > Transmitting A Voltage Set...

Another possibility for transmitting a frequency setpoint is to send
the value via default SDO communication channel. The device lis‐
tens to the CAN ID 600 (hex) + Node-ID internally to perform the
desired control, the reply is on CAN ID 580 (hex) + Node-ID.
The following example shows the send format on CANopen with
Node-ID 1.
The value is sent on the bus via the control parameter 509 of the
device.
n 509 (dec) -- 1FD (hex)
n 1FD (hex) + 2000 (hex) = 21FD (hex)

exchanged in the sent value.
required control.
the CANopen bus.
601 Remote F setpoint 2B FD 21 01 C4 13 00 00
6.4.1.3 Transmitting A Voltage Setpoint

It is possible to transmit a voltage setpoint value via the CANopen
protocol. Prerequisite for the use of a voltage setpoint via an inter‐
face is the configuration of the voltage setpoint sources with Ana‐
logManager 5618 Ä p. 272/Ä p. 1071 for voltage setpoint 1 or
AnalogManager 5619 Ä p. 272/Ä p. 1071 for voltage setpoint 2 .
Refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.4.1 “Voltage Control” on page 269 for
The respective voltage setpoint source is to be configured to 05.59
"Interface V setp [V]".

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control > Transmitting A Voltage Set...
Using absolute values but NOT % values

With "...-XT" the former used parameters 5618 and
5619 became AnalogManagers with the same ID
but changed from [%] to [V]. AnalogManagers
whose Analog result is an absolute value need
absolute input(s). For this example, both “Analog
input” and “Analog result” must be the same type:
[Hz].
With "...-XT" the former used 05.09 "Interface
volt.setp." became a % value 05.09 "Interface v
setp [%]" and so cannot be used for setpoint trans‐
mission because an absolute value is mandatory!
The parameter of the absolute value of the inter‐
face frequency setpoint is 05.59 "Interface v setp
[V]".
Two different methods to transmit a voltage setpoint setpoint via

CANopen are detailed below.
These are "Transmitting a voltage setpoint via RPDO" and "Trans‐
mitting a voltage setpoint via default SDO communication channel".
The advantages and the disadvantages of these two methods are
as follows.
6.4.1.3.1 RPDO

Master

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control> Transmitting A Voltage Set...
Configure RPDO

Mapped Objects
Object
ð


the CANopen bus in line 1.
A voltage setpoint of 412 V is transmitted:
n 412 (dec) = 019C (hex) ￫ 9C 01 according to the CANopen
protocol
321 Remote V setpoint 9C 01 00 00

Another possibility for transmitting a voltage setpoint is to send the
value via default SDO communication channel. The device listens
to the CAN ID 600 (hex) + Node ID internally to perform the
desired control, the reply is on CAN ID 580 (hex) + Node ID.
Node ID 1.
device.
n 510 (dec) - 1FE (hex)
n 1FE (hex) + 2000 (hex) = 21FE (hex)

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control > Transmitting A Power Facto...

601 Remote V setpoint 23 FE 21 01 9C 01 00 00
required control.
6.4.1.4 Transmitting A Power Factor Setpoint

It is possible to transmit a power factor setpoint value via the CAN‐
open protocol. Prerequisite for the use of a power factor setpoint
via an interface is the configuration of the power factor setpoint
source (parameter 5638 Ä p. 279/Ä p. 1070 for power factor set‐
point 1 source or parameter 5639 Ä p. 279/Ä p. 1070 for power
factor setpoint 2 source)
Refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.4.2 “Power Factor Control” on page 276 for
The respective power factor setpoint source is to be configured to
05.12 "Interface PF setp.".
Two different methods to transmit a power factor setpoint via CAN‐
open are detailed below.
These are "Transmitting a power factor setpoint via RPDO" and
"Transmitting a power factor setpoint via default SDO communica‐
tion channel". The advantages and the disadvantages of these two
6.4.1.4.1 RPDO

Master

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control> Transmitting A Power Facto...
Configure RPDO

Mapped Objects
Object
ð


the CANopen bus. A power factor setpoint of 0.85 capacitive/
leading is transmitted (64689 (dec) [65536-850] = FCAE (hex) ￫
AE FC according to the CANopen protocol) in line 1. Please note
that negative (capacitive or leading) power factor values are
deducted from 65536 (dec) or FFFF (hex).
A power factor setpoint of 0.9 inductive/lagging is transmitted in
line 2:
n 900 (dec) = 0384 (hex) ￫ 84 03 according to the CANopen pro‐
tocol.
A power factor setpoint of 1.0 is transmitted in line 3:
n 1000 (dec) = 03E8 (hex) ￫ E8 03 according to the CANopen
protocol
321 Remote PF Ld 085 AE FC
321 Remote PF LG 090 84 03
321 Remote PF 1.00 E8 03

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control > Transmitting A Power Setpo...

Another possibility for transmitting a power factor setpoint is to
send the value via default SDO communication channel. The
device listens to the CAN ID 600 (hex) + Node-ID internally to per‐
form the desired control, the reply is on CAN ID 580 (hex) + Node-
ID.
Node-ID 1.
device.
n 508 (dec) -- 1FC (hex)
n 1FC (hex) + 2000 (hex) = 21FC (hex)

required control.
the CANopen bus.
601 Remote PF Ld 085 2B FC 21 01 AE FC 00 00
601 Remote PF LG 090 2B FC 21 01 84 03 00 00
601 Remote PF 1.00 2B FC 21 01 E8 03 00 00
6.4.1.5 Transmitting A Power Setpoint

It is possible to transmit a power setpoint value via the CANopen
protocol. Prerequisite for the use of a power setpoint via an inter‐
face is the configuration of the power setpoint sources with Analog‐
Manager 5539 Ä p. 318/Ä p. 1069 for power setpoint 1 or Analog‐
Manager 5540 Ä p. 318/Ä p. 612/Ä p. 1069 for power setpoint 2.
Refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.4.5 “Load Control” on page 313 for detailed
information).
The respective power setpoint source is to be configured to 05.56
"Interface P setp [kW]".

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control> Transmitting A Power Setpo...
Using absolute values but NOT % values

With "...-XT" the former used parameters 5539 and
5540 became AnalogManagers with the same ID
but changed from [%] to [W]. AnalogManagers
whose Analog result is an absolute value need
absolute input(s). For this example, both “Analog
input” and “Analog result” must be the same type:
[W].
With "...-XT" the former used 05.06 "Interface pow.
setp." became a % value 05.06 "Interface P setp
[%]" and so cannot be used for setpoint transmis‐
sion because an absolute value is mandatory! The
parameter of the absolute value of the interface
power setpoint is 05.56 "Interface P setp [kW]".
Please note that the type of the power setpoint

(Steady, Import, or Export) must also be defined
(parameter 5526 Ä p. 318 for load setpoint 1 or
parameter 5527 Ä p. 318/Ä p. 612 for load set‐
point 2).
Two different methods to transmit a power setpoint via CANopen

are detailed below.
These are "Transmitting a power setpoint via RPDO" and "Trans‐
mitting a power setpoint via default SDO communication channel".
The advantages and the disadvantages of these two methods are
as follows.
6.4.1.5.1 RPDO

Master

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control > Transmitting A Power Setpo...
Configure RPDO

Mapped Objects
Object
ð


the CANopen bus in line 1.
A power setpoint of 1000.0 kW is transmitted:
n 10000 (dec) = 2710 (hex) ￫ 10 27 according to the CANopen
protocol
321 Remote P setpoint 10 27 00 00

Another possibility for transmitting a power setpoint is to send the
to the CAN ID 600 (hex) + Node-ID internally to perform the
desired control, the reply is on CAN ID 580 (hex) + Node-ID.
Node-ID 1.
device.
n 507 (dec) -- 1FB (hex)
n 1FB (hex) + 2000 (hex) = 21FB (hex)

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control > Transmitting Multiple Setp...

601 Remote P setpoint 23 FB 21 01 10 27 00 00
required control.
The table above shows exemplary send data for the device on the
CANopen bus in line 2.
6.4.1.6 Transmitting Multiple Setpoints

A single RPDO can transmit multiple objects. The receive PDO can
be used for four objects with 16 bits (2 bytes).
If larger objects - for example 32 bits (4 bytes), like for voltage and
power setpoints - are used, the maximum number of objects is
reduced.
Configure RPDO
9910 Number of 3 Three mapped objects are configured

Mapped Objects
Object
9912 2. Mapped 00507 The 2nd mapped object is set to control parameter 507.
Object
9913 3. Mapped 00508 The 3rd mapped object is set to control parameter 508.
Object
ð

The request on the bus is sent with the control parame‐
ters 509, 507, and 508 of the device as mapped object 1.


Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control > Remotely Changing The Setp...
the CANopen bus in line 1. The following setpoints are transmitted:
n Frequency 50.6 Hz (5060 (dec) = 13C4 (hex) ￫ C4 13
according to the CANopen protocol)
n Power 1000 kW (10000 (dec) = 2710 (hex) ￫ 10 27 according
to the CANopen protocol)
n Power factor 0.9 lagging (900 (dec) = 0384 (hex) ￫ 84 03
according to the CANopen protocol)
321 Remote F P PF setpoint C4 13 10 27 00 00 84 03
6.4.1.7 Remotely Changing The Setpoint

It is possible to remotely switch between pre-defined setpoints.
This is available for active power, power factor, frequency, and
voltage.
The bits 4 to 7 of parameter 504 ( Ä Chapter 9.2.19 “Additional
Data Identifier” on page 973) are carrying the settings and are
available in CAN bus and Modbus protocols. Each bit may be used
as input of the according setpoint switching LogicsManager.
ID Parameter Setting range Data type
504 Remote control word 2 Yes / No UNSIGNED 16
Table 150: Remote Control word “504” : switching between set‐

points
In order to switch to another setpoint, the respective bit of object

21F8 (hex), i.e. parameter 504, must be enabled. The following bits
are used for this:
Bit "x" of ... remotely requests to ... is available as LogicsManager command vari‐ ... uses LogicsManager "y" to switch
Parameter switch to able
504 ...
Bit 4 Voltage setpoint 2 04.37 "Remote voltage setpoint 2" 12920; 86.86 LM: "Setp. 2 voltage"
Bit 5 Frequency setpoint 2 04.38 "Remote frequency setpoint 2" 12918; 86.81 LM: "Setpoint 2 freq."
Bit 6 Power factor setpoint 2 04.39 "Remote PF setpoint 2" 12921: 86.84 LM: "Setp. 2
pwr.factor"
Bit 7 Active power setpoint 2 04.40 "Remote power setpoint 2" 12919; 86.82 LM: "Setp. 2 load"
12998; 86.67 LM: "Setp. 3 load"
12969; 86.75 LM: "Setp. 4 load"
Notes
This LogicsManager command vari‐
able can be used to switch to each
available load setpoint.

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control> Remotely Changing The Setp...
Additionally/alternatively to remotely changing the

control setpoints, it is possible to use "remote" set‐
points (values) defined via interface instead of the
internal setpoints as data source in the respective
controller. For example, use data source "05.53
Interface f setp [Hz]" instead of "05.51 Internal f
setp1 [Hz]" in AnalogManager 5518 Ä p. 311/
Ä p. 1068 (Freq. setpoint 1) to transmit a fre‐
quency setpoint via interface.
Two different methods for remotely switch between setpoints via

CANopen are detailed below.
These are switching between setpoints via “RPDO” or “Default
SDO communication channel” . The advantages and the disadvan‐
tages of these two methods are as follows:
Table 151: Comparison CANopen methods
6.4.1.7.1 RPDO

Master

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control > Remotely Changing The Setp...
Configure RPDO

Mapped Objects
Object
ð

the CANopen bus. The respective bits are enabled by sending the
data of the respective lines.
321 Remote P setpoint 2 80 00
321 Remote PF setpoint 2 40 00
321 Remote F setpoint 2 20 00
321 Remote V setpoint 2 10 00

Another possibility for changing a setpoint is to enable the bit via
default SDO communication channel. The device listens to the
CAN ID 600 (hex) + Node-ID internally to perform the desired con‐
trol, the reply is on CAN ID 580 (hex) + Node-ID.
Node-ID 1.
The value is sent on the bus via the control parameter ID 504 of
the device.
n 504 (dec) -- 1F8 (hex)
n 1F8 (hex) + 2000 (hex) = 21F8 (hex)


Application Field
CANopen Applications > Remote Control > Transmitting A Remote Cont...
required control.
the CANopen bus.
601 Remote P setpoint 2 2B F8 21 01 80 00 00 00
601 Remote PF setpoint 2 2B F8 21 01 40 00 00 00
601 Remote F setpoint 2 2B F8 21 01 20 00 00 00
601 Remote V setpoint 2 2B F8 21 01 10 00 00 00
6.4.1.8 Transmitting A Remote Control Bit

It is possible to transmit a remote control bit via the CANopen pro‐
tocol. Such a remote control bit can be sent by a PLC to remotely
control the easYgen if this remote control bit is used as a com‐
mand variable in a LogicsManager function.
Configure RPDO

Mapped Objects
Object
ð


the CANopen bus.
Remote control bit 1 is set:

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Sending A Data Protocol vi...
n 1 (dec) = 0001 (hex) ￫ 01 00 according to the CANopen pro‐

tocol
334 Remote Control Bit 1 (PDO) 01 00

Another possibility for transmitting a power setpoint is to send the
to the CAN ID 600 (hex) + Node-ID internally to perform the
desired control, the reply is on CAN ID 580 hex) + Node-ID.
Node-ID 1.
device.
n 249 (dec) -- 1F9 (hex)
n 1FB (hex) + 2000 (hex) = 21F9 (hex)

601 Remote Control Bit 1 (SDO) 2B F9 21 01 01 00 00 00
required control.
The table above shows exemplary sends data for the device on the
CANopen bus in line 2.
6.4.2 Sending A Data Protocol via TPDO

This is a configuration example for sending an object (data protocol
5003) on CAN ID 2AE (hex) every 20 ms on TPDO1. For this,
TPDO1 must be configured as follows:

Application Field
CANopen Applications > Sending A Data Protocol vi...

“Configure CAN interface 1 è Transmit PDO 1”.
9600 COB-ID 000002AE (hex) COB-ID set to 000002AE.
9602 Transmission 255 The number of required sync messages is set to 255.
type
9604 Event timer 20 ms Object is sent every 20 ms.
8962 Selected data 5003 Data protocol 5003 is used.

protocol
9609 Number of 0 No mapped object is configured

Mapped Objects
The data to be sent (Mapped Objects) may be provided on request

by configuring the Sync Message (parameter 9100 Ä p. 512) and
the Transmission Type (parameter 9602 Ä p. 518, 9612 Ä p. 518,
9622 Ä p. 518, 9632 Ä p. 518, or 12793 Ä p. 518) of a TPDO.
The unit is requested to send its data by sending a Sync Message.
The number of required Sync Messages is determined by the set‐
ting of the Transmission Type.
If the data is to be sent on request, Bit 30 of the Sync Message
(parameter 9100 Ä p. 512) must be configured to "0" and the CAN‐
open Master (parameter 8993 Ä p. 512) function must be config‐
ured to "Off".
Additional example The Transmission Type of TPDO 1 (parameter 9602 Ä p. 518) is

configured to "2" in the following example. This means that a mes‐
sage of the configured TPDO is sent by the unit after two Sync
Messages have been sent to the unit.
“Configure CAN interface 1 è Transmit PDO 1”.
9600 COB-ID 000002AE (hex) COB-ID set to 000002AE.
9602 Transmission 2 The number of required sync messages is set to 2.

type
9604 Event timer 20 ms Object is sent every 20 ms.
8962 Selected data 5003 Data protocol 5003 is used.

protocol
9609 Number of 0 No mapped object is configured

Mapped Objects
The recorded data shows that the data of the Mapped Object (in
this example Mux 5) is sent ( Ä Table 152 “Cyclical sending of
data - sync message request” on page 697) after sending the
Sync Message twice ( Ä Table 153 “Cyclical sending of data -
reply” on page 697).

Application Field
Modbus Applications
80 - -
Table 152: Cyclical sending of data - sync message request
No. Count ID (hex) Data (hex)
1 2 80 -
2 1 2AE 8B 13
Table 153: Cyclical sending of data - reply
6.4.3 Troubleshooting
General diagnosis
Error Possible diagnosis
Connected device (Phoenix I/O board) Are all LEDs at the expansion modules illuminated green (i.e. correctly connected)?
cannot be configured
Are all modules detected (i.e. no blinking expansion module)?
CAN interface 1 (guidance level) diag‐

nosis
Error Possible diagnosis
No data is sent by the Woodward con‐ Is the unit in operational mode (heartbeat - CAN ID 700 (hex) + Node-ID has the content
troller 5 (hex)?
Are the TPDOs correctly configured (CAN ID, mapping, parameter)?
No data is received by the Woodward con‐ Is the unit in operational mode (heartbeat - CAN ID 700 (hex) + Node-ID has the content
troller 5 (hex)?
Are the RPDOs correctly configured (CAN ID, mapping, parameter)?
No monitoring bit data is received on the Is the CAN bus connected correctly?
RPDO
Is the baud rate configured correctly?
Is the CAN ID assigned more than once?
Is the unit in operational mode? If not, start it via another device or put in NMT Master
No SDOs (configuration messages) are received by the unit
No SDOs (configuration messages) are Is the CAN ID assigned more than once?
received by the unit
Is the CAN ID 600 (hex) + Node-ID of the easYgen already used in a PDO (COB-ID)?
Are RPDOs or TPDOs higher then 580 (hex) or lower than 180 (hex) used?
6.5 Modbus Applications
Data Format(s)

Application Field
Modbus Applications > Remote Control > Remote Start/Stop, Shutdow...
6.5.1 Remote Control

The Woodward controller may be configured to perform start/stop/
Acknowledgment functions remotely through the Modbus protocol.
The required procedure is detailed in the following steps.
Please find remote control parameter 505

described at: Ä “ Remote control word 3”
on page 976. It works similar like 503 described
below.
The following descriptions refer to the remote con‐

trol parameter 503 as described in Ä Chapter
9.2.19 “Additional Data Identifier” on page 973.
It may be necessary to shift the address by 1
depending on the used PC software. In this case,
the address would be 504 for example.
Be sure to check both possibilities in case of
remote control problems.
503 Remote control word 1 0 to 65535 UNSIGNED 16
n Modbus address = 40000 + (Par. ID +1) = 40504

In order to issue a command, the respective bit of object 21F7
(hex), i.e. parameter 503, must be enabled. The following bits are
used for this:
n Bit 0 Start bit:
This bit activates the LogicsManager command variable 04.13
"Remote request" and enables a remote start.
n Bit 1 Stop bit:
This bit deactivates the LogicsManager command variable
04.13 "Remote request" and disables a remote start.
n Bit 4 Acknowledgment bit:
"Remote acknowledge". This bit must be set and reset twice to
acknowledge an alarm completely. The first rising edge disa‐
bles the horn and the second rising edge resets the alarm.
n Bit 9 Shutdown Command bit:
"Remote Shutdown-Status". With this function the engine is
immediately shut down without auxiliary service and cool down.
This works independent from beaker conditions.
The following Modscan32 screenshot (Fig. 320) shows the configu‐
rations made to remote control parameter 503. It is possible to set
the format to binary to view single bits using the "display options".

Application Field
Fig. 320: Modbus - remote control parameter 503
Example 1: Start Request

By double-clicking the address, a Write Register command may be
issued.
Fig. 321 shows how bit 0 is set using the ModScan32 Software.
Fig. 321: Modbus - write register -

start request
Example 2: Stop Request

issued.

stop request
Example 3: External Acknowledge

issued.

external acknowledge
Example 4: Shutdown Command

Application Field

issued.
Sample for Free alarm 1
This (remote) shutdown request can be taken by LogicsManager
equation 12230 to set Flag 1 (see Fig. 325). To perform an imme‐
diately shutdown, the free alarm has to be configured as alarm
Fig. 324: Modbus - write register - class F. Free alarm 1 configuration Fig. 326 shows how the Moni‐
shutdown command toring source LM 8120 Ä p. 471 “Free alarm 1” is set to Flag 1
and the Alarm class 8121 is set to Class F.
Fig. 325: LM 12230 Flag1
Fig. 326: LM Free-Alarms

Application Field
Modbus Applications > Remote Control > Setpoint Setting
6.5.1.2 Setpoint Setting

For a remote setting of the control setpoints, it is necessary to use
the interface setpoints instead of the internal setpoints.
For example, use data source 05.56 "Interface P setp [kW]" in Ana‐
logManager 5539 Ä p. 318/Ä p. 1069 (AM ActPower SP1 [kW]) to
transmit a load setpoint via interface. No password is required to
write this value.
Fig. 327: Setpoint source selection Screen shots beside show an exemplary configuration of the load
setpoint 1 source. All other setpoint sources are configured accord‐
ingly.
The interface setpoints may be set using the objects for active
power, power factor, frequency, and voltage (refer to Ä Chapter
9.2.19 “Additional Data Identifier” on page 973 for detailed infor‐
mation).
Fig. 328: Setpoint configuration
ID Parameter Setting range Unit Data type Data source
507 Active Power Setpoint 0 to 999999 1/10 kW INTEGER 32 05.56
508 Power Factor Setpoint -710 to 1000 to - INTEGER 16 05.12

710
509 Frequency Setpoint 0 to 7000 1/100 Hz UNSIGNED 16 05.53
510 Voltage Setpoint 50 to 650000 V UNSIGNED 32 05.59
Example 1: Active power interface The active power setpoint value must be written to object 21FB
setpoint (hex), i.e. parameter 507.
A power value of 50 kW = 500 (dec) = 01F4 (hex) is to be trans‐
mitted.
n Modbus length = 2 (INTEGER 32)
The high word must be written to the lower address and the low
word must be written to the higher address.

Application Field
To set the parameter address in ModScan32:
Fig. 329: Modscan32 at address 40508

1. Open the "Preset Multiple Registers" dialog by selecting
“Setup è Extended è Preset Regs” from the menu.
2. Select “OK” and enter the desired values.
Fig. 330: "Preset Multiple Registers"

dialog 1
3. Select “Update” to confirm the entered values.

ð The dialog closes and the values are changed.
Fig. 331: "Preset Multiple Registers"

dialog 2
Example 2: Power factor interface The power factor setpoint value must be written to object 21FC
A power factor of 1 = 1000 (dec) = 03E8 (hex) is to be trans‐
mitted.

Application Field

Analogous to Ä Further information on page 701 set the
parameter address as shown in (Fig. 333).
Example 3: Frequency interface The frequency setpoint value must be written to object 21FD
A frequency value of 50.00 Hz = 5000 (dec) = 1388 (hex) is to be
transmitted.

Example 4: Voltage interface set‐ The voltage setpoint value must be written to object 21FE (hex),
point i.e. parameter 510.
A voltage value of 400 V = 400 (dec) = 0190 (hex) is to be trans‐
mitted.
The high word must be written to the lower address and the low
word must be written to the higher address.

Application Field
Modbus Applications > Remote Control > Remotely Changing The Setp...

6.5.1.3 Remotely Changing The Setpoint

It is possible to remotely switch between pre-defined setpoints.
This is available for active power, power factor, frequency, and
voltage.
The bits 4 to 7 of parameter 504 ( Ä Chapter 9.2.19 “Additional
Data Identifier” on page 973) are carrying the settings and are
available in CAN bus and Modbus protocols. Each bit may be used
as input of the according setpoint switching LogicsManager.
504 Remote control word 2 Yes / No UNSIGNED 16
Table 154: Remote Control word “504” : switching between set‐

points
In order to switch to another setpoint, the respective bit of object

21F8 (hex), i.e. parameter 504, must be enabled. The following bits
are used for this:
Bit "x" of ... remotely requests to ... is available as LogicsManager command vari‐ ... uses LogicsManager "y" to switch
Parameter switch to able
504 ...
Bit 4 Voltage setpoint 2 04.37 "Remote voltage setpoint 2" 12920; 86.86 LM: "Setp. 2 voltage"
Bit 5 Frequency setpoint 2 04.38 "Remote frequency setpoint 2" 12918; 86.81 LM: "Setpoint 2 freq."
Bit 6 Power factor setpoint 2 04.39 "Remote PF setpoint 2" 12921: 86.84 LM: "Setp. 2
pwr.factor"
Bit 7 Active power setpoint 2 04.40 "Remote power setpoint 2" 12919; 86.82 LM: "Setp. 2 load"
12998; 86.67 LM: "Setp. 3 load"
12969; 86.75 LM: "Setp. 4 load"
Notes
This LogicsManager command vari‐
able can be used to switch to each
available load setpoint.

Application Field
Example
The active power setpoint 2 is to be enabled. Therefore LM 12919
is prepared using 04.40 (see beside).
The switching signal than comes remotely e.g. as described
below:
Fig. 336: Remotely switch Setp. 2
load
To set the bits in ModScan32:
Fig. 337: ModScan32 single bit view

1. Using the "display options" set the format to binary to view
single bits (Fig. 337).

Application Field
2. Double-click the address to issue a Write Register com‐

mand.
ð Fig. 338 shows how bit 7 is set to enable the active
power setpoint 2.
Fig. 338: Active power setpoint
Fig. 339 shows how bit 6 would be set to enable the

power factor setpoint 2.
Fig. 339: Power factor setpoint
Fig. 340 shows how bit 5 would be set to enable the fre‐
quency setpoint 2.
Fig. 340: Frequency setpoint
Fig. 341 shows how bit 4 would be set to enable the

voltage setpoint 2.
Additionally/alternatively to remotely changing the

control setpoints, it is possible to use "remote" set‐
points (values) defined via interface instead of the
Fig. 341: Voltage setpoint internal setpoints as data source in the respective
controller. For example, use data source "05.53
Interface f setp [Hz]" instead of "05.51 Internal f
setp1 [Hz]" in AnalogManager 5518 Ä p. 311/
Ä p. 1068 (Freq. setpoint 1) to transmit a fre‐
quency setpoint via interface.

Application Field
Modbus Applications > Changing Parameter Settings > Parameter Setting
6.5.2 Changing Parameter Settings

6.5.2.1 Parameter Setting
The example tables below are excerpts. Refer to

the following chapters for the complete parameter
lists:
– Ä Chapter 4.3.4 “Enter Password”
on page 165
– Ä Chapter 4.6 “Configure Measurement”
on page 495
Be sure to enter the password for the code level

that is needed to get access for changing param‐
eter settings via the preferred interface.
The new entered value must comply with the

parameter setting range when changing the
parameter setting.
Example 1: Addressing the generator ID Parameter Setting range Data type

rated voltage
1766 Generator rated voltage 50 to 650000 V UNSIGNED 32
Example n Modbus address = 40000 + (Par. ID + 1) = 41767


Set the configuration to address parameter 1766 as shown in
(Fig. 342).
Example 2: Addressing the generator ID Parameter Setting range Data type

voltage measuring
1851 Generator voltage measuring 3Ph 4W UNSIGNED 16
3Ph 3W
1Ph 2W
1Ph 3W
Example n Modbus address = 40000 + (Par. ID + 1) = 41852


Application Field
Modbus Applications > Changing Parameter Settings > Configuration Of LogicsMan...
If the setting range contains a list of parameter set‐

tings like in this example, the parameter settings
are numbered and start with 0 for the first param‐
eter setting. The number corresponding with the
respective parameter setting must be configured.

Set the configuration to address parameter 1851 as shown in
(Fig. 343).
ð The parameter is configured to "3Ph 4W".
6.5.2.2 Configuration Of LogicsManager Functions

Next to HMI and ToolKit, LogicsManager can also be configured
via Modbus.
n The complete LogicsManager instruction set is available for
Modbus control.
n Hex code equivalents are defined for all LogicsManager set‐
tings.
n The Modbus definition for a LogicsManager equation consists
of 7 data words following a well defined sequence.
Word 0 Word 1 Word 2 Word 3 Word 4 Word 5 Word 6
Delay ON Delay OFF Logic equation 1 Logic equation 2 Command 1 Command 2 Command 3
Table 155: 7 words Modbus message
To send a LogicsManager function via Modbus follow these steps:

1. Define your LogicsManager equation
2. Describe the LogicsManager equation as "command chain"
in hex code
3. Send the message via Modbus
Describe the LogicsManager equation The LogicsManager screens below show parts of the command
as "command chain" in hex code (step chain. How to generate hex code words is described for each part
2) of the Modbus message.

Application Field
Word 0 and word 1 contain the hex code of the Delay times but in
the reverse order of double-byte words, i.e. low byte before high
byte.
Fig. 344: LogicsManager command

chain words 0 and 1
Words 4, 5, and 6 contain the hex codes of the respective com‐

mand variable ID's decimal value but in the reverse order of
double-byte words, i.e. low byte before high byte.
The command variable prefix e.g., "04.13" is the

number of the command variable not it's ID.
Refer to Ä Chapter 9.3.2 “Logical Command Vari‐
ables” on page 988 for the command variable
IDs.
chain words 4, 5, and 6
Words 2 and 3 contain a sequence of nibbles each representing a

sign or operator of the equation.
The Data words table below shows the sequence how to arrange
the LogicsManager setting that build the command chain.
Word 2 Word 3
Sign 1 Oper‐ Sign 2 Oper‐ Sign 3 not not not

ator 1 ator 2 used used used
chain words 2 and 3 Table 156: Data words 2 and 3 - details of the logic equations
Please find the hex code equivalents on the table below:
Signs Operators
"NOT" 0 "AND" 0
"—" 1 "NAND" 1
"TRUE" 2 "OR" 2
"FALSE" 3 "NOR" 3
"XOR" 4
"NOT-XOR" 5
Table 157: Hex code equivalents of the logic equations' nibbles
The hex code of words 2 and 3 is taken "as is" ¾

don't swap high byte an d low byte.

Application Field
Write the Modbus message (step 3)

It may be necessary to shift the address by 1
depending on the software you use for Modbus
communication.
Copy the complete message of 7 words to the address

[parameter number +1] in one step.
low high low high Sign Oper‐ Sign Oper‐ Sign 0x00 0x00 0x00 low high low high low high
byte byte byte byte 1 ator 1 2 ator 2 3 byte byte byte byte byte byte
Table 158: 7 words Modbus message in detail
Example
Fig. 347: LogicsManager command chain sample 12120
3.00 sec 10.00 sec ¾ Or False Or ¾ -/- -/- -/- No. 09.02 No. 00.08 No. 04.13
ID = ID = ID =
520 dec, 7 dec, 0007 251 dec,
0208 hex hex 00FB hex
low high low high Sign Oper‐ Sign Oper‐ Sign 0x00 0x00 0x00 low high low high low high
byte byte byte byte 1 ator 1 2 ator 2 3 byte byte byte byte byte byte
2C 01 E8 03 1 2 3 2 1 0 0 0 08 02 07 00 FB 00
Table 159: 7 words Modbus message sample 12120 in detail
The Modbus message for the LogicsManager equation used for

description above is 2C01 / E803 / 1232 / 1000 / 0802 / 0700 /
FB00 (hex).

Application Field
6.5.2.3 Configuration Of LogicsManager Functions For Remote Access

6.5.2.3.1 Basic remote control functions
The following chapters describe how to parametrize the Logi‐
csManager via Modbus for the following basic remote control func‐
tions:
n Change to AUTOMATIC mode: 12510 Operat. mode AUTO
n Remote request start/stop: 12120 Start req. in AUTO
n Remote acknowledge: 12490 Ext. acknowledge
n Remote shutdown: 11669 Remote Shutdown-status
n Start without load: 12540 Start w/o load
6.5.2.3.2 Configuration of the LogicsManager "Operation mode AUTO"
To fix the operating mode use the LogicsManager

function 86.16 "Operat. mode AUTO" (parameter
10715 Ä p. 1017/Ä p. 1028).
The operating mode AUTO LogicsManager function (parameter

12510 Ä p. 338/Ä p. 1037) can be configured in two different
ways:
n 1. Automatic operating mode is always enabled
n 2. Automatic operating mode is enabled via discrete input

a detailed configuration of the LogicsManager via
HMI or ToolKit.
Example
Fig. 348: LogicsManager function sample 12510

To configure the "Operat. mode AUTO" LogicsManager function
(parameter 12510 Ä p. 338/Ä p. 1037) as indicated in (Fig. 348)
the following Modbus message must be sent to the easYgen:
Delay ON Delay OFF Logic equation 1* Logic equation 2* Command Command Command
1 2 3
Sig Oper‐ Sign Oper‐ Sig -/- -/- -/-
n1 ator 1 2 ator 2 n 3

Application Field
0.00 sec 0.00 sec ¾ And True And Tru 00 00 00 No. 09.09 No. 96.01 No. 96.01
e ID = ID = ID =
527 dec 0 dec 0 dec
0000 (hex) 0000 (hex) 1 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 020F (hex) 0000 (hex) 0000 (hex)
low high low high "as is" "as is" low high low high low high
byt byte byt byte byt byte byt byte byt byte
e e e e e
0000 (hex) 0000 (hex) 1020 (hex) 2000 (hex) 0F02 (hex) 0000 (hex) 0000 (hex)
* see Ä Table 157 “Hex code equivalents of the

logic equations' nibbles” on page 709 for reference

Copy the complete message of 7 words to address 12511 ff
(12510+1) in one step.
This is shown in (Fig. 349) using the ModScan32 software.
If an shutdown alarm of alarm class C through F

occurs in AUTOMATIC operating mode, the control
does not return to STOP operating mode if the
alarm is cleared after acknowledgment. This
means that a restart is initiated.
6.5.2.3.3 Configuration Of Remote Start/Stop, Shutdown, And Acknowledgment

a detailed configuration of the LogicsManager via
HMI or ToolKit.
The easYgen may start, stop, shut down, or acknowledge alarms

with CAN/Modbus. Therefore, two logical command variables
(04.13 and 04.14) have to be configured with the LogicsManager.
03.40 can handle Remote shutdown only.

Application Field
6.5.2.3.4 Configuration Of LogicsManager Function "Start Request in AUTO"

The "Start req. in AUTO" LogicsManager function (parameter
12120 Ä p. 340/Ä p. 1035) can be configured in a way that a start
request in AUTOMATIC operating mode is enabled as soon as a
remote request is issued.
Refer to Ä Chapter 6.3.5 “Performing Remote Start/Stop And
Acknowledgment” on page 615 for a detailed configuration of the
LogicsManager via HMI or ToolKit.
The remote request may be enabled by setting bit 0 (start) of the
remote control word 503 to HIGH and may be disabled by setting
bit 1 (stop) of the remote control word 503 to HIGH (refer to
Ä Chapter 9.2.19 “Additional Data Identifier” on page 973).
Example

To configure the "Start req. in AUTO" LogicsManager function
1 2 3
3.00 sec 10.00 sec ¾ Or False Or ¾ 00 00 00 No. 09.02 No. 96.08 No. 04.13
ID = ID = ID =
520 dec 7 dec 251 dec
012c (hex) 03E8 (hex) 1 2 3 2 1 0 0 0 0208 (hex) 0007 (hex) 00FB (hex)

Application Field
e e e e e
2C01 (hex) E803 (hex) 1232 (hex) 1000 (hex) 0802 (hex) 0700 (hex) FB00 (hex)

6.5.2.3.5 Configuration Of LogicsManager Function "External Acknowledge"

The "Ext. acknowledge" LogicsManager function (parameter
12490 Ä p. 470/Ä p. 1037) can be configured in a way that an
external acknowledgment is performed as soon as the remote
acknowledge signal is enabled.
External acknowledge may be enabled by setting bit 4 (external
acknowledge) of the remote control word 503 to HIGH (refer to
Ä Chapter 9.2.19 “Additional Data Identifier” on page 973).
Example

Application Field
To configure the "External acknowledge" LogicsManager function

1 2 3
0.00 sec 0.00 sec ¾ Or ¾ Or Fal 00 00 00 No. 09.05 No. 04.14 No. 96.01
se ID = ID = ID =
523 dec 252 dec 0 dec
0000 (hex) 0000 (hex) 1 2 1 2 3 0 0 0 020B (hex) 00FC (hex) 0000 (hex)
e e e e e
0000 (hex) 0000 (hex) 1212 (hex) 3000 (hex) 0B02 (hex) FC00 (hex) 0000 (hex)

6.5.2.3.6 Configuration Of LogicsManager Function "Start w/o Load"

The Start w/o load LogicsManager function (parameter
12540 Ä p. 340/Ä p. 1037/Ä p. 1037) can be configured in a way
that it is always enabled.

Application Field
Example

To configure the "Start w/o Load" LogicsManager function (param‐
eter ID 12540 Ä p. 340/Ä p. 1037/Ä p. 1037) as indicated in
(Fig. 354) the following Modbus message must be sent to the
easYgen:
1 2 3
0.00 sec 0.00 sec Fal And True And Tru 00 00 00 No. 00.01 No. 96.01 No. 96.01
se e ID = ID = ID =
0 dec 0 dec 0 dec
0000 (hex) 0000 (hex) 3 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 0000 (hex) 0000 (hex) 0000 (hex)
e e e e e
0000 (hex) 0000 (hex) 3020 (hex) 2000 (hex) 0000 (hex) 0000 (hex) 0000 (hex)


Application Field
Modbus Applications > Changing Parameter Settings > Remotely Clearing The Even...
6.5.2.4 Remotely Acknowledge Single Alarm Messages

Single alarm messages can be acknowledged remotely through
the Modbus by sending the respective parameter ID of the alarm to
be acknowledged on parameter 522. The required procedure is
detailed in the following steps.
522 Reset alarm list 0 to 65535 UNSIGNED 16
The parameter ID of the alarm to be acknowledged must be written

to object 220A (hex), i.e. parameter 522.
Example A "Mains undervoltage 1" alarm (ID 3012) shall be acknowledged

(refer to Ä Chapter 9.5.4.2 “Alarm Messages” on page 1084).
Fig. 356: ModScan32 at address 40523

1. Use the "display options" to set the format to decimal view.
mand.
ð Fig. 357 shows how the parameter ID of the alarm to be
acknowledged is written using the ModScan32 Software.
Fig. 357: Write register - acknowledge

alarm message
6.5.2.5 Remotely Clearing The Event History

The event history can be cleared remotely through the Modbus.
The required procedure is detailed in the following steps.
1706 Clear eventlog Yes / No UNSIGNED 16
In order to clear the event history, bit 0 of object 26AA (hex), i.e.
parameter 1706, must be enabled.

Application Field
Modbus Applications > Changing Parameter Settings > Remotely Resetting The Def...
Remotely clearing event history n Modbus address = 40000 + (Par. ID + 1) = 41707


1. Use the "display options" to set the value format to binary.
2. Double-click the address to issue a Write Register
command.
ð Fig. 359 shows how bit 0 is enabled using the Mod‐
Scan32 Software.
Fig. 359: Write register - clear

event history
6.5.2.6 Remotely Resetting The Default Values
10417 Factory settings Yes / No UNSIGNED 16
1701 Reset factory default Yes / No UNSIGNED 16

values
In order to enable the resetting procedure, parameter 10417 must

be enabled.
Example 1 (enable resetting) The resetting procedure shall be enabled.


Application Field
Modbus Applications > Changing Parameter Settings > Remotely Resetting The Def...

1. Use the "display options" to set the value format to decimal.
mand.
ð Fig. 361 shows how the parameter is enabled using the
ModScan32 Software. The value must be set to "1" to
enable the parameter.
Fig. 361: Write register - enable the

resetting procedure
Example 2 (reset to default) In order to reset the default values, parameter 1701 Ä p. 181 must
be enabled.
CAUTION!
Set factory default settings causes easYgen power
cycle!
Don't run 1701 Ä p. 181 “Set factory default
values” during controlling a genset because it
causes a power cycle of the easYgen control.
The default values shall be reset.


Application Field
Modbus Applications > Exception Responses

1. Use the "display options" to set the value format to decimal.
mand.
ð Fig. 363 shows how the parameter is enabled using the
ModScan32 Software. The value must be set to "1" to
enable the parameter.
Fig. 363: Write register - resetting the

default values
6.5.3 Exception Responses

The Modbus protocol has multiple exception responses to show
that a request could not be executed. Exception responses can be
recognized if the response telegram contains the request function
code with an offset of 128 (0x80 hex).
Ä Table 160 “Modbus - exception responses” on page 720
explains possible reasons for an exception response that occurred.
Modbus exception responses
Code Name Reason
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION The sent request function code is not supported by the Modbus protocol.
02 ILLEGAL ADDRESS Permission to read/write the parameter is denied.

The amount of requested registers is wrong to read/write this registers.
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE The data value exceeds the min. and max. limitations of the parameter
upon a write request.
There is no parameter on the requested address.
Table 160: Modbus - exception responses

Interfaces And Protocols
Interfaces Overview
7 Interfaces And Protocols

7.1 Interfaces Overview
Interfaces and protocols The easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2 provide the following inter‐
faces, which are supporting different protocols.


CAN Interfaces > CAN Interface 2 (Engine le...
Auxiliary excitation D+ and MPU input (speed

input) are connected via terminals.
External interfaces easYgen-3400XT-P1/3500XT-P1(-LT) (Package P1)
External discrete inputs / outputs via CANopen (maximum) 32 / 32
External analog inputs / outputs via CANopen (maximum) 16 / 4
7.2 CAN Interfaces

7.2.1 CAN Interface 1 (Guidance level)
The CAN interface 1 is a freely configurable CANopen interface
with 5 RPDOs (receive messages), 5 TPDOs (send messages)
and 4 additional Server SDOs.
Fig. 366: CAN interface 1
7.2.2 CAN Interface 2 (Engine level)

The CAN interface 2 supports the CANopen and J1939 protocol
simultaneously. It supports the connection of a wide range of
engine control units (ECUs) and J1939 analog input extension
modules, which comply with the J1939 standard (e.g. Axiomatic).
CANopen extension modules are also supported.

CAN Interfaces > CAN Interface 3 (System le...

CAN interface 2 is pre-configured for several expansion units.
These include the I/O expansion boards Woodward IKD 1, several
combinations of the expansion boards of the Phoenix Inline Mod‐
ular (IL) series, and the support of Wago terminals.
It is possible to connect several combinations of up to four Wood‐
ward IKD 1s and/or Phoenix Inline Modular (IL) modules and/or
WAGO modules with up to
n 32 discrete inputs/outputs, 16 analog inputs, and 4 analog out‐

puts.
n : 16 discrete inputs/outputs.
7.2.3 CAN Interface 3 (System level)

The CAN interface 3 is used for load sharing and the LS-5 commu‐
nication.

Serial Interfaces > RS-485 Interface (Serial I...
7.3 Ethernet Interfaces

General notes The Ethernet network provides a fast communication capability to
different devices, like remote panel, PLC or SCADA systems. The
common protocol Modbus TCP is there for the preferred communi‐
cation protocol. Additionally the Ethernet connection supports the
Woodward protocol Servlink for ToolKit and other Woodward own
monitoring tools (like remote panel and SCADA visualization tool).
At least the easYgen provides a UDP protocol for system relevant
and time discrete information exchange.
The actual IP address in Network A, subnet mask and gateway IP
address can be viewed under Next Page (Status Menu) / Diag‐
nostic / Interfaces / Ethernet / Ethernet A.
Fig. 369: Ethernet Network A screen
The actual IP address in Network B and the subnet mask can be

Ethernet / Ethernet B.
Fig. 370: Ethernet Network B screen
The actual IP address in Network C and the subnet mask can be

Ethernet / Ethernet C.
Fig. 371: Ethernet Network C screen
7.4 Serial Interfaces

7.4.1 RS-485 Interface (Serial Interface 2)
A freely configurable RS-485 Modbus RTU Slave interface is pro‐
vided to add PLC connectivity. It is also possible to configure the
unit, visualize measured data and alarm messages, and control the
unit remotely.

CANopen Protocol
Fig. 372: RS-485 interface
7.4.2 USB interface (USB 2.0, slave)
Service port
The USB interface follows the USB 2.0 standard
but is - as a service port - reserved for ToolKit and
special Woodward usage.
7.5 CANopen Protocol

CANopen is a communication protocol and device profile specifica‐
tion for embedded systems used in automation. The CANopen
standard consists of an addressing scheme, several small commu‐
nication protocols and an application layer defined by a device pro‐
file. The communication protocols have support for network man‐
agement, device monitoring and communication between nodes,
including a simple transport layer for message segmentation/de-
segmentation.
Protocol description If a data protocol is used, a CAN message looks like this:
Byte 0 Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7
MUX Data byte Data byte Data byte Data byte Data byte Data byte Internal
The MUX byte is counted up, the meaning of the data byte
changes according to the value of the MUX byte.
In the protocol tables is listed which parameter at which MUX on
which position is transmitted. The meaning of the parameter can
be taken by means of the number of the parameter description (For
details refer to Ä “The following data protocols are implemented to
be used” on page 769).
Example
MUX Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7
1 118 147 Internal
In MUX 1 (byte 0 has got value 1) the value of parameter 118 is

included in the byte 1 up to byte 4 (mains voltage 1-2). In byte 6
up to byte 6 the value of parameter 147 is included (mains fre‐
quency). Byte 7 includes internal definitions and can be ignored.
Data format "Unsigned Integer" UNSIGNED type data has positive integers as values. The range is
between 0 and 2n-1. The data is shown by the bit sequence of
length n.

CANopen Protocol
n Bit sequence:
b = b0 to b–1
n Value shown:
UNSIGNEDn(b) = b–1 * 2–1 + ... + b1 * 21 + b0 * 20
Please note that the bit sequence starts on the left

with the least significant byte.
Example: Value 266 = 10A hex of type
UNSIGNED16 is transmitted on the bus in two
octets, first 0A hex and then 01 hex.
The following UNSIGNED data types are transmitted as follows:
Octet Number 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
UNSIGNED8 b7 to b0
UNSIGNED16 b7 to b0 b15 to b8
UNSIGNED24 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16
UNSIGNED32 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24
UNSIGNED40 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24 b39 to b32
UNSIGNED48 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24 b39 to b32 b47 to b40
UNSIGNED56 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24 b39 to b32 b47 to b40 b55 to b48
UNSIGNED64 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24 b39 to b32 b47 to b40 b55 to b48 b63 to b56
Table 161: Transfer syntax for data type UNSIGNEDn
Data format "Signed Integer" SIGNED type data has integers as values. The range is between 0
and 2–1. The data is shown by the bit sequence of length n.
n Bit sequence:
b = b0 to b–1
n Value shown:
SIGNEDn(b) = b–2 * 2–2 + ... + b1 * 21 + b0 * 20
if b–1 = 0
n And with two’s complement:
SIGNEDn(b) = SIGNEDn(^b)-1
if b–1 = 1

J1939 Protocol
Please note that the bit sequence starts on the left

with the least significant byte.
Example: The value -266 = FEF6 hex of type
SIGNED16 is transmitted in two octets, first F6 hex
and then FE hex.
Octet Number 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
SIGNED8 b7 to b0
SIGNED16 b7 to b0 b15 to b8
SIGNED24 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16
SIGNED32 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24
SIGNED40 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24 b39 to b32
SIGNED48 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24 b39 to b32 b47 to b40
SIGNED56 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24 b39 to b32 b47 to b40 b55 to b48
SIGNED64 b7 to b0 b15 to b8 b23 to b16 b31 to b24 b39 to b32 b47 to b40 b55 to b48 b63 to b56
Table 162: Transfer syntax for data type INTEGER
7.6 J1939 Protocol

The J1939 protocol is using an extended CAN identifier and can be
used via CAN bus interface parallel to the CANopen protocol and
ToolKit. All devices connected to the CAN bus interface must use
the same baud rate independent of the selected protocol.
Most of the J1939 data is standardized and has a SPN (Suspect
Parameter Number), which describes the data (e.g. SPN 110 is
representing the value of the current “Engine Coolant Tempera‐
ture”). The SPNs are packed in different PGNs (Parameter Group
Numbers). The PGN is a part of the CAN ID and is representing
one CAN message (e.g. SPN 110 is packed in PGN 65263). J1939
defines several hundred SPNs. However, only a small part is
important for most of the applications. For this reason only a part of
the SPNs is supported by the J1939 devices and by the easYgen.
'SAE J1939' also allows manufacturer-specific data areas, so
called proprietary data, which are not defined in the standard. In
most cases, these proprietary data is used for remote control pur‐
poses (like start/stop, speed setpoint) of ECUs (Engine Control
Unit). Some manufacturers also issue specific error messages
using manufacturer-specific data. Besides important standardized
data, the easYgen is also supporting some proprietary data for the
different ECUs. Please refer to Ä Chapter 7.6.2 “Supported J1939
ECUs & Remote Control Messages” on page 732 for details.

J1939 Protocol > Displayed Messages (Visual...
7.6.1 Displayed Messages (Visualization)

Visualization messages like "Engine Coolant Temperature" of a
device (for example an ECU) are received on the CAN bus
according to J1939 protocol and are shown on the device display
and the ToolKit configuration software. In most cases the visualiza‐
tion works with standard messages.
The easYgen is able to display all values listed in the table
Ä “Standard visualization messages” on page 728 if they are sup‐
ported by the connected device as well.
If a message is used but its sensor/signal is dam‐

aged HMI and ToolKit display [ERROR].
Unused messages/SPN are monitored by ToolKit
with [Missing] but HMI doesn't display unused
messages/SPN (neither message/SPN nor status).
Diagnostic trouble codes (DM1/DM2) In the J1939 status screen the first 10 active alarm messages
(Active Diagnostic Trouble Codes - DM1) and the first 10 unac‐
knowledged alarm messages (Previously Active Diagnostic
Trouble Codes - DM2) with text, SPN, FMI, and OC are displayed.
Additionally, the state of the lamps (amber/red) is always dis‐
played.
n SPN (= Suspect Parameter Number) indicates the measured
value that the alarm code is referring (e.g. SPN = 100 corre‐
sponds to oil pressure).
n FMI (= Failure Mode Indicator) specifies the alarm more pre‐
cisely (e.g. FMI = 3 means: value is above predefined limits)
n OC (Occurrence Count) indicates how often an alarm occurred.
The indication of fault texts for DM1 and the entry

in the respective alarm list is only possible for
SPNs which are listed in the SPN list (refer to
Ä “Standard visualization messages”
on page 728)!
For SPNs without text: Refer to the J1939 specifi‐
cation for a list of all SPNs.
Standard visualization messages

In case of ...
– ... defective sensor: "Error" is displayed.
– ... missing sensor: "Missing" is displayed.
SPN PGN Description Resol. Data range J1939 Index
38 65276 Fuel level 2 0.1 % 0 to 100 % 12017
52 65262 Engine intercooler temperature 1 °C -40 to 210 °C 15217
91 61443 Throttle position 0.1 % 0 to 100 % 15207
92 61443 Load at current speed 1% 0 to 250 % 15208

94 65263 Fuel delivery pressure 1 kPa 0 to 1000 kPa 15218
95 65276 Fuel filter difference pressure 1 kPa 0 to 500 kPa 15219
96 65276 Fuel level 1 0.1 % 0 to 100 % 12016
98 65263 Engine oil level 0.1 % 0 to 100 % 15210
100 65263 Engine oil pressure 1 kPa 0 to 1000 kPa 15205
101 65263 Crankcase pressure 1 kPa -250 to 251 kPa 15220
102 65270 Boost pressure 1 kPa 0 to 500 kPa 15214
105 65270 Intake manifold temperature 1 °C -40 to 210 °C 15215
106 65270 Turbo air inlet pressure 1 kPa 0 to 500 kPa 15221
107 65270 Air filter 1 difference pressure 0.01 kPa 0 to 12.5 kPa 15222
108 65269 Barometric pressure 0.1 kPa 0 to 125 kPa 15212
109 65263 Coolant pressure 1 kPa 0 to 500 kPa 15223
110 65262 Engine coolant temperature 1 °C -40 to 210 °C 15202
111 65263 Coolant level 0.1 % 0 to 100 % 15206
127 65272 Transmission oil pressure 1 kPa 0 to 4000 kPa 15224
157 65243 Fuel rail pressure 0.1 MPa 0 to 251 Mpa 15225
158 65271 Battery potential switched 0.1 V 0 to 3212.75 V 15312
171 65269 Ambient air temperature 0.1 °C -273 to 1735 °C 15226
172 65269 Air inlet temperature 1 °C -40 to 210 °C 15213
173 65270 Exhaust gas temperature 0.1 °C -273 to 1735 °C 15216
174 65262 Fuel temperature 1 °C -40 to 210 °C 15203
175 65262 Engine oil temperature 0.1 °C -273 to 1735 °C 15309
176 65262 Turbo oil temperature 0.1 °C -273 to 1735 °C 15227
177 65272 Transmission oil temperature 0.1 °C -273 to 1735 °C 15228
183 65266 Fuel rate 0.1 l/h 0 to 3212.75 l/h 15307
190 61444 Engine speed 1 rpm 0 to 8031.875 rpm 15308
247 65253 Total engine hours1 1h 0 to 210554060 h 15201
250 65257 Total fuel used 0.5 l 0 to 2105540608 l 15319
441 65164 Auxiliary temperature 1 1 °C -40 to 210 °C 15229
442 65164 Auxiliary temperature 2 1 °C -40 to 210 °C 15230
513 61444 Actual engine torque 1% -125 to 125 % 15209
1081 65284 Engine Wait To Start Lamp
1122 65191 Alternator bearing 1 temperature 1 °C -40 to 210 °C 15231
1123 65191 Alternator bearing 2 temperature 1 °C -40 to 210 °C 15232
1124 65191 Alternator winding 1 temperature 1 °C -40 to 210 °C 15233
1131 65189 Intake manifold 2 temperature 1 °C -40 to 210 °C 15236
1134 65262 Engine thermostat 0.1 % 0 to 100 % 15239
1135 65188 Engine oil temperature 2 0.1 °C -273 to 1735 °C 15240

1136 65188 Engine ECU temperature 0.1 °C -273 to 1735 °C 15241
1137 65187 Exhaust gas port 1 temperature 0.1 °C -273 to 1735 °C 15242
1157 65182 Main bearing 1 temperature 0.1 °C -273 to 1735 °C 15262
1172 65178 Turbo 1 compressor inlet temperature 0.1 °C -273 to 1735 °C 15273
1176 65177 Turbo 1 compressor inlet pressure 1 kPa -250 to 251 kPa 15277
1180 65176 Turbo 1 inlet temperature 0.1 °C -273 to 1735 °C 15281

1184 65175 Turbo 1 outlet temperature 0.1 °C -273 to 1735 °C 15285
1203 65172 Engine auxiliary coolant pressure 1 kPa 0 to 1000 kPa 15289
1208 65170 Pre-filter oil pressure 1 kPa 0 to 1000 kPa 15290
1212 65172 Engine auxiliary coolant temperature 1 °C -40 to 210 °C 15291
1382 65130 Fuel filter difference pressure 1 kPa 0 to 500 kPa 15292
1761 65110 Aftertreatment 1 Exhaust Tank1 Level 0.1% 0 to 100% 15313
1800 65104 Battery 1 temperature 1 °C -40 to 210 °C 15293
1801 65104 Battery 2 temperature 1 °C -40 to 210 °C 15294
2433 65031 Right exhaust gas temperature 0.1 °C -273 to 1735 °C 15297
2434 65031 Left exhaust gas temperature 0.1 °C -273 to 1735 °C 15298
2629 64979 Turbo 1 compr. outlet tmp. 0.1 °C -273 to 1736 °C 15310
3031 65110 Aftertreatment 1 Exhaust Tank1 Temperature 1 °C -40 to 210 °C 15314
3644 64914 Engine derate request 0.1% 0 to 100% 15311
3719 6489 DPF 1 Soot Load 1% 0 to 250 % 12018
3720 64891 DPF 1 Ash Load 1% 0 to 250 % 12019
3251 64946 DPF Differential press. 0.1 kPa 0 to 6,425.5 kPa 15550
4151 64851 Exhaust Gas Temp. Avr. 0.1 °C -273 to 1734 °C 12807
4152 64851 Exh. Gas Temp. Avr. B2 0.1 °C -273 to 1734 °C 12812
4153 64851 Exh. Gas Temp. Avr. B1 0.1 °C -273 to 1734 °C 12809
4367 64829 Aftertreatment 1 Exhaust Tank2 Level 0.1% 0 to 100% 15315
4368 64829 Aftertreatment 1 Exhaust Tank2 Temperature 1 °C -40 to 210 °C 15316
1 If the total engine hours sent by the ECU exceed
419,000 hrs, the display in the unit is not correct

anymore
Data transmission engine control unit n If the sent values exceed the limits of the specification, the dis‐
(ECU) played value is not defined.
n If a value of the ECU is not sent or sent as not available or
defective, the value will be displayed as indicated in the table
before.
Special Deutz EMR2/Volvo EDC4 Suspect parameter Parameter group number Description
messages number
Engine stop 65301 (FF15h) 0 to 250
Please refer to the ECU manual for the engine specific stop codes.

J1939 Protocol > Supported J1939 ECUs & Rem...
Special Scania S6 messages

Suspect parameter Parameter group Description Display in unit Display in ToolKit
number number
DLN2-Proprietary 65409 (FF81h) Assessed messages:
n Low engine oil level No No
n High engine oil level Missing Missing
n Low oil pressure Yes Yes
n High coolant temperature
7.6.2 Supported J1939 ECUs & Remote Control Messages

The following table lists all ECUs, which are supported by the
easYgen beyond the J1939 standard with the appropriate settings.
We recommend device type (parameter 15102 Ä p. 527)
"Standard" for all ECUs, which are not listed here. All other param‐
eters shall be clarified with the ECU manufacturer.
ECU Device type J1939 own Engine con‐ SPN version Comment
address trol address
(15102) (15103)
(15106) (15107)
Standard ECUs Standard N/A N/A N/A Please refer to Ä Chapter 7.6.3 “Device
Type Standard” on page 735 for more
details.
Woodward EGS EGS Woodward 234 0 N/A
MTU ADEC ECU7 ADEC ECU7 MTU 1 128 N/A The easYgen is connected with the SAM
via CAN. The SAM communicates with the
ADEC using an own bus.
Deutz EMR2 EMR2 Deutz 3 0 Version 1

Volvo EDC4
Deutz EMR3 Standard 3 0 N/A

Deutz EMR4
(EDC 17)
Volvo EMS2 EMS2 Volvo 17 0 N/A The rated speed of the EMS1 and EDC3
cannot be switched via the easYgen.
Volvo EMS1
Volvo EDC3
Scania S6 S6 Scania 39 0 N/A
MAN MFR/EDC7 MFR/EDC7 MAN 253 39 N/A The easYgen is connected with the MFR
via CAN. The MFR communicates with the
EDC7 using an own bus.
SISU EEM2/3 EEM SISU N/A 0 / (1) N/A
Cummins Cummins 220 0 N/A Notes

Some Cummins setups need a special
value for “Governor Gain” otherwise they
will shut down. In this cases please set the
“Governor Gain” of the ECU to “Internal”
instead of “J1939” .
MTU ADEC ECU8/ ADEC ECU8 MTU 234 0 N/A The easYgen is connected with the MTU
ECU9 system: ADEC ECU8 & SmartConnect or
ADEC ECU9.

ECU Device type J1939 own Engine con‐ SPN version Comment
address trol address
(15102) (15103)
(15106) (15107)
ECU file N/A This is to support ECUs which are not rep‐
resented by the selection. Enter file name
with parameter 15167 “ECU file name”
Hatz EDC 17 3 0 N/A
The addresses listed here are only valid, if the

ECU is not configured to other values. In case of
doubt, please check the corresponding settings of
the ECU with the service tool.
The following data is only transmitted to the corresponding ECU, if

parameter "ECU remote controlled" is configured to "On", and
parameter "Device type" is configured to one of the available ECU
modes (if "Off" is configured, no J1939 remote control messages
will be sent as well).
Please note that some ECU manufacturers require

that this functionality must be enabled first. In
some cases, this is only possible by the manufac‐
turer. Please consider this when ordering the ECU.

Supported ECUs
1 - Woodward EGS
2 - Scania S6
3 - Deutz EMR2/EMR3 / Volvo EDC4
4 - Volvo EMS2
5 - Volvo EMS1/EDC3
6 - MTU ADEC ECU7
7 - MAN MFR/EDC7
8 - Standard
9 - SISU EEM 2/3
10 - Cummins
11 - MTU ADEC ECU8/ECU9
12 - Hatz EDC 17
Remote Availability with supported ECU number ... Comment

control
parameter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Engine No Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No / Yes Yes Yes If an engine start command is
Start Yes initiated by the easYgen, this
information is transmitted in the
form of a J1939 message bit to
an ECU. If ignition speed is
reached, this bit will be reset
(LogicsManager command vari‐
able 03.02. "Starter").
Engine Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No / Yes Yes Yes This J1939 bit information is
Stop Yes set, if a "Stop" command in
automatic or manual mode is
present in the easYgen. The
"Stop" bit information remains
set, until ignition speed is fallen
below. After ignition speed has
been fallen below, the "Stop"
bit will be reset (LogicsManager
command variable 03.27. "Stop
solenoid").
Droop Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes / Yes No No This J1939 bit information is
mode Yes set, if a "Start" command in
automatic or manual mode is
initiated by the easYgen. The
bit remains set until the engine
has been stopped.
Notes
This message is only sent, if
the LogicsManager output
86.25 "Frequency droop active"
is TRUE.
Idle Mode No Yes No1 Yes Yes No No1 No1 No / No Yes Yes No This J1939 bit information is
set, if "Idle" mode is active
(LogicsManager command vari‐
able 04.15. "Idle run active" is
TRUE).
The bit will be reset, if "Idle"
mode is no longer active (Logi‐
csManager command variable
04.15. "Idle run active" is
FALSE).

J1939 Protocol > Device Type Standard
Remote Availability with supported ECU number ... Comment

control
parameter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
50/60 Hz Yes Yes No Yes No Yes No1 No No / No Yes Yes No The J1939 information for 50 or
switch 2 60 Hz mode is sent to the ECU
depending on the "Rated
system frequency" parameter
setting (1750 Ä p. 496) within
the easYgen .
Speed bias Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes / Yes Yes Yes Refer to parameter
Yes 5537 Ä p. 529 for detailed
offs offs abs offs abs abs abs abs offs abs information.
et/ et olut et olut olut olut olut abso‐ et olut
abs e e e e e lute e Notes
olut
e Analog signal only
Preglow No No No Yes Yes No No No No / No No No No This J1939 bit information is

set, if the easYgen is in "Pre‐
glow" mode (LogicsManager
command variable 03.04. "Pre‐
glow/Ignition" is TRUE).
The bit will be reset, if the "Pre‐
glow" phase has been expired
or aborted.
Override No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No / No Yes Yes No This J1939 bit information is
set, if the easYgen is in critical
mode (LogicsManager com‐
mand variable 04.27. "Critical
mode" is TRUE).
The bit will be reset, if the crit‐
ical mode has been expired or
aborted.
Engine No No No No No No No No No No Yes No This message is generated

power according to parameter "ECU
mode power mode" (parameter
12939 Ä p. 530).
Engine No No No No No No No No No No Yes No This message is generated

selected according to parameter "ECU
application application" (parameter
4843 Ä p. 530).
1 Please contact manufacturer to clarify whether

both frequencies (50/60 Hz) may be controlled by
the speed bias.
2In case the rated speed of the easYgen and the
ECU don't match, please make sure that the CAN
connections works and change parameter
1750 Ä p. 496 of the easYgen once.
7.6.3 Device Type Standard

General notes If the used ECU is not specific listed in the chapter Ä Chapter 7.6 “
J1939 Protocol” on page 727 (e.g. Deutz (EMR3 & EMR4), John
Deere, Daimler, Perkins, Iveco, Caterpillar, Liebherr, etc.) we rec‐
ommend to configure the "Device type" (parameter
15102 Ä p. 527) to the setting “Standard”. Visualization via J1939
is working with every J1939 ECU. Concerning remote control most
ECUs are also supporting the speed offset via J1939 standard
message TSC1. This chapter supplies you with the details of the
device type standard, to help you to clarify with the manufacturer
how the ECU is supported.

J1939 Protocol > Device Type Standard
Displayed messages (visualization) In standard mode, the easYgen is able to display all values listed in
the table Ä “Standard visualization messages” on page 728 if they
are supported by the connected ECU.
Diagnostic trouble codes (DM1/DM2) In standard mode, the easYgen diagnostic messages DM1 (Active
Diagnostic Trouble Codes) and DM2 (Previously Active Diagnostic
Trouble Codes) are displayed. It is also possible to reset DM1 and
DM2 failure codes via DM3 and DM11 messages.
Remote control messages The following table shows the transmitted remote control mes‐
sages. These messages are only transmitted if the parameter
"ECU remote controlled" (parameter 15127 Ä p. 529) is configured
to "On".
All listed messages are according to J1939

standard protocol.
Not all SPNs of the supported PGNs are listed
here, in such case the easYgen transmits “Not
available”.
PGN Acronym Name SPN Description Rate [ms]
Dec Hex
0 0000 TSC1 Torque/Speed Control 1 695 Engine Override Control Mode (fixed 10
to “Speed Control”)
696 Requested Speed Control Conditions

(fixed to “Transient Optimized”)
897 Override Control Mode Priority (fixed

to “Highest Priority”)
898 Engine Requested Speed/Speed Limit
61441 F001 EBC1 Electronic Brake Con‐ 970 Engine Auxiliary Shutdown Switch 100
troller 1
61470 F01E GC2 Generator Control 2 3938 Generator Governing Bias 20
65029 FE05 GTACP Generator Total AC 2452 Generator Total Real Power 100
Power
64913 FD91 ACS AC Switching Device 3545 Generator Circuit Breaker Status 250
Status
3546 Utility Circuit Breaker Status
64971 FDCB OHECS Off-Highway Engine 2881 Engine Alternate Droop Accelerator 1 500
Control Selection Select
Notes
If droop shall be active (LogicsMan‐
ager 86.25 = TRUE) the easYgen is
transmitting “Normal Droop” else
“Alternate Droop Setting 1".
65265 FEF1 CCVS Cruise Control/Vehicle 1237 Engine Shutdown Override Switch 100
Speed
59904 EA00 — Request (specific) 247 Engine Total Hours of Operation (at 10,000
PGN FEE5)
— DM11 Diagnostic Data Clear/Reset

For Active DTCs (at PGN FED3)
— DM3 Diagnostic Data Clear/Reset Of

Previously Active DTCs (at PGN
FECE)

Modbus Protocol
PGN Acronym Name SPN Description Rate [ms]
Dec Hex
Notes
DM3 and DM11 are only transmitted if
triggered.
59904 EA(FF) — Request (global) — DM2 Previously diagnostic trouble 2,000

codes (at PGN FECB)
— DM11 Diagnostic Data Clear/Reset

For Active DTCs (at PGN FED3)
— DM3 Diagnostic Data Clear/Reset Of

Previously Active DTCs (at PGN
FECE)
441 Auxiliary Temperature 1 (at PGN

FE8C)
442 Auxiliary Temperature 2 (at PGN

FE8C)
Notes
DM3 and DM11 are only transmitted if
triggered.
Configure J1939 addresses For the visualization the “J1939 own address” (parameter
15106 Ä p. 528) and the “Engine control address” (parameter
15103 Ä p. 529) are not relevant. But for remote control e.g. speed
biasing these addresses must be configured correctly. Please refer
to your ECU manual for the correct address. Normally the “Engine
control address” (parameter 15103 Ä p. 529) is “0” and the “J1939
own address” (parameter 15106 Ä p. 528) is often "234" or "3".
7.7 Modbus Protocol

Modbus is a serial communications protocol published by Modicon
in 1979 for use with its programmable logic controllers (PLCs). It
has become a de facto standard communications protocol in
industry, and is now the most commonly available means of con‐
necting industrial electronic devices.
The Woodward controller supports
n a Modbus RTU Slave module for RS-485 connections
and
The Modbus RTU Slave expects that a Master node polls the con‐
troller slave node. Modbus RTU can also be multi-dropped, or in
other words, multiple Slave devices can exist on one Modbus RTU
network, assuming that the serial interface is a RS-485.
The Modbus/TCP Server fulfills the same role as Modbus client for
RTU mode. Also here it is possible to have one client connected to
many servers.
Temporary restriction
With the current easYgen-XT one server can
handle only one client at a time.
Detailed information about the Modbus protocol is available on the

following website:

Modbus Protocol
n http://www.modbus.org/specs.php
There are also various tools available on the internet. We recom‐
mend using ModScan32 which is a Windows application designed
to operate as a Modbus Master device for accessing data points in
a connected Modbus Slave device. It is designed primarily as a
testing device for verification of correct protocol operation in new or
existing systems.
A trial version download is available from the following website:
n http://www.win-tech.com/html/modscan32.htm
Address range The controller Modbus Slave module distinguishes between visual‐
ization data and configuration & remote control data. The different
data is accessible over a split address range and can be read via
the "Read Holding Register" function.
Furthermore, controller parameters and remote control data can be
written with the "Preset Single Registers" function or "Preset Mul‐
tiple Registers" (Fig. 373)
Fig. 373: Address range
All addresses in this document comply with the

Modicon address convention. Some PLCs or PC
programs use different address conventions
depending on their implementation. Then the
address must be increased and the leading 4 may
be omitted.
Please refer to your PLC or program manual for
more information. This determines the address
sent over the bus in the Modbus telegram. The
Modbus starting address 450001 of the visualiza‐
tion data may become bus address 50000 for
example.

Modbus Protocol
Visualization The visualization over Modbus is provided in a very fast data pro‐
tocol where important system data like alarm states, AC measure‐
ment data, switch states and various other information may be
polled.
According to the Modbus addressing range, the visualization pro‐
tocol can be reached on addresses starting at 450001. On this
address range it is possible to do block reads from 1 up to 128
Modbus registers at a time.
Modbus read addresses Description Multiplier Units
450001 Protocol-ID, always 5010 –
450002 Scaling Power (16 bits) Exponent 10x W (5;4;3;2)
............ ......... ..... .....
............
............ ......... ..... .....
450445 Total engine hours (j1939-HOURS) 1 h
Table 163: Address range block read
Ä Chapter 4.7.3 “Modbus Protocol” on page 507 is

only an excerpt of the data protocol. It conforms to
the data protocol 5010.
The easYgen has an additional combined CAN‐
open/Modbus protocol 5003.
Please refer to the Data Protocols chapter .
Ä “The following data protocols are implemented
to be used” on page 769
The following ModScan32 screenshot shows the configurations

made to read the visualization protocol with a block read of 128
registers.
Fig. 374: Visualization configurations

Modbus Protocol
Data Format(s)
Configuration The Modbus interface can be used to read/write parameters.

According the Modbus addressing range for the configuration
addresses, the range starts at 40001 and ends at 450000. You can
always access only one parameter of the system in this address
range. The Modbus address can be calculated depending on the
parameter ID as illustrated below:
Parameter ID < 10,000 Parameter ID >= 10,000
Modbus address = 40000 + (Par. ID+1) 400000 + (Par. ID+1)
Table 164: Address calculation
Block reads in this address range depend on the data type of the
parameter. This makes it important to set the correct length in
Modbus registers which depends on the data type (UNSIGNED 8,
INTEGER 16, etc.).
Refer to Ä Table 165 “Data types” on page 740 for more informa‐
tion.
Types Modbus regis‐ Remarks

ters
UNSIGNED 8 1
UNSIGNED 16 1
INTEGER 16 1
UNSIGNED 32 2
INTEGER 32 2
LOGMAN 7 Little-endian is used for LogicsManager to

be compatible with (non-XT) easYgen
series
ANALOGMAN‐ 7 Big-endian is used for AnalogManager

AGER because it is the regular format for
Modbus
TEXT/X X/2
Table 165: Data types
The Modbus RTU response time can increase

under certain conditions (display versions / plastic
housing only):
– without CAN (J1939 protocol) connected ->
max. 2 seconds
– with CAN (J1939 protocol) connected -> max.
3 seconds

Load Sharing
Woodward recommends to make a break time of

10 ms after receiving the data of the last Modbus
request.
7.8 Load Sharing

General information The maximum number of participating easYgen-3000XT Series
devices for load sharing is 32. Both CAN and Ethernet interfaces
can handle load share. Load share via Ethernet interface uses
UDP broadcast messages.
Multi-master principle It is important to know that the load share and load-dependent
start/stop functionality is subject to a multi-master principle. This
means that there is no dedicated master and slave function. Each
easYgen decides for itself how it has to behave.
The benefit is that there is no master control, which may cause a
complete loss of this functionality in case it fails. Each control is
also responsible for controlling common breakers like a mains cir‐
cuit or generator group breaker.
Load share monitoring The easYgen provides LDSS parameters for monitoring load
sharing:
n Multi-unit parameter alignment
The multi-unit parameter alignment functionality requires that
the relevant parameters are all configured identically at all par‐
ticipating units. For additional information refer to Ä Chapter
4.5.6.14 “Multi-Unit Parameter Alignment” on page 483.
n Multi-unit missing members
The multi-unit missing members monitoring function checks
whether all participating units are available (sending data on
the load share line). For additional information refer to
Ä Chapter 4.5.6.15 “Multi-Unit Missing easYgen” on page 485.
Load share communication The following parameters allows to select the interface for load
share communication. Refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.4.3.5 “Load-Share
Interface” on page 299 for detailed information.
ID Text Setting range Default

value
9924 Load share Interface CAN CAN

Off
Ethernet A
CAN/EthA by
LM*
Ethernet B/C
Notes
* CAN or Ethernet A depending
on 11986 Ä p. 742 (described
below)

Load Sharing > Load Share via CAN

value
11986 LS interface Ethernet A FALSE FALSE

(LM 86.13: LS interf. EthA = 11987) TRUE
Notes
Switches the load share inter‐
face between
n FALSE: CAN
n TRUE: Ethernet A
Woodward recommends to configure the Node-IDs

(parameter 8950 Ä p. 512) for units, which partici‐
pate in load sharing, as low as possible to facilitate
a fast establishing of communication.
7.8.1 Load Share via CAN

Bus load The bus load increases with the number of units participating in
load sharing.
The following parameters affect the bus load:
n Number of CAN participants
n Baud rate
n Transfer rate of load share messages
n Transfer rate of visualization protocols
We recommend to consider whether all data has to be sent on the
CAN bus when planning the CAN bus. It is also possible to send
visualization data via RS-485 for example.
Measures to reduce the bus load If you need to reduce the bus load of the load share CAN bus, the
following methods may be used:
n Increase the baud rate (parameter 3156 Ä p. 512) under con‐
sideration of the bus length (refer to Ä Chapter 3.4.4 “CAN Bus
Interfaces” on page 102).
n Reduce the transfer rate of the load share message (param‐
eter 9921 Ä p. 545).
n Reduce the transfer rate of the visualization message, i.e. the
event timer (parameter 9604 Ä p. 518).
n Disable the transmission visualization data on the CAN bus
and use the RS-485 interface to transmit visualization data.
n Disable SYNC message (parameter 9100 Ä p. 512) and/or
TIME message (parameter 9101 Ä p. 513) and/or the producer
heartbeat time SYNC message (parameter 9120 Ä p. 512), if
possible.
CAN load share configuration The following parameters are available for configuring the CAN bus
interfaces. Refer to Ä Chapter 4.7.6 “Load Share Parameters”
on page 545 for detailed information.
Open menu path “Parameter è Configuration
è Configure interfaces è Configure CAN interfaces
è Configure CAN load share”. Refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.4.3.6 “ Load
Sharing” on page 299.

Load Sharing > Load Share via UDP Broadca...

value
9921 Transfer rate LS fast message 0.10 to 0.30 s 0.10 s
9920 Load Share CAN-ID 2xx Hex / 3xx 5xx Hex

Hex / 4xx Hex /
5xx Hex
7.8.2 Load Share via UDP Broadcast Messages (Ethernet)

Load Share UDP Load share and other system relevant messages are handled with
UDP messages. The construction of the UDP messages allows
(load share) communication with other Woodward devices.
For configuration of the Ethernet interface see chapters Ä Chapter
4.7.5 “Ethernet Interfaces” on page 539 and Ä Chapter 7.3
“Ethernet Interfaces” on page 724.

Load Sharing > Load Share via UDP Broadca...

Technical Specifications
Technical Data > Measuring Values
8 Technical Specifications
8.1 Technical Data
Product label
Fig. 375: Product label
Number Name Description
1 Address Manufacturer and manufacturing addresses
2 S/N Serial number (numerical)
3 S/N Serial number (barcode)
4 P/N Item number
5 Type Description Description (product name)
6 Details Technical data
7 S/N Date of production (year-month)
8 REV Item revision number
9 Approval Approvals
10 Environment Separate collection symbol
Battery inside
This device contains a battery, and therefore it is labeled with the
symbol shown beside according to the EU Directive 2006/66/EC.
WARNING!
Batteries can be harmful to the environment. Dam‐
aged or unusable batteries must be disposed of in
Fig. 376: Waste Disposal a container specially reserved for this purpose.
In general, appropriate local guidelines and regula‐
tions must be followed when disposing of electrical
devices and batteries.
8.1.1 Measuring Values

Voltages Measuring values, voltages
Measuring voltages / 398/690 VAC
: Range rated value (VLLrated) 100 VAC up to 690 VAC

Technical Data > Ambient Variables
: Maximum value (VLLmax) max. 897 VAC
: Rated voltage phase – ground 600 VAC
: Rated surge voltage 6.0 kV
Input resistance per path 2.5 MΩ
Maximum power consumption per path < 0.15 W
Linear measuring range 1.3 × Vrated
Measuring frequency 50/60 Hz (30.0 to 85.0 Hz)
Currents
With External CT
For correct measuring with external CT the input
has to be one side grounded by the customer.
Measuring values, cur‐ Galvanically isolated

rents
Measuring current Rated value (Irated) ../1 A or ../5 A
Linear measuring range Generator 3.0 × Irated
Mains/ground current approx. 1.5 × Irated
Maximum power con‐ < 0.10 VA

sumption per path
Rated short-time current 50.0 A

(1 s)
Battery Voltage Measuring values, battery voltage Galvanically isolated
Input voltage range 8 to 40 VDC
8.1.2 Ambient Variables
CAUTION!
Device Operating Voltage
Connect the unit only to a DC power source that
complies with the safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
requirements.
Power supply 12/24 VDC (8 to 40.0 VDC), SELV
Intrinsic consumption max. 32 W
Degree of pollution 2
Maximum elevation 4,000 m ASL
Insulation voltage 100 VDC

Marine applications: 40 VDC

Technical Data > Inputs/Outputs
Overvoltage (≤ 2 min) 80 VDC
Reverse voltage protection Over the full supply range
Input capacitance 5,000 µF
Unit Power Supply Negative potential grounded or positive

potential grounded or ungrounded
8.1.3 Inputs/Outputs
Discrete inputs 'DI xx' Discrete inputs Galvanically isolated
Input range (Vcont. dig. input) Rated voltage

12/24 VDC (8 to 40.0 VDC)
Input resistance approx. 20 kΩ
Discrete outputs 'R xx' (relay outputs) Discrete/relay outputs Potential free Galvanically isolated
Configurable
via Logi‐
csManager
Contact material AgCdO
General purpose (GP) (Vcont, AC 2.00 AAC@250 VAC

relays)
DC 2.00 ADC@24 VDC
0.36 ADC@125 VDC

Not suitable for USA and
Canada applications. Not eval‐
uated by UL.
0.18 ADC@250 VDC

Not suitable for USA and
Canada applications. Not eval‐
uated by UL.
Pilot Duty AC B300
Sinking outputs (transistor outputs)

'SO xx' CAUTION!
Additional external fuse recommended!
Protect your device by using a 0.5 A or 0.63 A
time-lag surge withstand fuse compliant with IEC
60127 in an appropriate cartridge holder.
Sinking outputs Galvanically isolated
Insulation voltage (continuously) 100 VAC/DC
Insulation test voltage (1 s) 500 VAC
Rated switching voltage 24 VDC
Maximum switching voltage 40 VDC
Maximum switching current 300 mADC

Analog inputs 'AI 01-03' (Type 1: 0/4 Analog inputs FlexInTM Freely scal‐
to 20 mA | 0 to 2000 Ω | 0 to 1 V) able
Maximum permissible voltage 9V

against Engine Ground
Maximum permissible voltage 100 V

between Engine Ground & PE
Resolution 16 Bit
0/4 to 20 mA input Internal load ~50 Ω
0 to 2000 Ω input Load current ≤ 2.3 mA
0 to 1V input Input resistance approx. ~91

kΩ
Analog inputs 'AI 04-06' (Type 2: 0/4 Analog inputs FlexInTM Freely scal‐
to 20 mA | 0 to 10 V) able

against PE (Ground)
Resolution 14 Bit
0/4 to 20 mA input Internal load 249 Ω
0 to 10 V input Input resistance approx. 80 kΩ
Analog inputs 'AI 07-10' (Type 3: 0 to Analog inputs FlexInTM Freely scal‐
250 Ω | 0 to 2500 Ω) able

against PE (Ground)
Resolution 14 Bit
0 to 250 Ω input 0 to 250 Ω
0 to 2500 Ω input 0 to 2500 Ω
Analog outputs 'AO 01' "Speed Analog output Freely scalable Galvanically
Biasing" (Type 1: ±20 mA | ±10 V | isolated
Pre-configured to "11.03
PWM) Speed bias [%]"
Resolution min. 12 bit
Configurable as (bipolar) ±20 mA, ±10

VDC
PWM output ±10 VDC, 500

Hz duty cycle
Shunt resistor max. 500 Ω
Galvanically isolation to PE min. 100 VAC
Analog outputs 'AO 02' "Voltage Analog output Freely scalable Galvanically
Biasing" (Type 1: ±20 mA | ±10 V | isolated
Pre-configured to "11.02
PWM) Voltage bias [%]"
Resolution min. 12 bit
Configurable as (bipolar) ±20 mA, ±10

VDC

PWM output ±10 VDC, 500

Hz duty cycle
Shunt resistor max. 500 Ω
Basic isolation to PE 500 VRMS
Reinforced isolation to PE 300 VRMS
Analog outputs 'AO 03-06' (0/4 to 20 Analog outputs Galvanically

mA) isolated
At rated output Freely scal‐

able
Insulation voltage (continu‐ 100 VAC

ously)
Insulation test voltage (1 s) 500 VAC
Versions 0 to 20 mA
Resolution Configured to 0 to 20 mA 12 bit
0 to 20 mA output Load ≤ 500 Ω
Auxiliary excitation (D+) input/output Auxiliary excitation (D+) input/output Galvanically isolated
Output current approx. 100 mA@12/24 VDC
Voltage monitoring range (input) 8 to 40 VDC
Magnetic pickup input (MPU) Magnetic pickup input Capacitively isolated
Input impedance min. 17 kΩ

(decoupled by capacitors)
Voltage range (input) 800 mVpp to 100 Vpp

Refer to Fig. 377
Proximity Probe Leakage Current ⋜100 µA
Response time ⋜1000 rpm per second

(max. unloaded engine acceleration)
Minimum rated rpm 100 (rpm)
Fig. 377: MPU - characteristic

Technical Data > Interfaces
8.1.4 Interfaces
USB (slave) USB 2.0 interface Galvanically isolated
Type USB 2.0 standard; slave (Type

B)
Data rate max. 12 Mbit/s
Insulation Galvanically isolated
Bus Voltage 5V
Current consumption approx. 10 mA
RS-485 interface RS-485 interface Galvanically isolated
Insulation voltage (continuously) 100 VAC
Insulation test voltage (1 s) 1700 VDC
Version RS-485 Standard
CAN bus interface CAN bus interface Galvanically isolated
Version CAN bus
Internal line termination Not available
Ethernet interface Ethernet bus interface Galvanically isolated

Only one MAC ID is required
Version Ethernet 10/100Base-T/TX
Ethernet plug socket RJ45 standard, shielded

2 LEDs to indicate communica‐
tion.
Ethernet cable CAT 5 or 5e (class D)

Shielding: F/UTP according to
ISO/IEC 11801 (foil overall
shielding, pairs unshielded)
Green LED Indicates link activity (blinking

during data transmission)
Yellow LED Indicates link status (regarding

speed):
10 Mb/s: LED switched-off
100 Mb/s: LED switched-on
Internal shield termination Available

Technical Data > Housing
8.1.5 Real Time Clock Battery

Type Lithium
Life span (operation without power approx. 5 years

supply)
Battery field replacement Not allowed.

Please contact your Woodward service
partner.
8.1.6 Display (plastic housing variant, only)

Type LCD display
Size Diagonal: 5,7’’ (144.8 mm)
Resolution 320 x 240 pixel
Picture quality up to 8 bad dots allowed
Backlight luminance 550 cd/m2 (max)
Temperature threshold -20 °C ambient ( for "...-LT" variants,

only)
(Heater ON/OFF)
8.1.7 Housing
Housing type Type Plastic Sheet metal
easYpack Custom
Dimensions (W × H × D) 282 × 216 × 98.2 mm 250 × 227 × 84 mm
Front cutout (W × H) 249 [+1.1] × 183 [+1.0] -/-

mm
Weight approx. 2,250 g approx. 2,150 g
Wiring Screw-plug-terminals
2.5 mm²
Recommended locked 4 inch pounds / 0.5 Nm.

torque
Use 90 °C copper wire or better.
Use class 1 wire only or equivalent.
Protection Protection system Plastic IP54 in the front with clamp fas‐
teners
IP66 in the front with screw kit
IP20 on the rear side
Sheet metal IP20
Front foil (plastic Insulating surface

housing)

Environmental Data
8.1.8 Approvals
EMC test (CE) Tested according to applicable EMC standards. Refer to
Ä Chapter 8.2 “Environmental Data” on page 752 for
details
Listings CE marking
UL, Ordinary Locations, File No.: E231544
UL recognized component, category FTPM2/8, File No.:
E347132
cUL
CSA
EAC
BDEW (Dynamic mains stabilization)
VDE-AR-N 4105 (Mains decoupling and single failure
proof feature)
Marine Type approval Lloyds Register (LR)
Type approval American Bureau of Shipping

(ABS)
8.2 Environmental Data

Vibration Frequency range - sine sweep 5 Hz to 100 Hz
Acceleration 4G
Standards IEC 60068-2-6, Fc
Lloyd’s Register, Vibration Test2
SAEJ1455 Chassis Data
Frequency range - random 10 Hz to 2000 Hz
Power intensity 0.04 G²/Hz
RMS value 8.2 Grms
Standards MIL-STD 202F, M214A, SAE J1455
Shock Shock 40 G, Saw tooth pulse, 11 ms
Standards MIL-STD 810F, M516.5, Procedure 1
Temperature Housing “...-LT” version, only

type
Plastic Cold, Dry Heat -30 °C (-22 °F) / -30 °C (-22 °F) /
(storage) 80 °C (176 °F) 80 °C (176 °F)
Cold, Dry Heat (oper‐ -20 °C (-4 °F) / 70 °C -40 °C (-40 °F) /
ating) (158 °F) 70 °C (158 °F)
Sheet Cold, Dry Heat -40 °C (-40 °F) / 80 °C (176 °F)

metal (storage)
Cold, Dry Heat (oper‐ -40 °C (-40 °F) / 70 °C (158 °F)

ating)
Stand‐ IEC 60068-2-2, Test Bb and Bd

ards
IEC 60068-2-1, Test Ab and Ad

Accuracy
Humidity Humidity 60 °C, 95% RH, 5 days
Standards IEC 60068-2-30, Test Db
Marine environmental categories Marine environmental categories Lloyd’s Register of Shipping (LRS):
ENV1, ENV2, ENV3 and ENV4
Electromagnetic Compatibility EN 61000-6-2 2005 - Electromagnetic compatibility

(EMC). Generic standards.
Immunity for industrial environment
EN 61000-6-4 2007 + A1: 2011 - Electromagnetic

compatibility (EMC). Generic stand‐
ards.
Emission standard for industrial envi‐
ronments
EN 61326-1 2013 - Electrical equipment for meas‐

urement, control and laboratory use.
EMC requirements. General require‐
ments (according to industrial electro‐
magnetic environment)
8.3 Accuracy
The accuracy declaration is defined by the according measurement
ranges. The rated maximum of the single ranges are taken as
100%.
This results in the definitions:
n Range 1: 69/120 V rated = 100%
n Range 2: 277/480 V rated = 100%
n Range 3: 400/690 V rated = 100%
Measuring value Display Accuracy Measuring start Notes
Frequency
Generator 15.0 to 85.0 Hz 0.1% (of 85 Hz) 5% (of PT secondary

voltage setting)1
Mains 30.0 to 85.0 Hz
Voltage
Wye generator / mains / 0 to 650 kV 0.5% , Class 0.5 2 1.5% (of PT secondary
busbar voltage setting)1
related to:
Delta generator / mains / 2% (of PT secondary
69/277/400 V (Wye)
busbar voltage setting)1
120/480/690 V (Delta)
Power supply/Battery 0 to 40 VDC ±0.5% related to 40 V Related on the measure‐ 0.5% equals 0.2 V (±0.2
ment range 8 to 40 V V)
Current
Generator 0 to 32,000 A 0.5% 1% (of 1.3/6.5 A)3

Max. value (of 1/5 A)3 Class 0.5
Mains/ground current
Real power

Accuracy
Measuring value Display Accuracy Measuring start Notes
Actual total real power -2 to 2 GW 1% Measuring starts with

value detecting the zero pas‐
(of 69/277/400 V x 1/5 sage of current/voltage
A)2/3
Reactive power
Actual value in L1, L2, -2 to 2 Gvar 1% Measuring starts with

L3 detecting the zero pas‐
(of 69/277/400 V x 1/5 sage of current/voltage
A)2/3
Power factor
Actual value power lagging 0.000 to 1.000 to 1% 1% (of 1.3/6.5 A)3 1.000 is displayed for
factor L1 leading 0.000 measuring values below
the measuring start
Miscellaneous
Real energy 0 to 4,200 GWh 0.36% (of 1.3/6.5 A)3 Not calibrated
Operating hours Max. 1 × 106 h
Maintenance call hours 0 to 9,999 h
Maintenance call days 0 to 999 d
(Engine) Start counter 0 to 65,535
Battery voltage 8 to 40 V ±0.5% (of measurement

range 0 to 40 VDC)
Auxiliary excitation (D+) 1%

input/output
Pickup speed frated +/- 40% 0,1% of frated +/- 1 rpm
Phase angle -180 to 180° ± 1 degree 1.25% (of PT secondary 180° is displayed for
volt. setting) measuring values below
measuring start
Analog Inputs
0 to 20 mA Freely scalable ±0.5% related to 20 mA 2 wire input.

0.5% equals 0.1 mA ⇒
± 0.1 mA)
0 to 2000 Ω Freely scalable ±0.5% related to 2000 Ω 1 wire input (related to

engine ground)4
0 to 1 V Freely scalable ±0.5% related to 1 V 2 wire input.

0.5% equals 0.005 V⇒
± 0.005 V)
0 to 10 V Freely scalable ±0.5% related to 10 V 2 wire input.

0.5% equals 0.05 V ⇒
± 0.05 V)
0 to 250 Ω Freely scalable ±0.5% related to 250 Ω 3 wire input.

0.5% equals 1.25 Ω ⇒ ±
±1.25 Ω
0 to 2500 Ω Freely scalable ±0.5% related to 2500 Ω 3 wire input.

0.5% equals 12.5 Ω ⇒
±12.5 Ω
Analog Outputs
Type 1: ±20 mA | ±10 V | Freely scalable ≤1%

PWM
Type 2: 0 to 20 mA | 4 to Freely scalable ≤0.5%

20 mA

Protection (ANSI)
1 Setting of the parameter for the PT secondary
rated voltage
2 Depending on the used measuring range
(120/480/690 V)
3Depending on the CT input definition (1/5 A) by
customer settings. easYgen-XT hardware covers
both 1 A and 5 A ranges.
4 Some senders, like the VDO senders, are oper‐
ating in the working range 0 to 200 Ohms. For
sure, the 0.5% accuracy cannot be directly
assigned to these senders. Therefore the accuracy
percentage tolerance will be expanded accord‐
ingly. On the other hand, measurements have
shown that under usual circumstances (at 20°C, no
EMC surge or burst present) an accuracy of 1% for
such senders can be kept.
Reference conditions
The reference conditions for measuring the accu‐
racy are listed below.
Input voltage Sinusoidal rated voltage
Input current Sinusoidal rated current
Frequency Rated frequency
Power supply Rated voltage ± 2%
Power factor (cos φ) 1.000
Ambient temperature 23 °C ± 2 K
Warm-up period 20 minutes
8.4 Protection (ANSI)

"ANSI Code" related Protection Func‐ Protection related ANSI #
tions
Generator: Voltage / frequency 59 / 27 / 81O /
81U
Overload, reverse/reduced 32 / 32R / 32F

power
Unbalanced load 46
Synch Check 25
Instantaneous overcurrent 50
Time-overcurrent (IEC 255 51 / 51 V

compliant)
Ground fault (measured 50G

ground current)
Power factor 55
Rotation field

Protection (ANSI)
Protection related ANSI #
Engine: Overspeed / underspeed 12 / 14
Speed / frequency mismatch
D+ auxiliary excitation failure
Cylinder temperature
Mains: Voltage / frequency 59 / 27 / 81O /

81U /25
Phase shift / rotation field / 78

ROCOF (df/dt)
Busbar Voltage
Frequency

Appendix
Characteristics > Triggering Characteristics
9 Appendix
9.1 Characteristics
9.1.1 Triggering Characteristics
Time-dependent overshoot monitoring This triggering characteristic is used for time-dependent overcur‐
rent monitoring.
Fig. 378: Three-level time-dependent overshoot monitoring

Appendix
Two-level overshoot monitoring This triggering characteristic is used for generator, mains and bat‐
tery overvoltage, generator and mains overfrequency, overload
IOP and MOP and engine overspeed monitoring.
Fig. 379: Two-level overshoot monitoring

Appendix
Two-level undershoot monitoring This triggering characteristic is used for generator, mains and bat‐
tery undervoltage, generator and mains underfrequency, and
engine underspeed monitoring.
Fig. 380: Two-level undershoot monitoring

Appendix
Two-level reversed/reduced load This triggering characteristic is used for generator reversed/
monitoring reduced load monitoring.
Fig. 381: Two-level reversed/reduced load monitoring

Appendix
Two-level unbalanced load monitoring This triggering characteristic is used for generator unbalanced load
monitoring.
Fig. 382: Two-level unbalanced load monitoring
One-level asymmetry monitoring This triggering characteristic is used for generator voltage asym‐
metry monitoring.
Fig. 383: One-level asymmetry monitoring

Appendix
Characteristics > VDO Inputs Characteristics > VDO Input "Pressure"
9.1.2 VDO Inputs Characteristics

Since VDO sensors are available in different types, the index num‐
bers of the characteristic curve tables are listed.
Always order VDO sensors with the correct characteristic
curve. Manufacturers of VDO sensors usually list these
tables in their catalogs.
9.1.2.1 VDO Input "Pressure"

0 to 5 bar/0 to 72 psi - Index "III"
Fig. 384: Characteristics diagram VDO 0 to 5 bar, Index "III"
P [bar] 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
P [psi] 0 7.25 14.50 21.76 29.00 36.26 43.51 50.76 58.02 65.27 72.52
R [Ohm] 11 29 47 65 82 100 117 134 151 167 184

Appendix
Characteristics > VDO Inputs Characteristics > VDO Input "Pressure"
0 to 10 bar/0 to 145 psi - Index "IV"
Fig. 385: Characteristics diagram VDO 0 to 10 bar, Index "IV"
P [bar] 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8.5 9 10
P [psi] 0 7.25 14.50 21.76 29.00 43.51 58.02 72.52 87.02 101.5 116.0 123.2 130.5 145.0
3 3 8 3 4
R 10 21 31 42 52 71 90 107 124 140 156 163 170 184

[Ohm]

Appendix
Characteristics > VDO Inputs Characteristics > VDO Input "Temperature"
9.1.2.2 VDO Input "Temperature"

40 to 120 °C/104 to 248 °F - Index
"92-027-004"
Fig. 386: Characteristics diagram VDO 40 to 120 °C - detail, Index "92-027-004"

Appendix
Fig. 387: Characteristics diagram VDO -40 to 120 °C - full range, Index "92-027-004"
Temp. -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 5 10

[°C]
Temp. -40 -31 -22 -13 -4 5 14 23 32 41 50

[°F]
R [Ohm] 17162.4 12439.5 9134.5 6764.5 5067.6 3833.9 2929.9 2249.4 1743.1 1364.0 1075.6
... continued with further points:
Temp. 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65
[°C]
Temp. 59 68 77 86 95 104 113 122 131 140 149

[°F]
R [Ohm] 850.1 677.0 543.5 439.3 356.6 291.5 239.6 197.3 161.5 134.0 114.0
... continued with further points:
Temp. 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

[°C]
Temp. 158 167 176 185 194 203 212 221 230 239 248
[°F]
R [Ohm] 97.1 82.4 70.1 59.7 51.2 44.3 38.5 33.4 29.1 25.5 22.4
... and finally continued with further points:
Temp. 125 130 135 140 145 150

[°C]
Temp. 257 266 275 284 293 302

[°F]
R [Ohm] 19.75 17.44 15.46 13.75 12.26 10.96

Appendix
50 to 150 °C/122 to 302 °F - Index

"92-027-006"
Fig. 388: Characteristics diagram VDO 50 to 150 °C - detail, Index "92-027-006"

Appendix
Fig. 389: Characteristics diagram VDO 0 to 120 °C - full range, Index "92-027-006"
Temp. 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
[°C]
Temp. 32 41 50 59 68 77 86 95 104 113 122

[°F]
R [Ohm] 3240.18 2743.6 1905.87 1486.65 1168.64 926.71 739.98 594,9 481,53 392.57 322.17
Temp. 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105

[°C]
Temp. 131 140 149 158 167 176 185 194 203 212 221
[°F]
R [Ohm] 266.19 221.17 184.72 155.29 131.38 112.08 96.40 82.96 71.44 61.92 54.01
Temp. 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150
[°C]
Temp. 230 239 248 257 266 275 284 293 302
[°F]
R [Ohm] 47.24 41.42 36.51 32.38 28.81 25.70 23.00 20.66 18.59

Appendix
Characteristics > VDO Inputs Characteristics > Pt100 RTD
9.1.2.3 Pt100 RTD
Fig. 390: Characteristics diagram Pt100
Temp. -200 -150 -100 -50 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

[°C]
Temp. -328 -238 -148 -58 32 50 68 86 104 122 140

[°F]
R [Ohm] 18.5 39.7 60.25 80.7 100 103.9 107.8 111.7 115.5 119.4 123.2
Temp. 70 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 300

[°C]
Temp. 158 176 194 212 257 302 347 392 437 482 572
[°F]
R [Ohm] 127.1 130.9 134.7 138.5 147.9 157.3 166.6 175.8 188.6 194.1 212.0
Temp. 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850
[°C]
Temp. 662 752 842 932 1022 1112 1202 1292 1382 1472 1562
[°F]
R [Ohm] 229.7 247.0 264.1 280.9 297.4 313.6 329.5 345.1 360.5 375.5 390.25

Appendix
Data Protocols
9.1.2.4 Pt1000 RTD

The characteristic of the Pt1000 temperature sender accords the
characteristic diagram Pt100 at which the R value is to multiply
with 10. Refer to Ä Chapter 9.1.2.3 “Pt100 RTD” on page 768 for
details.
9.1.2.5 NTC-Sender "AB_94099" (AB-Elektronik Sachsen GmbH)
Fig. 391: Characteristic diagram "AB_94099"
9.2 Data Protocols

General note
The following data protocols / data telegrams are
describing the currently defined full set of data for
each protocol. Please ignore data your device
does not support.
The following data protocols are CANopen/Modbus

implemented to be used
n 5003: Basic Visualization
supported for easYgen-3000 series compatibility
n 5014: Basic Visualization (based on 5003)

Appendix
Data Protocols
CANopen
n 5004: Generator Values Visualization
n 5005: Mains Values Visualization
n 5011: Alarm Values Visualization
n 5018: Special data 1
n 6000: Load Share Message
n 6003: LS-5 Communication
n 65000: External Discrete I/O 1 to 8
Modbus
n 5010: Basic Visualization
n 5016: Basic Visualization (based on 5010)
Protocol tables
Please find the data protocol tables additionally as
– separate MS Excel files at
– the CD-ROM
– Woodward web site (search for "Refer‐
ence: Data Protocols")

Appendix
Data Protocols > Protocol 5...
9.2.1 Protocol 5003 (Basic Visualization)
Value size meets Modbus address

Row "Data byte" in the table below lists the CAN
bus data bytes but is an indicator for the number of
Bytes of the current address, too. Each number
stands for one Byte.
The Modbus standard address space is two Bytes.
– A 16-bit value (word) fits directly: See "Start
addr." 450003 > 45004.
– Some data types need four Bytes (32-bit value,
double word). The next available Modbus
address then is the next but one: See "Start
addr." 450004 > 450006.
Modbus CAN Param‐ Description Multiplier Units

eter ID
Modicon Start Data Data
start addr. (*1) byte 0 byte
addr. (Mux)
450001 450000 0 1,2 Protocol-ID, always 5003 –
450002 450001 3,4 10100 Pickup speed 1 rpm
450003 450002 0 5,6 - Control mode (STOP/AUTO/MANUALLY/(XT Mask:000Fh (enum.

only:) TEST) )
450004 450003 1 1,2 160 Gen. powerfactor 0.001
450005 450004 3,4,5,6 170 Av. Gen. Wye-Voltage 0.1 V
450007 450006 2 1,2 144 Gen. frequency 0.01 Hz
450008 450007 3,4,5,6 171 Av. Gen. Delta-Voltage 0.1 V
450010 450009 3 1,2 147 Mains frequency 0.01 Hz
450011 450010 3,4,5,6 173 Av. Mains Wye-Voltage 0.1 V
450013 450012 4 1,2 208 Mains power factor 0.001
450014 450013 3,4,5,6 174 Av. Mains Delta-Voltage 0.1 V
450016 450015 5 1,2 209 Busbar 1: Frequency 0.01 Hz
450017 450016 3,4,5,6 216 Av. Busbar 1 Delta-Voltage 0.1 V
450019 450018 6 1,2 internal
450020 450019 3,4 internal
450021 450020 5,6 internal
450022 450021 7 1,2 10110 Battery voltage 0.1 V
450023 450022 3,4,5,6 207 Av. Mains Current 0.001 A
450025 450024 8 1,2 10111 Analog input 1 changeable
450026 450025 3,4,5,6 185 Av. Gen. Current 0.001 A
450029 450028 3,4,5,6 161 Meas. ground current 0.001 A
450032 450031 3,4,5,6 159 Calculated ground current 0.001 A
450035 450034 3,4,5,6 111 Gen. current 1 0.001 A

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
450038 450037 3,4,5,6 112 Gen. current 2 0.001 A
450041 450040 3,4,5,6 113 Gen. current 3 0.001 A
450044 450043 3,4,5,6 134 Mains current L1 0.001 A
450047 450046 3,4 internal
450048 450047 5,6 internal
450050 450049 3,4 internal
450051 450050 5,6 internal
450053 450052 3,4,5,6 135 Total gen. power 1 W
450055 450054 18 1,2 internal
450056 450055 3,4,5,6 140 Total mains power 1 W
450058 450057 19 1,2 internal
450059 450058 3,4,5,6 136 Total gen. reactive power 1 var
450061 450060 20 1,2 10159 AI Auxiliary excitation D+ 0.1 V
450062 450061 3,4,5,6 150 Total mains reactive power 1 var
450064 450063 21 1,2 10133 Overspeed 1 latched Mask: 8000h Bit
Overspeed 2 latched Mask: 4000h Bit
Underspeed 1 latched Mask: 2000h Bit
Underspeed 2 latched Mask: 1000h Bit
Unintended stop latched Mask: 0800h Bit
Speed det. alarm latched Mask: 0400h Bit
Shutdwn malfunct. latched Mask: 0200h Bit
GCB fail to close latched Mask: 0100h Bit
GCB fail to open latched Mask: 0080h Bit
MCB fail to close latched Mask: 0040h Bit
MCB fail to open latched Mask: 0020h Bit
CAN-Fault J1939 latched Mask: 0010h Bit
Start fail latched Mask: 0008h Bit
Mainten. days exceeded latched Mask: 0004h Bit
Mainten. hours exceeded latched Mask: 0002h Bit
CANopen error at CAN Interface 1 Mask: 0001h Bit
450065 450064 3,4,5,6 182 Busbar 1: voltage L1-L2 0.1 V
450067 450066 22 1,2 10149 GCB syn. timeout latched Mask: 8000h Bit
MCB syn. timeout latched Mask: 4000h Bit
GGB Timeout latched Mask: 2000h Bit

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
Charge alt. low voltage (D+) latched Mask: 1000h Bit
Operating range failure 12 Mask: 0800h Bit
CAN overload / CPU overload Mask: 0400h
MCB failure 50BF Mask: 0200h
GCB failure 50BF Mask: 0100h
ECU Protect alarm Mask: 0080h
ECU Emission alarm Mask: 0040h
Parameter Alignment Mask: 0010h Bit
Missing easYgen Mask: 0008h Bit
MCB plausibility Mask: 0004h Bit
Red stop lamp latched Mask: 0002h Bit
Amber warning lamp latched Mask: 0001h Bit
450068 450067 3,4 internal
450069 450068 5,6 internal
450070 450069 23 1,2 10286 GAP alarm set 1 alarm 16 latched Mask: 8000h Bit
GAP alarm set 1 alarm 15 latched Mask: 4000h Bit
Free alarm 4 Mask: 2000h Bit
internal Mask: 0200h Bit
Neutral contactor reply mismatch Mask: 0100h Bit
Decoupling GCB<->MCB latched Mask: 0080h Bit
Meas.difference 4105 VDE-AR-N 4105 latched Mask: 0040h Bit
Parameter alignment VDE-AR-N 4105 latched Mask: 0020h Bit
Missing member VDE-AR-N 4105 latched Mask: 0010h Bit
Busbar monitoring latched Mask: 0008h Bit
Plausibility GCB feedback latched Mask: 0004h Bit
Reactive load sharing mismatch latched Mask: 0002h Bit
Active load sharing mismatch latched Mask: 0001h Bit
450071 450070 3,4 internal
450072 450071 5,6 internal
450073 450072 24 1,2 10134 Gen.overfreq. 1 latched Mask: 8000h Bit
Gen.overfreq. 2 latched Mask: 4000h Bit
Gen.underfreq. 1 latched Mask: 2000h Bit
Gen.underfreq. 2 latched Mask: 1000h Bit
Gen.overvolt. 1 latched Mask: 0800h Bit
Gen.overvolt. 2 latched Mask: 0400h Bit
Gen.undervolt. 1 latched Mask: 0200h Bit

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
Gen.undervolt. 2 latched Mask: 0100h Bit
Gen. overcurr. 1 latched Mask: 0080h Bit
Gen. Rv/Rd pow.1 latched Mask: 0010h Bit
Gen. Rv/Rd pow.2 latched Mask: 0008h Bit
Gen. Overload IOP 1 latched Mask: 0004h Bit
Gen. Overload IOP 2 latched Mask: 0002h Bit
450074 450073 3,4,5,6 108 Gen. voltage L1-L2 0.1 V
450076 450075 25 1,2 10138 Unbal. load 1 latched Mask: 8000h Bit
Unbal. load 2 latched Mask: 4000h Bit
Gen. Asymmetry latched Mask: 2000h Bit
Ground fault 1 latched Mask: 1000h Bit
Ground fault 2 latched Mask: 0800h Bit
Gen. phase rot. misw. Latched Mask: 0400h Bit
Gen act.pwr mismatch Latched Mask: 0200h Bit
Gen. unloading fault Latched Mask: 0100h Bit
Inv.time ov.curr. Latched Mask: 0080h Bit
Operating range failed, latched Mask: 0040h Bit
Gen. Overload MOP 1 latched Mask: 0020h Bit
Gen. Overload MOP 2 latched Mask: 0010h Bit
Gen. overexcited 1 latched Mask: 0008h Bit
Gen. overexcited 2 latched Mask: 0004h Bit
Gen. underexcited 1 latched Mask: 0002h Bit
Gen. underexcited 2 latched Mask: 0001h Bit
450077 450076 3,4,5,6 114 Gen. voltage L1-N 0.1 V
450079 450078 26 1,2 10135 Mains ov.freq. 1 latched Mask: 8000h Bit
Mains ov.freq. 2 latched Mask: 4000h Bit
Mains un.freq. 1 latched Mask: 2000h Bit
Mains ov.volt. 1 latched Mask: 0800h Bit
Mains un.volt. 1 latched Mask: 0200h Bit
Mains phaseshift latched Mask: 0080h Bit
Mains decoupling latched Mask: 0040h Bit

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
Mains phase rot. Miswired latched Mask: 0004h Bit
450080 450079 3,4,5,6 109 Gen. voltage L2-L3 0.1 V
450082 450081 27 1,2 10278 Mains import power 1 latched Mask: 8000h Bit
Mains import power 2 latched Mask: 4000h Bit
Mains export power 1 latched Mask: 2000h Bit
Mains overexcited 1 latched Mask: 0800h Bit
Mains underexcited 1 latched Mask: 0200h Bit
Mains df/dt Mask: 0080h Bit
Mns act.pwr mismatch latched Mask: 0040h Bit
Mains. Time dep. Voltage Mask: 0020h Bit
Mains Voltage Increase Mask: 0008h Bit
Mains QV Monitoring step 1 Mask: 0002h Bit
450083 450082 3,4,5,6 115 Gen. voltage L2-N 0.1 V
450085 450084 28 1,2 10132 State Digital Input 1 latched Mask: 8000h Bit
State Digital Input 2 latched Mask: 4000h Bit
State Digital Input 8 (reply GCB) Mask: 0100h Bit
450086 450085 3,4,5,6 110 Gen. voltage L3-L1 0.1 V
450088 450087 29 1,2 10283 State Digital Input 13 latched Mask: 8000h Bit

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
450089 450088 3,4,5,6 116 Gen. voltage L3-N 0.1 V
450091 450090 30 1,2 16377 State external Digital Input 16 latched Mask: 8000h Bit
State external Digital Input 15 latched Mask: 4000h Bit
450092 450091 3,4,5,6 118 Mains voltage L1-L2 0.1 V
450094 450093 31 1,2 10279 Alarm flexible limit 16 latched Mask: 8000h Bit
Alarm flexible limit 15 latched Mask: 4000h Bit

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
450095 450094 3,4,5,6 121 Mains voltage L1-N 0.1 V
450097 450096 32 1,2 10280 Alarm flexible limit 32 latched Mask: 8000h Bit
450100 450099 33 1,2 10281 internal Mask: 8000h Bit

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
450103 450102 34 1,2 10136 Batt.overvolt.2 latched Mask: 0008h Bit
Batt.undervolt.2 latched Mask: 0004h Bit
Batt.overvolt.1 latched Mask: 0002h Bit
Batt.undervolt.1 latched Mask: 0001h Bit
Alarm class F latched Mask: 0020h Bit
Alarm class E latched Mask: 0010h Bit
Alarm class D latched Mask: 0008h Bit
Alarm class C latched Mask: 0004h Bit
Alarm class B latched Mask: 0002h Bit
Alarm class A latched Mask: 0001h Bit
Analog inp. 1, wire brake Mask: 0002h Bit
Analog inp. 4, wire break or shortcut latched Mask: 0010h Bit
450110 450109 3,4 15310 Turbocharger 1 Compressor Outlet Temperature 0.1 °C
450111 450110 5,6 10285 Ext. analog inp. 16, wire break Mask: 8000h Bit
Ext. analog inp. 15, wire break Mask: 4000h Bit

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
450112 450111 37 1,2 10107 Digital outputs 1 to 12
Relay-Output 1 (inverted) Mask: 8000h Bit
Relay-Output 2 Mask: 4000h Bit
450113 450112 3,4 10109 Digital outputs 13 to 22

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
Open Collector Output 2 Mask: 0002h Bit
Open Collector Output 1 Mask: 0001h Bit
450114 450113 5,6 8005 Output to external CAN-I/O Relay 16 Mask: 8000h Bit
Output to external CAN-I/O Relay 15 Mask: 4000h Bit
450115 450114 38 1,2 10310 Analog output 1 0.01 %
450116 450115 3,4 10311 Analog output 2 0.01 %
450117 450116 5,6 10317 Analog output 3 0.01 %
450118 450117 39 1,2 10318 Analog output 4 0.01 %
450119 450118 3,4 10319 Analog output 5 0.01 %
450120 450119 5,6 10320 Analog output 6 0.01 %

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
450121 450120 40 1,2 10202 4685 = TEST Mode (enum.

)
14353 = AUTO Mode
13200 = Auxiliary services postrun
13201 = Aux. services prerun
13202 = Critical mode
13203 = Engine Stop
13204 = Cool down
13205 = Mains settling
13206 = Engine Start
13207 = Start - Pause
13208 = Preglow
13209 = GCB dead bus close
13210 = MCB dead bus close
13211 = Emergency run
13212 = Turning
13213 = Ignition
13214 = Crank protect
13215 = Emergency/Critical
13216 = Idle run active
13250 = Gen. stable time
13251 = In operation
13252 = Power limited prerun
13253 = AUTO mode ready
13254 = Ramp to rated
13255 = GCB open
13256 = Unloading generator
13257 = MCB open
13258 = Loading generator
13259 = Synchronization GCB
13260 = Synchronization MCB
13261 = GCB -> MCB Delay
13262 = MCB -> GCB Delay
13263 = Start w/o Load
13264 = Unloading mains
13265 = Synchronization permissive
13266 = Synchronization check
13267 = Synchronization off
13268 = GGB open
13269 = Synchronization GGB
13270 = GGB dead busbar closure
13271 = Run-up synchronization
13272 = GGB -> MCB Delay
13273 = MCB -> GGB Delay
13281 = Derating active

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
13282 = Unloading LS5
13283 = Synchronization LS5
13284 = Inhibit cranking
13285 = Set change
13287 = Uprating active
13288 = Gen excitation lim.
13309 = P(V) derating
13311 = Inh.dead bus closure
14354 = STOP Mode
14355 = MAN Mode
14763 = System update
14775 = Keypad locked
450122 450121 3,4,5,6 2520 Gen. real energy 0.01 MWh
450124 450123 41 1,2 2540 Engine, number of start requests 1
450125 450124 3,4,5,6 2522 Gen. positive reactive energy 0.01 Mvarh
450127 450126 42 1,2 2558 Hours until next maintenance 1 h
450128 450127 3,4,5,6 2568 Gen. hours of operation 0.01 h
450130 450129 43 1,2 5541 Setpoint frequency 0.01 Hz
450131 450130 3,4,5,6 5542 Setpoint active power 0.1 kW
450133 450132 44 1,2,3,4 5640 Setpoint voltage 1 V
450135 450134 5,6 5641 Setpoint power factor 0.001
450136 450135 45 1,2 4153 Idle mode monitoring OR ramp to rated state is Mask: 8000h Bit
active
Idle mode active Mask: 4000h Bit
Start without closing GCB Mask: 2000h Bit
Internal Mask: 1000h Bit
A manual START has been requested Mask: 0800h Bit
A manual STOP has been requested Mask: 0400h Bit
Cooldown is active Mask: 0200h Bit
Auxiliary services generally active Mask: 0100h Bit
Engine Monitoring delay timer has expired Mask: 0080h Bit
Breaker delay timer has expired Mask: 0040h Bit
Engine start is requested Mask: 0020h Bit
Critical mode is active in automatic mode Mask: 0010h Bit
Engine is released (speed governor is enabled) Mask: 0008h Bit
Auxiliary services prerun is active Mask: 0004h Bit
Auxiliary services postrun is active Mask: 0002h Bit
Lamp test is active Mask: 0001h Bit
450137 450136 3,4 4154 Crank (Starter) is active Mask: 8000h Bit
Operating Magnet / Gasrelay is active Mask: 4000h Bit
Preglow / Ignition is active Mask: 2000h Bit
Mains settling timer is running Mask: 1000h Bit

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
Emergency mode is currently active Mask: 0800h Bit
Free PID Controller 3: Lower Command Mask: 0200h Bit
Free PID Controller 3: Raise Command Mask: 0100h Bit
Stopping Magnet is active Mask: 0020h Bit
Excitation AVR (Run-up synchronization) Mask: 0010h Bit
The genset runs mains parallel Mask: 0008h Bit
Increment Engine Start Counter Mask: 0001h Bit
450138 450137 5,6 4155 3-Position Controller Freq./Power raise Mask: 8000h Bit
3-Position Controller Freq./Power lower Mask: 4000h Bit
3-Position Controller Volt./ReactPow raise Mask: 2000h Bit
3-Position Controller Volt./ReactPow lower Mask: 1000h Bit
GCB is closed Mask: 0800h Bit
MCB is closed Mask: 0400h Bit
Derating active Mask: 0200h Bit
Synchronisation GCB is active Mask: 0100h Bit
Opening GCB is active Mask: 0080h Bit
Closing GCB is active Mask: 0040h Bit
Synchronisation MCB is active Mask: 0020h Bit
Opening MCB is active Mask: 0010h Bit
Closing MCB is active Mask: 0008h Bit
Unloading generator is active Mask: 0004h Bit
Unloading mains is active Mask: 0002h Bit
Power limited prerun Mask: 0001h Bit
450139 450138 46 1,2 4156 GGB is closed Mask: 8000h Bit
GGB is released Mask: 4000h Bit
Synchronisation GGB is active Mask: 2000h Bit
Opening GGB is active Mask: 1000h Bit
Closing GGB is active Mask: 0800h Bit
Dead busbar closure request for GCB or MCB or Mask: 0400h Bit
GGB
Active power load share is active Mask: 0200h Bit
Reactive power load share is active Mask: 0100h Bit
Generator with a closed GCB is requested Mask: 0080h Bit
LDSS: The Engine shall start Mask: 0040h Bit
LDSS: The Engine shall stop Mask: 0020h Bit

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
LDSS: The Engine shall stop, if possible Mask: 0010h Bit
LDSS: Minimum Running Time is active Mask: 0008h Bit
LDSS: The LDSS function is active Mask: 0004h Bit
The Critical Mode Postrun is active Mask: 0002h Bit
AUTOMATIC Run: Switch to Operating Mode Mask: 0001h Bit

STOP
450140 450139 3,4 4150 internal Mask: 8000h Bit
450141 450140 5,6 10284 State external Digital Input 32 latched Mask: 8000h Bit
450142 450141 47 1,2 8009 Output to external CAN-I/O Relay 32 Mask: 8000h Bit
Relay 31 Mask: 4000h Bit

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
450143 450142 3,4 10170 External Analog input 1 changeable
450145 450144 48 1,2 10172 External Analog input 3 changeable
450159 450158 5,6 10245 External Analog Output 1 0.01 %
450160 450159 53 1,2 10255 External Analog Output 2 0.01 %
450163 450162 54 1,2 internal
450164 450163 3,4,5,6 2580 Period of use counter
450166 450165 55 1,2 10190 GGB fail to close latched Mask: 8000h Bit
GGB fail to open latched Mask: 4000h Bit
Mask: 2000h Bit
Mask: 1000h Bit

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
Temperature deviation level 1 Mask: 0800h Bit
Temperature deviation wire break Mask: 0200h Bit
Mask: 0100h Bit
Mask: 0080h Bit
Mask: 0040h Bit
Mask: 0020h Bit
Mask: 0010h Bit
Mask: 0008h Bit
Mask: 0004h Bit
Mask: 0002h Bit
Mask: 0001h Bit
450167 450166 3,4,5,6 219 Nominal active power in system (in own segment) 1 kW
450169 450168 56 1,2 4157 Command to CB-control 1 (OR) Mask: 8000h Bit
Command to CB-control 2 (OR) Mask: 4000h Bit
Gen excitation limit active Mask: 0200h Bit
Neutral interlocking closed NC Mask: 0100h Bit
Uprating active Mask: 0080h Bit
Extended Busbar F okay Mask: 0040h Bit
Extended Busbar V okay Mask: 0020h Bit
Extended Busbar F/V okay Mask: 0010h Bit
Extended Busbar is dead Mask: 0008h Bit
Phaseangle MNS/BUS okay Mask: 0004h Bit
Phaseangle GEN/BUS okay Mask: 0002h Bit
Inhibit cranking Mask: 0001h Bit
450170 450169 3,4,5,6 218 Active real power in system (in own segment) 1 kW
450172 450171 57 1,2 10277 Diff. outlet-inlet temp. (ANIN10-ANIN9) 1 °C
450173 450172 3,4,5,6 217 Active power reserve in system (in own segment) 1 kW
450175 450174 58 1,2 15109 J1939 MTU ADEC ECU Failure Codes 1
450176 450175 3,4 239 System act.nom.pwr. 0.01 %
450177 450176 5,6 240 Syst.total real pwr. 0.01 %
450178 450177 59 1,2 15304 Engine Stop Information (extracted from DEUTZ- 1 (enum.
specific J1939-Message) )

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
Notes
Please see Deutz documentation for correct data!
We know ...
Motorstopinformation:
0 = Keine Abschaltung
1 = Motorschutz
2 = CAN Botschaft Engine Stop Request
3 = Öldruck zu niedrig
4 = Ölstand zu niedrig
5 = Kühlmitteltemperatur zu hoch
6 = Kühlmittelstand zu niedrig
7 = Ladelufttemperatur
8 = reserviert (Abstellung über SAE-J1587)
9 = reserviert (Abstellung über VP2)
FEFFh = Sensorfehler
FFFFh = Nicht erreichbar
450179 450178 3,4 241 Syst.res.real power 0.01 %
450180 450179 5,6 15311 Engine Derate Request 0.1 %
450181 450180 60 1,2 15305 J1939 DLN2-Message Scania S6
Engine Coolant Temperature
J1939-Message not available Mask 8000h
Sensor fault Mask 4000h
High Temperature. Mask 2000h
NOT High Temperature Mask 1000h
Engine Oil Pressure
Low Pressure Mask 0200h
NOT Low Pressure Mask 0100h
High Engine Oil Level
High Level Mask 0020h
NOT High Level Mask 0010h
Low Engine Oil Level
Low Level Mask 0002h
NOT Low Level Mask 0001h
450182 450181 3,4 15313 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Level 0.1 %
450183 450182 5,6 15312 Battery Potential, Switched 0.1 V

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
1. Active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DM1)
450184 450183 61 1,2,3,4 15400 SPN
450186 450185 5,6 15401 FMT Mask FF00h
15402 OC Mask 00FFh
450187 450186 62 1,2,3,4 15403 SPN
450189 450188 5,6 15404 FMT Mask FF00h
15405 OC Mask 00FFh
450190 450189 63 1,2,3,4 15406 SPN
450192 450191 5,6 15407 FMT Mask FF00h
15408 OC Mask 00FFh
450193 450192 64 1,2,3,4 15409 SPN
450195 450194 5,6 15410 FMT Mask FF00h
15411 OC Mask 00FFh
450196 450195 65 1,2,3,4 15412 SPN
450198 450197 5,6 15413 FMT Mask FF00h
15414 OC Mask 00FFh
450199 450198 66 1,2,3,4 15415 SPN
450201 450200 5,6 15416 FMT Mask FF00h
15418 OC Mask 00FFh
450202 450201 67 1,2,3,4 15419 SPN
450204 450203 5,6 15420 FMT Mask FF00h
15421 OC Mask 00FFh
450205 450204 68 1,2,3,4 15422 SPN
450207 450206 5,6 15423 FMT Mask FF00h
15424 OC Mask 00FFh
450208 450207 69 1,2,3,4 15425 SPN
450210 450209 5,6 15426 FMT Mask FF00h
15427 OC Mask 00FFh

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
450211 450210 70 1,2,3,4 15428 SPN
450213 450212 5,6 15429 FMT Mask FF00h
15430 OC Mask 00FFh
1. Previously Active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DM2)
450214 450213 71 1,2,3,4 15450 SPN
450216 450215 5,6 15451 FMT Mask FF00h
15452 OC Mask 00FFh
450217 450216 72 1,2,3,4 15453 SPN
450219 450218 5,6 15454 FMT Mask FF00h
15455 OC Mask 00FFh
450220 450219 73 1,2,3,4 15456 SPN
450222 450221 5,6 15457 FMT Mask FF00h
15458 OC Mask 00FFh
450223 450222 74 1,2,3,4 15459 SPN
450225 450224 5,6 15460 FMT Mask FF00h
15461 OC Mask 00FFh
450226 450225 75 1,2,3,4 15462 SPN
450228 450227 5,6 15463 FMT Mask FF00h
15464 OC Mask 00FFh
450229 450228 76 1,2,3,4 15465 SPN
450231 450230 5,6 15466 FMT Mask FF00h
15467 OC Mask 00FFh
450232 450231 77 1,2,3,4 15468 SPN
450234 450233 5,6 15469 FMT Mask FF00h
15470 OC Mask 00FFh
450235 450234 78 1,2,3,4 15471 SPN
450237 450236 5,6 15472 FMT Mask FF00h
15473 OC Mask 00FFh
450238 450237 79 1,2,3,4 15474 SPN

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
450240 450239 5,6 15475 FMT Mask FF00h
15476 OC Mask 00FFh
450241 450240 80 1,2,3,4 15477 SPN
450243 450242 5,6 15478 FMT Mask FF00h
15479 OC Mask 00FFh
450244 450243 81 1,2 15395 DM1 Lamp Status
Malfunction Lamp
internal Mask 8000h
internal Mask 4000h
On Mask 2000h
Off Mask 1000h
Red Stop Lamp
internal Mask 0800h
internal Mask 0400h
On Mask 0200h
Off Mask 0100h
Amber Warning Lamp
internal Mask 0080h
internal Mask 0040h
On Mask 0020h
Off Mask 0010h
Protect Lamp
internal Mask 0008h
internal Mask 0004h
On Mask 0002h
Off Mask 0001h
450245 450244 3,4 15445 DM2 Lamp Status
Malfunction Lamp
internal Mask 8000h
internal Mask 4000h
On Mask 2000h
Off Mask 1000h
Red Stop Lamp
internal Mask 0800h
internal Mask 0400h
On Mask 0200h
Off Mask 0100h

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
Amber Warning Lamp
internal Mask 0080h
internal Mask 0040h
On Mask 0020h
Off Mask 0010h
Protect Lamp
internal Mask 0008h
internal Mask 0004h
On Mask 0002h
Off Mask 0001h
450246 450245 5,6 15314 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank Tem‐ 1 °C
perature
450247 450246 82 1,2,3,4 15200 Engine Speed (j1939-EEC1) 0.1 rpm
Notes
Value for Error indicator: 429496729,4
Value for Not available: 429496729,5
450249 450248 5,6 15202 Engine Coolant Temperature (J1939-ET1) 1 °C
Notes
Value for Error indicator: 32766
Value for Not available: 32767 signed
450250 450249 83 1,2,3,4 15201 Total engine hours (j1939-HOURS) 1 h
Notes
Value for Not available: 4294967295
450252 450251 5,6 15203 Fuel temperature (j1939-ET1) 1 °C
Notes
450253 450252 84 1,2,3,4 15204 Engine Oil Temperature (j1939-ET1) 0.01 °C
Notes
Value for Not available: 21474836,47 signed
450255 450254 5,6 15205 Engine Oil Pressure (j1939-EFL/P1) 1 kPa
Notes
450256 450255 85 1,2,3,4 15211 Fuel Rate (j1939-LFE) 0.01 L/h
Notes
450258 450257 5,6 15206 Coolant Level (j1939-EFL/P1) 0.1 %

Appendix

eter ID
addr. (Mux)
Notes
450259 450258 86 1,2 15207 Throttle position (j1939-EEC2) 0.1 %
Notes
450260 450259 3,4 15208 Load at current Speed (j1939-EEC2) 1 %
Notes
450261 450260 5,6 15210 Engine oil level (j1939-EFL/P1) 0.1 %
Notes
450262 450261 87 1,2 15214 Boost pressure (j1939-IC1) 1 kPa
Notes
450263 450262 3,4 15215 Intake Manifold Temp (j1939-IC1) 1 °C
Notes
450264 450263 5,6 15212 Barometric Pressure (j1939-AMB) 0.1 kPa
Notes
450265 450264 88 1,2 15213 Air inlet temperature (j1939-AMB) 1 °C
Notes
450266 450265 3,4 15209 Actual engine torque (j1939-EEC1) 1 %
Notes
450267 450266 5,6 15315 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 2 0.1 %
Level
450268 450267 89 1,2,3,4 15216 Exhaust Gas Temp.(J1939-IC1) 0.01 °C
Notes
Value for Not available: 21474836,47 signed
450270 450269 5,6 15316 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 2 1 °C

Temperature

Appendix
Data Protocols > Protocol 5004 (Generator V...
9.2.2 Protocol 5004 (Generator Values Visualization)
CAN Parameter ID Description Multiplier Units
Data byte 0 Data byte

(Mux)
0 1,2 Protocol ID, always 5004 –
0 3,4 10100 Pickup speed 1 rpm
0 5,6 - internal
1 1,2 160 Gen. power factor 0.001
1 3,4,5,6 170 Av. Gen. Wye-Voltage 0.1 V
2 1,2 144 Gen. frequency 0.01 Hz
2 3,4,5,6 171 Av. Gen. Delta-Voltage 0.1 V
3 1,2 10310 Analog output 1 0,01 %
3 3,4,5,6 185 Av. Gen. Current 0.001 A
4 1,2 10311 Analog output 2 0,01 %
4 3,4,5,6 161 Meas. ground current 0.001 A
5 1,2 10133 05.01 Engine Over speed 1 latched Mask: 8000h Bit
05.02 Engine Over speed 2 latched Mask: 4000h Bit
05.03 Engine under speed 1 latched Mask: 2000h Bit
05.04 Engine under speed 2 latched Mask: 1000h Bit
05.05 Unintended stop detected latched Mask: 0800h Bit
05.07 Speed detection alarm latched Mask: 0400h Bit
05.06 Shutdown malfunction detected latched Mask: 0200h Bit
08.05 GCB fail to close latched Mask: 0100h Bit
08.06 GCB fail to open latched Mask: 0080h Bit
08.07 MCB fail to close latched Mask: 0040h Bit
08.08 MCB fail to open latched Mask: 0020h Bit
08.10 General CAN-J1939 fault latched Mask: 0010h Bit
05.08 Start fail detected latched Mask: 0008h Bit
05.09 Maintenance days exceeded latched Mask: 0004h Bit
05.10 Maintenance hours exceeded latched Mask: 0002h Bit
08.18 CANopen error at CAN Interface 1 Mask: 0001h Bit
5 3,4,5,6 159 Calculated ground current 0.001 A
6 1,2 10149 08.30 Timeout Synchronisation GCB Mask: 8000h Bit
08.31 Timeout Synchronisation MCB Mask: 4000h Bit
08.32 Timeout Synchronisation GGB Mask: 2000h Bit
05.11 Charge fail (D+) latched Mask: 1000h Bit
Operating range failed 12 (phase rot. mism.) Mask: 0800h Bit
08.45 CPU overload R1 trip Mask: 0400h Bit
08.47 MCB failure 50BF Mask: 0200h Bit
08.46 GCB failure 50BF Mask: 0100h Bit

Appendix

(Mux)
05.22 ECU Protect alarm Mask: 0080h Bit
05.23 ECU Emission alarm Mask: 0040h Bit
08.19 CANopen error at CAN 2 latched Mask: 0020h Bit
08.16 Parameter Alignment LDSS latched Mask: 0010h
08.27 Missing easYgen latched (same as ID 10190) Mask: 0008h
08.48 MCB plausibility Mask: 0004h Bit
05.13 ECU red lamp alarm latched Mask: 0002h Bit
05.14 ECU yellow(amber) lamp alarm latched Mask: 0001h Bit
6 3,4,5,6 111 Gen. current 1 0.001 A
7 1,2,3,4 112 Gen. current 2 0.001 A
7 5,6 - internal
8 1,2,3,4 113 Gen. current 3 0.001 A
8 5,6 - internal
9 1,2,3,4 135 Total gen. power 1 W
9 5,6 10134 06.01 Generator over frequency 1 latched Mask: 8000h Bit
06.02 Generator over frequency 2 latched Mask: 4000h Bit
06.03 Generator under frequency 1 latched Mask: 2000h Bit
06.04 Generator under frequency 2 latched Mask: 1000h Bit
06.05 Generator over voltage 1 latched Mask: 0800h Bit
06.06 Generator over voltage 2 latched Mask: 0400h Bit
06.07 Generator under voltage 1 latched Mask: 0200h Bit
06.08 Generator under voltage 2 latched Mask: 0100h Bit
06.09 Generator over current 1 latched Mask: 0080h Bit
06.12 Reverse / reduced power 1 latched Mask: 0010h Bit
06.13 Reverse / reduced power 2 latched Mask: 0008h Bit
06.14 Generator overload IOP 1 latched Mask: 0004h Bit
06.15 Generator overload IOP 2 latched Mask: 0002h Bit
internal Mask: 0001h
10 1,2,3,4 136 Total gen. reactive power 1 var
10 5,6 10138 06.16 Generator unbalanced load 1 latched Mask: 8000h Bit
06.17 Generator unbalanced load 2 latched Mask: 4000h Bit
06.18 Generator voltage asymmetry latched Mask: 2000h Bit
06.19 Ground fault 1 latched Mask: 1000h Bit
06.20 Ground fault 2 latched Mask: 0800h Bit
06.21 Gen. Phase Rotation mismatch Latched Mask: 0400h Bit

Appendix

(Mux)
06.29 Gen. active power mismatch Latched Mask: 0200h Bit
06.30 Generator unloading mismatch Latched Mask: 0100h Bit
06.22 Inverse time over current Latched Mask: 0080h Bit
06.31 Operating Range failed latched Mask: 0040h Bit
06.23 Generator overload MOP 1 latched Mask: 0020h Bit
06.24 Generator overload MOP 2 latched Mask: 0010h Bit
06.25 Gen.Power Factor lagging 1 latched Mask: 0008h Bit
06.26 Gen.Power Factor lagging 2 latched Mask: 0004h Bit
06.27 Gen.Power Factor leading 1 latched Mask: 0002h Bit
06.28 Gen.Power Factor leading 2 latched Mask: 0001h Bit
11 1,2,3,4 108 Gen. voltage L1-L2 0.1 V
11 5,6 10131 01.11 New Alarm triggered Mask: 8000h Bit
01.06 Alarm class F latched Mask: 0020h Bit
01.05 Alarm class E latched Mask: 0010h Bit
01.04 Alarm class D latched Mask: 0008h Bit
01.03 Alarm class C latched Mask: 0004h Bit
01.02 Alarm class B latched Mask: 0002h Bit
01.01 Alarm class A latched Mask: 0001h Bit
12 1,2 4153 Idle mode OR Ramp to rated active Mask: 8000h
04.15 Idle run is active Mask: 4000h
04.12 Start without closing GCB Mask: 2000h
04.64 Key activation Mask: 1000h
A manual START has been requested Mask: 0800h
A manual STOP has been requested Mask: 0400h
04.10 Cooldown is active Mask: 0200h
03.01 Auxiliary Services is active Mask: 0100h
03.07 Engine monitoring delay expired Mask: 0080h
03.08 Breaker delay timer has expired Mask: 0040h
03.25 Engine shall run Mask: 0020h
04.27 Critical mode is active Mask: 0010h
03.06 Engine release is active Mask: 0008h

Appendix

(Mux)
03.30 Auxiliary services prerun is active Mask: 0004h
03.31 Auxiliary services postrun is active Mask: 0002h
04.61 Lamp test request Mask: 0001h
12 3,4,5,6 114 Gen. voltage L1-N 0.1 V
13 1,2,3,4 109 Gen. voltage L2-L3 0.1 V
13 5,6 - internal
14 1,2,3,4 115 Gen. voltage L2-N 0.1 V
14 5,6 - internal
15 1,2,3,4 110 Gen. voltage L3-L1 0.1 V
15 5,6 - internal
16 1,2,3,4 116 Gen. voltage 3-N 0.1 V
16 5,6 - internal
17 1,2,3,4 2522 Positive reactive generator energy 0,01 Mvar

h
17 5,6 - internal
18 1,2 5541 Frequency setpoint 0,01 Hz
18 3,4,5,6 5542 Active Power setpoint 0,1 kW
19 1,2,3,4 5640 Voltage setpoint 1 V
19 5,6 5641 Power Factor setpoint 0,001
20 1,2 4154 03.02 Starter / Crank is active Mask: 8000h
03.28 Operating Magnet / Gasrelay is active Mask: 4000h
03.04 Preglow or Ignition is active Mask: 2000h
04.11 Mains settling timer is running Mask: 1000h
04.09 Emergency mode is currently active Mask: 0800h
03.40 Remote Shutdown (ID503, Bit9) Mask: 0400h
03.33 Free PID Controller 3: Lower Command Mask: 0200h
03.32 Free PID Controller 3: Raise Command Mask: 0100h
03.27 Stop solenoid is active Mask: 0020h
03.24 Excitation AVR (Run-up Synchronization) Mask: 0010h
The genset runs mains parallel Mask: 0008h
Increment Engine Start Counter Mask: 0001h
20 3,4 4155 03.20 3-Pos. Controller Freq./Power raise Mask: 8000h
03.21 3-Pos. Controller Freq./Power lower Mask: 4000h
03.22 3-Pos. Controller Volt./ReactPow raise Mask: 2000h
03.23 3-Pos. Controller Volt./ReactPow lower Mask: 1000h
04.06 GCB is closed Mask: 0800h
04.07 MCB is closed Mask: 0400h

Appendix
Data Protocols > Protocol 5005 (Mains Value...

(Mux)
05.16 Derating active (J1939 or freely) Mask: 0200h
04.18 Synchronisation GCB procedure is active Mask: 0100h
04.19 Opening GCB relay is active Mask: 0080h
04.20 Close command GCB is active Mask: 0040h
04.21 Synchronisation MCB procedure is active Mask: 0020h
04.22 Open command MCB is active Mask: 0010h
04.23 Close command MCB is active Mask: 0008h
04.28 Unloading generator is active Mask: 0004h
04.29 Unloading mains is active Mask: 0002h
04.30 Power limited prerun Mask: 0001h
20 5,6 4156 04.16 GGB is closed Mask: 8000h
04.17 GGB is released Mask: 4000h
04.24 Synchronisation GGB procedure is active Mask: 2000h
04.25 Open command GGB is active Mask: 1000h
04.26 Close command GGB is active Mask: 0800h
Dead busbar closure requ. for GCB,MCB or GGB Mask: 0400h
4.62 Active power load share is active Mask: 0200h
4.63 Reactive power load share is active Mask: 0100h
Generator with a closed GCB is requested Mask: 0080h
LDSS: The Engine shall start Mask: 0040h
LDSS: The Engine shall stop Mask: 0020h
LDSS: The Engine shall stop, if possible Mask: 0010h
LDSS: Minimum Running Time is active Mask: 0008h
04.43 The LDSS function is active Mask: 0004h
04.60 Critical mode postrun Mask: 0002h
AUTOMATIC Run: Switch to Operating Mode STOP Mask: 0001h
9.2.3 Protocol 5005 (Mains Values Visualization)

(Mux)
0 1,2 - Protocol ID (always 5005) –
0 3,4 10100 Pickup speed 1 rpm
0 5,6 - internal
1 1,2 147 Mains frequency 0.01 Hz
1 3,4,5,6 173 Av. Mains Wye-Voltage 0.1 V
2 1,2 208 Mains power factor 0.001
2 3,4,5,6 174 Av. Mains Delta-Voltage 0.1 V
3 1,2,3,4 207 Av. Mains Current 0.1 V

Appendix
Data Protocols > Protocol 5005 (Mains Value...

(Mux)
3 5,6 - internal
4 1,2 10111 Analog input 1 (changeable)
4 3,4,5,6 134 Mains current L1 0.001 A
5 3,4,5,6 140 Total mains power 1 W
6 3,4,5,6 150 Total mains reactive power 1 var
7 1,2 10135 Mains ov.freq. 1 latched Mask: 8000h Bit
Mains ov.freq. 2 latched Mask: 4000h Bit
Mains phase shift latched Mask: 0080h Bit
Mains decoupling latched Mask: 0040h Bit
Mains phase rot. miswired latched Mask: 0004h Bit
7 3,4 10278 Mains import power 1 latched Mask: 8000h Bit
Mains import power 2 latched Mask: 4000h Bit
Mains df/dt latched Mask: 0080h Bit
Mains act.pwr mismatch latched Mask: 0040h Bit
Mains. Time dep. Voltage 1 latched Mask: 0020h Bit
Mains Voltage Increase latched Mask: 0008h Bit
Mains QV Monitoring step 1 latched Mask: 0002h Bit
Mains QV Monitoring step 2 latched Mask: 0001h Bit
7 5,6 - internal

Appendix
Data Protocols > Protocol 5010 (Basic Visua...

(Mux)
8 1,2,3,4 118 Mains voltage L1-L2 0.1 V
8 5,6 - internal
9 1,2,3,4 121 Mains voltage L1-N 0.1 V
9 5,6 - internal
10 5,6 - internal
11 5,6 - internal
12 5,6 - internal
13 5,6 - internal
" only: ..." applies to easYgen-XXXX Package

P2 only.
Modbus Parameter Description Multiplier Units

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450001 450000 Protocol-ID, always 5010 –
450002 450001 3181 Scaling Power (16 bits) Exponent 10x W

(5;4;3;2)
450003 450002 3182 Scaling Volts (16 bits) Exponent 10x V

(2;1;0;-1)
450004 450003 3183 Scaling Amps (16 bits) Exponent 10x A

(0;-1)
450005 450004 internal
450006 450005 internal
450007 450006 internal
450008 450007 internal
450009 450008 internal
AC Generator And Busbar Values
450010 450009 144 Generator frequency 0.01 Hz
450011 450010 246 Total generator power scaled defined by index W

3181 (modicon Address
450002)
450012 450011 247 Total generator reactive power scaled defined by index var
450002)

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450013 450012 160 Generator power factor 0.001
450014 450013 248 Generator voltage L1-L2 scaled defined by index V

450003)

450003)

450003)
450017 450016 251 Generator voltage L1-N scaled defined by index V

450003)

450003)

450003)
450020 450019 255 Generator current 1 scaled defined by index A

450004)

450004)

450004)
450023 450022 209 Busbar 1: Frequency 0.01 Hz
450024 450023 254 Busbar 1: voltage L1-L2 scaled defined by index V

450003)
450025 450024 internal
450026 450025 internal
450027 450026 internal
450028 450027 internal
450029 450028 5541 Setpoint frequency 1 Hz
450030 450029 5641 Setpoint power factor (cosphi) 1
AC Mains Values
450031 450030 147 Mains frequency 0.01 Hz
450032 450031 258 Total mains power scaled defined by index W

450002)
450033 450032 259 Total mains reactive power scaled defined by index var
450002)
450034 450033 208 Mains power factor 0.001
450035 450034 260 Mains voltage L1-L2 scaled defined by index V

450003)

450003)

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)

450003)
450038 450037 263 Mains voltage L1-N scaled defined by index V

450003)

450003)

450003)
450041 450040 266 Mains current L1 scaled defined by index A

450004)
450042 450041 internal
450043 450042 internal
450044 450043 267 Average LS5 Delta Mains voltage L-L scaled defined by index V
3182
450045 450044 268 Average LS5 Wye Mains voltage L-N scaled defined by index V
3182
AC System Values
450046 450045 239 Nominal real power in system 0.01 %

(Refer‐
ence
value
param‐
eter
1825 Ä p.
496.)
450047 450046 240 Real power in system 0.01 %

(Refer‐
ence
value
param‐
eter
1825 Ä p.
496.)
450048 450047 241 Reserve real power in system 0.01 %

(Refer‐
ence
value
param‐
eter
1825 Ä p.
496.)
450049 450048 269 Active power LS5 scaled defined by index W

3181
450050 450049 270 Reactive power LS5 scaled defined by index var
3181
450051 450050 4608 Average LS5 Mains delta frequency L-L 0.01 Hz
DC Analogue Values (Engine Values)
450052 450051 10100 Engine Pickup speed 1 rpm
450053 450052 10110 Battery voltage 0.1 V
450054 450053 10159 AI Auxiliary excitation D+ 0.1 V
450055 450054 2540 Engine, number of start requests 1

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450056 450055 2558 Hours until next maintenance 1 h
450057 450056 10111 Analog input 1 changeable
450067 450066 internal
450068 450067 internal
450069 450068 10310 Analog output 1 0,01 %
450070 450069 10311 Analog output 2 0,01 %
450071 450070 1031 Analog output 3 0,01 %
450072 450071 10318 Analog output 4 0,01 %
450073 450072 10319 Analog output 5 0,01 %
450074 450073 10320 Analog output 6 0,01 %
450075 450074 10170 External Analog input 1 changeable
450091 450090 10245 External Analog Output 1 0,01 %
450095 450094 2556 Days until next maintenance 1 days

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450096 450095 1027 Difference outlet-inlet temperature (AI10- changea

AI9)
450097 450096 internal
450098 450097 internal
450099 450098 internal
Control And Status
450100 450099 532 Control mode (STOP/AUTO/MANUAL) Mask: 000Fh (enum.)

1 = AUTO
2 = STOP
4 = MANUAL
450101 450100 10202 State Display ID description refer to (enum.)

Ä Chapter 9.5.3 “Status
Messages” on page 1079
450102 450101 reserved
450103 450102 4153 ControlBits 1
Idle mode OR Ramp to rated active Mask: 8000h Bit
Idle mode active Mask: 4000h Bit
Start without closing GCB Mask: 2000h Bit
A manual START has been requested Mask: 0800h Bit
A manual STOP has been requested Mask: 0400h Bit
Cooldown is active Mask: 0200h Bit
Auxiliary services generally active Mask: 0100h Bit
Engine Monitoring delay timer has expired Mask: 0080h Bit
Breaker delay timer has expired Mask: 0040h Bit
Engine start is requested Mask: 0020h Bit
Critical mode is active in automatic mode Mask: 0010h Bit
Engine is released (speed governor is ena‐ Mask: 0008h Bit

bled)
Auxiliary services prerun is active Mask: 0004h Bit
Auxiliary services postrun is active Mask: 0002h Bit
internal activation of Lamp test Mask: 0001h Bit
450104 450103 4154 ControlBits 2
Crank (Starter) is active Mask: 8000h Bit
Operating Magnet / Gasrelay is active Mask: 4000h Bit
Preglow / Ignition is active Mask: 2000h Bit
Mains settling timer is running Mask: 1000h Bit
Emergency mode is currently active Mask: 0800h Bit

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
Stopping Magnet is active Mask: 0020h Bit
Excitation AVR is active (Run-up Synchroni‐ Mask: 0010h Bit

zation)
The genset runs mains parallel Mask: 0008h Bit
Increment Engine Start Counter Mask: 0001h Bit
450105 450104 4155 ControlBits 3
3-Position Controller Freq./Power raise Mask: 8000h Bit
3-Position Controller Freq./Power lower Mask: 4000h Bit
3-Position Controller Volt./ReactPow raise Mask: 2000h Bit
3-Position Controller Volt./ReactPow lower Mask: 1000h Bit
GCB is closed Mask: 0800h Bit
MCB is closed Mask: 0400h Bit
Power Derating is active Mask: 0200h Bit
Synchronization GCB is active Mask: 0100h Bit
Opening GCB relay is active Mask: 0080h Bit
Closing GCB relais active Mask: 0040h Bit
Synchronization MCB is active Mask: 0020h Bit
Opening MCB is active Mask: 0010h Bit
Closing MCB is active Mask: 0008h Bit
Unloading generator is active Mask: 0004h Bit
Unloading mains is active Mask: 0002h Bit
Power limited prerun Mask: 0001h Bit
450106 450105 4156 ControlBits 4
GGB is closed Mask: 8000h Bit
GGB is released Mask: 4000h Bit
Synchronisation GGB is active Mask: 2000h Bit
Opening GGB is active Mask: 1000h Bit
Closing GGB is active Mask: 0800h Bit
Dead busbar closure request for GCB or Mask: 0400h Bit

MCB or GGB
Active power load share is active Mask: 0200h Bit
Reactive power load share is active Mask: 0100h Bit
Generator with a closed GCB is requested Mask: 0080h Bit
LDSS: The Engine shall start Mask: 0040h Bit
LDSS: The Engine shall stopped Mask: 0020h Bit
LDSS: The Engine shall stopped, if possible Mask: 0010h Bit
LDSS: Minimum Running Time is active Mask: 0008h Bit
LDSS: The LDSS function is active Mask: 0004h Bit

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
The Critical Mode Postrun is active Mask: 0002h Bit
AUTOMATIC Run: Switch to Operating Mask: 0001h Bit

Mode STOP
450107 450106 4150 GAPControlBits5
Opening GCB active 04.70 Mask: 0008h Bit
450108 450107 internal
Discrete Outputs
450109 450108 10107 Relay Outputs 1
Relay-Output 1 (inverted) Mask: 8000h Bit

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450110 450109 internal
450110 450109 10109 Relay Outputs 2
Mask: 8000h Bit

Relay-Output 13,
Relay-Output 14, Mask: 4000h Bit
Open Collector Output (Sinking output) Mask: 0002h Bit

SO1,
Open Collector Output (Sinking output) Mask: 0001h Bit

SO2,
450111 450110 8005 Relay Outputs 3
External Discrete Output DO 16 Mask: 8000h Bit
450112 450111 8009 Relay Outputs 4

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450113 450112 4157 Command to CB-Control 1 (OR) Mask: 8000h Bit
Command to CB-Control 2 (OR) Mask: 4000h Bit
Gen excitation limit active Mask: 0200h Bit
Neutral Interlocking Mask: 0100h Bit
450114 450113 reserved
Alarm Management
General
450115 450114 10131 Alarm Class Latched

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
Alarm class F latched Mask: 0020h Bit
Alarm class E latched Mask: 0010h Bit
Alarm class D latched Mask: 0008h Bit
Alarm class C latched Mask: 0004h Bit
Alarm class B latched Mask: 0002h Bit
Alarm class A latched Mask: 0001h Bit
450116 450115 10149 Alarms 2 latched (unacknowledged)
GCB sync. Timeout Mask: 8000h Bit
MCB sync. Timeout Mask: 4000h Bit
GGB sync. Timeout Mask: 2000h Bit
Charge alt. low voltage (D+) Mask: 1000h Bit
Operating range failure 12 latched Mask: 0800h Bit
Mask: 0200h Bit

08.47 MCB failure 50BF
Mask: 0100h Bit

08.46 GCB failure 50BF
Mask: 0080h Bit

05.22 ECU Protect alarm
Mask: 0040h Bit

05.23 ECU Emission alarm
Missing members on CAN Mask: 0008h Bit
08.48 MCB plausibility Mask: 0004h Bit
Red stop lamp DM1 Mask: 0002h Bit
Amber warning lamp DM1 Mask: 0001h Bit
450117 450116 4169 Alarms 2 active (reserved)

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
GGB fail to close Mask: 8000h Bit
GGB fail to open Mask: 4000h Bit

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450120 450119 internal
Engine
Overspeed 1 Mask: 8000h Bit
Underspeed 1 Mask: 2000h Bit
Unintended stop Mask: 0800h Bit
Speed det. Alarm Mask: 0400h Bit
Shutdown malfunct. Mask: 0200h Bit
GCB fail to close Mask: 0100h Bit
GCB fail to open Mask: 0080h Bit
MCB fail to close Mask: 0040h Bit
MCB fail to open Mask: 0020h Bit
CAN-Fault J1939 Mask: 0010h Bit
Start fail Mask: 0008h Bit
Mainten. days exceeded Mask: 0004h Bit
Mainten. hours exceeded Mask: 0002h Bit

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450123 450122 10136 Alarms Analog Inputs 1 latched (unacknowl‐

edged)
Batt. overvolt.2 Mask: 0008h Bit
Batt. undervolt.2 Mask: 0004h Bit
Batt. overvolt.1 Mask: 0002h Bit
Batt. undervolt.1 Mask: 0001h Bit
450124 450123 4171 Alarms Analog Inputs 1 active (reserved)
450125 450124 reserved

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450126 450125 reserved
Generator
450127 450126 10134 Alarms Generator latched (unacknowl‐

edged)
Gen. overfreq. 1 Mask: 8000h Bit
Gen. overfreq. 2 Mask: 4000h Bit
Gen. underfreq. 1 Mask: 2000h Bit
Gen. underfreq. 2 Mask: 1000h Bit
Gen. overvolt. 1 Mask: 0800h Bit
Gen. overvolt. 2 Mask: 0400h Bit
Gen. undervolt. 1 Mask: 0200h Bit
Gen. undervolt. 2 Mask: 0100h Bit
Gen. overcurr. 1 Mask: 0080h Bit
Gen. Rv/Rd pow.1 Mask: 0010h Bit
Gen. Overload IOP 1 Mask: 0004h Bit
450128 450127 4161 Alarms Generator active (reserved)

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450129 450128 10138 Alarms Generator 1 latched (unacknowl‐

edged)
Unbal. load 1 Mask: 8000h Bit
Gen. Asymmetry Mask: 2000h Bit
Ground fault 1 Mask: 1000h Bit
Gen. phase rot. misw. Mask: 0400h Bit
Gen act. pwr mismatch Mask: 0200h Bit
Gen. unloading fault Mask: 0100h Bit
Inv. time ov.curr. Mask: 0080h Bit
Operating range failed, Mask: 0040h Bit
Gen. Overload MOP 1 Mask: 0020h Bit
Gen. overexcited 1 Mask: 0008h Bit
Gen. underexcited 1 Mask: 0002h Bit
450130 450129 4163 Alarms Generator 1 active (reserved)
450131 450130 reserved
450132 450131 reserved

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
Mains
450133 450132 10135 Alarms Mains latched (unacknowledged)
Mains ov.freq. 1 Mask: 8000h Bit
Mains un.freq. 1 Mask: 2000h Bit
Mains ov.volt. 1 Mask: 0800h Bit
Mains un.volt. 1 Mask: 0200h Bit
Mains phaseshift Mask: 0080h Bit
Mains decoupling Mask: 0040h Bit
Mains phase rot. Miswired Mask: 0004h Bit
450134 450133 4188 Alarms Mains active (reserved)
450135 450134 10278 Alarms Mains 1 latched (unacknowledged)
Mains import power 1 Mask: 8000h Bit

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
Mains export power 1 Mask: 2000h Bit
Mains overexcited 1 Mask: 0800h Bit
Mains underexcited 1 Mask: 0200h Bit
Mns act. pwr mismatch Mask: 0040h Bit
450136 450135 4187 Alarms Mains 1 active (reserved)
450137 450136 reserved
450138 450137 reserved
Digital Inputs
450139 450138 10132 Alarms Digital Inputs 1 latched (unacknowl‐

edged)

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
Digital Input 1 Mask: 8000h Bit
Digital Input 8 (reply GCB) Mask: 0100h Bit
450140 450139 4181 Alarms Digital Inputs 1 active (reserved)
450141 450140 16377 Alarms External Digital Inputs latched

(unacknowledged)
State external Digital Input 16 Mask: 8000h Bit

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
External Digital Input 15 Mask: 4000h Bit
450142 450141 4185 Alarms External Digital Inputs active

(reserved)
450143 450142 10284 Alarm External Digital Inputs 1 latched

(unacknowledged)

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450144 450143 4195 Alarm External Digital Inputs 1 active

(reserved)
450145 450144 10283 Alarms Digital Inputs 2 latched (unacknowl‐

edged)
State Digital Input DI 13, Mask: 8000h Bit

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450146 450145 4183 Alarms Digital Inputs 2 active
Discrete input 13 Mask: 8000h Bit
450147 450146 internal
450148 450147 internal
450149 450148 internal
450150 450149 internal
Flexible Thresholds
450151 450150 10279 Alarms Flexible thresholds 1-16 latched

(unacknowledged)

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
Alarm flexible limit 16 Mask: 8000h Bit
450152 450151 4175 Alarms Flexible thresholds 1-16 active

(reserved)

(unacknowledged)

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)

(reserved)

(unacknowledged)

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)

(reserved)
450157 450156 internal
450158 450157 internal
450159 450158 internal
DC Analogue Values Wirebreak

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450160 450159 10137 Alarms Analog Inputs Wire Break latched

(unacknowledged)
Analog inp. 1, wire break Mask: 0002h Bit
Analog inp. 4, wire break or shortcut, Mask: 0010h Bit
450161 450160 4173 Alarms Analog Inputs Wire Break active

(reserved)

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450162 450161 10285 Alarms External Analog Inputs Wire Break

latched (unacknowledged)
Ext. Analog Inp. 1, wire break Mask: 0001h Bit
450163 450162 4196 Alarms External Analog Inputs Wire Break

active (reserved)
450164 450163 internal

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450165 450164 internal
Alarms
450166 450165 10286
Neutral contactor reply mismatch Mask: 0100h Bit
Decoupling GCB«MCB Mask: 0080h Bit
Meas. difference 4105 VDE-AR-N 4105 Mask: 0040h Bit
Parameter alignment VDE-AR-N 4105 Mask: 0020h Bit
Missing member VDE-AR-N 4105 Mask: 0010h Bit
Busbar monitoring latched Mask: 0008h Bit
Plausibility GCB feedback latched Mask: 0004h Bit
Reactive load sharing mismatch latched Mask: 0002h Bit
Active load sharing mismatch latched Mask: 0001h Bit
450167 450166 5197 special Alarms active (reserved)

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450168 450167 internal
450169 450168 internal
450170 450169 internal
450171 450170 internal
Engine Management
Active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DM1)
450172 450171 15400 SPN of 1. entry low 16 bits of 19 bits of SPN
450173 450172 15401 15402 FMI / OC of 1. entry Hi-Byte: FMI Lo-Byte: OC
DM1 Lamp Status
450192 450191 15395 J1939 Lamp Status DM1
internal Mask 8000h
internal Mask 4000h
On Malfunction Lamp Mask 2000h
Off Malfunction Lamp Mask 1000h
internal Mask 0800h
internal Mask 0400h
On Red Stop Lamp Mask 0200h
Off Red Stop Lamp Mask 0100h
internal Mask 0080h
internal Mask 0040h
On Amber Warning Lamp Mask 0020h
Off Amber Warning Lamp Mask 0010h

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
internal Mask 0008h
internal Mask 0004h
On Protect Lamp Mask 0002h
Off Protect Lamp Mask 0001h
DM2 Lamp Status
450193 450192 15445 J1939 Lamp Status DM2
internal Mask 8000h
internal Mask 4000h
On Malfunction Lamp Mask 2000h
Off Malfunction Lamp Mask 1000h
internal Mask 0800h
internal Mask 0400h
On Red Stop Lamp Mask 0200h
Off Red Stop Lamp Mask 0100h
internal Mask 0080h
internal Mask 0040h
On Amber Warning Lamp Mask 0020h
Off Amber Warning Lamp Mask 0010h
internal Mask 0008h
internal Mask 0004h
On Protect Lamp Mask 0002h
Off Protect Lamp Mask 0001h
Special Failure Codes
450194 450193 15109 J1939 MTU ADEC ECU Failure Codes 1
450195 450194 internal
450196 450195 15304 J1939 Engine Stop Information (e.g., "Missing" Value="65535"
DEUTZ-specific EMR2 J1939-Message).
Please refer to specific ECU documentation "Error" Value="65279"
for details. Engine stop information
value is 0 to 250
450197 450196 internal
450198 450197 15305 J1939 DLN2-Message Scania S6
High Temperature. Mask 2000h
NOT High Temperature Mask 1000h
Engine Oil Pressure
Low Pressure Mask 0200h
NOT Low Pressure Mask 0100h

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
High Level Mask 0020h
NOT High Level Mask 0010h
Low Level Mask 0002h
NOT Low Level Mask 0001h
450199 450198 internal
450200 450199 internal
450201 450200 internal
Values
450202 450201 15308 Engine Speed (SPN 190) 1 rpm
450203 450202 15202 Engine Coolant Temperature (SPN 110) 1 °C
450204 450203 15203 Fuel temperature (SPN 174) 1 °C
450205 450204 15309 Engine Oil Temperature 1 (SPN 175) 0,1 °C
450206 450205 15205 Engine Oil Pressure (SPN 100) 1 kPa
450207 450206 15307 Fuel Rate (SPN 183) 0,1 L/h
450208 450207 15206 Coolant Level (SPN 111) 0,1 %
450209 450208 15207 Throttle position (SPN 91) 0,1 %
450210 450209 15208 Load at current Speed (SPN 92) 1 %
450211 450210 15210 Engine oil level (SPN 98) 0,1 %
450212 450211 15214 Boost pressure (SPN 102) 1 kPa
450213 450212 15215 Intake Manifold 1 Temp (SPN 105) 1 °C
450214 450213 15212 Barometric Pressure (SPN 108) 0,1 kPa
450215 450214 15213 Air inlet temperature (SPN 172) 1 °C
450216 450215 15209 Actual engine torque (SPN 513) 1 %
450217 450216 15299 Exhaust Gas Temp.(SPN 173) 0,1 °C
450218 450217 15217 Engine Intercooler Temp (SPN52) 1 °C
450219 450218 15218 Fuel Delivery Pressure (SPN94) 1 kPa
450220 450219 15219 Fuel Filter Differential Pressure (SPN95) 1 kPa
450221 450220 15220 Crankcase Pressure (SPN101) 1 kPa
450222 450221 15221 Turbo Air Inlet Pressure (SPN106) 1 kPa
450223 450222 15222 Air Filter 1 Differential Pressure (SPN107) 0,01 kPa
450224 450223 15223 Coolant Pressure (SPN109) 1 kPa
450225 450224 15224 Transmission Oil Pressure (SPN127) 1 kPa
450226 450225 15225 Fuel Rail Pressure (SPN157) 0,1 MPa
450227 450226 15226 Ambient Air Temperature (SPN171) 0,1 °C

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450228 450227 15227 Turbo Oil Temperature (SPN176) 0,1 °C
450229 450228 15228 Transmission Oil Temperature (SPN177) 0,1 °C
450230 450229 15229 Auxiliary Temperature 1 (SPN441) 1 °C
450231 450230 15230 Auxiliary Temperature 2 (SPN442) 1 °C
450232 450231 15209 Actual Engine Torque (SPN513) 1 %
450233 450232 15231 Alternator Bear. 1 Temperature (SPN1122) 1 °C
450234 450233 15232 Alternator Bear. 2 Temperature (SPN1123) 1 °C
450235 450234 15233 Alternator Wind. 1 Temperature (SPN1124) 1 °C
450238 450237 15236 Intake Manifold 2 Temperature (SPN1131) 1 °C
450241 450240 15239 Engine Intercooler Thermostat Opening 0,1 %

(SPN1134)
450242 450241 15240 Engine Oil Temperature 2 (SPN1135) 0,1 °C
450243 450242 15241 Engine ECU Temperature (SPN1136) 0,1 °C
450244 450243 15242 Exhaust Gas Port 1 Temperatures 0,1 °C

(SPN1137)

(SPN1138)

(SPN1139)

(SPN1140)

(SPN1141)

(SPN1142)

(SPN1143)

(SPN1144)

(SPN1145)

(SPN1146)

(SPN1147)

(SPN1148)

(SPN1149)

(SPN1150)

(SPN1151)

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)

(SPN1152)

(SPN1153)

(SPN1154)

(SPN1155)

(SPN1156)
450264 450263 15262 Main Bearing 1 Temperatures (SPN1157) 0,1 °C
450275 450274 15273 Turbo 1 Compressor Inlet Temperatures 0,1 °C

(SPN1172)

(SPN1173)

(SPN1174)

(SPN1175)
450279 450278 15277 Turbo 1 Compressor Inlet Pressure 1 kPa

(SPN1176)

(SPN1177)

(SPN1178)

(SPN1179)
450283 450282 15281 Turbo 1 Turbine Inlet Temperature 0,1 °C

(SPN1180)
450284 450283 15282 Turbo 2 Turbine Inlet Temperature (SPN 0,1 °C

1181)
450285 450284 15283 Turbo 3 Turbine Inlet Temperature (SPN 0,1 °C

1182)
450286 450285 15284 Turbo 4 Turbine Inlet Temperature 0,1 °C

(SPN1183)
450287 450286 15285 Turbo 1 Turbine Outlet Temperature 0,1 °C

(SPN1184)

(SPN1185)

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450289 450288 15287 Turbo 3 Turbine Outlet Temperature (SPN 0,1 °C

1186)

(SPN1187)
450291 450290 15289 Engine Aux. Coolant Pressure (SPN1203) 1 kPa
450292 450291 15290 Pre-filter Oil Pressure (SPN1208) 1 kPa
450293 450292 15291 Engine Aux. Coolant Temperature 1 °C

(SPN1212)
450294 450293 15292 Fuel Filter Differential Pressure (SPN1382) 1 kPa
450295 450294 15293 Battery 1 Temperature (SPN1800) 1 °C
450296 450295 15294 Battery 2 Temperature (SPN1801) 1 °C
450299 450298 15297 Right Exhaust Gas Temperature (SPN2433) 0.1 °C
450300 450299 15298 Left Exhaust Gas Temperature (SPN2434) 0.1 °C
450301 450300 15310 Engine Turbocharger 1 Compressor Outlet 0.1 °C

Temperature (SPN2629)
450302 450301 15311 Engine Derate Request (SPN3644) 0.1 %
450303 450302 15312 Batterie Potential (SPN0158) 0.1 V
450304 450303 15313 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 0.1 %

1 Level (SPN1761)
450305 450304 15314 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 1 °C

1 Temperature (SPN3031)
450306 450305 15315 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 0.1 %

2 Level (SPN4367)
450307 450306 15316 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 1 °C

2 Temperature (SPN4368)
450308 450307 12807 Exhaust Gas Temperature Average(SPN 0.1 %

4151)
450309 450308 12809 Exhaust Gas Temperature Average Bank 1 0.1 %

(SPN 4153)
450310 450309 12812 Exhaust Gas Temperature Average Bank 2 0.1 %

(SPN 4152)
450311 450310 internal
450312 450311 internal
450313 450312 internal
450314 450313 internal
450315 450314 internal
450316 450315 internal
450317 450316 internal
450318 450317 internal
450319 450318 internal
450320 450319 internal
450321 450320 internal
450322 450321 internal

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
AC Generator And Busbar Values (Long - 32 bits)
450323 450322 135 Total gen. power 1 W
450325 450324 136 Total gen. reactive power 1 var
450327 450326 137 Total gen. apparent power 1 VA
450329 450328 170 Av. Gen. Wye-Voltage 0.1 V
450331 450330 171 Av. Gen. Delta-Voltage 0.1 V
450333 450332 216 Av. Busbar 1 Delta-Voltage 0.1 V
450335 450334 185 Av. Gen. Current 0.001 A
450337 450336 111 Gen. current 1 0.001 A
450339 450338 112 Gen. current 2 0.001 A
450341 450340 113 Gen. current 3 0.001 A
450343 450342 161 Meas. ground current 0.001 A
450345 450344 159 Calculated ground current 0.001 A
450347 450346 108 Gen. voltage L1-L2 0.1 V
450349 450348 109 Gen. voltage L2-L3 0.1 V
450351 450350 110 Gen. voltage L3-L1 0.1 V
450353 450352 114 Gen. voltage L1-N 0.1 V
450355 450354 115 Gen. voltage L2-N 0.1 V
450357 450356 116 Gen. voltage L3-N 0.1 V
450359 450358 125 Gen. active power 1-N 1 W
450365 450364 182 Busbar 1: voltage L1-L2 0.1 V
450367 450366 2520 Gen. real energy 0,01 MWh
450369 450368 2522 Gen. positive reactive energy 0,01 Mvarh
450371 450370 2568 Gen. hours of operation 0,01 h
450373 450372 5542 Setpoint active power 0,1 kW
450375 450374 5640 Setpoint voltage 1 V
450377 450376 internal
450379 450378 internal
450381 450380 internal
450383 450382 internal
AC Mains Values (Long - 32 bits)
450385 450384 140 Total mains power 1 W
450387 450386 150 Total mains reactive power 1 var
450389 450388 173 Av. Mains Wye-Voltage 0.1 V
450391 450390 174 Av. Mains Delta-Voltage 0.1 V
450393 450392 207 Av. Mains Current 0.001 A
450395 450394 134 Mains current L1 0.001 A
450397 450396 internal

Appendix

ID
Modicon Start addr.
start addr. (*1)
450399 450398 internal
450401 450400 118 Mains voltage L1-L2 0.1 V
450407 450406 121 Mains voltage L1-N 0.1 V
AC System Values (Long - 32 bits)
450413 450412 217 Reserve real power in system (only valid if 1 kW

LDSS is on)
450415 450414 218 Real power in system (only valid if LDSS is 1 kW

on)
450417 450416 219 Nominal real power in system (only valid if 1 kW

LDSS is on)
450419 450418 internal
450421 450420 internal
450423 450422 internal
Engine Management (Long - 32 bits)
Active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DM1)
450425 450424 15400 SPN of 1. entry full 19 bits of SPN
Values
450445 450444 15201 Total engine hours (j1939-HOURS) 1 h
450447 450446 2580 Period of use counter
450449 450448 internal
450451 450450 internal
450453 450452 internal
LS5 (Long - 32 bits)
450455 450454 267 Average LS5 Delta Mains voltage L-L 0.1 V
450457 450456 268 Average LS5 Wye Mains voltage L-N 0.1 V
450459 450458 269 Active power LS5 1 W
450461 450460 270 Reactive power LS5 1 var

Appendix
Data Protocols > Protocol 5011 (Alarm Value...
9.2.5 Protocol 5011 (Alarm Values Visualization)
" only: ..." applies to easYgen-xxxxXT

Package P2 only.
Some alarms change too fast!

Some Command Variables for active alarms (e.g.
“Unintended Stop” , breaker failures) are only
active for a very short time. For this reason they
could not be catched reliably via the interfaces.
Nevertheless they can be used to ensure that the
alarm is not active and could be acknowledged.

(Mux)
0 1,2 Protocol-ID, always 5011 –
Generator
0 3,4 4161 Alarms Generator active
Gen.overfreq. 1 Mask: 8000h Bit
Gen.underfreq. 1 Mask: 2000h Bit
Gen.overvolt. 1 Mask: 0800h Bit
Gen.undervolt. 1 Mask: 0200h Bit
0 5,6 10134 Alarms Generator latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
1 1,2 4163 Alarms Generator 1 active
Gen act.pwr mismatch Mask: 0200h Bit
Inv.time ov.curr. Mask: 0080h Bit
1 3,4 10138 Alarms Generator 1 latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
Operating range failed Mask: 0040h Bit
1 5,6 10131 Alarm classes latched (unacknowledged)
Class F Mask: 0020h Bit
Class E Mask: 0010h Bit
Class D Mask: 0008h Bit
Class C Mask: 0004h Bit
Class B Mask: 0002h Bit
Class A Mask: 0001h Bit
Mains
2 1,2 4188 Alarms Mains active

Appendix

(Mux)
2 3,4 10135 Alarms Mains latched (unacknowledged)
2 5,6 reserved
3 1,2 4187 Alarms Mains 1 active
Mns act.pwr mismatch Mask: 0040h Bit

Appendix

(Mux)
3 3,4 10278 Alarms Mains 1 latched (unacknowledged)
3 5,6 reserved
Engine
4 1,2 4167 Alarms 1 active
Speed det. alarm Mask: 0400h Bit

Appendix

(Mux)
4 3,4 10133 Alarms 1 latched (unacknowledged)
Cylinder temperature level 1 Mask: 0800h Bit
Cylinder temperature wire break Mask: 0200h Bit
Syst. update LS5 Mask: 0080h Bit
Syst. update easYgen Mask: 0040h Bit
Gen.AC wiring Mask: 0020h Bit
Busbar1 AC wiring Mask: 0010h Bit

Appendix

(Mux)
GGB sync.Timeout Mask: 2000h Bit
Operating Range 12 alarm Mask: 0800h Bit
CPU overload Mask: 0400h Bit
MCB failure 50BF Mask: 0200h Bit
GCB failure 50B Mask: 0100h Bit
ECU Protect alarm Mask: 0080h Bit
ECU Emission alarm Mask: 0040h Bit
08.27 Missing easYgen Mask: 0008h Bit
Operating Range 12 alarm Mask: 0800h Bit
GCB failure 50BF Mask: 0100h Bit

Appendix

(Mux)
08.27 Missing EG3000 Mask: 2000h Bit
08.28 Missing LS5 Mask: 1000h Bit
05.18 Cylinder temperature level 1 Mask: 0800h Bit
05.19 Cylinder temperature level 2 Mask: 0400h Bit
05.20 Cylinder Temperature wire break Mask: 0200h Bit
06.36 Pole slip Mask: 0100h Bit
08.44 Syst.update LS5 Mask: 0080h Bit
08.43 Syst.update easYgen Mask: 0040h Bit
06.32 Gen.AC Wiring Mask: 0020h Bit
06.33 Busbar1 AC Wiring Mask: 0010h Bit
Alarms
6 1,2 5197 Alarms active
Neutral contactor failure Mask: 0100h Bit
Meas.difference 4105 VDE-AR-N 4105 Mask: 0040h Bit
Busbar monitoring latched, Marine version only Mask: 0008h Bit
Plausibility GCB feedback latched, Marine version only Mask: 0004h Bit
Reactive load sharing mismatch latched, Marine version only Mask: 0002h Bit
Active load sharing mismatch latched, Marine version only Mask: 0001h Bit
6 3, 4 10286 Alarms latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
Busbar monitoring latche (Marine version only) Mask: 0008h Bit
Plausibility GCB feedback latched (Marine version only) Mask: 0004h Bit
6 5,6 reserved
Flexible Thresholds
7 1,2 4175 Alarms Flexible thresholds 1-16 active
7 3,4 10279 Alarms Flexible thresholds 1-16 latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
7 5,6 reserved

Appendix

(Mux)
8 5,6 reserved

Appendix

(Mux)
9 5,6 0 (reserve)
10 1,2 4194 Free Alarms active
Free Alarm 16 Mask: 8000h Bit
Free Alarm 4 (is also at MUX 5 to be compatibel to release 8) Mask: 0008h Bit
10 3,4 10282 Free Alarms latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
10 5,6 reserved
Internal DC Analogue Values Wirebreak
11 1,2 4171 Alarms Analog Inputs 1 active
Batt.overvolt.2 Mask: 0008h Bit
Batt.undervolt.2 Mask: 0004h Bit
11 3,4 10136 Alarms Analog Inputs 1 latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
11 5,6 reserved
12 1,2 4173 Alarms Analog Inputs Wire Break active
Analog inp. 4, wire break or shortcut Mask: 0010h Bit
12 3, 4 10137 Alarms Analog Inputs Wire Break latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
12 5, 6 reserved
Internal Digital Inputs
13 1,2 4181 Alarms Digital Inputs 1 active
13 3,4 10132 Alarms Digital Inputs 1 latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
13 5,6 0 (reserve)
Digital Input 13, Mask: 8000h Bit

Appendix

(Mux)
14 5,6 reserved
External Digital Inputs
15 1,2 4185 Alarms External Digital Inputs active
15 3,4 16377 Alarms External Digital Inputs latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
15 5,6 reserved
16 1,2 4195 Alarm External Digital Inputs 1 active
only: External Digital Input 32 Mask: 8000h Bit
16 3,4 10284 Alarm External Digital Inputs 1 latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
16 5,6 reserved
External DC Analogue Values Wirebreak
17 1,2 4196 Alarms External Analog Inputs Wire Break active
17 3,4 10285 Alarms External Analog Inputs Wire Break latched (unac‐
knowledged)

Appendix
Data Protocols > Protocol 6000 (Load Share...

(Mux)
17 5,6 reserved
9.2.6 Protocol 6000 (Load Share Message)

General information The load share message contains all data, which is required for
load/var sharing, load-dependent start/stop and dead bus detec‐
tion.
Further data, which is exchanged between the control units con‐
cerns time synchronization and parameter alignment. Parameter
alignment is intended for those parameters, which must be config‐
ured identically for all units participating in load sharing, to ensure
a proper operation of load sharing or load-dependent start/stop.
In order to lower the bus load, the messages are divided into "fast",
"normal", and "slow" refreshed data. The mux is identified accord‐
ingly with "F", "N", and "S" (refer to the following tables). The load
share message contains one fast, two normal, and four slow mes‐
sages, which are made up as in Ä “Load share bus communica‐
Timing The time interval between two fast messages (TFast , i.e. the time
for refreshing a fast message) is configured with the parameter
"Transfer rate LS fast message" (parameter 9921 Ä p. 545). The
time intervals between refreshing a normal or slow messages
depend on this parameter as well according to the following
sequence:
n S0 – F – N0 – F – N1 – F – S1 – F – N0 – F – N1 – F – S2 – F –
N0 – F – N1 – F – S3 – F – N0 – F – N1 – F
n TFast = time interval between refreshing the fast message
n TNormal = time interval between refreshing a normal message =
3 x TFast
n TSlow = time interval between refreshing a slow message = 12 x
TFast

Appendix
Example n The parameter "Transfer rate LS fast message" (param‐

eter 9921 Ä p. 545) is configured to "0.10 s".
n The sequence of the sent messages for TFast = 100 ms (i.e.
0.10 s) is shown in Ä “Load share bus communication”
on page 854.
n This means that a new message is sent every 50 ms.
Time [ms] 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
Sent message S0 F N0 F N1 F S1 F N0 F N1 F
MUX # 0 3 1 3 2 3 4 3 1 3 2 3
Time [ms] 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150
MUX # 5 3 1 3 2 3 6 3 1 3 2 3
The maximum length of the CAN bus load share line depends on
"Transfer rate LS fast message" (parameter 9921 Ä p. 545).
The values in Ä Table 166 “ Load share line - max. length (32 par‐
ticipants)” on page 854 are valid for 32 participants and a bus
load of approx. 40 %.
TFast [ms] TNormal [ms] TSlow [ms] Baud rate Distance
100 300 1200 250 kBaud 250 m
200 600 2400 125 kBaud 500 m
300 900 3800 50 kBaud 1000 m
Table 166: Load share line - max. length (32 participants)
Load share bus communication

Load share bus communication - "fast" refreshed data
MUX Byte Bit Function Remark
F 0 3 MUX identifier
1 Generator real load capacity utilization rate, L-Byte Integer [‰], signed
2 Generator real load capacity utilization rate, H-Byte
3 Generator reactive load capacity utilization rate, L- Integer [‰], signed

Byte
4 Generator reactive load capacity utilization rate, H-

Byte
5 0 Active power load sharing is enabled
1 Reactive power load sharing is enabled
2 GCB is closed
3 MCB is closed

Appendix
Load share bus communication - "fast" refreshed data
4 Reserved
5 Dead bus closure request is active Dead bus detection
6 Mains settling time is running Back synchronization to mains
7 Shutdown alarm is active (alarm class C,D,E,F)
6 0-4 Bus segment / node Max. 32 nodes possible
5 Not used
6 LDSS: add-on request enabled Load dependent start / stop
7 LDSS: add-off request enabled (reserved) Load dependent start / stop
7 Not used
Load share bus communication - "normal" refreshed data
Mux Byte Bit Function Remark
N0 0 1 Mux identifier
1 Generator real load, L-Byte, L-Word Long [W]
2 Generator real load, H-Byte, L-Word
3 Generator real load, L-Byte, H-Word
4 Generator real load, H-Byte, H-Word
5 0-3 Real load control state 2: Static

3: Isochronous
4: Base load control
5: Export/import control
10:Load share
0, 1, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, … : internal
4-7 Reactive load control state 2: Static

3: Isochronous
4: Reactive load control
5: Import/export reactive load
10:Reactive load share
0, 1, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, … : internal
6 0-3 Engine state 1: Locked out

2: Off
3: Preglow
4: Crank
5: Run
6: Cool down
7: Spin down
8: Start pause
9: Idle
0, 10, 11, … : internal

Appendix
4,5 Operating mode 0: Not available

1: STOP
2: MANUAL
3: AUTOMATIC
6 Generator request Generator is in AUTOMATIC mode

and able to produce rated active
power
7 Not used
7 Not used
N1 0 2 MUX identifier
1 Generator reactive load, L-Byte, L-Word Long [var]
2 Generator reactive load, H-Byte, L-Word
3 Generator reactive load, L-Byte, H-Word
4 Generator reactive load, H-Byte, H-Word
5 0 Generator voltage and frequency ok
1 Busbar voltage and frequency ok
2 Mains voltage and frequency ok
3 Fourth system voltage and frequency ok
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 Not used
7 Not used
6 0 Command 1 to CB control
1 Command 2 to CB control
6-7 Not used
7 Not used
Load share bus communication - "slow" refreshed data
S0 0 0 MUX identifier
1 Protocol-Identifier

Appendix
3 Generator rated real power, L-Byte, L-Word Long [0.1 kW]
4 Generator rated real power, H-Byte, L-Word
5 Generator rated real power, L-Byte, H-Word
6 Generator rated real power, H-Byte, H-Word
7 Not used
1 Generator rated reactive power, L-Byte, L-Word Long [0.1 kvar]
2 Generator rated reactive power, H-Byte, L-Word
3 Generator rated reactive power, L-Byte, H-Word
4 Generator rated reactive power, H-Byte, H-Word
5 0-4 Base segment Max. number of nodes: 32 / 64 with bit

5
5 Extended bit for Base segment
6-7 Not used
6 0-4 Priority Up to 32
5-7 Not used
7 Not used
1 Operating hours L-Byte, L-Word Long [h]
2 Operating hours H-Byte, L-Word
3 Operating hours L-Byte, H-Word
4 Operating hours H-Byte, H-Word
5 0 Alarm class A occurred
1 Alarm class B occurred
2 Alarm class C occurred
3 Alarm class D occurred
4 Alarm class E occurred
5 Alarm class F occurred
6 Warning alarm class occurred
7 Not used
6 LSI connection Load share interface
7 Not used
1 Remaining days before maintenance, L-Byte Integer [d]
2 Remaining days before maintenance, H-Byte
3 Remaining operating hours before maintenance, L- Integer [h]

Byte

Appendix
Data Protocols > Protocol 6003 (LS-5 Commu...
4 Remaining operating hours before maintenance, H-

Byte
5 Checksum parameters L-Byte Load share and load-dependent start /

stop parameters
6 Checksum parameters H-Byte
7 Not used
9.2.7 Protocol 6003 (LS-5 Communication)

General information The LS-5 communication message contains all data, which is
required to operate the LS-5 system. This communication protocol
works parallel to the load share communication.
In order to lower the bus load, the messages are divided into "fast",
"normal", and "slow" refreshed data. The mux is identified accord‐
ingly with "F", "N", and "S" (refer to the following tables). The load
share message contains one fast, two normal, and four slow mes‐
sages, which are made up as in Ä “LS-5 communication”
on page 859.
Timing The time interval between two fast messages (TFast , i.e. the time
for refreshing a fast message) is configured with the parameter
"Transfer rate LS fast message" (parameter 9921 Ä p. 545). The
time intervals between refreshing a normal or slow messages
depend on this parameter as well according to the following
sequence:
n S0 – F – N0 – F – N1 – F – S1 – F – N0 – F – N1 – F – S2 – F –
N0 – F – N1 – F – S3 – F – N0 – F – N1 – F
n TFast = time interval between refreshing the fast message
n TNormal = time interval between refreshing a normal message =
3 x TFast
n TSlow = time interval between refreshing a slow message = 12 x
TFast
Example n The parameter "Transfer rate LS fast message" (param‐

eter 9921 Ä p. 545) is configured to "0.10 s".
n The sequence of the sent messages for TFast = 100 ms (i.e.
0.10 s) is shown in Ä “LS-5 communication” on page 859.
n This means that a new message is sent every 50 ms.
Time [ms] 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550
Mux # 0 3 1 3 2 3 4 3 1 3 2 3
Time [ms] 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150
Mux # 5 3 1 3 2 3 6 3 1 3 2 3

Appendix
LS-5 communication
LS-5 communication - "fast" refreshed data
F 0 3 Mux identifier
1 Frequency of connected mains or frequency to Frequency in 00.00 Hz

which is to synchronize
2
3 Phase angle between system A and B Phase angle [1/10°]
4 Phase angle compensation is incorpo‐

rated
5 0 System A in range
1 System B in range
2 System A is black
3 System B is black
4 Breaker 1 closed
5 Isolation switch or breaker 2 closed
6 Synchronous networks detected Between system A an B
7 Not used
6 1 Wish to open the breaker
2 Wish to close the breaker
3 Wish is for breaker

0 = Breaker 1
1 = Breaker 2
4 Execution of wish
5 Variable system
0 = System A
1 = System B
6 Synchronizing mode
0 = Slip frequency
1 = Phase matching
7 Not used
7 Not used
LS-5 communication - "normal" refreshed data
1 Voltage setpoint Voltage of the fixed system in the per‐

centage format (000.00 %) of the
2 rated voltage setting
3 Active power system A Long [W]

Appendix
7 Not used
1 Not used
2 0 Logic bit 1
1 Logic bit 2
2 Logic bit 3
3 Logic bit 4
4 Logic bit 5
5 Mains settling active
6-7 Not used
3 Reactive power system A Long [var]
7 Not used
LS-5 communication - "slow" refreshed data
S0 0 0 Mux identifier
1 Protocol-Identifier 6003
3 Not used
7 Not used
1 0-1 Mains wiring

0 = No mains wiring
1 = Mains wiring at system A
2 = Mains wiring at system B
3 = Mains wiring at isolation switch

Appendix
LS-5 communication - "slow" refreshed data
2-3 Isolation switch wiring

0 = Off
1 = System A
2 = System B
3 = Not used
4-6 Visualization message definition

0 = No valid information
1 = Average delta voltage of mains (visualization
message 1) and average wye voltage of mains (vis‐
ualization message 2)
7 Mains power measurement valid This means the power of system A is

used for mains import/export control
2 0-4 Segment number isolation switch Max. 32 nodes possible
5 Extended bit for segment number isolation switch Max. 64 nodes possible
6-7 Not used
3 Not used
7 Not used
1 0-4 Segment number system A 1 to 32
5 Extended bit for segment number system A Max. 64 nodes possible
6-7 Not used
2 0-4 Segment number system B Max. 32 nodes possible
5 Extended bit for segment number system B Max. 64 nodes possible
6-7 Not used
3 Visualization message 1 Dependent on visualization message

defined in mux "S1"
4
7 Not used
1 Not used
2 Not used
3 Visualization message 2 Dependent of visualization message

defined in "Slow 1"
4
7 Not used

Appendix
Data Protocols > Protocol 65001 (External D...
9.2.8 Protocol 65000 (External Discrete I/O 1 to 8)
If this data protocol is addressed to an expansion

board, it is used to issue a command to energize a
discrete output of the expansion board (parameter
8005 is written).
If this data protocol is addressed to an easYgen, it
is used to transmit the state of a discrete input of
an expansion board (parameter 8014 is written).
CAN Parameter Description Multiplier Units

ID
(Mux)
1 1 - Discrete Inputs/Outputs 1 to 8 --
0: Discrete I/O 1 Bit
2 - internal
3,4,5,6 - internal

8005 is written).

ID
(Mux)

Appendix
Data Protocols > Protocol 65002 (External ...

ID
(Mux)
2 - internal
3,4,5,6 - internal

8009 is written).

ID
(Mux)
2 - internal
3,4,5,6 - internal

Appendix
Data Protocols > Protocol 5014

8009 is written).

ID
(Mux)
2 - internal
3,4,5,6 - internal
9.2.12 Protocol 5014

Based on Protocol 5003 but with
enhancements
Modbus CAN Param‐ Description Multiplier Units Model Com‐ Com‐
eter ID ment pared
Modicon start Data Data- (BUS-data * easYg with
addr. Byte 0 Byte easYgen Multiplier = en "5003"
start -3000XT real value)
addr. (*1) (Mux)
450001 450000 0 1,2 Protocol-ID, always 5014 – 3000X

T
450002 450001 0 3,4 10100 Pickup speed 1 rpm 3000X

T
450003 450002 0 5,6 - Control mode Mask:000Fh (enum 3000X TEST

.) T includ
(STOP/AUTO/MANUAL/ 1=AUTO ed
TEST)
2=STOP
4=MANUAL
/ 8=TEST
450004 450003 1 1,2 160 Gen. powerfactor 0.001 3000X

T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)
450005 450004 1 3,4,5, 170 Average Gen. Wye-Voltage 0.1 V 3000X

6 T
450007 450006 2 1,2 144 Gen. frequency 0.01 Hz 3000X

T
450008 450007 2 3,4,5, 171 Average Gen. Delta-Voltage 0.1 V 3000X

6 T
450010 450009 3 1,2 147 Mains frequency 0.01 Hz 3000X

T
450011 450010 3 3,4,5, 173 Average Mains Wye-Voltage 0.1 V 3000X

6 T
450013 450012 4 1,2 208 Mains power factor 0.001 3000X

T
450014 450013 4 3,4,5, 174 Average Mains Delta- 0.1 V 3000X

6 Voltage T
450016 450015 5 1,2 209 Busbar Frequency 0.01 Hz 3000X

T
450017 450016 5 3,4,5, 216 Average Busbar Delta- 0.1 V 3000X New
6 Voltage T
450019 450018 6 1,2 4085 96.16 LM Internal Flag 16 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X New
T
96.15 LM Internal Flag 15 Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X New

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T
450020 450019 6 3,4,5, 234 Average Busbar Wye- 0.1 V 3500X New
6 Voltage T-P2

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)
450022 450021 7 1,2 10110 Battery voltage 0.1 V 3000X

T
450023 450022 7 3,4,5, 207 Av. Mains Current 0.001 A 3000X

6 T
450025 450024 8 1,2 10111 Analog input 1 changeable 3000X

T
450026 450025 8 3,4,5, 185 Av. Gen. Current 0.001 A 3000X

6 T

T
450029 450028 9 3,4,5, 161 Meas. ground current 0.001 A 3000X

6 T

T
450032 450031 10 3,4,5, 159 Calculated ground current 0.001 A 3000X

6 T

T-P2
450035 450034 11 3,4,5, 111 Gen. current 1 0.001 A 3000X

6 T

T-P2
450038 450037 12 3,4,5, 112 Gen. current 2 0.001 A 3000X

6 T

T-P2
450041 450040 13 3,4,5, 113 Gen. current 3 0.001 A 3000X

6 T

T-P2
450044 450043 14 3,4,5, 134 Mains current L1 0.001 A 3000X

6 T

T-P2
450047 450046 15 3,4,5, 231 Busbar Voltage L1-N 0.1 V 3500X New
6 T-P2

T-P2
450050 450049 16 3,4,5, 232 Busbar Voltage L2-N 0.1 V 3500X New
6 T-P2

T-P2
450053 450052 17 3,4,5, 135 Total gen. power 1 W 3000X

6 T
450055 450054 18 1,2 internal reserve

d
450056 450055 18 3,4,5, 140 Total mains power 1 W 3000X

6 T
External Mains kW value can be picked up through the according Analog Input.
450058 450057 19 1,2 4086 Operating Range Monitoring Mask FF00h 3000X New
Code Number T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)
Operating range Error-Code ("0" means no failure is active or latched)
The current segment Mask 00FFh 3000X New

number T
One of 64 Segments possible
450059 450058 19 3,4,5, 136 Total gen. reactive power 1 var 3000X
6 T
450061 450060 20 1,2 10159 AI Auxiliary excitation D+ 0.1 V 3000X

T
450062 450061 20 3,4,5, 150 Total mains reactive power 1 var 3000X
6 T
External Mains kW value can be picked up through the according Analog Input.
450064 450063 21 1,2 10133 05.01 Engine Over speed 1 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
latched T
05.02 Engine Over speed 2 Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X

latched T
05.03 Engine under speed 1 Mask: 2000h Bit 3000X

latched T
05.04 Engine under speed 2 Mask: 1000h Bit 3000X

latched T
05.05 Unintended stop Mask: 0800h Bit 3000X

detected latched T
05.07 Speed detection alarm Mask: 0400h Bit 3000X

latched T
05.06 Shutdown malfunction Mask: 0200h Bit 3000X

detected latched T
08.05 GCB fail to close Mask: 0100h Bit 3000X

latched T
08.06 GCB fail to open Mask: 0080h Bit 3000X

latched T
08.07 MCB fail to close Mask: 0040h Bit 3000X

latched T
08.08 MCB fail to open Mask: 0020h Bit 3000X

latched T
08.10 General CAN-J1939 Mask: 0010h Bit 3000X

fault latched T
05.08 Start fail detected Mask: 0008h Bit 3000X

latched T
05.09 Maintenance days Mask: 0004h Bit 3000X

exceeded latched T
05.10 Maintenance hours Mask: 0002h Bit 3000X

exceeded latched T
08.18 CANopen error at Mask: 0001h Bit 3000X

CAN Interface 1 T
450065 450064 21 3,4,5, 182 Busbar: Voltage L1-L2 0.1 V 3000X

6 T
450067 450066 22 1,2 4087 08.30 Timeout Synchronisa‐ Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
tion GCB latched T
08.31 Timeout Synchronisa‐ Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X

tion MCB latched T
08.32 Timeout Synchronisa‐ Mask: 2000h Bit 3500X

tion GGB latched T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)
05.11 Charge fail (D+ func‐ Mask: 1000h Bit 3000X

tionality) latched T
Operating range failure Mask: 0800h Bit 3000X remov

(error 12) T ed
05.22 ECU Protect alarm Mask: 0400h reserve remov

latched d ed
05.23 ECU Emission alram Mask: 0200h reserve remov

latched d ed
08.47 MCB failure 50BF Mask: 0100h reserve

d
08.46 GCB failure 50BF Mask: 0080h reserve

d
08.29 CANopen error at Mask: 0040h Bit 3500X New

CAN Interface 3 T
08.19 CANopen error at Mask: 0020h Bit 3000X

CAN Interface 2 T
08.16 Parameter Alignment Mask: 0010h Bit 3000X

LDSS T
08.17 Missing members Mask: 0008h Bit 3000X

T
08.48 MCB plausibility Mask: 0004h Bit 3000X

T
05.13 ECU red lamp alarm Mask: 0002h Bit 3000X

latched T
05.14 ECU yellow (amber) Mask: 0001h Bit 3000X

lamp alarm latched T
450068 450067 22 3,4,5, 189 Busbar: Voltage L2-L3 0.1 V 3500X

6 T-P2
450070 450069 23 1,2 10286 08.53 LS interf.redundancy Mask: 8000h Bit 3500X
latched T
Internal Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X

T

T

T

T

T
Internal Mask: 0200h Bit reserve

d
17.09 Neutral interl. reply Mask: 0100h Bit 3000X

mismatch latched T
17.08 Decoupling GCB<- Mask: 0080h Bit 3000X

>MCB latched T
17.07 Measurement differ‐ Mask: 0040h Bit 3000X

ence 4105 latched T
17.06 Parameter alignment Mask: 0020h Bit 3000X

4105 latched T
17.05 Missing member 4105 Mask: 0010h Bit 3000X

latched T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)
08.22 Busbar v/f not ok Mask: 0008h Bit 3000X New

latched T
08.21 Feedback GCB mis‐ Mask: 0004h Bit reserve

match latched d
17.02 Reactive load share Mask: 0002h Bit 3000X New

mismatch latched T
17.01 Active load share mis‐ Mask: 0001h Bit 3000X New
match latched T
450071 450070 23 3,4,5, 193 Busbar: Voltage L3-L1 0.1 V 3500X New
6 T-P2
450073 450072 24 1,2 10134 06.01 Generator over fre‐ Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
quency 1 latched T
06.02 Generator over fre‐ Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X

quency 2 latched T
06.03 Generator under fre‐ Mask: 2000h Bit 3000X

quency 1 latched T
06.04 Generator under fre‐ Mask: 1000h Bit 3000X

quency 2 latched T
06.05 Generator over Mask: 0800h Bit 3000X

voltage 1 latched T
06.06 Generator over Mask: 0400h Bit 3000X

voltage 2 latched T
06.07 Generator under Mask: 0200h Bit 3000X

voltage 1 latched T
06.08 Generator under Mask: 0100h Bit 3000X

voltage 2 latched T
06.09 Generator over cur‐ Mask: 0080h Bit 3000X

rent 1 latched T

rent 2 latched T

rent 3 latched T
06.12 Reverse / reduced Mask: 0010h Bit 3000X

power 1 latched T
06.13 Reverse / reduced Mask: 0008h Bit 3000X

power 2 latched T
06.14 Generator overload Mask: 0004h Bit 3000X

IOP 1 latched T

IOP 2 latched T
06.34 Busbar phase rot. Mask: 0001h Bit 3500X

mismatch T-P2
450074 450073 24 3,4,5, 108 Gen. voltage L1-L2 0.1 V 3000X

6 T
450076 450075 25 1,2 10138 06.16 Generator unbalanced Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
load 1 latched T
06.17 Generator unbalanced Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X

load 2 latched T
06.18 Generator voltage Mask: 2000h Bit 3000X

asymmetry latched T
06.19 Ground fault 1 latched Mask: 1000h Bit 3000X

T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)
06.20 Ground fault 2 latched Mask: 0800h Bit 3000X

T
06.21 Gen. Phase Rotation Mask: 0400h Bit 3000X

mismatch Latched T
06.29 Gen. active power Mask: 0200h Bit 3000X

mismatch Latched T
06.30 Generator unloading Mask: 0100h Bit 3000X

mismatch Latched T
06.22 Inverse time over cur‐ Mask: 0080h Bit 3000X

rent Latched T
06.31 Operating Range Mask: 0040h Bit 3000X

failed latched T

MOP 1 latched T

MOP 2 latched T
06.25 Gen.Power Factor Mask: 0008h Bit 3000X

lagging 1 latched T

lagging 2 latched T

leading 1 latched T

leading 2 latched T
450077 450076 25 3,4,5, 114 Gen. voltage L1-N 0.1 V 3000X

6 T
450079 450078 26 1,2 10135 07.06 Mains over frequency Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
1 latched T
07.07 Mains over frequency Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X

2 latched T
07.08 Mains under fre‐ Mask: 2000h Bit 3000X

quency 1 latched T
07.09 Mains under fre‐ Mask: 1000h Bit 3000X

quency 2 latched T
07.10 Mains over voltage 1 Mask: 0800h Bit 3000X

latched T
07.11 Mains over voltage 2 Mask: 0400h Bit 3000X

latched T
07.12 Mains under voltage 1 Mask: 0200h Bit 3000X

latched T
07.13 Mains under voltage 2 Mask: 0100h Bit 3000X

latched T
07.14 Mains Phase shift Mask: 0080h Bit 3000X

latched T
07.25 Mains decoupling Mask: 0040h Bit 3000X

latched T
internal Mask: 0020h Bit reserve

d

d

d

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)
07.05 Mains Phase rotation Mask: 0004h Bit 3000X

mismatch latched T

d

d
450080 450079 26 3,4,5, 109 Gen. voltage L2-L3 0.1 V 3000X

6 T
450082 450081 27 1,2 10278 07.21 Mains import power 1 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
latched T
07.22 Mains import power 2 Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X

latched T
07.23 Mains export power 1 Mask: 2000h Bit 3000X

latched T
07.24 Mains export power 2 Mask: 1000h Bit 3000X

latched T
07.17 Mains PF lagging 1 Mask: 0800h Bit 3000X

latched T
07.18 Mains PF lagging 2 Mask: 0400h Bit 3000X

latched T
07.19 Mains PF leading 1 Mask: 0200h Bit 3000X

latched T
07.20 Mains PF leading 2 Mask: 0100h Bit 3000X

latched T
07.15 Mains df/dt latched Mask: 0080h Bit 3000X

T
07.16 Mains active power Mask: 0040h Bit 3000X

mismatch latched T
07.28 Mains Time-dep. Mask: 0020h Bit 3000X

Voltage (FRT) latched T

d
07.27 Mains slow voltage Mask: 0008h Bit 3000X

increase (10 min) T

d
07.29 QV Monitoring step 1 Mask: 0002h Bit 3000X

tripped T
07.30 QV Monitoring step 2 Mask: 0001h Bit 3000X

tripped T
450083 450082 27 3,4,5, 115 Gen. voltage L2-N 0.1 V 3000X

6 T
450085 450084 28 1,2 10132 09.01 Discrete input 1 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
latched T
09.02 Discrete input 2 Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

d

d

d

d
450086 450085 28 3,4,5, 110 Gen. voltage L3-L1 0.1 V 3000

6
450088 450087 29 1,2 10283 09.13 Discrete input 13 Mask: 8000h Bit 3500X
latched T-P2

latched T-P2

latched T-P2

latched T-P2

latched T-P2

latched T-P2

latched T-P2

latched T-P2

latched T-P2

latched T-P2

latched T-P2

d

d

d

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

d

d
450089 450088 29 3,4,5, 116 Gen. voltage L3-N 0.1 V 3000X

6 T
450091 450090 30 1,2 16377 12.16 External discrete input Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
16 latched T
12.15 External discrete input Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X

15 latched T

14 latched T

13 latched T

12 latched T

11 latched T

10 latched T

9 latched T

8 latched T

7 latched T

6 latched T

5 latched T

4 latched T

3 latched T

2 latched T

1 latched T
450092 450091 30 3,4,5, 118 Mains voltage L1-L2 0.1 V 3000X

6 T
450094 450093 31 1,2 10279 15.16 Flexible limit 16 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
latched T
15.15 Flexible limit 15 Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

latched T
15.09 Flexible limit 9 latched Mask: 0100h Bit 3000X

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T
450095 450094 31 3,4,5, 121 Mains voltage L1-N 0.1 V 3000X

6 T
450097 450096 32 1,2 10280 15.32 Flexible limit 32 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

latched T

6 T
450100 450099 33 1,2 10281 internal Mask: 8000h Bit reserve

d

d

d

d

d

d

d

d

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

latched T

6 T
450103 450102 34 1,2 4088 Internal Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

T

T

T

d

T
08.02 Battery over voltage 2 Mask: 0008h Bit 3000X

latched T
08.04 Battery under voltage Mask: 0004h Bit 3000X

2 latched T
08.01 Battery over voltage 1 Mask: 0002h Bit 3000X

latched T
08.03 Battery under voltage Mask: 0001h Bit 3000X

1 latched T

6 T
450106 450105 35 1,2 4089 01.11 New Alarm triggered Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X New
T

d

d

d

d

d

d

d

d

d
01.06 Alarm class F latched Mask: 0020h Bit 3000X

T
01.05 Alarm class E latched Mask: 0010h Bit 3000X

T
01.04 Alarm class D latched Mask: 0008h Bit 3000X

T
01.03 Alarm class C latched Mask: 0004h Bit 3000X

T
01.02 Alarm class B latched Mask: 0002h Bit 3000X

T
01.01 Alarm class A latched Mask: 0001h Bit 3000X

T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

6 T
450109 450108 36 1,2 10137 internal Mask: 0001h Bit reserve

d
10.01 Analog input 1 wire Mask: 0002h Bit 3000X

break T

break T

break T

break T-P2

break T-P2

break T-P2

break T-P2

break T-P2

break T-P2

break T-P2

d

d

d

d

d
450110 450109 36 3,4 15310 SPN 2629 Turbo Charger 1 1 °C 3000X

temp T
450111 450110 36 5,6 10285 25.16 Ext. analog input 16 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
wire break T
25.15 Ext. analog input 15 Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X

wire break T

wire break T

wire break T

wire break T

wire break T

wire break T

wire break T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

wire break T

wire break T

wire break T

wire break T

wire break T

wire break T

wire break T

wire break T
450112 450111 37 1,2 10107 13.01 Relay-Output 1 (Self- Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
test-relay) T
13.02 Relay-Output 2 Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

d

d

d

d
450113 450112 37 3,4 10109 13.13 Relay-Output 13 Mask: 8000h Bit 3500X
T-P2

T-P2

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

T-P2

T-P2

T-P2

T-P2

T-P2

T-P2

T-P2

T-P2

d

d

d

d
13.34 Transistor output 2 Mask: 0002h Bit 3500X

T-P2
13.33 Transistor output 1 Mask: 0001h Bit 3500X

T-P2
450114 450113 37 5,6 8005 98.16 LM External DO 16 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
T
98.15 LM External DO 15 Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

T

T

T

T
450115 450114 38 1,2 10310 Analog output 1 changeable 3000X

T

T
450117 450116 38 5,6 10317 Analog output 3 changeable 3500X New

T-P2

T-P2

T-P2

T-P2

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)
450121 450120 40 1,2 10202 Operation modes (enum 3000X

.) T
13200 = Auxiliary services
postrun
13216 = Idle run active
13201 = Aux. services
prerun
13250 = Gen. stable time
13202 = Critical mode
13251 = In operation
13203 = Motor Stop
13252 = Power limited
prerun
13204 = Cool down
13253 = AUTO mode ready
13205 = Mains settling
13254 = Ramp to rated
13206 = Engine Start
13255 = GCB open
13207 = Start - Pause
13256 = Unloading gener‐
ator
13208 = Preglow
13257 = MCB open
13209 = GCB dead bus
close
13258 = Loading generator
13210 = MCB dead bus
close
13259 = Synchronization
GCB
13211 = Emergency run
MCB
13212 = Turning
13261 = GCB -> MCB Delay
13213 = Ignition
13262 = MCB -> GCB Delay
13214 = Crank protect
13263 = Start w/o Load
13215 = Emergency/Critical
13264 = Unloading mains
13271 = Run-up synchroni‐
zation
13281 = Derating active
permissive
check
13267 = Synchronization off

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)
13268 = GGB open
GGB
13270 = GGB dead busbar
closure
13273 = MCB -> GGB Delay
13282 = Unloading LS5
LS5
13284 = Inhibit cranking
450122 450121 40 3,4,5, 2520 Gen. real energy 0,01 MWh 3000X
6 T
450124 450123 41 1,2 2540 Engine, number of start 1 3000X

requests T
450125 450124 41 3,4,5, 2522 Gen. positive reactive 0,01 Mvarh 3000X
6 energy T
450127 450126 42 1,2 2558 Hours until next mainte‐ 0,1 h 3000X
nance T
450128 450127 42 3,4,5, 2568 Gen. hours of operation 0,01 h 3000X

6 T
450130 450129 43 1,2 5541 Setpoint frequency 0,01 Hz 3000X

T
450131 450130 43 3,4,5, 5542 Setpoint active power 0,1 kW 3000X

6 T
450133 450132 44 1,2,3, 5640 Setpoint voltage 1 V 3000X

4 T
450135 450134 44 5,6 5641 Setpoint power factor 0,001 3000X

T
450136 450135 45 1,2 4090 Idle mode OR Ramp to rated Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
active (suppresses under‐ T
volt., underfreq., ...)
04.15 Idle run is active Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X

T
04.12 Start without closing Mask: 2000h Bit 3000X

GCB T
04.64 Key activation Mask: 1000h Bit 3000X

T
A manual START has been Mask: 0800h Bit 3000X

requested T
A manual STOP has been Mask: 0400h Bit 3000X

requested T
04.10 Cooldown is active Mask: 0200h Bit 3000X

T
03.01 Auxiliary Services is Mask: 0100h Bit 3000X

active T
03.07 Engine monitoring Mask: 0080h Bit 3000X

delay expired T
03.08 Breaker delay timer Mask: 0040h Bit 3000X

has expired T
03.25 Engine shall run Mask: 0020h Bit 3000X

T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)
04.27 Critical mode is active Mask: 0010h Bit 3000X

T
03.06 Engine release is Mask: 0008h Bit 3000X

active T
03.30 Auxiliary services Mask: 0004h Bit 3000X

prerun is active T
03.31 Auxiliary services Mask: 0002h Bit 3000X

postrun is active T
04.61 Lamp test request Mask: 0001h Bit 3000X

T
450137 450136 45 3,4 4091 03.02 Starter / Crank is Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
active T
03.28 Operating Magnet / Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X

Gasrelay is active T
03.04 Preglow or Ignition is Mask: 2000h Bit 3000X

active T
04.11 Mains settling timer is Mask: 1000h Bit 3000X

running T
04.09 Emergency mode is Mask: 0800h Bit 3000X

currently active T
03.40 Remote Shutdown Mask: 0400h Bit 3000X New

(ID503, Bit9) T
03.33 Free PID Controller 3: Mask: 0200h Bit 3000X

Lower Command T

Raise Command T

Lower Command T

Raise Command T
03.27 Stop solenoid is active Mask: 0020h Bit 3000X

T
03.24 Excitation AVR (Run- Mask: 0010h Bit 3500X

up Synchronization) T
The genset runs mains par‐ Mask: 0008h Bit 3000X

allel T

Lower Command T

Raise Command T
Increment Engine Start Mask: 0001h Bit 3000X

Counter T
450138 450137 45 5,6 4155 03.20 3-Pos. Controller Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
Freq./Power raise T
03.21 3-Pos. Controller Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X

Freq./Power lower T

Volt./ReactPow raise T

Volt./ReactPow lower T
04.06 GCB is closed Mask: 0800h Bit 3000X

T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)
04.07 MCB is closed Mask: 0400h Bit 3000X

T
05.16 Derating active (J1939 Mask: 0200h Bit 3000X

or freely) T
04.18 Synchronisation GCB Mask: 0100h Bit 3000X

procedure is active T
04.19 Opening GCB relay is Mask: 0080h Bit 3000X

active T
04.20 Close command GCB Mask: 0040h Bit 3000X

is active T
04.21 Synchronisation MCB Mask: 0020h Bit 3000X

04.22 Open command MCB Mask: 0010h Bit 3000X

is active T
04.23 Close command MCB Mask: 0008h Bit 3000X

is active T
04.28 Unloading generator Mask: 0004h Bit 3000X

is active T
04.29 Unloading mains is Mask: 0002h Bit 3000X

active T
04.30 Power limited prerun Mask: 0001h Bit 3000X

T
450139 450138 46 1,2 4156 04.16 GGB is closed Mask: 8000h Bit 3500X
T
04.17 GGB is released Mask: 4000h Bit 3500X

T
04.24 Synchronisation GGB Mask: 2000h Bit 3500X

04.25 Open command GGB Mask: 1000h Bit 3500X

is active T
04.26 Close command GGB Mask: 0800h Bit 3500X

is active T
Dead busbar closure requ. Mask: 0400h Bit 3000X

for GCB,MCB or GGB T
4.62 Active power load Mask: 0200h Bit 3000X

share is active T
4.63 Reactive power load Mask: 0100h Bit 3000X

share is active T
Generator with a closed Mask: 0080h Bit 3000X

GCB is requested T
LDSS: The Engine shall Mask: 0040h Bit 3000X

start T
LDSS: The Engine shall stop Mask: 0020h Bit 3000X

T
LDSS: The Engine shall Mask: 0010h Bit 3000X

stop, if possible T
LDSS: Minimum Running Mask: 0008h Bit 3000X

Time is active T
04.43 The LDSS function is Mask: 0004h Bit 3000X

active T
04.60 Critical mode postrun Mask: 0002h Bit 3000X

T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)
AUTOMATIC Run: Switch to Mask: 0001h Bit 3000X

Operating Mode STOP T
450140 450139 46 3,4 4092 04.13 Remote Start request Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X New
T
04.14 Remote acknowledge Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X New

T
internal Mask: 2000h Bit 3000X

T
86.25 LM Frequency Droop Mask: 1000h Bit 3000X New

active T
86.26 LM Voltage Droop Mask: 0800h Bit 3000X New

active T
Synchronization mode Mask: 0400h Bit 3000X New

Check active T
Synchronization mode Per‐ Mask: 0200h Bit 3000X New

missive active T
Synchronization mode Run Mask: 0100h Bit 3000X New

active T
86.85 LM Enable MCB Mask: 0080h Bit 3000X New

T

d

d

d

d

d

d

d
450141 450140 46 5,6 10284 12.32 External discrete input Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
32 latched T

31 latched T

30 latched T

29 latched T

28 latched T

27 latched T

26 latched T

25 latched T

24 latched T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

23 latched T

22 latched T

21 latched T

20 latched T

19 latched T

18 latched T

17 latched T
450142 450141 47 1,2 8009 98.32 LM External DO 32 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X
T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T
450143 450142 47 3,4 10170 External Analog input 1 changeable 3000X

T

T

T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T

T
450159 450158 52 5,6 10245 External Analog Output 1 0,01 % 3000X

T

T

T

T
450163 450162 54 1,2 Internal
450164 450163 54 3,4,5, 2580 Period of use counter 0.01 h 3000X

6 T
450166 450165 55 1,2 4093 08.34 GGB fail to close Mask: 8000h Bit 3500X
latched T
08.35 GGB fail to open Mask: 4000h Bit 3500X

latched T
08.27 Missing Mask: 2000h Bit 3000X New

easYgen-3000 T
08.28 Missing LS5 Mask: 1000h Bit 3500X New

T
05.18 Cylinder temperature Mask: 0800h Bit 3000X

level 1 T

level 2 T

wire break T

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

d
08.44 Syst.update LS5 Mask: 0080h Bit 3500X

T
08.43 Syst.update easYgen Mask: 0040h Bit 3000X

T
06.32 Gen.AC wiring Mask: 0020h Bit 3000X

T
06.33 Busbar1 AC wiring Mask: 0010h Bit 3500X

T

d

d

d
Load share diagnostic: Own Mask: 0001h Bit 3000X New

Unit is suspected T
The Load share Diagnostic function suspects the own device as not working
properly
450167 450166 55 3,4,5, 219 Nominal active power in 1 kW 3000X

6 system (in own segment) T
450169 450168 56 1,2 4157 28.01 Command 1 to LS5 Mask: 8000h Bit 3500X
(OR) T
28.02 Command 2 to LS5 Mask: 4000h Bit 3500X

(OR) T

(OR) T

(OR) T

(OR) T

(OR) T
Gen excitation limit active Mask: 0200h Bit 3500X

T
03.39 Neutral interlocking - Mask: 0100h Bit 3000X

Closed NC T
05.17 Uprating active Mask: 0080h Bit reserve

d

d

d

d

d

d

d

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)
03.38 Inhibit cranking Mask: 0001h Bit 3000X New

T
450170 450169 56 3,4,5, 218 Active real power in system 1 kW 3000X

6 (in own segment) T
450172 450171 57 1,2 Internal reserve

d
450173 450172 57 3,4,5, 217 Active power reserve in 1 kW 3000X

6 system (in own segment) T
450175 450174 58 1,2 Internal reserve remov

d ed
450176 450175 58 3,4 239 System actual nominal 0.01 % 3000X

power T
450177 450176 58 5,6 240 System total real power 0.01 % 3000X
T

d ed
450179 450178 59 3,4 241 System reserve active 0.01 % 3000X

power T
s
450180 450179 59 5,6 15311 Engine Derate Request 0.1 % 3000X

T

d ed

d ed

d ed
450184 450183 61 1,2 2556 Days until next maintenance 1 d 3000X rees‐
T tab‐
lished
450185 450184 61 3,4,5, 233 Busbar: Voltage L3-N 0.1 V 3500X rees‐
6 T-P2 tab‐
lished
450187 450186 62 1,2 4094 02.03 Generator voltage in Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X rees‐
range T tab‐
lished
02.06 Busbar voltage in Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X rees‐

range T tab‐
lished
02.11 Mains voltage and fre‐ Mask: 2000h Bit 3000X rees‐
quency in range T tab‐
lished
02.21 Busbar is dead Mask: 1000h Bit 3000X rees‐

T tab‐
lished
86.27 LM External mains Mask: 0800h Bit 3000X rees‐

decoupling T tab‐
lished
87.70 LM Release engine Mask: 0400h Bit 3000X rees‐

monitoring T tab‐
lished
87.72 LM Disable mains Mask: 0200h Bit 3000X rees‐

monitoring T tab‐
lished

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)
87.73 LM Mains decoupling Mask: 0100h Bit 3000X rees‐

MCB T tab‐
lished
87.74 LM Inhibit dead bus Mask: 0080h Bit 3000X rees‐

GCB T tab‐
lished
86.41 LDSS IOP Reserve Mask: 0040h Bit 3000X rees‐

power 2 ready T tab‐
lished
Internal Mask: 0020h Bit reserve in

d prepa‐
ration

d prepa‐
ration
86.42 LDSS MOP Reserve Mask: 0008h Bit 3000X rees‐

power 2 ready T tab‐
lished

d prepa‐
ration

d prepa‐
ration
02.45 Mains release breaker Mask: 0001h Bit EG300 Mains

0XT is
within
oper‐
ating
range
s
450188 450187 62 3,4,5, 5642 Setpoint reactive power 0,1 kvar 3000X rees‐
6 T tab‐
lished
450190 450189 63 1,2 4095 96.32 LM Internal Flag 32 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X rees‐
T tab‐
lished
96.31 LM Internal Flag 31 Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X rees‐

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished
450191 450190 63 3,4 Internal reserve rees‐

d tab‐
lished
450192 450191 63 5,6 9642 Free AnalogManager Value 3000X 9642 rees‐
1 T is long tab‐
(for lished
single
acces
s)
2 T is long tab‐
(for lished
single
acces
s)
3 T is long tab‐
(for lished
single
acces
s)
4 T is long tab‐
(for lished
single
acces
s)
5 T is long tab‐
(for lished
single
acces
s)

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)
6 T is long tab‐
(for lished
single
acces
s)
7 T is long tab‐
(for lished
single
acces
s)
8 T is long tab‐
(for lished
single
acces
s)
9 T is long tab‐
(for lished
single
acces
s)
10 T is long tab‐
(for lished
single
acces
s)
11 T is long tab‐
(for lished
single
acces
s)
12 T is long tab‐
(for lished
single
acces
s)
13 T is long tab‐
(for lished
single
acces
s)
14 T is long tab‐
(for lished
single
acces
s)
450206 450205 68 3,4,5, 9698 Free AnalogManager Value 3000X rees‐

6 15 (long) T tab‐
lished

d tab‐
lished
450209 450208 69 3,4,5, 9702 Free AnalogManager Value 3000X rees‐

6 16 (long) T tab‐
lished

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)
450211 450210 70 1,2 8908 81.29 Engine Coolant Tem‐ 1 °C/°F 3000X rees‐
[°C] / perature (HMI) T tab‐
8910 [°F] lished
Unit depends on parameter 3631 (°C/°F).
450212 450211 70 3,4 8904 81.25 Engine Oil Pressure 0.1bar/1psi bar/ps 3000X rees‐
[0.1bar] / (HMI) i T tab‐
8909 lished
[psi]
Unit depends on parameter 3630 (bar/psi).
450213 450212 70 5,6 4096 Monitored Number of Mask FF00h 3000X Load rees‐
easYgen communicating T share tab‐
Diag‐ lished
nostic
Number of easYgens cur‐ Mask 00FFh 3000X Load rees‐

rently communicating T share tab‐
Diag‐ lished
nostic
450214 450213 71 1,2 4097 Monitored Number of LS5 Mask FF00h 3500X LS-5 rees‐
communicating T Diag‐ tab‐
nostic lished
Number of LS5 currently Mask 00FFh 3500X LS-5 rees‐

communicating T Diag‐ tab‐
nostic lished
450215 450214 71 3,4 4098 Device number of missing Mask FFFFh 3500X LS-5 rees‐
LS-5 (33-48) T Diag‐ tab‐
nostic lished
LS-5 Device Nr. 48 Mask 8000h rees‐

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished
450216 450215 71 5,6 4099 Device number of missing Mask FFFFh 3500X LS-5 rees‐
LS-5 (49-64) T Diag‐ tab‐
nostic lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished
450217 450216 72 1,2 10282 16.16 Free alarm 16 latched Mask: 8000h Bit 3000X rees‐
T tab‐
lished
16.15 Free alarm 15 latched Mask: 4000h Bit 3000X rees‐

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished

T tab‐
lished
16.07 Free alarm 7 latched Mask: 0040h Bit reserve rees‐

d tab‐
lished

d tab‐
lished

d tab‐
lished

d tab‐
lished

d tab‐
lished

d tab‐
lished

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

d tab‐
lished
450218 450217 72 3,4 10313 Alarms 4 latched (unac‐

knowledged)

d

d

d
06.36 Pole slip Mask: 1000h Bit reserve

d
07.33 FRT Time-dep. Mask: 0800h Bit reserve Only

voltage 3 d revi‐
sion
1.16

d

d
07.31 FRT Time-dep. Mask: 0100h Bit reserve

voltage 2 d

d

d

d
08.40 CAN J1939 device 3 Mask: 0010h Bit reserve

timeout d

timeout d

timeout d
08.37 CAN J1939 ECU Mask: 0002h Bit reserve

timeout d
08.29 CANopen error inter‐ Mask: 0001h Bit reserve

face 3 d

d tab‐
lished
450220 450219 73 1,2,3, 2526 Generator negative reactive 0.01 Mvarh reserve 1.16 rees‐
4 energy d tab‐
lished

d tab‐
lished

d tab‐
lished

d tab‐
lished

Appendix

eter ID ment pared
addr. (*1) (Mux)

d tab‐
lished

d tab‐
lished

d tab‐
lished

d tab‐
lished

d tab‐
lished
75 Mux x 20ms = 1.5s refresh rate

CANopen: Slightly improved refresh rate
Modicon Start Size Format Param Description Multiplier (BUS- Unit Model Com‐
start addr. (*1) ID data * Multiplier = ment
addr. real value)
450001 450000 16 bits signed Protocoll-ID, always 5016 --
450002 450001 16 bits 3181 Skaling Power (16 bits)

Exponent 10x W (5;4;3;2)
450003 450002 16 bits 3182 Skaling Volts (16 bits)

Exponent 10x V (2;1;0;-1)
450004 450003 16 bits 3183 Skaling Amps (16 bits)

Exponent 10x A (0;-1)
450005 450004 0 (reserve)
450006 450005 0 (reserve)
450007 450006 0 (reserve)
450008 450007 0 (reserve)
AC Generator and Busbar values
450009 450008 283 Busbar Voltage L3-N format defined by V EG3500X

index 3182 (mod‐ T-P2
icon Adress
450003)
450010 450009 16 bits signed 144 Generator frequency 0.01 Hz EG3000X

T
450011 450010 16 bits signed 246 Total generator power format defined by W EG3000X
index 3181 (mod‐ T
icon Adress
450002)
450012 450011 16 bits signed 247 Total generator reactive format defined by var EG3000X
power index 3181 (mod‐ T
icon Adress
450002)

Appendix
addr. real value)
450013 450012 16 bits signed 160 Generator power factor 0.001 EG3000X
T
450014 450013 16 bits signed 248 Generator voltage L1-L2 format defined by V EG3000X
icon Adress
450003)
icon Adress
450003)
icon Adress
450003)
450017 450016 16 bits signed 251 Generator voltage L1-N format defined by V EG3000X
icon Adress
450003)
icon Adress
450003)
icon Adress
450003)
450020 450019 16 bits signed 255 Generator current L1 format defined by A EG3000X
icon Adress
450004)
icon Adress
450004)
icon Adress
450004)
450023 450022 16 bits signed 209 Busbar Frequency 0.01 Hz EG3000X

T
450024 450023 16 bits signed 254 Busbar Voltage L1-L2 format defined by V EG3000X
icon Adress
450003)
icon Adress
450003)
icon Adress
450003)
450027 450026 16 bits signed 281 Busbar Voltage L1-N format defined by V EG3500X
icon Adress
450003)
450028 450027 16 bits signed 282 Busbar Voltage L2-N format defined by V EG3500X
icon Adress
450003)
450029 450028 16 bits signed 5541 Setpoint frequency 1 Hz EG3000X

T

Appendix
addr. real value)
450030 450029 16 bits signed 5641 Setpoint power factor 1 EG3000X

(cosphi) T
AC Mains values
450031 450030 16 bits signed 147 Mains frequency 0.01 Hz 3000XT
450032 450031 16 bits signed 258 Total mains active power format defined by W 3000XT
index 3181 (mod‐
icon Address
450002)
450033 450032 16 bits signed 259 Total mains reactive power format defined by var 3000XT
index 3181 (mod‐
icon Address
450002)
450034 450033 16 bits signed 208 Mains power factor 0.001 3000XT
450035 450034 16 bits signed 260 Mains voltage L1-L2 format defined by V 3000XT
index 3182 (mod‐
icon Address
450003)
index 3182 (mod‐
icon Address
450003)
index 3182 (mod‐
icon Address
450003)
450038 450037 16 bits signed 263 Mains voltage L1-N format defined by V 3000XT
index 3182 (mod‐
icon Address
450003)
index 3182 (mod‐
icon Address
450003)
index 3182 (mod‐
icon Address
450003)
450041 450040 16 bits signed 266 Mains current L1 format defined by A 3000XT
index 3183 (mod‐
icon Address
450004)
450042 450041 16 bits 0 (prepared mains current format defined by A reserved

L2) index 3183 (mod‐
icon Address
450004)
450043 450042 16 bits 0 (prepared mains current format defined by A reserved

L3) index 3183 (mod‐
icon Address
450004)
450044 450043 16 bits signed 267 Average LS5 Delta Mains format defined by V 3500XT
voltage L-L index 3182
450045 450044 16 bits signed 268 Average LS5 Wye Mains format defined by V 3500XT
voltage L-N index 3182
AC System values
450046 450045 16 bits signed 239 Nominal real power in 0.01 % 3000XT
system
450047 450046 16 bits signed 240 Real power in system 0.01 % 3000XT

Appendix
addr. real value)
450048 450047 16 bits signed 241 Reserve real power in 0.01 % 3000XT
system
450049 450048 16 bits signed 269 Active power LS5 format defined by W 3500XT
index 3181
450050 450049 16 bits signed 270 Reactive power LS5 format defined by var 3500XT
index 3181
450051 450050 16 bits signed 4608 Average LS5 Mains delta 0.01 Hz 3500XT
frequency L-L
DC Analogue Values (Engine Values)
450052 450051 16 bits signed 10100 Engine Pickup speed 1 rpm 3000XT
450053 450052 16 bits signed 10110 Battery voltage 0.1 V 3000XT
450054 450053 16 bits signed 10159 AI Auxiliary excitation D+ 0.1 V 3000XT
450055 450054 16 bits signed 2540 Engine, number of start 1 3000XT

requests
450056 450055 16 bits signed 2558 Hours until next mainte‐ 1 h 3000XT
nance
450057 450056 16 bits signed 10111 Analog input 1 changeable 3000XT
450061 450060 16 bits signed 10151 Analog input 5 changeable 3500XT-

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2
450067 450066 16 bits signed 10157 Analog input 11 changeable reserved
450068 450067 16 bits signed 10158 Analog input 12 changeable reserved
450069 450068 16 bits signed 10310 Analog output 1 changeable % 3000XT
450070 450069 16 bits signed 10311 Analog output 2 changeable % 3000XT
450071 450070 16 bits signed 10317 Analog output 3 changeable % 3000XT New
450072 450071 16 bits signed 10318 Analog output 4 changeable % 3500XT-

P2

P2

P2
450075 450074 16 bits signed 10170 External Analog input 1 changeable 3000XT

Appendix
addr. real value)
450091 450090 16 bits signed 10245 External Analog Output 1 0.01 % 3000XT
450095 450094 16 bits signed 2556 Days until next mainte‐ 1 days 3000XT
nance
450096 450095 16 bits signed 10277 0 (reserve) changeable reserved
450097 450096 16 bits signed "_" Engine Coolant Tempera‐ 1 °C/°F 3000XT New
ture (HMI)
The
same
Value
as
shown
in HMI
450098 450097 16 bits signed "-" Engine Oil Pressure (HMI) 0.1bar/psi bar/p 3000XT New
si
The
same
Value
as
shown
in HMI
450099 450098 16 bits 0 (reserve)
Control and Status
450100 450099 16 bits bit array "-" Control mode (STOP/ Mask:000Fh enum 3000XT New
AUTO/MANUAL/TEST) 1=AUTO .
2=STOP TEST
4=MANUAL include
8=TEST d
450101 450100 16 bits bit array 10202 State Display Id description see enum 3000XT
operation manual .
status messages
450102 450101 16 bits 0 (reserve)
450103 450102 16 bits bit array 4153 ControlBits1
Idle mode OR Ramp to Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT

rated active
04.15 Idle run is active Mask: 4000h Bit 3000XT
04.12 Start without closing Mask: 2000h Bit 3000XT

GCB
04.64 Key activation Mask: 1000h Bit 3000XT

Appendix
addr. real value)
A manual START has been Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT

requested
A manual STOP has been Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT

requested
04.10 Cooldown is active Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT
03.01 Auxiliary Services is Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT

active
03.07 Engine monitoring Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT

delay expired
03.08 Breaker delay timer Mask: 0040h Bit 3000XT

has expired
03.25 Engine shall run Mask: 0020h Bit 3000XT
04.27 Critical mode is Mask: 0010h Bit 3000XT

active
03.06 Engine release is Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT

active
03.30 Auxiliary services Mask: 0004h Bit 3000XT

prerun is active
03.31 Auxiliary services Mask: 0002h Bit 3000XT

postrun is active
04.61 Lamp test request Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT
03.02 Starter / Crank is Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT

active
03.28 Operating Magnet / Mask: 4000h Bit 3000XT

Gasrelay is active
03.04 Preglow or Ignition is Mask: 2000h Bit 3000XT

active
04.11 Mains settling timer is Mask: 1000h Bit 3000XT

running
04.09 Emergency mode is Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT

currently active
03.40 Remote Shutdown Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT New

(ID503, Bit9)
03.33 Free PID Controller Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT

3: Lower Command

3: Raise Command

2: Lower Command

2: Raise Command
03.27 Stop solenoid is Mask: 0020h Bit 3000XT

active
03.24 Excitation AVR (Run- Mask: 0010h Bit 3500XT

up Synchronization)
The genset runs mains par‐ Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT

allel

1: Lower Command

1: Raise Command

Appendix
addr. real value)
Increment Engine Start Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT

Counter
03.20 3-Pos. Controller Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT

Freq./Power raise

Freq./Power lower

Volt./ReactPow raise

Volt./ReactPow lower
04.06 GCB is closed Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT
04.07 MCB is closed Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT
05.16 Derating active Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT

(J1939 or freely)
04.18 Synchronisation GCB Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT

procedure is active
04.19 Open GCB relay is Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT

active
04.20 Close command Mask: 0040h Bit 3000XT

GCB is active
04.21 Synchronisation MCB Mask: 0020h Bit 3000XT

procedure is active
04.22 Open command MCB Mask: 0010h Bit 3000XT

is active

MCB is active
04.28 Unloading generator Mask: 0004h Bit 3000XT

is active
04.29 Unloading mains is Mask: 0002h Bit 3000XT

active
04.30 Power limited prerun Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT
04.16 GGB is closed Mask: 8000h Bit 3500XT
04.17 GGB is released Mask: 4000h Bit 3500XT
04.24 Synchronisation GGB Mask: 2000h Bit 3500XT

procedure is active
04.25 Open command GGB Mask: 1000h Bit 3500XT

is active

GGB is active
Dead busbar closure requ. Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT

for GCB,MCB or GGB
4.62 Active power load Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT

share is active
4.63 Reactive power load Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT

share is active
Generator with a closed Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT

GCB is requested
LDSS: The Engine shall Mask: 0040h Bit 3000XT

start

Appendix
addr. real value)

stop

stop, if possible
LDSS: Minimum Running Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT

Time is active
04.43 The LDSS function is Mask: 0004h Bit 3000XT

active
04.60 Critical mode postrun Mask: 0002h Bit 3000XT
AUTOMATIC Run: Switch Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT

to Operating Mode STOP
04.13 Remote Start request Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT New
04.14 Remote acknowledge Mask: 4000h Bit 3000XT New
05.17 Uprating active Mask: 2000h Bit 3000XT New
86.25 LM Frequency Droop Mask: 1000h Bit 3000XT New

active
86.26 LM Voltage Droop Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT New

active
Synchronization mode Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT New

Check active
Synchronization mode Per‐ Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT New

missive active
Synchronization mode Run Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT New

active
86.85 LM Enable MCB Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT New
86.41 LDSS IOP Reserve Mask: 0040h Bit 3000XT New

power 2 ready
86.42 LDSS MOP Reserve Mask: 0020h Bit 3000XT New

power 2 ready
02.39 Mains decoubling Mask: 0010h Bit 3000XT New

enabled
Opening GCB active Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT New
Parameter Set 1-7 Selec‐ Mask: 0004h Bit reserved pre‐

tion Bit 3 pared
for
3500XT
Rental

tion Bit 2 pared
for
3500XT
Rental

tion Bit 1 pared
for
3500XT
Rental
450108 450107 16 bits bit array 4084 ControlBits 21
02.03 Generator voltage in Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT New

range
02.06 Busbar voltage in Mask: 4000h Bit 3000XT New

range

Appendix
addr. real value)
02.11 Mains voltage and Mask: 2000h Bit 3000XT New

frequency in range
02.21 Busbar is dead Mask: 1000h Bit 3000XT New
86.27 LM Mains failure by Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT New

external device
87.70 LM Release engine Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT New

monitoring
87.72 LM Disable mains Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT New

monitoring
87.73 LM Mains decoupling Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT New

MCB
87.74 LM Inhibit dead bus Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT New

GCB
Load share diagnostic: Own Mask: 0040h Bit 3000XT New

Unit is suspected
02.45 Mains release Mask: 0020h Bit 3000XT Mains

breaker is
within
oper‐
ating
window
Internal Mask: 0010h Bit reserved
Discrete Outputs
450109 450108 16 bits bit array 10107 Relay Outputs 1
13.01 Relay-Output 1 (Self- Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT

test-relay)
13.02 Relay-Output 2 Mask: 4000h Bit 3000XT
internal Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT

Appendix
addr. real value)
13.13 Relay-Output 13 Mask: 8000h Bit 3500XT-

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2
13.34 Transistor output 2 Mask: 0002h Bit 3500XT-

P2
13.33 Transistor output 1 Mask: 0001h Bit 3500XT-

P2
98.16 LM External DO 16 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT

Appendix
addr. real value)
450113 450112 16 bits bit array 4157 GAPControlBits6
28.01 Command 1 to LS5 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT

(OR)

(OR)

(OR)

(OR)

(OR)

(OR)
Gen excitation limit active Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT
03.39 Neutral interlocking - Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT

Closed NC
05.17 Uprating active Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT
Inhibit cranking Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT New
450114 450113 16 bits 0 (reserve)
Alarm Management
General
450115 450114 16 bits bit array 10131 Alarm General

Appendix
addr. real value)
01.11 New Alarm triggered Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT New
internal Mask: 4000h Bit reserved
01.06 Alarm class F latched Mask: 0020h Bit 3000XT
01.05 Alarm class E latched Mask: 0010h Bit 3000XT
01.04 Alarm class D Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT

latched
01.03 Alarm class C Mask: 0004h Bit 3000XT

latched
01.02 Alarm class B latched Mask: 0002h Bit 3000XT
01.01 Alarm class A latched Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT
450116 450115 16 bits bit array 10149 Alarms 2 latched (unac‐

knowledged)
3064 08.30 Timeout Synchroni‐ Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT

sation GCB latched

sation MCB latched

sation GGB latched
4056 05.11 Charge fail (D+ func‐ Mask: 1000h Bit 3000XT
tionality) latched
2944 Operating range failure 12 Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT

latched (phase rotation)
10089 Internal Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT
10083 08.47 MCB failure 50BF Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT
10082 08.46 GCB failure 50BF Mask: 0100h Bit reserved
10086 05.22 ECU Protect alarm Mask: 0080h Bit reserved
10085 05.23 ECU Emission alarm Mask: 0040h Bit reserved
10088 08.19 CANopen error at Mask: 0020h Bit 3000XT

CAN Interface 2
4073 08.16 Parameter Alignment Mask: 0010h Bit 3000XT

LDSS
4064 08.17 Missing members Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT
1714 08.48 MCB plausibility Mask: 0004h Bit reserved
15125 05.13 ECU red lamp alarm Mask: 0002h Bit 3000XT
latched
15126 05.14 ECU yellow (amber) Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT

lamp alarm latched
450117 450116 16 bits bit array 4169 Alarms 2 active

Appendix
addr. real value)
Timeout Synchronisation Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT New

GCB

MCB

GGB
Charge fail (D+ function‐ Mask: 1000h Bit 3000XT New

ality)
Gen/Busbar/Mains phase Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT New

rotat.
Internal Mask: 0400h Bit reserved New
MCB failure 50BF Mask: 0200h Bit reserved New
GCB failure 50BF Mask: 0100h Bit reserved New
ECU Protect alarm Mask: 0080h Bit reserved New
ECU Emission alarm Mask: 0040h Bit 3000XT New
CANopen error at CAN Mask: 0020h Bit 3000XT New

Interface 2
Parameter Alignment LDSS Mask: 0010h Bit 3000XT New
Missing members Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT New
MCB plausibility Mask: 0004h Bit reserved New
ECU red lamp alarm Mask: 0002h Bit 3000XT New
ECU yellow (amber) lamp Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT New

alarm
450118 450117 16 bits bit array 10190 Alarms 3

(latched / unacknowledged)
3089 08.34 GGB fail to close Mask: 8000h Bit 3500XT

latched
3090 08.35 GGB fail to open Mask: 4000h Bit 3500XT

latched
Missing 3000XT Mask: 2000h Bit 3000XT New
Missing LS5 Mask: 1000h Bit 3500XT New
14575 05.18 Cylinder temperature Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT

level 1

level 2

wire break
06.35 Pole slip Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT
08.44 Syst.update LS5 Mask: 0080h Bit 3500XT
08.43 Syst.update easYgen Mask: 0040h Bit 3500XT
06.32 Gen.AC Wiring Mask: 0020h Bit 3500XT
06.33 Busbar1 AC Wiring Mask: 0010h Bit 3500XT
450119 450118 16 bits 4193 Alarms 3 active

Appendix
addr. real value)
GGB fail to close Mask: 8000h Bit 3500XT New
GGB fail to open Mask: 4000h Bit 3500XT New
Missing 3000XT Mask: 2000h Bit 3000XT New
Missing LS5 Mask: 1000h Bit 3500XT New
Temperature deviation level Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT New

1
Temperature deviation level Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT New

2
Temperature deviation wire Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT New

break
Syst.update LS5 Mask: 0080h Bit reserved
Syst.update easYgen Mask: 0040h Bit reserved
Gen.AC Wiring Mask: 0020h Bit reserved
Busbar1 AC Wiring Mask: 0010h Bit reserved
450120 450119 16 bits 4086 Operating Range Moni‐ Mask: FF00h 3000XT New
toring Code Number
Oper‐
ating
range
Error-
Code
The current segment Mask: 00FFh 3000XT New

number
One of
64 Seg‐
ments
pos‐
sible
Alarm Management
Engine
450121 450120 16 bits bit array 10133 Alarms 1 latched (unac‐

knowledged)
2112 05.01 Engine Over speed 1 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT Only
latched rename
d
accordi
ng to
LM
system
2113 05.02 Engine Over speed 2 Mask: 4000h Bit 3000XT Only
latched rename
d
accordi
ng to
LM
system

Appendix
addr. real value)
2162 05.03 Engine under speed Mask: 2000h Bit 3000XT Only
1 latched rename
d
accordi
ng to
LM
system
2163 05.04 Engine under speed Mask: 1000h Bit 3000XT Only
2 latched rename
d
accordi
ng to
LM
system
2652 05.05 Unintended stop Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT Only

detected latched rename
d
accordi
ng to
LM
system
2457 05.07 Speed detection Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT Only

alarm latched rename
d
accordi
ng to
LM
system
2504 05.06 Shutdown malfunc‐ Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT Only

tion detected latched rename
d
accordi
ng to
LM
system
2603 08.05 GCB fail to close Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT Only
latched rename
d
accordi
ng to
LM
system
2604 08.06 GCB fail to open Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT Only
latched rename
d
accordi
ng to
LM
system
2623 08.07 MCB fail to close Mask: 0040h Bit 3000XT Only
latched rename
d
accordi
ng to
LM
system
2624 08.08 MCB fail to open Mask: 0020h Bit 3000XT Only
latched rename
d
accordi
ng to
LM
system

Appendix
addr. real value)
10017 08.10 General CAN-J1939 Mask: 0010h Bit 3000XT Only

fault latched rename
d
accordi
ng to
LM
system
3325 05.08 Start fail detected Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT Only
latched rename
d
accordi
ng to
LM
system
2560 05.09 Maintenance days Mask: 0004h Bit 3000XT Only

exceeded latched rename
d
accordi
ng to
LM
system
2561 05.10 Maintenance hours Mask: 0002h Bit 3000XT Only

exceeded latched rename
d
accordi
ng to
LM
system
10087 08.18 CANopen error at Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT Only

CAN Interface 1 rename
d
accordi
ng to
LM
system
450122 450121 16 bits bit array 4167 Alarms 1 active
Engine Over speed 1 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT New
Engine Over speed 2 Mask: 4000h Bit 3000XT New
Engine under speed 1 Mask: 2000h Bit 3000XT New
Engine under speed 2 Mask: 1000h Bit 3000XT New
Unintended stop detected Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT New
Speed detection alarm Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT New
Shutdown malfunction Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT New

detected
GCB fail to close Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT New
GCB fail to open Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT New
MCB fail to close Mask: 0040h Bit 3000XT New
MCB fail to open Mask: 0020h Bit 3000XT New
General CAN-J1939 fault Mask: 0010h Bit 3000XT New
Start fail detected Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT New
Maintenance days Mask: 0004h Bit 3000XT New

exceeded
Maintenance hours Mask: 0002h Bit 3000XT New

exceeded
CANopen error at CAN Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT New

Interface 1

Appendix
addr. real value)
450123 450122 16 bits bit array 10136 Alarms Analog Inputs 1

Internal Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT
05.11 Failure Charging Mask: 0010h Bit 3000XT New

Alternator (D+)
10008 08.02 Battery over voltage Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT

2 latched
10006 08.04 Battery under voltage Mask: 0004h Bit 3000XT

2 latched
10007 08.01 Battery over voltage Mask: 0002h Bit 3000XT

1 latched
10005 08.03 Battery under voltage Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT

1 latched
450124 450123 16 bits bit array 4171 Alarms Analog Inputs 1

active
Failure Charging Alternator Mask: 0010h Bit reserved New

(D+)
Battery over voltage 2 Mask: 0008h Bit reserved New
Battery under voltage 2 Mask: 0004h Bit reserved New
Battery over voltage 1 Mask: 0002h Bit reserved New
Battery under voltage 1 Mask: 0001h Bit reserved New
450125 450124 16 bits 0 (reserve)
450126 450125 16 bits 0 (reserve)

Appendix
addr. real value)
Alarm Management
Generator
450127 450126 16 bits bit array 10134 Alarms Generator latched

(unacknowledged)
1912 06.01 Generator over fre‐ Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT

quency 1 latched
1913 06.02 Generator over fre‐ Mask: 4000h Bit 3000XT

quency 2 latched
1962 06.03 Generator under fre‐ Mask: 2000h Bit 3000XT

quency 1 latched
1963 06.04 Generator under fre‐ Mask: 1000h Bit 3000XT

quency 2 latched
2012 06.05 Generator over Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT

voltage 1 latched
2013 06.06 Generator over Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT

voltage 2 latched
2062 06.07 Generator under Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT

voltage 1 latched
2063 06.08 Generator under Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT

voltage 2 latched
2218 06.09 Generator over cur‐ Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT

rent 1 latched

rent 2 latched

rent 3 latched
2262 06.12 Reverse / reduced Mask: 0010h Bit 3000XT

power 1 latched
2263 06.13 Reverse / reduced Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT

power 2 latched
2314 06.14 Generator overload Mask: 0004h Bit 3000XT

IOP 1 latched

IOP 2 latched
450128 450127 16 bits bit array 4161 Alarms Generator active
Generator over frequency 1 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT New
Generator over frequency 2 Mask: 4000h Bit 3000XT New
Generator under frequency Mask: 2000h Bit 3000XT New

1
Generator under frequency Mask: 1000h Bit 3000XT New

2
Generator over voltage 1 Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT New
Generator over voltage 2 Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT New
Generator under voltage 1 Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT New
Generator under voltage 2 Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT New
Generator over current 1 Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT New

Appendix
addr. real value)
Reverse / reduced power 1 Mask: 0010h Bit 3000XT New
Reverse / reduced power 2 Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT New
Generator overload IOP 1 Mask: 0004h Bit 3000XT New
Generator overload IOP 2 Mask: 0002h Bit 3000XT New
internal Mask: 0001h Bit reserved New
450129 450128 16 bits bit array 10138 Alarms Generator 1 latched

(unacknowledged)
2412 06.16 Generator unbal‐ Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT

anced load 1 latched
2413 06.17 Generator unbal‐ Mask: 4000h Bit 3000XT

anced load 2 latched
3907 06.18 Generator voltage Mask: 2000h Bit 3000XT

asymmetry latched
3263 06.19 Ground fault 1 Mask: 1000h Bit 3000XT

latched
3264 06.20 Ground fault 2 Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT

latched
3955 06.21 Gen. Phase Rotation Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT

mismatch Latched
2924 06.29 Gen. active power Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT

mismatch Latched
3124 06.30 Generator unloading Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT

mismatch Latched
4038 06.22 Inverse time over Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT

current Latched
2664 06.31 Operating Range Mask: 0040h Bit 3000XT

failed latched

MOP 1 latched

MOP 2 latched
2337 06.25 Gen.Power Factor Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT

lagging 1 latched

lagging 2 latched

leading 1 latched

leading 2 latched
450130 450129 16 bits bit array 4163 Alarms Generator 1 active
Generator unbalanced load Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT New

1
Generator unbalanced load Mask: 4000h Bit 3000XT New

2
Generator voltage asym‐ Mask: 2000h Bit 3000XT New

metry
Ground fault 1 Mask: 1000h Bit 3000XT New
Ground fault 2 Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT New
Gen. Phase Rotation mis‐ Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT New

match

Appendix
addr. real value)
Gen. active power mis‐ Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT New

match
Generator unloading mis‐ Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT New

match
Inverse time over current Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT New
Operating Range failed Mask: 0040h Bit 3000XT New
Generator overload MOP 1 Mask: 0020h Bit 3000XT New
Generator overload MOP 2 Mask: 0010h Bit 3000XT New
Gen.Power Factor lagging Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT New

1
Gen.Power Factor lagging Mask: 0004h Bit 3000XT New

2
Gen.Power Factor leading Mask: 0002h Bit 3000XT New

1
Gen.Power Factor leading Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT New

2
450131 450130 16 bits 0 (reserve)
450132 450131 16 bits 0 (reserve)
Alarm Management
Mains
450133 450132 16 bits bit array 10135 Alarms Mains latched

(unacknowledged)
2862 07.06 Mains over frequency Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT

1 latched
2863 07.07 Mains over frequency Mask: 4000h Bit 3000XT

2 latched
2912 07.08 Mains under fre‐ Mask: 2000h Bit 3000XT

quency 1 latched
2913 07.09 Mains under fre‐ Mask: 1000h Bit 3000XT

quency 2 latched
2962 07.10 Mains over voltage 1 Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT

latched
2963 07.11 Mains over voltage 2 Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT

latched
3012 07.12 Mains under voltage Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT

1 latched
3013 07.13 Mains under voltage Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT

2 latched
3057 07.14 Mains Phase shift Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT

latched
3114 07.25 Mains decoupling Mask: 0040h Bit 3000XT

latched
3975 07.05 Mains Phase rotation Mask: 0004h Bit 3000XT

mismatch latched

Appendix
addr. real value)
450134 450133 16 bits bit array 4188 Alarms Mains active
2862 Mains over frequency 1 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT New
2863 Mains over frequency 2 Mask: 4000h Bit 3000XT New
2912 Mains under frequency 1 Mask: 2000h Bit 3000XT New
2913 Mains under frequency 2 Mask: 1000h Bit 3000XT New
2962 Mains over voltage 1 Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT New
2963 Mains over voltage 2 Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT New
3012 Mains under voltage 1 Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT New
3013 Mains under voltage 2 Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT New
3057 Mains Phase shift Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT New
3114 Mains decoupling Mask: 0040h Bit 3000XT New
internal Mask: 0020h Bit 3000XT New
3975 Mains Phase rotation mis‐ Mask: 0004h Bit 3000XT New
match
450135 450134 16 bits bit array 10278 Alarms Mains 1 latched

(unacknowledged)
3217 07.21 Mains import power 1 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT

latched
3218 07.22 Mains import power 2 Mask: 4000h Bit 3000XT

latched
3241 07.23 Mains export power 1 Mask: 2000h Bit 3000XT

latched
3242 07.24 Mains export power 2 Mask: 1000h Bit 3000XT

latched
2985 07.17 Mains PF lagging 1 Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT

latched
2986 07.18 Mains PF lagging 2 Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT

latched
3035 07.19 Mains PF leading 1 Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT

latched
3036 07.20 Mains PF leading 2 Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT

latched
3106 07.15 Mains df/dt latched Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT
2934 07.16 Mains active power Mask: 0040h Bit 3000XT

mismatch latched
4958 07.28 Mains Time-dep. Mask: 0020h Bit 3000XT

Voltage (FRT) latched
Mains Time-dep. Voltage 3 Mask: 0010h Bit 3000XT

(FRT)
8834 07.27 Mains slow voltage Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT

increase (10 min)
Mains Time-dep. Voltage 2 Mask: 0004h Bit 3000XT

(FRT)

Appendix
addr. real value)
3288 07.29 QV Monitoring step 1 Mask: 0002h Bit 3000XT

tripped
3289 07.30 QV Monitoring step 2 Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT

tripped
450136 450135 16 bits bit array 4187 Alarms Mains 1 active
Mains import power 1 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT New
Mains import power 2 Mask: 4000h Bit 3000XT New
Mains export power 1 Mask: 2000h Bit 3000XT New
Mains export power 2 Mask: 1000h Bit 3000XT New
Mains PF lagging 1 Mask: 0800h Bit 3000XT New
Mains PF lagging 2 Mask: 0400h Bit 3000XT New
Mains PF leading 1 Mask: 0200h Bit 3000XT New
Mains PF leading 2 Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT New
Mains df/dt Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT New
Mains active power mis‐ Mask: 0040h Bit 3000XT New

match
Mains Time-dep. Voltage 1 Mask: 0020h Bit 3000XT New

(FRT)

(FRT)
Mains slow voltage Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT New

increase (10 min)

(FRT)
QV Monitoring 1 tripped Mask: 0002h Bit 3000XT New
QV Monitoring 2 tripped Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT New
450137 450136 16 bits 0 (reserve)
450138 450137 16 bits 0 (reserve)
Alarm Management
Digital Inputs
450139 450138 16 bits bit array 10132 Alarms Digital Inputs 1

10600 09.01 Discrete input 1 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

Appendix
addr. real value)

latched

latched

latched

latched

active
Discrete input 1 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT New
450141 450140 16 bits bit array 16377 Alarms External Digital

Inputs 1 latched (unac‐
knowledged)
16376 12.16 External discrete Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT

input 16 latched

input 15 latched

input 14 latched

input 13 latched

input 12 latched

input 11 latched

input 10 latched

Appendix
addr. real value)

input 9 latched

input 8 latched

input 7 latched

input 6 latched

input 5 latched

input 4 latched

input 3 latched

input 2 latched

input 1 latched
450142 450141 16 bits bit array 4185 Alarms External Digital

Inputs active
External discrete input 16 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT New
450143 450142 16 bits bit array 10284 Alarm External Digital

Inputs 2 latched (unac‐
knowledged)

input 32 latched

input 31 latched

input 30 latched

input 29 latched

input 28 latched

Appendix
addr. real value)

input 27 latched

input 26 latched

input 25 latched

input 24 latched

input 23 latched

input 22 latched

input 21 latched

input 20 latched

input 19 latched

input 18 latched

input 17 latched
450144 450143 16 bits bit array 4195 Alarm External Digital

Inputs 2 active

10613 09.13 Discrete input 13 Mask: 8000h Bit 3500XT-

latched P2

latched P2

latched P2

Appendix
addr. real value)

latched P2

latched P2

latched P2

latched P2

latched P2

latched P2

latched P2

latched P2

active
Discrete input 13 Mask: 8000h Bit 3500XT- New

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

Appendix
addr. real value)
450147 450146 16 bits 0 (reserve)
450148 450147 16 bits 0 (reserve)
450149 450148 16 bits 0 (reserve)
450150 450149 16 bits 0 (reserve)
Alarm Management
Flexible Thresholds
450151 450150 16 bits bit array 10279 Alarms Flexible thresholds

1-16 latched (unacknowl‐
edged)
10033 15.16 Flexible limit 16 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

1-16 active
Flexible limit 16 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT New

Appendix
addr. real value)

edged)

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

17-32 active

Appendix
addr. real value)

edged)

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

33-40 active

Appendix
addr. real value)
450157 450156 16 bits 0 (reserve) New
450158 450157 16 bits 0 (reserve)
450159 450158 16 bits 0 (reserve)
Alarm Management
DC Analogue Values Wirebreak
450160 450159 16 bits bit array 10137 Alarms Analog Inputs Wire
Break latched (unacknowl‐
edged)
10014 10.01 Analog input 1 wire Mask: 0002h Bit 3000XT

break

break

break
10061 10.04 Analog input 4 wire Mask: 0010h Bit 3500XT-

break P2

break P2

break P2

break P2

break P2

break P2

break P2
10068 internal Mask: 0800h Bit reserved
10069 internal Mask: 1000h Bit reserved
450161 450160 16 bits bit array 4173 Alarms Analog Inputs Wire
Break active

Appendix
addr. real value)
Analog input 1 wire break Mask: 0002h Bit 3500XT- New

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2

P2
450162 450161 16 bits bit array 10285 Alarms External Analog

Inputs Wire Break latched
(unacknowledged)
10221 25.01 Ext. analog input 1 Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT

wire break

wire break

wire break

wire break

wire break

wire break

wire break

wire break

wire break

wire break

wire break

Appendix
addr. real value)

wire break

wire break

wire break

wire break

wire break
450163 450162 16 bits bit array 4196 Alarms External Analog

Inputs Wire Break active
Ext. analog input 1 wire Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT New

break

break

break

break

break

break

break

break

break

break

break

break

break

break

break

break
450164 450163 16 bits 0 (reserve)
450165 450164 16 bits 0 (reserve)
Alarm Management
Other Alarms
450166 450165 16 bits bit array 10286 Other Alarms 1 latched

(unacknowledged)
5195 08.53 LS interf.redundancy Mask: 8000h Bit 3500XT rees‐

tab‐
lished

Appendix
addr. real value)
5189 Internal Mask: 4000h Bit 3000XT rees‐

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished
5159 Internal Mask: 0200h Bit reserved rees‐

tab‐
lished
5153 17.09 Neutral interl. reply Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT

mismatch latched
5147 17.08 Decoupling GCB<- Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT

>MCB latched
5141 17.07 Measurement differ‐ Mask: 0040h Bit 3000XT

ence 4105 latched
5135 17.06 Parameter alignment Mask: 0020h Bit 3000XT

4105 latched
5129 17.05 Missing member Mask: 0010h Bit 3000XT

4105 latched
5123 08.22 Busbar v/f not ok Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT

latched
5117 08.21 Feedback GCB mis‐ Mask: 0004h Bit reserved

match latched
5111 17.02 Reactive load share Mask: 0002h Bit 3000XT

mismatch latched
5105 17.01 Active load share Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT

mismatch latched
450167 450166 16 bits bit array 5197 Other Alarms 1 active

(reserved)
LS interf.redundancy Mask: 8000h Bit 3500XT
Neutral contactor failure Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT New
Decoupling GCB<->MCB Mask: 0080h Bit 3000XT New
Meas.difference 4105 VDE- Mask: 0040h Bit 3000XT New

AR-N 4105
Parameter alignment VDE- Mask: 0020h Bit 3000XT New

AR-N 4105

Appendix
addr. real value)
Missing member VDE-AR- Mask: 0010h Bit 3000XT New

N 4105
Busbar monitoring latched Mask: 0008h Bit 3000XT New
Plausibility GCB feedback Mask: 0004h Bit 3000XT New

latched
Reactive load sharing mis‐ Mask: 0002h Bit 3000XT New

match latched
Active load sharing mis‐ Mask: 0001h Bit 3000XT New

match latched
450168 450167 16 bits bit array 4085 Internal Flags 1-16
96.16 LM Internal Flag 16 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT New
450169 450168 16 bits bit array 4095 Internal Flags 17-32

Appendix
addr. real value)
450170 450169 16 bits bit array 10282 Free Alarms 1 latched

(unacknowledged)
5195 16.16 Free alarm 16 Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT New

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched

latched
5153 16.09 Free alarm 9 latched Mask: 0100h Bit 3000XT New
450171 450170 16 bits bit array 4194 Free Alarms 1 active
Free alarm 16 active Mask: 8000h Bit 3000XT New
Engine Management
Active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DM1) 1-10 (SPN Range 0…65535)full SPN value at 450425-450444

Appendix
addr. real value)
450172 450171 16 bits signed 15400 SPN of 1. entry low 16 bits of 19 3000XT
bits of SPN
450173 450172 16 bits byte 15401 FMI / OC of 1. entry Hi-Byte: FMI Lo- 3000XT
array 15402 Byte: OC
bits of SPN
bits of SPN
bits of SPN
bits of SPN
bits of SPN
bits of SPN
bits of SPN
bits of SPN
bits of SPN
Engine Management
DM1 Lamp Status
450192 450191 16 bits bit array 15395 J1939 Lamp Status DM1
internal Mask 8000h 3000XT
On Malfunction Lamp Mask 2000h 3000XT
Off Malfunction Lamp Mask 1000h 3000XT
On Red Stop Lamp Mask 0200h 3000XT

Appendix
addr. real value)
Off Red Stop Lamp Mask 0100h 3000XT
On Amber Warning Lamp Mask 0020h 3000XT
Off Amber Warning Lamp Mask 0010h 3000XT
On Protect Lamp Mask 0002h 3000XT
Off Protect Lamp Mask 0001h 3000XT
Engine Management
DM2 Lamp Status
450193 450192 16 bits bit array 15445 J1939 Lamp Status DM2
On Malfunction Lamp Mask 2000h 3000XT
Off Malfunction Lamp Mask 1000h 3000XT
On Red Stop Lamp Mask 0200h 3000XT
Off Red Stop Lamp Mask 0100h 3000XT
On Amber Warning Lamp Mask 0020h 3000XT
Off Amber Warning Lamp Mask 0010h 3000XT
On Protect Lamp Mask 0002h 3000XT
Off Protect Lamp Mask 0001h 3000XT
Engine Management
Especially Failure Codes
450194 450193 16 bits bit array 15109 J1939 MTU ADEC ECU 1 3000XT
Failure Codes
450195 450194 16 bits 0 (reserve)

Appendix
addr. real value)
450196 450195 16 bits bit array 15304 J1939 EMR2 Engine Stop "Missing" enum 3000XT
Information (extracted from Value="65535" .
DEUTZ-specific J1939- "Error"
Message) Value="65279"
"Type 9"
Value="9" "Type
8" Value="8"
"Type 7"
Value="7" "Type
6" Value="6"
"Type 5"
Value="5" "Type
4" Value="4"
"Type 3"
Value="3" "Type
2" Value="2"
"Type 1"
Value="1" "Type
0" Value="0"
450197 450196 16 bits 0 (reserve)
450198 450197 16 bits bit array 15305 J1939 DLN2-Message Scania S6
J1939-Message not avail‐ Mask 8000h 3000XT

able
Sensor fault Mask 4000h 3000XT
High Temperature. Mask 2000h 3000XT
NOT High Temperature Mask 1000h 3000XT
Engine Oil Pressure

able
Low Pressure Mask 0200h 3000XT
NOT Low Pressure Mask 0100h 3000XT

able
High Level Mask 0020h 3000XT
NOT High Level Mask 0010h 3000XT

able
Low Level Mask 0002h 3000XT
NOT Low Level Mask 0001h 3000XT
450199 450198 16 bits 0 (reserve)
450200 450199 16 bits 0 (reserve)
450201 450200 16 bits 0 (reserve)
Engine Management
Values
450202 450201 16 bits signed 15308 Engine Speed (SPN 190) 1 rpm 3000XT

Appendix
addr. real value)
450203 450202 16 bits signed 15202 Engine Coolant Tempera‐ 1 °C 3000XT

ture (SPN 110)
450204 450203 16 bits signed 15203 Fuel temperature (SPN 1 °C 3000XT

174)
450205 450204 16 bits signed 15309 Engine Oil Temperature 1 0.1 °C 3000XT
(SPN 175)
450206 450205 16 bits signed 15205 Engine Oil Pressure (SPN 1 kPa 3000XT
100)
450207 450206 16 bits signed 15307 Fuel Rate (SPN 183) 0.1 L/h 3000XT
450208 450207 16 bits signed 15206 Coolant Level (SPN 111) 0.1 % 3000XT
450209 450208 16 bits signed 15207 Throttle position (SPN 91) 0.1 % 3000XT
450210 450209 16 bits signed 15208 Load at current Speed 1 % 3000XT

(SPN 92)
450211 450210 16 bits signed 15210 Engine oil level (SPN 98) 0.1 % 3000XT
450212 450211 16 bits signed 15214 Boost pressure (SPN 102) 1 kPa 3000XT
450213 450212 16 bits signed 15215 Intake Manifold 1 Temp 1 °C 3000XT

(SPN 105)
450214 450213 16 bits signed 15212 Barometric Pressure (SPN 0.1 kPa 3000XT
108)
450215 450214 16 bits signed 15213 Air inlet temperature (SPN 1 °C 3000XT
172)
450216 450215 16 bits signed 15209 Actual engine torque (SPN 1 % 3000XT
513)
450217 450216 16 bits signed 15299 Exhaust Gas Temp.(SPN 0.1 °C 3000XT
173)
450218 450217 16 bits signed 15217 Engine Intercooler Temp 1 °C 3000XT

(SPN52)
450219 450218 16 bits signed 15218 Fuel Delivery Pressure 1 kPa 3000XT
(SPN94)
450220 450219 16 bits signed 15219 Fuel Filter Differential Pres‐ 1 kPa 3000XT
sure (SPN95)
450221 450220 16 bits signed 15220 Crankcase Pressure 1 kPa 3000XT

(SPN101)
450222 450221 16 bits signed 15221 Turbo Air Inlet Pressure 1 kPa 3000XT
(SPN106)
450223 450222 16 bits signed 15222 Air Filter 1 Differential Pres‐ 0.01 kPa 3000XT
sure (SPN107)
450224 450223 16 bits signed 15223 Coolant Pressure (SPN109) 1 kPa 3000XT
450225 450224 16 bits signed 15224 Transmission Oil Pressure 1 kPa 3000XT
(SPN127)
450226 450225 16 bits signed 15225 Fuel Rail Pressure 0.1 MPa 3000XT
(SPN157)
450227 450226 16 bits signed 15226 Ambient Air Temperature 0.1 °C 3000XT
(SPN171)
450228 450227 16 bits signed 15227 Turbo Oil Temperature 0.1 °C 3000XT
(SPN176)
450229 450228 16 bits signed 15228 Transmission Oil Tempera‐ 0.1 °C 3000XT
ture (SPN177)
450230 450229 16 bits signed 15229 Auxiliary Temperature 1 1 °C 3000XT

(SPN441)
450231 450230 16 bits signed 15230 Auxiliary Temperature 2 1 °C 3000XT

(SPN442)

Appendix
addr. real value)
450232 450231 16 bits signed 15209 Actual engine torque (SPN 1 % 3000XT
513)
450233 450232 16 bits signed 15231 Alternator Bear. 1 Temper‐ 1 °C 3000XT

ature (SPN1122)
450234 450233 16 bits signed 15232 Alternator Bear. 2 Temper‐ 1 °C 3000XT

ature (SPN1123)
450235 450234 16 bits signed 15233 Alternator Wind. 1 Temper‐ 1 °C 3000XT

ature (SPN1124)

ature (SPN1125)

ature (SPN1126)
450238 450237 16 bits signed 15236 Intake Manifold 2 Tempera‐ 1 °C 3000XT

ture (SPN1131)

ture (SPN1132)

ture (SPN1133)
450241 450240 16 bits signed 15239 Engine Intercooler Thermo‐ 0.1 % 3000XT
stat Opening (SPN1134)
450242 450241 16 bits signed 15240 Engine Oil Temperature 2 0.1 °C 3000XT
(SPN1135)
450243 450242 16 bits signed 15241 Engine ECU Temperature 0.1 °C 3000XT
(SPN1136)
450244 450243 16 bits signed 15242 Exhaust Gas Port 1 Tem‐ 0.1 °C 3000XT
peratures (SPN1137)
peratures (SPN1138)
peratures (SPN1139)
peratures (SPN1140)
peratures (SPN1141)
peratures (SPN1142)
peratures (SPN1143)
peratures (SPN1144)
peratures (SPN1145)
peratures (SPN1146)
peratures (SPN1147)
peratures (SPN1148)
peratures (SPN1149)
peratures (SPN1150)

Appendix
addr. real value)
peratures (SPN1151)
peratures (SPN1152)
peratures (SPN1153)
peratures (SPN1154)
peratures (SPN1155)
peratures (SPN1156)
450264 450263 16 bits signed 15262 Main Bearing 1 Tempera‐ 0.1 °C 3000XT
tures (SPN1157)
tures (SPN1158)
tures (SPN1159)
tures (SPN1160)
tures (SPN1161)
tures (SPN1162)
tures (SPN1163)
tures (SPN1164)
tures (SPN1165)
tures (SPN1166)
tures (SPN1167)
450275 450274 16 bits signed 15273 Turbo 1 Compressor Inlet 0.1 °C 3000XT
Temperatures (SPN1172)
450279 450278 16 bits signed 15277 Turbo 1 Compressor Inlet 1 kPa 3000XT
Pressure (SPN1176)
Pressure (SPN1177)
Pressure (SPN1178)
Pressure (SPN1179)
450283 450282 16 bits signed 15281 Turbo 1 Turbine Inlet Tem‐ 0.1 °C 3000XT
perature (SPN1180)

Appendix
addr. real value)
perature (SPN 1181)
perature (SPN 1182)
perature (SPN1183)
450287 450286 16 bits signed 15285 Turbo 1 Turbine Outlet 0.1 °C 3000XT
Temperature (SPN 1186)
450291 450290 16 bits signed 15289 Engine Aux. Coolant Pres‐ 1 kPa 3000XT
sure (SPN1203)
450292 450291 16 bits signed 15290 Pre-filter Oil Pressure 1 kPa 3000XT
(SPN1208)
450293 450292 16 bits signed 15291 Engine Aux. Coolant Tem‐ 1 °C 3000XT
perature (SPN1212)
450294 450293 16 bits signed 15292 Fuel Filter Differential Pres‐ 1 kPa 3000XT
sure (SPN1382)
450295 450294 16 bits signed 15293 Battery 1 Temperature 1 °C 3000XT

(SPN1800)
450296 450295 16 bits signed 15294 Battery 2 Temperature 1 °C 3000XT

(SPN1801)

ture (SPN1802)

ture (SPN1803)
450299 450298 16 bits signed 15297 Right Exhaust Gas Temper‐ 0.1 °C 3000XT
ature (SPN2433)
450300 450299 16 bits signed 15298 Left Exhaust Gas Tempera‐ 0.1 °C 3000XT
ture (SPN2434)
450301 450300 16 bits signed 15310 Turbo 1 Compr. Outlet 0.1 °C 3000XT
450302 450301 16 bits signed 15311 Engine derate request 0.1 % 3000XT
(SPN3644)
450303 450302 16 bits signed 15312 Batterie Potential 0.1 V 3000XT

(SPN0158)
450304 450303 16 bits signed 15313 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel 0.1 % 3000XT

Exhaust Fluid Tank 1 Level
(SPN1761)
450305 450304 16 bits signed 15314 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel 1 °C 3000XT

Exhaust Fluid Tank 1 Tem‐
perature (SPN3031)
450306 450305 16 bits signed 15315 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel 0.1 % 3000XT

Exhaust Fluid Tank 2 Level
(SPN4367)
450307 450306 16 bits signed 15316 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel 1 °C 3000XT

Exhaust Fluid Tank 2 Tem‐
perature (SPN4368)
450308 450307 16 bits signed 12807 Exhaust Gas Temperature 0.1 °C 3000XT
Average(SPN 4151)

Appendix
addr. real value)
Average Bank 1 (SPN
4153)
Average Bank 2 (SPN
4152)
450311 450310 16 bits signed 12016 Fuel level 1 (SPN 96) 0.1 % with rees‐
release tab‐
1.13 lished
450312 450311 16 bits signed 12017 Fuel level 2 (SPN 38) 0.1 % with rees‐
release tab‐
1.13 lished
450313 450312 16 bits 0 (reserve) rees‐

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

Appendix
addr. real value)

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

Appendix
addr. real value)

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

Appendix
addr. real value)

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished
Miscellaneous
450371 450370 16 bits "-" Free AnalogManager Value 3000XT rees‐

1 tab‐
lished

2 tab‐
lished

3 tab‐
lished

4 tab‐
lished

5 tab‐
lished

6 tab‐
lished

7 tab‐
lished

8 tab‐
lished

9 tab‐
lished

10 tab‐
lished

11 tab‐
lished

12 tab‐
lished

13 tab‐
lished

Appendix
addr. real value)

14 tab‐
lished
(15/16
are
avail‐
able as
long)

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished
450387 450386 16 bits 4096 Monitored Number of Mask FF00h 3000XT rees‐
easYgen communicating tab‐
lished
Load
share
Diag‐
nostic
Number of easYgens cur‐ Mask 00FFh 3000XT rees‐

rently communicating tab‐
lished
Load
share
Diag‐
nostic
450388 450387 16 bits 4097 Monitored Number of LS5 Mask FF00h 3500XT rees‐
communicating tab‐
lished
LS-5
Diag‐
nostic
Number of LS5 currently Mask 00FFh 3500XT rees‐

communicating tab‐
lished
LS-5
Diag‐
nostic
450389 450388 16 bits 4098 Device number of missing Mask FFFFh 3500XT rees‐
LS-5 (33-48) tab‐
lished
LS-5
Diag‐
nostic

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

Appendix
addr. real value)

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished
450390 450389 16 bits 4099 Device number of missing Mask FFFFh 3500XT rees‐
LS-5 (49-64) tab‐
lished
LS-5
Diag‐
nostic

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

Appendix
addr. real value)

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished
450391 450390 16 bits 181 Phase angle busbar1-gen‐ 0.1 ° 3000XT New
erator L1-L2
450392 450391 16 bits 184 Phase angle mains- 0.1 ° 3000XT New
busbar1 L1-L2
450393 450392 16 bits 4641 Delta voltage busbar1-gen‐ 0.1 % 3000XT New
erator
450394 450393 16 bits 4640 Delta frequency busbar1- 0.01 Hz 3000XT New
generator
450395 450394 16 bits 4607 Phase angle compensated 0.1 ° 3000XT New
generator-busbar1 L1-L2
450396 450395 16 bits 139 Generator power factor L1 0.001 3000XT New
450399 450398 16 bits 8850 Voltage increase monitored 0.01 % 3000XT New
value
450400 450399 16 bits Phase angle compensated 0.1 ° 3000XT New

mains-busbar1 L1-L2

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

Appendix
addr. real value)

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished

tab‐
lished
Int32
(Long)
AC Generator and Busbar values Offset

to
5010:
81
addres
ses
450411 450410 32 bits signed 135 Total gen. active power 1 W 3000XT
450413 450412 32 bits signed 136 Total gen. reactive power 1 var 3000XT
450415 450414 32 bits signed 137 Total gen. apparent power 1 VA 3000XT
450417 450416 32 bits signed 170 Average Gen. Wye-Voltage 0.1 V 3000XT
450419 450418 32 bits signed 171 Average Gen. Delta- 0.1 V 3000XT
Voltage
450421 450420 32 bits signed 216 Average Busbar Delta- 0.1 V 3000XT
Voltage
450423 450422 32 bits signed 185 Av. Gen. Current 0.001 A 3000XT
450425 450424 32 bits signed 111 Gen. current L1 0.001 A 3000XT
450431 450430 32 bits signed 161 Meas. ground current 0.001 A 3000XT
450433 450432 32 bits signed 159 Calculated ground current 0.001 A 3000XT
450435 450434 32 bits signed 108 Gen. voltage L1-L2 0.1 V 3000XT
450441 450440 32 bits signed 114 Gen. voltage L1-N 0.1 V 3000XT
450447 450446 32 bits signed 125 Gen. active power L1 1 W 3000XT

Appendix
addr. real value)
450453 450452 32 bits signed 182 Busbar 1: voltage L1-L2 0.1 V 3000XT
450455 450454 32 bits signed 2520 Gen. real energy 0,01 MWh 3000XT
450457 450456 32 bits signed 2522 Gen. positive reactive 0,01 Mvar 3000XT
energy h
450459 450458 32 bits signed 2568 Gen. hours of operation 0,01 h 3000XT
450461 450460 32 bits signed 5542 Setpoint active power 0,1 kW 3000XT
450463 450462 32 bits signed 5640 Setpoint voltage 1 V 3000XT
450465 450464 32 bits signed 234 Average Busbar Wye- 0.1 V 3000XT New
Voltage
450467 450466 32 bits signed 189 Busbar 1: voltage L2-L3 0.1 V 3500XT- New
P2
450469 450468 32 bits signed 193 Busbar 1: voltage L3-L1 0.1 V 3500XT- New
P2
450471 450470 32 bits signed 2526 Gen. negative reactive 0,01 MVar 3000XT
energy h
AC Mains values
450473 450472 32 bits signed 140 Total mains active power 1 W 3000XT
450475 450474 32 bits signed 150 Total mains reactive power 1 var 3000XT
450477 450476 32 bits signed 173 Average Mains Wye- 0.1 V 3000XT
Voltage
450479 450478 32 bits signed 174 Av. Mains Delta-Voltage 0.1 V 3000XT
450481 450480 32 bits signed 207 Av. Mains Current 0.001 A 3000XT
450483 450482 32 bits signed 134 Mains current L1 0.001 A 3000XT
450485 450484 32 bits signed 0 (prepared mains current reserved

L2)
450487 450486 32 bits signed 0 (prepared mains current reserved

L3)
450489 450488 32 bits signed 118 Mains voltage L1-L2 0.1 V 3000XT
450495 450494 32 bits signed 121 Mains voltage L1-N 0.1 V 3000XT
AC System values
450501 450500 32 bits signed 217 Reserve real power in 1 kW 3000XT

system (valid if LDSS is on)
450503 450502 32 bits signed 218 Real power in system (valid 1 kW 3000XT
if LDSS is on)
450505 450504 32 bits signed 219 Nominal real power in 1 kW 3000XT

system (valid if LDSS is on)
450507 450506 32 bits 0 (reserve)
450509 450508 32 bits 0 (reserve)
450511 450510 32 bits 0 (reserve)
Engine Management
Active Diagnostic Trouble Code (DM1) 1-10 (All SPNs)

Appendix
addr. real value)
450513 450512 32 bits signed 15400 SPN of 1. entry full 19 bits of SPN 3000XT
Engine Management
Values
450533 450532 32 bits signed 15201 Total engine hours (j1939- 1 h 3000XT
HOURS, SPN 247)
450535 450534 32 bits unsigned 2580 Period of use counter 0.01 h 3000XT New
450537 450536 32 bits 15319 Engine Total Fuel Used 0.1 L 3000XT Value
(SPN250) for
Error
indi‐
cator:
429496
7294
Value
for Not
avail‐
able:
429496
7295
450539 450538 32 bits (reserve)
450541 450540 32 bits (reserve)
LS5
450543 450542 32 bits unsigned 267 Average LS5 Delta Mains 0.1 V 3500XT
voltage L-L
450545 450544 32 bits unsigned 268 Average LS5 Wye Mains 0.1 V 3500XT
voltage L-N
450547 450546 32 bits signed 269 Active power LS5 1 W 3500XT
450549 450548 32 bits signed 270 Reactive power LS5 1 var 3500XT
450551 450550 32 bits (reserve)
450553 450552 32 bits (reserve)
450555 450554 32 bits (reserve)
450557 450556 32 bits (reserve)
450559 450558 32 bits (reserve)
450561 450560 32 bits (reserve)
Miscellaneous
450563 450562 32 bits 231 Busbar Voltage L1-N 0.1 V 3500XT- New
P2
P2

Appendix
addr. real value)
P2
450569 450568 32 bits 5646 Setpoint reactive power 0.1 kvar 3000XT New
450571 450570 32 bits "-" Free AnalogManager Value 3000XT New

15 (long)
450573 450572 32 bits "-" Free AnalogManager Value 3000XT New

16 (long)
450575 450574 32 bits signed 155 Generator current slave 0.001 A 3000XT New
pointer L1
pointer L2
pointer L3
450581 450580 32 bits signed 128 Generator reactive power 1 var 3000XT New
L1
L2
L3
450587 450586 32 bits signed 131 Generator apparent power 1 VA 3000XT New
L1
L2
L3
450593 450592 32 bits signed 152 Mains total apparent power 1 VA 3000XT New
450595 450594 32 bits signed 158 Mains current slave pointer 0.001 A 3000XT New
L1
450597 450596 32 bits signed 0 (prepared Mains current 0.001 A 3000XT New
slave pointer L2)
450599 450598 32 bits signed 0 (prepared Mains current 0.001 A 3000XT New
slave pointer L3)
450601 450600 32 bits signed
9.2.14 Protocol 5017 (Alarm Values Visualization)
" only: ..." applies to easYgen-xxxxXT

Package P2 only.

Appendix
Some alarms change too fast!

Some Command Variables for active alarms (e.g.
“Unintended Stop” , breaker failures) are only
active for a very short time. For this reason they
could not be catched reliably via the interfaces.
Nevertheless they can be used to ensure that the
alarm is not active and could be acknowledged.

(Mux)
0 1,2 Protocol-ID, always 5017 –
Generator
0 3,4 4161 Alarms Generator active
0 5,6 10134 Alarms Generator latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
1 1,2 4163 Alarms Generator 1 active
1 3,4 10138 Alarms Generator 1 latched (unacknowledged)
Operating range failed Mask: 0040h Bit

Appendix

(Mux)
1 5,6 10131 Alarm classes latched (unacknowledged)
01.11 New Alarm triggered
Control Mask: 0040h Bit
Class F Mask: 0020h Bit
Class E Mask: 0010h Bit
Class D Mask: 0008h Bit
Class C Mask: 0004h Bit
Class B Mask: 0002h Bit
Class A Mask: 0001h Bit
Mains
2 1,2 4188 Alarms Mains active
Mains AC Wiring Mask: 0020h Bit

Appendix

(Mux)
2 3,4 10135 Alarms Mains latched (unacknowledged)
Mains AC Wiring Mask: 0020h Bit
2 5,6 reserved
3 1,2 4187 Alarms Mains 1 active
3 3,4 10278 Alarms Mains 1 latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
3 5,6 reserved
Engine
Speed det. alarm Mask: 0400h Bit

Appendix

(Mux)
Missing easYgen (same as ID 4169) Mask: 2000h Bit
Missing LS5 Mask: 1000h Bit
Pole slip Mask: 0100h Bit
Syst.update LS5 Mask: 0080h Bit
Syst.update easYgen Mask: 0040h Bit
Gen.AC Wiring Mask: 0020h Bit
Busbar1 AC Wiring Mask: 0010h Bit
Timeout Synchronisation GCB Mask: 8000h Bit
Timeout Synchronisation MCB Mask: 4000h Bit

Appendix

(Mux)
Timeout Synchronisation GGB Mask: 2000h Bit
Charge fail (D+ functionality) Mask: 1000h Bit
Operating range failed 12 (phase rot. mism.) Mask: 0800h Bit
CPU overload R1 trip Mask: 0400h Bit
GCB failure 50BF Mask: 0100h Bit
ECU Protect alarm Mask: 0080h Bit
Parameter Alignment LDSS Mask: 0010h Bit
Missing easYgen (same as ID 4193) Mask: 0008h Bit
ECU red lamp alarm Mask: 0002h Bit
ECU yellow (amber) lamp alarm Mask: 0001h Bit
Phase rotation mismatch Mask: 0800h Bit

(not supported with operating range failure 'error 12')
ECU red lamp alarm latched Mask: 0002h Bit
ECU yellow (amber) lamp alarm latched Mask: 0001h Bit
08.34 GGB fail to close latched Mask: 8000h Bit
08.35 GGB fail to open latched Mask: 4000h Bit

Appendix

(Mux)
08.28 Missing LS5 Mask: 1000h Bit
Cylinder Temperature wire break Mask: 0200h Bit
08.44 Syst.update LS5 Mask: 0080h Bit
08.43 Syst.update easYgen Mask: 0040h Bit
06.32 Gen.AC Wiring Mask: 0020h Bit
06.33 Busbar1 AC Wiring Mask: 0010h Bit
Alarms
6 1,2 5197 Alarms active
08.52 LS interf.redundancy Mask: 8000h Bit
Max. starts per time Mask: 0200h Bit
Busbar monitoring latched, Marine version only Mask: 0008h Bit
Plausibility GCB feedback latched, Marine version only Mask: 0004h Bit
6 3, 4 10286 Alarms latched (unacknowledged)
08.53 LS interf.redundancy Mask: 8000h
internal Mask: 4000h

Appendix

(Mux)
Max. starts per time (K36) Mask: 0200h Bit
Busbar monitoring latche (Marine version only) Mask: 0008h Bit
Plausibility GCB feedback latched (Marine version only) Mask: 0004h Bit
6 5,6 reserved
Flexible Thresholds

Appendix

(Mux)
7 5,6 reserved

Appendix

(Mux)
8 5,6 reserved

Appendix

(Mux)
9 5,6 0 (reserve)
10 1,2 4194 Free Alarms active
10 3,4 10282 Free Alarms latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
10 5,6 reserved
Internal DC Analogue Values Wirebreak
11 1,2 4171 Alarms Analog Inputs 1 active
Failure Charging Alternator (D+) Mask: 0010h Bit
11 3,4 10136 Alarms Analog Inputs 1 latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
11 5,6 reserved
12 1,2 4173 Alarms Analog Inputs Wire Break active
12 3, 4 10137 Alarms Analog Inputs Wire Break latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
Mask: 0400h Bit
12 5, 6 reserved
Internal Digital Inputs

Appendix

(Mux)
13 5,6 0 (reserve)

Appendix

(Mux)
14 5,6 reserved
External Digital Inputs
15 1,2 4185 Alarms External Digital Inputs active
15 3,4 16377 Alarms External Digital Inputs latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
15 5,6 reserved
16 1,2 4195 Alarm External Digital Inputs 1 active
16 3,4 10284 Alarm External Digital Inputs 1 latched (unacknowledged)

Appendix

(Mux)
16 5,6 reserved
External DC Analogue Values Wirebreak
17 1,2 4196 Alarms External Analog Inputs Wire Break active
17 3,4 Alarms External Analog Inputs Wire Break latched (unac‐

knowledged)
25.01 Ext. Analog Inp. 01, wire break Mask: 0001h Bit

Appendix

(Mux)
17 5 Operating Range Monitoring Code Number
6 internal
07.33 FRT Time-dep. voltage 2 Mask: 0800h Bit
Mask: 0080h Bit
CAN J1939 device 3 timeout Mask: 0010h Bit
J1939 ECU timeout Mask: 0002h Bit
CANopen error interface 3 Mask: 0001h bit
18 3,4 10314 Alarms 4 active bit
Pole slip Mask: 1000h Bit
07.33 FRT Time-dep. voltage 3 Mask: 0800h Bit
FRT Time-dep. voltage 2 Mask: 0100h Bit
CAN J1939 ECU timeout Mask: 0002h Bit

Appendix
Data Protocols > Protocols 5019 (Basic CAN ...

(Mux)
CANopen error interface 3 Mask: 0001h Bit
18 5,6 reserved
19 1,2 reserved
19 3,4 reserved
19 5,6 reserved
20 1,2 reserved
20 3,4 reserved
20 5,6 reserved
21 5,6 reserved
9.2.15 Protocols 5018 (Basic CAN Protocol)
Data byte 0 Data byte Length in Param‐ Description EDS Multiplier Unit
Bytes eter ID
(Mux)
DEC HEX
0 0 1,2 2 Protocol ID, always 5018
0 0 3,4,5,6 4 108 Generator voltage 1-2 0x206C 0.1 V
1 1 1,2 2 144 Generator frequency 0x2090 0.01 Hz
1 1 3,4,5,6 4 109 Generator voltage 2-3 0x206D 0.1 V
2 2 1,2 2 160 Generator power factor (cos.phi) 0x20A0 0.001 -
2 2 3,4,5,6 4 110 Generator voltage 3-1 0x206E 0.1 V
3 3 1,2 2 4607 Phase angle compensated gen- 0x3202 0.1 °

busbar1 L1-L2
3 3 3,4,5,6 4 135 Generator total active power 0x2087 0.001 kW
4 4 1,2 2 183 Busbar 1 frequency L1-L2 0x20B7 0.01 Hz
4 4 3,4,5,6 4 182 Busbar 1 voltage 0x20B6 0.1 V
Bytes eter ID
(Mux)
DEC HEX
0 0 3,4,5,6 4 114 Generator voltage 1-N 0x2072 0.1 V
1 1 1,2 2 4085 Internal Flags 1-16
96.16 LM Internal Flag 16 Mask -

8000h

4000h

Appendix
Bytes eter ID
(Mux)
DEC HEX

2000h

1000h

0800h

0400h

0200h

0100h

0080h

0040h

0020h

0010h

0008h

0004h

0002h

0001h
2 2 1,2 2 9642 Free AnalogManager Value 1
2 2 3,4,5,6 4 111 Generator current 1 0x206F 0.001 A
3 3 3,4,5,6 4 112 Generator current 2 0x2070 0.001 A
4 4 3,4,5,6 4 113 Generator current 3 0x2071 0.001 A
Bytes eter ID
(Mux)
DEC HEX
1 1 1,2 2 147 Mains frequency 0x2093 0.01 Hz
1 1 3,4,5,6 4 174 Mains average delta voltage 0x20AE 0.1 V

Appendix
Bytes eter ID
(Mux)
DEC HEX
2 2 1,2 2 "-" Phase angle compensated 0x3202 0.1 °

mains-busbar1 L1-L2
2 2 3,4,5,6 4 173 Mains average wye voltage 0x20AD 0.1 V
3 3 3,4,5,6 4 118 Mains voltage 1-2 0x2076 0.1 V
4 4 3,4,5,6 4 119 Mains voltage 2-3 0x2077 0.1 V
Bytes eter ID
(Mux)
DEC HEX
0 0 3,4,5,6 4 120 Mains voltage L3-L1 0x2078 0.1 V
1 1 3,4,5,6 4 121 Mains voltage L1-N 0x2079 0.1 V
2 2 3,4,5,6 4 122 Mains voltage L2-N 0x207A 0.1 V
3 3 3,4,5,6 4 123 Mains voltage L3-N 0x207B 0.1 V
4 4 1,2 2 4155 Control Bits 1 0x303B
03.20 3-Pos. Controller Freq./ Mask -

Power raise 8000h
03.21 3-Pos. Controller Freq./ Mask -

Power lower 4000h
03.22 3-Pos. Controller Volt./ Mask -

ReactPow raise 2000h
03.23 3-Pos. Controller Volt./ Mask -

ReactPow lower 1000h
04.06 GCB is closed Mask -

0800h
04.07 MCB is closed Mask -

0400h
05.16 Derating active (J1939 or Mask -

freely) 0200h
04.18 Synchronisation GCB proce‐ Mask -

dure is active 0100h
04.19 Open command GCB is Mask -

active 0080h
04.20 Close command GCB is Mask -

active 0040h
04.21 Synchronisation MCB pro‐ Mask -

cedure is active 0020h

Appendix
Data Protocols > Additional Data Identifier > Receive Data (sent from re...
Bytes eter ID
(Mux)
DEC HEX
04.22 Open command MCB is Mask -

active 0010h
04.23 Close command MCB is Mask -

active 0008h
04.28 Unloading generator is Mask -

active 0004h
04.29 Unloading mains is active Mask -

0002h
04.30 Power limited prerun Mask -

0001h
4 4 3,4,5,6 4 9698 Free AnalogManager Value 15
9.2.19 Additional Data Identifier

9.2.19.1 Receive Data (sent from remote control to the easYgen)
General notes The device accepts receive data from outside. These data are usu‐
ally remote control data, with which the genset control starts and
stops the operation or runs different setpoints.
These data do not require a password level to be accepted. They
are overtaken into a non-volatile memory and are lost, if the device
is powered down.
Ensure Security!
Transmitting data from outside of the remote con‐
trol needs secure (network) communication. Do not
connect the easYgen with the internet as long the
security aspects are not considered! Consider an
IP responsible person to discuss proper security
procedures like placing routers and fire walls.
Take care for sufficient protection of Ethernet com‐
munication.

Appendix
Remote control word 1

Object 21F7h (Parameter 503)
This object is required for remote control. The data
type is UNSIGNED16.
The internal parameter 503 of the easYgen must
be set to react on the remote control instructions.
This is performed by sending rising signals for the
respective bits (refer to Fig. 392 for the priority of
start and stop signals).
Parameter Object ID Name Unit Data type Note

no.
503 21F7h Control word 1 Bit field unsigned1

6
Bit 15 Not used
Bit 14 Not used
Bit 13 Not used
Bit 12 Not used
Bit 11 Not used
Bit 10 Not used
Bit 9 Shutdown command To shut down, a "0" must be written

and then a "1"
Bit 8 Not used
Bit 7 Not used
Bit 6 Not used
Bit 5 Not used
Bit 4 Ext. Acknowledge (rising To acknowledge, a 0 must be written

edge) Must be set twice and then a 1
to acknowledge
Bit 3 Must always be set to 0
Bit 2 Must always be set to 0
Bit 1 Stop bit (rising edge) To stop, a 0 must be written and then
a1
Bit 0 Start bit (rising edge) To start, a 0 must be written and then
a1
Table 167: Remote control telegram
Bit 0 With the rising edge of the bit, the easYgen activates the remote request command (LogicsManager
input command variable 04.13).
Start bit
The condition of the start command will be stored and may be used as command variable for the
LogicsManager.
Bit 1 With the rising edge of the bit, the easYgen deactivates the remote request command (LogicsMan‐
ager input command variable 04.13).
Stop bit
The condition of the start command will be stored and may be used as command variable for the
LogicsManager.

Appendix
Bit 4 This bit controls the LogicsManager input command variable 04.14. The remote acknowledge bit
must be set and reset twice to acknowledge an alarm completely. The first rising edge disables the
"Reset alarms" horn and the second rising edge resets the alarm.
Bit 9 This bit is directly influencing the LogicsManager command variable: “03.40 Remote Shutdown“ and
can be taken to create an engine shut down and/or an alarm over an internal flag.
"Shutdown command"
Remote start /stop The command variable "04.13 Remote request" changes to "1" (high) if the start bit is enabled and
changes back to "0" (low) if the stop bit is enabled.
Ext. acknowledge The command variable "04.14 Remote acknowledge" is the reflection of the control bit. The
easYgen deactivates the horn with the first change from "0" to "1" of the logical output "External
acknowledge", and acknowledges all alarm messages, which have occurred and are no longer
active, with the second change from "0" to "1".
Fig. 392: : Remote control - start/stop priority

Fig. 392 shows the reaction of the command variable on the var‐
ious status changes of the bits.
The easYgen does not react on the disabling of the

start bit, but only on the enabling of the stop bit.
This has the advantage that it is not required to
maintain the connection established for the whole
time in case of a remote start via a modem.

This object is required for remote control. The data
type is UNSIGNED16.
Bit 15 = 1
Bit 14 = 1
Bit 13 = 1
Bit 12 = 1
Bit 11 = 1
Bit 10 = 1
Bit 9 = 1

Appendix
Bit 8 = 1
Bit 7 = 1 Request active power setpoint 2 – this bit activates the LogicsManager command variable [04.40]
"Remote power setpoint 2" and is dedicated for switching from active power setpoint 1 to active
power setpoint 2
Bit 6 = 1 Request power factor setpoint 2 – this bit activates the LogicsManager command variable [04.39]
"Remote PF setpoint 2" and is dedicated for switching from power factor setpoint 1 to power factor
setpoint 2
Bit 5 = 1 Request frequency setpoint 2 – this bit activates the LogicsManager command variable [04.38]
"Remote frequency setpoint 2" and is dedicated for switching from frequency setpoint 1 to fre‐
quency setpoint 2
Bit 4 = 1 Request voltage setpoint 2 – this bit activates the LogicsManager command variable [04.37]
"Remote voltage setpoint 2" and is dedicated for switching from voltage setpoint 1 to voltage set‐
point 2
Bit 3 = 1
Bit 2 = 1
Bit 1 = 1
Bit 0 = 1

This object is required for remote control. These
remote control bits can be used by a PLC to send
control signals via SDO or PDO, which can then be
used as command variables in the LogicsManager
to control the easYgen. The data type is
UNSIGNED16.
Bit 15 = 1 (ID 541) Remote control bit 16 (command variable 04.59)

Appendix
Remote active power setpoint

Object 21FBh (Parameter 507)
This value may be used as data source "[05.56]
Interface P setp [kW]" via the AnalogManager. No
password is required to write this value.
This object is required to transmit the active power
setpoint for active power control.
The data type is INTEGER32.
The value is scaled in [kW * 10].
Example
– 100 kW = 1000 = 03E8h
Remote power factor setpoint

Object 21FCh (Parameter 508)
Interface PF sp [%]" via the AnalogManager. No
This object is required to transmit the power factor
setpoint for power factor control.
The valid range for this value is [-710 to 1000 to
710].
Example
– PF (cosphi) = c0.71 (capacitive) = -710 =
FD3Ah PF (cosphi) = 1.00 = 1000 = 03E8h PF
(cosphi) = i0.71 (inductive) = 710 = 02C6h
Remote Frequency Setpoint - Object 21FDh
Remote frequency setpoint

Object 21FDh (Parameter 509)
Interface f setp [Hz]" via the AnalogManager. No
This object is required to transmit the frequency
setpoint for frequency control.
The valid range for this value is [Hz * 100].
Example
– 50.00 Hz = 5000 = 1388h

Appendix
Remote voltage setpoint

Object 21FEh (Parameter 510)
Interface V setp [V]" via the AnalogManager. No
This object is required to transmit the voltage set‐
point for voltage control.
The data type is UNSIGNED32.
The value is scaled in [V].
Example
– 400 V » 400 = 190h
– 10000 V » 10000 = 2710h
Remote reactive power setpoint

Object 21FFh (Parameter 511)
Interf.kvar sp [kvar]" via the AnalogManager. No
password is required to write this value. This object
is required to transmit the reactive power setpoint
for the kvar control.
The data type is signed INTEGER32.
The value is scaled in [kvar*10].
Example 1:
Writing 1000 via interface
– 100.0 kvar
Receiving in easYgen:
– 100 kvar
Example 2:
Writing 1002 via interface
– 100.2 kvar
Receiving in easYgen:
– 100200 kvar
(100kvar = 1000 = 3E8Hex)
Q(V) voltage shift VQ0

Object 2200h (Parameter 512)
This is the Setpoint for the reactive power - voltage
function Q(V). [VDE-AR-N 4110]
Interface reference value VQ0 has the resolution of
(1/100) steps. The “starting” value is 1.00. A value
limitation is included.
Free analog values The device provides Identifier for send remotely 16 bit integers for
free purposes. The values are available in the AnalogManager
group 24.

Appendix
No. Name Format Usable as
587 Free analog value INT16 AnalogManager

1 24.01
588 Free analog value INT16 AnalogManager

2 24.02
External DI request (1 to 16)

Object 3F4Eh (Parameter 8014)
This object is required to receive the state of the
external discrete inputs 1 to 16 (e.g. of a Phoenix
expansion card). The data type is UNSIGNED16.
Bit 15 External discrete input 16 [DIex16]
External DI request (17 to 32)

Object 3F4Fh (Parameter 8015)
This object is required to receive the state of the
external discrete inputs 17 to 32 (e.g. of a Phoenix
expansion card). The data type is UNSIGNED16.

Appendix
Data Protocols > Additional Data Identifier > Transmit Data (sent from ...
External Analog Inputs

Object 4008h ff, Subindex 1 (Parameter 8200 ff)
This unscaled value is transmitted by the external
expansion board. The easYgen must be config‐
ured to format this value accordingly. The data
type is UNSIGNED16.
The external analog inputs 1 to 16 have the following parameter

IDs:
AI # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Object 4008 4009 400A 400B 400C 400D 400E 400F
ID 8200 8201 8202 8203 8204 8205 8206 8207
AI # 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Object 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 4016 4017
ID 8208 8209 8210 8211 8212 8213 8214 8215
9.2.19.2 Transmit Data (sent from easYgen to control external devices)

The device sends data out which are receipt by external devices.
These data usually are commands to control expansion boards or
annunciators running CANopen.
External DO control (1 to 16)

This object is required to control the external out‐
puts (relays) 1 to 16 (e.g. of a Phoenix expansion
card). The data type is UNSIGNED16.
Bit 15 External discrete output 16 [Rex16]

Appendix
Data Protocols > Additional Data Identifier > Transmit Data (sent from ...
External DO control (17 to 32)

This object is required to control the external out‐
puts (relays) 17 to 32 (e.g. of a Phoenix expansion
card). The data type is UNSIGNED16.

Appendix
Data Protocols > Additional Data Identifier > Data Receive
External Analog Outputs

Object 4806h ff, Subindex 1 (Parameter ID 10246
ff)
This unscaled value is transmitted by the external
expansion board. The easYgen must be config‐
ured to format this value accordingly. The data
type is UNSIGNED16.
The external analog outputs 1 to 4 have the following parameter

IDs:
AI # 1 2 3 4
Object 4806hex 4810hex 481Ahex 4824hex
ID 10245 10255 10265 10275
9.2.19.3 Data Receive

The table below shows data which can be received via CAN RPDO
or Modbus from any other devices. These data are available as
analog variables (of group 21) and can be assigned to analog man‐
ager equations e.g. for free alarms or setpoints.
Analog variable Receive PDO Index
21.01 CAN1 RPDO1.1 RPDO1 Word1 3371
The bits 13-16 of indices 3371, 3375, 3379, 3383 are available as
command variables of group 32.xx too which can be assigned to
LogicsMangers.

Appendix
Data Protocols > Additional Data Identifier > Data Identifiers in Genera...
LogicsManager variable Index
32.13 CAN1 RPDO1.1.13 3371
32.14 CAN1 RPDO1.1.14
32.15 CAN1 RPDO1.1.15
32.16 CAN1 RPDO1.1.16
33.13 CAN1 RPDO2.1.13 3375
33.14 CAN1 RPDO2.1.14
33.15 CAN1 RPDO2.1.15
33.16 CAN1 RPDO2.1.16
34.13 CAN1 RPDO3.1.13 3379
34.14 CAN1 RPDO3.1.14
34.15 CAN1 RPDO3.1.15
34.15 CAN1 RPDO3.1.16
35.13 CAN1 RPDO4.1.13 3383
35.14 CAN1 RPDO4.1.14
35.15 CAN1 RPDO4.1.15
35.16 CAN1 RPDO4.1.16
36.15 CAN1 RPDO5.1.13 3387
36.15 CAN1 RPDO5.1.14
36.15 CAN1 RPDO5.1.15
36.15 CAN1 RPDO5.1.16
9.2.19.4 Data Identifiers in General
The communication interface programmer needs often for single

data transfer the identifier of the easYgen variable. To figure that
out he has here some tips.
Data Protocol Document: Identifier The data protocol document shows usually in the column “Param‐
Information in Column "Parameter ID" eter ID” the identifier for a single use. Please check the type. Usu‐
ally it is a signed INT16 (Short) variable but depending on the func‐
tion it can also be a signed INT32 (Long). Typical values for long
are voltages, currents and power measurement values.

Appendix
Fig. 393: Data Protocol Document in Columns "Parameter ID"
ToolKit: Identifier in front of the Nearly each parameter in ToolKit shows the according identifier in
parameter or visualization front of the data. The data type is to check. Usually it is a signed
INT16 (Short) variable but depending on the function it can also be
a signed INT32 (Long). Typical values for long are voltages, cur‐
rents and power measurement values.
Fig. 394: ToolKit page with generator visualization data

With a few minor exceptions the reading of parameter are always
possible. Writing of parameter is only accepted if the correct code
level was passed for the according interface channel.

Appendix
Fig. 395: ToolKit page with configuration data

The access on AnalogManager variables is provided as a signed 4
byte float value without decimals.
Fig. 396: ToolKit page with Analog manager data

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > LogicsManager Overview
9.3 LogicsManager Reference

9.3.1 LogicsManager Overview
The LogicsManager is used to customize the sequence of events
in the control unit such as the start command of the engine or the
operation of control unit relay outputs. For example, the start rou‐
tine may be programmed so that it requires the closing of a dis‐
crete input or a preset time of day.
Depending on the application mode of the unit, the number of
available relays that may be programmed with the LogicsManager
will vary.
Two independent time delays are provided for the configured
action to take place and be reset.
Please do not use the output of an equation as

input at the same time. Such a configuration could
decrease the performance of the interface.
Structure and description of the Logi‐

csManager
Fig. 397: LogicsManager - function overview

n Command (variable)
A list of over 400 parameters and functions is provided for the
command inputs.
Examples of the parameters that may be configured into these
commands are generator undervoltage thresholds 1 and 2,
start fail, and cool down.
These command variables are used to control the output func‐
tion or relay.
Refer to Ä Chapter 9.3.2 “Logical Command Variables”
on page 988 for a complete list of all command variables.
n Sign
The sign field can be used to invert the state of the command
or to fix its output to a logical true or false if the command is not
needed. Setting the sign to the NOT state changes the output
of the command variable from true to false or vice versa.
n Operator
A logical device such as AND or OR.
n (Logical) output
The action or control sequence that occurs when all parame‐
ters set into the LogicsManager are met.
For a complete list of all logical outputs refer to Ä Chapter
9.3.4 “Logical Outputs” on page 1027.

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > LogicsManager Overview
[Sx] - Sign {x}
Value {[Cx]} The value [Cx] is passed 1:1.
NOT Value {[Cx]} The opposite of the value [Cx] is

passed.
0 [False; always "0"] The value [Cx] is ignored and this logic
path will always be FALSE.
1 [True; always "1"] The value [Cx] is ignored and this logic
path will always be TRUE.
Table 168: Signs
[Ox] - Operator {x}
AND Logical AND
NAND Logical negated AND
OR Logical OR
NOR Logical negated OR
XOR Exclusive OR
NXOR Exclusive negated OR
Table 169: Operators
For the various display formats of the corre‐

sponding logical symbols refer to Ä Chapter 9.3.3
“Logical Symbols” on page 1025.
Configuration of the command chain Using the values specified in the above table, the chain of com‐
mands of the LogicsManager (for example: operating the relays,
setting the flags, specification of the automatic functions) is config‐
ured as follows:
[Ax] = ( ( [C1] & [S1] ) & [O1] & ( [C2] & [S2] ) ) & [O2] & ( [C3] & [S3] )
Programming example for the Logi‐

csManager
n Relay [R2] shall energize, whenever "Discrete input [DI 02]"
is energized "AND" the control does "NOT" have a fault that
is "Alarm class C" "AND" does "NOT" have a fault that is
"Alarm class D"
Fig. 398: Programming example

(ToolKit)

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables
9.3.2 Logical Command Variables
NEW arranged
In comparison to easYgen the easYgen-XT series
comes with re-arranged LogicsManagers.
Some samples: ... in general ...
– easYgen group 00.xx and group 24.xx moved
to Part 2: LM results (group 80.xx to group
99.xx)
– Parameters that are similarly used for easYgen
and easYgen-XT come with the same ID/
number - maybe wording is updated
– NEW or remarkable changed parameters come
with new (intentionally different) ID/number
The logical command variables are grouped into different catego‐

ries.
Part 1: LM variables (1 to 39)
n Group 01: Global alarms
n Group 02: Systems condition
n Group 03: Engine control
n Group 04: Applications condition
n Group 05: Engine related alarms
n Group 06: Generator related alarms
n Group 07: Mains related alarms
n Group 08: System related alarms
n Group 09: Discrete Inputs
n Group 10: Analog Inputs
n Group 11: Clock and timer
n Group 12: External Discrete Inputs
n Group 13: Discrete outputs
n Group 15: Flexible limits
n Group 16: Free alarms latched
n Group 17: System alarms
n Group 25: External Analog Inputs out of range
n Group 26: Flags of LS5 (33 to 48)
n Group 27: Flags of LS5 (49 to 64)
n Group 28: LS5 system conditions
n Group 31: Pulse signals
n Group 32: CAN 1 RPDO1 signals

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 01: Global Alarms
Cascading: Use digital results

This digital results of AnalogManagers and Logi‐
csManagers are available as LogicsManager Vari‐
ables additionally. Like the other LM Variables they
can be used as input signal for (further) Analog‐
Managers or LogicsManagers.
Part 2: AM and LM results (80 to 99)

n Group 81: AM Results 1
n Group 82: AM Results 2
n Group 86: LM Results 1
n Group 90: AM Internal values 0
n Group 91: AM Internal values 1
n Group 93: AM Analog outputs 1
n Group 96: LM Internal flags 1
n Group 98: LM External DOs 1
n Group 99: LM Internal DOs 1
Devices, packages, and versions

The following tables are describing a full set of
parameters. Please ignore data your device does
not support.
ID Numbers
The following tables list the "ID" numbers used e.g.
for Modbus communication.
9.3.2.1 Group 01: Global Alarms

n Alarm system
n Logic command variables 01.01-01.11
Alarm classes may be configured as command variables for all log‐
ical outputs in the LogicsManager. Refer to Ä Chapter 9.5.1 “Alarm
Classes” on page 1078 for a description of the alarm classes.
No. ID Name / Function Note
01.01 10720 Alarm class A TRUE as long as an alarm of this alarm class is active or
latched (triggered)
01.02 10721 Alarm class B TRUE as long as an alarm of this alarm class is active or
latched (triggered)
01.03 10722 Alarm class C TRUE as long as an alarm of this alarm class is active or
latched (triggered)
01.04 10723 Alarm class D TRUE as long as an alarm of this alarm class is active or
latched (triggered)

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 02: Systems Conditio...
01.05 10724 Alarm class E TRUE as long as an alarm of this alarm class is active or
latched (triggered)
01.06 10725 Alarm class F TRUE as long as an alarm of this alarm class is active or
latched (triggered)
01.07 10726 All alarm classes TRUE as long as at least one alarm of the alarm classes
A/B/C/D/E/F is active or latched (triggered)
01.08 10727 Warning alarm TRUE as long as at least one alarm of the alarm classes A/B
is active or latched (triggered)
01.09 10728 Shutdown alarm TRUE as long as at least one alarm of the alarm classes
C/D/E/F is active or latched (triggered)
01.10 10729 Centralized alarm TRUE as long as at least one alarm of the alarm classes
B/C/D/E/F is active or latched (triggered)
01.11 11620 New alarm triggered TRUE if any alarm of the Alarm classes B/C/D/E/F has been
triggered until it is acknowledged
9.3.2.2 Group 02: Systems Conditions

n Systems condition
The status of the system may be used as command variable in a
logical output to set parameters for customized operations.
No. ID Name Function Note
02.01 9180 LM FALSE Fixed value - often used for default setting
02.02 9181 LM TRUE
02.03 10732 Gen. voltage ok Generator voltage within operating TRUE as long as the generator voltage is within the
range operating range
02.04 10733 Gen. frequency Generator frequency within oper‐ TRUE as long as the generator frequency is within the
ok ating range operating range
02.05 10734 Gen. volt./freq. Generator voltage and frequency TRUE as long as the generator voltage and frequency
ok within operating ranges are within the operating ranges (02.03. and 02.04 are
TRUE)
02.06 10735 Busbar 1 Busbar 1 voltage within generator TRUE as long as the busbar 1 voltage is within the
voltage ok voltage operating range generator voltage operating range
02.07 10736 Busbar 1 freq. Busbar 1 frequency within fre‐ TRUE as long as the busbar 1 frequency is within the
ok quency voltage operating range generator frequency operating range
02.08 10737 Busb1 volt./freq. Busbar 1 voltage and frequency TRUE as long as the busbar 1 voltage and frequency
ok within generator voltage and fre‐ are within the generator voltage operating ranges
quency operating ranges (02.06. and 02.07 are TRUE)
02.09 10738 Mains voltage Mains voltage within operating TRUE as long as the mains voltage is within the oper‐
ok range ating range
This command variable is derived from the easYgen
mains measuremend, not from the LS5!
02.10 10739 Mains frequency Mains frequency within operating TRUE as long as the mains frequency is within the
ok range operating range
02.11 10740 Mains volt./freq. Mains voltage and frequency within TRUE as long as the mains voltage and frequency are
ok operating ranges within the operating ranges (02.09. and 02.10 are
TRUE)

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 03: Engine Control
02.12 10741 Gen. rotation Generator voltage: rotating direc‐ TRUE as long as the respective rotation field is
CCW tion CCW detected in case of a three-phase voltage measure‐
ment at the respective measuring location
02.13 10742 Gen. rotation Generator voltage: rotating direc‐
CW tion CW
02.14 10743 Mains rotation Mains voltage: rotating direction TRUE as long as the respective rotation field is
CCW CCW detected in case of a three-phase voltage measure‐
02.15 10744 Mains rotation Mains voltage: rotating direction
CW CW These command variables are derived from the
easYgen mains measuremend, not from the LS5!
02.16 10745 Busb.1 rotation Busbar voltage: rotating direction TRUE as long as the respective rotation field is
CCW CCW detected in case of a three-phase voltage measure‐
02.17 10746 Busbar 1 rota‐ Busbar voltage: rotating direction
tion CW CW
02.21 11630 Dead busbar1 Busbar 1 is dead TRUE as long as the busbar voltage is below the
value configured in parameter 5820 Ä p. 500 (Dead
bus detection max. volt.)
02.29 11649 Sync.Check Synchronize Check Relay: TRUE, if all of the following ranges matches:
gen./busb
Generator « Busbar (ANSI 25) n voltage
n frequency
n phase angle
n acceleration range
n lead angle
02.32 11641 Sync.Check Synchronize Check Relay: TRUE, if all of the following ranges matches:
mns/busb
Busbar « Mains (ANSI 25) n voltage
n frequency
n phase angle
n acceleration range
n lead angle
02.34 11643 Firing speed Electrical signal value matches

electr. firing speed
02.35 11644 Firing speed rpm signal value matches firing

rpm speed
02.36 11645 Speed electr. Electrical signal value matches

speed
02.37 11646 Speed rpm rpm signal value matches speed
02.38 10807 Gen excitation Value of generator excitation

lim. exceeded limit
02.39 10768 Mains decou‐ Active if "3110 Mains decoupling"

pling enabled not Off and "87.31 LM: Enable Mns
dec." is TRUE
02.45 10955 Mns.release Breaker mains reconnecting

breaker release command
02.46 10956 f dep.power

change
9.3.2.3 Group 03: Engine Control

n Engine control

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 03: Engine Control
These variables may be used as command variable in a logical

output to set parameters for customized operations.
03.01 10750 Auxiliary services TRUE if an auxiliary services prerun or postrun is enabled
03.02 10751 Starter TRUE if the starter relay is energized
03.04 10753 Preglow / Ignition
03.05 10754 Horn TRUE if the preglow (Diesel) or ignition (gas) relay is ener‐
gized
03.06 10755 Engine released TRUE if alarm class B to F is activated until the time until horn
reset is expired or it is acknowledged for the first time.
03.07 10756 Engine delay expired TRUE if the engine is requested and the start is released
03.08 10757 Break. delay expired TRUE after expiration of the "delayed engine monitoring" timer
until the fuel relay is de-energized
03.09 187 Reserved
03.10 188 Reserved
03.11 189 Reserved
03.12 190 Reserved
03.13 10762 Blinking lamp ECU TRUE as soon as the ECU activates the diagnosis light (only
for Scania S6 ECU). This command variable is only active if
remote control of the ECU via easYgen is activated.
03.14 10763 ECU special ignition TRUE as long as a reset or read-out of the Scania S6 ECU
blink code is requested (only for S6 Scania ECU). This com‐
mand variable is only active if remote control of the ECU via
easYgen is activated.
03.15 10764 ECU seq. B_OUT_1
03.16 10765 ECU seq. B_OUT_2
03.17 10766 ECU seq. B_OUT_3
03.18 10767 ECU seq. B_OUT_4
03.19 Reserved
03.20 10769 Governor raise Three-position controller .
03.21 11650 Governor lower TRUE if the respective three-position controller issues the
respective control pulse
03.22 11651 AVR raise
03.23 11652 AVR lower
03.24 11653 Excitation AVR TRUE if the easYgen excitation is activated
03.25 11654 Engine shall run
03.27 11656 Stop solenoid TRUE if a stop signal is issued until the stop time of engine
expires
03.28 11657 Start/Gas TRUE if the fuel solenoid (Diesel) or gas valve (gas) relay is
energized
03.29 Reserved
03.30 11659 Aux. serv. prerun TRUE, if "Auxiliary services prerun" is active
03.31 11660 Aux. serv. postrun TRUE, if "Auxiliary services postrun" is active
03.32 11661 + PID1 controller TRUE if the respective three-position controller issues the
respective control pulse
03.33 11662 - PID1 controller
03.34 11663 + PID2 controller

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 04: Applications Con...
03.36 11665 + PID3 controller
03.38 11667 Inhibit cranking TRUE if the easYgen inhibit cranking is activated
03.39 11668 Close neutral cont.
03.40 11669 Remote Shutdown
03.41 11186 Aux. excit. 12V act.
03.42 11187 Aux. excit. 24V act.
03.44 10808 Protection lamp DM1
03.45 10809 Emission lamp DM1
03.46 10931 DPF lamp solid on
03.47 10932 DPF lamp fast blink
03.48 10933 DPF regenerat.active
03.49 10934 DPF regenerat.needed
03.50 10935 DPFreg. needed low
03.51 10936 DPF reg. needed mod.
03.52 10937 DPF reg. needed high
03.53 10938 Exh. temp. lamp on
03.54 10939 Wait to start lamp
03.57 10953 DPF:Pass.regeneration
03.58 10954 DPF:Act.reg.inhibit
9.3.2.4 Group 04: Applications Condition

n Applications condition
These operating statuses may be used as command variable in a
04.01 10770 Operat. mode AUTOMATIC operating mode TRUE in AUTOMATIC operating mode
AUTO active
04.02 10771 Operat. mode STOP operating mode active TRUE in STOP operating mode
STOP
04.03 10772 Operat. mode MANUAL operating mode active TRUE in MANUAL operating mode
MAN
04.04 12273 Operat. mode A lamp test is being performed TRUE if the lamp test is active
TEST
04.05 10774 Acknowledge "Acknowledge" push button has This condition is TRUE for approx. 40 ms and must be
been pressed or an external extended utilizing a delay time
acknowledgment via LogicsMan‐
ager
04.06 10775 GCB closed GCB is closed and TRUE if DI 8 (Reply GCB) is de-energized

Appendix
04.07 10776 MCB closed MCB is closed only TRUE if DI 7 (Reply MCB) is de-energized
04.08 Reserved
04.09 10778 Emergency Emergency power operation active TRUE with the expiration of the emergency power
mode delay; FALSE with the expiration of the mains setting
time and the reply from the MCB is closed
04.10 10779 Cool down Engine cool-down cycle active TRUE as long as the cool down time is running
04.11 10780 Mains settling Mains settling time active Becomes TRUE with a mains failure and FALSE after
the mains settling timer has expired
04.12 10781 Start w/o load Start without closing GCB is active TRUE if Start w/o load is enabled
04.13 10782 Remote request Request over remote control to TRUE if the start bit is set via serial connection
activate a function (Modbus) or CAN bus (CANopen), (control word 503)
04.14 10783 Remote Request over remote control to TRUE if this bit is set via interface (control word 503)
acknowledge acknowledge
04.15 10784 Idle run active Idle mode is active TRUE if the idle mode is active. This may be used to
issue an "Idle" command to a speed controller.
04.16 10785 GGB closed GGB is closed TRUE if DI 9 (Reply GGB) is de-energized
04.17 10786 GGB released GGB is released GGB is released
04.18 10787 Synchron. GCB Synchronization GCB is active TRUE if the GCB shall be synchronized until the GCB
active is closed
04.19 10788 Opening GCB Opening GCB is active TRUE if a GCB open command is issued until DI 8
active (Reply GCB) is energized
04.20 10789 Closing GCB Closing GCB is active TRUE if a GCB close command is issued; same func‐
active tion as relay 6 in or
04.21 11670 Syn. MCB is Synchronization MCB is active TRUE if the MCB shall be synchronized until the MCB
active is closed
04.22 11671 Opening MCB Opening MCB is active TRUE if an MCB open command is issued until DI 7
active (Reply GCB) is energized
04.23 11672 Closing MCB Closing MCB is active TRUE if an MCB close command is issued; same
active function as relay 8 in
04.24 11673 Syn. GGB active Synchronization GGB is active TRUE if the GGB shall be synchronized until the GGB
is closed
04.25 11674 Opening GGB Opening GGB is active TRUE if a GGB open command is issued until DI 9
active (Reply GGB) is energized
04.26 11675 Closing GGB Closing GGB is active TRUE if a GGB close command is issued; same func‐
active tion as relay 10 in
04.27 11676 Critical mode Critical mode operation is enabled TRUE if critical mode is enabled
04.28 11677 Generator Generator unloading sequence is TRUE if a stop command has been issued until the
unloading active GCB is opened
04.29 11678 Mains unloading Mains unloading sequence is TRUE if a synchronization has been started until the
active MCB is opened
04.30 11679 Limited prerun Prerun operation with power limita‐ TRUE as long as the warm up load limitation is ena‐
tion is active bled
04.31 11680 Segment no.2 Load share group 2 is activated Internal calculation
act.
Refer to parameter 12929 Ä p. 303/Ä p. 1038.
act.
act.
04.34 11683 LDSS Priority 2 Load-dependent start/stop priority Internal calculation

2 is activated

Appendix

3 is activated

4 is activated
04.37 11686 Remote volt. Voltage setpoint 2 is enabled TRUE if this bit is set via interface (control word 504)
setp. 2
04.38 11687 Remote freq. Frequency setpoint 2 is enabled

setp. 2
04.39 11688 Remote PF Power factor setpoint 2 is enabled

setp. 2
04.40 11689 Remote pwr. Load setpoint 2 is enabled

setp. 2
04.41 11690 Transition mode Breaker transition mode alternative Internal calculation
1 1
04.42 11691 Transition mode Breaker transition mode alternative Internal calculation
2 2
04.43 11692 LD start stop Load-dependent start/stop is acti‐ Internal calculation

vated
Refer to parameter 12930 Ä p. 353/Ä p. 606/
Ä p. 1038.
04.44 11693 RemoteControl Free control bit 1 is activated

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Bit 8

Bit 9

Bit 10

Bit 11

Bit 12

Bit 13

Bit 14

Bit 15

Bit 16
04.60 11709 Crit. mode Critical mode postrun is active TRUE as long as the critical mode postrun time is run‐
postrun ning

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 05: Engine Related A...
04.61 10773 Lamp test Releases the lamp test All illuminated buttons and signs at the front panel are
a short time illuminated for test
04.62 11981 Act.pow.LS Active power load share is active

active
04.63 11982 React.pow.LS Reactive power load share is active

active
04.64 11970 Key activation ON if any key is activated Relevant for versions with front panel (HMI) only
04.65 11973 System update System update is active

active
04.66 11977 Mains failure Mains failure ended

ended
04.67 11980 Reserve power Reserve power is available

avail.
04.68 11983 ATS start ATS start request

request
04.69 11984 Inhibit ATS Inhibit ATS
04.70 10845 Opening GCB Opening GCB active

active
9.3.2.5 Group 05: Engine Related Alarms

n Engine related alarms
These engine alarms may be used as command variable in a log‐
ical output to set parameters for customized operations.
05.01 10790 Overspeed 1 TRUE = alarm latched (triggered)
05.02 10791 Overspeed 2 FALSE = alarm acknowledged
05.03 10792 Underspeed 1
05.04 10793 Underspeed 2
05.05 10794 Unintended stop
05.06 10795 Eng. stop malfunct.
05.07 10796 Speed/freq. mismatch
05.08 10797 Start fail
05.09 10798 Maint. days exceeded
05.10 10799 Maint. hrs exceeded
05.11 10800 Charge alt. low volt
05.12 Reserved
05.13 10802 Red stop lamp
05.14 10803 Amber warning lamp
05.16 10805 Derating active TRUE if derating is activated Ä Chapter

4.4.4.5.4.3 “Derating Parameters”
on page 328
05.17 10806 Uprating active TRUE if uprating is activated Ä Chapter
4.4.4.5.4.3 “Derating Parameters”
on page 328

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 06: Generator Relate...
05.18 13306 Cyl.tmp.lev.1
05.19 13307 Cyl.tmp.lev.2
05.20 13308 Cyl.tmp.wire brk.
05.22 10664 ECU Protect lamp AL
05.23 10665 ECU Emission lamp AL
9.3.2.6 Group 06: Generator Related Alarms

n Generator related alarms
These generator alarms may be used as command variable in a
06.01 10810 06.01 Gen. overfrequency 1 TRUE = alarm latched (trig‐

gered)
06.02 10811 06.02 Gen. overfrequency 2
FALSE = alarm acknowl‐
06.03 10812 06.03 Gen.underfrequency 1 edged
06.04 10813 06.04 Gen.underfrequency 2
06.05 10814 06.05 Gen. overvoltage 1
06.06 10815 06.06 Gen. overvoltage 2
06.07 10816 06.07 Gen. undervoltage 1
06.08 10817 06.08 Gen. undervoltage 2
06.09 10818 06.09 Gen. overcurrent 1
06.10 10819 06.10 Gen. overcurrent 2
06.11 10820 06.11 Gen. overcurrent 3
06.12 10821 06.12 Gen. rev./red. pwr.1
06.13 10822 06.13 Gen. rev./red. pwr.2
06.14 10823 06.14 Gen. overload IOP 1
06.15 10824 06.15 Gen. overload IOP 2
06.16 10825 06.16 Unbalanced load 1
06.17 10826 06.17 Unbalanced load 2
06.18 10827 06.18 Gen. volt. asymmetry
06.19 10828 06.19 Ground fault 1
06.20 10829 06.20 Ground fault 2
06.21 10830 06.21 Gen.ph.rot. mismatch
06.22 10831 06.22 Inv. time overcurr.
06.23 10832 06.23 Gen. overload MOP 1
06.24 10833 06.24 Gen. overload MOP 2
06.25 10834 06.25 Gen. PF lagging 1
06.26 10835 06.26 Gen. PF lagging 2
06.27 10836 06.27 Gen. PF leading 1

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 07: Mains Related Al...
06.28 10837 06.28 Gen. PF leading 2
06.29 10838 06.29 Gen.act.pwr.mismatch
06.30 10839 06.30 Gen. unload.mismatch
06.31 10840 06.31 Operat. range failed
06.32 10843 06.32 Generator AC wiring plausibility
06.33 10844 06.33 Busbar 1 AC wiring plausibility
06.34 10667 06.34 Busbar phase rotation mismatch
06.36 10674 06.36 Gen pole slip
9.3.2.7 Group 07: Mains Related Alarms

n Mains related alarms
These mains alarms may be used as command variable in a log‐
ical output to set parameters for customized operations.
No. ID Function Note
07.01 .. 07.04 Reserved
07.05 10854 Mains mismatched phase rotation (rotation field alarm) TRUE = alarm latched (trig‐
gered)
07.06 10855 Mains overfrequency (limit) 1
07.07 10856 Mains overfrequency (limit) 2 edged
07.08 10857 Mains underfrequency (limit) 1
07.09 10858 Mains underfrequency (limit) 2
07.10 10859 Mains overvoltage (limit) 1
07.11 10860 Mains overvoltage (limit) 2
07.12 10861 Mains undervoltage (limit) 1
07.13 10862 Mains undervoltage (limit) 2
07.14 10863 Mains phase shift
07.15 10864 Mains df/dt
07.16 10865 Mains active power mismatch
07.17 10866 Mains power factor inductive (limit) 1
07.18 10867 Mains power factor inductive (limit) 2
07.19 10868 Mains power factor capacitive (limit) 1
07.20 10869 Mains power factor capacitive (limit) 2
07.21 10870 Mains import power (limit) 1
07.22 10871 Mains import power (limit) 2
07.23 10872 Mains export power (limit) 1
07.24 10873 Mains export power (limit) 2
07.25 10874 Mains decoupling
07.26 Reserved
07.27 10876 Mains voltage increase TRUE = alarm latched (trig‐

gered)

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 08: System Related A...
07.28 10877 Time-dependent voltage FALSE = alarm acknowl‐

edged
07.29 10878 QV monitoring 1
07.30 10879 QV monitoring 2
07.31 11750 Time-dependent voltage 2
07.32 10930 Mains AC wiring plausibility
07.33 11751 Time-dep. voltage 3
07.34 11752 FRT ROCOF enable FRT (time-dependent voltage

monitoring) status enables
ROCOF monitoring if config‐
ured.
07.35 11753 FRT Q/V curve True if "Voltage control" is

configured to AVR and FRT is
excited and "Delay FRT SP"
has exceeded. (No "LED")
07.36 11754 2nd Q PID in FRT True if 07.35 is true and "2nd
PID Q Limit FRT" is undercut.
(No "LED")
07.37 11746 LS5 Syst. A rot. CW Note: Usable in dedicated

LS5 modes: GCB/L-MCB,
07.38 11747 LS5 Syst. A rot. CCW GCB/GGB/L-MCB, GCB/L-
GGBMCB, GCB/L-GGB/L-
07.39 11748 LS5 Syst. B rot. CW MCB. The value comes from
the mains LS5 (Node-ID33)
07.40 11749 LS5 Syst. B rot. CCW connected with system A on
mains.
9.3.2.8 Group 08: System Related Alarms

n System related alarms
These system alarms may be used as command variable in a log‐
ical output n to set parameters for customized operations.
08.01 10880 Battery overvoltage (limit) 1 TRUE = alarm latched (trig‐

gered)
08.02 10881 Battery overvoltage (limit) 2
08.03 10882 Battery undervoltage (limit) 1 edged
08.04 10883 Battery undervoltage (limit) 2
08.05 10884 GCB fail to close
08.06 10885 GCB fail to open
08.07 10886 MCB fail to close
08.08 10887 MCB fail to open
08.09 Reserved
08.10 10889 CAN J1939 communication alarm
08.11 Reserved
08.12 Reserved
08.13 Reserved
08.14 Reserved

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 09: Discrete Inputs
08.15 Reserved
08.16 10895 Parameter alignment
08.17 10896 Missing members
08.18 10897 CANopen Interface 1
08.20 Reserved
08.21 Reserved
08.22 11781 Busbar v/f not ok
08.23 Reserved
08.24 Reserved
08.25 Reserved
08.26 Reserved
08.27 11786 Missing easYgen
08.28 11787 Missing LS5
08.30 11789 Timeout synchronization GCB
08.31 11790 Timeout synchronization MCB
08.32 11791 Timeout synchronization GGB
08.33 Reserved
08.34 11793 GGB fail to close
08.35 11794 GGB fail to open
08.36 Reserved
08.37 11796 J1939 ECU timeout
08.38 11797 J1939 device 1 timeout
08.41 11800 Ethernet B fault
08.42 11801 Ethernet C fault
08.43 11802 System update easYgen
08.44 11803 System update LS5
08.45 11804 CPU overload R1 trip
08.46 10669 GCB failure 50BF
08.47 10671 MCB failure 50BF
08.48 10673 MCB plausibility
08.50 11814 Syst.upd.r/y twinkle
08.53 11710 LS interf.redundancy
9.3.2.9 Group 09: Discrete Inputs

n Discrete inputs

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 10: Analog Inputs
The discrete inputs may be used as command variable in a logical

output to set parameters for customized operations.
09.01 10900 DI 1 (Discrete input [DI 01]) TRUE = logical "1" (delay
times and N.O./N.C. parame‐
09.02 10901 DI 2 (Discrete input [DI 02]) ters are ignored)
09.03 10902 DI 3 (Discrete input [DI 03]) FALSE = logical "0" (alarm
has been acknowledged or
09.04 10903 DI 4 (Discrete input [DI 04]) immediately after TRUE con‐
dition is not present anymore,
09.05 10904 DI 5 (Discrete input [DI 05]) if Control is configured as
alarm class)
09.06 10905 DI 6 (Discrete input [DI 06])
09.13 10912 DI 13 (Discrete input [DI 13]) TRUE = logical "1" (delay
09.14 10913 DI 14 (Discrete input [DI 14]) ters are ignored)
09.15 10914 DI 15 (Discrete input [DI 15]) FALSE = logical "0" (alarm
has been acknowledged or
09.16 10915 DI 16 (Discrete input [DI 16]) immediately after TRUE con‐
09.17 10916 DI 17 (Discrete input [DI 17]) if Control is configured as
alarm class)
9.3.2.10 Group 10: Analog Inputs

n Analog inputs

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 11: Clock And Timer
The analog inputs may be used as command variable in a logical

output.
10.01 11072 Analog input AI 01 wire break TRUE = measured value out
of range
10.02 11073 Analog input AI 02 wire break
FALSE = logical "0" (alarm
10.03 11074 Analog input AI 03 wire break has been acknowledged, or
immediately after TRUE con‐
if Control is configured as
alarm class)
10.04 11075 Analog input AI 04 wire break TRUE = measured value out
of range
FALSE = logical "0" (alarm
10.06 11077 Analog input AI 06 wire break has been acknowledged, or
immediately after TRUE con‐
10.07 11078 Analog input AI 07 wire break dition is not present anymore,
if Control is configured as
10.08 11079 Analog input AI 08 wire break alarm class)
9.3.2.11 Group 11: Clock And Timer

n Clock and timer
Time functions may be used as command variable in a logical
output.
11.01 10940 Timer setpoint 1 (exceeded) Refer to parameter

1652 Ä p. 550,
1651 Ä p. 550 and
1650 Ä p. 550.
11.02 10941 Timer setpoint 2 (exceeded) Refer to parameters

1657 Ä p. 550,
1656 Ä p. 550 and
1655 Ä p. 550.
11.03 10942 Active weekday (equal to setting) Refer to parameter

1670 Ä p. 551,
1671 Ä p. 551,
1672 Ä p. 551,
1673 Ä p. 551,
1674 Ä p. 551,
1675 Ä p. 551, and
1676 Ä p. 551.
11.04 10943 Active day (equal to setting) Refer to parameter

1663 Ä p. 550.
11.05 10944 Active hour (equal to setting) Refer to parameter

1662 Ä p. 550.
11.06 10945 Active minute (equal to setting) Refer to parameter

1661 Ä p. 551.

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 12: External Discret...
11.07 10946 Active second (equal to setting) Refer to parameter

1660 Ä p. 551.
11.08 10947 Engine (running hours exceeded by) 1 hour Status changes every oper‐
ating hour
11.09 10948 Engine (running hours exceeded by) 10 hour Status changes every 10
operating hours
11.10 10949 Engine (running hours exceeded by) 100 hour Status changes every 100
operating hours
9.3.2.12 Group 12: External Discrete Inputs

n External discrete inputs
Additional discrete inputs from an expansion board (i.e. IKD 1
extension board) may be used as command variable in a logical
output.
12.01 609 External DI 1 TRUE = logical "1" (delay

12.02 610 External DI 2 ters are ignored)
12.03 611 External DI 3 FALSE = logical "0" (alarm
has been acknowledged, or
12.04 612 External DI 4 immediately after TRUE con‐
12.05 613 External DI 5 if Control is configured as
alarm class)
12.06 614 External DI 6
12.17 11350 External DI 17
12.18 11351 External DI 18
12.19 11352 External DI 19
12.20 11353 External DI 20
12.21 11354 External DI 21
12.22 11355 External DI 22
12.23 11356 External DI 23
12.24 11357 External DI 24
12.25 11358 External DI 25
12.26 11359 External DI 26

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 13: Discrete Outputs
12.27 11360 External DI 27
12.28 11361 External DI 28
12.29 11362 External DI 29
12.30 11363 External DI 30
12.31 11364 External DI 31
12.32 11365 External DI 32
9.3.2.13 Group 13: Discrete Outputs

n Discrete outputs
The discrete outputs may be used as command variable in a log‐
ical output.
13.01 10980 Discrete output DO1 [R01] TRUE = logical "1" (this con‐
dition indicates the logical
13.02 10981 Discrete output DO2 [R02] status of the internal relays)
13.03 10982 Discrete output DO3 [R03] FALSE = logical "0" (this con‐
dition indicates the logical
13.04 10983 Discrete output DO4 [R04] status of the internal relays)
13.05 10984 Discrete output DO5 [R05]
13.33 11184 Transistor output 1
13.34 11185 Transistor output 2

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 15: Flexible Limits
9.3.2.14 Group 15: Flexible Limits

n Flexible limits
The flexible analog input thresholds may be used as command var‐
iable in a logical output.
15.01 11093 Flexible analog limit 1 (triggered) TRUE = limit value reached
15.02 11094 Flexible analog limit 2 (triggered) FALSE = alarm acknowl‐

edged
15.03 11095 Flexible analog limit 3 (triggered)

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 17: System Alarms
9.3.2.15 Group 16: Free Alarms latched

n Free alarms latched
16.01 11040 Free alarm 1 latched
9.3.2.16 Group 17: System Alarms

n System alarms
17.01 10841 Act. load shar.mism.
17.02 10842 React.load shar.mism
17.05 11156 Missing member 4105 Parameters are aligned to

VDE-AR-N 4105 conditions
17.06 11157 Para.alignment 4105

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 26: Flags Of LS5 (33...
17.07 11158 Meas.difference 4105 Measuring difference

detected according to VDE-
AR-N 4105
17.08 11159 Decoupling GCB<->MCB
17.09 11160 N-cont. reply mism.
9.3.2.17 Group 25: Ext. Analog inputs "out of range"

n Ext. analog inputs "out of range"/"wire break" information
25.01 11489 Ext. AI 1 wire break-status TRUE, if "out of range"/"wire

break" of dedicated ext. analog
25.02 11490 Ext. AI 2 wire break-status input is recognized
25.03 11491 Ext. AI 3 wire break-status
9.3.2.18 Group 26: Flags Of LS5 (33 to 48)

n Flags of LS5 (33 to 48)

Appendix
Information exchanges between easYgen and LS-5 via command

variables.
26.01 8300 Flag 1 LS5 device 33 TRUE if LogicsManager

12952 in LS-5 device no. {x}
is activated [x = 33 to 48]




26.06 8305 Flag 1 LS5 device 34
26.07 8306 Flag 2 LS5 device 34
26.08 8307 Flag 3 LS5 device 34
26.09 8308 Flag 4 LS5 device 34
26.10 8309 Flag 5 LS5 device 34
26.11 8310 Flag 1 LS5 device 35
26.12 8311 Flag 2 LS5 device 35
26.13 8312 Flag 3 LS5 device 35
26.14 8313 Flag 4 LS5 device 35
26.15 8314 Flag 5 LS5 device 35
26.16 8315 Flag 1 LS5 device 36
26.17 8316 Flag 2 LS5 device 36
26.18 8317 Flag 3 LS5 device 36
26.19 8318 Flag 4 LS5 device 36
26.20 8319 Flag 5 LS5 device 36
26.21 8320 Flag 1 LS5 device 37
26.22 8321 Flag 2 LS5 device 37
26.23 8322 Flag 3 LS5 device 37
26.24 8323 Flag 4 LS5 device 37
26.25 8324 Flag 5 LS5 device 37
26.26 8325 Flag 1 LS5 device 38
26.27 8326 Flag 2 LS5 device 38
26.28 8327 Flag 3 LS5 device 38
26.29 8328 Flag 4 LS5 device 38
26.30 8329 Flag 5 LS5 device 38

Appendix
26.31 8330 Flag 1 LS5 device 39
26.32 8331 Flag 2 LS5 device 39
26.33 8332 Flag 3 LS5 device 39
26.34 8333 Flag 4 LS5 device 39
26.35 8334 Flag 5 LS5 device 39
26.36 8335 Flag 1 LS5 device 40
26.37 8336 Flag 2 LS5 device 40
26.38 8337 Flag 3 LS5 device 40
26.39 8338 Flag 4 LS5 device 40
26.40 8339 Flag 5 LS5 device 40
26.41 8340 Flag 1 LS5 device 41
26.42 8341 Flag 2 LS5 device 41
26.43 8342 Flag 3 LS5 device 41
26.44 8343 Flag 4 LS5 device 41
26.45 8344 Flag 5 LS5 device 41
26.46 8345 Flag 1 LS5 device 42
26.47 8346 Flag 2 LS5 device 42
26.48 8347 Flag 3 LS5 device 42
26.49 8348 Flag 4 LS5 device 42
26.50 8349 Flag 5 LS5 device 42
26.51 8350 Flag 1 LS5 device 43
26.52 8351 Flag 2 LS5 device 43
26.53 8352 Flag 3 LS5 device 43
26.54 8353 Flag 4 LS5 device 43
26.55 8354 Flag 5 LS5 device 43
26.56 8355 Flag 1 LS5 device 44
26.57 8356 Flag 2 LS5 device 44
26.58 8357 Flag 3 LS5 device 44
26.59 8358 Flag 4 LS5 device 44
26.60 8359 Flag 5 LS5 device 44
26.61 8360 Flag 1 LS5 device 45
26.62 8361 Flag 2 LS5 device 45
26.63 8362 Flag 3 LS5 device 45
26.64 8363 Flag 4 LS5 device 45
26.65 8364 Flag 5 LS5 device 45
26.66 8365 Flag 1 LS5 device 46
26.67 8366 Flag 2 LS5 device 46

Appendix
26.68 8367 Flag 3 LS5 device 46
26.69 8368 Flag 4 LS5 device 46
26.70 8369 Flag 5 LS5 device 46
26.71 8370 Flag 1 LS5 device 47
26.72 8371 Flag 2 LS5 device 47
26.73 8372 Flag 3 LS5 device 47
26.74 8373 Flag 4 LS5 device 47
26.75 8374 Flag 5 LS5 device 47
26.76 8375 Flag 1 LS5 device 48
26.77 8376 Flag 2 LS5 device 48
26.78 8377 Flag 3 LS5 device 48
26.79 8378 Flag 4 LS5 device 48
26.80 8379 Flag 5 LS5 device 48
9.3.2.19 Group 27: Flags Of LS5 (49 to 64)

n Flags of LS5 (49 to 64)
Information exchanges between easYgen and LS-5 via command
variables.





27.06 8404 Flag 1 LS5 device 50
27.07 8405 Flag 2 LS5 device 50
27.08 8406 Flag 3 LS5 device 50
27.09 8407 Flag 4 LS5 device 50
27.10 8408 Flag 5 LS5 device 50
27.11 8409 Flag 1 LS5 device 51
27.12 8410 Flag 2 LS5 device 51

Appendix
27.13 8411 Flag 3 LS5 device 51
27.14 8412 Flag 4 LS5 device 51
27.15 8413 Flag 5 LS5 device 51
27.16 8414 Flag 1 LS5 device 52
27.17 8415 Flag 2 LS5 device 52
27.18 8416 Flag 3 LS5 device 52
27.19 8417 Flag 4 LS5 device 52
27.20 8418 Flag 5 LS5 device 52
27.21 8419 Flag 1 LS5 device 53
27.22 8420 Flag 2 LS5 device 53
27.23 8421 Flag 3 LS5 device 53
27.24 8422 Flag 4 LS5 device 53
27.25 8423 Flag 5 LS5 device 53
27.26 8424 Flag 1 LS5 device 54
27.27 8425 Flag 2 LS5 device 54
27.28 8426 Flag 3 LS5 device 54
27.29 8427 Flag 4 LS5 device 54
27.30 8428 Flag 5 LS5 device 54
27.31 8429 Flag 1 LS5 device 55
27.32 8430 Flag 2 LS5 device 55
27.33 8431 Flag 3 LS5 device 55
27.34 8432 Flag 4 LS5 device 55
27.35 8433 Flag 5 LS5 device 55
27.36 8434 Flag 1 LS5 device 56
27.37 8435 Flag 2 LS5 device 56
27.38 8436 Flag 3 LS5 device 56
27.39 8437 Flag 4 LS5 device 56
27.40 8438 Flag 5 LS5 device 56
27.41 8439 Flag 1 LS5 device 57
27.42 8440 Flag 2 LS5 device 57
27.43 8441 Flag 3 LS5 device 57
27.44 8442 Flag 4 LS5 device 57
27.45 8443 Flag 5 LS5 device 57
27.46 8444 Flag 1 LS5 device 58
27.47 8445 Flag 2 LS5 device 58
27.48 8446 Flag 3 LS5 device 58
27.49 8447 Flag 4 LS5 device 58

Appendix
27.50 8448 Flag 5 LS5 device 58
27.51 8449 Flag 1 LS5 device 59
27.52 8450 Flag 2 LS5 device 59
27.53 8451 Flag 3 LS5 device 59
27.54 8452 Flag 4 LS5 device 59
27.55 8453 Flag 5 LS5 device 59
27.56 8454 Flag 1 LS5 device 60
27.57 8455 Flag 2 LS5 device 60
27.58 8456 Flag 3 LS5 device 60
27.59 8457 Flag 4 LS5 device 60
27.60 8458 Flag 5 LS5 device 60
27.61 8459 Flag 1 LS5 device 61
27.62 8460 Flag 2 LS5 device 61
27.63 8461 Flag 3 LS5 device 61
27.64 8462 Flag 4 LS5 device 61
27.65 8463 Flag 5 LS5 device 61
27.66 8464 Flag 1 LS5 device 62
27.67 8465 Flag 2 LS5 device 62
27.68 8466 Flag 3 LS5 device 62
27.69 8467 Flag 4 LS5 device 62
27.70 8468 Flag 5 LS5 device 62
27.71 8469 Flag 1 LS5 device 63
27.72 8470 Flag 2 LS5 device 63
27.73 8471 Flag 3 LS5 device 63
27.74 8472 Flag 4 LS5 device 63
27.75 8473 Flag 5 LS5 device 63
27.76 8474 Flag 1 LS5 device 64
27.77 8475 Flag 2 LS5 device 64
27.78 8476 Flag 3 LS5 device 64
27.79 8477 Flag 4 LS5 device 64
27.80 8478 Flag 5 LS5 device 64

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 32: CAN 1 Receive PD...
9.3.2.20 Group 28: LS5 System Conditions

n LS5 system conditions
28.01 8498 Command 1 to LS5 easYgen (OR) TRUE if at least one easYgen sets the command
variable to TRUE (OR operation)
28.02 8499 Command 2 to LS5 easYgen (OR)
These command variables can be taken also to

exchange binary information between the easY‐
gens. A typical example here by is to command
'droop mode' to all neighbor easYgen.
9.3.2.21 Group 31: Transistor Outputs

n Pulse signals A and B
n Logic command variables 31.01 and 31.02
The transistor outputs may be used as command variable in a log‐
ical output but are not visible and/or configurable like other Logi‐
csManager conditions - neither in ToolKit nor via HMI.
31.01 9200 Pulse signal A kWh / kvarh counter
31.02 9201 Pulse signal B kWh / kvarh counter
9.3.2.22 Group 32: CAN 1 Receive PDO1

32.13 11509 CAN1 RPDO1.1.13
32.14 11510 CAN1 RPDO1.1.14
32.15 11511 CAN1 RPDO1.1.15
32.16 11512 CAN1 RPDO1.1.16

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 81: AM Results 1

33.13 11513 CAN1 RPDO2.1.13
33.14 11514 CAN1 RPDO2.1.14
33.15 11515 CAN1 RPDO2.1.15
33.16 11516 CAN1 RPDO2.1.16

34.13 11517 CAN1 RPDO3.1.13
34.14 11518 CAN1 RPDO3.1.14
34.15 11519 CAN1 RPDO3.1.15
34.16 11520 CAN1 RPDO3.1.16

35.13 11521 CAN1 RPDO4.1.13
35.14 11522 CAN1 RPDO4.1.14
35.15 11523 CAN1 RPDO4.1.15
35.16 11524 CAN1 RPDO4.1.16

36.13 11525 CAN1 RPDO5.1.13
36.14 11526 CAN1 RPDO5.1.14
36.15 11527 CAN1 RPDO5.1.15
36.16 11528 CAN1 RPDO5.1.16
9.3.2.27 Group 81: AM Results 1

n Binary outputs of function-related AnalogManagers.
81.01 9308 AM Preglow criterion The boolean result BR of the

AnalogManager
81.02 9311 AM Warm-up criterion

Appendix
81.03 9313 AM Freq.source SP1
81.04 9315 AM Freq.source SP2
81.05 9317 AM ActPwr.source SP1
81.09 9326 AM Volt.source SP1
81.10 9328 AM Volt.source SP2
81.11 9387 AM PF/var src. SP1
81.12 9389 AM PF/var src. SP2
81.13 5691 AM PID1 setpoint
81.14 5695 AM PID1 actual value
81.19 9391 AM Ext.mains act.pwr.
81.20 9393 AM Ext.mains RPower
81.21 9395 AM Derating source
81.22 9397 AM ECU seq.A_IN_1
81.23 9398 AM ECU seq.A_IN_2
81.24 9593 AM Engine speed
81.25 9595 AM Engine oil press.
81.26 9597 AM Engine hours
81.27 9599 AM Engine fuel level
81.28 9603 AM Engine batt.volt.
81.29 9613 AM Engine coolant T
81.30 9623 AM Consumer load [kW]
81.31 9370 AM Reference VQ0
81.32 9371 AM Q/P ref.offset

Appendix
9.3.2.28 Group 82: AM Results 2

n Binary outputs of function-related AnalogManagers (flexible
limits)
82.01 9330 AM Flexible limit 1 The boolean result BR of the

AnalogManager
82.02 9331 AM Flexible limit 2

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 86: LM Results 1
9.3.2.29 Group 86: LM Results 1

n Binary outputs of function-related LogicsManager
86.09 10708 LM: Start req in AUTO The (boolean) result of the Log‐
icsManager
86.10 10709 LM: Stop req. in AUTO
86.11 10710 LM: Inhibit emerg.run
86.12 10711 LM: Undelay close GCB
86.13 11987 LM: LS interf. EthA
86.14 10713 LM: Constant idle run
86.15 10714 LM: Ext. acknowledge
86.16 10715 LM: Operat. mode AUTO
86.17 10716 LM: Operat. mode MAN
86.18 10717 LM: Operat. mode STOP
86.19 10718 LM: Start w/o load
86.20 10719 LM: Auto idle mode
86.21 11600 LM: Discrete f/P +
86.22 11601 LM: Discrete f/P -
86.23 11602 LM: Discrete V/PF +
86.24 11603 LM: Discrete V/PF -
86.25 11604 LM: Freq. droop act.
86.26 11605 LM: Volt. droop act.
86.27 11606 LM: Ext. mns.decoupl.
86.28 11607 LM: Critical mode
86.29 12272 LM: Operat. mode TEST
86.30 11924 LM: Lock keypad 1

Appendix
86.31 11647 LM: ECU seq. B_IN_1
86.32 11648 LM: ECU seq. B_IN_2
86.33 11971 LM: 2nd disp.bright.
86.34 11972 LM: Enable heater
86.35 11974 LM: Syst. update
86.36 12606 LM: LDSS predicted
86.38 11617 LM: Syn. mode CHECK
86.39 11618 LM: Syn. mode PERMIS.
86.40 11619 LM: Syn. mode RUN
86.41 11975 LM: IOP Res.power 2
86.42 11976 LM: MOP Res.power 2
86.43 11994 LM: RP3000XT Full mode
86.44 11995 LM: RP3000XT Annunciator
86.45 11996 LM: RP3000XT Off mode
86.46 10848 LM: AVR V(f) enabled
86.81 11910 LM: Setpoint 2 freq.
86.82 11911 LM: Setp. 2 load
86.83 11912 LM: Setp. 2 voltage
86.84 11913 LM: Setp.2 pwr.factor
86.85 11914 LM: Enable MCB
86.86 11915 LM: LDSS enabled
86.87 11916 LM: Segment no.2 act.
86.90 11919 LM: LDSS Priority 2
86.93 11922 LM: Transition mode 1
86.94 11923 LM: Transition mode 2
86.96 11925 LM: Release f-control
86.97 11926 LM: Release V-control
86.98 11927 LM: P-control active
86.99 11928 LM: Q control active

Appendix

n Binary outputs of function-related LogicsManager
n Logic command variables 87.17 - 87.79
87.17 11406 LM: PID1 ctrl.release The (boolean) result of the Log‐
icsManager
87.18 11407 LM: PID2 ctrl.release
87.19 11408 LM: PID3 ctrl.release
87.23 11412 LM: LS5 command 1
87.24 11413 LM: LS5 command 2
87.25 11414 LM: LS5 command 3
87.26 11415 LM: LS5 command 4
87.27 11416 LM: LS5 command 5
87.28 11417 LM: LS5 command 6
87.29 11418 LM: Bypass min. Pgen.
87.30 11419 LM: Run-up sync.
87.31 11420 LM: Enable Mns dec.
87.46 11435 LM: GCB open in MAN
87.47 11436 LM: GCB close in MAN
87.48 11437 LM: MCB open in MAN
87.49 11438 LM: MCB close in MAN
87.50 11439 LM: MAN engine start
87.59 11448 LM: MAN engine stop
87.60 11449 LM: Free derating
87.61 11450 LM: GGB open in MAN
87.62 11451 LM: GGB close in MAN
87.66 11455 LM: Inhibit cranking
87.67 11456 LM: Setp. 3 load
87.68 11457 LM: Firing speed
87.69 11458 LM: Speed detected
87.70 11459 LM: Release eng.mon.
87.71 11460 LM: Release cyl.temp.
87.72 11461 LM: Disable mns.mon.
87.73 11462 LM: Mains decoupl.MCB
87.74 11463 LM: Inh.dead bus GCB
87.75 11464 LM: Setp. 4 load
87.76 11465 LM: Disable load ramp
87.77 11979 LM: 2nd load SP ramp

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 90: AM Internal Valu...
87.78 11997 LM: 2nd frequency PID
87.79 11999 LM: 3rd load SP ramp

n Binary outputs of function-related LogicsManager (free alarms)
88.01 11550 LM: Free alarm 1 The (boolean) result of the Log‐
icsManager
88.02 11551 LM: Free alarm 2
88.03 11552 LM: Free alarm 3
88.04 11553 LM: Free alarm 4
88.05 11554 LM: Free alarm 5
88.06 11555 LM: Free alarm 6
88.07 11556 LM: Free alarm 7
88.08 11557 LM: Free alarm 8
88.09 11558 LM: Free alarm 9
88.10 11559 LM: Free alarm 10
88.11 11560 LM: Free alarm 11
88.12 11561 LM: Free alarm 12
88.13 11562 LM: Free alarm 13
88.14 11563 LM: Free alarm 14
88.15 11564 LM: Free alarm 15
88.16 11565 LM: Free alarm 16
9.3.2.32 Group 90: AM Internal Values 0

n Binary outputs of function-related AnalogManagers (customer
screen)
90.01 7694 AM Cust.screen 1.1 The boolean result BR of the

AnalogManager
90.02 7699 AM Cust.screen 1.2

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 91: AM Internal Valu...
9.3.2.33 Group 91: AM Internal Values 1

n Binary outputs of function-related AnalogManagers (internal
values)
91.01 9643 AM Internal value 1 The boolean result BR of the

AnalogManager
91.02 9647 AM Internal value 2

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 96: LM Internal flag...
91.17 - 91.99 free
9.3.2.34 Group 93: AM Analog outputs 1

n Binary outputs of function-related AnalogManagers (data
sources)
93.01 9704 AM Data source AO1 Data source analog output 1 is valid The boolean result BR
of the AnalogManager
93.02 9706 AM Data source AO2 Data source analog output 2 is valid
93.07 - 93.20 free
93.21 9717 AM Data s. ext. AO1 Data source of external analog output 1 is valid
93.24 9723 AM Data s. ext. AO4 Data source of external analog output4 is valid
93.25 - 93.99 free
9.3.2.35 Group 96: LM Internal flags 1

n Binary outputs of function-related LogicsManagers (internal
flags)
96.01 10700 LM: Flag 1 The (boolean) result of the Log‐

icsManager
96.02 10701 LM: Flag 2
96.03 10702 LM: Flag 3
96.04 10703 LM: Flag 4
96.05 10704 LM: Flag 5
96.06 10705 LM: Flag 6
96.07 10706 LM: Flag 7
96.08 10707 LM: Flag 8
96.09 11609 LM: Flag 9
96.10 11610 LM: Flag 10

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 98: LM External DOs 1
96.11 11611 LM: Flag 11
96.12 11612 LM: Flag 12
96.13 11613 LM: Flag 13
96.14 11614 LM: Flag 14
96.15 11615 LM: Flag 15
96.16 11616 LM: Flag 16
96.17 12232 LM: Flag 17
96.18 12234 LM: Flag 18
96.19 12236 LM: Flag 19
96.20 12238 LM: Flag 20
96.21 12242 LM: Flag 21
96.22 12244 LM: Flag 22
96.23 12246 LM: Flag 23
96.24 12248 LM: Flag 24
96.25 12252 LM: Flag 25
96.26 12254 LM: Flag 26
96.27 12256 LM: Flag 27
96.28 12258 LM: Flag 28
96.29 12262 LM: Flag 29
96.30 12264 LM: Flag 30
96.31 12266 LM: Flag 31
96.32 12268 LM: Flag 32
9.3.2.36 Group 98: LM External DOs 1

n Binary outputs of function-related LogicsManagers (external
DOs)
98.01 11892 LM: External DO 1 The (boolean) result of the Log‐

icsManager
98.02 11893 LM: External DO 2

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Command Variables > Group 99: LM Internal DOs 1
9.3.2.37 Group 99: LM Internal DOs 1

n Binary outputs of function-related LogicsManagers (internal
discrete outputs e.g. relays, transistor outputs)
99.01 11870 LM: Ready for op. OFF The flag “Ready for operation” ON would mean the device is
(negative logic) is OFF NOT READY for operation
99.02 11871 LM: Relay 2 The (boolean) result of the Log‐

icsManager
99.03 11872 LM: Relay 3
99.04 11873 LM: Relay 4
99.05 11874 LM: Relay 5

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Symbols
99.06 11875 LM: Relay 6
99.07 11876 LM: Relay 7
99.08 11877 LM: Relay 8
99.09 11878 LM: Relay 9
99.10 11879 LM: Relay 10
99.11 11880 LM: Relay 11
99.12 11881 LM: Relay 12
99.13 11882 LM: Relay 13 The (boolean) result of the Log‐

icsManager
99.14 11883 LM: Relay 14
99.15 11884 LM: Relay 15
99.16 11885 LM: Relay 16
99.17 11886 LM: Relay 17
99.18 11887 LM: Relay 18
99.19 11888 LM: Relay 19
99.20 11889 LM: Relay 20
99.21 11890 LM: Relay 21
99.22 11891 LM: Relay 22
99.33 11908 LM: Transistor out 1
99.34 11909 LM: Transistor out 2
9.3.3 Logical Symbols

The following symbols are used for the graphical programming of
the LogicsManager. The easYgen displays symbols according to
the IEC standard by default.
n Use parameter 4117 Ä p. 546 to change display mode to ASA
standard.

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Symbols
Fig. 399: Logical symbols
Row ... according to standard:
A easYgen (default: IEC)
B DIN 40 700
C ASA
US MIL (configurable)
D IEC617-12
Meaning of the columns
1 2 3 4 5 6
AND OR NAND NOR NXOR XOR
AND OR NAND NOR NXOR XOR
x1 x2 y x1 x2 y x1 x2 y x1 x2 y x1 x2 y x1 x2 y
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0
Table 170: Truth table

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Logical Outputs
9.3.4 Logical Outputs

The logical outputs or combinations may be grouped into three cat‐
egories:
n Internal logical flags
n Internal functions
n Relay outputs
The numbers of the logical outputs in the third

column may again be used as input variable for
other outputs in the LogicsManager.
Internal flags 32 internal logical flags may be programmed to activate/deactivate

functions. This permits more than 3 commands to be included in a
logical function. They may be used like "auxiliary flags".
Name Function Number ID
LM: Flag 1 Internal flag 1 96.01 10700

Appendix
Internal functions The following logical functions may be used to activate/deactivate

functions.
LM: Start req in AUTO Start in AUTOMATIC operating mode (parameter 12120 Ä p. 340/Ä p. 1035) 86.09 10708
LM: Stop req. in AUTO Stop in AUTOMATIC operating mode (parameter 12190 Ä p. 340/Ä p. 1035) 86.10 10709
LM: Inhibit emerg.run Blocking or interruption of an emergency power operating in AUTOMATIC 86.11 10710
operating mode (parameter 12200 Ä p. 365/Ä p. 1035)
LM: Undelay close GCB Immediately closing of the GCB after engine start without waiting for the engine 86.12 10711
delayed monitoring and generator stable timer to expire (param‐
eter 12210 Ä p. 257/Ä p. 1035)
LM: LS interf. EthA Enables to switch load share interface between CAN and Ethernet A (param‐ 86.13 11987
eter 11986 Ä p. 742)
LM: Constant idle run Enables idle/rated speed modes (parameter 12550 Ä p. 199/Ä p. 1037). 86.14 10713
LM: Ext. acknowledge The alarm acknowledgement is performed from an external source (param‐ 86.15 10714
eter 12490 Ä p. 470/Ä p. 1037)
LM: Operat. mode Activation of the AUTOMATIC operating mode (parameter 12510 Ä p. 338/ 86.16 10715
AUTO Ä p. 1037 )
LM: Operat. mode MAN Activation of the MANUAL operating mode (parameter 12520 Ä p. 338/ 86.17 10716
Ä p. 1037)
LM: Operat. mode STOP Activation of the STOP operating mode (parameter 12530 Ä p. 339/Ä p. 1037) 86.18 10717
LM: Start w/o load Starting the engine without closing the GCB (parameter 12540 Ä p. 340/ 86.19 10718
Ä p. 1037/Ä p. 1037)
LM: Auto idle mode Automatic idle mode (blocks the undervoltage, underfrequency, and under‐ 86.20 10719
speed monitoring for a configured time automatically, param‐
eter 12570 Ä p. 199/Ä p. 1037)
LM: Discrete f/P + Raise frequency / real power setpoint (parameter 12900 Ä p. 337/Ä p. 1037) 86.21 11600
LM: Discrete f/P - Lower frequency / real power setpoint (parameter 12901 Ä p. 337/Ä p. 1037) 86.22 11601
LM: Discrete V/PF + Raise voltage / power factor setpoint (parameter 12902 Ä p. 337/Ä p. 1037) 86.23 11602
LM: Discrete V/PF - Lower voltage / power factor setpoint (parameter 12903 Ä p. 337/Ä p. 1037) 86.24 11603
LM: Freq. droop act. Activation of the frequency droop (parameter 12904 Ä p. 312/Ä p. 1037) 86.25 11604
LM: Volt. droop act. Activation of the voltage droop (parameter 12905 Ä p. 272/Ä p. 1037) 86.26 11605
LM: Ext. mns.decoupl. Activation of the mains decoupling function (parameter 12922 Ä p. 421/ 86.27 11606
Ä p. 1038)
LM: Critical mode Activation of critical mode operation (parameter 12220 Ä p. 348/Ä p. 1035) 86.28 11607
LM: Operat. mode TEST 86.29 12272
LM: Lock keypad 1 86.30 11924
LM: ECU seq. B_IN_1 86.31 11647
LM: ECU seq. B_IN_2 86.32 11648

Appendix
LM: 2nd disp.bright. 86.33 11971
LM: Enable heater 86.34 11972
LM: Syst. update 86.35 11974
LM: Syn. mode CHECK Activation of CHECK synchronization mode (parameter 12906 Ä p. 265/ 86.38 11617
Ä p. 1037)
LM: Syn. mode Activation of PERMISSIVE synchronization mode (parameter 12907 Ä p. 265/ 86.39 11618
PERMIS. Ä p. 1037)
LM: Syn. mode RUN Activation of RUN synchronization mode (parameter 12908 Ä p. 265/ 86.40 11619
Ä p. 1037)
LM: IOP Res.power 2 86.41 11975
LM: MOP Res.power 2 86.42 11976
LM: Setpoint 2 freq. Activates the frequency setpoint 2 (parameter 12918 Ä p. 312/Ä p. 1038) 86.81 11910
LM: Setp. 2 load Activates the load setpoint 2 (parameter 12919 Ä p. 319/Ä p. 612/Ä p. 1038) 86.82 11911
LM: Setp. 2 voltage Activates the voltage setpoint 2 (parameter 12920 Ä p. 272/Ä p. 1038) 86.83 11912
LM: Setp.2 pwr.factor Activates the power factor setpoint 2 (parameter 12921 Ä p. 280/Ä p. 1038) 86.84 11913
LM: Enable MCB Enables the MCB (parameter 12923 Ä p. 263/Ä p. 1038) 86.85 11914
LM: LDSS enabled Activation of load-dependent start/stop (parameter 12930 Ä p. 353/Ä p. 606/ 86.86 11915
Ä p. 1038)
LM: Segment no.2 act. Assigns the genset to load share segm. #2 (parameter 12929 Ä p. 303/ 86.87 11916
Ä p. 1038)
Ä p. 1038)
Ä p. 1038)
LM: LDSS Priority 2 Sets the LDSS priority to 2 (parameter 12926 Ä p. 353/Ä p. 1038) 86.90 11919
LM: Transition mode 1 Activates breaker transition mode 1 (parameter 12931 Ä p. 252/Ä p. 1038) 86.93 11922
LM: Transition mode 2 Activates breaker transition mode 2 (parameter 12932 Ä p. 253/Ä p. 1038) 86.94 11923
LM: Release f-control 86.96 11925
LM: Release V-control 86.97 11926
LM: P-control active 86.98 11927
LM: Q control active 86.99 11928
LM: PID1 ctrl.release 87.17 11406
LM: LS5 command 1 87.23 11412
LM: LS5 command 2 87.24 11413
LM: LS5 command 3 87.25 11414
LM: LS5 command 4 87.26 11415
LM: LS5 command 5 87.27 11416
LM: LS5 command 6 87.28 11417

Appendix
LM: Bypass min. Pgen. 87.29 11418
LM: Run-up sync. 87.30 11419
LM: Enable Mns dec. 87.31 11420
LM: GCB open in MAN 87.46 11435
LM: GCB close in MAN 87.47 11436
LM: MCB open in MAN 87.48 11437
LM: MCB close in MAN 87.49 11438
LM: MAN engine start 87.50 11439
LM: MAN engine stop 87.59 11448
LM: Free derating 87.60 11449
LM: GGB open in MAN 87.61 11450
LM: GGB close in MAN 87.62 11451
LM: Inhibit cranking 87.66 11455
LM: Setp. 3 load 87.67 11456
LM: Firing speed 87.68 11457
LM: Speed detected 87.69 11458
LM: Release eng.mon. 87.70 11459
LM: Release cyl.temp. 87.71 11460
LM: Disable mns.mon. 87.72 11461
LM: Mains decoupl.MCB 87.73 11462
LM: Inh.dead bus GCB 87.74 11463
LM: Setp. 4 load 87.75 11464
LM: Disable load ramp 87.76 11465
LM: 2nd load SP ramp 87.77 11979
LM: Free alarm 1 88.01 11550
LM: Free alarm 2 88.02 11551
LM: Free alarm 3 88.03 11552
LM: Free alarm 4 88.04 11553
LM: Free alarm 5 88.05 11554
LM: Free alarm 6 88.06 11555
LM: Free alarm 7 88.07 11556
LM: Free alarm 8 88.08 11557
LM: Free alarm 9 88.09 11558
LM: Free alarm 10 88.10 11559
LM: Free alarm 11 88.11 11560
LM: Free alarm 12 88.12 11561
LM: Free alarm 13 88.13 11562

Appendix
LM: Free alarm 14 88.14 11563
LM: Free alarm 15 88.15 11564
LM: Free alarm 16 88.16 11565
Priority hierarchy of the logical outputs The following table contains the priority relationships between the
start conditions of the logical outputs in the LogicsManager:
Prioritized function Overrides Reaction
Critical mode Stop req. in Auto A start will still be performed.
Start req. in Auto The behavior of the system depends on the configuration of the
related parameters.
Stop req. in Auto Start req. in Auto No start will be performed.
Emergency power No start will be performed.
Idle mode No start will be performed.
Start w/o load Start req. in Auto The GCB remains open / will be opened.
Emergency power Start w/o load The GCB will be closed nevertheless.
Critical mode The GCB will be closed nevertheless. The alarm class manage‐
ment is still performed like for the critical mode. If emergency
power is already enabled and the critical mode will be enabled
then, a pause time may be configured for the emergency power
operation.
Inhibit emergency run Emergency power No start will be performed.
Emergency power during Start The generator keeps on running without taking over load.
w/o load
Relay outputs All relays may be controlled directly by the LogicsManager

depending on the respective application mode.
Name LM: Function Number ID
Relay 1 If this logical output becomes true, the relay output 1 will be acti‐ 99.01 11870
vated
(Ready for opera‐
tion OFF)
vated
vated
vated
vated
vated
vated
vated

Appendix
Name LM: Function Number ID
vated
vated
vated
vated
vated
vated
vated
vated
vated
vated
vated
vated
vated
vated
External DO 1 If this logical output becomes true, the external relay output 1 will 98.01 11892
be activated
be activated
be activated
be activated
be activated
be activated
be activated
be activated
be activated

Appendix
External DO 10 If this logical output becomes true, the external relay output 10 98.10 11901
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated
will be activated

Appendix
Relay Application mode (parameter 3444 Ä p. 251)
No. Term. None GCB GCB GCB/ GCB/G GCB/G GCB/LS GCB/L- GCB/G GCB/L- GCB/L-
open MCB GB GB/MCB 5 MCB GB/L- GGB GGB/L-
MCB MCB
Internal relay outputs, board #1
[R 01] 41/42 'Ready for operation'; additionally programmable with LogicsManager

CAUTION! Only relay [R 01] has an inverse logic. The relay opens (all other relays close), if the logical output of
the LogicsManager becomes TRUE.
[R 02] 43/46 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'Centralized alarm (horn)'
[R 03] 44/46 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'Starter'
[R 04] 45/46 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'Diesel: Fuel solenoid, Gas: Gas valve'
[R 05] 47/48 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'Diesel: Preglow, Gas: Ignition'
[R 06] 49/50 LogicsManager Command: close GCB
[R 07] 51/52 Logi‐ Command: open GCB

csMan
ager
[R 08] 53/54 LogicsManager Com‐ Logi‐ Com‐ LogicsManager

mand: csMan‐ mand:
close ager close
MCB MCB
[R 09] 55/56 LogicsManager; pre- Com‐ Logi‐ Com‐ LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'Mains decou‐
assigned with 'Mains mand: csMan‐ mand: pling'
decoupling' open ager; open
MCB pre- MCB
assigne
d with
'Mains
decou‐
pling'
[R 10] 57/60 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with Command: close LogicsManager; Com‐ LogicsManager;
'Auxiliary services' GGB pre-assigned with mand: pre-assigned with
'Auxiliary services' close 'Auxiliary services'
GGB
[R 11] 58/60 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with Command: open LogicsManager; Com‐ LogicsManager;
'Alarm class A, B active' GGB pre-assigned with mand: pre-assigned with
'Alarm class A, B open 'Alarm class A, B
active' GGB active'
[R 13 121/122 LogicsManager; pre-assigned with 'Alarm class C, D, E, F active'

Appendix
LogicsManager Reference > Factory Settings
9.3.5 Factory Settings

LogicsManager's default definition
ID Name Function
4871 Inhibit cranking (02.01 LM FALSE And True) And True
5580 PID1 ctrl.release (False And True) And True
7794 Enable 2nd display brightness (Not 04.64 Key activation And True) And True
7799 Enable front foil heater (True And True) And True
7801 System update (False And True) And True
8120 Free alarm 1 (02.01 LM FALSE And True) And True
11978 2nd load control setpoint ramp (False And 02.02 LM TRUE) And 02.02 LM TRUE
12110 Relay 2 (03.05 Horn And True) And True
12120 Start req in AUTO (09.02 Discrete input 2 Or False) Or 04.13 Remote request
12130 Relay 5 (03.04 Preglow / Ignition And True) And True
12140 Relay 6 (False And True) And True
12180 Relay 10 (03.01 Auxiliary services And True) And True
12190 Stop req. in AUTO (False And True) And True
12200 Inhibit emerg.run (False And True) And True
12210 Undelay close GCB (04.09 Emergency mode And True) And True
12220 Critical mode (False And Not 05.08 Start fail) And Not 09.01 Discrete input 1
12230 Flag 1 (02.01 LM FALSE And True) And True

Appendix
ID Name Function
12269 Setp. 4 load (False And True) And True
12271 Operat. mode TEST (False And True) And True
12310 Relay 3 (03.02 Starter And True) And True
12320 Relay 4 (03.28 Start/Gas And True) And True
12330 External DO 1 (False And True) And True

Appendix
ID Name Function
12490 Ext. acknowledge (09.05 Discrete input 5 And True) Or 04.14 Remote acknowledge
12510 Operat. mode AUTO (False And True) And True
12520 Operat. mode MAN (False And True) And True
12530 Operat. mode STOP (False And True) And True
12540 Start w/o load (False And True) And True
12540 Start w/o load (False And True) And True
12550 Constant idle run (False And True) And True
12560 Relay 11 (01.08 Warning alarm And True) And True
12570 Auto idle mode (False And True) And True
12580 Ready for op. OFF (False And False) And True
12590 Relay 12 (01.09 Shutdown alarm And True) And True
12604 IOP Reserve power 2 (False And True) And True
12605 MOP Reserve power 2 (False And True) And True
12853 Disable load setpoint ramp (02.01 LM FALSE And True) And True
12900 Discrete f/P + (False And True) And True
12901 Discrete f/P - (False And True) And True
12902 Discrete V/PF + (False And True) And True
12903 Discrete V/PF - (False And True) And True
12904 Freq. droop act. (08.17 Missing members Or 08.06 GCB fail to open) And True
12905 Volt. droop act. (08.17 Missing members Or 08.06 GCB fail to open) And True
12906 Syn. mode CHECK (False And True) And True
12907 Syn. mode PERMIS. (False And True) And True
12908 Syn. mode RUN (False And True) And True
12909 Release f-control (True And True) And True

Appendix
ID Name Function
12918 Setpoint 2 freq. (False And True) And True
12920 Setp. 2 voltage (False And True) And True
12921 Setp.2 pwr.factor (False And True) And True
12922 Ext. mns.decoupl. (False And True) And True
12923 Enable MCB (09.06 Discrete input 6 And Not 08.07 MCB fail to close) And Not 07.05
Mns.ph.rot. mismatch
12924 LDSS Priority 4 (02.01 LM FALSE And True) And True
12927 Segment no.4 act. (02.01 LM FALSE And True) And True
12930 LD start stop (False And True) And True
12931 Transition mode 1 (False And True) And True
12932 Transition mode 2 (False And True) And True
12938 Release V-control (True And True) And True
12940 P control (04.07 MCB closed And 04.06 GCB closed) And True
12941 Q control (04.07 MCB closed And 04.06 GCB closed) And True
12942 Enable mains decoupl. (02.02 LM TRUE And True) And True
12951 Firing speed detection (02.34 Firing speed electr. Or 02.35 Firing speed rpm) And True
12970 MAN engine start (False And True) And True
12971 MAN engine stop (False And True) And True
12974 MCB open in MAN (False And True) And True
12975 MCB close in MAN (False And True) And True
12976 GCB open in MAN (False And True) And True
12977 GCB close in MAN (False And True) And True
12978 Lock keypad 1 (False And True) And True
12989 Speed detection (02.36 Speed electr. Or 02.37 Speed rpm) And True
12999 Release eng.mon. (02.34 Firing speed electr. Or 02.35 Firing speed rpm) And 03.28
Start/Gas
15146 Free derating (02.01 LM FALSE And True) And True
15158 Release cyl.temp. (02.01 LM FALSE And True) And True
15159 Disable mns.mon. (False And True) And True
15160 Mains decoupl.MCB (False And True) And True
15161 Inh.dead bus GCB (False And True) And True
15164 ECU seq. B_IN_1 (False And True) And True
15165 ECU seq. B_IN_2 (False And True) And True

Appendix
Table 171: Factory settings by ID: LogicsManager
Relay outputs
Simple (function) Extended (configuration) Result
[99.01] Relay 1 [R01] - Ready for operation OFF FALSE
Relay will be de-energized if unit is not ready for

operation or the logics manager output is TRUE.
Deactivated by default
Note: This function is pre-configured and may be
activated by passing through the command vari‐
ables [01.09] Shutdown alarm or [04.01] Oper‐
ating mode AUTO or [00.01] LM: Flag 1 ('―'
instead of '0').
The unit is only ready for operation after an start-
up delay following the power supply connection.
[99.02] Relay 2 [R02] - Centralized alarm (horn) / dependent on

freely configurable Logics Com‐
mand Variable
Relay energizes if the internal condition "Horn" is [03.05]
TRUE
[99.03] Relay 3 [R03] - Starter / freely configu‐ dependent on

rable Logics Com‐
mand Variable
Relay energizes if the internal condition "Starter" [03.02]
is TRUE
[99.04] Relay 4 [R04] - Start/Gas / freely configu‐ dependent on

rable Logics Com‐
mand Variable
Relay energizes if the internal condition "Start/ [03.28]
Gas" is TRUE to energize the start (Diesel) or
gas (Gas) solenoid
[99.05] Relay 5 [R05] - Preglow/Ignition / freely dependent on

configurable Logics Com‐
mand Variable
Relay energizes if the internal condition "Pre‐ [03.04]
glow/Ignition" is TRUE to preglow the Diesel
engine or enabling the ignition of the gas engine

Appendix
[99.06] Relay 6 [R06] - Free / Command: close FALSE

GCB
In application mode
and = freely configurable relay (unas‐
signed)
In application mode to "Command:
close GCB"
[99.07] Relay 7 [R07] - Mains decoupling / freely dependent on

configurable / Command: open GCB application
mode and
In application mode pre-configured to Logics Com‐
mains decoupling. Relay energizes if the internal mand Variable
condition "Mains decoupling" is TRUE to [07.25]
decouple the genset from the mains.
In application mode to "Command:
open GCB"
[99.08] Relay 8 [R08] - Free / Command: close FALSE

MCB
In application mode , , , ,
, , , and = freely con‐
figurable relay (unassigned)
In application mode and "Command:
close MCB"
[99.09] Relay 9 [R09] - Mains decoupling / freely dependent on

configurable / Command: open MCB application
mode and
In application mode , , , , Logics Com‐
, , , and pre-config‐ mand Variable
ured to mains decoupling. Relay energizes if the [07.25]
internal condition "Mains decoupling" is TRUE to
decouple the genset from the mains.
In application mode and "Command:
open MCB"
[99.10] Relay 10 [R10] - Auxiliary services / dependent on

freely configurable Logics Com‐
mand Variable
In application mode , , , , [03.01]
, , and pre-configured to
auxiliary services. Relay energizes if the internal
condition "Aux. services" is TRUE to activate the
auxiliary services (it energizes prior to an engine
start and de-energizes with the engine stop)
In application mode , and "Com‐
mand: close GGB"
[99.11] Relay 11 [R11] - Warning alarm class dependent on

active / freely configurable Logics Com‐
mand Variable
In application mode , , , , [01.08]
, , and pre-configured to
alarm class A or B. Relay energizes if one of the
alarm classes A or B is active
In application mode , and "Com‐
mand: open GGB"

Appendix
[99.12] Relay 12 [R12] - Shutdown alarm class dependent on

active / freely configurable Logics Com‐
mand Variable
Relay energizes if one of the alarm classes C, D, [01.09]
E or F is active
[98.xx] External discrete output {y} - {xx} = 01 to FALSE

32 ; {y} = 1 to 32)
Control of the external relay {y}, if this is con‐

nected
Prepared for:
[98.xx] External discrete output {y} - Free FALSE

(external expansion card, if connected; {xx} = 01
to 16 ; {y} = 17 to 32).
Control of the external relay {y}, if this is con‐

nected
Prepared for:
Discrete inputs
Number LM ID Alarm class Pre-assigned to
DI 01 09.01 10900 F freely configurable EMERGENCY STOP
DI 02 09.02 10901 CONTROL freely configurable LogicsManager Start in AUTO
DI 03 09.03 10902 B freely configurable Low oil pressure
DI 04 09.04 10903 B freely configurable Coolant temperature
DI 05 09.05 10904 CONTROL freely configurable LogicsManager External acknowledgment
DI 06 09.06 10905 CONTROL freely configurable LogicsManager Enable MCB
DI 07 09.07 10906 fixed Reply MCB
DI 08 09.08 10907 fixed Reply GCB
DI 09 09.09 10908 B freely configurable unassigned
DI Alarm class Pre-assigned to
13 B freely configurable unassigned

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM
DI Alarm class Pre-assigned to
Table 172: easYgen-3400/3500: Package 2 only
9.4 AnalogManager Reference

9.4.1 Data Sources AM
To enhance flexibility of programming the functions of the
easYgen-3000XT series, an AnalogManager is used.
All analog values may be used as data sources for the analog out‐
puts (refer to Ä Chapter 4.4.2.5 “Analog Outputs” on page 225),
the flexible limit monitoring (refer to Ä Chapter 4.5.5 “Flexible
Limits” on page 465), and the controller setpoints (refer to
Ä Chapter 4.4.4 “Configure Controller” on page 267).
– Every data source is indicated by a group

number and a sub-number.
– Some values are percentage values and relate
to reference values.
Groups 1 to 79 make available even more than the already

arranged analog variables out of the easYgen system.
Groups 80 to 99 are result variables of AnalogManager calcula‐
tions.
AnalogManager Variables
AnalogManager Results
Cascading: Use analog results
This analog results of an AnalogManager is avail‐
able as AnalogManager input additionally. Like the
other AnalogManager inputs they can be used as
input signal for (further) AnalogManagers.
The groups 80.xx to 89.xx contain analog outputs (results) of func‐

tion-related AnalogManagers.
The description/name of these analog variables starts always with
'AM ...'.
'Internal'/Fixed AnalogManager The groups 90.xx to 99.xx contain analog outputs of fixed Analog‐
Values Managers.
The description/name of these analog variables starts always with
'AM ...'.

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM > Group 01: Generator Values
9.4.1.1 Group 01: Generator Values
Analog ID Data Source Reference Value Remarks

Input #
01.01 15730 Generator: Voltage wye average Gen.volt L-N [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator Rated Voltage.
01.02 15731 Generator voltage L1-N Gen.volt L1-N [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator Rated Voltage.
ator Rated Voltage.
ator Rated Voltage.
01.05 15734 Generator: Voltage delta average Gen.volt L-L [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator Rated Voltage.
01.06 15735 Generator voltage L1-L2 Gen.volt L1-L2 [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator Rated Voltage.
ator Rated Voltage.
ator Rated Voltage.
01.09 15738 Generator frequency Gen.frequency [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator Nominal Frequency.
01.10 15739 Generator frequency L1-L2 Gen.freq.L1-L2 [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
01.13 15742 Generator average current Gen.current [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator Rated Current.
01.14 15743 Generator current L1 Gen.current L1 [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator Rated Current.
ator Rated Current.
ator Rated Current.
01.17 15746 Dragged generator current L1 Gen.curr.max. L1 [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator Rated Current.
ator Rated Current.
ator Rated Current.
01.20 15749 Generator power factor Gen. PF [%] Percentage value related on Power
Factor 1.
01.21 15750 Generator power factor L1 Gen. PF L1 [%] Percentage value related on Power
Factor 1.
Factor 1.
Factor 1.
01.24 15753 Total Generator real power Gen. act. power [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator rated active power.
01.25 15754 Generator real power L1-N Gen.act.pwr. L1 [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM > Group 01: Generator Values

Input #
01.28 15757 Total gen. reactive power Gen.react.pwr. [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator rated reactive power.
01.29 15758 Generator reactive power L1-N Gen.react.pwr.L1 [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
01.32 15761 Total gen. apparent power Gen.app.power [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator rated active- and reactive power.
01.33 15762 Generator apparent power L1-N Gen.app.pwr. L1 [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
01.36 to free
01.50
01.51 9730 Generator voltage wye average Gen volt L-N [V] Voltage Format
01.52 9731 Generator voltage 1-N Gen volt L1-N [V] Voltage Format
01.53 9732 Generator voltage L2-N Gen.volt L2-N [V] Voltage Format
01.54 9733 Generator voltage L3-N Gen.volt L3-N [V] Voltage Format
01.55 9734 Generator voltage delta average Gen.volt L-L [V] Voltage Format
01.56 9735 Generator voltage L1-L2 Gen.volt L1-L2 [V] Voltage Format
01.59 9738 Generator frequency Gen.frequency [Hz] Frequency Format
01.60 9739 Generator frequency L1-L2 Gen.freq.L1-L2 [Hz] Frequency Format
01.63 9742 Generator average current Gen.current [A] Current Format
01.64 9743 Generator current L1 Gen.current L1 [A] Current Format.
01.65 9744 Generator current L2 Gen.current L2 [A] Current Format
01.66 9745 Generator current L3 Gen.current L3 [A] Current Format
01.67 9746 Dragged generator current L1 Gen.curr.max. L1 [A] Current Format
01.70 9749 Generator power factor Gen. PF Power Factor Format
01.71 9750 Generator power factor L1 Gen. PF L1 Power Factor Format
01.74 9753 Total Generator real power Gen. act. power [W] Power Format
01.75 9754 Generator real power L1-N Gen.act.pwr. L1 [W] Power Format

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM > Group 02: Mains Values

Input #
01.78 9757 Total generator reactive power Gen. react.pwr. [var] Reactive Power Format
01.79 9758 Generator reactive power L1-N Gen.react.pwr.L1[var] Reactive Power Format
01.82 9761 Total generator apparent power Gen.app.power [VA] Apparent Power Format
01.83 9762 Generator apparent power L1-N Gen.app.pwr. L1 [VA] Apparent Power Format
01.86 9765 Number of pole slip Number of pole slip Actual number of pole slip events for
the analog manager.
9.4.1.2 Group 02: Mains Values

Input #
02.01 15780 Mains: Voltage wye average Mains volt L-N [%] Percentage value related on Mains
Rated Voltage.
02.02 15781 Mains voltage 1-N Mains volt L1-N [%] Percentage value related on Mains
Rated Voltage.
Rated Voltage.
Rated Voltage.
02.05 15784 Mains: Voltage delta average Mains volt L-L [%] Percentage value related on Mains
Rated Voltage.
02.06 15785 Mains voltage 1-2 Mains volt L1-L2 [%] Percentage value related on Mains
Rated Voltage.
Rated Voltage.
Rated Voltage.
02.09 15788 Mains frequency Mains frequency [%] Percentage value related on Nominal
Frequency.
02.10 15789 Mains frequency 1-2 Mains freq.L1-L2 [%] Percentage value related on Nominal
Frequency.
Frequency.
Frequency.
02.13 15792 Mains average current Mains current [%] Percentage value related on Mains
Rated Current.
02.14 15793 Mains current 1 Mains current L1 [%] Percentage value related on Mains
Rated Current.
Rated Current.
Rated Current.
02.17 15796 Dragged mains current 1 Mns.curr.max.L1 [%] Percentage value related on Mains
Rated Current.

Appendix

Input #
Rated Current.
Rated Current.
02.20 15799 Mains powerfactor Mains PF [%] Percentage value related on Power
Factor 1.
02.21 15800 Mains powerfactor 1 Mains PF L1 [%] Percentage value related on Power
Factor 1.
Factor 1.
Factor 1.
02.24 15803 Total mains. real power Mains act. power [%] Percentage value related on Mains
rated active power.
02.25 15804 Mains power 1-N Mns.act.pwr.L1 [%] Percentage value related on Mains
rated active power.
rated active power.
rated active power.
02.28 15807 Total mains reactive power Mns.react. pwr. [%] Percentage value related on Mains
rated reactive power.
02.29 15808 Mains reactive power 1-N Mns.react.pwr.L1 [%] Percentage value related on Mains
02.32 15811 Total mains apparent power Mns.app.power [%] Percentage value related on Mains
rated active- and reactive power.
02.33 15812 Mains apparent power 1-N Mns.app.pwr.L1 [%] Percentage value related on Mains
02.36 15815 Mains external measured active Mns.ext.act.pwr. [%] Percentage value related on Mains
power by AI rated active power.
02.37 15816 Mains external measured reactive Mns.ext.react.pwr[%] Percentage value related on Mains
power by AI rated reactive power.
02.38 15817 Mains calculated Power Factor by AI Mains ext. PF [%] Percentage value related on Power
Factor 1.
02.40 15822 Mains frequency 200ms Mains freq.200ms [%] Percentage value related on Nominal
Frequency
02.41 to free
02.50
02.51 9780 Mains : Voltage wye average Mains volt L-N [V] Voltage Format
02.52 9781 Mains voltage 1-N Mains volt L1-N [V] Voltage Format
02.55 9784 Mains: Voltage delta average Mains volt L-L [V] Voltage Format
02.56 9785 Mains voltage 1-2 Mains volt L1-L2 [V] Voltage Format

Appendix

Input #
02.59 9788 Mains frequency Mains frequency [Hz] Frequency Format
02.60 9789 Mains frequency 1-2 Mains freq.L1-L2 [Hz] Frequency Format
02.63 9792 Mains average current Mains current [A] Current Format
02.64 9793 Mains current 1 Mains current L1 [A] Current Format
02.67 9796 Dragged mains current 1 Mns.curr.max.L1 [A] Current Format
02.70 9799 Mains powerfactor Mains PF Power Factor Format
02.71 9810 Mains powerfactor 1 Mains PF L1 Power Factor Format
02.74 9813 Total mains. real power Mains act. power [W] Power Format
02.75 9814 Mains power 1-N Mns.act.pwr. L1 [W] Power Format
02.78 9817 Total mains reactive power Mns.react.pwr. [var] Reactive Power Format
02.79 9818 Mains reactive power 1-N Mns.react.pwr.L1[var] Reactive Power Format
02.82 9821 Total mains apparent power Mns.app.power [VA] Apparent Power Format
02.83 9822 Mains apparent power 1-N Mns.app.pwr. L1 [VA] Apparent Power Format
02.86 9825 Mains external measured active Mns.ext.act.pwr. [W] Power Format
power by AI
02.87 9826 Mains external measured reactive Mns.ext.reac.pwr [var] Reactive Power Format
power by AI
02.88 9827 Mains calculated Power Factor by AI Mains ext. PF Power Factor Format
02.89 11571 Mains settling time Mains settl.time [s] Seconds format

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM > Group 03: Busbar 1 Values

Input #
02.90 15823 Mains frequency 200ms Mains freq.200ms[Hz] Frequency Format
Note:
The easYgen provides a special
mains frequency measurement with a
0.05 Hz accuracy. This is maintained
through calculating an average value
over the last 200ms.
The value can be picked up via com‐
munication interface as parameter
ID236. This frequency is automatically
overtaken into the Over/Under-fre‐
quency active power regulation Q(P).
9.4.1.3 Group 03: Busbar 1 Values

Input #
03.01 15830 Busbar 1: voltage delta average [%] Busb1 volt. L-L [%] Percentage value related on Busbar 1
rated voltage.
03.02 15831 Busbar 1: voltage L1-L2 [%] Busb1 volt.L1-L2 [%] Percentage value related on Busbar 1
rated voltage.
rated voltage.
rated voltage.
03.05 15834 Busbar 1: Frequency [%] Busb1 frequency [%] Percentage value related on Nominal
Frequency.
03.06 15835 Busbar 1: Frequency L1-L2 [%] Busb1 freq.L1-L2 [%] Percentage value related on Nominal
Frequency.
Frequency.
Frequency.
03.09 15838 Busbar 1: Voltage L1-N [%] Busb1 volt.L1-N [%] Percentage value related on Busbar 1
rated voltage.
rated voltage.
rated voltage.
03.12 15841 Busbar 1: Voltage wye average [%] Busb1 volt L-N [%] Percentage value related on Busbar 1
rated voltage.
03.13 to free
03.20
03.51 9840 Busbar 1: Voltage delta average [V] Busb1 volt.L-L [V] Voltage Format
03.52 9841 Busbar 1: voltage L1-L2 [V] Busb1 volt.L1-L2 [V] Voltage Format
03.55 9844 Busbar 1: Frequency [Hz] Busb1 frequency [Hz] Frequency Format
03.56 9845 Busbar 1: Frequency L1-L2 [Hz] Busb1 freq.L1-L2 [Hz] Frequency Format

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM > Group 05: Controller Setpo...

Input #
03.59 9848 Busbar 1: Voltage L1-N [V] Busb1 volt.L1-N [V] Voltage Format
03.62 9851 Busbar 1: Voltage wye average [V] Busb1 volt.L-N [V] Voltage Format
9.4.1.4 Group 05: Controller Setpoints

Input #
05.01 15860 Internal freq.setp.1 Internal f setp1 [%] Percentage value related on Nominal
Frequency.
05.02 15861 Internal freq.setp.2 Internal f setp2 [%] Percentage value related on Nominal
Frequency.
05.03 15862 Interface freq.setp. Interface f setp [%] Percentage value related on Nominal
Frequency.
05.04 15863 Internal pow.setp.1 Internal P setp1 [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
05.06 15865 Interface pow.setp. Interface P setp [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
05.07 15866 Internal volt.setp.1 Internal V setp1 [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator rated voltage.
05.08 15867 Internal volt.setp.2 Internal V setp2 [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator rated voltage.
05.09 15868 Interface volt.setp. Interface V setp [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator rated voltage.
05.10 15869 Int.pow.factor setp1 Intern. PF setp1 [%] Percentage value related on Power
Factor 1.
05.11 15870 Int.pow.factor setp2 Intern. PF setp2 [%] Percentage value related on Power
Factor 1.
05.12 15871 Interface pow.factor Interface PF sp [%] Percentage value related on Power
Factor 1.
05.13 15872 Digital poti freq. Discrete f +/- [%] Percentage value related on Nominal
Frequency.
05.14 15873 Digital poti power Discrete P +/- [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator rated active power
05.15 15874 Digital poti voltage Discrete V +/- [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator rated voltage
05.16 15875 Dig. poti pow.factor Discrete PF +/- [%] Percentage value related on Power
Factor 1.
05.17 15876 Used freq.setp. Used f setp. [%] Percentage value related on Nominal
Frequency.
05.18 15877 Used freq.setp.ramp Used f setp.ramp [%] Percentage value related on Nominal
Frequency.
05.19 15878 Used pwr. setp. Used P setp. [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
05.20 15879 Used pwr. setp.ramp Used P setp.ramp [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
05.21 15880 Used volt.setp. Used V setp. [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator rated voltage

Appendix

Input #
05.22 15881 Used volt.setp.ramp Used V setp.ramp [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
ator rated voltage
05.23 15882 Used PF setp. Used PF setp [%] Percentage value related on Power
Factor 1.
05.24 15883 Used PF setp.ramp Used PF sp ramp [%] Percentage value related on Power
Factor 1.
05.28 15887 Pred(F) P derating (f) [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
05.29 15888 cosphi(P) PF characteristic % Percentage value related on Power

Factor 1.
05.31 15501 Internal kvar setpoint 1 Int. kvar setp1 [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
05.32 15502 Internal kvar setpoint 2 Int. kvar setp2 [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
05.33 15503 Interface kvar setpoint Interf. kvar sp [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐
05.35 9196 F/P controller setpoint F/P control setp [%]
05.36 9197 V/Q controller setpoint V/Q control setp [%]
05.37 15765 Manual f setp. Manual f setp. [%] Percentage value related on Nominal
Frequency.
05.38 15766 Manual P setp. Manual P setp. [%] Percentage value related on Nominal
Power.
05.39 15767 Manual V setp. Manual V setp. [%] Percentage value related on Nominal
Voltage.
05.40 15768 Manual PF setp. Manual PF setp. [%] Percentage value related on Power
Factor 1.
05.41 15774 Used kvar setp. Used kvar setp. [%] Percentage value related on generator
rated reactive power
05.42 15776 Used kvar setp.ramp Used kvar setp.ramp [%] Percentage value related on generator
rated reactive power
05.43 15778 QV reference QV reference [%] Calculated set point from the reactive-
voltage curve “Q(V)”
05.44 15818 QP reference QP reference [%] Calculated set point from the reactive-
voltage curve “Q(P)”
05.45 15820 QV lim.reference QV lim.reference [%] Calculated set point from the reactive-
voltage curve “Q(V)” with voltage limi‐
tation
05.46 15824 VQ0 reference VQ0 reference Percentage value reactive power:
voltage where reactive power setpoint
shall be 0kvar
05.47 15825 Interface QP offset Interface QP offset Percentage value reactive power in
relation to the installed active power
from the power generation device.
05.48 15826 P uprating(f) P uprating(f) [%] Percentage value related on Gener‐

05.51 9863 Internal freq.setp.1 Internal f setp1 [Hz] Frequency Format
05.52 9864 Internal freq.setp.2 Internal f setp2 [Hz] Frequency Format
05.53 9865 Interface freq.setp. Interface f setp [Hz] Frequency Format
05.54 9866 Internal pow.setp.1 Internal P setp1 [kW] Power Format

Appendix

Input #
05.56 9868 Interface pow.setp. Interface P setp [kW] Power Format
05.57 9869 Internal volt.setp.1 Internal V setp1 [V] Voltage Format
05.58 9870 Internal volt.setp.2 Internal V setp2 [V] Voltage Format
05.59 9871 Interface volt.setp. Interface V setp [V] Voltage Format
05.63 9883 Digital poti freq. Discrete f +/- [Hz] Frequency Format
05.64 9884 Digital poti power Discrete P +/- [kW] Power Format
05.65 9885 Digital poti voltage Discrete V +/- [V] Voltage Format
05.67 9872 Used freq.setp. Used f setp. [Hz] Frequency Format
05.68 9873 Used freq.setp.ramp Used f setp.ramp [Hz] Frequency Format
05.69 9874 Used pwr. setp. Used P setp. [kW] Power Format
05.70 9875 Used pwr. setp.ramp Used P setp.ramp [kW] Power Format
05.71 9876 Used volt.setp. Used V setp. [V] Voltage Format
05.72 9877 Used volt.setp.ramp Used V setp.ramp [V] Voltage Format
05.75 15884 Int. PID 1 Setp. Int. PID 1 setpoint
05.81 9879 Internal kvar setpoint 1 Int. kvar setp1 [kvar] Reactive Power Format
05.82 9880 Internal kvar setpoint 2 Int. kvar setp2 [kvar] Reactive Power Format
05.83 9881 Interface kvar setpoint Interf. kvar sp [kvar] Reactive Power Format
05.87 15769 Manual f setp. Manual f setp. [Hz]
05.88 15770 Manual P setp. Manual P setp. [W]
05.89 15771 Manual V setp. Manual V setp. [V]
05.91 15775 Used Q setp. Used Q setp. [kvar] The current used kvar setpoint from
the reactive power controller without
ramp.
05.92 15777 Q setp. ramp Q setp. ramp [kvar] The current used kvar setpoint from
the reactive power controller with
ramp.
05.93 15779 QV reference QV reference [kvar] Calculated set point from the reactive-
voltage curve “Q(V)”
05.94 15819 QP reference QP reference [kvar] Calculated set point from the reactive-
voltage curve “Q(P)”
05.95 15821 QV lim.reference QV limit ref.[kvar] Calculated set point from the reactive-
voltage curve “Q(V)” with voltage limi‐
tation

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM > Group 07: J1939 Values 1
9.4.1.5 Group 06: DC Analog Inputs
Analog Input ID Data Source Reference Value Remarks

#
06.01 15890 Analog input 1 Analog input 1
9.4.1.6 Group 07: J1939 Values 1

#
07.01 15920 SPN 52: Engine Intercooler 52:Eng. Interc.Temp.
07.02 15921 SPN 91: Throttle Position 91:Accel.Pedal Pos.1
07.03 15922 SPN 92: Load At Current Speed 92:Load at Speed
07.04 15923 SPN 94: Fuel Delivery Pressure 94:Fuel Deliv.Press.
07.05 15924 SPN 95: Fuel Filter Difference Pressure 95:Fuel Filt.Diff. Pr.
07.06 15925 SPN 98: Engine Oil Level 98:Engine Oil Level
07.07 15926 SPN 100: Engine Oil Pressure 100:Engine Oil Press.
07.08 15927 SPN 101: Crankcase Pressure 101:Crankcase Press.
07.09 15928 SPN 102: Boost Pressure 102:Int.Manif.1 Pr.
07.10 15929 SPN 105: Intake Manifold 1 Temperature 105:Int.Manif.1 Temp.
07.11 15930 SPN 106: Turbo Air Inlet Pressure 106:Air Intake Press.
07.12 15931 SPN 107: Air Filter 1 Difference Pressure 107:Air Filt1 Diff.Pr
07.13 15932 SPN 108: Barometric Pressure 108:Barometric Press.
07.14 15933 SPN 109: Coolant Pressure 109:Coolant Pressure
07.15 15934 SPN 110: Engine Coolant Temperature 110:Eng.Coolant Temp.
07.16 15935 SPN 111: Coolant Level 111:Coolant Level
07.17 15936 SPN 127: Transmission Oil Pressure 127:Transm.Oil Press.
07.18 15937 SPN 157: Fuel Rail Pressure 157:Inj.Met.Rail1 Pr.
07.19 15938 SPN 171: Ambient Air Temperature 171:Ambient Air Temp.
07.20 15939 SPN 172: Air Intake Temperature 172:Air Intake Temp.
07.21 15940 SPN 173: Exhaust Gas Temperature 173:Exhaust Gas Temp.

Appendix

#
07.22 15941 SPN 174: Fuel Temperature 174:Fuel Temp. 1
07.23 15942 SPN 175: Engine Oil Temperature 1 175:Oil Temperature 1
07.24 15943 SPN 176: Turbo Oil Temperature 176:Turbo Oil Temp.
07.25 15944 SPN 177: Transmission Oil Temperature 177:Transm.Oil Temp.1
07.26 15945 SPN 183: Fuel Rate 183:Fuel Rate
07.27 15946 SPN 190: Engine Speed 190:Engine Speed
07.28 15947 SPN 441: Auxiliary Temperature 1 441:Auxiliary Temp.1
07.29 15948 SPN 442: Auxiliary Temperature 2 442:Auxiliary Temp.2
07.30 15949 SPN 513: Actual Engine Torque 513:Actual Eng.Torque
07.31 15321 SPN 1122: Alternator Bearing 1 Tempera‐ 1122:Altern.Bear.1 T

ture
07.32 15322 SPN 1123: Alternator Bearing 2 Tempera‐ 1123:Altern.Bear.2 T

ture
07.33 15323 SPN 1124: Alternator Winding 1 Tempera‐ 1124:Altern.Wind.1 T

ture

ture

ture
07.36 15326 SPN 1131: Intake Manifold 2 Temperature 1131:Int.Manif.2 Temp
07.39 15329 SPN 1134: Engine Thermostat 1134:Cooler Therm.Op.
07.40 15330 SPN 1135: Engine Oil Temperature 2 1135:Oil Temp. 2
07.41 15331 SPN 1136: Engine ECU Temperature 1136:ECU Temperature
07.42 15332 SPN 1137: Exhaust Gas Port 1 Tempera‐ 1137:Exh.Gas P.1 Temp
ture
ture
ture
ture
ture
ture
ture
ture
ture
07.51 15341 SPN 1146: Exhaust Gas Port 10 Tempera‐ 1146:Exh.Gas P.10 T
ture
ture

Appendix

#
ture
ture
ture
ture
ture
ture
ture
ture
ture
07.62 15352 SPN 1157: Main Bearing 1 Temperature 1157:Main Bear.1 Temp
07.71 15361 SPN 1166: Main Bearing 10 Temperature 1166:Main Bear.10 T
07.72 15362 SPN 1167: Main Bearing 11 Temperature 1167:Main Bear.11 T
07.73 15363 SPN 1172: Turbo 1 Compressor Inlet Tem‐ 1172:Tb1 Compr.Int.T
perature
perature
perature
perature
07.77 15367 SPN 1176: Turbo 1 Compressor Inlet pres‐ 1176:Tb1 Compr.Int.Pr
sure
sure
sure
sure
07.81 15371 SPN 1180: Turbo 1 Inlet Temperature 1180:Turbo1 Int.Temp

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM > Group 08: External Analog ...

#
07.85 15375 SPN 1184: Turbo 1 Outlet Temperature 1184:Turbo1 Outl.Temp
07.89 15379 SPN 1203: Engine Auxiliary Coolant Pres‐ 1203:Aux.Coolant Pr.
sure
07.90 15380 SPN 1208: Pre-Filter Oil Pressure 1208:Pre-filt.Oil Pr.
07.91 15381 SPN 1212: Engine Auxiliary Coolant Tem‐ 1212:Aux.Coolant Temp
perature
07.92 15382 SPN 1382: Fuel Filter Difference Pressure 1382:Fuel Filt.DiffPr
07.93 15383 SPN 1800: Battery 1 Temperature 1800:Battery 1 Temp.
07.94 15384 SPN 1801: Battery 2 Temperature 1801:Battery 2 Temp.
07.97 15387 SPN 2433: Right Exhaust Gas Tempera‐ 2433:Right Exh.Gas T
ture
07.98 15388 SPN 2434: Left Exhaust Gas Temperature 2434:Left Exh.Gas T
07.99 15389 SPN 2629: Turbo 1 Compressor Outlet 2629:Tb1 Compr.Outl.T

Temperature
9.4.1.7 Group 08: External Analog Inputs

#
08.01 15950 External Analog input 1 Ext. analog input 1

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM > Group 10: Internal Values

#
9.4.1.8 Group 09: J1939 Values 2

#
09.01 12001 3644: Engine Derate Request 3644:Derate Request
09.02 12002 158: Keyswitch Battery Potential 158:Keysw.Batt.Pot.
09.03 12003 4151:Exhaust Gas Temp. average 4151:Exh.Gas T Avr.
09.04 12004 4153:Exhaust Gas Temp.average Bank 1 4153:Exh.Gas T Avr.B1
09.05 12005 4152:Exhaust Gas Temp.average Bank 2 4152:Exh.Gas T Avr.B2
09.06 12006 ECU sequencer analog output 1 ECU seq. A_OUT_1
09.07 12007 ECU sequencer analog output 2 ECU seq. A_OUT_2
09.08 12008 SPN 1761 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust 1761:Aft1Exh.Tank1Lev

Fluid Tank 1 Level
09.09 12009 SPN 3031 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust 3031:Aft1 Exh.Tank1 T

Fluid Tank 1 Temperature
09.10 12010 SPN 4367 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust 4367:Aft1Exh.Tank2Lev

Fluid Tank 2 Level
09.11 12011 SPN 4368 Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust 4368:Aft1Exh.Tank2 T

Fluid Tank 2 Temp
09.12 12012 SPN 250 Engine Total Fuel Used 250: Total fuel used
09.13 12013 SPN 247 Total Engine hours 247: Total Eng. hours
09.14 12014 SPN 96 Fuel level 1 96: Fuel Level 1
09.15 12015 SPN 96 Fuel level 2 96: Fuel Level 1
09.16 12020 SPN 3719: DPF 1 Soot load 3719: DPF 1 Soot load
09.17 12021 SPN 3720: DPF 1 Ash load 3720: DPF 1 Ash load
09.18 12036 SPN 3251: DPF Diff. P 3251: DPF Diff. P
9.4.1.9 Group 10: Internal Values

Input #
10.01 9178 Zero ZERO always 0
10.02 9179 One ONE always 1
10.03 free
10.04 15703 Battery voltage Battery voltage [%] Percentage value related on Battery
Voltage 24V.
10.05 free

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM > Group 10: Internal Values

Input #
10.06 15705 Calculated ground current Calc.ground curr.[%] Calculated Percentage value related
on Rated Ground Current
10.07 15706 Direct measured ground current Meas.ground curr.[%] Measured percentage value related
on Rated Ground Current
10.08 5570 Free PID 1 analog output (PID1 bias) AM PID1 bias
10.11 15710 Active nominal power in system System nominal P [%] Percentage value related on System
rated active power
10.12 15711 Total real power in system System real P [%] Percentage value related on System
rated active power
10.13 15712 Reserve real power in system Syst.res.real P [%] Percentage value related on System
rated active power
10.54 9855 Battery voltage Battery voltage [V] Voltage format
10.55 free
10.56 9856 Calculated ground current Calc.ground curr.[A] Current format
10.57 9857 Direct measured ground current Meas.ground curr.[A] Current format
10.61 9858 Active nominal power in system System nominal P [W] Power format
10.62 9859 Total real power in system System real P [W] Power format
10.63 9860 Reserve real power in system Syst.res.real P [W] Power format
10.64 15713 Active power LS-5 Act. power LS5 [W] Power format
10.65 15714 Reactive power LS-5 React. power LS5 [var] Reactive Power Format
10.66 15722 Total reactive power in system Syst.react.pwr.[var] Reactive Power Format
10.67 15828 Syst. A pwr. LS5 Syst. A pwr. LS5 [kW] Note: Usable in dedicated LS5 modes:
GCB/L-MCB, GCB/GGB/L-MCB,
10.68 15829 Syst.A pwr.LS5 Syst.A pwr.LS5 [kvar] GCB/L-GGBMCB, GCB/L-GGB/L-
MCB. The value comes from the
mains LS5 (Node-ID33) connected
with system A on mains.
10.70 15719 LS-5 frequency L-L LS-5 freq. L-L [Hz] Frequency format
10.71 15720 LS-5 voltage L-L LS-5 volt.L-L [V] Voltage format
10.72 15721 LS-5 voltage L-N LS-5 volt.L-N [V] Voltage format
10.73 15724 Average load 1 Average load 1 [kW]
10.78 15729 Average load sum Average load sum [kW]
10.79 11988 10.79 RTC Year RTC Year
10.80 11989 10.80 RTC Month RTC Month
10.81 11990 10.81 RTC Day RTC Day
10.82 11991 10.82 RTC Hour RTC Hour
10.83 11992 10.83 RTC Minute RTC Minute

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM > Groups 12 Free

Input #
10.84 11993 10.84 RTC Second RTC Second
10.85 11985 10.85 RTC Weekday RTC Weekday (Definition: 1 = Sunday )
9.4.1.10 Group 11: Engine Values

Input #
11.01 15700 Engine speed Engine speed [%] Percentage value related on Engine
rated Speed.
11.02 15701 Biasing Volt/Preact Voltage bias [%]
11.03 15702 Biasing Freq/Pact Speed bias [%]
11.04 15704 Analog input D+ Analog input D+ [%] Percentage value related on Battery
Voltage 24V.
11.51 9861 Engine speed Engine speed [rpm] Speed Format
11.54 9862 Analog input D+ Analog input D+ [V] Voltage Format
11.55 15715 Engine operating hours Eng.oper.hours [h] Hour Format
11.56 15716 Average Cylinder temp. bank 1 Cyl.temp.bank 1 [°C] Temperature Format
11.57 15717 Average Cylinder temp. bank 2 Cyl.temp.bank 2 [°C] Temperature Format
11.58 15723 Period of use Period of use hours Hour Format
11.59 11566 Cooldown time Cooldown time [s] Seconds format. Remaining time only!
11.60 11567 Preglow time Preglow time [s] Seconds format. Remaining time only!
11.61 11568 Eng. monit. delay Eng. monit. delay [s] Seconds format. Remaining time only!
11.62 11569 Auxil.serv.prerun Auxil.serv.prerun [s] Seconds format. Remaining time only!
11.63 11570 Auxil.serv.postr. Auxil.serv.postr.[s] Seconds format. Remaining time only!
11.64 11572 Stop engine Stop engine [s] Seconds format. Remaining time only!
11.66 11593 Number of starts Number
9.4.1.11 Groups 12 Free
Ideas to enhance the functionality and/or usability

of our devices are welcome!
Please see contact info at the rear page.

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM > Groups 15 .. 20: Free
9.4.1.12 Group 13: Free Constants

Input #
13.01 15551 13.01 Free constant 1 Free constant 1
9.4.1.13 Group 14: Controller Values

Input #
14.01 15842 Excitation AVR [%] Excitation AVR [%]
14.02 15843 Voltage set point V(f) [%] Volt. setp. V(f) [%]
14.52 15844 Volt. setp. V(f) [V] Volt. setp. V(f) [V]
9.4.1.14 Groups 15 .. 20: Free


Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM > Group 24: Free Analog Valu...
9.4.1.15 Group 21: CAN1 Receive

#
21.01 9886 CAN1 RPDO1.1 CAN1 RPDO1.1
21.02 9887 CAN1 RPDO1.2 CAN1 RPDO1.2
21.03 9888 CAN1 RPDO1.3 CAN1 RPDO1.3
21.04 9889 CAN1 RPDO1.4 CAN1 RPDO1.4
21.05 9890 CAN1 RPDO2.1 CAN1 RPDO2.1
21.06 9891 CAN1 RPDO2.2 CAN1 RPDO2.2
21.07 9892 CAN1 RPDO2.3 CAN1 RPDO2.3
21.08 9893 CAN1 RPDO2.4 CAN1 RPDO2.4
21.09 9894 CAN1 RPDO3.1 CAN1 RPDO3.1
21.10 9895 CAN1 RPDO3.2 CAN1 RPDO3.2
21.11 9896 CAN1 RPDO3.3 CAN1 RPDO3.3
21.12 9897 CAN1 RPDO3.4 CAN1 RPDO3.4
21.13 9898 CAN1 RPDO4.1 CAN1 RPDO4.1
21.14 9899 CAN1 RPDO4.2 CAN1 RPDO4.2
21.15 9900 CAN1 RPDO4.3 CAN1 RPDO4.3
21.16 9901 CAN1 RPDO4.4 CAN1 RPDO4.4
21.17 9902 CAN1 RPDO5.1 CAN1 RPDO5.1
21.18 9903 CAN1 RPDO5.2 CAN1 RPDO5.2
21.19 9904 CAN1 RPDO5.3 CAN1 RPDO5.3
21.20 9927 CAN1 RPDO5.4 CAN1 RPDO5.4
9.4.1.16 Group 21: Free

9.4.1.17 Group 24: Free Analog Values

#
24.01 587 Free analog value 1 Free analog value 1
24.02 588 Free analog value 2 Free analog value 2

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM > Group 81: Results 1
9.4.1.18 Groups 25 .. 79: Free

9.4.1.19 Group 80: Reserved - don't use
9.4.1.20 Group 81: Results 1

#
81.01 9308 Preglow criterion AM Preglow criterion
81.02 9309 Engine Warm-up criterion AM Warm-up criterion
81.03 9312 Frequency setpoint 1 source [Hz] AM Frequency SP1[Hz]
81.04 9314 Frequency setpoint 2 source [Hz] AM Frequency SP2[Hz]
81.05 9316 Active power setpoint 1 source [kW] AM ActPower SP1 [kW]
81.09 9325 Voltage setpoint 1 source [V] AM Voltage SP1 [V]
81.10 9327 Voltage setpoint 2 source [V] AM Voltage SP2 [V]
81.11 9386 PF/var setpoint 1 source [-/var] AM PF/var SP1[-/var]
81.12 9388 PF/var setpoint 2 source [-/var] AM PF/var SP2[-/var]
81.13 5583 PID 1 control setpoint AM PID1 setpoint
81.14 5596 PID 1 control actual value AM PID1 actual value
81.19 9390 External measured mains active power AM Ext.mains act.pwr.
81.20 9392 External measured mains reactive power AM Ext.mains RPower
81.21 9394 Free derating source AM Derating source
81.22 9396 ECU sequencer analog input 1 AM ECU seq.A_IN_1
81.23 9398 ECU sequencer analog input 2 AM ECU seq.A_IN_2
81.24 9592 AM Engine speed AM Engine speed
81.25 9594 AM Engine oil pressure AM Engine oil press.
81.26 9596 AM Engine hours AM Engine hours

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM > Group 82: Results 2

#
81.27 9598 AM Engine tank level AM Engine fuel level
81.28 9601 AM Engine battery voltage AM Engine batt.volt.
81.29 9611 AM Engine coolant water temperature AM Engine coolant T
81.30 9621 AM Consumer load AM Consumer load [kW]
81.31 5826 AM Reference VQ0 AM Reference VQ0
81.32 6909 AM Q/P ref.offset AM Q/P ref.offset
9.4.1.21 Group 82: Results 2

#
82.01 9250 Flexible Limit 1 data source AM FlexLim 1 source

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM > Group 90: 'Internal'/Fixed...

#
82.27 9276 Flexible Limit 27 data source AM FlexLim 27source
9.4.1.22 Groups 83..89: Reserved - don't use
9.4.1.23 Group 90: 'Internal'/Fixed Values 0

Input #
90.01 7693 Screen 1 row 1 AM Cust. screen 1.1 Customer defined screen
90.02 7698 Screen 1 row 2 AM Cust.screen 1.2 Customer defined screen

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Data Sources AM > Group 93: Analog Outputs 1

Input #
9.4.1.24 Group 91: 'Internal'/Fixed Values 1

#
91.01 9642 Internal Value 1 AM Internal value 1
9.4.1.25 Group 92: Reserved - don't use
9.4.1.26 Group 93: Analog Outputs 1

Output #
93.01 9705 Analog output 1 data source AM Data source AO1
93.02 9707 Analog output 2 data source AM Data source AO2
93.03 9708 AM Data source AO3 AM Data source AO3
93.21 9717 AM Data source external AO1 AM Data s. ext. AO1

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Reference Values > Generator/Mains rated acti...

Output #
9.4.1.27 Groups 94..99: Reserved - don't use
9.4.2 Reference Values

9.4.2.1 Generator Rated Voltage
Generator voltage values
(Wye and Delta and average values)
User defined max. output value = 100% means, that the 100%
refer to the generator rated voltage. If parameter “Source value at
maximal output” is set to “+100.00%” this will result in that the
Analog output delivers its maximum output value if for example
400V Phase-phase are the nominal value and 400V are measured.
If only 200 V are measured this will result in an analog output value
of 50% end scale.
9.4.2.2 Mains Rated Voltage

Mains voltage values
(Wye, Delta, Average, and dragged values)
refer to the mains rated voltage. If parameter “Source value at
Analog output delivers its maximum output value if for example
400V are the nominal value and 400V are measured. If only 200 V
are measured this will result in an analog output value of 50% end
scale.
9.4.2.3 Nominal Frequency

Generator, Mains,Busbar1,Busbar2 frequency values
refer to the nominal frequency. If parameter “Source value at max‐
imal output” is set to “+100.00%” this will result in that the Analog
output delivers its maximum output value if a for example 50Hz are
the nominal value and 50V are measured.
9.4.2.4 Generator/Mains rated active/reactive Power

Generator and Mains active/ reactive/ apparent power values

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Reference Values > Nominal Speed
refer to the rated active power value. If parameter “Source value at
Analog output delivers its maximum output value if a for example
1000kW are the nominal value and 1000kW are measured. If only
200kW are measured this will result in an Analog output value of
20% end scale.
9.4.2.5 Generator/Mains Power Factor

Mains and Generator Power factors
User defined max. output value = 100% means, that 50% refers to
power factor 1.00.
If the power factor moves to lagging (inductive) the output goes to
100%. If the power factor goes to leading (capacitive), the output
goes to 0%.
Examples:
0,05% = -0,001(capacitive)
99,95% = 0,001(inductive)
100% = 0% = cosphi 0
9.4.2.6 Generator Rated Current

Generator current values
(Wye,Delta,Average and dragged values)
refer to the rated generator current. If parameter “Source value at
1000A are the nominal value and 1000A are measured. If only
200A are measured this will result in an Analog output value of
20% end scale.
9.4.2.7 Mains rated Current

Mains current values
(Wye,Delta,Average and dragged values)
refer to the rated mains current. If parameter “Source value at max‐
output delivers its maximum output value if a for example 1000A
are the nominal value and 1000A are measured. If only 200A are
measured this will result in an Analog output value of 20% end
scale.
9.4.2.8 Nominal Speed

Pickup speed

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Reference Values > Display Value Format
refer to the parametrized nominal speed. If parameter “Source
value at maximal output” is set to “+100.00%” this will result in that
the Analog output delivers its maximum output value if a for
example 1500 RPM are the nominal value and 1500 RPM are
measured. If only 750 RPM are measured this will result in an
Analog output value of 50% end scale.
9.4.2.9 Battery Voltage

Battery voltage and Auxiliary excitation
refer to a voltage of 24.0 Volts . If parameter “Source value at max‐
output delivers its maximum output value if a for example 24.0
Volts are the nominal value and 24.0 Volts are measured. If only
12.0 Volts are measured this will result in an Analog output value
of 50% end scale.
9.4.2.10 Fixed Value 10000

Analog inputs, GAP values
refer to a fixed value of 10000. If parameter “Source value at max‐
output delivers its maximum output value if a for example “10000”
is delivered by GAP.
9.4.2.11 Busbar 1 Rated Voltage

Busbar 1 voltages ( delta values)
refer to the nominal busbar 1 voltage. If parameter “Source value
at maximal output” is set to “+100.00%” this will result in that the
400V are the nominal value and 400V are measured.
9.4.2.12 Display Value Format

The analog input values refer to the display value format (refer to
parameter 1035 Ä p. 217/Ä p. 645).
Delimiters like decimal points or commas are ignored. If the display
value format is 0.01 bar for example, a value of 5 bar corresponds
with 00500.

Appendix
AnalogManager Reference > Factory Settings
Analog output example n An analog input is configured to VDO 120 °C characteristic.

n The source value at maximum output is configured to 00100
(i.e. 100 °C).
n The source value at minimum output is configured to 00020
(i.e. 20 °C).
n The analog output range is configured to 0 to 20 mA.
n If a value of 20 °C (or below) is measured, the analog output
issues its lower limit (i.e. 0 mA).
n If a value of 100 °C (or above) is measured, the analog
output issues its upper limit (i.e. 20 mA).
n If a value of 60 °C is measured, the analog output issues
50% of its upper limit (i.e. 10 mA).
n If a value of 84 °C is measured, the analog output issues
80% of its upper limit (i.e. 16 mA).
Flexible limit example n An analog input is configured to VDO 10 bar characteristic.

n If the flexible limit is to be configured to 5.23 bar, it must be
entered as 00523.
See the fixed display value formats below:
Analog input type Display value Example value Example format

format
VDO 5 bar 0.01 bar 5.0 bar 500
VDO 10 bar 0.01 bar 6.6 bar 660
VDO 120 °C 1 °C 69 °C 69
VDO 150 °C 1 °C 73 °C 73
Pt100 1 °C 103 °C 103
Table 173: Display value format
9.4.3 Factory Settings

AnalogManager's default settings
ID Name Operator Default setting/value
5518 AM Frequency SP1[Hz] Analog1 ("A1 =") 05.51 Internal f setp1 [Hz]
Analog2 ("A2 =") 10.01 ZERO
Constant1 ("C1 =") 0
Function Type ("Type =") Pass through
Logic1 "L1" 02.01 LM FALSE
Operators
Operators-Unary1 —————
5519 AM Frequency SP2[Hz] Analog1 ("A1 =") 05.52 Internal f setp2 [Hz]

Appendix
Operators
15147 AM Derating source Analog1 ("A1 =") 06.01 Analog input 1
Analog2 ("A2 =") 06.01 Analog input 1
Operators
5539 AM ActPower SP1 [kW] Analog1 ("A1 =") 05.54 Internal P setp1 [kW]
Operators
Operators
5606 AM ActPower SP3 [kW] Analog1 ("A1 =") 05.80 Internal P setp3 [W]
Operators

Appendix
Operators
5538 AM Warm-up criterion Analog1 ("A1 =") 10.01 ZERO
Operators
5638 AM PF/var SP1[-/kvar] Analog1 ("A1 =") 05.10 Intern. PF setp1 [%]
Operators
5639 AM PF/var SP2[-/kvar] Analog1 ("A1 =") 05.11 Intern. PF setp2 [%]
Operators
3346 AM Preglow criterion Analog1 ("A1 =") 10.01 ZERO

Appendix
Operators
5618 AM Voltage SP1 [V] Analog1 ("A1 =") 05.57 Internal V setp1 [V]
Operators
5619 AM Voltage SP2 [V] Analog1 ("A1 =") 05.58 Internal V setp2 [V]
Operators
5577 AM PID1 setpoint Analog1 ("A1 =") 05.75 Int. PID1 setpoint
Operators
5578 AM PID1 actual value Analog1 ("A1 =") 10.01 ZERO
Operators

Appendix
Operators
Operators
Operators
Operators
3346 AM Preglow criterion Analog1 ("A1 =") 10.01 ZERO

Appendix
Operators
5200 AM Data source AO1 Analog1 ("A1 =") 11.03 Speed bias [%]
Operators
5214 AM Data source AO2 Analog1 ("A1 =") 11.02 Voltage bias [%]
Operators
10237 AM Data source ext.AO1 Analog1 ("A1 =") 11.03 Speed bias [%]
Operators
Operators

Appendix
Operators 5
Operators 5
15162 AM ECU seq.A_IN_1 Analog1 ("A1 =") 10.01 ZERO
Operators 5
15163 AM ECU seq.A_IN_2 Analog1 ("A1 =") 10.01 ZERO
Operators 5
9640 AM Internal value 1 Analog1 ("A1 =") 10.01 ZERO

9644 AM Internal value 2 Analog2 ("A2 =") 10.01 ZERO
9648 AM Internal value 3 Constant1 ("C1 =") 0
9652 AM Internal value 4

Appendix

9668 AM Internal value 8 Operators 5
5780 AM Ext.mains act.pwr Analog1 ("A1 =") 06.01 Analog input 1
Operators 5
5794 AM Ext.mains RPower Analog1 ("A1 =") 06.02 Analog input 2
Operators 5
4206 AM FlexLim 1 source Analog1 ("A1 =") 10.01 ZERO

4240 AM FlexLim 3 source Constant1 ("C1 =") 0
4257 AM FlexLim 4 source
Operators 5

6026 AM FlexLim 10 source Constant1 ("C1 =") 0
6026 + (N x AM FlexLim 10 + N source ((N = 1,
(+10)) 2, ...)) Function Type ("Type =") Pass through
... ... Logic1 "L1" 02.01 LM FALSE
6326 AM FlexLim 40 source Logic2 "L2" 02.01 LM FALSE
Operators 5

Appendix
7690 AM Customer screen 1.1 Analog1 ("A1 =") 10.01 ZERO

7695 AM Customer screen 1.2 Analog2 ("A2 =") 10.01 ZERO
7700 AM Customer screen 1.3 Constant1 ("C1 =") 0
7705 AM Customer screen 1.4
Operators —————
7730 AM Customer screen 2.9 Operators-Unary1 —————
7735 AM Customer screen 2.1 Operators-Unary2

8891 AM Engine speed Analog1 ("A1 =") 11.51 Engine speed [rpm]
Analog2 ("A2 =") 10.02 ONE
Operators 5
8893 AM Engine oil pressure Analog1 ("A1 =") 07.07 100:Engine Oil Press.
Analog2 ("A2 =") 10.02 ONE
Operators 5
8895 AM Engine hours Analog1 ("A1 =") 11.55 Eng.oper.hours [h]
Analog2 ("A2 =") 10.02 ONE

Appendix
Operators 5
8897 AM Engine fuel level Analog1 ("A1 =") 06.03 Analog input 3
Analog2 ("A2 =") 10.02 ONE
Operators 5
8899 AM Engine batt.voltage Analog1 ("A1 =") 10.54 Battery voltage [V]
Analog2 ("A2 =") 10.02 ONE
Operators 5
8901 AM Engine coolant temp. Analog1 ("A1 =") 07.15 110:Eng.Coolant Temp.
Analog2 ("A2 =") 10.02 ONE
Operators 5
9059 AM Consumer load [kW] Analog1 ("A1 =") 02.74 Mains act.power [W]
Analog2 ("A2 =") 10.02 ONE
Constant1 ("C1 =") -0.001
Function Type ("Type =") Multiply type C
Operators 5
Table 174: Factory settings: AnalogManager

Appendix
Event And Alarm Reference > Alarm Classes
9.5 Event And Alarm Reference

9.5.1 Alarm Classes
The control functions are structured in the following

alarm classes:
Alarm class Visible in the display LED "Alarm" Relay "Command: Shut-down engine Engine blocked until
open GCB" ack. sequence has
& horn been performed
A Yes No No No No
Warning Alarm This alarm does not interrupt the unit operation. A message output without a centralized alarm occurs:
n Alarm text.
B Yes Yes No No No
Warning Alarm This alarm does not interrupt the unit operation. An output of the centralized alarm occurs and the command
variable 3.05 (horn) is issued.
n Alarm text + flashing LED "Alarm" + Relay centralized alarm (horn).
C Yes Yes Soft unloading Cool down time Yes
Shutdown Alarm With this alarm the GCB is opened and the engine is stopped. Coasting occurs.
n Alarm text + flashing LED "Alarm" + Relay centralized alarm (horn) + GCB open + Coasting + Engine stop.
D Yes Yes Immediately Cool down time Yes
Shutdown Alarm With this alarm the GCB is opened and the engine is stopped. Coasting occurs.
n Alarm text + flashing LED "Alarm" + Relay centralized alarm (horn) + GCB open + Coasting + Engine stop.
E Yes Yes Soft unloading Immediately Yes
Shutdown Alarm With this alarm the GCB is opened immediately and the engine is stopped.
n Alarm text + flashing LED "Alarm" + Relay centralized alarm (horn) + GCB open + Engine stop.
F Yes Yes Immediately Immediately Yes
Shutdown Alarm With this alarm the GCB is opened immediately and the engine is stopped.
n Alarm text + flashing LED "Alarm" + Relay centralized alarm (horn) + GCB open + Engine stop.
Control No No No No No
Control Signal This signal issues a control command only. It may be assigned to a discrete input for example to get a control
signal, which may be used in the LogicsManager. No alarm message and no entry in the alarm list or the event
history will be issued. This signal is always self-acknowledging, but considers a delay time and may also be
configured with an engine delay.
CAUTION!
If an alarm of class C, D, or E is present and the
GCB cannot be opened, the engine will not be
stopped. This can only be achieved by enabling
GCB monitoring (parameter 2600 Ä p. 456/
Ä p. 457) with the alarm class configured to "F"
If an alarm has been configured with a shutdown alarm that has

been enabled to self-acknowledge, and has been configured as
engine delayed the following scenario may happen:

Appendix
Event And Alarm Reference > Status Messages
n The alarm shuts down the engine because of its alarm class.
n Due to the engine stopping, all engine delayed alarms are
ignored.
n The alarm class is acknowledged automatically.
n The alarm will self-acknowledge and clear the fault message
that shut the engine down.
This prevents the fault from being analyzed. After a short
delay, the engine will restart.
n After the engine monitoring delay expires, the fault that origi‐
nally shut down the engine will do so again.
This cycle will continue to repeat until corrected.
9.5.2 Conversion Factors

Temperature °C → °F T [°F] = (T [°C] x 1.8) + 32
°F → °C T [°C] = (T [°F] – 32) / 1.8
Pressure bar → psi P [psi] = P [bar] x 14.503
psi → bar P [bar] = P [psi] / 14.503
9.5.3 Status Messages

Status messages on main screen In alphabetical order:
Message text Meaning

ID
AUTO mode ready Automatic mode ready for start

13253 The unit is waiting for a start signal in Automatic operating mode and no alarm of class C, D, E, or F is
present.
Aux. serv. postrun Postrun of the auxiliary operation is active

13200 After the engine has stopped, auxiliary operations are enabled. These operations ensure that required
equipment which is necessary for the operation of the engine continues to run (i.e. electric cooling fan).
Aux. services prerun Prerun of the auxiliary operation is active

13201 Before the engine is started the signal "aux. services prerun" is enabled, so that all required equipment
which is necessary for the operation of the engine can be initialized, started or switched.
Cool down Coasting of the engine is active

13204 The no load operation is performed prior to the stopping of the engine. The no load operation is utilized to
cool the engine.
Crank protect Starter protection

13214 To prevent the starter from being damaged by an engine that is rotating, a crank protection delay is active
to ensure that the engine has time to stop rotating.
Critical mode Critical mode (Sprinkler operation) is active

13202 The sprinkler operation is activated.
Derating active Derating active

13281 As long as the derating function is activated, this text message is shown (parameter 15143 Ä p. 328).
Emergency/Critical Emergency operation during active critical operation

13215 Both Critical mode and Emergency run are activated.

Appendix

ID
Emergency run Emergency power operation

13211 After the control unit detects that a mains fault has occurred, the engine is started after the emergency
delay timer expires. The MCB is opened, the GCB is closed, and the generator set assumes the load. If
the generator set is already running, operations continue until the emergency power operation conditions
no longer exist. If the mains return, the mains settling timer becomes active first (see below).
GCB dead bus close Dead bus closing of the GCB to

13209 The GCB is closed onto the de-energized busbar. The measured busbar voltage is below the configured
dead bus detection limit.
GCB ￫ MCB Delay GCB – MCB delay time is active

13261 If the breaker logic is configured to Open Transition and a transfer from generator to mains supply is initi‐
ated, the transfer time delay will start after the replay "GCB is open" is received. The MCB close command
will be issued after the transfer time has expired.
GCB open The GCB is being opened to

13255 A GCB open command has been issued.
Gen. stable time Generator stable time is active

13250 If the engine monitoring delay timer has expired, the generator settling time starts. This permits for an
additional delay time before the breaker is closed in order to ensure that none of the engine delayed
watchdogs trips.
GGB dead bus close Dead bus closing of the GGB

13270 The GGB is closed when the busbar is inside the operating range and the load busbar is dead.
GGB ￫ MCB Delay GGB – MCB delay time is active

13272 If the breaker logic is configured to Open Transition and a transfer from busbar to mains supply is initiated,
the transfer time delay will start after the replay "GGB is open" is received. The MCB close command will
be issued after the transfer time has expired.
GGB open The GGB is being opened

13268 A GGB open command has been issued.
Idle run active The control is in idle mode

13216 No undervoltage, underfrequency, and underspeed monitoring is performed in idle mode. The flexible
limits 33 through 40 are not monitored.
Ignition Enable the ignition (Gas engine)

13213 After the purging operation and before the fuel solenoids opened.
In operation The genset is in regular operation

13251 The genset is in regular operation and is ready for supplying load.
Loading Generator The generator power will be increased to the setpoint

13258 The generator power will be increased to the configured setpoint with a rate defined by the power control
setpoint ramp.
Mains settling Mains settling time is active

13205 When the control unit detects that the mains fault is no longer present and power has been restored, the
mains settling timer begins counting down. If the mains are stable after the expiration of the timer (the
mains voltage has not fallen below or risen over the configured monitoring limits), the load is transferred
from the generator supply to the mains supply.
MCB dead bus close Dead bus closing of the MCB

13210 The MCB is closed onto the de-energized busbar. The measured busbar voltage is below the configured
dead bus detection limit.
MCB ￫ GCB Delay MCB – GCB delay time is active

13262 If the breaker logic is configured to Open Transition and a transfer from mains to generator supply is initi‐
ated, the transfer time delay will start after the reply "MCB is open" is received. The GCB close command
MCB ￫ GGB Delay MCB – GGB delay time is active

13273 If the breaker logic is configured to Open Transition and a transfer from mains to generator supply is initi‐
ated, the transfer time delay will start after the reply "MCB is open" is received. The GGB close command

Appendix

ID
MCB open The MCB is being opened

13257 An MCB open command has been issued.
P(V) derating P(V) derating is active

13309
Power limited prerun Active power limited prerun is active

13252 The real power setpoint is limited to the warm up power limit for the configured warm up time.
Preglow Preglow of the engine is active (Diesel engine)

13208 The diesel engine is preheated prior to starting.
Ramp to rated Engine is accelerating to rated speed

13254 After firing speed has been exceeded, the engine monitoring delay timer starts. This message is displayed
during this period.
Ready for Operation Ready for Operation OFF

12580 The discrete output R01 is energized by default to monitor controlled/uncontrolled operation of the device
itself.
Run-up Synchron. Run-up Synchronization to

13271 The run-up synchronization mode is active (parameter 3435).
Start Start engine is active

13206 After the "Prerun auxiliary operation" expires, the engine is started according to the configured start logic
(Diesel or gas engine). When the start sequence is active, various relays are enabled and representative
signals are passed via the CAN bus to a secondary engine control.
Start – Pause Start pause while starting the engine is active

13207 If the engine could not be started, the controller will pause for the configured time prior to attempting to
issuing a start command again.
Start w/o Load Start without load is active

13263 A regular engine start is performed. The GCB operation is blocked to prevent a change from mains to gen‐
erator supply.
Stop engine Engine will be stopped

13203 The engine will be stopped. The engine stop delay will be started when ignition speed has been fallen
below. A restart is only possible if the engine stop delay has been expired.
Synch. CHECK Synchronization mode CHECK

13266 If the synchronization mode is set to “CHECK” (parameter 5728 Ä p. 264) the screen message “Synch.
CHECK” is blinking on the main screen.
Synch. OFF Synchronization mode OFF

13267 If the synchronization mode is set to “OFF” (parameter 5728 Ä p. 264) the screen message “Synch. OFF”
is blinking on the main screen.
Synch. PERMISSIVE Synchronization mode PERMISSIVE

13265 If the synchronization mode is set to “PERMISSIVE” (parameter 5728 Ä p. 264) the screen message
“Synch. PERMISSIVE” is blinking on the main screen.
Synchronization GCB The GCB will be synchronized

13259 The control tries to synchronize the GCB.
Synchronization GGB The GGB will be synchronized

13269 The control tries to synchronize the GGB.
Synchronization LS5 The LS-5 will be synchronized

13283 The control tries to synchronize the LS-5
Synchronization MCB The MCB will be synchronized

13260 The control tries to synchronize the MCB.

Appendix
Event And Alarm Reference > Event History

ID
Turning Purging operation is active (Gas engine)

13212 Before the fuel solenoid opens and the ignition of the gas engine is energized the remaining fuel, that may
be present in the combustion chamber, will be removed by a purging operation. The starter turns the
engine without enabling the ignition for a specified time to complete the purging operation. After the
purging process, the ignition is energized.
Unloading Generator The generator power will be decreased

13256 The generator power will be decreased after a stop command has been issued with a rate defined by the
power control setpoint ramp before the GCB will be opened.
Unloading LS5 Unloading the LS-5

13282 The LS-5 performs a power reduction to make sure that there is little power in the system before opening
the breaker .
Unloading mains The mains power will be decreased

13264 The real power setpoint is increased with the configured rate after synchronizing the generator in inter‐
change transition mode. After the mains have been unloaded, the MCB will be opened.
Uprating active Uprating active

13287 As long as the uprating function is activated, this text message is shown (Please refer to Ä Chapter
4.4.4.5.4 “Derating And Uprating Of Power ” on page 321 for details).
Status messages to be displayed on In alphabetical order:

special screens only

ID
Add-off delay Load dependent start/stop (LDSS) add-off delay time

13275 Shows the current state of LDSS in the sequencing screen. A countdown of the configured add-off delay
time will be displayed.
Add-on delay Load dependent start/stop (LDSS) add-on delay time

13274 Shows the current state of LDSS in the sequencing screen. A countdown of the configured add-on delay
Minimum run time Load dependent start/stop (LDSS) minimum run time
13276 Shows the current state of LDSS in the sequencing screen. A countdown of the configured minimum run
9.5.4 Event History

General notes The event history is a 1000 entry FIFO (First In/First Out) memory
for logging alarm events and operation states of the unit. As new
event messages are entered into the history, the oldest messages
are deleted once 1000 events have occurred.
For additional information refer to Ä Chapter 5 “Operation”
on page 569.

Appendix
Event And Alarm Reference > Event History > Event Messages
Resetting event history

Make sure to have set the appropriate code level
to reset the event history.
If you have not entered the correct password for
the required code level, the parameters for reset‐
ting the event history are not available (for addi‐
tional information refer to Ä Chapter 4.3.4.1 “Pass‐
word System - Parameter Overview” on page 178).
Three ways to reset Event History

n ToolKit: Click the “Clear all ” button at “STATUS MENU
è Diagnostic: Event History”.
(Read Event History at the same page)
n HMI/display: Go to “Parameter
è Configure system management è Factory default settings”
and select [Yes], then [Clear eventlog] appears. Select [Yes]
for [Clear event log]
(To read Event History go to: “Next Page è Diagnostic
è Event History”)
n Parameter/remote:Set parameter 1706 Ä p. 717
[Clear eventlog] ) to "TRUE" (1)
n The complete event history is now being cleared
9.5.4.1 Event Messages

Message text Meaning ID
AUTO mode The unit is switched to AUTO mode 14353
Close command GCB Control commands GCB close 14719
Close command Control commands GGB close 14723

GGB
Close command Control commands MCB close 14721

MCB
Critical mode The critical mode is initiated 14707
Emergency run The emergency run is initiated 14705
Engine idle run The engine is running in idle mode 14762
Engine is running The engine is started 14706
GCB closed The GCB reply signals GCB is closed 14703
GCB opened The GCB reply signals GCB is open 14702
GGB opened The GGB reply signals GGB is open. 14712
GGB closed The GGB reply signals GGB is closed 14717
Gen excitation lim. The limit of the generator's excitation is 13288

exceeded
Mains failure Mains frequency or voltage is not ok 14704
MAN mode The unit is switched to MANUAL mode 14355
MCB closed The MCB reply signals MCB is closed 14701
MCB opened The MCB reply signals MCB is open 14700
Neutral cont. closed Neutral control is closed 1843
Neutral cont. opened Neutral control is opened 1842
Open command GCB Control commands GCB open 14718

Appendix
Event And Alarm Reference > Event History > Alarm Messages
Message text Meaning ID
Close command GCB Control commands GCB close 14719
Open command MCB Control commands MCB open 14720
Open command GGB Control commands GGB open 14722
Close command Control commands GGB close 14723

GGB
Close command Control commands MCB close 14721

MCB
Open command GGB Control commands GGB open 14722
Operation mode The unit is switched to TEST mode 4685

TEST
Power derating act. Power derating is activated 16192
Power uprating act. Power uprating is activated 16193
Start up power Start up power supply 14778
STOP mode The unit is switched to STOP mode 14354
System update System update is ongoing 14763
Test with load Testmode started with load 4684
Test withoud load Testmode started without load 4683
P(V) derating active Power derating with mains voltage is active 16185
9.5.4.2 Alarm Messages
For a detailed description of the monitoring func‐

tions, which trigger the alarm messages, refer to
Ä Chapter 4.5.1 “Configure Generator Monitoring”
on page 367.
In alphabetical order:

ID
Active LS mismatch Active power loadsharing mismatch.

5105 Percentage load value of this device is different to the others.
Amber warning lamp Amber warning lamp, J1939 interface

15126 This watchdogs monitors, whether a specific alarm bit is received from the CAN J1939 interface. This ena‐
bles to configure the control in a way that a reaction is caused by this bit (e.g. warning, shutdown). No
alarm can be indicated if the CAN communication fails.
Bat. overvoltage 1 Battery overvoltage, limit value 1

10007 The battery voltage has exceeded the limit value 1 for battery overvoltage for at least the configured time
and does not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
Bat. overvoltage 2 Battery overvoltage, limit value 2

10008 The battery voltage has exceeded the limit value 2 for battery overvoltage for at least the configured time
Bat. undervoltage 1 Battery undervoltage, limit value 1

10005 The battery voltage has fallen below the limit value 1 for battery undervoltage for at least the configured
time and has not exceeded the value of the hysteresis.

Appendix

ID
Bat. undervoltage 2 Battery undervoltage, limit value 2

10006 The battery voltage has fallen below the limit value 2 for battery undervoltage for at least the configured
Busbar 1 AC wiring AC wiring issue of Busbar voltages

10094 One or more of the busbar voltages are wrong wired (detected by plausibility checking of frequencies).
Busbar v/f not ok Busbar voltage or frequency is not ok

5123 Busbar values are not in the range defined by the operating ranges gen./busbar settings
CANopen Interface 1 Interface alarm CANopen on CAN bus 1

10087 No Receive Process Data Object ( RPDO) is received within the configured time.

10088 No message is received from the external expansion board (Node-ID) within the configured time.

10090 No Receive Process Data Object ( RPDO) is received within the configured time.
Charge alt. low volt Charging alternator voltage low

4056 The charging alternator voltage has fallen below the critical limit for at least the configured time and has
not exceeded the value of the hysteresis (the critical limit is 9 V for 12 V systems and 20 V for 24 V sys‐
tems).
Cylinder temp.lev.1 Cylinder temperature Level 1

14575
Cylinder temp.lev.2 Cylinder temperature Level 2

14576
Cyl.tmp.wire brk. Cylinder temperature monitoring wire is detected as broken

14584
Decoupling GCB <-> Decoupling GCB <->MCB

MCB
During decoupling there was a change over from the preferred breaker to the other.
5147
Eng. stop malfunct. Stop alarm of the engine

2504 The engine failed to stop when given the stop command. When a stop command is issued a timer starts a
countdown. If speed is still detected when this timer expires the controller recognizes an unsuccessful stop
of the engine. An unsuccessful stop of the engine is determined if speed (measured by the generator fre‐
quency, the MPU, or the LogicsManager "ignition speed") is detected within the configured time after the
stop signal has been issued.
Free alarm 1 Free alarm 1 is detected

5165

5171

5177

5183
GCB fail to close GCB failed to close

2603 The easYgen has attempted to close the GCB the configured maximum number of attempts and failed.
Depending on the configuration, the easYgen will continue to attempt to close the GCB as long as the con‐
ditions for closing the GCB are fulfilled.
GCB fail to open GCB failed to open

2604 The easYgen is still receiving the reply "GCB closed" after the GCB open monitoring timer has expired.
GCB failure 50BF GCB failure 50BF

10668 Generator current is measured even if the mains repliy signals GCB open.

Appendix

ID
GCB syn. timeout GCB synchronization time exceeded

3064 The easYgen has failed to synchronize the GCB within the configured synchronization time.
Gen. AC wiring AC wiring issue of Generator voltages

10093 One or more of the generator voltages are wrong wired (detected by plausibility checking of frequencies).
Gen act. pwr mismatch Generator active power mismatch

2924 The deviation between the generator power and the active power setpoint has exceeded the limit for at
least the configured time.
Gen. overcurrent 1 Generator overcurrent, limit value 1

2218 The generator current has exceeded the limit value 1 for the generator overcurrent for at least the config‐
ured time and does not fall below the value of the hysteresis.


Gen. overfrequency 1 Generator overfrequency, limit value 1

1912 The generator frequency has exceeded the limit value 1 for generator overfrequency for at least the config‐
Gen. overfrequency 2 Generator overfrequency, limit value 2

1913 The generator frequency has exceeded the limit value 2 for generator overfrequency for at least the config‐
Gen. overload IOP 1 Generator overload IOP, limit value 1

2314 The generator power has exceeded the limit value 1 for generator overload in islanded operation (MCB is
open) for at least the configured time and does not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
Gen. overload IOP 2 Generator overload IOP, limit value 2

2315 The generator power has exceeded the limit value 2 for generator overload in islanded operation (MCB is
open) for at least the configured time and does not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
Gen. overload MOP 1 Generator overload MOP, limit value 1

2362 The generator power has exceeded the limit value 1 for generator overload in mains parallel operation
(GCB and MCB are closed) for at least the configured time and does not fall below the value of the hyste‐
resis.
Gen. overload MOP 2 Generator overload MOP, limit value 2

2363 The generator power has exceeded the limit value 2 for generator overload in mains parallel operation
(GCB and MCB are closed) for at least the configured time and does not fall below the value of the hyste‐
resis.
Gen. overvoltage 1 Generator overvoltage, limit value 1

2012 The generator voltage has exceeded the limit value 1 for generator overvoltage for at least the configured
time and does not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
Gen. overvoltage 2 Generator overvoltage, limit value 2

2013 The generator voltage has exceeded the limit value 2 for generator overvoltage for at least the configured
Gen. PF lagging 1 Generator overexcited, limit value 1

2337 The power factor limit 1 has been exceeded at the generator towards inductive (i.e. the current is lagging)
for at least the configured time and does not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
Gen. PF lagging 2 Generator overexcited, limit value 2

2338 The power factor limit 2 has been exceeded at the generator towards inductive (i.e. the current is lagging)
for at least the configured time and does not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
Gen. PF leading 1 Generator underexcited, limit value 1

2387 The power factor limit 1 has fallen below at the generator towards capacitive (i.e. the current is leading) for
at least the configured time and does not exceed the value of the hysteresis.

Appendix

ID
Gen. PF leading 2 Generator underexcited, limit value 2

2388 The power factor limit 2 has fallen below at the generator towards capacitive (i.e. the current is leading) for
at least the configured time and does not exceed the value of the hysteresis.
Gen. ph. rot. mismatch Generator rotating field mismatch

3955 The generator rotating field does not correspond with the configured direction.
Gen. rev/red. pwr.1 Generator reverse power, limit value 1 / Generator reduced power, limit value 1
2262 The generator power has exceeded the limit value 1 for generator reverse power / generator reduced
power for at least the configured time and does not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
Gen. rev/red. pwr.2 Generator reverse power, limit value 2 / Generator reduced power, limit value 2
2263 The generator power has exceeded the limit value 2 for generator reverse power / generator reduced
power for at least the configured time and does not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
Gen. underfrequency 1 Generator underfrequency, limit value 1

1962 The generator frequency has fallen below the limit value 1 for generator underfrequency for at least the
configured time and has not exceeded the value of the hysteresis. Additionally, the alarm has not been
acknowledged (unless the "Self acknowledgment" is configured YES).
Gen. underfrequency 2 Generator underfrequency, limit value 2

1963 The generator frequency has fallen below the limit value 2 for generator underfrequency for at least the
configured time and has not exceeded the value of the hysteresis.
Gen. undervoltage 1 Generator undervoltage, limit value 1

2062 The generator voltage has fallen below the limit value 1 for generator undervoltage for at least the config‐
ured time and has not exceeded the value of the hysteresis.
Gen. undervoltage 2 Generator undervoltage, limit value 2

2063 The generator voltage has fallen below the limit value 2 for generator undervoltage for at least the config‐
ured time and has not exceeded the value of the hysteresis.
Gen unloading fault Generator unloading mismatch

3124 The easYgen failed to reduce the generator power below the configured unload limit within the configured
time.
Gen. volt. asymmetry Voltage asymmetry

3907 The generator phase-to-phase voltages have higher differences between each other than the configured
limit value.
GGB fail to close GGB failed to close

3089 The easYgen has attempted to close the GGB the configured maximum number of attempts and failed.
Depending on the configuration, the easYgen will continue to attempt to close the GGB as long as the con‐
ditions for closing the GGB are fulfilled.
GGB fail to open Failed GGB open

3090 The easYgen is still receiving the reply "GGB closed" after the GGB open monitoring timer has expired.
Ground fault 1 Generator ground current, limit value 1

3263 The measured or calculated ground current has exceeded the limit value 1 for the generator ground cur‐
rent for at least the configured time and does not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
Ground fault 2 Generator ground current, limit value 2

3264 The measured or calculated ground current has exceeded the limit value 2 for the generator ground cur‐
rent for at least the configured time and does not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
Inv. time overcurr. Generator inverse time-overcurrent

4038 Current monitoring with tripping time depending on the measured current. The higher the current is the
faster the tripping time according to a defined curve. According to IEC 255 three different characteristics
are available: normal, highly, and extremely inverse.
J1939 dev. 1 timeout J1939 device 1 timeout

10059 Messages from the J1939 device 1 are missing. (CAN2)


Appendix

ID

J1939 ECU timeout J1939 ECU timeout

10058 Messages from the J1939 ECU are missing. (CAN2)
J1939 Emission lamp J1939 Emission lamp

10663 ECU has an Emission/Malfunction alarm
J1939 Protect lamp J1939 Protect lamp

10662 ECU has a protect alarm
Mains AC wiring AC wiring issue of Mains voltages

10095 One or more of the mains voltages are wrong wired (detected by plausibility checking of frequencies).
Mains decoupling Mains decoupling is initiated

3114 One or more monitoring function(s) considered for the mains decoupling functionality has triggered.
Mains df/dt Mains df/dt (ROCOF)

3106 A mains df/dt, which has exceeded the configured limit, has occurred. Triggering this monitoring function
causes the mains decoupling function to trigger.
Mains export power 1 Mains export power, limit value 1

3241 The mains export power has exceeded or fallen below the limit value 1 for mains export power for at least
the configured time and does not fall below or exceed the value of the hysteresis.
Mains export power 2 Mains export power, limit value 2

3242 The mains export power has exceeded or fallen below the limit value 2 for mains export power for at least
Mains import power 1 Mains import power, limit value 1

3217 The mains import power has exceeded or fallen below the limit value 1 for mains import power for at least
Mains import power 2 Mains import power, limit value 2

3218 The mains import power has exceeded or fallen below the limit value 2 for mains import power for at least
Mains overfreq. 1 Mains overfrequency, limit value 1

2862 The mains frequency has exceeded the limit value 1 for mains overfrequency for at least the configured
Mains overfreq. 2 Mains overfrequency, limit value 2

2863 The mains frequency has exceeded the limit value 2 for mains overfrequency for at least the configured
time and does not fall below the value of the hysteresis. Triggering this monitoring function causes the
mains decoupling function to trigger.
Mains overvoltage 1 Mains overvoltage, limit value 1

2962 The mains voltage has exceeded the limit value 1 for mains overvoltage for at least the configured time
Mains overvoltage 2 Mains overvoltage, limit value 2

2963 The mains voltage has exceeded the limit value 2 for mains overvoltage for at least the configured time
and does not fall below the value of the hysteresis. Triggering this monitoring function causes the mains
decoupling function to trigger.
Mains PF lagging 1 Mains overexcited, limit value 1

2985 The power factor limit 1 has been exceeded at the mains interchange point towards inductive (i.e. the cur‐
rent is lagging) for at least the configured time and does not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
Mains PF lagging 2 Mains overexcited, limit value 2

2986 The power factor limit 2 has been exceeded at the mains interchange point towards inductive (i.e. the cur‐
rent is lagging) for at least the configured time and does not fall below the value of the hysteresis.

Appendix

ID
Mains PF leading 1 Mains underexcited, limit value 1

3035 The power factor limit 1 has fallen below at the mains interchange point towards capacitive (i.e. the current
is leading) for at least the configured time and does not exceed the value of the hysteresis.
Mains PF leading 2 Mains underexcited, limit value 2

3036 The power factor limit 1 has fallen below at the mains interchange point towards capacitive (i.e. the current
is leading) for at least the configured time and does not exceed the value of the hysteresis.
Mains phase shift Mains phase shift

3057 A mains phase shift, which has exceeded the configured limit, has occurred. Triggering this monitoring
function causes the mains decoupling function to trigger.
Mains underfreq. 1 Mains underfrequency, limit value 1

2912 The mains frequency has fallen below the limit value 1 for mains underfrequency for at least the configured
Mains underfreq. 2 Mains underfrequency, limit value 2

2913 The mains frequency has fallen below the limit value 2 for mains underfrequency for at least the configured
time and has not exceeded the value of the hysteresis. Triggering this monitoring function causes the
mains decoupling function to trigger.
Mains undervoltage 1 Mains undervoltage, limit value 1

3012 The mains voltage has fallen below the limit value 1 for mains undervoltage for at least the configured time
and has not exceeded the value of the hysteresis.
Mains undervoltage 2 Mains undervoltage, limit value 2

3013 The mains voltage has fallen below the limit value 2 for mains undervoltage for at least the configured time
and has not exceeded the value of the hysteresis. Triggering this monitoring function causes the mains
decoupling function to trigger.
Mains volt. incr. Mains voltage increase

8834 The mains voltage has exceeded for a longer time period the voltage increase criteria.
Maint. days exceeded Maintenance days exceeded

2560 The generator run time has exceeded the configured number of days since the last maintenance period.
Additionally, the alarm has not been acknowledged.
Maint. hrs exceeded Maintenance hours exceeded

2561 The generator run time has exceeded the configured number of operating hours since the last mainte‐
nance period. Additionally, the alarm has not been acknowledged.
MCB fail to close MCB failed to close

2623 The easYgen has attempted to close the MCB the configured maximum number of attempts and failed.
Depending on the configuration, the easYgen will continue to attempt to close the GCB as long as the con‐
ditions for closing the MCB are fulfilled.
MCB fail to open Failed MCB open

2624 The easYgen is still receiving the reply MCB closed” after the MCB open monitoring timer has expired.
MCBfailure 50BF MCBfailure 50BF

10670 There is mains current measured even if the mains reply signals MCB open.
MCB plausibility MCB plausibility

10672 The number of closed MCBs is different to the number of easYgen devices in the same segment.
MCB syn. timeout MCB synchronization time exceeded

3074 The easYgen has failed to synchronize the MCB within the configured synchronization time.
Meas.difference 4105 Measurement difference 4105

5141 There is a difference in the measured mains values between the 4105 devices.
Missing easYgen Missing easYgen

4059 At least one easYgen is missing.
Missing LS5 Missing LS5

4069 At least one LS5 is missing.

Appendix

ID
Missing members 4105 Missing load share members detected

4064 The easYgen has detected that the number of available units for load sharing does not correspond with
the configured number of members.
Mns act. pwr mismatch Mains active power mismatch

2934 The deviation between the import/export power and the active import/export power setpoint has exceeded
the limit for at least the configured time.
Mns. ph. rot. mismatch Mains rotating field mismatch

3975 The mains rotating field does not correspond with the configured direction.
N-cont. reply mism. Neutral contactor reply mismatch

5153 Neutral contactor reply mismatch alarm is active
Oper.range failed 1 Measured values checked but not within operating range
Oper.range failed 2 An alarm will be issued if check x result is negative because measured values are not within the config‐
ured operating range. No alarm will be issued in idle mode.
Oper.range failed 3
For details refer to Ä Chapter 4.5.6.18 “Operating Range Failure” on page 492.
Oper.range failed 4
Oper.range failed 5
Oper.range failed 6
Oper.range failed 7
Oper.range failed 8
Oper.range failed 9
Oper.range failed 10
2665 to 2676
Operat. range failed Measured values not within operating range

2664 An alarm will be issued if ignition speed is exceeded and the measured values for generator and/or mains
are not within the configured operating range. No alarm will be issued in idle mode.
Overspeed 1 Engine overspeed, limit value 1

2112 The engine speed has exceeded the limit value 1 for engine overspeed for at least the configured time and
does not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
Overspeed 2 Engine overspeed, limit value 2

2113 The engine speed has exceeded the limit value 2 for engine overspeed for at least the configured time and
does not fall below the value of the hysteresis.
Parameter alignment LDSS parameter mismatch detected

4073 The easYgen has detected that not all LDSS parameters are configured identically at all participating units.
Refer to Ä Chapter 4.5.6.14 “Multi-Unit Parameter Alignment” on page 483 for a list of all monitored
parameters.
Ph. rotation mismatch Generator/busbar/mains phase rotation different

2944 Generator, busbar (easYgen-3400/3500 only), and mains have different rotating fields. A CB closure is
blocked.
The phase rotation monitoring is always enabled and cannot be disabled.
Pole Slip Pole slip Monitoring Alarm active

2424 Alarm text which occurs in the alarm list and event history. The alarm stays active during mains parallel
operation.
QV monitoring 1 QV monitoring, delay time 1

3288 The generator reactive power has exceeded the limit for at least the configured delay time 1.
QV monitoring 2 QV monitoring, delay time 2

3289 The generator reactive power has exceeded the limit for at least the configured delay time 2.

Appendix

ID
Reactive LS mismatch Reactive power loadsharing mismatch

5111 Percentage load value of this device is different to the others.
Red stop lamp Red stop lamp, J1939 interface

15125 This watchdog monitors, whether a specific alarm bit is received from the CAN J1939 interface. This ena‐
bles to configure the control in a way that a reaction is caused by this bit (e.g. warning, shutdown). No
alarm can be indicated if the CAN communication fails.
Speed/freq. mismatch Difference in frequency/speed measurement alarm

2457 The speed differential between the generator frequency (ascertained by the generator voltage measure‐
ment) and the engine speed (measured by the MPU) has exceeded the configured limit value / differential
frequency for at least the configured time and has not fallen below the value of the hysteresis. The alarm
may also be triggered if the LogicsManager "ignition speed" is enabled and no electrical frequency is
detected as well as the other way round.
Start fail Failure of engine to start alarm

3325 The generator set has failed to start after the configured number of attempts. Depending on the configura‐
tion, no more start attempt will be carried out until the alarm is acknowledged.
Syst. update easYgen System update easYgen

4074 An additional easYgen is detected and so a new system update is required.
Syst. update LS5 System update LS5

4075 An additional LS5 is detected and so a new system update is required.
Time-dep. voltage 1 Time-dependent voltage, limit value 1

4958 The measured voltage falls below/exceeds the configured criteria.
Time-dep. voltage 2 Time-dependent voltage, limit value 2

5022 The measured voltage falls below/exceeds the configured criteria.
Timeout syn. GGB GGB synchronization time exceeded

3084 The easYgen has failed to synchronize the GGB within the configured synchronization time.
Unbalanced load 1 Generator unbalanced load, limit value 1

2412 The generator current has exceeded the limit value 1 for generator unbalanced load for at least the config‐
Unbalanced load 2 Generator unbalanced load, limit value 2

2413 The generator current has exceeded the limit value 2 for generator unbalanced load for at least the config‐
Underspeed 1 Engine underspeed, limit value 1

2162 The engine speed has fallen below the limit value 1 for engine underspeed and has not exceeded the
value of the hysteresis.
Underspeed 2 Engine underspeed, limit value 2

2163 The engine speed has fallen below the limit value 2 for engine underspeed and has not exceeded the
value of the hysteresis.
Unintended stop Unintended Stop

2652 The easYgen expects the generator to be running but a sudden underrun of the ignition speed has been
detected.
{Analog input x} Analog input {x}, wire break

During measurement of the analog input a wire break was detected. This text may be assigned customer
defined. The text in angular brackets is the default text.
Refer to Ä “ Message IDs for analog inputs” on page 1092 and Ä “Message IDs for external analog
inputs” on page 1092.
{Discrete input x} Discrete input {x}, energized / de-energized
The actual state of the monitored discrete input is energized / de-energized (depending on the configura‐
tion) for at least the configured time. This text may be assigned customer defined. The text in angular
brackets is the default text.
Refer to Ä “ Message IDs for discrete inputs” on page 1092.

Appendix

ID
{Ext. Discrete input x} External discrete input {x}, energized / de-energized

The actual state of the monitored external discrete input is energized / de-energized (depending on the
configuration) for at least the configured time. This text may be assigned customer defined. The text in
angular brackets is the default text.
Refer to Ä “ Message IDs for external discrete inputs” on page 1093.
{Flexible limit x} Flexible threshold {x}, overrun / underrun

The actual value of the monitored analog value has exceeded / fallen below the threshold (depending on
the configuration) for at least the configured time and does not fall below / exceed the value of the hyste‐
resis. This text may be assigned customer defined. The text in angular brackets is the default text.
Refer to Ä “ Message IDs for flexible limits” on page 1093.
Message IDs for analog inputs

Analog input # 1 2 3
Message ID 10014 10015 10060
Message IDs for external analog

inputs
External analog input # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Message ID 10221 10222 10223 10224 10225 10226 10227 10228
External analog input # 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Message ID 10229 10230 10231 10232 10233 10234 10235 10236
Message IDs for discrete inputs

Discrete input # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Message ID 10600 10601 10602 10603 10604 10605 10607 10608 10609 10610 10611 10612

Appendix
Formulas > Load Dependent Start Stop ...
Message IDs for external discrete

inputs
External discrete input # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Message ID 16360 16361 16362 16364 16365 16366 16367 16368
Message ID 16369 16370 16371 16372 16373 16374 16375 16376
: package 1 only.
Message ID 16202 16212 16222 16232 16242 16252 16262 16272
: package 1 only.
Message ID 16282 16292 16302 16312 16322 16332 16342 16352
Message IDs for flexible limits

Flexible limit # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Message ID 10018 10019 10020 10021 10022 10023 10024 10025 10026 10027
Flexible limit # 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Message ID 10028 10029 10030 10031 10032 10033 10034 10035 10036 10037
Flexible limit # 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Message ID 10038 10039 10040 10041 10042 10043 10044 10045 10046 10047
Flexible limit # 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Message ID 10048 10049 10050 10051 10052 10053 10054 10055 10056 10057
9.6 Formulas
9.6.1 Load Dependent Start Stop (LDSS) Formulas
The following formulas are used by the load-dependent start/stop
function to determine whether a genset is to be started or stopped.

Appendix
Formulas > Load Dependent Start Stop ...
Abbreviations
Abbreviation Parameter
PGN real active Momentary active generator real power on the busbar
Prated active Momentary active generator rated power on the busbar
Preserve Prated active – PGN real active
Preserve islanded 5760 Minimum permissible reserve power on busbar in islanded operation
Physteresis IOP 5761 hysteresis in islanded operation
PMN setpoint Export / import power control setpoint
PMN real Momentary active power at the interchange point
PMOP minimum 5767 Minimum requested generator load
Preserve parallel 5768 Minimum permissible reserve power on busbar in mains parallel operation
Physteresis MOP 5769 Physteresis in mains parallel operation
Pmax. load islanded 5762 Maximum permissible generator load in islanded operation
Pmin. load islanded 5763 Minimum permissible generator load in islanded operation
Pmax. load parallel 5770 Maximum permissible generator load in mains parallel operation
Pmin. load parallel 5771 Minimum permissible generator load in mains parallel operation
LDSS mode "Reserve Power"

Task Formula
Islanded Operation
Changing the Engine Combination to Increase Rated Power PGNreal active + Preserve islanded > Prated active
Changing the Engine Combination to Reduce Rated Power PGN real active + Preserve islanded + Physteresis IOP < Prated active
Mains Parallel Operation (Import/Export Control)
Starting the First Engine Combination (no engine supplies the PMNsetpoint – PMN real + PGN real active > PMOP minimum
busbar)
Changing the Engine Combination to Increase Rated Power PMNsetpoint – PMN real + PGN real active + Preserve parallel > Prated active
Changing the Engine Combination to Reduce Rated Power PMNsetpoint – PMNreal + PGNreal active + Preserve parallel + Physteresis MOP
< Prated active
Stopping the Last Engine Combination (load close to minimum PMN setpoint – PMN real + PGN real active < PMOPminimum – Physteresis
load) MOP
LDSS mode "Generator Load"

Task Formula
Islanded Operation
Changing the Engine Combination to Increase Rated Power PGN real active > Pmax. load islanded
Changing the Engine Combination to Reduce Rated Power PGN real active < Pmin. load islanded
(except dynamic setpoint is not matched)
Mains Parallel Operation (Import/Export Control)
Starting the First Engine Combination PMNsetpoint – PMN real + PGN real active > PMOPminimum
(no engine supplies the busbar)
Changing the Engine Combination to Increase Rated Power PGNreal active > Pmax. load parallel

Appendix
Additional Information > CAN Bus Pin Assignments Of...
Task Formula
Changing the Engine Combination to Reduce Rated Power PGN real active < Pmin. load parallel
(except dynamic setpoint is not matched)
Stopping the Last Engine Combination (load close to minimum PMN setpoint – PMN real + PGN real active < PMOPminimum – Physteresis
load) MOP
LDSS dynamic
Dynamic characteristic = [(max. generator load – min. generator load) * dynamic] + (min. generator load)
Dynamic power level = (dynamic characteristic) * (generator rated power)
Constants Low dynamic = 25 %
Moderate dynamic = 50 %
High dynamic = 75 %
Example for moderate dynamic n Dynamic characteristic = [(80 % – 40 %) * 50 %] + (40 %) =

60 %
n Dynamic power level = (60 %) * (200 kW) = 120 kW
9.7 Additional Information

9.7.1 CAN Bus Pin Assignments Of Third-Party Units
"For your information only ..."

The following pin assignments are typically by
third-party units.
For the CAN Bus pin assignments of your Wood‐
ward device please go to Ä Table 175 “Pin assign‐
ment CANbus” on page 1095.
6-pole screw terminal connector

Terminal Description Amax
1 GND - local galvanically N/A

islanded
2 CAN-L N/A
3 Shield N/A
4 CAN-H N/A
5 Not connected N/A
6 Not connected N/A
Table 175: Pin assignment CANbus
Fig. 400: CANbus terminal

Appendix
Additional Information > CAN Bus Pin Assignments Of...
RJ45/8P8C connector Male / plug Female / socket
Terminal Signal Description
1 TX_D+ Transmit Data Positive
2 TX_D- Transmit Data Negative
3 RX_D+ Receive Data Positive
4 - Reserved
5 - Reserved
6 RX_D- Receive Data Negative
7 - Reserved
Table 176: Pin assignment RJ-45

Glossary And List Of Abbreviations
10 Glossary And List Of Abbreviations

AM AnalogManager
BDEW German community of 1,800 companies represented by the
German Association of Energy and Water Industries (Bun‐
desverband der Energie- und Wasserwirtschaft)
CB Circuit Breaker
CL Code Level
CT Current Transformer
DI Discrete Input
DO Discrete (Relay) Output
ECU Engine Control Unit
FMI Failure Mode Indicator
GAP Graphical Application Programming (GAP™)
GCB Generator Circuit Breaker
GCP Woodward device series (Genset Control) - not preferred for
new design!
GGB Generator Group Breaker
GOV (speed) Governor; rpm regulator
HMI Human Machine Interface e.g., a front panel with display and
buttons for interaction
I Current
IOP Islanded Operation in Parallel ("Islanded Parallel Operation")
LDSS Load-Dependent Start/Stop operation
LM LogicsManager©
LSG Woodward device: Load Share Gateway (communication
converter)
MCB Mains Circuit Breaker
MFR Woodward device series (multifunctional relays) - not pre‐
ferred for new design!
MOP Mains Operation in Parallel
MPU Magnetic Pickup Unit
N.C. Normally Closed (break) contact
N.O. Normally Open (make) contact
NC Neutral Contactor
OC Occurrence Count
Operation In (general) operation.
State when the genset is running according to the selected
mode, all parameters are in allowed values and ranges, and
without OPEN requests or alarms. Somehow "waiting for
next occurrence".
P Real power
P/N Part Number
PF Power Factor
PID Proportional Integral Derivative controller

Glossary And List Of Abbreviations
PLC Programmable Logic Control

PT Potential (Voltage) Transformer
Q Reactive power
S Apparent power
S/N Serial Number
Sequencer A sequencer file is carrying specific settings e.g. to enable
communication with and/or control of an expansion module.
Such files can be prepared by Woodward.
SPN Suspect Parameter Number
V Voltage

Index
11 Index
A G
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 GCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Free configurable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Analog Fixed Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Analog Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042 GCB 50BF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Analog Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042 Generator
AnalogManager Fixed Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042 Ground Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
AnalogManager Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042 Inverse Time-Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
AnalogManager sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555, 556 Lagging Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
AnalogManager Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042 Overfrequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
B
Phase Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Battery
Pole Slip Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481, 482
Reverse/Reduced Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
BDEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Speed Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Busbar
Unbalanced Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Phase Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Underfrequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
C Undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
CAN Voltage asymmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
J1939 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 GGB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472, 473, 474 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Contact person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 GGB Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Critical Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Grid Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Customer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
H
D HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Data Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 Translation Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Droop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
E I
Engine Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Overspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 IOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Shutdown Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 islanded Parallel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Speed Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
J
Start Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
J1939 Interface . . . . . . . . . 474, 477, 478, 479, 480
Underspeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Unintended Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 L
Engine/Generator LDSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Active Power Mismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Load Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Unloading Mismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Load Dependent Start Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Engine/Mains Load Share Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Active Power Mismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Localization Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Ethernet
ToolKit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Index
M Toolkit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Mains Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Blocking protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Off-line mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Change Of Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
U
Decoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Export Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
General Mains Operating Range . . . . . . . . . 418
Import Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 V
Lagging Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 VDE-AR-N 4105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Leading Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Voltage Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Monitoring Hysteresis Voltage / Frequency . 417 AVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
QV Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
W
Reconnecting Mains Operating Range . . . . . 419
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Time-Dependent Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Underfrequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Voltage Increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Voltage Phase Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Mains Parallel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
MCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Measurement
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
MOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
O
Off-line mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Operating Range Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
P
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Power Factor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Reactive Power Q(P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Reactive Power Q(V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Protective equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
S
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Symbols
in the instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
T
Temperature
Cylinder Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

Woodward GmbH
Handwerkstrasse 29 - 70565 Stuttgart - Germany
Phone +49 (0) 711 789 54-510
Fax +49 (0) 711 789 54-101
[email protected]

Manual Easygen 3500XTP2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Easygen 3500XTP2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Easygen 3500XTP2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

easYgen-3000XT Series

Manual Genset Control

2 easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 37581D

Fig. 1: easYgen-3500XT-P2 Series

Fig. 2: easYgen-3400XT-P2 Series

The easYgen-3000XT series are control units for engine-generator

37581D easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 3

Fig. 3: Scope of delivery - schematic

Configuration files and Technical Manual are avail‐

4 easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 37581D

Sample application setup

Fig. 4: Sample application setup

For a listing of all available application modes

37581D easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 5

6 easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 37581D

1.1 About This Manual.................................................................................................................... 21

2.1 Display And Status Indicators................................................................................................... 39

3.1 Mount Unit (Sheet Metal Housing)............................................................................................ 43

37581D easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 7

3.3.11.1 Connecting 24 V Relays............................................................................................................ 89

4.1 Front Panel Access................................................................................................................. 112

8 easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 37581D

4.1.5.16 CAN Interface 1 State............................................................................................................. 131

37581D easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 9

4.4.2.7 External Analog Outputs......................................................................................................... 234

10 easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 37581D

4.5.2.8 Cylinder Temperature.............................................................................................................. 412

37581D easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 11

4.5.6.9 J1939 Interface - Protect Alarm............................................................................................... 479

12 easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 37581D

4.10.2 Service Reset Values.............................................................................................................. 564

5.1 Power ON................................................................................................................................ 569

6 Application Field...................................................................................................................... 577

6.1 Basic Applications................................................................................................................... 577

37581D easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 13

6.3.6.1 Configuring an IKD 1 Expansion Module................................................................................ 623

14 easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 37581D

6.5.2.5 Remotely Clearing The Event History..................................................................................... 717

7 Interfaces And Protocols......................................................................................................... 721

7.1 Interfaces Overview................................................................................................................. 721

8 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................... 745

8.1 Technical Data........................................................................................................................ 745

9.1 Characteristics......................................................................................................................... 757

37581D easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 15

9.1.2.1 VDO Input "Pressure" ............................................................................................................. 762

16 easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 37581D

9.3.2.11 Group 11: Clock And Timer................................................................................................... 1002

37581D easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 17

9.4.1.11 Groups 12 Free..................................................................................................................... 1058

18 easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 37581D

10 Glossary And List Of Abbreviations....................................................................................... 1097

37581D easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 19

20 easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 37581D

37581D easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 21

Rev. Date Editor Changes

D 2019-04 PC NEW Software Revision Release 1.16 or higher

C 2018-12 PC NEW Software Revision Release 1.15 or higher

22 easYgen-3400XT-P2/3500XT-P2/3500XT-P2-LT | Genset Control 37581D

Rev. Date Editor Changes